This is a modern-English version of Psychology: Briefer Course, originally written by James, William.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Contents.
Contents.
(etext transcriber's note) (etext transcriber's note) |
BRIEFER COURSE
Short Course
PSYCHOLOGY
BY
WILLIAM JAMES
Professor of Psychology in Harvard University
London
MACMILLAN AND CO.
1892
Copyright, 1892,
BY
HENRY HOLT & CO.
Robert Drummond,
Electrotyper and Printer,
New York.
BY
WILLIAM JAMES
Professor of Psychology at Harvard University
London
MACMILLAN AND CO.
1892
Copyright, 1892,
BY
HENRY HOLT & CO.
Robert Drummond,
Electrotyper and Printer,
New York.
PREFACE.
In preparing the following abridgment of my larger work, the Principles of Psychology, my chief aim has been to make it more directly available for class-room use. For this purpose I have omitted several whole chapters and rewritten others. I have left out all the polemical and historical matter, all the metaphysical discussions and purely speculative passages, most of the quotations, all the book-references, and (I trust) all the impertinences, of the larger work, leaving to the teacher the choice of orally restoring as much of this material as may seem to him good, along with his own remarks on the topics successively studied. Knowing how ignorant the average student is of physiology, I have added brief chapters on the various senses. In this shorter work the general point of view, which I have adopted as that of 'natural science,' has, I imagine, gained in clearness by its extrication from so much critical matter and its more simple and dogmatic statement. About two fifths of the volume is either new or rewritten, the rest is 'scissors and paste.' I regret to have been unable to supply chapters on pleasure and pain, æsthetics, and the moral sense. Possibly the defect may be made up in a later edition, if such a thing should ever be demanded.
In preparing this shorter version of my larger work, the Principles of Psychology, my main goal has been to make it more suitable for classroom use. To achieve this, I have removed several entire chapters and rewritten others. I've cut out all the argumentative and historical content, all the metaphysical discussions and purely speculative sections, most of the quotes, all the book references, and (I hope) all the unnecessary comments from the original work, leaving it to the teacher to add back any of this material as they see fit, along with their own insights on the topics being studied. Recognizing how little the average student knows about physiology, I've included brief chapters on the different senses. In this condensed version, the general perspective, which I have framed as 'natural science,' should be clearer without all the critical content and in a more straightforward and assertive manner. About two-fifths of the volume is either new or rewritten, while the rest is simply compiled from the original. I regret that I couldn't provide chapters on pleasure and pain, aesthetics, and the moral sense. Hopefully, these gaps can be filled in a future edition if there is enough interest.
I cannot forbear taking advantage of this preface to make a statement about the composition of the 'Principles of Psychology.' My critics in the main have been so indulgent that I must cordially thank them; but they have been unanimous in one reproach, namely, that my{iv} order of chapters is planless and unnatural; and in one charitable excuse for this, namely, that the work, being largely a collection of review-articles, could not be expected to show as much system as a treatise cast in a single mould. Both the reproach and the excuse misapprehend the facts of the case. The order of composition is doubtless unshapely, or it would not be found so by so many. But planless it is not, for I deliberately followed what seemed to me a good pedagogic order, in proceeding from the more concrete mental aspects with which we are best acquainted to the so-called elements which we naturally come to know later by way of abstraction. The opposite order, of 'building-up' the mind out of its 'units of composition,' has the merit of expository elegance, and gives a neatly subdivided table of contents; but it often purchases these advantages at the cost of reality and truth. I admit that my 'synthetic' order was stumblingly carried out; but this again was in consequence of what I thought were pedagogic necessities. On the whole, in spite of my critics, I venture still to think that the 'unsystematic' form charged upon the book is more apparent than profound, and that we really gain a more living understanding of the mind by keeping our attention as long as possible upon our entire conscious states as they are concretely given to us, than by the post-mortem study of their comminuted 'elements.' This last is the study of artificial abstractions, not of natural things.[1]
I can’t help but take this opportunity in the preface to address the way the 'Principles of Psychology' is structured. Most of my critics have been quite forgiving, and I truly appreciate that; however, they all share one criticism: that the order of my chapters lacks a clear plan and feels unnatural. They also offer one kind explanation for this, which is that since the work is mainly a collection of review articles, it’s unreasonable to expect it to have as much structure as a single cohesive treatise. Both the criticism and the excuse misunderstand the situation. The order might indeed seem awkward, as many have noted, but it’s definitely not random; I intentionally followed what I believed to be a good teaching sequence, starting with the more concrete mental aspects we’re most familiar with before moving to the so-called elements that we typically understand later through abstraction. The alternative approach, which involves "building up" the mind from its "units of composition," may have a certain elegance in presentation and a neatly organized table of contents, but it often sacrifices reality and truth for those advantages. I acknowledge that my "synthetic" order could have been executed more smoothly, but that was a result of what I considered to be educational needs. Overall, despite my critics, I still believe that the so-called "unsystematic" form attributed to this book is more superficial than significant, and that we gain a richer understanding of the mind by focusing as long as we can on our whole conscious experiences as they are presented to us, rather than relying on the retrospective examination of their broken-down "elements." The latter is the study of artificial abstractions, not of real phenomena.[1]
But whether the critics are right, or I am, on this first point, the critics are wrong about the relation of the magazine-articles to the book. With a single exception all the chapters were written for the book; and then by an after-thought some of them were sent to magazines, because the completion of the whole work seemed so distant. My lack of capacity has doubtless been great, but the charge of not having taken the utmost pains, according to my lights, in the composition of the volumes, cannot justly be laid at my door.
But whether the critics are right or I am on this first point, they are wrong about the relationship between the magazine articles and the book. With one exception, all the chapters were written for the book; then, as an afterthought, some of them were submitted to magazines because finishing the entire work felt so far away. My lack of ability has certainly been significant, but the accusation that I didn’t put in my best effort, according to my understanding, in putting the volumes together cannot fairly be directed at me.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I. | |
---|---|
PAGE | |
Intro | 1 |
Psychology defined; psychology as a natural science, its data, 1. The human mind and its environment, 3. The postulate that all consciousness has cerebral activity for its condition, 5. | |
CHAPTER II. | |
General Sensation | 9 |
Incoming nerve-currents, 9. Terminal organs, 10. 'Specific energies,' 11. Sensations cognize qualities, 13. Knowledge of acquaintance and knowledge-about, 14. Objects of sensation appear in space, 15. The intensity of sensations, 16. Weber's law, 17. Fechner's law, 21. Sensations are not psychic compounds, 23. The 'law of relativity,' 24. Effects of contrast, 26. | |
CHAPTER III. | |
Vision | 28 |
The eye, 28. Accommodation, 32. Convergence, binocular vision, 33. Double images, 36. Distance, 39. Size, color, 40. After-images, 43. Intensity of luminous objects, 45. | |
CHAPTER IV. | |
Listening | 47 |
The ear, 47. The qualities of sound, 43. Pitch, 44. 'Timbre,' 45. Analysis of compound air-waves, 56. No fusion of elementary sensations of sound, 57. Harmony and discord, 58. Discrimination by the ear, 59. | |
CHAPTER V. | |
Touch, the sense of temperature, the sense of muscle, and pain. | 60 |
End-organs in the skin, 60. Touch, sense of pressure, 60. Localization, 61. Sensibility to temperature, 63. The muscular sense, 65. Pain, 67. | |
CHAPTER VI. | |
Feelings of Movement | 70 |
The feeling of motion over surfaces, 70. Feelings in joints, 74. The sense of translation, the sensibility of the semicircular canals, 75. | |
CHAPTER VII. | |
The Brain's Structure | 78 |
Embryological sketch, 78. Practical dissection of the sheep's brain, 81. | |
CHAPTER VIII. | |
Brain Functions | 91 |
General idea of nervous function, 91. The frog's nerve-centres, 92. The pigeon's nerve-centres, 96. What the hemispheres do, 97. The automaton-theory, 101. The localization of functions, 104. Brain and mind have analogous 'elements,' sensory and motor, 105. The motor zone, 106. Aphasia, 108. The visual region, 110. Mental blindness, 112. The auditory region, mental deafness, 113. Other centres, 116. | |
CHAPTER IX. | |
General Conditions of Neural Activity | 120 |
The nervous discharge, 120. Reaction-time, 121. Simple reactions, 122. Complicated reactions, 124. The summation of stimuli, 128. Cerebral blood-supply, 130. Brain-thermometry, 131. Phosphorus and thought, 132. | |
CHAPTER X. | |
Habit | 134 |
Its importance, and its physical basis, 134. Due to pathways formed in the centres, 136. Its practical uses, 138. Concatenated acts, 140. Necessity for guiding sensations in secondarily automatic performances, 141. Pedagogical maxims concerning the formation of habits, 142. | |
CHAPTER XI. | |
Stream of Consciousness | 151 |
Analytic order of our study, 151. Every state of mind forms part of a personal consciousness, 152. The same state of mind is never had twice, 154. Permanently recurring ideas are a fiction, 156. Every personal consciousness is continuous, 157. Substantive and transitive states, 160. Every object appears with a 'fringe' of relations, 163. The 'topic' of the thought, 167. Thought may be rational in any sort of imagery, 168. Consciousness is always especially interested in some one part of its object, 170. | |
CHAPTER XII. | |
The Self | 176 |
The Me and the I, 176. The material Me, 177. The social Me, 179. The spiritual Me, 181. Self-appreciation, 182. Self-seeking, bodily, social, and spiritual, 184. Rivalry of the Mes, 186. Their hierarchy, 190. Teleology of self-interest, 193. The I, or 'pure ego,' 195. Thoughts are not compounded of 'fused' sensations, 196. The 'soul' as a combining medium, 200. The sense of personal identity, 201. Explained by identity of function in successive passing thoughts, 203. Mutations of the self, 205. Insane delusions, 207. Alternating personalities, 210. Mediumships or possessions, 212. Who is the Thinker, 215. | |
CHAPTER XIII. | |
Attention! | 217 |
The narrowness of the field of consciousness, 217. Dispersed attention, 218. To how much can we attend at once? 219. The varieties of attention, 220. Voluntary attention, its momentary character, 224. To keep our attention, an object must change, 226. Genius and attention, 227. Attention's physiological conditions, 228. The sense-organ must be adapted, 229. The idea of the object must be aroused, 232. Pedagogic remarks, 236. Attention and free-will, 237. | |
CHAPTER XIV. | |
Conception | 239 |
Different states of mind can mean the same, 239. Conceptions of abstract, of universal, and of problematic objects, 240. The thought of 'the same' is not the same thought over again, 243. | |
CHAPTER XV. | |
Discrimination | 244 |
Discrimination and association; definition of discrimination, 244. Conditions which favor it, 245. The sensation of difference, 246. Differences inferred, 248. The analysis of compound objects, 248. To be easily singled out, a quality should already be separately known, 250. Dissociation by varying concomitants, 251. Practice improves discrimination, 252. | |
CHAPTER XVI. | |
Organization | 253 |
The order of our ideas, 253. It is determined by cerebral laws, 255. The ultimate cause of association is habit, 256. The elementary law in association, 257. Indeterminateness of its results, 258. Total recall, 259. Partial recall, and the law of interest, 261. Frequency, recency, vividness, and emotional congruity tend to determine the object recalled, 264. Focalized recall, or 'association by similarity,' 267. Voluntary trains of thought, 271. The solution of problems, 273. Similarity no elementary law; summary and conclusion, 277. | |
CHAPTER XVII. | |
The Feeling of Time | 280 |
The sensible present has duration, 280. We have no sense for absolutely empty time, 281. We measure duration by the events which succeed in it, 283. The feeling of past time is a present feeling, 285. Due to a constant cerebral condition, 286. | |
CHAPTER XVIII. | |
Memory | 287 |
What it is, 287. It involves both retention and recall, 289. Both elements explained by paths formed by habit in the brain, 290. Two conditions of a good memory, persistence and numerousness of paths, 292. Cramming, 295. One's native retentiveness is unchangeable, 296. Improvement of the memory, 298. Recognition, 299. Forgetting, 300. Pathological conditions, 301. | |
CHAPTER XIX. | |
Creativity | 302 |
What it is, 302. Imaginations differ from man to man; Galton's statistics of visual imagery, 303. Images of sounds, 306. Images of movement, 307. Images of touch, 308. Loss of images in aphasia, 309. The neural process in imagination, 310. | |
CHAPTER XX. | |
Perception | 312 |
Perception and sensation compared, 312. The perceptive state of mind is not a compound, 313. Perception is of definite things, 316. Illusions, 317. First type: inference of the more usual object, 318. Second type: inference of the object of which our mind is full, 321. 'Apperception,' 326. Genius and old-fogyism, 327. The physiological process in perception, 329. Hallucinations, 330. | |
CHAPTER XXI. | |
Understanding Space | 335 |
The attribute of extensity belongs to all objects of sensation, 335. The construction of real space, 337. The processes which it involves: 1) Subdivision, 338; 2) Coalescence of different sensible data into one 'thing,' 339; 3) Location in an environment, 340; 4) Place in a series of positions, 341; 5) Measurement, 342. Objects which are signs, and objects which are realities, 345. The 'third dimension,' Berkeley's theory of distance, 346. The part played by the intellect in space-perception, 349. | |
CHAPTER XXII. | |
Reasoning | 351 |
What it is, 351. It involves the use of abstract characters, 353. What is meant by an 'essential' character, 354. The 'essence' varies with the subjective interest, 358. The two great points in reasoning, 'sagacity' and 'wisdom,' 360. Sagacity, 362. The help given by association by similarity, 364. The reasoning powers of brutes, 367. | |
CHAPTER XXIII. | |
Awareness and Movement | 370 |
All consciousness is motor, 370. Three classes of movement to which it leads, 372. | |
CHAPTER XXIV. | |
Feelings | 373 |
Emotions compared with instincts, 373. The varieties of emotion are innumerable, 374. The cause of their varieties, 375. The feeling, in the coarser emotions, results from the bodily expression, 375. This view must not be called materialistic, 380. This view explains the great variability of emotion, 381. A corollary verified, 382. An objection replied to, 383. The subtler emotions, 384. Description of fear, 385. Genesis of the emotional reactions, 386. | |
CHAPTER XXV. | |
Intuition | 391 |
Its definition, 391. Every instinct is an impulse, 392. Instincts are not always blind or invariable, 395. Two principles of non-uniformity, 398. Enumeration of instincts in man, 406. Description of fear, 407. | |
CHAPTER XXVI. | |
Will | 415 |
Voluntary acts, 415. They are secondary performances, 415. No third kind of idea is called for, 418. The motor-cue, 420. Ideo-motor action, 432. Action after deliberation, 428. Five chief types of decision, 429. The feeling of effort, 434. Healthiness of will, 435. Unhealthiness of will, 436. The explosive will: (1) from defective inhibition, 437; (2) from exaggerated impulsion, 439. The obstructed will, 441. Effort feels like an original force, 442. Pleasure and pain as springs of action, 444. What holds attention determines action, 448. Will is a relation between the mind and its 'ideas,' 449. Volitional effort is effort of attention, 450. The question of free-will, 455. Ethical importance of the phenomenon of effort, 458. | |
EPILOGUE. | |
Psychology & Philosophy | 461 |
What the word metaphysics means, 461. Relation of consciousness to the brain, 462. The relation of states of mind to their 'objects,' 464. The changing character of consciousness, 466. States of consciousness themselves are not verifiable facts, 467. |
PSYCHOLOGY.
CHAPTER I.
INTRODUCTORY.
The definition of Psychology may be best given in the words of Professor Ladd, as the description and explanation of states of consciousness as such. By states of consciousness are meant such things as sensations, desires, emotions, cognitions, reasonings, decisions, volitions, and the like. Their 'explanation' must of course include the study of their causes, conditions, and immediate consequences, so far as these can be ascertained.
The definition of Psychology can best be described using Professor Ladd's words, as the description and explanation of states of consciousness. By states of consciousness, we mean things like sensations, desires, emotions, thoughts, reasoning, decisions, willpower, and similar experiences. Their 'explanation' must, of course, involve studying their causes, conditions, and immediate effects, as far as we can determine them.
Psychology is to be treated as a natural science in this book. This requires a word of commentary. Most thinkers have a faith that at bottom there is but one Science of all things, and that until all is known, no one thing can be completely known. Such a science, if realized, would be Philosophy. Meanwhile it is far from being realized; and instead of it, we have a lot of beginnings of knowledge made in different places, and kept separate from each other merely for practical convenience' sake, until with later growth they may run into one body of Truth. These provisional beginnings of learning we call 'the Sciences' in the plural. In order not to be unwieldy, every such science has to stick to its own arbitrarily-selected problems, and to ignore all others. Every science thus accepts certain data unquestioningly, leaving it to the other parts of Philosophy{2} to scrutinize their significance and truth. All the natural sciences, for example, in spite of the fact that farther reflection leads to Idealism, assume that a world of matter exists altogether independently of the perceiving mind. Mechanical Science assumes this matter to have 'mass' and to exert 'force,' defining these terms merely phenomenally, and not troubling itself about certain unintelligibilities which they present on nearer reflection. Motion similarly is assumed by mechanical science to exist independently of the mind, in spite of the difficulties involved in the assumption. So Physics assumes atoms, action at a distance, etc., uncritically; Chemistry uncritically adopts all the data of Physics; and Physiology adopts those of Chemistry. Psychology as a natural science deals with things in the same partial and provisional way. In addition to the 'material world' with all its determinations, which the other sciences of nature assume, she assumes additional data peculiarly her own, and leaves it to more developed parts of Philosophy to test their ulterior significance and truth. These data are—
Psychology will be viewed as a natural science in this book. This calls for some explanation. Most thinkers believe that, fundamentally, there is only one Science of everything, and that until everything is understood, no single thing can be completely known. If such a science were fully developed, it would be Philosophy. However, that’s not the case; instead, we have various beginnings of knowledge created in different areas, which are kept separate for practical reasons until they can eventually combine into a single body of Truth. We refer to these initial stages of learning as 'the Sciences' in the plural. To avoid being cumbersome, each science must focus on its specific, chosen problems and ignore others. Consequently, each science accepts certain data without question, leaving it to other parts of Philosophy{2} to examine their significance and validity. For instance, all natural sciences, despite the fact that deeper reflection leads to Idealism, assume that a material world exists completely independently of the observing mind. Mechanical Science assumes this matter to have 'mass' and to exert 'force,' defining these terms only in terms of what can be observed, without delving into certain puzzling aspects that arise upon closer examination. Similarly, Mechanical Science assumes that motion exists independently of the mind, even though this assumption is problematic. Physics, for example, accepts atoms and action at a distance without question; Chemistry uncritically accepts all the data from Physics; and Physiology takes on those from Chemistry. Psychology, as a natural science, also addresses things in this same limited and temporary way. Besides the 'material world' and all its specifics, which other natural sciences take for granted, it incorporates additional data that are uniquely its own and leaves it to more advanced parts of Philosophy to verify their deeper significance and truth. These data are—
1. Thoughts and feelings, or whatever other names transitory states of consciousness may be known by.
1. Thoughts and feelings, or whatever other names temporary states of consciousness might go by.
2. Knowledge, by these states of consciousness, of other things. These things may be material objects and events, or other states of mind. The material objects may be either near or distant in time and space, and the states of mind may be those of other people, or of the thinker himself at some other time.
2. Knowledge involves being aware of other things through these states of consciousness. These things can be physical objects and events or different mental states. The physical objects can be present or far away in time and space, and the mental states can belong to other people or to the thinker themselves at a different time.
How one thing can know another is the problem of what is called the Theory of Knowledge. How such a thing as a 'state of mind' can be at all is the problem of what has been called Rational, as distinguished from Empirical, Psychology. The full truth about states of mind cannot be known until both Theory of Knowledge and Rational Psychology have said their say. Meanwhile an immense amount of provisional truth about them can be got together, which will work in with the larger truth and be{3} interpreted by it when the proper time arrives. Such a provisional body of propositions about states of mind, and about the cognitions which they enjoy, is what I mean by Psychology considered as a natural science. On any ulterior theory of matter, mind, and knowledge, the facts and laws of Psychology thus understood will have their value. If critics find that this natural-science point of view cuts things too arbitrarily short, they must not blame the book which confines itself to that point of view; rather must they go on themselves to complete it by their deeper thought. Incomplete statements are often practically necessary. To go beyond the usual 'scientific' assumptions in the present case, would require, not a volume, but a shelfful of volumes, and by the present author such a shelfful could not be written at all.
How one thing can know another is the issue known as the Theory of Knowledge. How something like a 'state of mind' can exist at all is the challenge posed by what has been called Rational, as opposed to Empirical, Psychology. The full truth about states of mind can't be understood until both the Theory of Knowledge and Rational Psychology have made their arguments. In the meantime, a vast amount of provisional truth about them can be gathered, which will align with the larger truth and be{3} interpreted by it when the right time comes. This provisional collection of statements about states of mind and the cognitions they have is what I refer to when I talk about Psychology as a natural science. Any future theory of matter, mind, and knowledge will find value in the facts and laws of Psychology as understood in this way. If critics feel that this natural-science perspective is too limiting, they shouldn't blame the book for sticking to that viewpoint; instead, they should continue to enrich it with their own deeper insights. Incomplete statements are often practically necessary. To go beyond the typical 'scientific' assumptions in this case wouldn’t just require a single volume, but a whole shelf of volumes, and such a shelf couldn't be produced by this author at all.
Let it also be added that the human mind is all that can be touched upon in this book. Although the mental life of lower creatures has been examined into of late years with some success, we have no space for its consideration here, and can only allude to its manifestations incidentally when they throw light upon our own.
Let’s also note that the human mind is the only focus of this book. While the mental lives of lower creatures have been explored in recent years with some success, we don’t have the space to delve into that here and can only briefly mention it when it helps clarify our own minds.
Mental facts cannot be properly studied apart from the physical environment of which they take cognizance. The great fault of the older rational psychology was to set up the soul as an absolute spiritual being with certain faculties of its own by which the several activities of remembering, imagining, reasoning, willing, etc., were explained, almost without reference to the peculiarities of the world with which these activities deal. But the richer insight of modern days perceives that our inner faculties are adapted in advance to the features of the world in which we dwell, adapted, I mean, so as to secure our safety and prosperity in its midst. Not only are our capacities for forming new habits, for remembering sequences, and for abstracting general properties from things and associating their usual consequences with them, exactly the faculties needed for steering us in this world of mixed variety and uniformity, but our emotions{4} and instincts are adapted to very special features of that world. In the main, if a phenomenon is important for our welfare, it interests and excites us the first time we come into its presence. Dangerous things fill us with involuntary fear; poisonous things with distaste; indispensable things with appetite. Mind and world in short have been evolved together, and in consequence are something of a mutual fit. The special interactions between the outer order and the order of consciousness, by which this harmony, such as it is, may in the course of time have come about, have been made the subject of many evolutionary speculations, which, though they cannot so far be said to be conclusive, have at least refreshed and enriched the whole subject, and brought all sorts of new questions to the light.
Mental facts can’t be properly studied without considering the physical environment they relate to. The major flaw of older rational psychology was treating the soul as an absolute spiritual entity with its own set of faculties, explaining various activities like remembering, imagining, reasoning, and willing, almost without mentioning the unique aspects of the world these activities interact with. However, our modern understanding recognizes that our inner faculties are designed to fit the characteristics of the world we live in, aimed at ensuring our safety and well-being. Not only are our abilities to form new habits, remember sequences, and generalize properties from things essential for navigating the diverse and uniform aspects of our world, but our emotions{4} and instincts are also tailored to very specific features of that world. In general, if something is crucial for our well-being, it captures our interest and excitement the first time we encounter it. Dangerous things trigger involuntary fear; poisonous things evoke disgust; essential things create desire. Mind and world have essentially evolved together, resulting in a mutual compatibility. The unique interactions between the external world and our conscious experience, which may have led to this harmony over time, have been the focus of various evolutionary theories. Although these theories aren't conclusive yet, they have at least revitalized and enriched the entire topic, bringing many new questions to light.
The chief result of all this more modern view is the gradually growing conviction that mental life is primarily teleological; that is to say, that our various ways of feeling and thinking have grown to be what they are because of their utility in shaping our reactions on the outer world. On the whole, few recent formulas have done more service in psychology than the Spencerian one that the essence of mental life and bodily life are one, namely, 'the adjustment of inner to outer relations.' The adjustment is to immediately present objects in lower animals and in infants. It is to objects more and more remote in time and space, and inferred by means of more and more complex and exact processes of reasoning, when the grade of mental development grows more advanced.
The main outcome of this more modern perspective is the increasing belief that mental life is primarily goal-oriented; in other words, the different ways we feel and think have developed the way they have because of their usefulness in influencing our reactions to the outside world. Overall, few recent theories have contributed more to psychology than the Spencerian idea that the essence of mental and physical life is the same, namely, 'the adjustment of inner to outer relations.' This adjustment focuses on immediate objects in lower animals and infants. As mental development advances, it shifts to objects that are further away in time and space, inferred through increasingly complex and precise reasoning processes.
Primarily then, and fundamentally, the mental life is for the sake of action of a preservative sort. Secondarily and incidentally it does many other things, and may even, when ill 'adapted,' lead to its possessor's destruction. Psychology, taken in the widest way, ought to study every sort of mental activity, the useless and harmful sorts as well as that which is 'adapted.' But the study of the harmful in mental life has been made the subject of a special branch called 'Psychiatry'—the science of insanity—and{5} the study of the useless is made over to 'Æsthetics.' Æsthetics and Psychiatry will receive no special notice in this book.
Primarily, the mind exists mainly for the purpose of preserving actions. Secondarily and incidentally, it serves many other functions and can even, when poorly adapted, lead to the person's downfall. Psychology, in the broadest sense, should explore all types of mental activity, including both the useless and harmful kinds, as well as those that are suitable. However, the study of harmful mental activity has become a separate field known as 'Psychiatry'—the science of mental illness—and{5} the study of the useless is left to 'Aesthetics.' This book will not focus specifically on Aesthetics and Psychiatry.
All mental states (no matter what their character as regards utility may be) are followed by bodily activity of some sort. They lead to inconspicuous changes in breathing, circulation, general muscular tension, and glandular or other visceral activity, even if they do not lead to conspicuous movements of the muscles of voluntary life. Not only certain particular states of mind, then (such as those called volitions, for example), but states of mind as such, all states of mind, even mere thoughts and feelings, are motor in their consequences. This will be made manifest in detail as our study advances. Meanwhile let it be set down as one of the fundamental facts of the science with which we are engaged.
All mental states (regardless of their usefulness) are accompanied by some form of bodily movement. They result in subtle changes in breathing, circulation, overall muscle tension, and organ activity, even if they don't cause noticeable movements of voluntary muscles. So, it's not just specific states of mind (like those called volitions, for instance) that are involved, but rather all states of mind, including simple thoughts and feelings, are motor in their effects. This will be explained in detail as we continue our studies. For now, let's acknowledge this as one of the fundamental facts of the science we are exploring.
It was said above that the 'conditions' of states of consciousness must be studied. The immediate condition of a state of consciousness is an activity of some sort in the cerebral hemispheres. This proposition is supported by so many pathological facts, and laid by physiologists at the base of so many of their reasonings, that to the medically educated mind it seems almost axiomatic. It would be hard, however, to give any short and peremptory proof of the unconditional dependence of mental action upon neural change. That a general and usual amount of dependence exists cannot possibly be ignored. One has only to consider how quickly consciousness may be (so far as we know) abolished by a blow on the head, by rapid loss of blood, by an epileptic discharge, by a full dose of alcohol, opium, ether, or nitrous oxide—or how easily it may be altered in quality by a smaller dose of any of these agents or of others, or by a fever,—to see how at the mercy of bodily happenings our spirit is. A little stoppage of the gall-duct, a swallow of cathartic medicine, a cup of strong coffee at the proper moment, will entirely overturn for the time a man's views of life. Our moods and resolutions are more determined{6} by the condition of our circulation than by our logical grounds. Whether a man shall be a hero or a coward is a matter of his temporary 'nerves.' In many kinds of insanity, though by no means in all, distinct alterations of the brain-tissue have been found. Destruction of certain definite portions of the cerebral hemispheres involves losses of memory and of acquired motor faculty of quite determinate sorts, to which we shall revert again under the title of aphasias. Taking all such facts together, the simple and radical conception dawns upon the mind that mental action may be uniformly and absolutely a function of brain-action, varying as the latter varies, and being to the brain-action as effect to cause.
It was mentioned earlier that the 'conditions' of states of consciousness need to be examined. The immediate condition of a state of consciousness is some kind of activity in the brain's hemispheres. This idea is supported by numerous pathological facts and is foundational for many physiological theories, making it nearly self-evident to those in the medical field. However, it is difficult to provide a concise and definitive proof of the absolute dependence of mental processes on neural changes. While it's undeniable that there is a general and significant level of dependence, one only needs to consider how quickly consciousness can be (as far as we know) lost due to a blow to the head, significant blood loss, an epileptic seizure, or a strong dose of alcohol, opium, ether, or nitrous oxide—or how easily it can be altered in quality with a smaller dose of any of these substances or by fever—to understand how much our spirit is influenced by physical conditions. A slight blockage in the bile duct, a dose of laxative, or a strong cup of coffee at the right moment can completely change a person's perspective on life. Our moods and decisions are influenced more by our circulation than by logical reasoning. Whether someone acts as a hero or a coward often comes down to their temporary ‘nerves.’ In many types of insanity, though certainly not all, distinct changes in brain tissue have been observed. Damage to specific parts of the brain's hemispheres can lead to specific losses of memory and motor skills, which we will discuss further under the title of aphasias. Considering all these facts, a straightforward and fundamental concept emerges: mental action can consistently and entirely depend on brain activity, changing as brain activity changes, with mental action being an effect of brain action.
This conception is the 'working hypothesis' which underlies all the 'physiological psychology' of recent years, and it will be the working hypothesis of this book. Taken thus absolutely, it may possibly be too sweeping a statement of what in reality is only a partial truth. But the only way to make sure of its unsatisfactoriness is to apply it seriously to every possible case that can turn up. To work an hypothesis 'for all it is worth' is the real, and often the only, way to prove its insufficiency. I shall therefore assume without scruple at the outset that the uniform correlation of brain-states with mind-states is a law of nature. The interpretation of the law in detail will best show where its facilities and where its difficulties lie. To some readers such an assumption will seem like the most unjustifiable a priori materialism. In one sense it doubtless is materialism: it puts the Higher at the mercy of the Lower. But although we affirm that the coming to pass of thought is a consequence of mechanical laws,—for, according to another 'working hypothesis,' that namely of physiology, the laws of brain-action are at bottom mechanical laws,—we do not in the least explain the nature of thought by affirming this dependence, and in that latter sense our proposition is not materialism. The authors who most unconditionally affirm the dependence of our thoughts{7} on our brain to be a fact are often the loudest to insist that the fact is inexplicable, and that the intimate essence of consciousness can never be rationally accounted for by any material cause. It will doubtless take several generations of psychologists to test the hypothesis of dependence with anything like minuteness. The books which postulate it will be to some extent on conjectural ground. But the student will remember that the Sciences constantly have to take these risks, and habitually advance by zig—zagging from one absolute formula to another which corrects it by going too far the other way. At present Psychology is on the materialistic tack, and ought in the interests of ultimate success to be allowed full headway even by those who are certain she will never fetch the port without putting down the helm once more. The only thing that is perfectly certain is that when taken up into the total body of Philosophy, the formulas of Psychology will appear with a very different meaning from that which they suggest so long as they are studied from the point of view of an abstract and truncated 'natural science,' however practically necessary and indispensable their study from such a provisional point of view may be.
This idea is the 'working hypothesis' that supports all the 'physiological psychology' of recent years, and it will be the working hypothesis of this book. Taken in this absolute sense, it might be too broad a statement of what is really just a partial truth. However, the best way to determine its shortcomings is to seriously apply it to every possible case that arises. Testing a hypothesis 'for all it is worth' is the true, and often the only, way to demonstrate its insufficiency. Therefore, I will confidently assume from the beginning that the consistent correlation of brain states with mind states is a natural law. A detailed interpretation of this law will reveal where its strengths and weaknesses lie. To some readers, this assumption might seem like the most unjustifiable a priori materialism. In one sense, it undoubtedly is materialism: it places the Higher in the control of the Lower. But while we assert that the occurrence of thought is a result of mechanical laws—since, according to another 'working hypothesis,' specifically that of physiology, the laws governing brain activity are fundamentally mechanical laws—we do not actually explain the nature of thought by acknowledging this dependence. In that latter sense, our proposition isn't materialism. The authors who most firmly state that our thoughts{7} depend on our brain often insist that this fact is inexplicable, claiming that the true essence of consciousness cannot be rationally explained by any material cause. It will likely take several generations of psychologists to thoroughly test the hypothesis of dependence. The books that propose it will be somewhat based on conjecture. However, the student should remember that the sciences often have to take these risks and typically progress by zig-zagging between absolute formulas that correct each other by overstepping in the opposite direction. Currently, psychology is pursuing a materialistic approach, and in the interest of ultimate success, it should be allowed to move forward fully, even by those who believe it will never reach its destination without adjusting its course once again. The only certainty is that when incorporated into the broader context of philosophy, the principles of psychology will take on a very different meaning from what they suggest when studied solely as an abstract and incomplete 'natural science,' regardless of how practically necessary and essential their examination might be from such a temporary perspective.
The Divisions of Psychology.—So far as possible, then, we are to study states of consciousness in correlation with their probable neural conditions. Now the nervous system is well understood to-day to be nothing but a machine for receiving impressions and discharging reactions preservative to the individual and his kind—so much of physiology the reader will surely know. Anatomically, therefore, the nervous system falls into three main divisions, comprising—
The Divisions of Psychology.—As much as we can, we’ll study states of consciousness in relation to their likely neural conditions. Today, the nervous system is widely recognized as a mechanism for receiving inputs and delivering responses that help preserve the individual and their species—something the reader will surely be familiar with. Anatomically, the nervous system is divided into three main parts, which include—
1) The fibres which carry currents in; |
2) The organs of central redirection of them; and |
3) The fibres which carry them out. |
Functionally, we have sensation, central reflection, and motion, to correspond to these anatomical divisions. In Psychology we may divide our work according to a similar{8} scheme, and treat successively of three fundamental conscious processes and their conditions. The first will be Sensation; the second will be Cerebration or Intellection; the third will be the Tendency to Action. Much vagueness results from this division, but it has practical conveniences for such a book as this, and they may be allowed to prevail over whatever objections may be urged.{9}
Functionally, we have sensation, central reflection, and motion that align with these anatomical divisions. In Psychology, we can organize our work in a similar way{8} and discuss three fundamental conscious processes and their conditions one by one. The first will be Sensation; the second will be Thinking or Understanding; the third will be the Impulse to Act. This division may create some ambiguity, but it is convenient for a book like this, and those practicalities can be prioritized over any concerns that might be raised.{9}
CHAPTER II.
SENSATION IN GENERAL.
Incoming nerve-currents are the only agents which normally affect the brain. The human nerve-centres are surrounded by many dense wrappings of which the effect is to protect them from the direct action of the forces of the outer world. The hair, the thick skin of the scalp, the skull, and two membranes at least, one of them a tough one, surround the brain; and this organ moreover, like the spinal cord, is bathed by a serous fluid in which it floats suspended. Under these circumstances the only things that can happen to the brain are:
Incoming nerve signals are the only things that usually impact the brain. The human nerve centers are surrounded by several thick layers that serve to protect them from direct exposure to outside forces. The hair, the thick skin on the scalp, the skull, and at least two membranes, one of which is tough, encase the brain; additionally, this organ, like the spinal cord, is submerged in a fluid that allows it to float. Given these conditions, the only things that can happen to the brain are:
1) The dullest and feeblest mechanical jars;
1) The most boring and weakest mechanical jars;
2) Changes in the quantity and quality of the blood-supply; and
2) Changes in the amount and quality of the blood supply; and
3) Currents running in through the so-called afferent or centripetal nerves.
3) Currents coming in through the so-called afferent or centripetal nerves.
The mechanical jars are usually ineffective; the effects of the blood-changes are usually transient; the nerve-currents, on the contrary, produce consequences of the most vital sort, both at the moment of their arrival, and later, through the invisible paths of escape which they plough in the substance of the organ and which, as we believe, remain as more or less permanent features of its structure, modifying its action throughout all future time.{10}
The mechanical jars typically don't work well; the effects of the blood changes are usually short-lived. In contrast, the nerve currents have significant effects, both when they arrive and later, along the unseen pathways they carve into the tissue of the organ. We believe these changes become more or less permanent aspects of its structure, influencing its function for a long time to come.{10}
Each afferent nerve comes from a determinate part of the periphery and is played upon and excited to its inward activity by a particular force of the outer world. Usually it is insensible to other forces: thus the optic nerves are not impressible by air-waves, nor those of the skin by light-waves. The lingual nerve is not excited by aromatic effluvia, the auditory nerve is unaffected by heat. Each selects from the vibrations of the outer world some one rate to which it responds exclusively. The result is that our sensations form a discontinuous series, broken by enormous gaps. There is no reason to suppose that the order of vibrations in the outer world is anything like as interrupted as the order of our sensations. Between the quickest audible air-waves (40,000 vibrations a second at the outside) and the slowest sensible heat-waves (which number probably billions), Nature must somewhere have realized innumerable intermediary rates which we have no nerves for perceiving. The process in the nerve-fibres themselves is very likely the same, or much the same, in all the different nerves. It is the so-called 'current'; but the current is started by one order of outer vibrations in the retina, and in the ear, for example, by another. This is due to the different terminal organs with which the several afferent nerves are armed. Just as we arm ourselves with a spoon to pick up soup, and with a fork to pick up meat, so our nerve-fibres arm themselves with one sort of end-apparatus to pick up air-waves, with another to pick up ether-waves. The terminal apparatus always consists of modified epithelial cells with which the fibre is continuous. The fibre itself is not directly excitable by the outer agent which impresses the terminal organ. The optic fibres are unmoved by the direct rays of the sun; a cutaneous nerve-trunk may be touched with ice without feeling cold.[2] The{11} fibres are mere transmitters; the terminal organs are so many imperfect telephones into which the material world speaks, and each of which takes up but a portion of what it says; the brain-cells at the fibres' central end are as many others at which the mind listens to the far-off call.
Each sensory nerve comes from a specific area of the body and is activated and stimulated to send signals inward by a particular force from the outside world. Usually, it doesn't respond to other forces: for example, the optic nerves aren't influenced by airwaves, and the skin nerves aren't affected by light waves. The lingual nerve doesn't react to smells, and the auditory nerve isn't responsive to heat. Each nerve picks a specific vibration rate from the outside world to respond to exclusively. As a result, our sensations create a disjointed series, filled with significant gaps. There's no reason to believe that the range of vibrations in the external world is as fragmented as our sensations. Between the fastest audible airwaves (about 40,000 vibrations per second at most) and the slowest noticeable heat waves (which likely number in the billions), nature must have created countless intermediate rates that we cannot perceive due to a lack of appropriate nerves. The process occurring in the nerve fibers is probably very similar across different nerves. It's what we call the 'current'; however, this current is initiated by one type of outer vibration in the retina and by another in the ear, for instance. This is because of the different terminal organs with which the various sensory nerves are equipped. Just as we use a spoon to eat soup and a fork to eat meat, our nerve fibers are equipped with different kinds of end devices to detect air waves and ether waves. The terminal apparatus is always made up of modified epithelial cells that connect with the fiber. The fiber itself isn't directly activated by the external force that affects the terminal organ. The optic fibers do not react to direct sunlight; a skin nerve can be touched with ice and still not feel cold.[2] The{11} fibers are simply transmitters; the terminal organs act like imperfect telephones that pick up portions of what the material world conveys, and the brain cells at the fibers' central end are like listeners picking up the distant call.
The 'Specific Energies' of the Various Parts of the Brain.—To a certain extent anatomists have traced definitely the paths which the sensory nerve-fibres follow after their entrance into the centres, as far as their termination in the gray matter of the cerebral convolutions.[3] It will be shown on a later page that the consciousness which accompanies the excitement of this gray matter varies from one portion of it to another. It is consciousness of things seen, when the occipital lobes, and of things heard, when the upper part of the temporal lobes, share in the excitement. Each region of the cerebral cortex responds to the stimulation which its afferent fibres bring to it, in a manner with which a peculiar quality of feeling seems invariably correlated. This is what has been called the law of 'specific energies' in the nervous system. Of course we are without even a conjectural explanation of the ground of such a law. Psychologists (as Lewes, Wundt, Rosenthal, Goldscheider, etc.) have debated a good deal as to whether the specific quality of the feeling depends solely on the place stimulated in the cortex, or on the sort of current which the nerve pours in. Doubtless the sort of outer force habitually impinging on the end-organ gradually modifies the end-organ, the sort of commotion received from the end-organ modifies the fibre, and the sort of current a so-modified fibre pours into the cortical centre modifies the centre. The modification of the centre in turn (though no man{12} can guess how or why) seems to modify the resultant consciousness. But these adaptive modifications must be excessively slow; and as matters actually stand in any adult individual, it is safe to say that, more than anything else, the place excited in his cortex decides what kind of thing he shall feel. Whether we press the retina, or prick, cut, pinch, or galvanize the living optic nerve, the Subject always feels flashes of light, since the ultimate result of our operations is to stimulate the cortex of his occipital region. Our habitual ways of feeling outer things thus depend on which convolutions happen to be connected with the particular end-organs which those things impress. We see the sunshine and the fire, simply because the only peripheral end-organ susceptible of taking up the ether-waves which these objects radiate excites those particular fibres which run to the centres of sight. If we could interchange the inward connections, we should feel the world in altogether new ways. If, for instance, we could splice the outer extremity of our optic nerves to our ears, and that of our auditory nerves to our eyes, we should hear the lightning and see the thunder, see the symphony and hear the conductor's movements. Such hypotheses as these form a good training for neophytes in the idealistic philosophy!
The 'Specific Energies' of the Various Parts of the Brain.—To some extent, anatomists have clearly traced the paths that sensory nerve fibers take after they enter the brain centers, all the way to where they end in the gray matter of the brain's folds.[3] It will be shown later that the consciousness triggered by this gray matter varies depending on which part is activated. It's the consciousness of things seen when the occipital lobes are involved, and of things heard when the upper part of the temporal lobes is active. Each area of the cerebral cortex reacts to the stimulation from its incoming fibers in a way that seems always linked to a specific quality of feeling. This is known as the law of 'specific energies' in the nervous system. Naturally, we lack even a speculative explanation for the reason behind this law. Psychologists (like Lewes, Wundt, Rosenthal, Goldscheider, etc.) have debated whether the specific quality of feeling is determined solely by the location stimulated in the cortex, or by the type of current that the nerve sends in. It's likely that the kind of external force consistently affecting the sensory organ gradually changes it, the nature of the signals from the sensory organ alters the fiber, and the type of current a modified fiber sends into the cortical center changes that center. The modification of the center in turn (though no one{12} can guess how or why) seems to alter the resulting consciousness. However, these adaptive changes must be quite slow; and as it stands in any adult individual, it's safe to say that, more than anything else, the location activated in their cortex determines what kind of sensation they will experience. Whether we press on the retina, or prick, cut, pinch, or stimulate the living optic nerve, the Subject always perceives flashes of light, since the ultimate result of our actions is to stimulate the cortex of their occipital region. Our usual ways of perceiving the external world depend on which brain folds are connected to the specific sensory organs affected. We see sunlight and fire simply because the only peripheral sensory organ capable of detecting the ether waves these objects produce activates the specific fibers that lead to the visual centers. If we were able to swap the internal connections, we would experience the world in entirely new ways. For instance, if we could connect the ends of our optic nerves to our ears and our auditory nerves to our eyes, we would hear lightning and see thunder, perceive the symphony, and hear the conductor's movements. Such ideas serve as great exercises for newcomers in idealistic philosophy!
Sensation distinguished from Perception.—It is impossible rigorously to define a sensation; and in the actual life of consciousness sensations, popularly so called, and perceptions merge into each other by insensible degrees. All we can say is that what we mean by sensations are FIRST things in the way of consciousness. They are the immediate results upon consciousness of nerve-currents as they enter the brain, and before they have awakened any suggestions or associations with past experience. But it is obvious that such immediate sensations can only be realized in the earliest days of life. They are all but impossible to adults with memories and stores of associations acquired. Prior to all impressions on sense-organs, the brain is plunged in deep sleep and consciousness is practically non-existent{13}. Even the first weeks after birth are passed in almost unbroken sleep by human infants. It takes a strong message from the sense-organs to break this slumber. In a new-born brain this gives rise to an absolutely pure sensation. But the experience leaves its 'unimaginable touch' on the matter of the convolutions, and the next impression which a sense-organ transmits produces a cerebral reaction in which the awakened vestige of the last impression plays its part. Another sort of feeling and a higher grade of cognition are the consequence. 'Ideas' about the object mingle with the awareness of its mere sensible presence, we name it, class it, compare it, utter propositions concerning it, and the complication of the possible consciousness which an incoming current may arouse, goes on increasing to the end of life. In general, this higher consciousness about things is called Perception, the mere inarticulate feeling of their presence is Sensation, so far as we have it at all. To some degree we seem able to lapse into this inarticulate feeling at moments when our attention is entirely dispersed.
Sensation distinguished from Perception.—It's impossible to strictly define a sensation; in real life, sensations, as we commonly refer to them, and perceptions blend into each other in subtle ways. All we can say is that what we mean by sensations are FIRST things in the way of consciousness. They are the immediate results on consciousness from nerve signals as they enter the brain, before they trigger any suggestions or linkages with past experiences. However, it’s clear that such immediate sensations can only be experienced in the earliest days of life. They are nearly impossible for adults who have memories and a wealth of associations accumulated. Before any impressions hit the sense organs, the brain is deep in sleep and consciousness is virtually nonexistent{13}. Even the first weeks after birth are spent in nearly uninterrupted sleep by human infants. It takes a strong signal from the sense organs to wake them up from this slumber. In a newborn brain, this leads to a completely pure sensation. But the experience leaves its 'unimaginable touch' on the structure of the brain folds, and the next impression a sense organ transmits triggers a brain response in which the remnants of the last impression play a role. This leads to another type of feeling and a higher level of understanding. 'Ideas' about the object combine with the awareness of its mere physical presence; we name it, categorize it, compare it, make statements about it, and the complexity of possible consciousness that an incoming signal can stir continues to grow throughout life. Generally, this higher level of awareness about things is called Perception, while the mere instinctive feeling of their presence is Sensation, as far as we experience it at all. To some extent, we seem able to slip into this instinctive feeling at times when our attention is completely scattered.
Sensations are cognitive. A sensation is thus an abstraction seldom realized by itself; and the object which a sensation knows is an abstract object which cannot exist alone. 'Sensible qualities' are the objects of sensation. The sensations of the eye are aware of the colors of things, those of the ear are acquainted with their sounds; those of the skin feel their tangible heaviness, sharpness, warmth or coldness, etc., etc. From all the organs of the body currents may come which reveal to us the quality of pain, and to a certain extent that of pleasure.
Sensations are cognitive. A sensation is an abstraction that is rarely experienced on its own; and the object that a sensation perceives is an abstract object that cannot exist independently. 'Sensible qualities' are the objects of sensation. The sensations of the eye recognize the colors of things, those of the ear are familiar with their sounds; those of the skin feel their tangible heaviness, sharpness, warmth, or coldness, and so on. From all the organs of the body, signals can emerge that inform us about the quality of pain, and to some extent, that of pleasure.
Such qualities as stickiness, roughness, etc., are supposed to be felt through the coöperation of muscular sensations with those of the skin. The geometrical qualities of things, on the other hand, their shapes, bignesses, distances, etc. (so far as we discriminate and identify them), are by most psychologists supposed to be impossible without the evocation of memories from the past; and the{14} cognition of these attributes is thus considered to exceed the power of sensation pure and simple.
Such qualities as stickiness, roughness, etc., are thought to be experienced through the combined input of muscle sensations and those from the skin. In contrast, the geometrical qualities of objects, like their shapes, sizes, distances, etc. (as we recognize and identify them), are believed by most psychologists to be unattainable without recalling memories from the past; thus, the{14} understanding of these attributes is seen as going beyond what pure sensation can provide.
'Knowledge of Acquaintance' and 'Knowledge about.'—Sensation, thus considered, differs from perception only in the extreme simplicity of its object or content. Its object, being a simple quality, is sensibly homogeneous; and its function is that of mere acquaintance with this homogeneous seeming fact. Perception's function, on the other hand, is that of knowing something about the fact. But we must know what fact we mean, all the while, and the various whats are what sensations give. Our earliest thoughts are almost exclusively sensational. They give us a set of whats, or thats, or its; of subjects of discourse in other words, with their relations not yet brought out. The first time we see light, in Condillac's phrase we are it rather than see it. But all our later optical knowledge is about what this experience gives. And though we were struck blind from that first moment, our scholarship in the subject would lack no essential feature so long as our memory remained. In training-institutions for the blind they teach the pupils as much about light as in ordinary schools. Reflection, refraction, the spectrum, the ether-theory, etc., are all studied. But the best taught born-blind pupil of such an establishment yet lacks a knowledge which the least instructed seeing baby has. They can never show him what light is in its 'first intention'; and the loss of that sensible knowledge no book-learning can replace. All this is so obvious that we usually find sensation 'postulated' as an element of experience, even by those philosophers who are least inclined to make much of its importance, or to pay respect to the knowledge which it brings.
'Knowledge of Acquaintance' and 'Knowledge about.'—When we think about sensation, it only differs from perception in how simple its object or content is. Its object, being a basic quality, is clearly homogeneous; and its role is simply to provide acquaintance with this uniform seeming fact. On the other hand, perception serves to know something about the fact. However, we must constantly understand what fact we're discussing, and the various whats are what sensations provide. Our earliest thoughts are nearly entirely based on sensation. They give us a collection of whats, or thats, or its; subjects of conversation, in other words, without their relationships being clarified yet. The first time we experience light, to borrow Condillac's phrase, we are it rather than simply see it. But all our later knowledge about optics comes from what this experience provides. Even if we were to lose our sight from that initial moment, our understanding of the topic would still be complete as long as our memory held. In schools for the blind, students are taught as much about light as in regular schools. Concepts like reflection, refraction, the spectrum, and the ether-theory are all explored. However, the best-educated blind student still misses a kind of knowledge that even the least informed seeing baby possesses. They can never show him what light is in its 'first intention'; and that physical experience cannot be replaced by any amount of book learning. This is so clear that we often see sensation 'assumed' as part of experience, even by those philosophers who are least likely to emphasize its significance or acknowledge the knowledge it provides.
Sensations distinguished from Images.—Both sensation and perception, for all their difference, are yet alike in that their objects appear vivid, lively, and present. Objects merely thought of, recollected, or imagined, on the contrary, are relatively faint and devoid of this pungency, or tang, this quality of real presence which the objects of sensation{15} possess. Now the cortical brain-processes to which sensations are attached are due to incoming currents from the periphery of the body—an external object must excite the eye, ear, etc., before the sensation comes. Those cortical processes, on the other hand, to which mere ideas or images are attached are due in all probability to currents from other convolutions. It would seem, then, that the currents from the periphery normally awaken a kind of brain-activity which the currents from other convolutions are inadequate to arouse. To this sort of activity—a profounder degree of disintegration, perhaps—the quality of vividness, presence, or reality in the object of the resultant consciousness seems correlated.
Sensations Distinguished from Images.—Both sensation and perception, despite their differences, are similar in that their objects seem vivid, lively, and present. In contrast, objects that are merely thought of, recollected, or imagined are relatively faint and lack the intensity or tang, the quality of real presence that the objects of sensation{15} have. The brain processes related to sensations are triggered by incoming signals from the body’s periphery—an external object must stimulate the eye, ear, etc., before the sensation occurs. In contrast, the brain processes related to mere ideas or images are likely driven by signals from other brain regions. It appears that signals from the periphery typically activate a type of brain activity that signals from other regions cannot adequately trigger. This kind of activity—possibly a deeper level of disintegration—seems to correlate with the quality of vividness, presence, or reality in the resulting conscious experience.
The Exteriority of Objects of Sensation.—Every thing or quality felt is felt in outer space. It is impossible to conceive a brightness or a color otherwise than as extended and outside of the body. Sounds also appear in space. Contacts are against the body's surface; and pains always occupy some organ. An opinion which has had much currency in psychology is that sensible qualities are first apprehended as in the mind itself, and then 'projected' from it, or 'extradited,' by a secondary intellectual or super-sensational mental act. There is no ground whatever for this opinion. The only facts which even seem to make for it can be much better explained in another way, as we shall see later on. The very first sensation which an infant gets is for him the outer universe. And the universe which he comes to know in later life is nothing but an amplification of that first simple germ which, by accretion on the one hand and intussusception on the other, has grown so big and complex and articulate that its first estate is unrememberable. In his dumb awakening to the consciousness of something there, a mere this as yet (or something for which even the term this would perhaps be too discriminative, and the intellectual acknowledgment of which would be better expressed by the bare interjection 'lo!'), the infant encounters an object in which (though it{16} be given in a pure sensation) all the 'categories of the understanding' are contained. It has externality, objectivity, unity, substantiality, causality, in the full sense in which any later object or system of objects has these things. Here the young knower meets and greets his world; and the miracle of knowledge bursts forth, as Voltaire says, as much in the infant's lowest sensation as in the highest achievement of a Newton's brain.
The Exteriority of Objects of Sensation.—Everything we feel is perceived in external space. We can’t imagine brightness or color as anything other than something that extends outside of our bodies. Sounds also exist in space. Touch occurs against the surface of the body, and pains always relate to some part of it. A common belief in psychology is that we first experience sensory qualities as in the mind itself, and then they are ‘projected’ out or ‘extradited’ through a secondary mental process. There’s no solid basis for this belief. The few facts that seem to support it can be better explained in another way, as we will see later. The very first sensation that an infant receives is their perception of the outer universe. The universe they come to understand later in life is simply an expansion of that initial simple experience, which has grown so large and complex that it becomes unrecognizable. As they awaken to the awareness of something there, just a mere this (or possibly something for which even the term this feels too specific, better captured by a simple interjection like 'lo!'), the infant encounters an object that, although it{16} might be felt as pure sensation, contains all the ‘categories of understanding.’ It has externality, objectivity, unity, substantiality, causality, in the same sense that any later object or system of objects possesses these qualities. Here, the young learner meets and greets their world; and the miracle of knowledge emerges, as Voltaire suggests, in both the infant's simplest sensation and the greatest achievements of a mind like Newton's.
The physiological condition of this first sensible experience is probably many nerve-currents coming in from various peripheral organs at once; but this multitude of organic conditions does not prevent the consciousness from being one consciousness. We shall see as we go on that it can be one consciousness, even though it be due to the coöperation of numerous organs and be a consciousness of many things together. The Object which the numerous inpouring currents of the baby bring to his consciousness is one big blooming buzzing Confusion. That Confusion is the baby's universe; and the universe of all of us is still to a great extent such a Confusion, potentially resolvable, and demanding to be resolved, but not yet actually resolved, into parts. It appears from first to last as a space-occupying thing. So far as it is unanalyzed and unresolved we may be said to know it sensationally; but as fast as parts are distinguished in it and we become aware of their relations, our knowledge becomes perceptual or even conceptual, and as such need not concern us in the present chapter.
The physical state of this initial sensory experience likely involves multiple nerve signals coming in from different peripheral organs all at once; however, this flood of organic activity doesn’t prevent consciousness from being a single entity. As we move forward, we’ll see that it can remain one consciousness, even if it arises from the collaboration of many organs and encompasses a variety of experiences simultaneously. The input from the many nerve signals in a baby creates a unified experience that feels like a chaotic mix. That chaos is the baby’s universe, and for all of us, the universe still resembles such chaos to a large extent—potentially understandable and calling for organization, but not yet actually broken down into parts. Initially, it seems like a thing that occupies space. As long as it remains unexamined and unsorted, we can say we know it through sensation; but as we start to identify individual elements and become aware of how they relate, our knowledge becomes perceptual and even conceptual, and that aspect isn’t our focus in this chapter.
The Intensity of Sensations.—A light may be so weak as not sensibly to dispel the darkness, a sound so low as not to be heard, a contact so faint that we fail to notice it. In other words, a certain finite amount of the outward stimulus is required to produce any sensation of its presence at all. This is called by Fechner the law of the threshold—something must be stepped over before the object can gain entrance to the mind. An impression just above the threshold is called the minimum visibile, audibile, etc.{17} From this point onwards, as the impressing force increases, the sensation increases also, though at a slower rate, until at last an acme of the sensation is reached which no increase in the stimulus can make sensibly more great. Usually, before the acme, pain begins to mix with the specific character of the sensation. This is definitely observable in the cases of great pressure, intense heat, cold, light, and sound; and in those of smell and taste less definitely so only from the fact that we can less easily increase the force of the stimuli here. On the other hand, all sensations, however unpleasant when more intense, are rather agreeable than otherwise in their very lowest degrees. A faintly bitter taste, or putrid smell, may at least be interesting.
The Intensity of Sensations.—A light can be so weak that it barely dispels the darkness, a sound can be so low that it isn’t heard, and a touch can be so slight that we fail to notice it. In other words, a certain minimum level of external stimulus is needed to create any sensation at all. Fechner refers to this as the law of the threshold—something needs to be crossed for the object to enter the mind. An impression just above the threshold is termed the minimum visibile, audible, etc.{17} As the strength of the stimulus increases, the sensation also grows, though at a slower rate, until it reaches an acme where no amount of increased stimulus can make it significantly stronger. Typically, before reaching this peak, pain starts to blend with the specific nature of the sensation. This is clearly noticeable in cases of strong pressure, intense heat, cold, light, and sound; with smell and taste, it’s less obvious simply because it’s harder to increase the strength of the stimuli. However, all sensations, while they may be unpleasant at higher intensities, are generally more pleasant at their lowest levels. A faintly bitter taste or a putrid smell can at least be interesting.
Weber's Law.—I said that the intensity of the sensation increases by slower steps than those by which its exciting cause increases. If there were no threshold, and if every equal increment in the outer stimulus produced an equal increment in the sensation's intensity, a simple straight line would represent graphically the 'curve' of the relation between the two things. Let the horizontal line stand for the scale of intensities of the objective stimulus, so that at 0 it has no intensity, at 1 intensity 1, and so forth. Let the verticals dropped from the slanting line stand for the sensations aroused. At 0 there will be no sensation; at 1 there will be a sensation represented by the length of the vertical S¹—1, at 2 the sensation will be represented by{18} S²—2, and so on. The line of S's will rise evenly because by the hypothesis the verticals (or sensations) increase at the same rate as the horizontals (or stimuli) to which they severally correspond. But in Nature, as aforesaid, they increase at a slower rate. If each step forward in the horizontal direction be equal to the last, then each step upward in the vertical direction will have to be somewhat shorter than the last; the line of sensations will be convex on top instead of straight.
Weber's Law.—I said that the intensity of a sensation increases more slowly than the increase in its cause. If there was no threshold, and if every equal increase in the external stimulus produced an equal increase in sensation intensity, a simple straight line would illustrate the relationship between the two. Let the horizontal line represent the scale of intensities for the objective stimulus, where at 0 there is no intensity, at 1 there is intensity 1, and so on. Let the vertical lines drawn from the slanting line represent the sensations triggered. At 0, there will be no sensation; at 1, there will be a sensation represented by the length of the vertical S¹—1, at 2 the sensation will be represented by {18} S²—2, and so forth. The line of S's will rise evenly because, based on the hypothesis, the verticals (or sensations) increase at the same rate as the horizontals (or stimuli) they correspond to. But in nature, as mentioned, they increase at a slower rate. If each step forward on the horizontal axis is equal to the previous one, then each step upward on the vertical axis will have to be slightly shorter than the last; the line of sensations will be curved upwards instead of straight.
Fig. 2 represents this actual state of things, 0 being the zero-point of the stimulus, and conscious sensation, represented by the curved line, not beginning until the 'threshold' is reached, at which the stimulus has the value 3. From here onwards the sensation increases, but it increases less at each step, until at last, the 'acme' being reached, the sensation-line grows flat. The exact law of retardation is called Weber's law, from the fact that he first observed it in the case of weights. I will quote Wundt's account of the law and of the facts on which it is based.
Fig. 2 represents the actual state of things, where 0 is the starting point of the stimulus, and conscious sensation, shown by the curved line, doesn’t begin until the 'threshold' is reached, at which the stimulus has a value of 3. From that point on, the sensation increases, but it increases less with each step until finally, when the 'peak' is reached, the sensation-line levels off. The specific principle of this slowdown is known as Weber's law, named after the fact that he first noticed it in relation to weights. I will reference Wundt's explanation of the law and the facts it’s based on.
"Every one knows that in the stilly night we hear things unnoticed in the noise of day. The gentle ticking of the clock, the air circulating through the chimney, the cracking of the chairs in the room, and a thousand other slight noises, impress themselves upon our ear. It is equally well known that in the confused hubbub of the streets, or the clamor of a railway, we may lose not only what our neighbor says to us, but even not hear the sound of our own voice. The stars{19} which are brightest at night are invisible by day; and although we see the moon then, she is far paler than at night. Every one who has had to deal with weights knows that if to a pound in the hand a second pound be added, the difference is immediately felt; whilst if it be added to a hundredweight, we are not aware of the difference at all....
"Everyone knows that in the quiet of the night, we hear things that go unnoticed in the daytime noise. The gentle ticking of the clock, the air moving through the chimney, the creaking of the chairs in the room, and countless other small sounds resonate in our ears. It's also well-known that in the chaotic noise of the streets or the racket of a train station, we might not only miss what our neighbor is saying, but we might not even hear our own voice. The stars{19} that shine the brightest at night are invisible during the day; and although we can see the moon then, she appears much fainter than at night. Anyone who has handled weights knows that if you add a second pound to one pound in your hand, you feel the difference right away; while if you add it to a hundredweight, you won't notice the difference at all...."
"The sound of the clock, the light of the stars, the pressure of the pound, these are all stimuli to our senses, and stimuli whose outward amount remains the same. What then do these experiences teach? Evidently nothing but this, that one and the same stimulus, according to the circumstances under which it operates, will be felt either more or less intensely, or not felt at all. Of what sort now is the alteration in the circumstances upon which this alteration in the feeling may depend? On considering the matter closely we see that it is everywhere of one and the same kind. The tick of the clock is a feeble stimulus for our auditory nerve, which we hear plainly when it is alone, but not when it is added to the strong stimulus of the carriage-wheels and other noises of the day. The light of the stars is a stimulus to the eye. But if the stimulation which this light exerts be added to the strong stimulus of daylight, we feel nothing of it, although we feel it distinctly when it unites itself with the feebler stimulation of the twilight. The poundweight is a stimulus to our skin, which we feel when it joins itself to a preceding stimulus of equal strength, but which vanishes when it is combined with a stimulus a thousand times greater in amount.
"The sound of the clock, the light of the stars, the weight of the pound—these are all stimuli for our senses, and their outside amount stays the same. So, what do these experiences teach us? Clearly, nothing more than that one and the same stimulus can be experienced either more or less intensely, or not felt at all, depending on the circumstances it operates in. What kind of changes in those circumstances can affect how we feel? If we look closely, we see that they are all basically the same. The tick of the clock is a weak stimulus for our auditory nerve, which we hear clearly when it's alone, but we barely notice it when it's mixed with the loud sounds of carriage wheels and other daytime noises. The light of the stars is a stimulus for the eye. However, if this light is combined with the bright stimulus of daylight, we don't perceive it, even though we can clearly see it when it’s paired with the lighter stimulation of twilight. The weight of a pound is a stimulus for our skin, which we feel when it’s added to another stimulus of the same strength, but it fades away when combined with a stimulus that is much stronger."
"We may therefore lay it down as a general rule that a stimulus, in order to be felt, may be so much the smaller if the already preëxisting stimulation of the organ is small, but must be so much the larger, the greater the preëxisting stimulation is.... The simplest relation would obviously be that the sensation should increase in identically the same ratio as the stimulus.... But if this simplest of all relations prevailed, ... the light of the stars, e.g., ought to make as great an addition to the daylight as it does to the darkness of the nocturnal sky, and this we know to be not the case.... So it is clear that the strength of the sensations does not increase in proportion to the amount of the stimuli, but more slowly. And now comes the question, in what proportion does the increase of the sensation grow less as the increase of the stimulus grows greater? To answer this question, every-day experiences do not suffice. We need exact measurements, both of the amounts of the various stimuli, and of the intensity of the sensations themselves.
"We can therefore establish a general rule that a stimulus may be felt more faintly if the existing stimulation of the organ is low but must be felt more strongly the greater the existing stimulation is. The simplest relationship would clearly be that the sensation increases in the same ratio as the stimulus. However, if this simple relationship held true, for example, the light from the stars should add as much to daylight as it does to the darkness of the night sky, and we know that’s not the case. It’s evident that the strength of sensations doesn’t increase in direct proportion to the amount of stimuli but rather at a slower rate. This raises the question: how much less does the increase in sensation grow as the increase in stimulus gets larger? To answer this question, everyday experiences aren’t enough. We need precise measurements of the different stimulus amounts and the intensity of the sensations themselves."
"How to execute these measurements, however, is something which daily experience suggests. To measure the strength of sensations is, as we saw, impossible; we can only measure the difference of{20} sensations. Experience showed us what very unequal differences of sensation might come from equal differences of outward stimulus. But all these experiences expressed themselves in one kind of fact, that the same difference of stimulus could in one case be felt, and in another case not felt at all—a pound felt if added to another pound, but not if added to a hundredweight.... We can quickest reach a result with our observations if we start with an arbitrary strength of stimulus, notice what sensation it gives us, and then see how much we can increase the stimulus without making the sensation seem to change. If we carry out such observations with stimuli of varying absolute amounts, we shall be forced to choose in an equally varying way the amounts of addition to the stimulus which are capable of giving us a just barely perceptible feeling of more. A light to be just perceptible in the twilight need not be near as bright as the starlight; it must be far brighter to be just perceived during the day. If now we institute such observations for all possible strengths of the various stimuli, and note for each strength the amount of addition of the latter required to produce a barely perceptible alteration of sensation, we shall have a series of figures in which is immediately expressed the law according to which the sensation alters when the stimulation is increased...."
"How to carry out these measurements, however, is something that daily experience suggests. Measuring the strength of sensations is, as we saw, impossible; we can only measure the difference between sensations. Experience showed us how very unequal differences in sensation could come from equal differences in external stimulus. But all these experiences boil down to one fact: the same difference in stimulus can be perceived in one situation and not in another—a pound feels noticeable when added to another pound, but not when added to a hundredweight. We can most quickly reach a conclusion with our observations if we start with an arbitrary strength of stimulus, notice what sensation it gives us, and then see how much we can increase the stimulus without the sensation seeming to change. If we carry out these observations with stimuli of different absolute amounts, we will need to choose in a similarly varying manner the amounts of addition to the stimulus required to produce a barely noticeable feeling of more. A light needs to be just perceptible in twilight, but it doesn't have to be nearly as bright as starlight; it must be much brighter to be perceived during the day. If we conduct such observations for all possible strengths of the various stimuli and note the amount of additional stimulus required for each strength to produce a barely noticeable change in sensation, we will have a series of figures that immediately express the law by which sensation changes as stimulation increases..."
Observations according to this method are particularly easy to make in the spheres of light, sound, and pressure. Beginning with the latter case,
Observations using this method are especially easy to make in the areas of light, sound, and pressure. Starting with the last case,
"We find a surprisingly simple result. The barely sensible addition to the original weight must stand exactly in the same proportion to it, be the same fraction of it, no matter what the absolute value may be of the weights on which the experiment is made.... As the average of a number of experiments, this fraction is found to be about ⅓; that is, no matter what pressure there may already be made upon the skin, an increase or a diminution of the pressure will be felt, as soon as the added or subtracted weight amounts to one third of the weight originally there."
"We discover a surprisingly simple result. The barely noticeable addition to the original weight must stand exactly in the same proportion to it, be the same fraction of it, regardless of what the absolute value of the weights used in the experiment may be.... As the average of several experiments, this fraction is found to be about ⅓; that is, no matter how much pressure is already being applied to the skin, any increase or decrease in pressure will be felt, as soon as the added or removed weight reaches one third of the original weight."
Wundt then describes how differences may be observed in the muscular feelings, in the feelings of heat, in those of light, and in those of sound; and he concludes thus:
Wundt then describes how we can notice differences in muscle sensations, temperature sensations, light sensations, and sound sensations; and he concludes this way:
"So we have found that all the senses whose stimuli we are enabled to measure accurately, obey a uniform law. However various may be their several delicacies of discrimination, this holds true of all, that the increase of the stimulus necessary to produce an increase{21} of the sensation bears a constant ratio to the total stimulus. The figures which express this ratio in the several senses may be shown thus in tabular form:
"So we have discovered that all the senses, for which we can accurately measure the stimuli, follow a consistent law. No matter how different their sensitivities are, the same is true for all: the increase in stimulus required to create an increase{21} in sensation maintains a constant ratio to the total stimulus. The numbers that represent this ratio across the different senses can be presented in a table like this:"
Sensation of light | 1/100 |
Muscular sensation | 1/17 |
Feeling of pressure, | —1/3 |
"" warmth, | |
" " sound, |
"These figures are far from giving as accurate a measure as might be desired. But at least they are fit to convey a general notion of the relative discriminative susceptibility of the different senses.... The important law which gives in so simple a form the relation of the sensation to the stimulus that calls it forth was first discovered by the physiologist Ernst Heinrich Weber to obtain in special cases."[4]
"These numbers don't provide as precise a measurement as we would like. However, they do give a good idea of how different senses vary in sensitivity. The key principle that simply defines how sensations relate to the stimuli that trigger them was first identified by the physiologist Ernst Heinrich Weber for specific cases."[4]
Fechner's Law.—Another way of expressing Weber's law is to say that to get equal positive additions to the sensation, one must make equal relative additions to the stimulus. Professor Fechner of Leipzig founded upon Weber's law a theory of the numerical measurement of sensations, over which much metaphysical discussion has raged. Each just perceptible addition to the sensation, as we gradually let the stimulus increase, was supposed by him to be a unit of sensation, and all these units were treated by him as equal, in spite of the fact that equally perceptible increments need by no means appear equally big when they once are perceived. The many pounds which form the just perceptible addition to a hundredweight feel bigger when added than the few ounces which form the just perceptible addition to a pound. Fechner ignored this fact. He considered that if n distinct perceptible steps of increase might be passed through in gradually increasing a stimulus from the threshold-value till the intensity s was felt, then the sensation of s was composed of n units, which were of the same value all along the line.[5] Sensations once{22} represented by numbers, psychology may become, according to Fechner, an 'exact' science, susceptible of mathematical treatment. His general formula for getting at the number of units in any sensation is S = C log R, where S stands for the sensation, R for the stimulus numerically estimated, and C for a constant that must be separately determined by experiment in each particular order of sensibility. The sensation is proportional to the logarithm of the stimulus; and the absolute values, in units, of any series of sensations might be got from the ordinates of the curve in Fig. 2, if it were a correctly drawn logarithmic curve, with the thresholds rightly plotted out from experiments.
Fechner's Law.—Another way to explain Weber's law is to say that to achieve equal positive increases in sensation, you need to make equal relative increases to the stimulus. Professor Fechner from Leipzig developed a theory for the numerical measurement of sensations based on Weber's law, sparking a lot of philosophical debate. He believed that each just noticeable increment in sensation, as we gradually increase the stimulus, was a unit of sensation, treating all these units as equal, despite the reality that equally perceptible increments don’t always seem equally large once perceived. The many pounds constituting the just noticeable addition to a hundredweight feel larger when added than the few ounces making up the just noticeable addition to a pound. Fechner overlooked this fact. He thought that if you could pass through n distinct perceptible steps of increase while gradually raising a stimulus from the threshold value to when the intensity s is felt, then the sensation of s was made up of n units of the same value throughout the process.[5] Once sensations were represented by numbers, psychology could become, according to Fechner, an 'exact' science open to mathematical analysis. His general formula to determine the number of units in any sensation is S = C log R, where S represents the sensation, R is the stimulus measured numerically, and C is a constant that needs to be specifically determined through experimentation for each sensitivity range. The sensation is proportional to the logarithm of the stimulus; and the absolute values, in units, of any series of sensations could be derived from the ordinates of the curve in Fig. 2, if it were a properly drawn logarithmic curve with the thresholds accurately plotted from experiments.
Fechner's psycho-physic formula, as he called it, has been attacked on every hand; and as absolutely nothing practical has come of it, it need receive no farther notice here. The main outcome of his book has been to stir up experimental investigation into the validity of Weber's law (which concerns itself merely with the just perceptible increase, and says nothing about the measurement of the sensation as a whole) and to promote discussion of statistical methods. Weber's law, as will appear when we take the senses, seriatim, is only approximately verified. The discussion of statistical methods is necessitated by the extraordinary fluctuations of our sensibility from one moment to the next. It is found, namely, when the difference of two sensations approaches the limit of discernibility, that at one moment we discern it and at the next we do not. Our incessant accidental inner alterations make it impossible to tell just what the least discernible increment of the sensation is without taking the average of a large number of appreciations. These accidental errors are as likely to increase as to diminish our sensibility, and are eliminated in such an average, for those above and those below{23} the line then neutralize each other in the sum, and the normal sensibility, if there be one (that is, the sensibility due to constant causes as distinguished from these accidental ones), stands revealed. The methods of getting the average all have their difficulties and their snares, and controversy over them has become very subtle indeed. As an instance of how laborious some of the statistical methods are, and how patient German investigators can be, I may say that Fechner himself, in testing Weber's law for weights by the so-called 'method of true and false cases,' tabulated and computed no less than 24,576 separate judgments.
Fechner's psycho-physics formula, as he referred to it, has been criticized from all sides, and since nothing practical has come from it, we won’t discuss it further here. The main result of his book has been to spark experimental research into the validity of Weber's law (which only deals with the just noticeable increase and doesn’t address the overall measurement of sensation) and to encourage discussions about statistical methods. Weber's law, as will be shown when we look at the senses, seriatim, is only roughly confirmed. The discussion around statistical methods is necessary due to the significant fluctuations in our sensitivity from one moment to the next. It turns out that when the difference between two sensations gets close to the limit of what we can discern, we might perceive it one moment and then not the next. Our constant random internal changes make it hard to determine the smallest noticeable increment of sensation without averaging a large number of assessments. These accidental errors can just as easily increase or decrease our sensitivity, but they balance out in such averages, neutralizing each other in the sum, revealing the normal sensitivity, if there is one (that is, the sensitivity from constant causes as opposed to these random ones). The methods for calculating the average all have their challenges and pitfalls, and the debates around them have become quite intricate. For an example of how labor-intensive some statistical methods are, and how diligent German researchers can be, I should mention that Fechner himself, while testing Weber's law for weights using the so-called 'method of true and false cases,' tabulated and analyzed no less than 24,576 separate judgments.{23}
Sensations are not compounds. The fundamental objection to Fechner's whole attempt seems to be this, that although the outer causes of our sensations may have many parts, every distinguishable degree, as well as every distinguishable quality, of the sensation itself appears to be a unique fact of consciousness. Each sensation is a complete integer. "A strong one," as Dr. Münsterberg says, "is not the multiple of a weak one, or a compound of many weak ones, but rather something entirely new, and as it were incomparable, so that to seek a measurable difference between strong and weak sonorous, luminous, or thermic sensations would seem at first sight as senseless as to try to compute mathematically the difference between salt and sour, or between headache and toothache. It is clear that if in the stronger sensation of light the weaker sensation is not contained, it is unpsychological to say that the former differs from the latter by a certain increment."[6] Surely our feeling of scarlet is not a feeling of pink with a lot more pink added; it is something quite other than pink. Similarly with our sensation of an electric arc-light: it does not contain that of many smoky tallow candles in itself. Every sensation presents itself as an indivisible unit; and it is quite impossible to read any clear meaning into the notion that they are masses of units combined.{24}
Sensations are not compounds. The main criticism of Fechner's entire approach seems to be that while the external causes of our sensations might consist of many parts, every identifiable degree or quality of the sensation itself is a unique aspect of consciousness. Each sensation is a complete whole. "A strong one," as Dr. Münsterberg says, "is not just a stronger version of a weak one, nor is it made up of multiple weak ones, but is instead something entirely different and incomparable. Trying to find a measurable difference between strong and weak sounds, lights, or temperature sensations would be as pointless as trying to mathematically calculate the difference between salty and sour, or between a headache and a toothache. It’s clear that if a strong sensation of light does not contain the weaker sensation, it’s unpsychological to claim that the former differs from the latter by a certain increment."[6] Our experience of scarlet isn't just a more intense version of pink; it’s something entirely different from pink. The same goes for our sensation of an electric arc light: it does not include the experience of many flickering tallow candles. Every sensation stands as an indivisible unit; it's simply impossible to extract any clear meaning from the idea that they are just collections of combined units.{24}
There is no inconsistency between this statement and the fact that, starting with a weak sensation and increasing it, we feel 'more,' 'more,' 'more,' as the increase goes on. It is not more of the same stuff added, so to speak; but it is more and more difference, more and more distance, from the starting-point, which we feel. In the chapter on Discrimination we shall see that Difference can be perceived between simple things. We shall see, too, that differences themselves differ—there are various directions of difference; and along any one of them a series of things may be arranged so as to increase steadily in that direction. In any such series the end differs more from the beginning than the middle does. Differences of 'intensity' form one such direction of possible increase—so our judgments of more intensity can be expressed without the hypothesis that more units have been added to a growing sum.
There’s no contradiction between this statement and the fact that, starting with a weak sensation and increasing it, we feel 'more,' 'more,' 'more,' as the increase continues. It’s not just more of the same stuff added, so to speak; it’s more and more difference, more and more distance from the starting point that we feel. In the chapter on Discrimination, we will see that we can perceive differences between simple things. We’ll also see that differences themselves differ—there are various directions of difference; and along any of these, a series of things can be arranged to steadily increase in that direction. In any such series, the end differs more from the beginning than the middle does. Differences of 'intensity' represent one direction of possible increase—so our judgments of more intensity can be expressed without assuming that more units have been added to a growing sum.
The so-called 'Law of Relativity.'—Weber's law seems only one case of the still wider law that the more we have to attend to the less capable we are of noticing any one detail. The law is obvious where the things differ in kind. How easily do we forget a bodily discomfort when conversation waxes hot; how little do we notice the noises in the room so long as our work absorbs us! Ad plura intentus minus est ad singula sensus, as the old proverb says. One might now add that the homogeneity of what we have to attend to does not alter the result; but that a mind with two strong sensations of the same sort already before it is incapacitated by their amount from noticing the detail of a difference between them which it would immediately be struck by, were the sensations themselves weaker and consequently endowed with less distracting power.
The so-called 'Law of Relativity.'—Weber's law appears to be just one example of a broader principle that the more we have to focus on, the less capable we are of noticing any single detail. This principle is clear when the things differ in type. How easily do we forget physical discomfort when a conversation gets intense; how little do we notice the background noise as long as our work keeps us engaged! Ad plura intentus minus est ad singula sensus, as the old saying goes. One could also add that the similarity of what we have to focus on doesn't change the outcome; rather, a mind already dealing with two strong sensations of the same kind is unable to notice the subtle differences between them that it would immediately recognize if the sensations were weaker, thus less distracting.
This particular idea may be taken for what it is worth.[7] Meanwhile it is an undoubted general fact that the psychical{25} effect of incoming currents does depend on what other currents may be simultaneously pouring in. Not only the perceptibility of the object which the current brings before the mind, but the quality of it, is changed by the other currents. "Simultaneous[8] sensations modify each other" is a brief expression for this law. "We feel all things in relation to each other" is Wundt's vaguer formula for this general 'law of relativity,' which in one shape or other has had vogue since Hobbes's time in psychology. Much mystery has been made of it, but although we are of course ignorant of the more intimate processes involved, there seems no ground to doubt that they are physiological, and come from the interference of one current with another. A current interfered with might naturally give rise to a modified sensation.
This idea can be taken for what it's worth.[7] At the same time, it's a well-known fact that the mental effect of incoming currents relies on other currents that might be flowing in at the same time. Not only does the perceptibility of the object brought to the mind by the current change based on these other currents, but its quality does too. "Simultaneous[8] sensations modify each other" is a concise way of stating this principle. "We feel all things in relation to each other" is Wundt's more abstract definition of this general 'law of relativity,' which has been popular in psychology since Hobbes's time. Much has been made of it, but while we are certainly unaware of the deeper processes involved, there seems to be no reason to doubt that they are physiological and come from the interference of one current with another. A current that is interfered with might naturally lead to a modified sensation.
Examples of the modification in question are easy to find.[9] Notes make each other sweeter in a chord, and so do colors when harmoniously combined. A certain amount of skin dipped in hot water gives the perception of a certain heat. More skin immersed makes the heat much more intense, although of course the water's heat is the same. Similarly there is a chromatic minimum of size in objects. The image they cast on the retina must needs excite a sufficient number of fibres, or it will give no sensation of color at all. Weber observed that a thaler laid on the skin of the forehead feels heavier when cold than when warm. Urbantschitsch has found that all our sense-organs influence each other's sensations. The hue of patches of color so distant as not to be recognized was immediately, in his patients, perceived when a tuning-fork was sounded close to the ear. Letters too far off to be read could be read{26} when the tuning-fork was heard, etc., etc. The most familiar examples of this sort of thing seem to be the increase of pain by noise or light, and the increase of nausea by all concomitant sensations.
Examples of the modification in question are easy to find.[9] Notes enhance each other in a chord, and so do colors when combined harmoniously. A certain amount of skin in hot water gives a sensation of heat. More skin immersed makes the heat feel much more intense, even though the water's temperature is the same. Similarly, there is a chromatic minimum of size in objects. The image they create on the retina must stimulate a sufficient number of fibers, or it won't produce any sensation of color at all. Weber noticed that a thaler placed on the skin of the forehead feels heavier when cold than when warm. Urbantschitsch discovered that all our sense organs affect each other's sensations. The color of patches that are too far away to be recognized was immediately perceived by his patients when a tuning fork was sounded near their ear. Letters that were too distant to be read became legible{26} when the tuning fork was heard, etc., etc. The most familiar examples of this phenomenon include the increase of pain due to noise or light and the increase of nausea from accompanying sensations.
Effects of Contrast.—The best-known examples of the way in which one nerve-current modifies another are the phenomena of what is known as 'simultaneous color-contrast.' Take a number of sheets of brightly and differently colored papers, lay on each of them a bit of one and the same kind of gray paper, then cover each sheet with some transparent white paper, which softens the look of both the gray paper and the colored ground. The gray patch will appear in each case tinged by the color complementary to the ground; and so different will the several pieces appear that no observer, before raising the transparent paper, will believe them all cut out of the same gray. Helmholtz has interpreted these results as being due to a false application of an inveterate habit—that, namely, of making allowance for the color of the medium through which things are seen. The same thing, in the blue light of a clear sky, in the reddish-yellow light of a candle, in the dark brown light of a polished mahogany table which may reflect its image, is always judged of its own proper color, which the mind adds out of its own knowledge to the appearance, thereby correcting the falsifying medium. In the cases of the papers, according to Helmholtz, the mind believes the color of the ground, subdued by the transparent paper, to be faintly spread over the gray patch. But a patch to look gray through such a colored film would have really to be of the complementary color to the film. Therefore it is of the complementary color, we think, and proceed to see it of that color.
Effects of Contrast.—The best-known examples of how one nerve current influences another are the phenomena known as 'simultaneous color-contrast.' Take several sheets of brightly colored paper, place a piece of the same gray paper on each sheet, and then cover each one with a transparent white sheet, which softens the appearance of both the gray paper and the colored background. The gray patch will seem to be tinted by the color complementary to the background, and the different pieces will look so distinct that no observer, before lifting the transparent paper, will believe they are all cut from the same gray. Helmholtz interpreted these results as a misapplication of a long-held habit: namely, adjusting for the color of the medium through which we view things. The same thing, in the blue light of a clear sky, the reddish-yellow light of a candle, or the dark brown light of a polished mahogany table reflecting its image, is always perceived in its true color, which the mind adds based on its own knowledge to correct the misleading medium. In the case of the papers, according to Helmholtz, the mind assumes the subdued background color, filtered by the transparent paper, is faintly cast over the gray patch. However, for a patch to appear gray through such a colored film, it would actually need to be of the complementary color to the film. Therefore, we think it is of the complementary color, and we proceed to see it that way.
This theory has been shown to be untenable by Hering. The discussion of the facts is too minute for recapitulation here, but suffice it to say that it proves the phenomenon to be physiological—a case of the way in which, when sensory nerve-currents run in together, the effect of each on{27} consciousness is different from that which it would be if they ran in separately.
This theory has been proven to be unsustainable by Hering. The details of the discussion are too intricate to summarize here, but it’s enough to say that it demonstrates the phenomenon to be physiological—a situation where, when sensory nerve signals operate together, the impact of each on{27} consciousness is different from what it would be if they operated separately.
'Successive contrast' differs from the simultaneous variety, and is supposed to be due to fatigue. The facts will be noticed under the head of 'after-images,' in the section on Vision. It must be borne in mind, however, that after-images from previous sensations may coexist with present sensations, and the two may modify each other just as coexisting sensational processes do.
Successive contrast is different from the simultaneous variety and is thought to result from fatigue. The details will be discussed under the topic of 'after-images' in the section on Vision. It's important to remember that after-images from previous sensations can coexist with current sensations, and both can influence each other just like overlapping sensory processes do.
CHAPTER III.
SIGHT.
The Eye's Structure is described in all the books on anatomy. I will only mention the few points which concern the psychologist.[10] It is a flattish sphere formed by a tough{29}
The Eye's Structure is discussed in all anatomy textbooks. I'll just highlight a few points that are relevant to psychologists.[10] It is a somewhat flattened sphere made up of a tough{29}

Fig. 5.—Diagram of retinal fibers, based on Küss. Nop. optic nerve; S, sclera; Ch, choroid; R, retina; P, papilla (blind spot); F, fovea.
The retina is what corresponds to this plate. The optic nerve pierces the sclerotic shell and spreads its fibres radially in every direction over its inside, forming a thin translucent film (see Fig. 3, Ret.). The fibres pass into a complicated apparatus of cells, granules, and branches (Fig. 4), and finally end in the so-called rods and cones (Fig. 4,—9), which are the specific organs for taking up the influence of the waves of light. Strange to say, these end-organs are not pointed forward towards the light as it streams through the pupil, but backwards towards the sclerotic membrane itself, so that the light-waves traverse the translucent nerve-fibres, and the cellular and granular layers of the retina, before they touch the rods and cones themselves. (See Fig. 5.){31}
The retina corresponds to this plate. The optic nerve penetrates the sclerotic shell and spreads its fibers out radially in every direction over its interior, forming a thin translucent layer (see Fig. 3, Ret.). The fibers connect to a complex arrangement of cells, granules, and branches (Fig. 4), and ultimately terminate in the so-called rods and cones (Fig. 4,—9), which are the specialized structures for receiving the impact of light waves. Interestingly, these end-organs are not facing forward toward the light as it enters through the pupil but are turned backward toward the sclerotic membrane itself. This means that the light waves pass through the translucent nerve fibers and the cellular and granular layers of the retina before reaching the rods and cones directly. (See Fig. 5.){31}
The Blind Spot.—The optic nerve-fibres must thus be unimpressible by light directly. The place where the nerve enters is in fact entirely blind, because nothing but fibres exist there, the other layers of the retina only beginning round about the entrance. Nothing is easier than to prove the existence of this blind spot. Close the right eye and look steadily with the left at the cross in Fig. 6, holding the book vertically in front of the face, and moving it to and fro. It will be found that at about a foot off the black disk disappears; but when the page is nearer or farther, it is seen. During the experiment the gaze must be kept fixed on the cross. It is easy to show by measurement that this blind spot lies where the optic nerve enters.
The Blind Spot.—The optic nerve fibers can't be directly affected by light. The spot where the nerve enters the eye is completely blind, because only fibers are there, with the other layers of the retina starting a bit further away. Proving the existence of this blind spot is simple. Close your right eye and focus your left eye on the cross in Fig. 6, holding the book vertically in front of your face and moving it back and forth. You'll notice that the black dot disappears when it's about a foot away; but when the page is closer or farther away, you can see it. Throughout the experiment, keep your gaze fixed on the cross. It's easy to measure and confirm that this blind spot is where the optic nerve enters.
The Fovea.—Outside of the blind spot the sensibility of the retina varies. It is greatest at the fovea, a little pit lying outwardly from the entrance of the optic nerve, and round which the radiating nerve-fibres bend without passing over it. The other layers also disappear at the fovea, leaving the cones alone to represent the retina there. The sensibility of the retina grows progressively less towards its periphery, by means of which neither colors, shapes, nor number of impressions can be well discriminated.
The Fovea.—Outside of the blind spot, the sensitivity of the retina varies. It is highest at the fovea, a small pit located just outward from the entrance of the optic nerve, around which the radiating nerve fibers bend without covering it. The other layers also vanish at the fovea, leaving only the cones to represent the retina in that area. The sensitivity of the retina gradually decreases toward its edges, making it difficult to distinguish colors, shapes, or the number of impressions.
In the normal use of our two eyes, the eyeballs are rotated so as to cause the two images of any object which catches the attention to fall on the two foveæ, as the spots of acutest vision. This happens involuntarily, as any one may observe. In fact, it is almost impossible not to 'turn the eyes,' the moment any peripherally lying object does catch our attention, the turning of the eyes being only{32} another name for such rotation of the eyeballs as will bring the foveæ under the object's image.
When we normally use our two eyes, the eyeballs move to make sure that the images of any interesting object fall on the two foveas, which are the spots of sharpest vision. This happens automatically, as anyone can see. In fact, it's nearly impossible not to "turn the eyes" the moment something on the edge of our vision grabs our attention; turning our eyes is just another way of describing the rotation of the eyeballs that aligns the foveas with the image of the object.
Accommodation.—The focussing or sharpening of the image is performed by a special apparatus. In every camera, the farther the object is from the eye the farther forward, and the nearer the object is to the eye the farther backward, is its image thrown. In photographers' cameras the back is made to slide, and can be drawn away from the lens when the object that casts the picture is near, and pushed forward when it is far. The picture is thus kept always sharp. But no such change of length is possible in the eyeball; and the same result is reached in another way. The lens, namely, grows more convex when a near object is looked at, and flatter when the object recedes. This change is due to the antagonism of the circular 'ligament' in which the lens is suspended, and the 'ciliary muscle.' The ligament, when the ciliary muscle is at rest, assumes such a spread-out shape as to keep the lens rather flat. But the lens is highly elastic; and it springs into the more convex form which is natural to it whenever the ciliary muscle, by contracting, causes the ligament to relax its pressure. The contraction of the muscle, by thus rendering the lens more refractive, adapts the eye for near objects ('accommodates' it for them, as we say); and its relaxation, by rendering the lens less refractive, adapts the eye for distant vision. Accommodation for the near is thus{33} the more active change, since it involves contraction of the ciliary muscle. When we look far off, we simply let our eyes go passive. We feel this difference in the effort when we compare the two sensations of change.
Accommodation.—The focusing or sharpening of the image is done by a special mechanism. In every camera, the farther away the object is from the lens, the further forward the image is projected, and the closer the object is, the further back the image is pushed. In photographers’ cameras, the back can slide, allowing it to be pulled away from the lens when the object is close, and pushed forward when it is far away. This keeps the image sharp at all times. In the eye, however, such changes in length are not possible; it achieves the same result in a different way. The lens becomes more curved when looking at something close and flatter when looking at something far away. This change is due to the opposition between the circular 'ligament' that holds the lens and the 'ciliary muscle.' When the ciliary muscle is relaxed, the ligament spreads out to keep the lens relatively flat. But the lens is very elastic; it springs into its more curved shape anytime the ciliary muscle contracts and relieves pressure on the ligament. This muscle contraction makes the lens more refractive, allowing the eye to focus on near objects (we say it 'accommodates' for them); and when the muscle relaxes, the lens becomes less refractive, making it suitable for distant vision. Accommodating for close objects is thus{33} the more active change, as it requires the contraction of the ciliary muscle. When we look far away, we simply let our eyes relax. We can sense this difference in effort when we compare the two feelings of change.
Convergence accompanies accommodation. The two eyes act as one organ; that is, when an object catches the attention, both eyeballs turn so that its images may fall on the foveæ. When the object is near, this naturally requires them to turn inwards, or converge; and as accommodation then also occurs, the two movements of convergence and accommodation form a naturally associated couple, of which it is difficult to execute either singly. Contraction of the pupil also accompanies the accommodative act. When we come to stereoscopic vision, it will appear that by much practice one can learn to converge with relaxed accommodation, and to accommodate with parallel axes of vision. These are accomplishments which the student of psychological optics will find most useful.
Convergence goes hand in hand with accommodation. The two eyes work together as a single unit; when something grabs our attention, both eyes move so that the images fall on the fovea. When the object is close, they naturally turn inward, or converge; and since accommodation happens at the same time, these two movements of convergence and accommodation are closely linked, making it challenging to perform either one separately. The contraction of the pupil also happens during accommodation. When it comes to stereoscopic vision, it becomes clear that with enough practice, one can learn to converge while keeping accommodation relaxed, and to accommodate while maintaining parallel lines of sight. These skills will be very helpful for anyone studying psychological optics.
Single Vision by the two Retinæ.—We hear single with two ears, and smell single with two nostrils, and we also see single with two eyes. The difference is that we also can see double under certain conditions, whereas under no conditions can we hear or smell double. The main conditions of single vision can be simply expressed.
Single Vision by the two Retinæ.—We hear as one with two ears, and smell as one with two nostrils, and we also see as one with two eyes. The difference is that we can also see double in certain situations, whereas we can never hear or smell double. The main factors that contribute to single vision can be simply explained.
In the first place, impressions on the two foveæ always appear in the same place. By no artifice can they be made to appear alongside of each other. The result is that one object, casting its images on the foveæ of the two converging eyeballs will necessarily always appear as what it is, namely, one object. Furthermore, if the eyeballs, instead of converging, are kept parallel, and two similar objects, one in front of each, cast their respective images on the foveæ, the two will also appear as one, or (in common parlance) 'their images will fuse.' To verify this, let the reader stare fixedly before him as if through the paper at infinite distance, with the black spots in Fig. 8 in front of his respective eyes. He{34} will then see the two black spots swim together, as it were, and combine into one, which appears situated between their original two positions and as if opposite the root of his nose. This combined spot is the result of the spots opposite both eyes being seen in the same place. But in addition to the combined spot, each eye sees also the spot opposite the other eye. To the right eye this appears to the left of the combined spot, to the left eye it appears to the right of it; so that what is seen is three spots, of which the middle one is seen by both eyes, and is flanked by two others, each seen by one. That such are the facts can be tested by interposing some small opaque object so as to cut off the vision of either of the spots in the figure from the other eye. A vertical partition in the median plane, going from the paper to the nose, will effectually confine each eye's vision to the spot in front of it, and then the single combined spot will be all that appears.[11]
First, the images that focus on the two foveae always show up in the same spot. No trick can make them appear next to each other. As a result, one object that casts its images on the foveae of the two converging eyes will always seem like one object. Moreover, if the eyes are kept parallel instead of converging, and two similar objects are in front of each eye, the two will also seem like one, or as people commonly say, "their images will fuse." To check this, you can look straight ahead as if you're staring at something far away, with the black spots in Fig. 8 in front of your eyes. You’ll see the two black spots merge together, appearing as one spot located between their original positions, as if it’s in front of your nose. This combined spot results from both eyes seeing the spots in the same location. Additionally, each eye also sees the spot that corresponds to the other eye. For the right eye, this appears to the left of the combined spot, while for the left eye, it appears to the right; hence, you see three spots: the middle one is viewed by both eyes, flanked by two others, each seen by only one eye. You can confirm this by placing a small opaque object to block the view of either spot from the other eye. A vertical barrier right down the middle, extending from the paper to the nose, will limit each eye's view to the spot directly in front of it, making the single combined spot the only thing visible.
If, instead of two identical spots, we use two different figures, or two differently colored spots, as objects for the two foveæ to look at, they still are seen in the same place; but since they cannot appear as a single object, they appear there alternately displacing each other from the view. This is the phenomenon called retinal rivalry.
If we use two different shapes or two differently colored spots for the two foveas to focus on instead of two identical spots, they still appear in the same place; however, since they can’t look like one single object, they show up alternately, taking turns disappearing from view. This is known as retinal rivalry.
As regards the parts of the retinæ round about the foveæ, a similar correspondence obtains. Any impression on the{35} upper half of either retina makes us see an object as below, on the lower half as above, the horizon; and on the right half of either retina, an impression makes us see an object to the left, on the left half one to the right, of the median line. Thus each quadrant of one retina corresponds as a whole to the geometrically similar quadrant of the other; and within two similar quadrants, al and ar for example, there should, if the correspondence were carried out in detail, be geometrically similar points which, if impressed at the same time by light emitted from the same object, should cause that object to appear in the same direction to either eye. Experiment verifies this surmise. If we look at the starry vault with parallel eyes, the stars all seem single; and the laws of perspective show that under the circumstances the parallel light-rays coming from each star must impinge on points within either retina which are geometrically similar to each other. Similarly, a pair of spectacles held an inch or so from the eyes seem like one large median glass. Or we may make an experiment like that with the spots. If we take two exactly similar pictures, no larger than those on an ordinary stereoscopic slide, and if we look at one with each eye (a median partition confining the view) we shall see but one flat picture, all of whose parts appear single. 'Identical retinal points' being impressed, both eyes see their object in the same direction, and the two objects consequently coalesce into one.
Regarding the areas of the retinas around the foveas, a similar relationship exists. Any impression on the{35} upper half of either retina makes us perceive an object as being below, while one on the lower half makes it appear above the horizon; and an impression in the right half of either retina makes us see an object to the left, and one in the left half makes us see it to the right of the median line. Thus, each quadrant of one retina corresponds as a whole to the geometrically similar quadrant of the other; and within two similar quadrants, al and ar for example, there should be, if the correspondence is detailed, geometrically similar points which, if activated simultaneously by light from the same object, would cause that object to appear in the same direction to either eye. Experiments confirm this idea. If we look at the starry sky with our eyes parallel, the stars all seem to be single; and the laws of perspective demonstrate that in this scenario, the parallel light rays coming from each star must hit points within each retina that are geometrically similar to each other. Similarly, a pair of glasses held an inch or so from the eyes looks like one large median lens. Or we can conduct an experiment similar to the one with the spots. If we take two exactly identical pictures, no bigger than those on a typical stereoscopic slide, and if we look at one with each eye (with a partition limiting the view) we will see only one flat picture, all of whose parts appear single. 'Identical retinal points' being activated, both eyes see their object in the same direction, causing the two objects to merge into one.
Here again retinal rivalry occurs if the pictures differ. And it must be noted that when the experiment is performed{36} for the first time the combined picture is always far from sharp. This is due to the difficulty mentioned on p. 33, of accommodating for anything as near as the surface of the paper, whilst at the same time the convergence is relaxed so that each eye sees the picture in front of itself.
Here again, retinal rivalry happens if the images are different. It’s important to point out that when the experiment is done{36} for the first time, the combined image is usually quite blurry. This is because of the challenge mentioned on p. 33, of adjusting for something as close as the surface of the paper, while at the same time, the convergence is eased so that each eye sees the image in front of it.
Double Images.—Now it is an immediate consequence of the law of identical location of images falling on geometrically similar points that images which fall upon geometrically DISPARATE points of the two retinæ should be seen in DISPARATE directions, and that their objects should consequently appear in TWO places, or LOOK DOUBLE. Take the parallel rays from a star falling upon two eyes which converge upon a near object, O, instead of being parallel as in the previously instanced case. The two foveæ will receive the images of O, which therefore will look single. If then SL and SR in Fig. 10 be the parallel rays, each of them will fall upon the nasal half of the retina{37} which it strikes. But the two nasal halves are disparate, geometrically symmetrical, not geometrically similar. The star's image on the left eye will therefore appear as if lying to the left of O; its image on the right eye will appear to the right of this point. The star will, in short, be seen double—'homonymously' double.
Double Images.—Now, it's a direct result of the law of identical location of images falling on geometrically similar points that images falling on geometrically DISPARATE points of the two retinas should be seen in DISPARATE directions, which means their objects should appear in TWO places, or LOOK DOUBLE. Take the parallel rays from a star falling on two eyes that converge on a nearby object, O, instead of being parallel as in the earlier example. The two foveas will receive the images of O, so it will look single. If SL and SR in Fig. 10 represent the parallel rays, each will hit the nasal half of the retina{37} that it strikes. However, the two nasal halves are disparate, geometrically symmetrical, but not geometrically similar. Therefore, the star's image in the left eye will appear as if it's to the left of O; its image in the right eye will appear to the right of this point. In short, the star will be seen double—'homonymously' double.
Conversely, if the star be looked at directly with parallel axes, any near object like O will be seen double, because its images will affect the outer or cheek halves of the two retinæ, instead of one outer and one nasal half. The position of the images will here be reversed from that of the previous case. The right eye's image will now appear to the left, the left eye's to the right; the double images will be 'heteronymous.'
Conversely, if you look at the star directly with parallel axes, any nearby object like O will appear doubled because its images will hit the outer or cheek sides of both retinas, instead of one outer and one inner side. The position of the images will be opposite to what was seen in the previous case. The image in the right eye will now look like it’s on the left, and the image in the left eye will look like it’s on the right; the double images will be 'heteronymous.'
The same reasoning and the same result ought to apply where the object's place with respect to the direction of the two optic axes is such as to make its images fall not on non-similar retinal halves, but on non-similar parts of similar halves. Here, of course, the positions seen will be less widely disparate than in the other case, and the double images will appear to lie less widely apart.
The same reasoning and the same result should apply when the object's position in relation to the direction of the two optic axes causes its images to fall on non-similar parts of similar halves of the retina, instead of on non-similar retinal halves. In this case, the positions that are seen will be less different than in the other situation, and the double images will appear to be closer together.
Careful experiments made by many observers according to the so-called haploscopic method confirm this law, and show that corresponding points, of single visual direction, exist upon the two retinæ. For the detail of these one must consult the special treatises.
Careful experiments conducted by many observers using the haploscopic method support this law and demonstrate that corresponding points, of single visual direction, exist on the two retinas. For details, one must refer to the specialized studies.
Vision of Solidity.—This description of binocular vision follows what is called the theory of identical points. On the whole it formulates the facts correctly. The only odd thing is that we should be so little troubled by the innumerable double images which objects nearer and farther than the point looked at must be constantly producing. The answer to this is that we have trained ourselves to habits of inattention in regard to double images. So far as things interest us we turn our foveæ upon them, and they are necessarily seen single; so that if an object impresses disparate points, that may be taken as proof that it is so{38} unimportant for us that we needn't notice whether it appears in one place or in two. By long practice one may acquire great expertness in detecting double images, though, as some one says, it is an art which is not to be learned completely either in one year or in two.
Vision of Solidity.—This explanation of binocular vision follows what’s known as the theory of identical points. Overall, it captures the facts accurately. The only strange thing is that we are not much bothered by the countless double images that objects closer and further away from the point of focus must be constantly creating. The reason for this is that we have conditioned ourselves to be inattentive to double images. As long as something piques our interest, we direct our foveae at it, and it is necessarily perceived as a single image; thus, if an object affects different points in our vision, that suggests it is so{38} unimportant to us that we don't need to care if it appears in one spot or two. With practice, one can become quite skilled at spotting double images, although, as someone once said, it’s a skill that can't be mastered completely in just one or two years.
Where the disparity of the images is but slight it is almost impossible to see them as if double. They give rather the perception of a solid object being there. To fix our ideas, take Fig. 11. Suppose we look at the dots in the middle of the lines a and b just as we looked at the spots in Fig. 8. We shall get the same result—i.e., they will coalesce in the median line. But the entire lines will not coalesce, for, owing to their inclination, their tops fall on the temporal, and their bottoms on the nasal, retinal halves. What we see will be two lines crossed in the middle, thus (Fig. 12):
Where the difference between the images is minimal, it’s almost impossible to see them as duplicates. Instead, they create the impression of a solid object being present. To clarify this, consider Fig. 11.. If we look at the dots in the middle of the lines a and b, just like we did with the spots in Fig. 8., we’ll get the same outcome—meaning they will merge at the median line. However, the entire lines won’t merge because, due to their angle, their tops align with the outer sections of the retina, and their bottoms align with the inner sections. What we see will be two lines intersecting in the middle, like this (Fig. 12):
The moment we attend to the tops of these lines, however, our foveæ tend to abandon the dots and to move upwards, and in doing so, to converge somewhat, following the lines, which then appear coalescing at the top as in Fig. 13.
The moment we focus on the tops of these lines, our foveae tend to ignore the dots and move upwards, converging slightly as they follow the lines. This makes the lines appear to come together at the top, just like in Fig. 13.
If we think of the bottom, the eyes descend and diverge, and what we see is Fig. 14.
If we consider the bottom, our eyes lower and spread apart, and what we see is Fig. 14.
Running our eyes up and down the lines makes them converge and diverge just as they would were they running{39} up and down some single line whose top was nearer to us than its bottom. Now, if the inclination of the lines be moderate, we may not see them double at all, but single throughout their length, when we look at the dots. Under these conditions their top does look nearer than their bottom—in other words, we see them stereoscopically; and we see them so even when our eyes are rigorously motionless. In other words, the slight disparity in the bottom-ends which would draw the foveæ divergently apart makes us see those ends farther, the slight disparity in the top ends which would draw them convergently together makes us see these ends nearer, than the point at which we look. The disparities, in short, affect our perception as the actual movements would.[12]
Moving our eyes up and down the lines makes them appear to come together or spread apart, just like they would if they were going up and down a single line that is closer to us at the top than at the bottom. If the angle of the lines is moderate, we might not see them as double at all, but as single throughout their length when we focus on the dots. In this case, the top appears closer than the bottom—in other words, we perceive them in a three-dimensional way; and we can see this even when our eyes are completely still. This means that the slight difference at the bottoms that would push our focus apart makes us perceive those ends as farther away, while the slight difference at the tops that would pull our focus together makes us see these ends as closer than the point we are looking at. In short, these differences affect our perception just like actual movements would.{39}
The Perception of Distance.—When we look about us at things, our eyes are incessantly moving, converging, diverging, accommodating, relaxing, and sweeping over the field. The field appears extended in three dimensions, with some of its parts more distant and some more near.
The Perception of Distance.—When we look around at things, our eyes are constantly moving, focusing, unfocusing, adjusting, relaxing, and scanning the area. The space seems to stretch out in three dimensions, with some parts appearing farther away and others closer.
"With one eye our perception of distance is very imperfect, as illustrated by the common trick of holding a ring suspended by a string in front of a person's face, and telling him to shut one eye and pass a rod from one side through the ring. If a penholder be held erect before one eye, while the other is closed, and an attempt be made to touch it with a finger moved across towards it, an error will nearly always be made. In such cases we get the only clue from the amount of effort needed to 'accommodate' the eye to see the object distinctly. When we use both eyes our perception of distance is much better; when we look at an object with two eyes the visual axes are converged on it, and the nearer the object the greater the convergence. We have a pretty accurate knowledge of the degree of muscular effort required to converge the eyes on all tolerably near points. When objects are{40} farther off, their apparent size, and the modifications their retinal images experience by aërial perspective, come in to help. The relative distance of objects is easiest determined by moving the eyes; all stationary objects then appear displaced in the opposite direction (as for example when we look out of the window of a railway car) and those nearest most rapidly; from the different apparent rates of movement we can tell which are farther and which nearer."[13]
"With just one eye, our sense of distance is pretty limited. This is shown by the common trick of holding a ring on a string in front of someone's face and asking them to close one eye and try to pass a stick through it. If someone holds a pen in front of one eye while the other is closed and then tries to touch it with their finger, they'll almost always miss. In these situations, the only clue we have is the effort it takes to adjust our eye to see the object clearly. When we use both eyes, our depth perception improves significantly. Looking at an object with both eyes means the visual lines are focused on it, and the closer the object, the more they converge. We have a pretty good sense of how much effort our muscles need to put in to focus on objects that are fairly close. For objects that are farther away, their apparent size and the changes their images undergo due to atmospheric perspective help us out. We can most easily judge how far away things are by moving our eyes; all stationary objects then seem to shift in the opposite direction (like when we look out of a train window), with the ones closest moving the most. By observing the different speeds of movement, we can figure out which objects are farther away and which are closer."
Subjectively considered, distance is an altogether peculiar content of consciousness. Convergence, accommodation, binocular disparity, size, degree of brightness, parallax, etc., all give us special feelings which are signs of the distance feeling, but not it. They simply suggest it to us. The best way to get it strongly is to go upon some hill-top and invert one's head. The horizon then looks very distant, and draws near as the head erects itself again.
Subjectively speaking, distance is a really unique part of our awareness. Things like convergence, accommodation, binocular disparity, size, brightness, and parallax produce specific sensations that are indicators of our sense of distance, but they aren't the feeling itself. They just hint at it. The most effective way to really feel it is to go up on a hilltop and tip your head upside down. The horizon seems very far away and appears to come closer as you lift your head back up.
The Perception of Size.—"The dimensions of the retinal image determine primarily the sensations on which conclusions as to size are based; and the larger the visual angle the larger the retinal image: since the visual angle depends on the distance of an object, the correct perception of size depends largely upon a correct perception of distance; having formed a judgment, conscious or unconscious, as to that, we conclude as to size from the extent of the retinal region affected. Most people have been surprised now and then to find that what appeared a large bird in the clouds was only a small insect close to the eye; the large apparent size being due to the previous incorrect judgment as to the distance of the object. The presence of an object of tolerably well-known height, as a man, also assists in forming conceptions (by comparison) as to size; artists for this purpose frequently introduce human figures to assist in giving an idea of the size of other objects represented."[14]
The Perception of Size.—"The size of the image on the retina mainly determines the sensations that lead to conclusions about size; the larger the visual angle, the larger the retinal image. Since the visual angle is influenced by how far away an object is, accurately perceiving size relies heavily on accurately judging distance. Once we make a conscious or unconscious judgment about that, we deduce size based on how much of the retinal area is affected. Many people have been surprised to discover that what looked like a large bird in the clouds was actually just a small insect nearby; the apparent large size was due to an earlier incorrect judgment about the object's distance. The presence of an object with a reasonably known height, like a person, also helps in forming size concepts through comparison; artists often include human figures to give a sense of the size of other objects they depict."[14]
Sensations of Color.—The system of colors is a very complex thing. If one take any color, say green, one can pass{41} away from it in more than one direction, through a series of greens more and more yellowish, let us say, towards yellow, or through another series more and more bluish towards blue. The result would be that if we seek to plot out on paper the various distinguishable tints, the arrangement cannot be that of a line, but has to cover a surface. With the tints arranged on a surface we can pass from any one of them to any other by various lines of gradually changing intermediaries. Such an arrangement is represented in Fig. 15. It is a merely classificatory diagram based on degrees of difference simply felt, and has no physical significance. Black is a color, but does not figure on the plane of the diagram. We cannot place it anywhere alongside of the other colors because we need both to represent the straight gradation from untinted white to black, and that from each pure color towards black as well as towards white. The best way is to put black into the third dimension, beneath the paper, e.g., as is shown perspectively in Fig. 16, then all the transitions can be schematically shown. One can pass straight from black to white, or one can pass round by way of olive, green, and pale green; or one can change from dark blue to yellow through green, or by way of sky-blue, white and straw color; etc., etc. In any case the changes are continuous; and the color system thus forms what Wundt calls a tri-dimensional continuum.
Sensations of Color.—The system of colors is really complex. If you take any color, like green, you can transition away from it in multiple directions, through a range of greens that become yellower as you move toward yellow, or through another range that becomes bluer as you approach blue. The result is that if we try to represent the different shades on paper, the arrangement won’t be in a line, but will cover a surface. With the shades arranged on a surface, you can move from one to another using various paths of gradually changing shades. This arrangement is shown in Fig. 15.. It's just a classification diagram based on degrees of differences we can feel, and doesn't have any physical meaning. Black is a color, but it doesn’t appear on the plane of the diagram. We can’t place it next to the other colors because we need to show both the direct transition from pure white to black, and that from each pure color toward black as well as toward white. The best way to represent black is to place it in the third dimension, beneath the paper, e.g., as is perspective shown in Fig. 16, so all transitions can be illustrated schematically. You can move directly from black to white, or you can go around via olive, green, and pale green; or transition from dark blue to yellow through green, or through sky-blue, white, and straw color; etc., etc. In any case, the changes are continuous; and the color system thus forms what Wundt refers to as a three-dimensional continuum.
Color-mixture.—Physiologically considered, the colors have this peculiarity, that many pairs of them, when they impress the retina together, produce the sensation of white. The colors which do this are called complementaries. Such are spectral red and green-blue, spectral yellow and indigo-blue. Green and purple, again, are complementaries. All{42} the spectral colors added together also make white light, such as we daily experience in the sunshine. Furthermore, both homogeneous ether-waves and heterogeneous ones may make us feel the same color, when they fall on our retina. Thus yellow, which is a simple spectral color, is also felt when green light is added to red; blue is felt when violet and green lights are mixed. Purple, which is not a spectral color at all, results when the waves either of red and of violet or those of blue and of orange are superposed.[15]
Color Mixing.—From a physiological perspective, colors have this interesting feature: many pairs of them, when they hit the retina at the same time, create the sensation of white. The colors that do this are called complementaries. Examples include spectral red and green-blue, as well as spectral yellow and indigo-blue. Green and purple are also complementaries. All{42} of the spectral colors combined together also produce white light, like what we experience every day in sunlight. Additionally, both homogeneous and heterogeneous ether waves can make us perceive the same color when they strike our retina. For instance, yellow, which is a simple spectral color, can also be perceived when green light is mixed with red; blue can be perceived when violet and green lights are combined. Purple, which isn’t a spectral color at all, occurs when the waves of red and violet or those of blue and orange are layered on top of each other.[15]
From all this it follows that there is no particular congruence between our system of color-sensations and the physical stimuli which excite them. Each color-feeling is a 'specific energy' (p. 11) which many different physical causes may arouse. Helmholtz, Hering, and others have sought to simplify the tangle of the facts, by physiological hypotheses which, differing much in detail, agree in principle, since they all postulate a limited number of elementary retinal processes to which, when excited singly,{43} certain 'fundamental' colors severally correspond. When excited in combination, as they may be by the most various physical stimuli, other colors, called 'secondary,' are felt. The secondary color-sensations are often spoken of as if they were compounded of the primary sensations. This is a great mistake. The sensations as such are not compounded—yellow, for example, a secondary on Helmholtz's theory, is as unique a quality of feeling as the primaries red and green, which are said to 'compose' it. What are compounded are merely the elementary retinal processes. These, according to their combination, produce diverse results on the brain, and thence the secondary colors result immediately in consciousness. The 'color-theories' are thus physiological, not psychological, hypotheses, and for more information concerning them the reader must consult the physiological books.
From all this, it follows that there’s no specific match between our color sensations and the physical stimuli that trigger them. Each color feeling is a 'specific energy' (p. 11) that can be sparked by many different physical causes. Helmholtz, Hering, and others have tried to simplify the complexity of the facts with physiological hypotheses that, while varying in detail, agree in principle. They all assume a limited number of basic retinal processes that correspond to certain 'fundamental' colors when excited individually.{43} When these processes are excited in combination, as they can be by various physical stimuli, we experience other colors called 'secondary.' People often discuss secondary color sensations as if they are made up of primary sensations. This is a significant misunderstanding. The sensations themselves aren't combined—yellow, for instance, a secondary color in Helmholtz's theory, is as distinct a quality as the primary colors red and green, which are said to 'compose' it. What’s actually compounded are the elementary retinal processes. Depending on how these processes combine, they produce different effects on the brain, leading to the immediate experience of secondary colors in consciousness. Therefore, the 'color theories' are physiological, not psychological, hypotheses, and for more information, readers should refer to physiological texts.
The Duration of Luminous Sensations.—"This is greater than that of the stimulus, a fact taken advantage of in making fireworks: an ascending rocket produces the sensation of a trail of light extending far behind the position of the bright part of the rocket itself at the moment, because the sensation aroused by it in a lower part of its course still persists. So, shooting stars appear to have luminous tails behind them. By rotating rapidly before the eye a disk with alternate white and black sectors we get for each point of the retina alternate stimulation (due to the passage of white sector) and rest (when a black sector is passing). If the rotation be rapid enough the sensation aroused is that of a uniform gray, such as would be produced if the white and black were mixed and spread evenly over the disk. In each revolution the eye gets as{44} much light as if that were the case, and is unable to distinguish that this light is made up of separate portions reaching it at intervals: the stimulation due to each lasts until the next begins, and so all are fused together. If one turns out suddenly the gas in a room containing no other light, the image of the flame persists a short time after the flame itself is extinguished."[16] If we open our eyes instantaneously upon a scene, and then shroud them in complete darkness, it will be as if we saw the scene in ghostly light through the dark screen. We can read off details in it which were unnoticed whilst the eyes were open. This is the primary positive after-image, so-called. According to Helmholtz, one third of a second is the most favorable length of exposure to the light for producing it.
The Duration of Luminous Sensations.—"This lasts longer than the stimulus itself, which is a principle used in creating fireworks: an ascending rocket creates the illusion of a bright trail of light extending far behind the rocket's bright part at the moment because the sensation generated in a lower part of its flight continues. Similarly, shooting stars seem to have glowing tails behind them. When we spin a disk before our eyes that has alternating white and black sections, each point on the retina experiences alternating stimulation (from the white section) and rest (when the black section is passing). If the rotation is fast enough, the result is a consistent gray sensation, as if the white and black were blended evenly across the disk. With each complete turn, the eye receives as{44} much light as if this mixing had occurred, and it can't tell that this light comes in separate portions arriving at intervals: the stimulation from each portion lasts until the next one starts, causing them all to blend into one. If you suddenly turn off the gas in a completely dark room without any other light, the image of the flame will remain for a brief moment after the flame is out."[16] When we quickly open our eyes to view a scene and then close them tightly in darkness, it feels like we see the scene in a ghostly light through the dark veil. We can notice details we missed when our eyes were open. This is referred to as the primary positive after-image. According to Helmholtz, one third of a second is the optimal duration of exposure to light to create this effect.
Negative after-images are due to more complex conditions, in which fatigue of the retina is usually supposed to play the chief part.
Negative after-images are caused by more complex conditions, where fatigue of the retina is generally believed to be the main factor.
"The nervous visual apparatus is easily fatigued. Usually we do not observe this because its restoration is also rapid, and in ordinary life our eyes, when open, are never at rest; we move them to and fro, so that parts of the retina receive light alternately from brighter and darker objects, and are alternately excited and rested. How constant and habitual the movement of the eyes is can be readily observed by trying to 'fix' for a short time a small spot without deviating the glance; to do so for even a few seconds is impossible without practice. If any small object is steadily 'fixed' for twenty or thirty seconds, it will be found that the whole field of vision becomes grayish and obscure, because the parts of the retina receiving most light get fatigued, and arouse no more sensation than those less fatigued and stimulated by light from less illuminated objects. Or look steadily at a black object, say a blot on a white page, for twenty seconds, and then turn the eye on a white wall; the latter will seem dark gray, with a white patch on it; an effect due to the greater excitability of the retinal parts previously rested by the black, when compared with the sensation aroused elsewhere by light from the white wall acting on the previously stimulated parts of the visual surface. All persons will recall many instances of such phenomena, which are especially noticeable soon after rising in the morning.{45} Similar things may be noticed with colors; after looking at a red patch the eye turned on a white wall sees a blue-green patch; the elements causing red sensations having been fatigued, the white mixed light from the wall now excites on that region of the retina only the other primary color sensations. The blending of colors so as to secure their greatest effect depends on this fact; red and green go well together because each rests the parts of the visual apparatus most excited by the other, and so each appears bright and vivid as the eye wanders to and fro; while red and orange together, each exciting and exhausting mainly the same visual elements, render dull, or in popular phrase 'kill,' one another.
The visual system gets tired easily. We typically don’t notice this because it recovers quickly, and in everyday life, our eyes are always moving when open; we shift them back and forth so that different areas of the retina receive light alternately from brighter and darker objects, allowing for alternating excitement and rest. You can see just how constant and habitual eye movement is by attempting to "fix" on a small spot for a brief moment without shifting your gaze; doing this for even a few seconds is nearly impossible without practice. If you focus on a small object for twenty or thirty seconds, you’ll notice that your entire field of vision becomes grayish and blurred because the parts of the retina that received the most light get fatigued, resulting in no more sensation than those less fatigued and stimulated by light from dimmer objects. For instance, if you fixate on a black object, like a blot on a white page, for twenty seconds and then shift your gaze to a white wall, the wall will appear dark gray with a white patch on it. This effect occurs because the retinal areas that were rested by the black object are now more responsive compared to those still stimulated by light from the white wall. Many people can recall similar experiences, especially soon after waking in the morning.{45} You can observe something similar with colors; after looking at a red patch, if you turn your gaze to a white wall, you might see a blue-green patch. This happens because the elements that respond to red have been fatigued, and now the white mixed light from the wall only excites the other primary color sensations in that area of the retina. The way colors blend to achieve their strongest effect is based on this principle; red and green look great together because they each allow the parts of the visual system that were most excited by the other to rest, making both appear bright and vivid as you look around. In contrast, combining red and orange, which both primarily excite and exhaust the same visual elements, results in a dulling effect, or as people often say, "kills" each other.
"If we fix steadily for thirty seconds a point between two white squares about 4 mm. (⅙ inch) apart on a large black sheet, and then close and cover our eyes, we get a negative after-image in which are seen two dark squares on a brighter surface; this surface is brighter close around the negative after-image of each square, and brightest of all between them. This luminous boundary is called the corona, and is explained usually as an effect of simultaneous contrast; the dark after-image of the square it is said makes us mentally err in judgment, and think the clear surface close to it brighter than elsewhere; and it is brightest between the two dark squares, just as a middle-sized man between two tall ones looks shorter than if alongside one only. If, however, the after-image be watched, it will often be noticed not only that the light band between the squares is intensely white, much more so than the normal idio-retinal light [see below], but, as the image fades away, often the two dark after-images of the squares disappear entirely with all of the corona, except that part between them which is still seen as a bright band on a uniform grayish field. Here there is no contrast to produce the error of judgment; and from this and other experiments Hering concludes that light acting on one part of the retina produces inverse changes in all the rest, and that this plays an important part in producing the phenomena of contrasts. Similar phenomena may be observed with colored objects; in their negative after-images each tint is represented by its complementary, as black is by white in colorless vision."[17]
"If we fix our gaze steadily for thirty seconds on a point between two white squares about 4 mm (⅙ inch) apart on a large black sheet, then close and cover our eyes, we experience a negative after-image where we see two dark squares on a brighter background. This background is brighter immediately around the negative after-image of each square and brightest of all between them. This bright edge is called the corona, usually explained as a result of simultaneous contrast; the dark after-image of the square tricks our mind into thinking the clear area next to it is brighter than in other places, and it appears brightest between the two dark squares, just like a medium-height person standing between two tall ones looks shorter than if they are next to just one. However, if we watch the after-image, we can notice that the light band between the squares is extremely white, much more so than the usual idio-retinal light [see below], and as the image fades, often the two dark after-images of the squares completely disappear along with all of the corona, except for the part in between which is still seen as a bright band against a uniform grayish backdrop. Here, there is no contrast to create the misjudgment; from this and other experiments, Hering concludes that light acting on one part of the retina causes opposite changes in the rest, playing a key role in creating contrast phenomena. Similar effects can be observed with colored objects; in their negative after-images, each color is shown by its complementary, just as black is represented by white in colorless vision."[17]
This is one of the facts referred to on p. 27 which have made Hering reject the psychological explanation of simultaneous contrast.
This is one of the facts mentioned on p. 27 that led Hering to dismiss the psychological explanation of simultaneous contrast.
The Intensity of Luminous Objects.—Black is an optical sensation. We have no black except in the field of view;{46} we do not, for instance, see black out of our stomach or out of the palm of our hand. Pure black is, however, only an 'abstract idea,' for the retina itself (even in complete objective darkness) seems to be always the seat of internal changes which give some luminous sensation. This is what is meant by the 'idio-retinal light,' spoken of a few lines back. It plays its part in the determination of all after-images with closed eyes. Any objective luminous stimulus, to be perceived, must be strong enough to give a sensible increment of sensation over and above the idio-retinal light. As the objective stimulus increases the perception is of an intenser luminosity; but the perception changes, as we saw on p. 18, more slowly than the stimulus. The latest numerical determinations, by König and Brodhun, were applied to six different colors and ran from an intensity arbitrarily called 1 to one which was 100,000 times as great. From intensity 2000 to 20,000 Weber's law held good; below and above this range discriminative sensibility declined. The relative increment discriminated here was the same for all colors of light, and lay (according to the tables) between 1 and 2 per cent of the stimulus. Previous observers have got different results.
The Intensity of Luminous Objects.—Black is an optical experience. We only perceive black within our field of vision;{46} we don't see black outside of our stomach or the palm of our hand. Pure black is, however, merely an 'abstract idea,' because the retina itself (even in complete darkness) seems to constantly undergo internal changes that create some light sensation. This is what was referred to as 'idio-retinal light' a few lines earlier. It influences how we experience all after-images when our eyes are closed. For any external light stimulus to be noticed, it must be strong enough to provide a noticeable increase in sensation beyond the idio-retinal light. As the external stimulus gets stronger, the perception of brightness increases; however, this perception changes, as we noted on p. 18, more slowly than the stimulus itself. The latest numerical measurements by König and Brodhun were conducted with six different colors and ranged from an intensity that was arbitrarily labeled 1 to one that was 100,000 times greater. Between intensities of 2000 and 20,000, Weber's law was valid; outside of this range, sensitivity to discrimination decreased. The relative change that could be discerned in this instance was the same for all colors of light, lying (according to the tables) between 1 and 2 percent of the stimulus. Previous researchers have reported varying results.
A certain amount of luminous intensity must exist in an object for its color to be discriminated at all. "In the dark all cats are gray." But the colors rapidly become distincter as the light increases, first the blues and last the reds and yellows, up to a certain point of intensity, when they grow indistinct again through the fact that each takes a turn towards white. At the highest bearable intensity of the light all colors are lost in the blinding white dazzle. This again is usually spoken of as a 'mixing' of the sensation white with the original color-sensation. It is no mixing of two sensations, but the replacement of one sensation by another, in consequence of a changed neural process.{47}
For you to see an object's color, it needs to reflect a certain amount of light. "In the dark, all cats look gray." However, as the light increases, the colors become more distinct, with blues appearing first, followed by reds and yellows, until reaching a point where they start to become less clear again as they approach white. At the brightest level of light that one can tolerate, all colors vanish into a blinding white glare. This is often described as a 'mixing' of the sensation of white with the original color sensation. But it's not a mixing of sensations; rather, it's one sensation being replaced by another due to a change in the way our brain processes signals.{47}
CHAPTER IV.
HEARING.[18]

Fig. 17.—Semidiagrammatic section through the right ear (Czermak). M, concha; G, external auditory meatus; T, tympanic membrane; P, tympanic cavity; o, oval foramen; r, round foramen; R, pharyngeal opening of Eustachian tube; V, vestibule; B, a semicircular canal; S, the cochlea; Vt, scala vestibuli; Pt, scala tympani; A, auditory nerve.
Fig. 17.—Diagrammatic section through the right ear (Czermak). M, concha; G, external ear canal; T, eardrum; P, ear cavity; o, oval window; r, round window; R, pharyngeal opening of Eustachian tube; V, vestibule; B, semicircular canal; S, cochlea; Vt, vestibular scala; Pt, tympanic scala; A, auditory nerve.
The Ear.—"The auditory organ in man consists of three portions, known respectively as the external ear, the middle ear or tympanum, and the internal ear or labyrinth; the latter contains the end-organs of the auditory nerve. The external ear consists of the expansion seen on the exterior of the head, called the concha, M, Fig. 17,{48} and a passage leading in from it, the external auditory meatus, G. This passage is closed at its inner end by the tympanic or drum membrane, T. It is lined by skin, through which numerous small glands, secreting the wax of the ear, open.
The Ear.—"The hearing organ in humans has three parts, known as the external ear, the middle ear or tympanum, and the internal ear or labyrinth; the last one contains the end-organs of the auditory nerve. The external ear includes the structure visible on the outside of the head, called the concha, M, Fig. 17,{48} and a passage leading in from it, the external auditory meatus, G. This passage is closed at its inner end by the tympanic or drum membrane, T. It is lined with skin, which has numerous small glands that secrete the wax of the ear."

Fig. 18.—Mcp, Mc, Ml, and Mm stand for different parts of the malleus; Jc, Jb, Jl, Jpl, for different parts of the incus. S is the stapes.
Fig. 18.—Mcp, Mc, Ml, and Mm represent various sections of the malleus; Jc, Jb, Jl, and Jpl denote different parts of the incus. S is the stapes.
"The Tympanum (P, Fig. 17) is an irregular cavity in the temporal bone, closed externally by the drum membrane. From its inner side the Eustachian tube (R) proceeds and opens into the pharynx. The inner wall of the tympanum is bony except for two small apertures, the oval and round foramens, o and r, which lead into the labyrinth. During life the round aperture is closed by the lining mucous membrane, and the oval by the stirrup-bones. The tympanic membrane T, stretched across the outer side of the tympanum, forms a shallow funnel with its concavity outwards. It is pressed by the external air on its exterior, and by air entering the tympanic cavity through the Eustachian tube on its inner side. If the tympanum were closed these pressures would not be always equal when barometric pressure varied, and the membrane would be bulged in or out according as the external or internal pressure on it were the greater. On the other hand, were the Eustachian tube always open the sounds of our own voices would be loud and disconcerting, so it is usually closed; but every time we swallow it is opened, and thus the air-pressure in the cavity is kept equal to that in the external auditory meatus. On making a balloon ascent or going rapidly down a deep mine, the sudden and great change of aërial pressure outside frequently causes{49} painful tension of the drum-membrane, which may be greatly alleviated by frequent swallowing.
"The Tympanum (P, Fig. 17) is an irregular space in the temporal bone, closed off on the outside by the drum membrane. On its inner side is the Eustachian tube (R), which opens into the pharynx. The inner wall of the tympanum is bony except for two small openings, the oval and round foramens, o and r, which lead into the labyrinth. In a living person, the round opening is covered by a lining of mucous membrane, while the oval is covered by the stirrup bones. The tympanic membrane T, stretched across the outer side of the tympanum, forms a shallow funnel shape with its concave side facing outwards. It is pressed by external air on the outside and by air entering the tympanic cavity through the Eustachian tube on the inside. If the tympanum were closed, these pressures would not always balance when the barometric pressure changed, causing the membrane to bulge in or out depending on whether the external or internal pressure was greater. On the other hand, if the Eustachian tube were always open, the sounds of our own voices would be loud and unsettling, so it usually remains closed; however, it opens every time we swallow, allowing the air pressure in the cavity to stay equal to that in the external auditory meatus. When ascending in a balloon or descending quickly into a deep mine, the sudden and significant change in external air pressure can often cause{49} painful tension in the drum membrane, which can be greatly relieved by frequent swallowing."
Accommodation is provided for in the ear as well as in the eye. One muscle an inch long, the tensor tympani, arises in the petrous portion of the temporal bone (running in a canal parallel to the Eustachian tube) and is inserted into the malleus below its head. When it contracts, it makes the membrane of the tympanum more tense. Another smaller muscle, the stapedius, goes to the head of the stirrup-bone. These muscles are by many persons felt distinctly contracting when certain notes are heard, and some can make them contract at will. In spite of this, uncertainty still reigns as to their exact use in hearing, though it is highly probable that they give to the membranes which they influence the degree of tension best suited to take up whatever rates of vibration may fall upon them at the time. In listening, the head and ears in lower animals, and the head alone in man, are turned so as best to receive the sound. This also is a part of the reaction called 'adaptation' of the organ (see the chapter on Attention).
Accommodation is found in both the ear and the eye. One muscle, about an inch long, the tensor tympani, originates in the hard part of the temporal bone (running in a canal parallel to the Eustachian tube) and attaches to the malleus just below its head. When this muscle contracts, it tightens the tympanic membrane. Another smaller muscle, the stapedius, connects to the head of the stirrup bone. Many people can actually feel these muscles contracting in response to certain notes, and some can even make them contract on command. Despite this, there's still some uncertainty about their exact role in hearing, though it’s very likely that they adjust the tension of the membranes they affect to better respond to different vibration rates that occur at the moment. When listening, lower animals turn both their head and ears, while humans just turn their head to better capture the sound. This is also part of the process known as the 'adaptation' of the organ (see the chapter on Attention).
The Internal Ear.—"The labyrinth consists primarily of chambers and tubes hollowed out in the temporal bone and inclosed by it on all sides, except for the oval and round foramens on its exterior, and certain apertures for blood-vessels and the auditory nerve; during life all these are closed water-tight in one way or another. Lying in the bony labyrinth thus constituted are membranous parts, of the same general form but smaller, so that between the two{50} a space is left; this is filled with a watery fluid, called the perilymph; and the membranous internal ear is filled by a similar liquid, the endolymph.
The Internal Ear.—"The labyrinth mainly consists of chambers and tubes carved out of the temporal bone and surrounded by it on all sides, except for the oval and round openings on its exterior, as well as certain openings for blood vessels and the auditory nerve; during life, all these are sealed off tightly in one way or another. Inside the bony labyrinth is a membranous structure that has the same general shape but is smaller, creating a space between the two{50} that is filled with a watery fluid called perilymph; and the membranous internal ear is filled with a similar liquid, known as endolymph.

Fig. 19.—Casts of the bony labyrinth. A, left labyrinth seen from the outer side; B, right labyrinth from the inner side; C, left labyrinth from above; Co, cochlea; V, vestibule; Fc, round foramen; Fv, oval foramen; h, horizontal semicircular canal; ha, its ampulla; vaa, ampulla of anterior vertical semicircular canal; vpa, ampulla of posterior vertical semicircular canal; vc, conjoined portion of the two vertical canals.
Fig. 19.—Models of the bony labyrinth. A, left labyrinth viewed from the outside; B, right labyrinth seen from the inside; C, left labyrinth viewed from above; Co, cochlea; V, vestibule; Fc, round opening; Fv, oval opening; h, horizontal semicircular canal; ha, its ampulla; vaa, ampulla of the anterior vertical semicircular canal; vpa, ampulla of the posterior vertical semicircular canal; vc, combined section of the two vertical canals.
The Bony Labyrinth.—"The bony labyrinth is described in three portions, the vestibule, the semicircular canals, and the cochlea; casts of its interior are represented from different aspects in Fig. 19. The vestibule is the central part and has on its exterior the oval foramen (Fv) into which the base of the stirrup-bone fits. Behind the vestibule are three bony semicircular canals, communicating with the back of the vestibule at each end, and dilated near one end to form an ampulla. The bony cochlea is a tube coiled on itself somewhat like a snail's shell, and lying in front of the vestibule.
The Bony Labyrinth.—"The bony labyrinth is divided into three parts: the vestibule, the semicircular canals, and the cochlea; models of its interior are shown from different angles in Fig. 19.. The vestibule is the central section and has on its outer side the oval opening (Fv) where the base of the stirrup bone fits. Behind the vestibule are three bony semicircular canals that connect to the back of the vestibule at either end, with a widened section at one end forming an ampulla. The bony cochlea is a tube that coils around itself like a snail's shell and is located in front of the vestibule."
The Membranous Labyrinth.—"The membranous vestibule, lying in the bony, consists of two sacs communicating by a narrow aperture. The posterior is called the utriculus, and into it the membranous semicircular canals open. The anterior, called the sacculus, communicates by a tube with the membranous cochlea. The membranous semicircular canals much resemble the bony, and each has{51}
The Membranous Labyrinth.—"The membranous vestibule, located within the bony structure, consists of two sacs connected by a narrow opening. The back one is called the utriculus, and the membranous semicircular canals open into it. The front sac, known as the sacculus, connects to the membranous cochlea through a tube. The membranous semicircular canals closely resemble the bony ones, and each has {51}

Fig. 20.—A section through the cochlea in the line of its axis.
Fig. 20.—A cross-section of the cochlea along its axis.

Fig. 21.—Section of one coil of the cochlea, magnified. SV, scala vestibuli; R, membrane of Reissner; CC, membranous cochlea (scala media); lls, limbus laminæ spiralis; t, tectorial membrane; ST, scala tympani; lso, spiral lamina; Co, rods of Corti; b, basilar membrane.
Fig. 21.—Section of one coil of the cochlea, magnified. SV, scala vestibuli; R, Reissner's membrane; CC, membranous cochlea (scala media); lls, limbus of the spiral lamina; t, tectorial membrane; ST, scala tympani; lso, spiral lamina; Co, rods of Corti; b, basilar membrane.
an ampulla; in the ampulla one side of the membranous tube is closely adherent to its bony protector; at this point nerves enter the former. The relations of the membranous to the bony cochlea are more complicated. A section through this part of the auditory apparatus (Fig. 20) shows that its osseous portion consists of a tube wound two and a half times round a central bony axis, the modiolus. From the axis a shelf, the lamina spiralis, projects and partially subdivides the tube, extending farthest across in its lower coils. Attached to the outer edge of this bony plate is the membranous cochlea (scala media), a tube triangular in cross-section and attached by its base to the outer side of the bony cochlear spiral. The spiral lamina and the membranous cochlea thus subdivide the cavity of the bony tube (Fig. 21) into an upper portion, the scala vestibuli, SV, and a lower, the scala tympani, ST. Between these lie the lamina spiralis (lso) and the membranous{52} cochlea (CC), the latter being bounded above by the membrane of Reissner (R) and below by the basilar membrane (b)."[20]
an ampulla; in the ampulla, one side of the membranous tube is closely attached to its bony protector; at this point, nerves enter the former. The relationship between the membranous and bony cochlea is more complex. A section through this part of the auditory system (Fig. 20) shows that its bony portion consists of a tube wound two and a half times around a central bony axis, the modiolus. From the axis, a shelf called the lamina spiralis projects and partially divides the tube, extending the farthest across in its lower coils. Attached to the outer edge of this bony plate is the membranous cochlea (scala media), a tube that is triangular in cross-section and attached by its base to the outer side of the bony cochlear spiral. The spiral lamina and the membranous cochlea thus divide the cavity of the bony tube (Fig. 21) into an upper portion, the scala vestibuli, SV, and a lower portion, the scala tympani, ST. Between these lie the lamina spiralis (lso) and the membranous{52} cochlea (CC), with the former being bounded above by Reissner's membrane (R) and below by the basilar membrane (b)."[20]
The membranous cochlea does not extend to the tip of the bony cochlea; above its apex the scala vestibuli and scala tympani communicate. Both are filled with perilymph, so that when the stapes is pushed into the oval foramen, o, in Fig. 17, by the impact of an air-wave on the tympanic membrane, a wave of perilymph runs up the scala vestibuli to the top, where it turns into the scala tympani, down whose whorls it runs and pushes out the round foramen r, ruffling probably the membrane of Reissner and the basilar membrane on its way up and down.
The membranous cochlea doesn't reach the tip of the bony cochlea; above its apex, the scala vestibuli and scala tympani connect. Both are filled with perilymph, so when the stapes is pushed into the oval window o, in Fig. 17, by the impact of an air-wave on the eardrum, a wave of perilymph travels up the scala vestibuli to the top, where it shifts into the scala tympani, down which it flows and pushes out the round window r, likely disturbing the membrane of Reissner and the basilar membrane on its way up and down.

Fig. 22.—The rods of Corti. A, a pair of rods separated from the rest; B, a bit of the basilar membrane with several rods on it, showing how they cover in the tunnel of Corti; i, inner, and e, outer rods; b, basilar membrane; r, reticular membrane.
Fig. 22.—The rods of Corti. A, a pair of rods separated from the rest; B, a piece of the basilar membrane with several rods on it, showing how they cover the tunnel of Corti; i, inner, and e, outer rods; b, basilar membrane; r, reticular membrane.
The Terminal Organs.—"The membranous cochlea contains certain solid structures seated on the basilar membrane and forming the organ of Corti. This contains the end-organs of the cochlear nerves. Lining the sulcus spiralis, a groove in the edge of the bony lamina spiralis, are cuboidal cells; on the inner margin of the basilar membrane they become columnar, and then are succeeded by a row which bear on their upper ends a set of short stiff hairs, and constitute the inner hair-cells, which are fixed below by a narrow apex to the basilar membrane; nerve-fibres enter them. To the inner hair-cells succeed the{53} rods of Corti (Co, Fig. 21), which are represented highly magnified in Fig. 22. These rods are stiff and arranged side by side in two rows, leaned against one another by their upper ends so as to cover in a tunnel; they are known respectively as the inner and outer rods, the former being nearer the lamina spiralis. The inner rods are more numerous than the outer, the numbers being about 6000 and 4500 respectively. Attached to the external sides of the heads of the outer rods is the reticular membrane (r, Fig. 22), which is stiff and perforated by holes. External to the outer rods come four rows of outer hair-cells, connected like the inner row with nerve-fibres; their bristles project into the holes of the reticular membrane. Beyond the outer hair-cells is ordinary columnar epithelium, which passes gradually into cuboidal cells lining most of the membranous cochlea. From the upper lip of the sulcus spiralis projects the tectorial membrane (t, Fig. 21) which extends over the rods of Corti and the hair-cells."[21]
The Terminal Organs.—"The membranous cochlea contains some solid structures positioned on the basilar membrane that form the organ of Corti. This organ holds the end-organs of the cochlear nerves. Lining the sulcus spiralis, a groove in the edge of the bony lamina spiralis, are cuboidal cells; on the inner edge of the basilar membrane, they change to columnar cells, which are then followed by a row that has short stiff hairs on their upper ends, making up the inner hair-cells. These are anchored below by a narrow apex to the basilar membrane, and nerve fibers connect to them. Following the inner hair-cells are the {53} rods of Corti (Co, Fig. 21), which are shown in high magnification in Fig. 22.. These rods are stiff and lined up in two rows, leaning against one another at their upper ends to create a tunnel; they are known as the inner and outer rods, with the inner rods being closer to the lamina spiralis. The inner rods outnumber the outer ones, with approximately 6000 inner rods and 4500 outer rods. Attached to the outer rods' external sides is the reticular membrane (r, Fig. 22), which is stiff and has holes. Beyond the outer rods are four rows of outer hair-cells, which, like the inner row, are linked to nerve fibers; their bristles project into the holes of the reticular membrane. Beyond the outer hair-cells is standard columnar epithelium, gradually changing into cuboidal cells that line most of the membranous cochlea. The tectorial membrane (t, Fig. 21) extends from the upper edge of the sulcus spiralis over the rods of Corti and the hair-cells."[21]

Fig. 23.—Sensory epithelium from ampulla or semicircular canal, and saccule. At n a nerve-fibre pierces the wall, and after branching enters the two hair-cells, c. At h a 'columnar cell' with a long hair is shown, the nerve-fibre being broken away from its base. The slender cells at f seem unconnected with nerves.
Fig. 23.—Sensory tissue from the ampulla or semicircular canal, and saccule. At n, a nerve fiber penetrates the wall, and after branching, it connects to the two hair cells, c. At h, a 'columnar cell' with a long hair is depicted, with the nerve fiber detached from its base. The slender cells at f appear to be unconnected to any nerves.
The hair-cells would thus seem to be the terminal organs for 'picking up' the vibrations which the air-waves communicate through all the intervening apparatus, solid and liquid, to the basilar membrane. Analogous hair-cells receive the terminal nerve-filaments in the walls of the saccule, utricle, and ampullæ (see Fig. 23).
The hair cells appear to be the final organs for detecting the vibrations that the airwaves transmit through all the intervening structures, both solid and liquid, to the basilar membrane. Similar hair cells receive the terminal nerve fibers in the walls of the saccule, utricle, and ampullae (see Fig. 23).
The Various Qualities of Sound.—Physically, sounds consist of vibrations, and these are, generally speaking, aërial waves. When the waves are non-periodic the result is a{54} noise; when periodic it is what is nowadays called a tone, or note. The loudness of a sound depends on the force of the waves. When they recur periodically a peculiar quality called pitch is the effect of their frequency. In addition to loudness and pitch tones have each their voice or timbre, which may differ widely in different instruments giving equally loud tones of the same pitch. This voice depends on the form of the aërial wave.
The Different Qualities of Sound.—Sounds are made up of vibrations, which are essentially air waves. When these waves are random, the outcome is a noise; when they are regular, it results in what we now refer to as a tone or note. The loudness of a sound is determined by the strength of the waves. When the waves repeat at regular intervals, a specific quality called pitch emerges from their frequency. Besides loudness and pitch, tones also have their own voice or timbre, which can vary significantly between different instruments even when producing equally loud tones of the same pitch. This voice is influenced by the shape of the air wave.
Pitch.—A single puff of air, set in motion by no matter what cause, will give a sensation of sound, but it takes at least four or five puffs, or more, to convey a sensation of pitch. The pitch of the note c, for instance, is due to 132 vibrations a second, that of its octave c´ is produced by twice as many, or 264 vibrations; but in neither case is it necessary for the vibrations to go on during a full second for the pitch to be discerned. "Sound vibrations may be too rapid or too slow in succession to produce sonorous sensations, just as the ultra-violet and ultra-red rays of the solar spectrum fail to excite the retina. The highest-pitched audible note answers to about 38,016 vibrations in a second, but it differs in individuals; many persons cannot hear the cry of a bat nor the chirp of a cricket, which lie near this upper audible limit. On the other hand, sounds of vibrational rate about 40 per second are not well heard, and a little below this they produce rather a 'hum' than a true tone-sensation, and are only used along with notes of higher octaves to which they give a character of greater depth."[22]
Pitch.—A single breath of air, caused by any source, will create a sound sensation, but it takes at least four or five breaths, or even more, to convey a sense of pitch. The pitch of the note c, for example, corresponds to 132 vibrations per second, while its octave c´ is produced by double that amount, or 264 vibrations; however, in neither case is it necessary for the vibrations to continue for an entire second for the pitch to be recognized. "Sound vibrations can be too fast or too slow in succession to create audible sensations, just like the ultraviolet and infrared rays of the solar spectrum do not stimulate the retina. The highest-pitched audible note corresponds to about 38,016 vibrations per second, but this can vary among individuals; many people cannot hear the call of a bat or the chirp of a cricket, which are close to this upper audible limit. Conversely, sounds at a vibrational rate of around 40 per second are not clearly heard, and just below this they create more of a 'hum' than a true tone sensation, only being used alongside notes of higher octaves to give them a deeper quality."[22]
The entire system of pitches forms a continuum of one dimension; that is to say, you can pass from one pitch to another only by one set of intermediaries, instead of by more than one, as in the case of colors. (See p. 41.) The whole series of pitches is embraced in and between the terms of what is called the musical scale. The adoption of certain arbitrary points in this scale as 'notes' has an explanation{55} partly historic and partly æsthetic, but too complex for exposition here.
The whole system of pitches creates a continuous spectrum; meaning you can transition from one pitch to another only through a single set of intermediaries, unlike with colors where there are multiple ways. (See p. 41.) The entire range of pitches is contained within what we refer to as the musical scale. The choice of specific points in this scale as 'notes' has a reasoning{55} that's partly historical and partly aesthetic, but it's too complicated to explain here.
The 'timbre' of a note is due to its wave-form. Waves are either simple ('pendular') or compound. Thus if a tuning-fork (which gives waves nearly simple) vibrate 132 times a second, we shall hear the note c. If simultaneously a fork of 264 vibrations be struck, giving the next higher octave, c´, the aërial movement at any time will be the algebraic sum of the movements due to both forks; whenever both drive the air one way they reinforce one another; when on the contrary the recoil of one fork coincides with the forward stroke of another, they detract from each other's effect. The result is a movement which is still periodic, repeating itself at equal intervals of time, but no longer pendular, since it is not alike on the ascending and descending limbs of the curves. We thus get at the fact that non-pendular vibrations may be produced by the fusion of pendular, or, in technical phrase, by their composition.
The 'timbre' of a note comes from its wave-form. Waves can be either simple ('pendular') or compound. For example, if a tuning fork (which produces nearly simple waves) vibrates 132 times a second, we hear the note c. If at the same time another fork vibrating 264 times is struck, producing the next higher octave, c´, the air movement at any moment will be the algebraic sum of the movements from both forks; whenever both push the air in the same direction, they amplify each other; when the recoil of one fork lines up with the forward motion of another, they cancel each other's effect. The result is a movement that remains periodic, repeating at regular intervals of time, but is no longer pendular, since it differs in the upward and downward motions of the curves. This shows that non-pendular vibrations can be created by combining pendular ones, or, in technical terms, through their composition.
Suppose several musical instruments, as those of an orchestra, to be sounded together. Each produces its own effect on the air-particles, whose movements, being an algebraical sum, must at any given instant be very complex; yet the ear can pick out at will and follow the tones of any one instrument. Now in most musical instruments it is susceptible of physical proof that with every single note that is sounded many upper octaves and other 'harmonics' sound simultaneously in fainter form. On the relative strength of this or that one or more of these Helmholtz has shown that the instrument's peculiar voice depends. The several vowel-sounds in the human voice also depend on the predominance of diverse upper harmonics accompanying the note on which the vowel is sung. When the two tuning-forks of the last paragraph are sounded together the new form of vibration has the same period as the lower-pitched fork; yet the ear can clearly distinguish the resultant sound from that of the lower fork alone, as a note of the same pitch but of different timbre; and within{56} the compound sound the two components can by a trained ear be severally heard. Now how can one resultant wave-form make us hear so many sounds at once?
Suppose several musical instruments, like those in an orchestra, are played together. Each one affects the air particles in its own way, combining to create a very complex movement at any moment; yet, the ear can selectively focus on and track the sounds of any single instrument. It can be physically proven that when a note is played on most musical instruments, many higher octaves and other 'harmonics' also sound at the same time, though at a lower volume. Helmholtz demonstrated that the unique sound of an instrument depends on the relative strength of these harmonics. Similarly, the different vowel sounds in the human voice depend on which upper harmonics stand out alongside the note the vowel is sung on. When the two tuning forks mentioned earlier are struck together, the new vibration has the same period as the lower-pitched fork; however, the ear can clearly differentiate the combined sound from that of the lower fork alone, perceiving it as a note of the same pitch but with a different timbre. A trained ear can even pick out the individual components within{56} the combined sound. So, how can one resulting wave make us hear so many sounds simultaneously?
The analysis of compound wave-forms is supposed (after Helmholtz) to be effected through the different rates of sympathetic resonance of the different parts of the membranous cochlea. The basilar membrane is some twelve times broader at the apex of the cochlea than at the base where it begins, and is largely composed of radiating fibres which may be likened to stretched strings. Now the physical principle of sympathetic resonance says that when stretched strings are near a source of vibration those whose own rate agrees with that of the source also vibrate, the others remaining at rest. On this principle, waves of perilymph running down the scala tympani at a certain rate of frequency ought to set certain particular fibres of the basilar membrane vibrating, and ought to leave others unaffected. If then each vibrating fibre stimulated the hair-cell above it, and no others, and each such hair-cell, sending a current to the auditory brain-centre, awakened therein a specific process to which the sensation of one particular pitch was correlated, the physiological condition of our several pitch-sensations would be explained. Suppose now a chord to be struck in which perhaps twenty different physical rates of vibration are found: at least twenty different hair-cells or end-organs will receive the jar; and if the power of mental discrimination be at its maximum, twenty different 'objects' of hearing, in the shape of as many distinct pitches of sound, may appear before the mind.
The analysis of compound waveforms is thought (following Helmholtz) to occur through the varying rates of sympathetic resonance in different parts of the membranous cochlea. The basilar membrane is about twelve times wider at the top of the cochlea than at the base where it starts, and is mainly made up of radiating fibers that can be compared to stretched strings. The physical principle of sympathetic resonance states that when stretched strings are close to a source of vibration, those with a frequency that matches the source will vibrate, while others stay still. Based on this principle, waves of perilymph moving down the scala tympani at a specific frequency should cause particular fibers of the basilar membrane to vibrate, leaving others untouched. If each vibrating fiber stimulates the hair cell above it and no others, and each hair cell sends a signal to the auditory brain center that triggers a specific process linked to the sensation of a certain pitch, this explains the physiological basis of our various pitch sensations. Now imagine a chord being played that produces perhaps twenty different physical vibration rates: at least twenty different hair cells or end-organs will feel the impact; and if our ability to mentally distinguish sounds is at its peak, twenty different 'objects' of hearing, represented by as many distinct pitches, may present themselves to the mind.
The rods of Corti are supposed to be dampers of the fibres of the basilar membrane, just as the malleus, incus, and stapes are dampers of the tympanic membrane, as well as transmitters of its oscillations to the inner ear. There must be, in fact, an instantaneous damping of the physiological vibrations, for there are no such positive after-images, and no such blendings of rapidly successive tones, as the retina shows us in the case of light. Helmholtz's theory of{57} the analysis of sounds is plausible and ingenious. One objection to it is that the keyboard of the cochlea does not seem extensive enough for the number of distinct resonances required. We can discriminate many more degrees of pitch than the 20,000 hair-cells, more or less, will allow for.
The rods of Corti are thought to be dampers for the fibers of the basilar membrane, similar to how the malleus, incus, and stapes dampen the tympanic membrane and transmit its vibrations to the inner ear. There must be, in fact, an immediate damping of the physiological vibrations, since there are no prominent after-images or blends of rapidly successive tones, unlike what we see in the case of light with the retina. Helmholtz's theory of{57} sound analysis is plausible and clever. One criticism of it is that the keyboard of the cochlea doesn’t seem large enough to accommodate the number of distinct resonances needed. We can distinguish many more pitches than the roughly 20,000 hair cells can account for.
The so-called Fusion of Sensations in Hearing.—A very common way of explaining the fact that waves which singly give no feeling of pitch give one when recurrent, is to say that their several sensations fuse into a compound sensation. A preferable explanation is that which follows the analogy of muscular contraction. If electric shocks are sent into a frog's sciatic nerve at slow intervals, the muscle which the nerve supplies will give a series of distinct twitches, one for each shock. But if they follow each other at the rate of as many as thirty a second, no distinct twitches are observed, but a steady state of contraction instead. This steady contraction is known as tetanus. The experiment proves that there is a physiological cumulation or overlapping of processes in the muscular tissue. It takes a twentieth of a second or more for the latter to relax after the twitch due to the first shock. But the second shock comes in before the relaxation can occur, then the third again, and so on; so that continuous tetanus takes the place of discrete twitching. Similarly in the auditory nerve. One shock of air starts in it a current to the auditory brain-centre, and affects the latter, so that a dry stroke of sound is heard. If other shocks follow slowly, the brain-centre recovers its equilibrium after each, to be again upset in the same way by the next, and the result is that for each shock of air a distinct sensation of sound occurs. But if the shock comes in too quick succession, the later ones reach the brain before the effects of the earlier ones on that organ have died away. There is thus an overlapping of processes in the auditory centre, a physiological condition analogous to the muscle's tetanus, to which new condition a new quality of feeling, that of pitch, directly corresponds. This latter{58} feeling is a new kind of sensation altogether, not a mere 'appearance' due to many sensations of dry stroke being compounded into one. No sensations of dry stroke can exist under these circumstances, for their physiological conditions have been replaced by others. What 'compounding' there is has already taken place in the brain-cells before the threshold of sensation was reached. Just so red light and green light beating on the retina in rapid enough alternation, arouse the central process to which the sensation yellow directly corresponds. The sensations of red and of green get no chance, under such conditions, to be born. Just so if the muscle could feel, it would have a certain sort of feeling when it gave a single twitch, but it would undoubtedly have a distinct sort of feeling altogether, when it contracted tetanically; and this feeling of the tetanic contraction would by no means be identical with a multitude of the feelings of twitching.
The so-called Fusion of Sensations in Hearing.—A common way to explain how waves that don't individually produce a sense of pitch can do so when repeated is to say that their individual sensations combine into a single sensation. A better explanation follows the analogy of muscle contraction. When electric shocks are delivered to a frog's sciatic nerve at slow intervals, the muscle served by the nerve will twitch distinctly with each shock. However, if the shocks come in at a rate of thirty times a second, you won't see distinct twitches; instead, there will be a steady contraction. This steady contraction is known as tetanus. The experiment shows that there’s a physiological buildup or overlap of processes in the muscle tissue. It takes at least one-twentieth of a second for the muscle to relax after twitching from the first shock. But if the second shock arrives before the relaxation happens, followed by the third, and so on, continuous tetanus replaces discrete twitching. The same goes for the auditory nerve. One air shock sends a current to the auditory brain center, affecting it so that a distinct sound is detected. If subsequent shocks follow slowly, the brain center returns to its normal state after each one, only to be disturbed again by the next. This results in a distinct sensation of sound for each air shock. However, if the shocks come too quickly, the later ones reach the brain before the effects of the earlier ones disappear. This creates an overlap of processes in the auditory center, a physiological state similar to muscle tetanus, which corresponds to a new sensation—pitch. This sensation{58} is fundamentally different and not just an 'appearance' from many sensations of dry sound blending into one. Under these conditions, there can't be sensations of dry sound, as their physiological conditions have been replaced by others. Any 'compounding' happens in the brain cells before sensation is even registered. Similarly, red and green light flashing rapidly on the retina stimulate the process that directly corresponds to the sensation yellow. The sensations of red and green don’t get a chance to emerge under these conditions. If a muscle could feel, it would have one kind of sensation from a single twitch, but a completely different sensation from continuous tetanic contraction; and this feeling of tetanic contraction would not be the same as many separate feelings of twitching.
Harmony and Discord.—When several tones sound together we may get peculiar feelings of pleasure or displeasure designated as consonance and dissonance respectively. A note sounds most consonant with its octave. When with the octave the 'third' and the 'fifth' of the note are sounded, for instance c—e—g—c´, we get the 'full chord' or maximum of consonance. The ratios of vibration here are as 4:5:6:8, so that one might think simple ratios were the ground of harmony. But the interval c—d is discordant, with the comparatively simple ratio 8:9. Helmholtz explains discord by the overtones making 'beats' together. This gives a subtle grating which is unpleasant. Where the overtones make no 'beats', or beats too rapid for their effect to be perceptible, there is consonance, according to Helmholtz, which is thus a negative rather than a positive thing. Wundt explains consonance by the presence of strong identical overtones in the notes which harmonize. No one of these explanations of musical harmony can be called quite satisfactory; and the subject is too intricate to be treated farther in this place.{59}
Harmony and Discord.—When several notes play together, we might experience unique feelings of pleasure or discomfort known as consonance and dissonance, respectively. A note sounds most consonant with its octave. When we play the 'third' and the 'fifth' of the note along with the octave, for example, c—e—g—c´, we achieve the 'full chord' or the highest level of consonance. The vibration ratios here are 4:5:6:8, which could lead one to believe that simple ratios form the basis of harmony. However, the interval c—d is dissonant, with the relatively simple ratio of 8:9. Helmholtz attributes dissonance to the overtones creating 'beats' with each other, producing a subtle irritation that is unpleasant. Where the overtones do not produce 'beats,' or when the beats are too fast to be noticed, there is consonance, which Helmholtz suggests is more of a negative concept than a positive one. Wundt defines consonance as the presence of strong identical overtones in the notes that harmonize. None of these explanations for musical harmony can be considered entirely satisfactory, and the topic is too complex to explore further here.{59}
Discriminative Sensibility of the Ear.—Weber's law holds fairly well for the intensity of sounds. If ivory or metal balls are dropped on an ebony or iron plate, they make a sound which is the louder as they are heavier or dropped from a greater height. Experimenting in this way (after others) Merkel found that the just perceptible increment of loudness required an increase of 3/10 of the original stimulus everywhere between the intensities marked 20 and 5000 of his arbitrary scale. Below this the fractional increment of stimulus must be larger; above it, no measurements were made.
Discriminative Sensibility of the Ear.—Weber's law applies quite well to sound intensity. When ivory or metal balls are dropped onto an ebony or iron plate, they produce a sound that is louder depending on how heavy they are or how high they are dropped from. In his experiments (building on previous work), Merkel discovered that to notice a slight increase in loudness, there needs to be an increase of 3/10 of the original stimulus across the intensities marked 20 and 5000 on his arbitrary scale. Below this, the increase in stimulus needs to be larger; above it, no measurements were taken.
Discrimination of differences of pitch varies in different parts of the scale. In the neighborhood of 1000 vibrations per second, one fifth of a vibration more or less can make the sound sharp or flat for a good ear. It takes a much greater relative alteration to sound sharp or flat elsewhere on the scale. The chromatic scale itself has been used as an illustration of Weber's law. The notes seem to differ equally from each other, yet their vibration-numbers form a series of which each is a certain multiple of the last. This, however, has nothing to do with intensities or just perceptible differences; so the peculiar parallelism between the sensation series and the outer-stimulus series forms here a case all by itself, rather than an instance under Weber's more general law.{60}
Discrimination of differences in pitch varies across different parts of the scale. Around 1000 vibrations per second, even a slight difference of one-fifth of a vibration can make the sound appear sharp or flat to a trained ear. It requires a much larger relative change for the sound to be perceived as sharp or flat at other points on the scale. The chromatic scale itself has been used to illustrate Weber's law. The notes seem to be equally different from each other, yet their vibration numbers form a sequence where each is a specific multiple of the one before it. However, this doesn't relate to intensities or just noticeable differences; therefore, the unique parallel between the sensation series and the outer-stimulus series stands as a separate case rather than an example of Weber's broader law.{60}
CHAPTER V.
TOUCH, THE TEMPERATURE SENSE, THE MUSCULAR SENSE, AND PAIN.
Nerve-endings in the Skin.—"Many of the afferent skin-nerves end in connection with hair-bulbs; the fine hairs over most of the cutaneous surface, projecting from the skin, transmit any movement impressed on them, with increased force, to the nerve-fibres at their fixed ends. Fine branches of axis-cylinders have also been described as penetrating between epidermic cells and ending there without terminal organs. In or immediately beneath the skin several peculiar forms of nerve end-organs have also been described; they are known as (1) Touch-cells; (2) Pacinian corpuscles; (3) Tactile corpuscles; (4) End-bulbs."[23]
Nerve-endings in the Skin.—"Many of the sensory nerves in the skin connect with hair follicles; the fine hairs covering most of the skin's surface, which extend from the skin, send any movement affecting them, with greater intensity, to the nerve fibers at their base. Delicate branches of nerve fibers have also been observed penetrating between skin cells and ending there without any terminal structures. In or just beneath the skin, several unique types of nerve endings have also been identified; they are known as (1) Touch-cells; (2) Pacinian corpuscles; (3) Tactile corpuscles; (4) End-bulbs."[23]

Fig. 24.—End-bulbs from the conjunctiva of the human eye, magnified.
Fig. 24.—End-bulbs from the conjunctiva of the human eye, enlarged.
These bodies all consist essentially of granules formed of connective tissue, in which or round about which one or more sensory nerve-fibres terminate. They probably magnify impressions just as a grain of sand does in a shoe, or a crumb does in a finger of a glove.
These bodies are basically made up of granules made of connective tissue, where one or more sensory nerve fibers end. They likely amplify sensations just like a grain of sand does in a shoe or a crumb does in a finger of a glove.
Touch, or the Pressure Sense.—"Through the skin we get several kinds of sensation; touch proper, heat and cold, and pain; and we can with more or less accuracy localize them on the surface of the body. The interior of the mouth possesses also three sensibilities. Through touch proper we recognize pressure or traction exerted on the skin, and the force of the pressure; the softness or hardness, roughness or smoothness, of the body producing it;{61} and the form of this when not too large to be felt all over. When to learn the form of an object we move the hand over it, muscular sensations are combined with proper tactile, and such a combination of the two sensations is frequent; moreover, we rarely touch anything without at the same time getting temperature sensations; therefore pure tactile feelings are rare. From an evolution point of view, touch is probably the first distinctly differentiated sensation, and this primary position it still largely holds in our mental life."[24]
Touch, or the Pressure Sense.—"Through our skin, we experience various sensations: proper touch, heat, cold, and pain. We can also localize these feelings on the surface of our body with varying accuracy. The inside of the mouth has three kinds of sensitivity as well. Through proper touch, we identify pressure or pulling on the skin, the intensity of that pressure, and the softness or hardness, roughness or smoothness of the object causing it;{61} and we can discern its shape when it's not too large to feel entirely. When we slide our hand over an object to learn its shape, we combine muscular sensations with proper tactile ones, and this blending of sensations is common; moreover, we rarely touch something without also sensing its temperature, making pure tactile feelings quite rare. From an evolutionary perspective, touch is likely the first clearly defined sensation, and it still plays a significant role in our mental experiences."[24]
Objects are most important to us when in direct contact. The chief function of our eyes and ears is to enable us to prepare ourselves for contact with approaching bodies, or to ward such contact off. They have accordingly been characterized as organs of anticipatory touch.
Objects are most important to us when we are in direct contact with them. The main function of our eyes and ears is to help us get ready for contact with things coming our way or to avoid that contact altogether. They’ve thus been described as organs of anticipatory touch.
"The delicacy of the tactile sense varies on different parts of the skin; it is greatest on the forehead, temples, and back of the forearm, where a weight of 2 milligr. pressing on an area of 9 sq. millim. can be felt.
"The sensitivity of the sense of touch varies across different parts of the skin; it's highest on the forehead, temples, and back of the forearm, where a weight of 2 milligrams pressing on an area of 9 square millimeters can be felt."
"In order that the sense of touch may be excited neighboring skin-areas must be differently pressed. When the hand is immersed in a liquid, as mercury, which fits into all its inequalities and presses with practically the same weight on all neighboring immersed areas, the sense of pressure is only felt at a line along the surface, where the immersed and non-immersed parts of the skin meet.
"In order for the sense of touch to be stimulated, adjacent areas of skin need to be pressed differently. When the hand is submerged in a liquid, like mercury, which conforms to all its contours and exerts almost the same pressure on all nearby submerged areas, the sensation of pressure is only experienced along the line where the submerged and non-submerged parts of the skin come together."
The Localizing Power of the Skin.—"When the eyes are closed and a point of the skin is touched we can with some accuracy indicate the region stimulated; although tactile feelings are in general characters alike, they differ in something besides intensity by which we can distinguish them; some sub-sensation quality not rising definitely into prominence in consciousness must be present, comparable to the upper partials determining the timbre of a tone. The accuracy of the localizing power varies widely in different{62} skin regions and is measured by observing the least distance which must separate two objects (as the blunted points of a pair of compasses) in order that they may be felt as two. The following table illustrates some of the differences observed:
The Localizing Power of the Skin.—"When our eyes are closed and a spot on the skin is touched, we can fairly accurately identify the area that was stimulated. Although tactile sensations are generally similar, they differ in ways beyond just intensity, and there is some sub-sensory quality that we may not consciously notice, similar to the higher frequencies that affect the tone of a sound. The accuracy of our ability to pinpoint sensations varies greatly across different{62} areas of the skin, and it's measured by determining the smallest distance that two objects (like the dull points of a pair of calipers) must be apart for us to feel them as separate sensations. The following table shows some of the differences observed:
Tongue-tip | 1.1 mm. | (.04 inch) |
Palm side of last phalanx of finger | 2.2 mm. | (.08 inch) |
Red part of lips | 4.4 mm. | (.16 inch) |
Tip of nose | 6.6 mm. | (.24 inch) |
Back of second phalanx of finger | 11.0 mm. | (.44 inch) |
Heel | 22.0 mm. | (.88 inch) |
Back of hand | 30.8 mm. | (1.23 inches) |
Forearm | 39.6 mm. | (1.58 inches) |
Sternum | 44.0 mm. | (1.76 inches) |
Back of neck | 52.8 mm. | (2.11 inches) |
Middle of back | 66.0 mm. | (2.64 inches) |
The localizing power is a little more acute across the long axis of a limb than in it; and is better when the pressure is only strong enough to just cause a distinct tactile sensation than when it is more powerful; it is also very readily and rapidly improvable by practice." It seems to be naturally delicate in proportion as the skin which possesses it covers a more movable part of the body.
The ability to pinpoint touch is a bit better along the length of a limb than in other areas; it works best when the pressure is just enough to create a clear tactile sensation rather than when it’s stronger; and it can be quickly and easily improved with practice. It seems to be naturally more sensitive when the skin that has this ability covers a more flexible part of the body.
"It might be thought that this localizing power depended directly on nerve-distribution; that each touch-nerve had connection with a special brain-centre at one end (the excitation of which caused a sensation with a characteristic local sign), and at the other end was distributed over a certain skin-area, and that the larger this area the farther apart might two points be and still give rise to only one sensation. If this were so, however, the peripheral tactile areas (each being determined by the{63} anatomical distribution of a nerve-fibre) must have definite unchangeable limits, which experiment shows that they do not possess. Suppose the small areas in Fig. 25 to each represent a peripheral area of nerve-distribution. If any two points in c were touched we should according to the theory get but a single sensation; but if, while the compass-points remained the same distance apart, or were even approximated, one were placed in c and the other on a contiguous area, two fibres would be stimulated and we ought to get two sensations; but such is not the case; on the same skin-region the points must be always the same distance apart, no matter how they be shifted, in order to give rise to two just distinguishable sensations.
"It might seem that this localizing ability directly relates to nerve distribution; that each touch nerve connects to a specific brain center at one end (stimulation of which causes a sensation with a distinct local sign) and is spread over a particular skin area at the other end. The larger this area, the farther apart two points can be while still producing a single sensation. However, if this were true, the peripheral tactile areas (each determined by the{63} anatomical layout of a nerve fiber) would have fixed, unchanging boundaries, which experiments show they do not have. Imagine the small areas in Fig. 25 each representing a peripheral nerve distribution area. If any two points in c were touched, we should, according to the theory, experience only one sensation; but if, while keeping the compass points the same distance apart or even bringing them closer, one point is placed in c and the other on an adjacent area, two fibers would be activated, and we should perceive two sensations. However, this is not the case; within the same skin area, the points must always be the same distance apart, regardless of how they are moved, to produce two distinctly recognizable sensations."
"It is probable that the nerve-areas are much smaller than the tactile; and that several unstimulated must intervene between the excited, in order to produce sensations which shall be distinct. If we suppose twelve unexcited nerve-areas must intervene, then, in Fig. 25, a and b will be just on the limits of a single tactile area; and no matter how the points are moved, so long as eleven, or fewer, unexcited areas come between, we would get a single tactile sensation; in this way we can explain the fact that tactile areas have no fixed boundaries in the skin, although the nerve-distribution in any part must be constant. We also see why the back of a knife laid on the surface causes a continuous linear sensation, although it touches many distinct nerve-areas. If we could discriminate the excitations of each of these from that of its immediate neighbors we should get the sensation of a series of points touching us, one for each nerve-region excited; but in the absence of intervening unexcited nerve-areas the sensations are fused together.
"It’s likely that the nerve areas are much smaller than the tactile ones, and that several unstimulated ones need to be in between the stimulated areas to create sensations that are distinct. If we assume that twelve unexcited nerve areas must come between them, then, in Fig. 25, a and b will be just on the edge of a single tactile area; and no matter how the points are moved, as long as there are eleven or fewer unexcited areas in between, we would perceive a single tactile sensation. This explains why tactile areas don’t have fixed boundaries in the skin, even though the nerve distribution in any part must remain constant. We can also understand why the back of a knife resting on the surface creates a continuous linear sensation, even though it touches many distinct nerve areas. If we could differentiate the excitations of each of these from those of their immediate neighbors, we would feel a series of points touching us, one for each excited nerve region; but without intervening unexcited nerve areas, the sensations blend together."
The Temperature-sense. Its Terminal Organs.—"By this we mean our faculty of perceiving cold and warmth; and, with the help of these sensations, of perceiving temperature differences in external objects. Its organ is the whole skin, the mucous membrane of mouth and fauces, pharynx{64} and gullet, and the entry of the nares. Direct heating or cooling of a sensory nerve may stimulate it and cause pain, but not a true temperature-sensation; hence we assume the presence of temperature end-organs. [These have not yet been ascertained anatomically. Physiologically, however, the demonstration of special spots in the skin for feeling heat and cold is one of the most interesting discoveries of recent years. If one draw a pencil-point over the palm or cheek one will notice certain spots of sudden coolness. These are the cold-spots; the heat-spots are less easy to single out. Goldscheider, Blix, and Donaldson have made minute exploration of determinate tracts of skin and found the heat-and cold-spots thick-set and permanently distinct. Between them no temperature-sensation is excited by contact with a pointed cold or hot object. Mechanical and faradic irritation also excites in these points their specific feelings respectively.]
The Temperature-sense. Its Terminal Organs.—"This refers to our ability to sense cold and warmth; and, using these sensations, to detect temperature differences in external objects. Its organ is the entire skin, the mucous membrane of the mouth and throat, pharynx{64}, and esophagus, as well as the entrance of the nostrils. Directly heating or cooling a sensory nerve may trigger it and cause pain, but it doesn't create a true temperature sensation; therefore, we assume there are temperature end-organs. [These have not yet been anatomically identified. However, physiologically, the discovery of specific spots in the skin for feeling heat and cold is one of the most fascinating findings of recent years. If you glide a pencil point over the palm or cheek, you will notice certain areas of sudden coolness. These are the cold spots; the heat spots are harder to identify. Goldscheider, Blix, and Donaldson have conducted detailed studies of specific areas of skin and discovered that the heat and cold spots are closely placed and permanently distinct. Between them, no temperature sensation is triggered by contact with a pointed cold or hot object. Mechanical and faradic stimulation also triggers their specific sensations at these points.]

Fig. 26.—The figure marked C P shows the cold-spots, that marked H P the heat-spots, and the middle one the hairs on a certain patch of skin on one of Goldscheider's fingers.
Fig. 26.—The point labeled C P represents the cold spots, H P indicates the heat spots, and the center one shows the hairs on a specific area of skin on one of Goldscheider's fingers.
The feeling of temperature is relative to the state of the skin. "In a comfortable room we feel at no part of the body either heat or cold, although different parts of its surface are at different temperatures; the fingers and nose being cooler than the trunk which is covered by clothes, and this, in turn, cooler than the interior of the mouth. The temperature which a given region of the temperature-organ has (as measured by a thermometer) when it feels neither heat nor cold, is its temperature-sensation zero, and is not associated with any one objective temperature; for not only, as we have just seen, does it vary in different parts of the organ, but also on the same part from time to time. Whenever a skin-region has a temperature above its sensation-zero we feel warmth; and vice versa: the sensation is more marked the greater the difference, and the more suddenly it is produced; touching a metallic body, which{65} conducts heat rapidly to or from the skin, causes a more marked hot or cold sensation than touching a worse conductor, as a piece of wood, of the same temperature.
The feeling of temperature is relative to the condition of the skin. "In a comfortable room, we don't feel heat or cold in any part of our body, even though different areas have different temperatures; for instance, our fingers and nose are cooler than our trunk, which is covered by clothing, and this, in turn, is cooler than the inside of our mouth. The temperature of a specific area of the temperature-organ (as measured by a thermometer) when we feel neither heat nor cold is its temperature-sensation zero, and it doesn't correspond to any specific objective temperature; not only does it vary in different parts of the organ, as we've just mentioned, but it can also change in the same area over time. Whenever a part of the skin has a temperature above its sensation-zero, we feel warmth; and vice versa: the sensation is stronger the greater the difference and the more sudden it occurs; touching a metal object, which{65} quickly conducts heat to or from the skin, creates a more intense hot or cold sensation compared to touching a poorer conductor, like a piece of wood, at the same temperature."
"The change of temperature in the organ may be brought about by changes in the circulatory apparatus (more blood flowing through the skin warms it and less leads to its cooling), or by temperature-changes in gases, liquids, or solids in contact with it. Sometimes we fail to distinguish clearly whether the cause is external or internal; a person coming in from a windy walk often feels a room uncomfortably warm which is not really so; the exercise has accelerated his circulation and tended to warm his skin, but the moving outer air has rapidly conducted off the extra heat; on entering the house the stationary air there does this less quickly, the skin gets hot, and the cause is supposed to be oppressive heat of the room. Hence, frequently, opening windows and sitting in a draught, with its concomitant risks; whereas keeping quiet for five or ten minutes, until the circulation has returned to its normal rate, would attain the same end without danger.
"The change in temperature in the body can happen due to changes in the circulatory system (more blood flowing through the skin warms it, while less leads to cooling) or by temperature changes in gases, liquids, or solids that come into contact with it. Sometimes, we can't clearly tell if the cause is external or internal; for example, someone coming in from a windy walk often feels a room is uncomfortably warm when it really isn't. The exercise has increased his circulation and warmed his skin, but the moving outside air has quickly taken away the extra heat. Once he enters the house, the still air doesn’t dissipate the heat as fast, making his skin feel hot, and he assumes the room is oppressively warm. This often leads to opening windows and sitting in drafts, which comes with its own risks. However, if he just rests for five or ten minutes until his circulation goes back to normal, he would achieve the same relief without any danger."
"The acuteness of the temperature-sense is greatest at temperatures within a few degrees of 30° C. (86° F.); at these differences of less than 0.1° C. can be discriminated. As a means of measuring absolute temperatures, however, the skin is very unreliable, on account of the changeability of its sensation-zero. We can localize temperature-sensations much as tactile, but not so accurately."[25]
"The sensitivity of our ability to sense temperature is highest at levels close to 30° C. (86° F.); at these differences, we can detect changes of less than 0.1° C. However, the skin is not a reliable way to measure absolute temperatures because its sensation baseline can change. We can pinpoint temperature sensations similar to how we do with touch, but not as precisely." [25]
Muscular Sensation.—The sensation in the muscle itself cannot well be distinguished from that in the tendon or in its insertion. In muscular fatigue the insertions are the places most painfully felt. In muscular rheumatism, however, the whole muscle grows painful; and violent contraction such as that caused by the faradic current, or known as cramp, produces a severe and peculiar pain felt in{66} the whole mass of muscle affected. Sachs also thought that he had demonstrated, both experimentally and anatomically, the existence of special sensory nerve-fibres, distinct from the motor fibres, in the frog's muscle. The latter end in the 'terminal plates,' the former in a network.
Muscular Sensation.—The sensation in the muscle itself is hard to separate from that in the tendon or where it attaches. When muscles are fatigued, the insertion points are the areas that hurt the most. However, in cases of muscular rheumatism, the entire muscle becomes painful; and strong contractions, like those triggered by electrical currents or known as cramps, result in an intense and unique pain felt throughout{66} the entire muscle group affected. Sachs also believed that he had shown, through experiments and anatomical studies, the presence of special sensory nerve fibers, separate from the motor fibers, in the frog's muscle. The latter end in the 'terminal plates,' while the sensory fibers connect to a network.
Great importance has been attached to the muscular sense as a factor in our perceptions, not only of weight and pressure, but of the space-relations between things generally. Our eyes and our hands, in their explorations of space, move over it and through it. It is usually supposed that without this sense of an intervening motion performed we should not perceive two seen points or two touched points to be separated by an extended interval. I am far from denying the immense participation of experiences of motion in the construction of our space-perceptions. But it is still an open question how our muscles help us in these experiences, whether by their own sensations, or by awakening sensations of motion on our skin, retina, and articular surfaces. The latter seems to me the more probable view, and the reader may be of the same opinion after reading Chapter VI.
Great importance has been placed on our sense of muscle as a key factor in how we perceive not only weight and pressure but also the spatial relationships between objects. Our eyes and hands, while exploring space, move across and through it. It's generally assumed that without this sense of movement, we wouldn't perceive two visual points or two touched points as separated by a distance. I definitely acknowledge the significant role that experiences of movement play in shaping our perceptions of space. However, it's still unclear how our muscles contribute to these experiences, whether through their own sensations or by triggering sensations of movement on our skin, retina, and joints. The latter seems to be the more likely explanation, and you might agree after reading Chapter VI.
Sensibility to Weight.—When we wish to estimate accurately the weight of an object we always, when possible, lift it, and so combine muscular and articular with tactile sensations. By this means we can form much better judgments.
Sensibility to Weight.—When we want to accurately estimate the weight of an object, we always lift it whenever possible, combining our muscle and joint sensations with our sense of touch. This way, we can make much better judgments.
Weber found that whereas ⅓ must be added to a weight resting on the hand for the increase to be felt, the same hand actively 'hefting' the weight could feel an addition of as little as 1/17. Merkel's recent and very careful experiments, in which the finger pressed down the beam of a balance counterweighted by from 25 to 8020 grams, showed that between 200 and 2000 grams a constant fractional increase of about 1/13 was felt when there was no movement of the finger, and of about 1/19 when there was movement. Above and below these limits the discriminative power grew less.{67}
Weber discovered that while a weight resting on the hand needed an additional third to be noticeable, the same hand could sense an increase as small as 1/17 when actively lifting the weight. Merkel's recent and meticulous experiments, where a finger pressed down on a balance beam counterweighted by 25 to 8020 grams, demonstrated that between 200 and 2000 grams, a consistent fractional increase of about 1/13 was perceived with no finger movement, and about 1/19 when the finger was moving. Outside these ranges, the ability to discriminate decreased.{67}
Pain.—The physiology of pain is still an enigma. One might suppose separate afferent fibres with their own end-organs to carry painful impressions to a specific pain-centre. Or one might suppose such a specific centre to be reached by currents of overflow from the other sensory centres when the violence of their inner excitement should have reached a certain pitch. Or again one might suppose a certain extreme degree of inner excitement to produce the feeling of pain in all the centres. It is certain that sensations of every order, which in moderate degrees are rather pleasant than otherwise, become painful when their intensity grows strong. The rate at which the agreeableness and disagreeableness vary with the intensity of a sensation is roughly represented by the dotted curve in Fig. 27. The horizontal line represents the threshold both of sensational and of agreeable sensibility. Below the line is the disagreeble. The continuous curve is that of Weber's law which we learned to know in Fig. 2, p. 18. With the minimal sensation the agreeableness is nil, as the dotted curve shows. It rises at first more slowly than the sensational intensity, then faster; and reaches its maximum before the sensation is near its acme. After its maximum of agreeableness the{68} dotted line rapidly sinks, and soon tumbles below the horizontal into the realm of the disagreeable or painful in which it declines. That all sensations are painful when too strong is a piece of familiar knowledge. Light, sound, odors, the taste of sweet even, cold, heat, and all the skin-sensations, must be moderate to be enjoyed.
Pain.—The way our bodies experience pain is still a mystery. You might think there are separate nerve fibers with their own receptors that send pain signals to a specific pain center. Or you might believe that a specific center gets activated by overflow signals from other sensory areas when their activity reaches a certain level. Alternatively, it's possible that a very high level of internal excitement can trigger pain feelings in all centers. It's clear that sensations that are generally more pleasant at moderate levels can become painful when they become too intense. The way agreeableness and disagreeableness change with the intensity of a sensation is roughly illustrated by the dotted curve in Fig. 27.. The horizontal line represents the threshold for both enjoyable and unpleasant sensations. Below this line represents discomfort. The continuous curve illustrates Weber's law, which we learned about in Fig. 2, p. 18. For the slightest sensation, the level of agreeableness is nil, as shown by the dotted curve. It initially increases more slowly than the intensity of the sensation, then picks up speed; it reaches its peak before the sensation itself peaks. After hitting its peak of agreeableness, the{68} dotted line quickly drops and soon falls below the horizontal line into the area of discomfort or pain, where it continues to decline. It's common knowledge that all sensations can become painful when they are too intense. Light, sound, smells, even the taste of sweetness, cold, heat, and all skin sensations need to be moderate in order to be enjoyed.
The quality of the sensation complicates the question, however, for in some sensations, as bitter, sour, salt, and certain smells, the turning point of the dotted curve must be drawn very near indeed to the beginning of the scale. In the skin the painful quality soon becomes so intense as entirely to overpower the specific quality of the sort of stimulus. Heat, cold, and pressure are indistinguishable when extreme—we only feel the pain. The hypothesis of separate end-organs in the skin receives some corroboration from recent experiments, for both Blix and Goldscheider have found, along with their special heat-and cold spots, also special 'pain-spots' on the skin. Mixed in with these are spots which are quite feelingless. However it may stand with the terminal pain-spots, separate paths of conduction to the brain, for painful and for merely tactile stimulations of the skin, are made probable by certain facts. In the condition termed analgesia, a touch is felt, but the most violent pinch, burn, or electric spark destructive of the tissue will awaken no sensation. This may occur in disease of the cord, by suggestion in hypnotism, or in certain stages of ether and chloroform intoxication. "In rabbits a similar state of things was produced by Schiff, by dividing the gray matter of the cord, leaving the posterior white columns intact. If, on the contrary, the latter were divided and the gray substance left, there was increased sensitiveness to pain, and possibly touch proper was lost. Such experiments make it pretty certain that when afferent impulses reach the spinal cord at any level and there enter its gray matter with the posterior root-fibres, they travel on in different tracts to conscious centres; the tactile ones coming soon out of the gray network and coursing on in a{69} readily conducting white fibre, while the painful ones travel on farther in the gray substance. It is still uncertain if both impulses reach the cord in the same fibres. The gray network conducts nerve-impulses, but not easily; they tend soon to be blocked in it. A feeble (tactile) impulse reaching it by an afferent fibre might only spread a short way and then pass out into a single good conducting fibre in a white column, and proceed to the brain; while a stronger (painful) impulse would radiate farther in the gray matter, and perhaps break out of it by many fibres leading to the brain through the white columns, and so give rise to an incoördinate and ill-localized sensation. That pains are badly localized, and worse the more intense they are, is a well-known fact, which would thus receive an explanation."[26]
The quality of sensation complicates the issue, though, because with certain sensations like bitterness, sourness, saltiness, and specific smells, the peak of the dotted curve has to be positioned very close to the start of the scale. In the skin, pain quickly becomes so intense that it completely overshadows the unique quality of the stimulus. Extreme heat, cold, and pressure feel indistinguishable—we only experience pain. The theory of separate end-organs in the skin gets some support from recent experiments, as both Blix and Goldscheider have discovered not only special heat and cold spots but also distinct 'pain spots' on the skin. Mixed in with these are areas that have no sensation at all. Regardless of the status of these terminal pain spots, certain facts make it likely that there are separate pathways of conduction to the brain for painful and merely tactile skin stimuli. In a condition called analgesia, a person can feel a light touch, but even the most intense pinch, burn, or electric shock that damages tissue won't provoke any sensation. This can happen due to spinal cord diseases, through suggestion in hypnosis, or during certain stages of ether and chloroform intoxication. "In rabbits, a similar situation was created by Schiff, who cut the gray matter of the spinal cord while leaving the posterior white columns intact. If, however, the latter were severed and the gray matter preserved, sensitivity to pain increased, while the ability to feel touch was possibly lost. Such experiments make it fairly certain that when afferent impulses enter the spinal cord at any level and enter its gray matter via the posterior root fibers, they travel along different pathways to conscious centers; the tactile signals quickly exit the gray network and proceed through a{69} well-conducting white fiber, while the painful signals continue deeper into the gray matter. It's still unclear if both impulses arrive at the cord via the same fibers. The gray network conducts nerve impulses, but not easily; they tend to get blocked there quickly. A weak (tactile) impulse that reaches it through an afferent fiber might only spread a short distance before escaping into a single efficient conducting fiber in a white column, proceeding to the brain; meanwhile, a stronger (painful) impulse would spread more broadly in the gray matter and might break out through multiple fibers leading to the brain via the white columns, resulting in a confusing and poorly localized sensation. It is a well-known fact that pain is poorly localized, and it gets worse with increased intensity, which this explanation would clarify."[26]
Pain also gives rise to ill-coördinated movements of defence. The stronger the pain the more violent the start. Doubtless in low animals pain is almost the only stimulus; and we have preserved the peculiarity in so far that to-day it is the stimulus of our most energetic, though not of our most discriminating, reactions.
Pain also causes uncoordinated defensive movements. The stronger the pain, the more intense the reaction. Undoubtedly, in lower animals, pain is nearly the only trigger; and we have maintained this characteristic so that today it is the driving force behind our most vigorous, though not our most thoughtful, responses.
CHAPTER VI.
SENSATIONS OF MOTION.
I treat of these in a separate chapter in order to give them the emphasis which their importance deserves. They are of two orders:
I talk these in a separate chapter to give them the emphasis they deserve. They come in two types:
1) Sensations of objects moving over our sensory surfaces; and
1) Feelings of objects sliding over our senses; and
2) Sensations of our whole person's translation through space.
2) Feelings of our entire being moving through space.
1) The Sensation of Motion over Surfaces.—This has generally been assumed by physiologists to be impossible until the positions of terminus a quo and terminus ad quem are severally cognized, and the successive occupancies of these positions by the moving body are perceived to be separated by a distinct interval of time. As a matter of fact, however, we cognize only the very slowest motions in this way. Seeing the hand of a clock at XII and afterwards at VI, I judge that it has moved through the interval. Seeing the sun now in the east and again in the west, I infer it to have passed over my head. But we can only infer that which we already generically know in some more direct fashion, and it is experimentally certain that we have the feeling of motion given us as a direct and simple sensation. Czermak long ago pointed out the difference between seeing the motion of the second-hand of a watch, when we look directly at it, and noticing the fact that it has altered its position, whilst our gaze is fixed upon some other point of the dial-plate. In the first case we have a specific quality of sensation which is absent in the second. If the reader will find a portion of his skin—the arm, for example—where a pair of compass-points an inch{71} apart are felt as one impression, and if he will then trace lines a tenth of an inch long on that spot with a pencil-point, he will be distinctly aware of the point's motion and vaguely aware of the direction of the motion. The perception of the motion here is certainly not derived from a preëxisting knowledge that its starting and ending points are separate positions in space, because positions in space ten times wider apart fail to be discriminated as such when excited by the compass-points. It is the same with the retina. One's fingers when cast upon its peripheral portions cannot be counted—that is to say, the five retinal tracts which they occupy are not distinctly apprehended by the mind as five separate positions in space—and yet the slightest movement of the fingers is most vividly perceived as movement and nothing else. It is thus certain that our sense of movement, being so much more delicate than our sense of position, cannot possibly be derived from it.
1) The Sensation of Motion over Surfaces.—Physiologists have generally assumed that we can’t perceive motion until we recognize the starting and ending points and see that the body moving between them takes a certain amount of time. In reality, we only perceive the slowest motions this way. When I see the hand of a clock at XII and then at VI, I understand it has moved in between. When I notice the sun in the east and then in the west, I conclude it has moved across the sky. However, we can only make these conclusions based on what we already know in a more direct way, and it has been experimentally shown that we directly experience the sensation of motion. Czermak noted the difference between actually watching the second hand of a watch move when we focus on it, versus noticing it has changed position while looking at a different part of the face. In the first instance, we have a specific sensation that isn’t present in the second. If the reader can find a part of their skin—like their arm—where two compass points an inch apart are felt as one impression, and then traces lines a tenth of an inch long with a pencil point on that area, they will clearly sense the motion of the point and have a vague awareness of its direction. The perception of motion here doesn’t come from already knowing the starting and ending points are separate in space, because even points ten times further apart may not be recognized as such when stimulated by the compass points. The same applies to the retina. One can’t distinguish the separate locations occupied by their fingers on its peripheral parts—meaning the five retina areas they occupy aren’t perceived as five separate positions in space—and yet the smallest movement of the fingers is vividly felt as movement and nothing more. Thus, it is clear that our sense of movement is much more sensitive than our sense of position, and it can't originate from it.
Vierordt, at almost the same time, called attention to certain persistent illusions, amongst which are these: If another person gently trace a line across our wrist or finger, the latter being stationary, it will feel to us as if the member were moving in the opposite direction to the tracing point. If, on the contrary, we move our limb across a fixed point, it will seem as if the point were moving as well. If the reader will touch his forehead with his forefinger kept motionless, and then rotate the head so that the skin of the forehead passes beneath the finger's tip, he will have an irresistible sensation of the latter being itself in motion in the opposite direction to the head. So in abducting the fingers from each other; some may move and the rest be still, but the still ones will feel as if they were actively separating from the rest. These illusions, according to Vierordt, are survivals of a primitive form of perception, when motion was felt as such, but ascribed to the whole 'content' of consciousness, and not yet distinguished as belonging exclusively to one of its parts. When{72} our perception is fully developed we go beyond the mere relative motion of thing and ground, and can ascribe absolute motion to one of these components of our total object, and absolute rest to another. When, in vision for example, the whole field of view seems to move together, we think it is ourselves or our eyes which are moving; and any object in the foreground which may seem to move relatively to the background is judged by us to be really still. But primitively this discrimination is not perfectly made. The sensation of the motion spreads over all that we see and infects it. Any relative motion of object and retina both makes the object seem to move, and makes us feel ourselves in motion. Even now when our whole field of view really does move we get giddy, and feel as if we too were moving; and we still see an apparent motion of the entire field of view whenever we suddenly jerk our head and eyes or shake them quickly to and fro. Pushing our eyeballs gives the same illusion. We know in all these cases what really happens, but the conditions are unusual, so our primitive sensation persists unchecked. So it does when clouds float by the moon. We know the moon is still; but we see it move faster than the clouds. Even when we slowly move our eyes the primitive sensation persists under the victorious conception. If we notice closely the experience, we find that any object towards which we look appears moving to meet our eye.
Vierordt, around the same time, pointed out specific persistent illusions, including these: When someone lightly traces a line across our wrist or finger while the latter remains still, it feels as though the finger is moving in the opposite direction from where the tracing is happening. Conversely, if we move our limb across a fixed point, it’ll seem like the point itself is moving as well. If the reader touches their forehead with a stationary forefinger and then turns their head so that the skin of the forehead moves under the fingertip, they will feel an undeniable sensation of the fingertip moving in the opposite direction of the head. This also happens when separating the fingers; some may move while others stay still, but the still ones feel as if they are actively pulling away from the others. According to Vierordt, these illusions are remnants of a primitive way of perceiving, where motion was experienced as a whole but not yet distinguished as belonging to a specific part of our consciousness. When{72} our perception is fully developed, we can go beyond just the relative motion of an object and its background, and we can attribute absolute motion to one part of the total object and absolute stillness to another. For example, in vision, when the entire visual field appears to move together, we believe it’s ourselves or our eyes that are moving; any object in the foreground that seems to move relative to the background is perceived as actually remaining still. However, in a primitive state, this distinction isn’t made perfectly. The sensation of motion spreads throughout everything we see and affects it. Any relative motion between an object and the retina makes the object seem to move and makes us feel like we are in motion. Even now, when our whole field of view actually shifts, we can become dizzy, feeling as if we’re also moving; we perceive apparent motion in the entire field of view whenever we quickly jerk our head and eyes or shake them back and forth. Pushing our eyeballs creates the same illusion. We know what is truly happening in all these cases, but the situations are unusual, allowing our primitive sensations to persist unchallenged. This is also true when clouds pass by the moon; we know the moon is stationary, yet we see it moving faster than the clouds. Even when we slowly move our eyes, the primitive sensation remains even against our better understanding. If we observe closely, we find that any object we look at seems to be moving towards our eye.
But the most valuable contribution to the subject is the paper of G. H. Schneider,[27] who takes up the matter zoölogically, and shows by examples from every branch of the animal kingdom that movement is the quality by which animals most easily attract each other's attention. The instinct of 'shamming death' is no shamming of death at all, but rather a paralysis through fear, which saves the insect, crustacean, or other creature from being noticed at all by his enemy. It is paralleled in the human race by{73} the breath-holding stillness of the boy playing 'I spy,' to whom the seeker is near; and its obverse side is shown in our involuntary waving of arms, jumping up and down, and so forth, when we wish to attract someone's attention at a distance. Creatures 'stalking' their prey and creatures hiding from their pursuers alike show how immobility diminishes conspicuity. In the woods, if we are quiet, the squirrels and birds will actually touch us. Flies will light on stuffed birds and stationary frogs. On the other hand, the tremendous shock of feeling the thing we are sitting on begin to move, the exaggerated start it gives us to have an insect unexpectedly pass over our skin, or a cat noiselessly come and snuffle about our hand, the excessive reflex effects of tickling, etc., show how exciting the sensation of motion is per se. A kitten cannot help pursuing a moving ball. Impressions too faint to be cognized at all are immediately felt if they move. A fly sitting is unnoticed,—we feel it the moment it crawls. A shadow may be too faint to be perceived. If we hold a finger between our closed eyelid and the sunshine we do not notice its presence. The moment we move it to and fro, however, we discern it. Such visual perception as this reproduces the conditions of sight among the radiates.
But the most valuable contribution to the topic is the paper by G. H. Schneider,[27] who approaches the issue from a zoological perspective. He demonstrates, using examples from various branches of the animal kingdom, that movement is the key quality that most easily grabs the attention of other animals. The instinct of 'playing dead' isn’t really about pretending to be dead; instead, it’s a paralysis caused by fear that prevents the insect, crustacean, or other creature from being noticed at all by its predator. This can be compared to the stillness of a boy holding his breath while playing 'I spy,' when the seeker is close by; the opposite occurs when we wave our arms and jump around to get someone’s attention from a distance. Creatures that 'stalk' their prey and those that hide from their hunters both illustrate how staying still makes them less noticeable. In the woods, if we stay quiet, squirrels and birds will actually come close to us. Flies will land on stuffed birds and still frogs. On the flip side, the jarring surprise of feeling the surface we’re sitting on start to move, the sudden shock of an insect crawling over our skin, or a cat quietly approaching us, as well as the strong reflexive reactions from tickling, all highlight how stimulating the sensation of movement is in itself. A kitten can’t help but chase after a moving ball. Stimuli that are too faint to register at all are immediately sensed if they move. A fly sitting still goes unnoticed, but we notice it the moment it crawls. A shadow may be too subtle to see. If we hold a finger between our closed eyelid and the sunlight, we won’t notice it. However, as soon as we move it back and forth, we can see it. This kind of visual perception mimics the conditions of sight in radiates.
In ourselves, the main function of the peripheral parts of the retina is that of sentinels, which, when beams of light move over them, cry 'Who goes there?' and call the fovea to the spot. Most parts of the skin do but perform the same office for the finger-tips. Of course movement of surface under object is (for purposes of stimulation) equivalent to movement of object over surface. In exploring the shapes and sizes of things by either eye or skin the movements of these organs are incessant and unrestrainable. Every such movement draws the points and lines of the object across the surface, imprints them a hundred times more sharply, and drives them home to the attention. The immense part thus played by movements in our perceptive activity is held by many psychologists to prove that the{74} muscles are themselves the space-perceiving organ. Not surface-sensibility, but 'the muscular sense,' is for these writers the original and only revealer of objective extension. But they have all failed to notice with what peculiar intensity muscular movements call surface-sensibilities into play, and how largely the mere discernment of impressions depends on the mobility of the surfaces upon which they fall.
In our bodies, the main role of the peripheral parts of the retina is to act as sentinels, which shout 'Who’s there?' when light beams pass over them and alert the fovea to the location. Most areas of the skin serve a similar purpose for our fingertips. Of course, movement of surface under object is (for purposes of stimulation) equivalent to movement of object over surface. When we explore the shapes and sizes of things with either our eyes or skin, the movements of these organs are constant and unstoppable. Every movement pulls the points and lines of the object across the surface, marking them much more clearly and capturing our attention. Many psychologists believe that the significant role movements play in our perception shows that the{74} muscles themselves are the organs that perceive space. Rather than surface sensitivity, these writers argue that 'the muscular sense' is the primary and only way we reveal objective extension. However, they have all overlooked how intensely muscular movements activate surface sensitivities and how largely the ability to recognize impressions depends on the mobility of the surfaces they land on.
Our articular surfaces are tactile organs which become intensely painful when inflamed. Besides pressure, the only stimulus they receive is their motion upon each other. To the sensation of this motion more than anything else seems due the perception of the position which our limbs may have assumed. Patients cutaneously and muscularly anæsthetic in one leg can often prove that their articular sensibility remains, by showing (by movements of their well leg) the positions in which the surgeon may place their insensible one. Goldscheider in Berlin caused fingers, arms, and legs to be passively rotated upon their various joints in a mechanical apparatus which registered both the velocity of movement impressed and the amount of angular rotation. The minimal felt amounts of rotation were much less than a single angular degree in all the joints except those of the fingers. Such displacements as these, Goldscheider says, can hardly be detected by the eye. Anæsthesia of the skin produced by induction-currents had no disturbing effect on the perception, nor did the various degrees of pressure of the moving force upon the skin affect it. It became, in fact, all the more distinct in proportion as the concomitant pressure-feelings were eliminated by artificial anæsthesia. When the joints themselves, however, were made artificially anæsthetic, the perception of the movement grew obtuse and the angular rotations had to be much increased before they were perceptible. All these facts prove, according to Herr Goldscheider, that the joint-surfaces and these alone are the seat of the impressions{75} by which the movements of our members are immediately perceived.
Our joint surfaces are sensory organs that become really painful when they’re inflamed. Besides pressure, the only stimulus they react to is their movement against each other. It seems that our perception of how our limbs are positioned relies mostly on this motion. Patients who are unable to feel their skin or muscles in one leg can often demonstrate that they still have joint sensation by using movements in their unaffected leg to show the positions where a surgeon might place their numb leg. Goldscheider in Berlin had fingers, arms, and legs rotated passively at their joints in a mechanical device that recorded both the speed of the movement and the amount of angular rotation. The smallest detectable rotations were less than a single angular degree in all joints except for the fingers. According to Goldscheider, such slight movements can barely be seen. Skin numbness caused by induced currents didn’t interfere with this sensation, nor did different levels of pressure from the moving force on the skin affect it. In fact, the sensations became clearer as the pressure feelings were lessened by artificial anesthesia. However, when the joints themselves were made numb, the perception of movement decreased, and the angular rotations had to be increased significantly before they could be felt. All these findings suggest, according to Herr Goldscheider, that the joint surfaces are the only location where the impressions{75} that allow us to perceive the movements of our limbs are processed.
2) Sensations of Movement through Space.—These may be divided, into feelings of rotation and feelings of translation. As was stated at the end of the chapter on the ear, the labyrinth (semicircular canals, utricle and saccule) seems to have nothing to do with hearing. It is conclusively established to-day that the semicircular canals are the organs of a sixth special sense, that namely of rotation. When subjectively excited, this sensation is known as dizziness or vertigo, and rapidly engenders the farther feeling of nausea. Irritative disease of the inner ear causes intense vertigo (Ménière's disease). Traumatic irritation of the canals in birds and mammals makes the animals tumble and throw themselves about in a way best explained by supposing them to suffer from false sensations of falling, etc., which they compensate by reflex muscular acts that throw them the other way. Galvanic irritation of the membranous canals in pigeons cause just the same compensatory movements of head and eye which actual rotations impressed on the creatures produce. Deaf and dumb persons (amongst whom many must have had their auditory nerves or labyrinths destroyed by the same disease which took away their hearing) are in a very large percentage of cases found quite insusceptible of being made dizzy by rotation. Purkinje and Mach have shown that, whatever the organ of the sense of rotation may be, it must have its seat in the head. The body is excluded by Mach's elaborate experiments.
2) Sensations of Movement through Space.—These can be divided into feelings of rotation and feelings of translation. As mentioned at the end of the chapter on the ear, the labyrinth (semicircular canals, utricle, and saccule) seems unrelated to hearing. It's now clearly established that the semicircular canals serve as organs for a sixth special sense, specifically that of rotation. When this sense is subjectively stimulated, it is experienced as dizziness or vertigo, which quickly leads to a feeling of nausea. Conditions affecting the inner ear can cause severe vertigo (like Ménière's disease). Traumatic irritation of the canals in birds and mammals causes them to tumble and move around in a way that suggests they are experiencing false sensations of falling, which they try to offset with reflexive muscle movements. Galvanic irritation of the membranous canals in pigeons results in the same compensatory movements of head and eye as actual rotations do. Deaf and mute individuals (many of whom likely had their auditory nerves or labyrinths damaged by the same condition that took away their hearing) often show a significant inability to feel dizzy from rotation. Purkinje and Mach demonstrated that, regardless of where the sense of rotation is located, it must be in the head. The body is excluded based on Mach's detailed experiments.
The semicircular canals, being, as it were, six little spirit-levels in three rectangular planes, seem admirably adapted to be organs of a sense of rotation. We need only suppose that when the head turns in the plane of any one of them, the relative inertia of the endolymph momentarily increases its pressure on the nerve-termini in the appropriate ampulla, which pressure starts a current towards the central organ for feeling vertigo. This organ seems to be{76} the cerebellum, and the teleology of the whole business would appear to be the maintenance of the upright position. If a man stand with shut eyes and attend to his body, he will find that he is hardly for a moment in equilibrium. Incipient fallings towards every side in succession are incessantly repaired by muscular contractions which restore the balance; and although impressions on the tendons, ligaments, foot-soles, joints, etc., doubtless are among the causes of the compensatory contractions, yet the strongest and most special reflex arc would seem to be that which has the sensation of incipient vertigo for its afferent member. This is experimentally proved to be much more easily excited than the other sensations referred to. When the cerebellum is disorganized the reflex response fails to occur properly and loss of equilibrium is the result. Irritation of the cerebellum produces vertigo, loss of balance, and nausea; and galvanic currents through the head produce various forms of vertigo correlated with their direction. It seems probable that direct excitement of the cerebellar centre is responsible for these feelings. In addition to these corporeal reflexes the sense of rotation causes compensatory rollings of the eyeballs in the opposite direction, to which some of the subjective phenomena of optical vertigo are due. Steady rotation gives no sensation; it is only starting or stopping, or, more generally speaking, acceleration (positive or negative), which impresses the end-organs in the ampullæ. The sensation always has a little duration, however; and the feeling of reversed movement after whirling violently may last for nearly a minute, slowly fading out.
The semicircular canals, acting like six tiny spirit levels in three different planes, are perfectly suited to detect rotation. When the head turns within the plane of any of these canals, the relative inertia of the endolymph temporarily increases the pressure on the nerve endings in the corresponding ampulla. This pressure sends signals to the central organ responsible for feeling vertigo, which seems to be{76} the cerebellum. The main purpose of this entire system appears to be maintaining an upright position. If a person stands with their eyes closed and focuses on their body, they'll notice they're hardly ever balanced. Small falls in every direction continually trigger muscle contractions that help restore balance. Although signals from the tendons, ligaments, soles of the feet, joints, etc., likely contribute to these compensatory contractions, the most significant reflex appears to be tied to the sensation of initial vertigo. This has been experimentally shown to be triggered much more easily than other sensations. When the cerebellum is damaged, the reflex response doesn’t work properly, leading to a loss of balance. Irritating the cerebellum causes vertigo, loss of balance, and nausea, and applying electrical currents to the head results in various types of vertigo, depending on their direction. It seems likely that the direct stimulation of the cerebellar center is behind these sensations. Besides these physical reflexes, the sensation of rotation leads to compensatory eye movements in the opposite direction, which contribute to some of the subjective experiences of optical vertigo. Steady rotation doesn’t produce any sensation; it’s only the starting, stopping, or, more generally, acceleration (either positive or negative) that stimulates the end-organs in the ampullae. The sensation always lasts a little while, though, and the feeling of reversed movement after vigorous spinning can persist for nearly a minute, gradually fading away.
The cause of the sense of translation (movement forwards or backwards) is more open to dispute. The seat of this sensation has been assigned to the semicircular canals when compounding their currents to the brain; and also to the utricle. The latest experimenter, M. Delage, considers that it cannot possibly be in the head, and assigns it rather to the entire body, so far as its parts (blood-vessels,{77} viscera, etc.) are movable against each other and suffer friction or pressure from their relative inertia when a movement of translation begins. M. Delage's exclusion of the labyrinth from this form of sensibility cannot, however, yet be considered definitively established, so the matter may rest with this mention.{78}
The reason for the sense of translation (moving forwards or backwards) is still up for debate. This sensation has been linked to the semicircular canals when they send signals to the brain and also to the utricle. The most recent researcher, M. Delage, argues that it can't possibly be located in the head and suggests that it comes from the entire body, particularly as its parts (blood vessels, {77} organs, etc.) move against each other and experience friction or pressure from their relative inertia when movement begins. However, M. Delage's dismissal of the labyrinth as part of this sensory experience cannot yet be considered definitively proven, so this topic may remain open for now.{78}
CHAPTER VII.
THE STRUCTURE OF THE BRAIN.[28]
Embryological Sketch.—The brain is a sort of pons asinorum in anatomy until one gets a certain general conception of it as a clue. Then it becomes a comparatively simple affair. The clue is given by comparative anatomy and especially by embryology. At a certain moment in the development of all the higher vertebrates the cerebro-spinal axis is formed by a hollow tube containing fluid and terminated in front by an enlargement separated by transverse constrictions into three 'cerebral vesicles,' so called (see Fig. 28). The walls of these vesicles thicken in most{79} places, change in others into a thin vascular tissue, and in others again send out processes which produce an appearance of farther subdivision. The middle vesicle or mid-brain (Mb in the figures) is the least affected by change. Its upper walls thicken into the optic lobes, or corpora quadrigemina as they are named in man; its lower walls become the so-called peduncles or crura of the brain; and its cavity dwindles into the aqueduct of Silvius. A section through the adult human mid-brain is shown in Fig. 31.
Embryological Sketch.—The brain is somewhat of a pons asinorum in anatomy until you have a basic understanding of it as a starting point. Once you have that, it becomes relatively straightforward. The understanding comes from comparative anatomy and especially from embryology. At a certain stage in the development of all higher vertebrates, the cerebro-spinal axis forms as a hollow tube filled with fluid, ending in front with an enlargement that is divided by transverse constrictions into three 'cerebral vesicles' (see Fig. 28). The walls of these vesicles thicken in most places, become a thin vascular tissue in others, and in some instances, extend processes that create an appearance of further subdivision. The middle vesicle, or mid-brain (Mb in the figures), is the least changed. Its upper walls thicken into the optic lobes, also known as corpora quadrigemina; its lower walls form the so-called peduncles or crura of the brain; and its cavity reduces to the aqueduct of Silvius. A section through the adult human mid-brain is shown in Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.—The 'nates' are the anterior corpora quadrigemina, the spot above aq is a section of the sylvian aqueduct, and the tegmentum and two 'feet' together make the Crura. These are marked C.C., and a cross (+) marks the aqueduct, in Fig. 32.
Fig. 31.—The 'nates' are the front part of the corpora quadrigemina, the area above aq is a cut of the sylvian aqueduct, and the tegmentum along with the two 'feet' together form the Crura. These are indicated with C.C., and a cross (+) indicates the aqueduct, in Fig. 32.
The anterior and posterior vesicles undergo much more considerable change. The walls of the posterior vesicle thicken enormously in their foremost portion and form the cerebellum on top (Cb in all the figures) and the pons Varolii below (P.V. in Fig. 33). In its hindmost portions the posterior vesicle thickens below into the medulla oblongata (Mo in all the figures), whilst on top its walls thin out and melt, so that one can pass a probe into the cavity without breaking through any truly nervous tissue. The cavity which one thus enters from without is named the fourth ventricle (4 in Figs. 32 and 33). One can run the probe forward{80} through it, passing first under the cerebellum and then under a thin sheet of nervous tissue (the valve of Vieussens) just anterior thereto, as far as the aqueduct of Silvius. Passing through this, the probe emerges forward into what was once the cavity of the anterior vesicle. But the covering has melted away at this place, and the cavity now forms a deep compressed pit or groove between the two walls of the vesicle, and is called the third ventricle (3 in Figs. 32 and 33). The 'aqueduct of Sylvius' is in consequence of this connection often called the iter a tertio ad quartum ventriculum. The walls of the vesicle form the optic thalami (Th in all the figures).
The anterior and posterior vesicles experience significant changes. The walls of the posterior vesicle thicken greatly at the front, forming the cerebellum on top (Cb in all the figures) and the pons Varolii below (P.V. in Fig. 33). In the back portions, the posterior vesicle thickens beneath into the medulla oblongata (Mo in all the figures), while the top part thins out and dissolves, allowing a probe to enter the cavity without damaging any actual nervous tissue. The cavity accessible from the outside is called the fourth ventricle (4 in Figs. 32 and 33). You can push the probe forward{80} through it, first going under the cerebellum and then under a thin layer of nervous tissue (the valve of Vieussens) right in front of it, all the way to the aqueduct of Silvius. After passing through, the probe comes out into what used to be the cavity of the anterior vesicle. However, the covering has dissolved at this point, and the cavity now forms a deep compressed pit or groove between the two walls of the vesicle, referred to as the third ventricle (3 in Figs. 32 and 33). The 'aqueduct of Sylvius' is often called the iter a tertio ad quartum ventriculum due to this connection. The walls of the vesicle form the optic thalami (Th in all the figures).
From the anterior vesicle just in front of the thalami there buds out on either side an enlargement, into which the cavity of the vesicle continues, and which becomes the hemisphere of that side. In man its walls thicken enormously and form folds, the so-called convolutions, on their surface. At the same time they grow backwards rather than forwards of their starting-point just in front of the thalamus, arching over the latter; and growing fastest along their top circumference, they end by bending downwards and forwards again when they have passed the rear end of the thalamus. When fully developed in man, they overlay and cover in all the other parts of the brain. Their cavities form the lateral ventricles, easier to understand by a dissection than by a description. A probe can be passed into either of them from the third ventricle at its anterior{81} end; and like the third ventricle, their wall is melted down along a certain line, forming a long cleft through which they can be entered without rupturing the nervous tissue. This cleft, on account of the growth of the hemisphere outwards, backwards, and then downwards from its starting point, has got rolled in and tucked away beneath the apparent surface.[29]
From the front vesicle just in front of the thalami, there's an outgrowth on each side that becomes larger, continuing the cavity of the vesicle, and which develops into the hemisphere on that side. In humans, the walls thicken significantly and create folds, known as convolutions, on their surface. At the same time, they grow more towards the back than the front from where they originally started, just in front of the thalamus, arching over it; they grow fastest along their upper edges, ultimately bending downwards and forwards again after passing the back end of the thalamus. When fully developed in humans, they cover all the other parts of the brain. Their cavities become the lateral ventricles, which are easier to understand through dissection rather than description. A probe can be inserted into either of them from the front end of the third ventricle; and like the third ventricle, their wall is reduced along a specific line, creating a long cleft that allows access without damaging the nervous tissue. This cleft, due to the hemisphere's outward, backward, and then downward growth from its starting point, has become rolled in and tucked beneath the visible surface.[29]
At first the two hemispheres are connected only with their respective thalami. But during the fourth and fifth months of embryonic life they become connected with each other above the thalami through the growth between them of a massive system of transverse fibres which crosses the median line like a great bridge and is called the corpus callosum. These fibres radiate in the walls of both hemispheres and form a direct connection between the convolutions of the right and of the left side. Beneath the corpus callosum another system of fibres called the fornix is formed, between which and the corpus callosum there is a peculiar connection. Just in front of the thalami, where the hemispheres begin their growth, a ganglionic mass called the corpus striatum (C.S., Figs. 32 and 33) is formed in their wall. It is complex in structure, consisting of two main parts, called nucleus lenticularis and nucleus candatus respectively. The figures, with their respective explanations, will give a better idea of the farther details of structure than any verbal description; so, after some practical directions for dissecting the organ, I will pass to a brief account of the physiological relations of its different parts to each other.
At first, the two hemispheres are connected only by their thalami. However, during the fourth and fifth months of embryonic development, they connect above the thalami through the growth of a large network of transverse fibers that crosses the middle line like a big bridge, known as the corpus callosum. These fibers spread out in the walls of both hemispheres and create a direct link between the convolutions on the right and left sides. Beneath the corpus callosum, another collection of fibers, called the fornix, forms, and there is a unique connection between it and the corpus callosum. Just in front of the thalami, where the hemispheres start to grow, a cluster of nerve cells called the corpus striatum (C.S., Figs. 32 and 33) develops in their wall. It has a complex structure, consisting of two main parts known as nucleus lenticularis and nucleus caudatus, respectively. The figures with their corresponding explanations provide a clearer understanding of the structural details than any verbal description can, so after some practical tips for dissecting the organ, I will give a brief overview of the physiological relationships between its different parts.
Dissection of Sheep's Brain.—The way really to understand the brain is to dissect it. The brains of mammals differ only in their proportions, and from the sheep's one can learn all that is essential in man's. The student is therefore strongly urged to dissect a sheep's brain. Full directions of the order of procedure are given in the human dissecting{82} books, e.g. Holden's Practical Anatomy (Churchill), Morrell's Student's Manual of Comparative Anatomy and Guide to Dissection (Longmans), and Foster and Langley's Practical Physiology (Macmillan). For the use of classes who cannot procure these books I subjoin a few practical notes. The instruments needed are a small saw, a chisel with a shoulder, and a hammer with a hook on its handle, all three of which form part of the regular medical autopsy-kit and can be had of surgical-instrument-makers. In addition a scalpel, a pair of scissors, a pair of dissecting-forceps, and a silver probe are required. The solitary student can find home-made substitutes for all these things but the forceps, which he ought to buy.
Dissection of Sheep's Brain.—The best way to really understand the brain is to dissect it. The brains of mammals only differ in size and shape, and you can learn all the important aspects of the human brain by studying a sheep's brain. Therefore, students are strongly encouraged to dissect a sheep's brain. Detailed instructions on how to proceed can be found in human dissection{82} books, such as Holden's Practical Anatomy (Churchill), Morrell's Student's Manual of Comparative Anatomy and Guide to Dissection (Longmans), and Foster and Langley's Practical Physiology (Macmillan). For classes that can't get these books, I’m providing a few practical notes. You will need a small saw, a chisel with a shoulder, and a hammer with a hook on its handle; all three are part of a standard medical autopsy kit and can be purchased from surgical instrument makers. Additionally, you'll need a scalpel, a pair of scissors, a pair of dissecting forceps, and a silver probe. A solitary student can find homemade alternatives for all these tools except for the forceps, which should be bought.
The first thing is to get off the skull-cap. Make two saw-cuts, through the prominent portion of each condyle (or articular surface bounding the hole at the back of the skull, where the spinal cord enters) and passing forwards to the temples of the animal. Then make two cuts, one on each side, which cross these and meet in an angle on the frontal bone. By actual trial, one will find the best direction for the saw-cuts. It is hard to saw entirely through the skull-bone without in some places also sawing into the brain. Here is where the chisel comes in—one can break by a smart blow on it with the hammer any parts of the skull not quite sawn through. When the skull-cap is ready to come off one will feel it 'wobble.' Insert then the hook under its forward end and pull firmly. The bony skull-cap alone will come away, leaving the periosteum of the inner surface adhering to that of the base of the skull, enveloping the brain, and forming the so-called dura mater or outer one of its 'meninges.' This dura mater should be slit open round the margins, when the brain will be exposed wrapped in its nearest membrane, the pia mater, full of blood-vessels whose branches penetrate the tissues.
The first step is to remove the skullcap. Make two saw cuts through the prominent part of each condyle (the joint surface that outlines the hole at the back of the skull where the spinal cord enters) and extend these cuts forward to the animal's temples. Then make two additional cuts on each side that cross these and meet in an angle on the frontal bone. You’ll find the best direction for the saw cuts through practical experience. It can be challenging to saw all the way through the skull without occasionally cutting into the brain. This is where the chisel comes in— you can break any parts of the skull that are not completely sawed through with a sharp blow from a hammer. When the skullcap is ready to come off, you’ll feel it 'wobble.' Next, insert the hook under the front edge and pull firmly. Only the bony skullcap will come off, leaving the periosteum of the inner surface attached to the base of the skull, which wraps around the brain, forming what is known as the dura mater, the outer layer of the 'meninges.' The dura mater should be cut open around the edges so that the brain will be exposed, wrapped in its closest membrane, the pia mater, which is full of blood vessels whose branches penetrate the tissues.
The brain in its pia mater should now be carefully 'shelled out.' Usually it is best to begin at the forward end, turning it up there and gradually working backwards. The olfactory lobes are liable to be torn; they must be carefully scooped from the pits in the base of the skull to which they adhere by the branches which they send through the bone into the nose-cavity. It is well to have a little blunt curved instrument expressly for this purpose. Next the optic nerves tie the brain down, and must be cut through—close to the chiasma is easiest. After that comes the pituitary body, which has to be left behind. It is attached by a neck, the so-called infundibulum, into the upper part of which the cavity of the third ventricle is prolonged downwards for a short distance. It has no known function and is probably a 'rudimentary organ.' Other nerves, into the detail of which I shall not go, must be cut successively. Their places in the human brain are shown in Fig. 34. When they{83} are divided, and the portion of dura mater (tentorium) which projects between the hemispheres and the cerebellum is cut through at its edges, the brain comes readily out.
The brain in its pia mater should now be carefully 'shelled out.' Usually, it's best to start at the front end, lifting it there and gradually working your way back. The olfactory lobes can easily get torn; you need to gently scoop them out from the pits in the base of the skull where they stick due to the branches they send through the bone into the nasal cavity. It's helpful to have a small blunt curved instrument specifically for this. Next, the optic nerves hold the brain down and should be cut close to the chiasma for ease. After that, you'll encounter the pituitary body, which needs to be left behind. It's connected by a neck called the infundibulum, into which the cavity of the third ventricle extends downwards a bit. It has no known function and is probably just a 'rudimentary organ.' Other nerves, which I won't detail here, need to be cut one after the other. Their locations in the human brain are shown in Fig. 34. When they{83} are cut, and the portion of dura mater (tentorium) that projects between the hemispheres and the cerebellum is cut at its edges, the brain will come out easily.

Fig. 34.—The human brain from below, with its nerves numbered, after Henle I, olfactory; II, optic; III, oculo-motorius; IV, trochlearis; V, trifacial; VI, abducens oculi; VII, facial; VIII, auditory; IX, glosso-pharyngeal; X, pneumogastric; XI, spinal accessory; XII, hypoglossal; ncI, first cervical, etc.
Fig. 34.—The human brain viewed from below, showing the numbered nerves: I, olfactory; II, optic; III, oculomotor; IV, trochlear; V, trigeminal; VI, abducens; VII, facial; VIII, auditory; IX, glossopharyngeal; X, vagus; XI, spinal accessory; XII, hypoglossal; ncI, first cervical, etc.
It is best examined fresh. If numbers of brains have to be prepared and kept, I have found it a good plan to put them first in a solution of chloride of zinc, just dense enough at first to float them, and to leave them for a fortnight or less. This softens the pia mater, which can then be removed in large shreds, after which it is enough to place them in quite weak alcohol to preserve them indefinitely, tough, elastic, and in their natural shape, though bleached to a uniform white color. Before immersion in the chloride all the more superficial adhesions of the parts must be broken through, to bring{84} the fluid into contact with a maximum of surface. If the brain is used fresh, the pia mater had better be removed carefully in most places with the forceps, scalpel, and scissors. Over the grooves between the cerebellum and hemispheres, and between the cerebellum and medulla oblongata, thin cobwebby moist transparent vestiges of the arachnoid membrane will be found.
It’s best to examine it fresh. If you need to prepare and store several brains, I’ve found that putting them first in a zinc chloride solution, just dense enough to float them, works well for about two weeks or less. This softens the pia mater, which can then be removed in large pieces. After that, placing them in very weak alcohol will preserve them indefinitely, keeping them tough, elastic, and in their natural shape, though bleached to a uniform white. Before immersing in the chloride, all the more superficial adhesions of the parts must be broken to maximize fluid contact with the surface. If the brain is being used fresh, it’s better to carefully remove the pia mater in most areas using forceps, scalpel, and scissors. You’ll find thin, cobweb-like, moist, transparent remnants of the arachnoid membrane over the grooves between the cerebellum and hemispheres, and between the cerebellum and the medulla oblongata.
The subdivisions may now be examined in due order. For the convolutions, blood-vessels, and nerves the more special books must be consulted.
The subdivisions can now be examined in order. For the folds, blood vessels, and nerves, more specific books should be consulted.
First, looked at from above, with the deep longitudinal fissure between them, the hemispheres are seen partly overlapping the intricately wrinkled cerebellum, which juts out behind, and covers in turn almost all the medulla oblongata. Drawing the hemispheres apart, the brilliant white corpus callosum is revealed, some half an inch below their surface. There is no median partition in the cerebellum, but a median elevation instead.
First, when viewed from above, with the deep longitudinal fissure between them, the hemispheres partially overlap the intricately wrinkled cerebellum, which sticks out at the back and nearly covers the entire medulla oblongata. Pulling the hemispheres apart reveals the bright white corpus callosum, located about half an inch beneath their surface. There isn’t a median partition in the cerebellum, but rather a median elevation.
Looking at the brain from below, one still sees the longitudinal fissure in the median line in front, and on either side of it the olfactory lobes, much larger than in man; the optic tracts and commissure or 'chiasma'; the infundibulum cut through just behind them; and behind that the single corpus albicans or mamillare, whose function is unknown and which is double in man. Next the crura appear, converging upon the pons as if carrying fibres back from either side. The pons itself succeeds, much less prominent than in man; and finally behind it comes the medulla oblongata, broad and flat and relatively large. The pons looks like a sort of collar uniting the two halves of the cerebellum, and surrounding the medulla, whose fibres by the time they have emerged anteriorly from beneath the collar have divided into the two crura. The inner relations are, however, somewhat less simple than what this description may suggest.
Looking at the brain from below, you can still see the longitudinal fissure in the middle at the front, and on either side are the olfactory lobes, which are much larger than in humans; the optic tracts and the commissure or 'chiasma'; the infundibulum sliced just behind them; and behind that is the single corpus albicans or mamillare, whose function is unknown and which is doubled in humans. Next, the crura appear, coming together at the pons as if bringing fibers back from each side. The pons itself follows, much less prominent than in humans; and finally, behind it is the medulla oblongata, broad and flat and relatively large. The pons looks like a kind of collar connecting the two halves of the cerebellum and surrounding the medulla, whose fibers, by the time they have emerged in front from under the collar, have divided into the two crura. However, the inner relationships are somewhat less straightforward than this description might suggest.
Now turn forward the cerebellum; pull out the vascular choroid plexuses of the pia, which fill the fourth ventricle; and bring the upper surface of the medulla oblongata into view. The fourth ventricle is a triangular depression terminating in a posterior point called the calamus scriptorius. (Here a very fine probe may pass into the central canal of the spinal cord.) The lateral boundary of the ventricle on either side is formed by the restiform body or column, which runs into the cerebellum, forming its inferior or posterior peduncle on that side. Including the calamus scriptorius by their divergence, the posterior columns of the spinal cord continue into the medulla as the fasciculi graciles. These are at first separated from the broad restiform bodies by a slight groove. But this disappears anteriorly, and the 'slender' and 'ropelike' strands soon become outwardly indistinguishable.{85}
Now move the cerebellum forward; pull out the vascular choroid plexuses from the pia that fill the fourth ventricle, and reveal the upper surface of the medulla oblongata. The fourth ventricle is a triangular depression that ends in a posterior point known as the calamus scriptorius. (Here, a very fine probe can slip into the central canal of the spinal cord.) The lateral edges of the ventricle on each side are bordered by the restiform body or column, which extends into the cerebellum, forming its inferior or posterior peduncle on that side. Including the calamus scriptorius due to their separation, the posterior columns of the spinal cord continue into the medulla as the fasciculi graciles. At first, these are separated from the wide restiform bodies by a slight groove, but this groove disappears at the front, and the 'slender' and 'ropelike' strands quickly become indistinguishable from the outside.{85}
Turn next to the ventral surface of the medulla, and note the anterior pyramids, two roundish cords, one on either side of the slight median groove. The pyramids are crossed and closed over anteriorly by the pons Varolii, a broad transverse band which surrounds them like a collar, and runs up into the cerebellum on either side, forming its middle peduncles. The pons has a slight median depression and its posterior edge is formed by the trapezium on either side. The trapezium consists of fibres which, instead of surrounding the pyramid, seem to start from alongside of it. It is not visible in man. The olivary bodies are small eminences on the medulla lying just laterally of the pyramids and below the trapezium.
Turn next to the underside of the medulla, and note the anterior pyramids, two roundish cords, one on each side of the slight median groove. The pyramids are crossed and covered at the front by the pons Varolii, a broad band that wraps around them like a collar and extends into the cerebellum on both sides, forming its middle peduncles. The pons has a slight dip in the center, and its back edge is shaped by the trapezium on either side. The trapezium is made up of fibers that, instead of surrounding the pyramid, seem to originate from beside it. It is not visible in humans. The olivary bodies are small bumps on the medulla located just to the sides of the pyramids and below the trapezium.

Fig. 35.—Fourth ventricle, etc. (Henle). III, third ventricle; IV, fourth ventricle; P, anterior, middle, and posterior peduncles of cerebellum cut through; Cr, restiform body; Fg, funiculus gracilis; Cq, corpora quadrigemina.
Fig. 35.—Fourth ventricle, etc. (Henle). III, third ventricle; IV, fourth ventricle; P, anterior, middle, and posterior peduncles of cerebellum cut through; Cr, restiform body; Fg, funiculus gracilis; Cq, corpora quadrigemina.
Now cut through the peduncles of the cerebellum, close to their entrance into that organ. They give one surface of section on each side, though they receive contributions from three directions. The{86} posterior and middle portions we have seen: the anterior peduncles pass forward to the corpora quadrigemina. The thin white layer of nerve-tissue between them and continuous with them is called the valve of Vieussens. It covers part of the canal from the fourth ventricle to the third. The cerebellum being removed, examine it, and cut sections to show the peculiar distribution of white and gray matter, forming an appearance called the arbor vitæ in the books.
Now cut through the stalks of the cerebellum, close to where they enter the organ. They create one surface of the cut on each side, even though they receive input from three directions. The {86} posterior and middle sections we have seen: the anterior stalks extend forward to the corpora quadrigemina. The thin white layer of nerve tissue between them, which is continuous with them, is called the valve of Vieussens. It covers part of the channel from the fourth ventricle to the third. After removing the cerebellum, examine it, and cut sections to show the unique arrangement of white and gray matter, creating a pattern referred to as the arbor vitæ in textbooks.
Now bend up the posterior edge of the hemispheres, exposing the corpora quadrigemina (of which the anterior pair are dubbed the nates and the posterior the testes), and noticing the pineal gland, a small median organ situated just in front of them and probably, like the pituitary body, a vestige of something useful in premammalian times. The rounded posterior edge of the corpus callosum is visible now passing from one hemisphere to the other. Turn it still farther up, letting the medulla, etc., hang down as much as possible and trace the under surface from this edge forward. It is broad behind but narrows forward, becoming continuous with the fornix. The anterior stem, so to speak, of this organ plunges down just in front of the optic thalami, which now appear with the fornix arching over them, and the median third ventricle between them. The margins of the fornix, as they pass backwards, diverge laterally farther than the margins of the corpus callosum, and under the name of corpora fimbriata are carried into the lateral ventricles, as will be seen again.
Now lift the back edge of the hemispheres to reveal the corpora quadrigemina (the front pair is called the nates and the back pair the testes), and notice the pineal gland, a small median structure located just in front of them that likely serves as a remnant of something functional from pre-mammalian times, similar to the pituitary gland. You can now see the rounded back edge of the corpus callosum connecting the two hemispheres. Tilt it up further, allowing the medulla and other parts to hang down as much as possible, and trace the underside from this edge forward. It’s wide at the back but narrows as it moves forward, connecting with the fornix. The front part of this structure dives down just in front of the optic thalami, which now come into view with the fornix arching above them and the median third ventricle located between them. As the edges of the fornix extend backward, they spread out laterally further than the edges of the corpus callosum and are referred to as corpora fimbriata, which extend into the lateral ventricles, as will be discussed later.
It takes a good topographical mind to understand these ventricles clearly, even when they are followed with eye and hand. A verbal description is absolutely useless. The essential thing to remember is that they are offshoots from the original cavity (now the third ventricle) of the anterior vesicle, and that a great split has occurred in the walls of the hemispheres so that they (the lateral ventricles) now communicate with the exterior along a cleft which appears sickle shaped, as it were, and folded in.
It takes a sharp spatial mind to really grasp these ventricles, even when you're looking at them and touching them. Words alone don't help at all. The key thing to keep in mind is that they branch off from the original cavity (now the third ventricle) of the front part of the brain, and that a significant split has happened in the walls of the hemispheres so that they (the lateral ventricles) now connect to the outside through a gap that looks somewhat like a folded sickle.
The student will probably examine the relations of the parts in various ways. But he will do well to begin in any case by cutting horizontal slices off the hemispheres almost down to the level of the corpus callosum, and examining the distribution of gray and white matter on the surfaces of section, any one of which is the so-called centrum ovale. Then let him cut down in a fore-and-aft direction along the edge of the corpus callosum, till he comes 'through' and draw the hemispherical margin of the cut outwards—he will see a space which is the ventricle, and which farther cutting along the side and removing of its hemisphere-roof will lay more bare. The most conspicuous object on its floor is the nucleus caudatus of the corpus striatum.
The student will likely explore the relationships of the parts in different ways. However, it’s best to start by making horizontal slices of the hemispheres down to the level of the corpus callosum, and examining the distribution of gray and white matter on the surfaces of the sections; each section represents the so-called centrum ovale. Next, he should cut in a front-to-back direction along the edge of the corpus callosum until he breaks through, then pull the hemispherical margin of the cut outward—this will reveal a space that is the ventricle, and further cutting along the side and removing its hemisphere roof will expose more. The most noticeable feature on its floor is the nucleus caudatus of the corpus striatum.

Fig. 36.—Horizontal section of human brain just above the thalami.—Ccl, corpus callosum in section; Cs, corpus striatum; Sl, septum lucidum; Cf, columns of the fornix; Tho, optic thalami; Cn, pineal gland. (After Henle.)
Fig. 36.—Horizontal section of the human brain just above the thalami.—Ccl, corpus callosum in section; Cs, corpus striatum; Sl, septum lucidum; Cf, columns of the fornix; Tho, optic thalami; Cn, pineal gland. (After Henle.)
Cut the corpus callosum transversely through near its posterior edge and bend the anterior portion of it forwards and sideways. The rear edge (splenium) left in situ bends round and downwards and becomes continuous with the fornix. The anterior part is also continuous with the fornix, but more along the median line, where a thinnish membrane, the septum lucidum, triangular in shape, reaching from the one body to the other, practically forms a sort of partition between the{88} contiguous portion of the lateral ventricles on the two sides. Break through the septum if need be and expose the upper surface of the fornix, broad behind and narrow in front where its anterior pillars plunge down in front of the third ventricle (from a thickening in whose anterior walls they were originally formed), and finally penetrate the corpus albicans. Cut these pillars through and fold them back, exposing the thalamic portion of the brain, and noting the under surface of the fornix. Its diverging posterior pillars run backwards, downwards, and then forwards again, forming with their sharp edges the corpora fimbriata, which bound the cleft by which the ventricle lies open. The semi-cylindrical welts behind the corpora fimbriata and parallel thereto in the wall of the ventricle are the hippocampi. Imagine the fornix and corpus callosum shortened in the fore-and-aft direction to a transverse cord; imagine the hemispheres not having grown backwards and downwards round the thalamus; and the corpus fimbriatum on either side would then be the upper or anterior margin of a split in the wall of the hemispheric ventricle of which the lower and posterior margin would be the posterior border of the corpus striatum where it grows out of the thalamus.
Cut the corpus callosum across near its back edge and bend the front part forward and sideways. The back edge (splenium) left in situ curves around and downwards and connects with the fornix. The front part is also connected to the fornix, but more towards the middle, where a thin membrane, the septum lucidum, shaped like a triangle, stretches from one side to the other, creating a kind of partition between the{88} adjacent sections of the lateral ventricles on both sides. If necessary, break through the septum to reveal the upper surface of the fornix, which is wide at the back and narrow at the front where its anterior pillars drop down in front of the third ventricle (from a thickening in its front walls from which they were originally formed), and eventually reach the corpus albicans. Cut these pillars and fold them back to reveal the thalamic part of the brain, also observing the underside of the fornix. Its diverging posterior pillars extend back, down, and then forward again, creating sharp edges that form the corpora fimbriata, which define the gap through which the ventricle is open. The semi-cylindrical areas behind the corpora fimbriata, parallel to them in the wall of the ventricle, are the hippocampi. Imagine the fornix and corpus callosum shortened from front to back to form a transverse cord; picture the hemispheres not having developed backwards and downwards around the thalamus; then the corpus fimbriatum on either side would represent the upper or front edge of a split in the wall of the hemispheric ventricle, with the lower and back edge being the rear border of the corpus striatum where it extends from the thalamus.
The little notches just behind the anterior pillar of the fornix and between them and the thalami are the so-called foramina of Monro through which the plexus of vessels, etc., passes from the median to the lateral ventricles.
The small indentations located just behind the front part of the fornix and between them and the thalami are known as the foramina of Monro, through which the network of blood vessels and other structures passes from the middle ventricles to the side ventricles.
See the thick middle commissure joining the two thalami, just as the corpus callosum and fornix join the hemispheres. These are all embryological aftergrowths. Seek also the anterior commissure crossing just in front of the anterior pillars of the fornix, as well as the posterior commissure with its lateral prolongations along the thalami, just below the pineal gland.
See the thick middle commissure connecting the two thalami, just like the corpus callosum and fornix connect the hemispheres. These are all embryological extensions. Also look for the anterior commissure crossing right in front of the anterior pillars of the fornix, and the posterior commissure with its lateral extensions along the thalami, just below the pineal gland.
On a median section, note the thinnish anterior wall of the third ventricle and its prolongation downwards into the infundibulum.
On a middle section, notice the thin anterior wall of the third ventricle and its extension downward into the infundibulum.
Turn up or cut off the rear end of one hemisphere so as to see clearly the optic tracts turning upwards towards the rear corner of the thalamus. The corpora geniculata to which they also go, distinct in man, are less so in the sheep. The lower ones are visible between the optic-tract band and the 'testes,' however.
Turn up or remove the back part of one hemisphere to clearly see the optic tracts heading upwards towards the back corner of the thalamus. The corpora geniculata that they connect to, which are distinct in humans, are less so in sheep. However, the lower ones are visible between the optic-tract band and the 'testes.'
The brain's principal parts are thus passed in review. A longitudinal section of the whole organ through the median line will be found most instructive (Fig. 37). The student should also (on a fresh brain, or one hardened in bichromate of potash or ammonia to save the contrast of color between white and gray matter) make transverse sections through the nates and crura, and through the
The main parts of the brain have now been reviewed. A longitudinal section of the entire organ along the median line is very informative (Fig. 37). The student should also (on a fresh brain, or one preserved in bichromate of potash or ammonia to maintain the contrast between white and gray matter) make transverse sections through the nates and crura, and through the

Fig. 37.—Median section of human brain below the hemispheres. Th, thalamus; Cg, corpora quadrigemina; VIII, third ventricle; Com, middle commissure; F, columns of fornix; Inf, infundibulum; Op.n, optic nerve; Pit, pituitary body; Av, arbor vitæ. (After Obersteiner).
Fig. 37.—Median section of the human brain below the hemispheres. Th, thalamus; Cg, corpora quadrigemina; VIII, third ventricle; Com, middle commissure; F, columns of fornix; Inf, infundibulum; Op.n, optic nerve; Pit, pituitary gland; Av, arbor vitae. (After Obersteiner).
hemispheres just in front of the corpus albicans. The latter section shows on each side the nucleus lenticularis of the corpus striatum, and also the inner capsule (see Fig. 38, Nl, and Ic).
hemispheres just in front of the corpus albicans. The latter section shows on each side the nucleus lenticularis of the corpus striatum, and also the inner capsule (see Fig. 38, Nl, and Ic).

Fig. 38.—Transverse section through right hemisphere (after Gegenbaur). Cc, corpus callosum; Pf, pillars of fornix; Ic, internal capsule; V, third ventricle; Nl, nucleus lenticularis.
Fig. 38.—Transverse section through the right hemisphere (after Gegenbaur). Cc, corpus callosum; Pf, pillars of fornix; Ic, internal capsule; V, third ventricle; Nl, nucleus lenticularis.
When all is said and done, the fact remains that, for the beginner, the understanding of the brain's structure is not an easy thing. It must be gone over and forgotten and learned again many times before it is definitively assimilated by the mind. But patience and repetition, here as elsewhere, will bear their perfect fruit.{91}
When everything is considered, the truth is that, for beginners, grasping the structure of the brain isn’t an easy task. It has to be reviewed, forgotten, and relearned many times before it is truly understood. However, patience and repetition, just like in other areas, will ultimately yield great results.{91}
CHAPTER VIII.
THE FUNCTIONS OF THE BRAIN.
General Idea of Nervous Function.—If I begin chopping the foot of a tree, its branches are unmoved by my act, and its leaves murmur as peacefully as ever in the wind. If, on the contrary, I do violence to the foot of a fellow-man, the rest of his body instantly responds to the aggression by movements of alarm or defence. The reason of this difference is that the man has a nervous system, whilst the tree has none; and the function of the nervous system is to bring each part into harmonious coöperation with every other. The afferent nerves, when excited by some physical irritant, be this as gross in its mode of operation as a chopping axe or as subtle as the waves of light, conveys the excitement to the nervous centres. The commotion set up in the centres does not stop there, but discharges through the efferent nerves, exciting movements which vary with the animal and with the irritant applied. These acts of response have usually the common character of being of service. They ward off the noxious stimulus and support the beneficial one; whilst if, in itself indifferent, the stimulus be a sign of some distant circumstance of practical importance, the animal's acts are addressed to this circumstance so as to avoid its perils or secure its benefits, as the case may be. To take a common example, if I hear the conductor calling 'All aboard!' as I enter the station, my heart first stops, then palpitates, and my legs respond to the air-waves falling on my tympanum by quickening their movements. If I stumble as I run, the sensation of falling provokes a movement of the hands towards the direction of the fall, the effect of which is to shield the{92} body from too sudden a shock. If a cinder enter my eye, its lids close forcibly and a copious flow of tears tends to wash it out.
General Idea of Nervous Function.—If I start chopping the foot of a tree, its branches remain unaffected by what I'm doing, and its leaves rustle quietly in the wind as usual. On the other hand, if I harm a person's foot, the rest of their body immediately reacts to the injury with movements of alarm or defense. The reason for this difference is that a person has a nervous system, while a tree does not; and the purpose of the nervous system is to coordinate all parts of the body in harmony. The sensory nerves, when stimulated by some physical irritant—whether it's something as blunt as an axe or as subtle as rays of light—send that stimulation to the nervous centers. The disruption caused in the centers doesn’t stop there but triggers responses through the motor nerves, leading to movements that vary based on the animal and the irritant involved. These responses generally have the common purpose of being helpful. They fend off harmful stimuli and support beneficial ones; if the stimulus is neutral, it may signal a distant situation of practical significance, prompting the animal to respond in a way that avoids dangers or secures advantages, depending on the scenario. For example, if I hear the conductor shout 'All aboard!' as I enter the station, my heart first pauses, then races, and my legs respond to the soundwaves hitting my ears by speeding up. If I trip while running, the feeling of falling prompts my hands to reach out in the direction of the fall, helping to protect my body from a sudden impact. If a cinder gets in my eye, my eyelids shut tightly, and tears flow abundantly to wash it out.
These three responses to a sensational stimulus differ, however, in many respects. The closure of the eye and the lachrymation are quite involuntary, and so is the disturbance of the heart. Such involuntary responses we know as 'reflex' acts. The motion of the arms to break the shock of falling may also be called reflex, since it occurs too quickly to be deliberately intended. It is, at any rate, less automatic than the previous acts, for a man might by conscious effort learn to perform it more skilfully, or even to suppress it altogether. Actions of this kind, into which instinct and volition enter upon equal terms, have been called 'semi-reflex.' The act of running towards the train, on the other hand, has no instinctive element about it. It is purely the result of education, and is preceded by a consciousness of the purpose to be attained and a distinct mandate of the will. It is a 'voluntary act.' Thus the animal's reflex and voluntary performances shade into each other gradually, being connected by acts which may often occur automatically, but may also be modified by conscious intelligence.
These three responses to a dramatic stimulus vary in several ways. Closing the eye and tearing up are completely involuntary, as is the heart disturbance. We refer to these involuntary reactions as 'reflex' actions. The movement of the arms to lessen the shock of falling can also be considered reflex since it happens too fast to be intentional. However, it is less automatic than the previous actions because a person can consciously learn to do it better or even ignore it completely. These kinds of actions, which involve both instinct and conscious decision-making, are known as 'semi-reflex.' In contrast, the act of running towards the train has no instinctive component; it's entirely a learned behavior and is based on an awareness of the goal and a clear decision of the will. It is a 'voluntary act.' Therefore, the reflex and voluntary actions of an animal gradually transition into one another, linked by acts that can often happen automatically but can also be adjusted by conscious thought.
The Frog's Nerve-centres.—Let us now look a little more closely at what goes on.
The Frog's Nerve-centres.—Now, let's take a closer look at what's happening.
The best way to enter the subject will be to take a lower creature, like a frog, and study by the vivisectional method the functions of his different nerve-centres. The frog's nerve-centres are figured in the diagram over the page, which needs no further explanation. I shall first proceed to state what happens when various amounts of the anterior parts are removed, in different frogs, in the way in which an ordinary student removes them—that is, with no extreme precautions as to the purity of the operation.
The best way to start this topic is by examining a simpler creature, like a frog, and using vivisection to study how its various nerve centers function. The frog's nerve centers are shown in the diagram on the next page, which doesn’t require any additional explanation. I will first explain what occurs when different amounts of the front parts are removed from various frogs, done in the typical way a student would do it—without taking any special precautions for the purity of the procedure.
If, then, we reduce the frog's nervous system to the spinal cord alone, by making a section behind the base of the skull, between the spinal cord and the medulla oblongata,{93} thereby cutting off the brain from all connection with the rest of the body, the frog will still continue to live, but with a very peculiarly modified activity. It ceases to breathe or swallow; it lies flat on its belly, and does not, like a normal frog, sit up on its forepaws, though its hind-legs are kept, as usual, folded against its body and immediately resume this position if drawn out. If thrown on its back it lies there quietly, without turning over like a normal frog. Locomotion and voice seem entirely abolished. If we suspend it by the nose, and irritate different portions of its skin by acid, it performs a set of remarkable 'defensive' movements calculated to wipe away the irritant. Thus, if the breast be touched, both fore-paws will rub it vigorously; if we touch the outer side of the elbow, the hind-foot of the same side will rise directly to the spot and wipe it. The back of the foot will rub the knee if that be attacked, whilst if the foot be cut away, the stump will make ineffectual movements, and then, in many frogs, a pause will come, as if for deliberation, succeeded by a rapid passage of the opposite unmutilated foot to the acidulated spot.
If we isolate the frog's nervous system to just the spinal cord by cutting behind the base of the skull, where the spinal cord meets the medulla oblongata,{93} disconnecting the brain from the rest of the body, the frog can still survive, but its activity changes significantly. It stops breathing or swallowing; it lies flat on its stomach and doesn’t sit up on its forelegs like a healthy frog would, even though its hind legs remain tucked against its body and will snap back into that position if pulled out. If placed on its back, it stays there quietly without flipping over like a normal frog. Movement and vocalization seem completely gone. If we hang it by its nose and irritate different parts of its skin with acid, it performs a series of impressive 'defensive' movements meant to wipe away the irritant. For example, if we touch its chest, both forelegs will rub it vigorously; if we touch the outer side of its elbow, the hind foot on that side will rise to wipe it. The back of the foot will rub the knee if it’s touched, and if the foot is removed, the stump will try to move ineffectively, then in many frogs, there will be a pause as if they’re thinking, followed by a quick movement of the opposite, intact foot to the sore spot.

Fig. 39.—C, H, cerebral hemispheres; O Th, optic thalami; O L, optic lobes; Cb, cerebellum; M O, medulla oblongata; S C, spinal cord.
Fig. 39.—C, H, brain hemispheres; O Th, optic thalami; O L, optic lobes; Cb, cerebellum; M O, medulla oblongata; S C, spinal cord.
The most striking character of all these movements, after their teleological appropriateness, is their precision. They vary, in sensitive frogs and with a proper amount of irritation, so little as almost to resemble in their machine-like regularity the performances of a jumping-jack, whose legs must twitch whenever you pull the string. The spinal cord of the frog thus contains arrangements of cells and fibres fitted to convert skin-irritations into movements of defence. We may call it the centre for defensive movements in this animal. We may indeed go farther than this, and by cutting the spinal cord in various places find that its{94} separate segments are independent mechanisms, for appropriate activities of the head and of the arms and legs respectively. The segment governing the arms is especially active, in male frogs, in the breeding season; and these members alone, with the breast and back appertaining to them, and everything else cut away, will actively grasp a finger placed between them and remain hanging to it for a considerable time.
The most striking feature of all these movements, beyond their purposeful nature, is their precision. They vary, in sensitive frogs and with a proper amount of irritation, so little that they almost mimic the machine-like regularity of a jack-in-the-box, whose legs twitch whenever you pull the string. The spinal cord of the frog contains arrangements of cells and fibers designed to convert skin irritations into defensive movements. We can call it the center for defensive movements in this animal. In fact, we can go further and, by cutting the spinal cord at various points, find that its{94} separate segments function as independent mechanisms, responsible for the appropriate activities of the head and of the arms and legs, respectively. The segment that controls the arms is especially active in male frogs during the breeding season; and even with these limbs, along with the chest and back connected to them, cut away, they will still actively grasp a finger placed between them and hang onto it for quite a while.
Similarly of the medulla oblongata, optic lobes, and other centres between the spinal cord and the hemispheres of the frog. Each of them is proved by experiment to contain a mechanism for the accurate execution, in response to definite stimuli, of certain special acts. Thus with the medulla the animal swallows; with the medulla and cerebellum together he jumps, swims, and turns over from his back; with his optic lobes he croaks when pinched; etc. A frog which has lost his cerebral hemispheres alone is by an unpractised observer indistinguishable from a normal animal.
Similarly, the medulla oblongata, optic lobes, and other centers between the spinal cord and the frog's brain hemispheres are involved. Each of them has been shown through experiments to have a mechanism for accurately performing certain specific actions in response to certain stimuli. For example, the medulla controls swallowing; when the medulla and cerebellum work together, the frog can jump, swim, and flip over; when its optic lobes are stimulated, it croaks when pinched, and so on. A frog that has only lost its cerebral hemispheres is indistinguishable from a normal frog to an untrained observer.
Not only is he capable, on proper instigation, of all the acts already mentioned, but he guides himself by sight, so that if an obstacle be set up between him and the light, and he be forced to move forward, he either jumps over it or swerves to one side. He manifests the sexual instinct at the proper seasons, and discriminates between male and female individuals of his own species. He is, in short, so similar in every respect to a normal frog that it would take a person very familiar with these animals to suspect anything wrong or wanting about him; but even then such a person would soon remark the almost entire absence of spontaneous motion—that is, motion unprovoked by any present incitation of sense. The continued movements of swimming, performed by the creature in the water, seem to be the fatal result of the contact of that fluid with its skin. They cease when a stick, for example, touches his hands. This is a sensible irritant towards which the feet are automatically drawn by reflex action, and on which the animal remains sitting. He manifests no hunger, and will{95} suffer a fly to crawl over his nose unsnapped at. Fear, too, seems to have deserted him. In a word, he is an extremely complex machine whose actions, so far as they go, tend to self-preservation; but still a machine, in this sense—that it seems to contain no incalculable element. By applying the right sensory stimulus to him we are almost as certain of getting a fixed response as an organist is of hearing a certain tone when he pulls out a certain stop.
Not only can he perform all the previously mentioned actions when prompted properly, but he also relies on his sight, so if something blocks his view and he has to move ahead, he either jumps over it or moves to the side. He shows his sexual instincts at the right times and can tell the difference between male and female members of his species. In short, he is so similar to a regular frog that it would take someone very knowledgeable about these creatures to notice anything unusual about him; however, even that person would quickly notice the complete lack of spontaneous movement—that is, movement not triggered by any sensory input. The continuous swimming motions the creature makes in the water appear to result from the contact of that liquid with its skin. Those movements stop when something, like a stick, touches his hands. This is a noticeable irritant that causes his feet to automatically move toward it by reflex, leading him to stay in place. He shows no signs of hunger and will let a fly crawl over his nose without reacting. It seems like fear has also left him. In summary, he is a highly complex machine whose actions, as far as they go, aim for self-preservation; yet still a machine in the sense that there doesn’t seem to be any unpredictable element. By applying the right sensory trigger, we can almost guarantee a specific response, just like an organist can expect a certain note when pulling out a specific stop.
But now if to the lower centres we add the cerebral hemispheres, or if, in other words, we make an intact animal the subject of our observations, all this is changed. In addition to the previous responses to present incitements of sense, our frog now goes through long and complex acts of locomotion spontaneously, or as if moved by what in ourselves we should call an idea. His reactions to outward stimuli vary their form, too. Instead of making simple defensive movements with his hind-legs, like a headless frog, if touched; or of giving one or two leaps and then sitting still like a hemisphereless one, he makes persistent and varied efforts of escape, as if, not the mere contact of the physiologist's hand, but the notion of danger suggested by it were now his spur. Led by the feeling of hunger, too, he goes in search of insects, fish, or smaller frogs, and varies his procedure with each species of victim. The physiologist cannot by manipulating him elicit croaking, crawling up a board, swimming or stopping, at will. His conduct has become incalculable—we can no longer foretell it exactly. Effort to escape is his dominant reaction, but he may do anything else, even swell up and become perfectly passive in our hands.
But now, if we add the brain hemispheres to the lower centers, or in other words, if we observe a complete animal, everything changes. Besides the previous responses to sensory stimuli, our frog now engages in long and complex movements spontaneously, almost as if driven by what we would call an idea. His reactions to external stimuli also vary in form. Instead of making simple defensive movements with his hind legs like a headless frog when touched, or jumping once or twice and then sitting still like a brainless one, he makes persistent and varied attempts to escape, as if the mere contact with the physiologist's hand, rather than just that contact itself, suggested the idea of danger that drives him. Motivated by hunger as well, he actively hunts for insects, fish, or smaller frogs, adjusting his approach for each type of prey. The physiologist can't elicit behaviors like croaking, climbing a board, swimming, or stopping at will just by manipulating him. His behavior has become unpredictable—we can no longer accurately forecast it. Escaping is his primary reaction, but he may do anything else, even puff up and remain completely passive in our hands.
Such are the phenomena commonly observed, and such the impressions which one naturally receives. Certain general conclusions follow irresistibly. First of all the following:
Such are the phenomena we usually observe, and these are the impressions one naturally gets. Certain general conclusions follow without question. First of all, the following:
The acts of all the centres involve the use of the same muscles. When a brainless frog's hind-leg wipes the acid,{96} he calls into play all the leg-muscles which a frog with his full medulla oblongata and cerebellum uses when he turns from his back to his belly. Their contractions are, however, combined differently in the two cases, so that the results vary widely. We must consequently conclude that specific arrangements of cells and fibres exist in the cord for wiping, in the medulla for turning over, etc. Similarly they exist in the thalami for jumping over seen obstacles and for balancing the moved body; in the optic lobes for creeping backwards, or what not. But in the hemispheres, since the presence of these organs brings no new elementary form of movement with it, but only determines differently the occasions on which the movements shall occur, making the usual stimuli less fatal and machine-like, we need suppose no such machinery directly coördinative of muscular contractions to exist. We may rather assume, when the mandate for a wiping-movement is sent forth by the hemispheres, that a current goes straight to the wiping-arrangement in the spinal cord, exciting this arrangement as a whole. Similarly, if an intact frog wishes to jump, all he need do is to excite from the hemispheres the jumping-centre in the thalami or wherever it may be, and the latter will provide for the details of the execution. It is like a general ordering a colonel to make a certain movement, but not telling him how it shall be done.
The actions of all the centers involve using the same muscles. When a brainless frog's hind leg wipes the acid,{96} it activates all the leg muscles that a fully functioning frog with a complete medulla oblongata and cerebellum uses when it flips from its back to its belly. However, their contractions are combined differently in both scenarios, leading to significantly different outcomes. Therefore, we must conclude that there are specific arrangements of cells and fibers in the spinal cord for wiping, in the medulla for turning over, and so on. Similar arrangements exist in the thalami for jumping over obstacles and for balancing the moving body; in the optic lobes for creeping backward, or whatever else. But in the hemispheres, since the presence of these organs does not introduce a new basic form of movement, but rather differently influences the situations in which the movements occur, making the usual stimuli less automatic and robotic, we do not need to assume that any such machinery directly coordinates muscular contractions exists. Instead, we can assume that when the command for a wiping movement is sent out by the hemispheres, a current goes directly to the wiping arrangement in the spinal cord, stimulating this arrangement as a whole. Similarly, if an intact frog wants to jump, all it needs to do is activate the jumping center in the thalami or wherever it may be from the hemispheres, and that center will take care of the execution details. It’s like a general telling a colonel to perform a certain movement without specifying how it should be done.
The same muscle, then, is repeatedly represented at different heights; and at each it enters into a different combination with other muscles to coöperate in some special form of concerted movement. At each height the movement is discharged by some particular form of sensorial stimulus, whilst the stimuli which discharge the hemispheres would seem not so much to be elementary sorts of sensation, as groups of sensations forming determinate objects or things.
The same muscle, then, is repeatedly shown at different heights; and at each height, it combines with other muscles to work together in a specific type of coordinated movement. At each height, the movement is triggered by a specific kind of sensory stimulus, while the stimuli that activate the hemispheres don’t seem to be basic types of sensation, but rather groups of sensations that create definite objects or things.
The Pigeon's Lower Centres.—The results are just the same if, instead of a frog, we take a pigeon, cut out his hemispheres carefully and wait till he recovers from the{97} operation. There is not a movement natural to him which this brainless bird cannot execute; he seems, too, after some days to execute movements from some inner irritation, for he moves spontaneously. But his emotions and instincts exist no longer. In Schrader's striking words:
The Pigeon's Lower Centres.—The results are the same if we take a pigeon instead of a frog, carefully remove its hemispheres, and wait for it to recover from the{97} procedure. This brainless bird can still perform all its natural movements; after a few days, it also shows spontaneous movements due to some internal stimulation. However, its emotions and instincts are gone. In Schrader's powerful words:
"The hemisphereless animal moves in a world of bodies which ... are all of equal value for him.... He is, to use Goltz's apt expression, impersonal.... Every object is for him only a space-occupying mass, he turns out of his path for an ordinary pigeon no otherwise than for a stone. He may try to climb over both. All authors agree that they never found any difference, whether it was an inanimate body, a cat, a dog, or a bird of prey which came in their pigeon's way. The creature knows neither friends nor enemies, in the thickest company it lives like a hermit. The languishing cooing of the male awakens no more impression than the rattling of the peas, or the call-whistle which in the days before the injury used to make the birds hasten to be fed. Quite as little as the earlier observers have I seen hemisphereless she-birds answer the courting of the male. A hemisphereless male will coo all day long and show distinct signs of sexual excitement, but his activity is without any object, it is entirely indifferent to him whether the she-bird be there or not. If one is placed near him, he leaves her unnoticed.... As the male pays no attention to the female, so she pays none to her young. The brood may follow the mother ceaselessly calling for food, but they might as well ask it from a stone.... The hemisphereless pigeon is in the highest degree tame, and fears man as little as cat or bird of prey."
"The hemisphereless animal moves in a world of bodies that are all of equal value to him. He is, as Goltz aptly put it, impersonal. To him, every object is just a mass that takes up space; he will move out of the way for an ordinary pigeon just like he would for a stone. He might try to climb over both. All authors agree that they have found no difference between an inanimate object, a cat, a dog, or a bird of prey that crosses the path of their pigeons. The creature knows neither friends nor enemies; in the midst of a crowd, it behaves like a hermit. The soft cooing of the male has no more effect on him than the sound of rattling peas or the call-whistle that used to make the birds rush for food before the injury. Just like earlier observers, I haven't seen hemisphereless female birds respond to the male’s courtship. A hemisphereless male will coo all day and show visible signs of sexual excitement, but his actions lack any real purpose; it makes no difference to him whether the female is present or not. If one is nearby, he ignores her completely. Just as the male pays no attention to the female, she shows no interest in her young. The chicks may follow their mother, constantly calling for food, but they might as well be asking a stone. The hemisphereless pigeon is extremely tame and has no fear of humans, just like a cat or a bird of prey."
General Notion of Hemispheres.—All these facts lead us, when we try to formulate them broadly, to some such conception as this: The lower centres act from present sensational stimuli alone; the hemispheres act from considerations, the sensations which they may receive serving only as suggesters of these. But what are considerations but expectations, in the fancy, of sensations which will be felt one way or another according as action takes this course or{98} that? If I step aside on seeing a rattlesnake, from considering how dangerous an animal he is, the mental materials which constitute my prudential reflection are images more or less vivid of the movement of his head, of a sudden pain in my leg, of a state of terror, a swelling of the limb, a chill, delirium, death, etc., etc., and the ruin of my hopes. But all these images are constructed out of my past experiences. They are reproductions of what I have felt or witnessed. They are, in short, remote sensations; and the main difference between the hemisphereless animal and the whole one may be concisely expressed by saying that the one obeys absent, the other only present, objects.
General Notion of Hemispheres.—All these facts lead us, when we try to summarize them broadly, to a concept like this: The lower centers respond only to immediate sensory stimuli; the hemispheres respond based on considerations, with the sensations they receive acting only as prompts for these considerations. But what are considerations if not expectations, in our minds, of sensations that will be experienced in one way or another depending on whether action takes one route or{98} another? If I step aside when I see a rattlesnake, based on how dangerous I know that animal is, the mental elements making up my cautious thought are images that are more or less vivid—of the movement of its head, of a sudden pain in my leg, feelings of terror, swelling of the limb, chills, delirium, death, and so on, along with the destruction of my hopes. But all these images are formed from my past experiences. They are reproductions of what I have felt or witnessed. Essentially, they are remote sensations; and the key difference between an animal without hemispheres and one with them can be summed up by saying that the former reacts to absent objects, while the latter responds only to present ones.
The hemispheres would then seem to be the chief seat of memory. Vestiges of past experience must in some way be stored up in them, and must, when aroused by present stimuli, first appear as representations of distant goods and evils; and then must discharge into the appropriate motor channels for warding off the evil and securing the benefits of the good. If we liken the nervous currents to electric currents, we can compare the nervous system, C, below the hemispheres to a direct circuit from sense-organ to muscle along the line S ...C ...M of Fig. 40. The hemisphere, H, adds the long circuit or loop-line through which the current may pass when for any reason the direct line is not used.
The brain hemispheres seem to be the main area for memory. Traces of past experiences must be somehow stored in them, and when triggered by current stimuli, they first emerge as mental images of distant rewards and threats; then they must activate the right motor pathways to avoid harm and gain the benefits of good things. If we think of nervous signals like electric currents, we can compare the nervous system, C, below the hemispheres to a direct path from sensory organs to muscles along the route S ...C ...M of Fig. 40.. The hemisphere, H, adds a longer circuit or loop through which the signal can travel when, for any reason, the direct path is not taken.
Thus, a tired wayfarer on a hot day throws himself on the damp earth beneath a maple-tree. The sensations of delicious rest and coolness pouring themselves through the direct line would naturally discharge into the muscles of complete extension: he would abandon himself to the dangerous repose. But the loop-line being open, part of the current is drafted along it, and awakens rheumatic or catarrhal reminiscences, which prevail over the instigations of sense, and make the man arise and pursue his way{99} to where he may enjoy his rest more safely. Presently we shall examine the manner in which the hemispheric loop-line may be supposed to serve as a reservoir for such reminiscences as these. Meanwhile I will ask the reader to notice some corollaries of its being such a reservoir.
Thus, a weary traveler on a hot day lies down on the damp ground under a maple tree. The feeling of refreshing rest and coolness would naturally flow into his fully stretched muscles: he would let himself sink into the tempting relaxation. However, since the loop-line is open, part of the current is drawn along it, stirring up old memories of rheumatism or colds, which overpower the urges of his senses and force him to get up and continue on his way{99} to a place where he can enjoy his rest more safely. Soon we will look at how the hemispheric loop-line might act as a reservoir for these kinds of memories. In the meantime, I’d like the reader to note some consequences of it being such a reservoir.
First, no animal without it can deliberate, pause, postpone, nicely weigh one motive against another, or compare. Prudence, in a word, is for such a creature an impossible virtue. Accordingly we see that nature removes those functions in the exercise of which prudence is a virtue from the lower centres and hands them over to the cerebrum. Wherever a creature has to deal with complex features of the environment, prudence is a virtue. The higher animals have so to deal; and the more complex the features, the higher we call the animals. The fewer of his acts, then, can such an animal perform without the help of the organs in question. In the frog many acts devolve wholly on the lower centres; in the bird fewer; in the rodent fewer still; in the dog very few indeed; and in apes and men hardly any at all.
First, no animal can think, pause, delay, carefully weigh one option against another, or compare without it. Prudence, simply put, is an impossible virtue for such a creature. Therefore, we see that nature moves the functions where prudence is a virtue from the lower centers and assigns them to the cerebrum. Wherever a creature has to deal with complex aspects of its environment, prudence is a virtue. Higher animals face these complexities; the more intricate the features, the higher we rank the animals. Thus, the fewer actions such an animal can perform without the aid of the relevant organs. In frogs, many actions rely entirely on the lower centers; in birds, fewer; in rodents, even fewer; in dogs, very few; and in apes and humans, hardly any at all.
The advantages of this are obvious. Take the prehension of food as an example and suppose it to be a reflex performance of the lower centres. The animal will be condemned fatally and irresistibly to snap at it whenever presented, no matter what the circumstances may be; he can no more disobey this prompting than water can refuse to boil when a fire is kindled under the pot. His life will again and again pay the forfeit of his gluttony. Exposure to retaliation, to other enemies, to traps, to poisons, to the dangers of repletion, must be regular parts of his existence. His lack of all thought by which to weigh the danger against the attractiveness of the bait, and of all volition to remain hungry a little while longer, is the direct measure of his lowness in the mental scale. And those fishes which, like our cunners and sculpins, are no sooner thrown back from the hook into the water than they automatically seize the hook again, would soon expiate the degradation of their{100} intelligence by the extinction of their type, did not their extraordinary fecundity atone for their imprudence. Appetite and the acts it prompts have consequently become in all higher vertebrates functions of the cerebrum. They disappear when the physiologist's knife has left the subordinate centres alone in place. The brainless pigeon will starve though left on a corn-heap.
The benefits of this are clear. Take eating as an example and imagine it as an automatic response from the lower brain centers. The animal will be doomed to snap at food whenever it's available, regardless of the situation; it can no more resist this urge than water can stop boiling when heat is applied. Its life will repeatedly pay the price for its greed. Dealing with retaliation, other predators, traps, poisons, and the risks of overeating must be regular parts of its life. Its complete lack of thought to weigh the danger against the temptation of food, and its inability to hold off hunger for a little while longer, directly reflects its low level of intelligence. And those fish that, like some species of cunners and sculpins, immediately gulp the hook again after being thrown back into the water would quickly pay for their lack of intelligence with their extinction, if not for their remarkable ability to reproduce, which mitigates their folly. Thus, appetite and the actions it drives have become functions of the brain in all higher vertebrates. They vanish when the physiologist's knife leaves the lower centers alone. A brainless pigeon will starve even if it's surrounded by food.
Take again the sexual function. In birds this devolves exclusively upon the hemispheres. When these are shorn away the pigeon pays no attention to the billings and cooings of its mate. It is the same, according to Goltz, with male dogs who have suffered large losses of cerebral tissue. Those who have read Darwin's Descent of Man will recollect what an importance this author ascribes to the agency of sexual selection in the amelioration of the breeds of birds. The females are naturally coy, and their coyness must be overcome by the exhibition of the gorgeous plumage, and various accomplishments in the way of strutting and fighting, of the males. In frogs and toads, on the other hand, where (as we saw on page 94) the sexual instinct devolves upon the lower centres, we find a machine-like obedience to the present incitements of sense, and an almost total exclusion of the power of choice. The consequence is that every spring an immense waste of batrachian life, involving numbers of adult animals and innumerable eggs, takes place from no other cause than the blind character of the sexual impulse in these creatures.
Take the sexual function, for example. In birds, this is entirely managed by the brain hemispheres. When these are removed, the pigeon ignores the affection and cooing of its partner. The same applies, according to Goltz, to male dogs that have lost significant amounts of brain tissue. Those familiar with Darwin's *Descent of Man* will remember how much importance he places on sexual selection in improving bird breeds. Females are naturally shy, and this shyness must be overcome by the males showcasing their stunning plumage and various skills, such as strutting and fighting. In frogs and toads, on the other hand, where (as we saw on page 94) the sexual instinct is governed by the lower brain centers, we observe a mechanical response to immediate sensory triggers, with almost no real choice involved. This results in a massive waste of amphibian life every spring, including numerous adult animals and countless eggs, solely because of the impulsive nature of the sexual drive in these creatures.
No one need be told how dependent all human social elevation is upon the prevalence of chastity. Hardly any factor measures more than this the difference between civilization and barbarism. Physiologically interpreted, chastity means nothing more than the fact that present solicitations of sense are overpowered by suggestions of æsthetic and moral fitness which the circumstances awaken in the cerebrum; and that upon the inhibitory or permissive influence of these alone action directly depends.
No one needs to be reminded how much human social progress relies on the existence of chastity. Few things highlight the difference between civilization and barbarism more than this. From a physiological standpoint, chastity simply means that current temptations are outweighed by feelings of aesthetic and moral appropriateness that circumstances trigger in the brain, and that actions depend directly on the inhibiting or permitting effects of these feelings.
Within the psychic life due to the cerebrum itself the{101} same general distinction obtains, between considerations of the more immediate and considerations of the more remote. In all ages the man whose determinations are swayed by reference to the most distant ends has been held to possess the highest intelligence. The tramp who lives from hour to hour; the bohemian whose engagements are from day to day; the bachelor who builds but for a single life; the father who acts for another generation; the patriot who thinks of a whole community and many generations; and, finally, the philosopher and saint whose cares are for humanity and for eternity,—these range themselves in an unbroken hierarchy, wherein each successive grade results from an increased manifestation of the special form of action by which the cerebral centres are distinguished from all below them.
Within the mind due to the brain itself, the same general distinction exists between immediate thoughts and more distant ones. Throughout history, those whose decisions are guided by far-off goals have been considered the most intelligent. The drifter who lives hour by hour; the artist whose plans change daily; the bachelor who only plans for himself; the father who acts for the next generation; the patriot who considers the whole community and future generations; and finally, the philosopher and saint who care for humanity and eternity—these individuals form a continuous hierarchy, where each level represents a greater expression of the unique kind of action that sets the brain apart from all lower forms.
The Automaton-Theory.—In the 'loop-line' along which the memories and ideas of the distant are supposed to lie, the action, so far as it is a physical process, must be interpreted after the type of the action in the lower centres. If regarded here as a reflex process, it must be reflex there as well. The current in both places runs out into the muscles only after it has first run in; but whilst the path by which it runs out is determined in the lower centres by reflections few and fixed amongst the cell-arrangements, in the hemispheres the reflections are many and instable. This, it will be seen, is only a difference of degree and not of kind, and does not change the reflex type. The conception of all action as conforming to this type is the fundamental conception of modern nerve-physiology. This conception, now, has led to two quite opposite theories about the relation to consciousness of the nervous functions. Some authors, finding that the higher voluntary functions seem to require the guidance of feeling, conclude that over the lowest reflexes some such feeling also presides, though it may be a feeling connected with the spinal cord, of which the higher conscious self connected with the hemispheres remains unconscious. Others, finding that{102} reflex and semi-automatic acts may, notwithstanding their appropriateness, take place with an unconsciousness apparently complete, fly to the opposite extreme and maintain that the appropriateness even of the higher voluntary actions connected with the hemispheres owes nothing to the fact that consciousness attends them. They are, according to these writers, results of physiological mechanism pure and simple.
The Automaton-Theory.—In the 'loop-line' where memories and ideas of the distant are thought to exist, the action, when considered as a physical process, must be understood in the same way as actions in the lower centers. If it’s viewed as a reflex process here, it has to be reflexive there too. The current in both areas moves into the muscles only after it has first flowed in; however, while the route it takes out in the lower centers is influenced by a few fixed reflections among the cell arrangements, in the hemispheres, the reflections are numerous and unstable. This is merely a difference in degree rather than kind, and it does not alter the reflex type. The idea that all action follows this type is a core concept of modern nerve physiology. This idea has resulted in two completely opposing theories regarding the connection of nervous functions to consciousness. Some authors, observing that higher voluntary functions seem to need the guidance of feelings, conclude that a similar feeling also oversees the lowest reflexes, even if it’s a feeling associated with the spinal cord that the higher conscious self, linked to the hemispheres, is unaware of. Others, however, noting that{102} reflex and semi-automatic actions can occur with complete lack of awareness, go to the other extreme and argue that the appropriateness of even the higher voluntary actions related to the hemispheres has nothing to do with consciousness. According to these writers, they are simply the results of pure physiological mechanisms.
To comprehend completely this latter doctrine one should apply it to examples. The movements of our tongues and pens, the flashings of our eyes in conversation, are of course events of a physiological order, and as such their causal antecedents may be exclusively mechanical. If we knew thoroughly the nervous system of Shakespeare, and as thoroughly all his environing conditions, we should be able, according to the theory of automatism, to show why at a given period of his life his hand came to trace on certain sheets of paper those crabbed little black marks which we for shortness' sake call the manuscript of Hamlet. We should understand the rationale of every erasure and alteration therein, and we should understand all this without in the slightest degree acknowledging the existence of the thoughts in Shakespeare's mind. The words and sentences would be taken, not as signs of anything beyond themselves, but as little outward facts, pure and simple. In like manner, the automaton-theory affirms, we might exhaustively write the biography of those two hundred pounds, more or less, of warmish albuminoid matter called Martin Luther, without ever implying that it felt.
To fully understand this latter idea, we should apply it to examples. The movements of our tongues and pens, the glints in our eyes during conversation, are clearly physical events, and as such, their causes could be entirely mechanical. If we completely understood Shakespeare's nervous system and all the surrounding conditions he faced, we could theoretically demonstrate, based on the idea of automatism, why at a certain time in his life his hand ended up creating those awkward little black marks on paper that we casually call the manuscript of Hamlet. We would grasp the logic behind every erasure and change made, and we could do so without acknowledging any thoughts in Shakespeare's mind. The words and sentences would be seen not as indicators of something beyond themselves, but as mere external facts, plain and simple. Similarly, the automatism theory claims we could thoroughly write the biography of those two hundred pounds, more or less, of warmish protein matter known as Martin Luther, without ever suggesting that it had any feelings.
But, on the other hand, nothing in all this could prevent us from giving an equally complete account of either Luther's or Shakespeare's spiritual history, an account in which every gleam of thought and emotion should find its place. The mind-history would run alongside of the body-history of each man, and each point in the one would correspond to, but not react upon, a point in the other. So the melody floats from the harp-string, but neither checks{103} nor quickens its vibrations; so the shadow runs alongside the pedestrian, but in no way influences his steps.
But, on the other hand, nothing in all this could stop us from giving a fully detailed account of either Luther's or Shakespeare's spiritual journey, an account where every spark of thought and emotion would have its place. The history of their minds would run parallel to the history of their bodies, and each point in one would align with, but not affect, a point in the other. Just like the melody floats from the harp string, but neither slows down nor speeds up its vibrations; or like the shadow follows the walker, but doesn’t influence their steps.
As a mere conception, and so long as we confine our view to the nervous centres themselves, few things are more seductive than this radically mechanical theory of their action. And yet our consciousness is there, and has in all probability been evolved, like all other functions, for a use—it is to the highest degree improbable a priori that it should have no use. Its use seems to be that of selection; but to select, it must be efficacious. States of consciousness which feel right are held fast to; those which feel wrong are checked. If the 'holding' and the 'checking' of the conscious states severally mean also the efficacious reinforcing or inhibiting of the correlated neural processes, then it would seem as if the presence of the states of mind might help to steer the nervous system and keep it in the path which to the consciousness seemed best. Now on the average what seems best to consciousness is really best for the creature. It is a well-known fact that pleasures are generally associated with beneficial, pains with detrimental, experiences. All the fundamental vital processes illustrate this law. Starvation; suffocation; privation of food, drink, and sleep; work when exhausted; burns, wounds, inflammation; the effects of poison, are as disagreeable as filling the hungry stomach, enjoying rest and sleep after fatigue, exercise after rest, and a sound skin and unbroken bones at all times, are pleasant. Mr. Spencer and others have suggested that these coincidences are due, not to any preëstablished harmony, but to the mere action of natural selection, which would certainly kill off in the long-run any breed of creatures to whom the fundamentally noxious experience seemed enjoyable. An animal that should take pleasure in a feeling of suffocation would, if that pleasure were efficacious enough to make him keep his head under water, enjoy a longevity of four or five minutes. But if conscious pleasure does not reinforce, and conscious pain does not{104} inhibit, anything, one does not see (without some such a priori rational harmony as would be scouted by the 'scientific' champions of the automaton-theory) why the most noxious acts, such as burning, might not with perfect impunity give thrills of delight, and the most necessary ones, such as breathing, cause agony. The only considerable attempt that has been made to explain the distribution of our feelings is that of Mr. Grant Allen in his suggestive little work, Physiological Æsthetics; and his reasoning is based exclusively on that causal efficacy of pleasures and pains which the partisans of pure automatism so strenuously deny.
As just a concept, if we only look at the nervous system itself, not much is more appealing than this purely mechanical theory of its function. And yet, our consciousness exists and has likely evolved, like all other functions, for a purpose—it's highly unlikely a priori that it serves no purpose. Its purpose appears to be selection; but to select, it has to be effective. States of consciousness that feel right are clung to; those that feel wrong are rejected. If the 'holding' and 'checking' of conscious states also mean effectively reinforcing or inhibiting the related neural processes, then it seems that states of mind might help navigate the nervous system, keeping it on a path that consciousness perceives as best. Typically, what feels best to consciousness is indeed best for the being. It’s a well-known fact that pleasures usually come with beneficial experiences and pains with harmful ones. All fundamental vital processes illustrate this principle. Starvation, suffocation, lack of food, drink, and sleep, pushing through exhaustion, burns, wounds, inflammation, and the effects of poison are as unpleasant as the satisfaction of a full stomach, enjoying rest and sleep after being tired, exercising after resting, and maintaining healthy skin and intact bones are enjoyable. Mr. Spencer and others have proposed that these correlations are not due to any predetermined balance, but instead to the simple action of natural selection, which would ultimately eliminate any species for whom fundamentally harmful experiences seemed pleasurable. An animal that found pleasure in suffocation would, if that pleasure was strong enough for it to stay submerged, only last four or five minutes. But if conscious pleasure doesn't reinforce actions, and conscious pain doesn't {104} inhibit them, one cannot understand (without some kind of a priori rational balance that the 'scientific' advocates of the automaton-theory would reject) why the most harmful actions, like burning, couldn't grant delightful thrills without consequence, while the most essential ones, like breathing, cause distress. The most significant attempt to explain the distribution of our feelings comes from Mr. Grant Allen in his insightful little work, Physiological Æsthetics; his reasoning relies entirely on that causal efficacy of pleasures and pains which supporters of pure automatism vehemently deny.
Probability and circumstantial evidence thus run dead against the theory that our actions are purely mechanical in their causation. From the point of view of descriptive Psychology (even though we be bound to assume, as on p. 6, that all our feelings have brain-processes for their condition of existence, and can be remotely traced in every instance to currents coming from the outer world) we have no clear reason to doubt that the feelings may react so as to further or to dampen the processes to which they are due. I shall therefore not hesitate in the course of this book to use the language of common-sense. I shall talk as if consciousness kept actively pressing the nerve-centres in the direction of its own ends, and was no mere impotent and paralytic spectator of life's game.
Probability and circumstantial evidence clearly contradict the idea that our actions are purely mechanical in their causation. From the standpoint of descriptive psychology (even though we have to assume, as stated in p. 6, that all our feelings are based on brain processes and can be traced back to stimuli from the outside world), we have no solid reason to believe that feelings can’t influence or dampen the processes they originate from. Therefore, I will not hesitate throughout this book to use everyday language. I will speak as if consciousness actively drives the nerve centers toward its own goals and is not just a powerless and immobilized observer of life’s events.
The Localization of Functions in the Hemispheres.—The hemispheres, we lately said, must be the organ of memory, and in some way retain vestiges of former currents, by means of which mental considerations drawn from the past may be aroused before action takes place. The vivisections of physiologists and the observations of physicians have of late years given a concrete confirmation to this notion which the first rough appearances suggest. The various convolutions have had special functions assigned to them in relation to this and that sense-organ, as well as to this or that portion of the muscular system. This book is{105} no place for going over the evidence in detail, so I will simply indicate the conclusions which are most probable at the date of writing.
The Localization of Functions in the Hemispheres.—Recently, we mentioned that the hemispheres must be the center for memory and somehow hold traces of past experiences, allowing mental thoughts from the past to come to mind before we take action. Recent experiments by physiologists and the observations of doctors have provided solid proof for this idea suggested by early findings. Different areas of the brain have specific functions linked to various senses and parts of the muscular system. This book is{105} not the right place to go into detail about the evidence, so I will just highlight the conclusions that seem most likely at the time of writing.
Mental and Cerebral Elements.—In the first place, there is a very neat parallelism between the analysis of brain-functions by the physiologists and that of mental functions by the 'analytic' psychologists.
Mental and Cerebral Elements.—First of all, there is a clear parallel between the analysis of brain functions by physiologists and the analysis of mental functions by 'analytic' psychologists.
The phrenological brain-doctrine divided the brain into 'organs,' each of which stood for the man in a certain partial attitude. The organ of 'Philoprogenitiveness,' with its concomitant consciousness, is an entire man so far as he loves children, that of 'Reverence' is an entire man worshipping, etc. The spiritualistic psychology, in turn, divided the Mind into 'faculties,' which were also entire mental men in certain limited attitudes. But 'faculties' are not mental elements any more than 'organs' are brain-elements. Analysis breaks both into more elementary constituents.
The phrenological brain theory divided the brain into 'organs,' each representing a person in a specific way. The organ of 'Philoprogenitiveness,' along with its related consciousness, reflects a whole person in terms of their love for children, while the organ of 'Reverence' embodies a whole person worshiping, and so on. Spiritualistic psychology then broke the Mind into 'faculties,' which were also complete mental representations of people in certain limited ways. However, 'faculties' are not mental elements, just as 'organs' are not brain elements. Analyzing both reveals more fundamental components.
Brain and mind alike consist of simple elements, sensory and motor. "All nervous centres," says Dr. Hughlings Jackson, "from the lowest to the very highest (the substrata of consciousness), are made up of nothing else than nervous arrangements, representing impressions and movements.... I do not see of what other materials the brain can be made." Meynert represents the matter similarly when he calls the cortex of the hemispheres the surface of projection for every muscle and every sensitive point of the body. The muscles and the sensitive points are represented each by a cortical point, and the Brain is little more than the sum of all these cortical points, to which, on the mental side, as many sensations and ideas correspond. The sensations and ideas of sensation and of motion are, in turn, the elements out of which the Mind is built according to the analytic school of psychology. The relations between objects are explained by 'associations' between the ideas; and the emotional and instinctive tendencies, by associations between ideas and movements.{106} The same diagram can symbolize both the inner and the outer world; dots or circles standing indifferently for cells or ideas, and lines joining them, for fibres or associations. The associationist doctrine of 'ideas' may be doubted to be a literal expression of the truth, but it probably will always retain a didactic usefulness. At all events, it is interesting to see how well physiological analysis plays into its hands. To proceed to details.
Brain and mind both consist of simple elements, sensory and motor. "All nervous centers," says Dr. Hughlings Jackson, "from the lowest to the very highest (the foundations of consciousness), are made up of nothing but nervous arrangements that represent impressions and movements.... I don’t see what other materials the brain can be made of." Meynert expresses this idea similarly when he describes the cortex of the hemispheres as the projection surface for every muscle and every sensitive point in the body. Each muscle and sensitive point is represented by a cortical point, and the brain is little more than the sum of all these cortical points, which correspond to as many sensations and ideas on the mental side. The sensations and ideas related to sensation and movement are, in turn, the building blocks of the mind, according to the analytic school of psychology. The relationships between objects are explained by 'associations' between ideas; and emotional and instinctive tendencies are explained by associations between ideas and movements.{106} The same diagram can represent both the inner and outer world; dots or circles can represent cells or ideas interchangeably, and lines connecting them represent fibers or associations. The associationist theory of 'ideas' may not be a completely accurate representation of the truth, but it will likely always have some educational value. In any case, it's interesting to see how well physiological analysis supports this concept. Let's move on to the details.

Fig. 41.—Left hemisphere of monkey's brain. Outer surface.
Fig. 41.—Left side of a monkey's brain. Outer surface.
The Motor Region.—The one thing which is perfectly well established is this, that the 'central' convolutions, on either side of the fissure of Rolando, and (at least in the monkey) the calloso-marginal convolution (which is continuous with them on the mesial surface where one hemisphere is applied against the other), form the region by which all the motor incitations which leave the cortex pass out, on their way to those executive centres in the region of the pons, medulla, and spinal cord from{107} which the muscular contractions are discharged in the last resort. The existence of this so-called 'motor zone' is established by anatomical as well as vivisectional and pathological evidence.
The Motor Region.—One thing that is clearly established is that the 'central' folds, on either side of the Rolandic fissure, and (at least in monkeys) the calloso-marginal fold (which connects with them on the inner surface where one hemisphere meets the other), make up the area through which all motor signals from the cortex exit on their way to the executive centers in the area of the pons, medulla, and spinal cord, from{107} which muscle contractions are ultimately initiated. The existence of this so-called 'motor zone' is supported by anatomical, vivisectional, and pathological evidence.

Fig. 42.—Left hemisphere of monkey's brain. Mesial surface.
Fig. 42.—Left side of a monkey's brain. Inner surface.
Fig. 43, after Starr, shows how the fibres run downwards. All sensory currents entering the hemispheres run out from the Rolandic region, which may thus be regarded as a sort of funnel of escape, which narrows still more as it plunges beneath the surface, traversing the inner capsule, pons, and parts below. The dark ellipses on the left half of the diagram stand for hemorrhages or tumors, and the reader can easily trace, by following the course of the fibres, what the effect of them in interrupting motor currents may be.{108}
Fig. 43, after Starr, illustrates how the fibers run downward. All sensory signals entering the hemispheres exit from the Rolandic region, which can be seen as a sort of exit funnel that narrows even more as it goes beneath the surface, passing through the inner capsule, pons, and the areas below. The dark ellipses on the left side of the diagram represent hemorrhages or tumors, and readers can easily follow the path of the fibers to understand how these interruptions might affect motor signals.{108}

Fig. 43.—Schematic transverse section of the human brain, through the rolandic region. S, fissure of Sylvius; N.C., nucleus candatus, and N.L., nucleus lenticularis, of the corpus striatum; O.T., thalamus; C, crus; M, medulla oblongata; VII, the facial nerves passing out from their nucleus in the region of the pons. The fibres passing between O.T. and N.L. constitute the so-called internal capsule.
Fig. 43.—Schematic cross-section of the human brain, through the rolandic region. S, Sylvian fissure; N.C., caudate nucleus, and N.L., lenticular nucleus, of the corpus striatum; O.T., thalamus; C, crus; M, medulla oblongata; VII, the facial nerves exiting from their nucleus in the area of the pons. The fibers connecting O.T. and N.L. make up the so-called internal capsule.
One of the most instructive proofs of motor localization in the cortex is that furnished by the disease now called aphemia, or motor aphasia. Motor aphasia is neither loss of voice nor paralysis of the tongue or lips. The patient's voice is as strong as ever, and all the innervations of his hypoglossal and facial nerves, except those necessary for speaking, may go on perfectly well. He can laugh and cry, and even sing; but he either is unable to utter any words at all; or a few meaningless stock phrases form his only speech; or else he speaks incoherently and confusedly,{109}
One of the most informative examples of motor localization in the cortex is found in a condition now known as aphemia, or motor aphasia. Motor aphasia is not about losing your voice or having paralysis of the tongue or lips. The patient's voice is still as strong as ever, and all the functions of his hypoglossal and facial nerves, except those needed for speaking, can work perfectly well. He can laugh, cry, and even sing; but he is either unable to say any words at all, or he can only use a few meaningless stock phrases for speech, or he speaks in a confused and incoherent way,{109}

Fig. 44.—Schematic profile of left hemisphere, with the parts shaded whose destruction causes motor ('Broca') and sensory ('Wernicke') aphasia.
Fig. 44.—Schematic profile of the left hemisphere, highlighting the areas whose damage leads to motor ('Broca') and sensory ('Wernicke') aphasia.
mispronouncing, misplacing, and misusing his words in various degrees. Sometimes his speech is a mere broth of unintelligible syllables. In cases of pure motor aphasia the patient recognizes his mistakes and suffers acutely from them. Now whenever a patient dies in such a condition as this, and an examination of his brain is permitted, it is found that the lowest frontal gyrus (see Fig. 44) is the seat of injury. Broca first noticed this fact in 1861, and since then the gyrus has gone by the name of Broca's convolution. The injury in right-handed people is found on the left hemisphere, and in left-handed people on the right hemisphere. Most people, in fact, are left-brained, that is, all their delicate and specialized movements are handed over to the charge of the left hemisphere. The ordinary right-handedness for such movements is only a consequence of that fact, a consequence which shows outwardly{110} on account of that extensive crossing of the fibres from the left hemisphere to the right half of the body only, which is shown in Fig. 41, below the letter M. But the left-brainedness might exist and not show outwardly. This would happen wherever organs on both sides of the body could be governed by the left hemisphere; and just such a case seems offered by the vocal organs, in that highly delicate and special motor service which we call speech. Either hemisphere can innervate them bilaterally, just as either seems able to innervate bilaterally the muscles of the trunk, ribs, and diaphragm. Of the special movements of speech, however, it would appear (from these very facts of aphasia) that the left hemisphere in most persons habitually takes exclusive charge. With that hemisphere thrown out of gear, speech is undone; even though the opposite hemisphere still be there for the performance of less specialized acts, such as the various movements required in eating.
mispronouncing, misplacing, and misusing his words in different ways. Sometimes his speech is just a jumble of unintelligible sounds. In cases of pure motor aphasia, the patient is aware of their mistakes and feels a deep sense of frustration because of them. Whenever a patient dies in this condition and an examination of their brain is done, it’s found that the lowest frontal gyrus (see Fig. 44) is where the damage is located. Broca first identified this in 1861, and since then, this gyrus has been known as Broca's convolution. For right-handed people, the damage is in the left hemisphere, while for left-handed people, it’s in the right hemisphere. Most people are indeed left-brained, meaning that their fine and specialized movements are primarily controlled by the left hemisphere. The typical right-handedness for such movements is simply a result of this fact, which outwardly manifests{110} due to the extensive crossing of the fibers from the left hemisphere to the right side of the body, as shown in Fig. 41, below the letter M. However, left-brainedness can exist without being outwardly visible. This would occur where organs on both sides of the body can be controlled by the left hemisphere; and the vocal organs might be a prime example of this, in terms of the delicate and specialized motor functions we call speech. Either hemisphere can control them bilaterally, similar to how either can control the muscles of the trunk, ribs, and diaphragm. However, when it comes to the specific movements of speech, it appears (from these very aphasia cases) that the left hemisphere typically takes full control. When that hemisphere is not functioning properly, speech breaks down, even though the opposite hemisphere is still capable of carrying out less specialized actions, like the various movements needed for eating.
The visual centre is in the occipital lobes. This also is proved by all the three kinds of possible evidence. It seems that the fibres from the left halves of both retinæ go to the left hemisphere, those from the right half to the right hemisphere. The consequence is that when the right occipital lobe, for example, is injured, 'hemianopsia' results in both eyes, that is, both retinæ grow blind as to their right halves, and the patient loses the leftward half of his field of view. The diagram on p. 111 will make this matter clear (see Fig. 45).
The visual center is located in the occipital lobes. This is supported by all three types of potential evidence. It appears that the fibers from the left sides of both retinas go to the left hemisphere, while those from the right side go to the right hemisphere. As a result, when the right occipital lobe is injured, 'hemianopsia' occurs in both eyes, meaning both retinas become blind to their right halves, and the patient loses the left side of their field of view. The diagram on p. 111 will clarify this (see Fig. 45).
Quite recently, both Schaefer and Munk, in studying the movements of the eyeball produced by galvanizing the visual cortex in monkeys and dogs, have found reason to plot out an analogous correspondence between the upper and lower portions of the retinæ and certain parts of the visual cortex. If both occipital lobes were destroyed, we should have double hemiopia, or, in other words, total blindness. In human hemiopic blindness there is insensibility to light on one half of the field of view, but{111}
Recently, both Schaefer and Munk studied how the eyeball moves when stimulating the visual cortex in monkeys and dogs, and they discovered a similar relationship between the upper and lower areas of the retinas and certain parts of the visual cortex. If both occipital lobes were damaged, it would result in double hemiopia, or total blindness. In cases of human hemiopic blindness, there is a lack of sensitivity to light in one half of the visual field, but{111}

Fig. 45.—Scheme of the mechanism of vision, after Seguin. The cuneus convolution (Cu) of the right occipital lobe is supposed to be injured, and all the parts which lead to it are darkly shaded to show that they fail to exert their function. F.O. are the intra-hemispheric optical fibres. P.O.C. is the region of the lower optic centres (corpora geniculata and quadrigemina). T.O.D. is the right optic tract; C, the chiasma; F.L.D. are the fibres going to the lateral or temporal half T of the right retina, and F.C.S. are those going to the central or nasal half of the left retina. O.D. is the right, and O.S. the left, eyeball. The rightward half of each is therefore blind; in other words, the right nasal field, R.N.F., and the left temporal field, L.T.F., have become invisible to the subject with the lesion at Cu.
Fig. 45.—Diagram of the vision mechanism, based on Seguin. The cuneus convolution (Cu) in the right occipital lobe is assumed to be damaged, and all the pathways leading to it are shaded darkly to indicate that they are not functioning. F.O. represents the intra-hemispheric optical fibers. P.O.C. refers to the area of the lower optic centers (corpora geniculata and quadrigemina). T.O.D. indicates the right optic tract; C is the chiasma; F.L.D. are the fibers going to the lateral or temporal half T of the right retina, while F.C.S. are those going to the central or nasal half of the left retina. O.D. is the right eyeball, and O.S. is the left eyeball. Therefore, the right half of each is blind; in other words, the right nasal field, R.N.F., and the left temporal field, L.T.F., are now invisible to the person with the lesion at Cu.
mental images of visible things remain. In double hemiopia there is every reason to believe that not only the sensation of light must go, but that all memories and images{112} of a visual order must be annihilated also. The man loses his visual 'ideas.' Only 'cortical' blindness can produce this effect on the ideas. Destruction of the retinæ or of the visual tracts anywhere between the cortex and the eyes impairs the retinal sensibility to light, but not the power of visual imagination.
Mental images of things we can see still persist. In double hemiopia, it’s likely that not only the sensation of light disappears, but also all memories and images{112} related to sight must be erased too. The person loses their visual 'concepts.' Only 'cortical' blindness can cause this effect on those concepts. Damage to the retinas or to the visual pathways anywhere between the cortex and the eyes reduces sensitivity to light but doesn’t impact the ability for visual imagination.

Fig. 46.—Fibres associating the cortical centres together. (Schematic, after Starr.)
Fig. 46.—Fibers connecting the cortical centers together. (Schematic, after Starr.)
Mental Blindness.—A most interesting effect of cortical disorder is mental blindness. This consists not so much in insensibility to optical impressions, as in inability to understand them. Psychologically it is interpretable as loss of associations between optical sensations and what they signify; and any interruption of the paths between the optic centres and the centres for other ideas ought to bring it about. Thus, printed letters of the alphabet, or words, signify both certain sounds and certain articulatory movements. But the connection between the articulating or auditory centres and those for sight being ruptured, we ought a priori to expect that the sight of words would{113} fail to awaken the idea of their sound, or of the movement for pronouncing them. We ought, in short, to have alexia, or inability to read: and this is just what we do have as a complication of aphasic disease in many cases of extensive injury about the fronto-temporal regions.
Mental Blindness.—A very interesting effect of cortical disorder is mental blindness. This doesn't mean a lack of sensitivity to visual inputs, but rather an inability to understand them. Psychologically, it can be seen as a loss of associations between visual sensations and their meanings; and any disruption of the pathways between the optic centers and the centers for other ideas would likely cause this. For instance, printed letters or words represent both specific sounds and certain ways of speaking. However, if the connection between the speaking or hearing centers and the visual centers is broken, we would a priori expect that seeing words would{113} fail to trigger the idea of their sounds or the actions needed to say them. In short, we would expect to see alexia, or an inability to read: and this is exactly what occurs as a complication of aphasic disease in many cases of significant injury in the fronto-temporal regions.
Where an object fails to be recognized by sight, it often happens that the patient will recognize and name it as soon as he touches it with his hand. This shows in an interesting way how numerous are the incoming paths which all end by running out of the brain through the channel of speech. The hand-path is open, though the eye-path be closed. When mental blindness is most complete, neither sight, touch, nor sound avails to steer the patient, and a sort of dementia which has been called asymbolia or apraxia is the result. The commonest articles are not understood. The patient will put his breeches on one shoulder and his hat upon the other, will bite into the soap and lay his shoes on the table, or take his food into his hand and throw it down again, not knowing what to do with it, etc. Such disorder can only come from extensive brain-injury.
When an object can't be recognized by sight, it's often the case that the person will recognize and name it as soon as they touch it with their hand. This illustrates in a fascinating way how many different sensory pathways converge before they channel through speech in the brain. The pathway through touch is open, even if the pathway through sight is blocked. In cases of severe mental blindness, neither sight, touch, nor sound help guide the person, leading to a kind of impairment known as asymbolia or apraxia. Common items are not comprehended. The individual might put their pants on one shoulder and their hat on the other, bite into the soap, place their shoes on the table, or take their food in hand and throw it down again, unsure of what to do with it, and so on. Such disarray can only result from significant brain injury.
The centre for hearing is situated in man in the upper convolution of the temporal lobe (see the part marked 'Wernicke' in Fig. 44). The phenomena of aphasia show this. We studied motor aphasia a few pages back; we must now consider sensory aphasia. Our knowledge of aphasia has had three stages: we may talk of the period of Broca, the period of Wernicke, and the period of Charcot. What Broca's discovery was we have seen. Wernicke was the first to discriminate those cases in which the patient can not even understand speech from those in which he can understand, only not talk; and to ascribe the former condition to lesion of the temporal lobe. The condition in question is word-deafness, and the disease is auditory aphasia. The latest statistical survey of the subject is that by Dr. Allen Starr. In the seven cases of pure word-deafness which he has collected (cases in{114} which the patient could read, talk, and write, but not understand what was said to him), the lesion was limited to the first and second temporal convolutions in their posterior two thirds. The lesion (in right-handed, i.e. left-brained, persons) is always on the left side, like the lesion in motor aphasia. Crude hearing would not be abolished, even were the left centre for it utterly destroyed; the right centre would still provide for that. But the linguistic use of hearing appears bound up with the integrity of the left centre more or less exclusively. Here it must be that words heard enter into association with the things which they represent, on the one hand, and with the movements necessary for pronouncing them, on the other. In most of us (as Wernicke said) speech must go on from auditory cues; that is, our visual, tactile, and other ideas probably do not innervate our motor centres directly, but only after first arousing the mental sound of the words. This is the immediate stimulus to articulation; and where the possibility of this is abolished by the destruction of its usual channel in the left temporal lobe, the articulation must suffer. In the few cases in which the channel is abolished with no bad effect on speech we must suppose an idiosyncrasy. The patient must innervate his speech-organs either from the corresponding portion of the other hemisphere or directly from the centres of vision, touch, etc., without leaning on the auditory region. It is the minuter analysis of such individual differences as these which constitutes Charcot's contribution towards clearing up the subject.
The center for hearing is located in the upper part of the temporal lobe (see the section marked 'Wernicke' in Fig. 44). This is demonstrated by the phenomena of aphasia. We previously examined motor aphasia; now we need to consider sensory aphasia. Our understanding of aphasia has evolved through three stages: we can refer to the period of Broca, the period of Wernicke, and the period of Charcot. We've already discussed Broca's findings. Wernicke was the first to distinguish between cases where the patient can not even understand speech and those where they can understand but cannot speak; he attributed the former condition to damage in the temporal lobe. This condition is known as word-deafness, and the disorder is called auditory aphasia. The most recent statistical review on the topic is by Dr. Allen Starr. In the seven cases of pure word-deafness he collected (where the patient could read, speak, and write, but not comprehend spoken language), the damage was confined to the first and second temporal convolutions in their posterior two-thirds. The lesion (in right-handed, i.e. left-brained, individuals) is always on the left side, similar to the lesion found in motor aphasia. Basic hearing would not be affected even if the left center for it were completely destroyed; the right center would still handle that. However, the linguistic use of hearing seems to be primarily linked to the integrity of the left center. It is likely that heard words become associated with the things they represent, as well as with the movements needed to pronounce them. As Wernicke noted, in most people, speech is triggered by auditory cues; meaning our visual, tactile, and other concepts probably do not directly stimulate our motor centers, but first generate the mental sound of the words. This serves as the immediate trigger for articulation, and when this pathway is disrupted by damage to the left temporal lobe, articulation is affected. In the rare cases where this pathway is lost without impairing speech, we must assume some unique adaptation. The patient must activate their speech organs either from the corresponding area in the other hemisphere or directly from the centers for vision, touch, etc., without relying on the auditory region. It is the detailed examination of individual differences like these that represents Charcot's contribution to clarifying the topic.
Every namable thing has numerous properties, qualities, or aspects. In our minds the properties together with the name form an associated group. If different parts of the brain are severally concerned with the several properties, and a farther part with the hearing, and still another with the uttering, of the name, there must inevitably be brought about (through the law of association which we shall later study) such a connection amongst all these brain-parts that the activity of any one of them will be likely to{115} awaken the activity of all the rest. When we are talking whilst we think, the ultimate process is utterance. If the brain-part for that be injured, speech is impossible or disorderly, even though all the other brain-parts be intact: and this is just the condition of things which, on p. 109, we found to be brought about by lesion of the convolution of Broca. But back of that last act various orders of succession are possible in the associations of a talking man's ideas. The more usual order is, as aforesaid, from the tactile, visual, or other properties of the things thought-about to the sound of their names, and then to the latter's utterance. But if in a certain individual's mind the look of an object or the look of its name be what habitually precedes articulation, then the loss of the hearing centre will pro tanto not affect that individual's speech or reading. He will be mentally deaf, i.e. his understanding of the human voice will suffer, but he will not be aphasic. In this way it is possible to explain the seven cases of word-deafness without motor aphasia which figure in Dr. Starr's table.
Every named thing has many properties, qualities, or aspects. In our minds, these properties along with the name create an associated group. If different parts of the brain are each responsible for different properties, with another part handling hearing and yet another for saying the name, there must naturally be a connection among all these brain parts (through the principle of association that we'll explore later) so that the activity of any one of them is likely to trigger the activity of all the others. When we think while we talk, the ultimate process is speaking. If the part of the brain responsible for that is damaged, speech becomes impossible or disordered, even if all the other brain parts are working fine: this is exactly the situation we observed on p. 109 as a result of damage to Broca's area. However, before that final act, various sequences can happen in how a talking person's ideas connect. The more common sequence goes from the tactile, visual, or other properties of the things being thought about to the sound of their names, and then to saying those names. But if for a certain individual, the appearance of an object or the appearance of its name consistently comes before they speak, then the loss of the hearing center will not significantly affect that person's speech or reading. They may be mentally deaf, meaning their understanding of spoken language will suffer, but they won't be aphasic. This helps explain the seven cases of word-deafness without motor aphasia shown in Dr. Starr's table.
If this order of association be ingrained and habitual in that individual, injury to his visual centres will make him not only word-blind, but aphasic as well. His speech will become confused in consequence of an occipital lesion. Naunyn, consequently, plotting out on a diagram of the hemisphere the 71 irreproachably reported cases of aphasia which he was able to collect, finds that the lesions concentrate themselves in three places: first, on Broca's centre; second, on Wernicke's; third, on the supra-marginal and angular convolutions under which those fibres pass which connect the visual centres with the rest of the brain (see Fig. 47, p. 116). With this result Dr. Starr's analysis of purely sensory cases agrees.
If this way of associating things becomes ingrained and habitual for a person, damage to their visual centers will leave them not only unable to read words but also with speech difficulties. Their speech will become jumbled due to an occipital injury. Naunyn, therefore, mapping out on a diagram of the brain the 71 well-documented cases of aphasia he was able to gather, discovers that the injuries tend to cluster in three areas: first, in Broca's area; second, in Wernicke's area; and third, in the supra-marginal and angular gyri, where the fibers connecting the visual centers to the rest of the brain run (see Fig. 47, p. 116). Dr. Starr's analysis of purely sensory cases supports this finding.
In the chapter on Imagination we shall return to these differences in the sensory spheres of different individuals. Meanwhile few things show more beautifully than the history of our knowledge of aphasia how the sagacity and patience of many banded workers are in time certain to{116} analyze the darkest confusion into an orderly display. There is no 'organ' of Speech in the brain any more than there is a 'faculty' of Speech in the mind. The entire mind and the entire brain are more or less at work in a man who uses language. The subjoined diagram, from Ross, shows the four parts most vitally concerned, and, in the light of our text, needs no farther explanation (see Fig. 48, p. 117).
In the chapter on Imagination, we'll revisit these differences in the sensory experiences of various individuals. In the meantime, few things illustrate more beautifully than the history of our understanding of aphasia how the insights and persistence of many dedicated workers will eventually untangle complex confusion into a clear explanation. There is no specific 'organ' for Speech in the brain, just as there isn't a distinct 'faculty' for Speech in the mind. The whole mind and the entire brain are pretty much engaged in a person who uses language. The diagram below, from Ross, shows the four key areas involved, and, given the context of our discussion, requires no further explanation (see Fig. 48, p. 117).
Centres for Smell, Taste, and Touch.—The other sensory centres are less definitely made out. Of smell and taste I will say nothing; and of muscular and cutaneous feeling only this, that it seems most probably seated in the motor zone, and possibly in the convolutions immediately backwards and midwards thereof. The incoming tactile currents must enter the cells of this region by one set of fibres, and the discharges leave them by another, but of these{117}
Centers for Smell, Taste, and Touch.—The other sensory centers are less clearly defined. I won’t say anything about smell and taste; and regarding muscle and skin sensations, it seems they are likely located in the motor zone, probably in the folds just behind and around it. The incoming touch signals must enter the cells in this area through one set of fibers, and the signals exit through another, but regarding these{117}

Fig. 48.—A is the auditory centre, V the visual, W the writing, and E that for speech.
Fig. 48.—A is the hearing center, V the sight center, W the writing center, and E the speech center.
Conclusion.—We thus see the postulate of Meynert and Jackson, with which we started on p. 105, to be on the whole most satisfactorily corroborated by objective research. The highest centres do probably contain nothing but arrangements for representing impressions and movements, and other arrangements for coupling the activity of these arrangements together. Currents pouring in from the sense-organs first excite some arrangements, which in turn excite others, until at last a discharge downwards of some sort occurs. When this is once clearly grasped there remains little ground for asking whether the motor zone is exclusively motor, or sensitive as well. The whole cortex, inasmuch as{118} currents run through it, is both. All the currents probably have feelings going with them, and sooner or later bring movements about. In one aspect, then, every centre is afferent, in another efferent, even the motor cells of the spinal cord having these two aspects inseparably conjoined. Marique, and Exner and Paneth have shown that by cutting round a 'motor' centre and so separating it from the influence of the rest of the cortex, the same disorders are produced as by cutting it out, so that it is really just what I called it, only the funnel through which the stream of innervation, starting from elsewhere, escapes; consciousness accompanying the stream, and being mainly of things seen if the stream is strongest occipitally, of things heard if it is strongest temporally, of things felt, etc., if the stream occupies most intensely the 'motor zone.' It seems to me that some broad and vague formulation like this is as much as we can safely venture on in the present state of science—so much at least is not likely to be overturned. But it is obvious how little this tells us of the detail of what goes on in the brain when a certain thought is before the mind. The general forms of relation perceived between things, as their identities, likenesses, or contrasts; the forms of the consciousness itself, as effortless or perplexed, attentive or inattentive, pleasant or disagreeable; the phenomena of interest and selection, etc., etc., are all lumped together as effects correlated with the currents that connect one centre with another. Nothing can be more vague than such a formula. Moreover certain portions of the brain, as the lower frontal lobes, escape formulational together. Their destruction gives rise to no local trouble of either motion or sensibility in dogs, and in monkeys neither stimulation nor excision of these lobes produces any symptoms whatever. One monkey of Horsley and Schaefer's was as tame, and did certain tricks as well, after as before the operation.
Conclusion.—We can see that the theories of Meynert and Jackson, which we began discussing on p. 105, are mostly supported by objective research. The highest centers likely only handle the representation of impressions and movements, along with other arrangements that link these activities together. Currents coming in from the sense organs first activate certain arrangements, which then trigger others, until eventually, some kind of discharge occurs downwards. Once this is clearly understood, there's little reason to debate whether the motor zone is solely motor or also sensitive. Since {118} currents flow through the entire cortex, it is both. All these currents likely carry feelings with them and will eventually produce movements. In one way, every center is afferent, and in another, efferent; even the motor cells of the spinal cord have these two aspects closely linked. Marique, along with Exner and Paneth, demonstrated that cutting around a 'motor' center and disconnecting it from the influence of the rest of the cortex causes the same disorders as removing it entirely, essentially just acting as a funnel through which the stream of innervation, originating from somewhere else, flows; the stream is accompanied by consciousness, primarily related to what is seen if the stream is strongest in the occipital region, what is heard if it's strongest in the temporal region, or what is felt if the stream intensely occupies the 'motor zone.' It seems to me that this broad and somewhat vague formulation is about as much as we can reliably state given the current state of science—this at least is unlikely to change. However, it’s clear how little this reveals about the specific processes occurring in the brain when a particular thought is present. The general relationships perceived between things, such as their identities, similarities, or differences; the nature of consciousness itself, whether effortless or confused, attentive or distracted, pleasant or unpleasant; the experiences of interest and selection, etc., are all grouped as effects associated with the currents that connect one center to another. Nothing could be more vague than such a formula. Furthermore, certain areas of the brain, like the lower frontal lobes, do not fit neatly into any formulation. Their destruction causes no local issues with motion or sensation in dogs, and in monkeys, neither stimulation nor removal of these lobes produces any symptoms at all. One monkey from Horsley and Schaefer's studies remained just as tame and performed tricks equally well after the operation as before.
It is in short obvious that our knowledge of our mental states infinitely exceeds our knowledge of their concomitant cerebral conditions. Without introspective analysis of{119} the mental elements of speech, the doctrine of Aphasia, for instance, which is the most brilliant jewel in Physiology, would have been utterly impossible. Our assumption, therefore (p. 5), that mind-states are absolutely dependent on brain-conditions, must still be understood as a mere postulate. We may have a general faith that it must be true, but any exact insight as to how it is true lags wofully behind.
It’s clear that our understanding of our mental states is vastly greater than our understanding of the brain conditions that go along with them. Without looking closely at the mental aspects of speech, for example, the theory of Aphasia—one of the most remarkable achievements in Physiology—would have been completely impossible. Therefore, our assumption (p. 5) that mental states are entirely dependent on brain conditions should still be seen as just a basic assumption. We might generally believe it to be true, but our detailed understanding of how it is true is still frustratingly lacking.
CHAPTER IX.
SOME GENERAL CONDITIONS OF NEURAL ACTIVITY.
The Nervous Discharge.—The word discharge is constantly used, and must be used in this book, to designate the escape of a current downwards into muscles or other internal organs. The reader must not understand the word figuratively. From the point of view of dynamics the passage of a current out of a motor cell is probably altogether analogous to the explosion of a gun. The matter of the cell is in a state of internal tension, which the incoming current resolves, tumbling the molecules into a more stable equilibrium and liberating an amount of energy which starts the current of the outgoing fibre. This current is stronger than that of the incoming fibre. When it reaches the muscle it produces an analogous disintegration of pent-up molecules and the result is a stronger effect still. Matteuci found that the work done by a muscle's contraction was 27,000 times greater than that done by the galvanic current which stimulated its motor nerve. When a frog's leg-muscle is made to contract, first directly, by stimulation of its motor nerve, and second reflexly, by stimulation of a sensory nerve, it is found that the reflex way requires a stronger current and is more tardy, but that the contraction is stronger when it does occur. These facts prove that the cells in the spinal cord through which the reflex takes place offer a resistance which has first to be overcome, but that a relatively violent outward current outwards then escapes from them. What is this but an explosive discharge on a minute scale?
The Nervous Discharge.—The term discharge is frequently used, and needs to be used in this book, to refer to the release of a current down into muscles or other internal organs. Readers should not interpret the term figuratively. From a dynamics perspective, the exit of a current from a motor cell is likely very similar to the firing of a gun. The content of the cell is under internal tension, which the incoming current resolves, causing the molecules to shift into a more stable state and releasing energy that triggers the current of the outgoing fiber. This outgoing current is stronger than the incoming one. When it reaches the muscle, it causes a similar release of stored molecules, resulting in an even stronger effect. Matteuci found that the work done by a muscle's contraction was 27,000 times greater than that done by the galvanic current that stimulated its motor nerve. When a frog's leg muscle contracts, first directly through stimulation of its motor nerve and second reflexively through stimulation of a sensory nerve, it's observed that the reflex method requires a stronger current and is slower, but the contraction is stronger when it does happen. These observations show that the cells in the spinal cord involved in the reflex have resistance that must be overcome, but that a relatively strong outward current escapes from them afterward. What is this if not an explosive discharge on a small scale?
Reaction-time.—The measurement of the time required for the discharge is one of the lines of experimental investigation{121} most diligently followed of late years. Helmholtz led the way by discovering the rapidity of the outgoing current in the sciatic nerve of the frog. The methods he used were soon applied to sensory reactions, and the results caused much popular admiration when described as measurements of the 'velocity of thought.' The phrase 'quick as thought' had from time immemorial signified all that was wonderful and elusive of determination in the line of speed; and the way in which Science laid her doomful hand upon this mystery reminded people of the day when Franklin first 'eripuit cœlo fulmen,' foreshadowing the reign of a newer and colder race of gods. I may say, however, immediately, that the phrase 'velocity of thought' is misleading, for it is by no means clear in any of the cases what particular act of thought occurs during the time which is measured. What the times in question really represent is the total duration of certain reactions upon stimuli. Certain of the conditions of the reaction are prepared beforehand; they consist in the assumption of those motor and sensory tensions which we name the expectant state. Just what happens during the actual time occupied by the reaction (in other words, just what is added to the preëxistent tensions to produce the actual discharge) is not made out at present, either from the neural or from the mental point of view.
Reaction time.—Measuring the time it takes for a response to occur is one of the most actively explored areas of research in recent years{121}. Helmholtz was the pioneer, discovering how quickly the outgoing current travels in the frog's sciatic nerve. His methods were soon applied to sensory reactions, and the findings gained a lot of public admiration when described as measurements of the 'speed of thought.' The expression 'quick as thought' has long represented something incredible and hard to pin down when it comes to speed, and the way Science tackled this mystery reminded people of the moment Franklin first 'eripuit cœlo fulmen', signaling the rise of a newer and cooler set of gods. However, I must point out that the term 'speed of thought' can be misleading because it's unclear what specific act of thought occurs during the measured time. What the times actually reflect is the overall duration of certain reactions to stimuli. Some conditions for these reactions are prepared in advance; they involve the motor and sensory tensions we refer to as the expectant state. What takes place during the actual reaction time (in other words, what is added to the pre-existing tensions to trigger the response) remains unclear from both neural and mental perspectives.
The method is essentially the same in all these investigations. A signal of some sort is communicated to the subject, and at the same instant records itself on a time-registering apparatus. The subject then makes a muscular movement of some sort, which is the 'reaction,' and which also records itself automatically. The time found to have elapsed between the two records is the total time of that reaction. The time-registering instruments are of various types. One type is that of the revolving drum covered with smoked paper, on which one electric pen traces a line which the signal breaks and the 'reaction' draws again; whilst another electric pen (connected with a rod of metal{122} vibrating at a known rate) traces alongside of the former line a 'time-line' of which each undulation or link stands for a certain fraction of a second, and against which the break in the reaction-line can be measured. Compare Fig. 49, where the line is broken by the signal at the first arrow, and continued again by the reaction at the second. The machine most often used is Hipp's chronoscopic clock. The hands are placed at zero, the signal starts them (by an electric connection), and the reaction stops them. The duration of their movement, down to 1000ths of a second, is then read off from the dial-plates.
The method is basically the same in all these studies. A signal is sent to the subject, and at the same moment, it records itself on a time-registering device. The subject then makes some kind of muscular movement, which is the 'reaction,' and that also records automatically. The time measured between the two records is the total time of that reaction. The time-registering instruments come in various types. One type is a revolving drum covered with smoked paper, where one electric pen draws a line that the signal interrupts and the 'reaction' continues again; meanwhile, another electric pen (connected to a metal rod{122} vibrating at a known frequency) draws a 'time-line' alongside the first line, with each wave or section representing a specific fraction of a second, allowing the break in the reaction line to be measured. Compare Fig. 49, where the line is interrupted by the signal at the first arrow, and resumes by the reaction at the second. The most commonly used machine is Hipp's chronoscopic clock. The hands are set to zero, the signal starts them (via an electric connection), and the reaction stops them. The duration of their movement, down to thousandths of a second, is then read from the dial-plates.
Simple Reactions.—It is found that the reaction-time differs in the same person according to the direction of his expectant attention. If he thinks as little as possible of the movement which he is to make, and concentrates his mind upon the signal to be received, it is longer; if, on the contrary, he bends his mind exclusively upon the muscular response, it is shorter. Lange, who first noticed this fact when working in Wundt's laboratory, found his own 'muscular' reaction-time to average 0´´.123, whilst his 'sensorial' reaction-time averaged as much as 0´´.230. It is obvious that experiments, to have any comparative value, must always be made according to the 'muscular' method, which reduces the figure to its minimum and makes it more constant. In general it lies between one and two tenths of a second. It seems to me that under these circumstances the reaction is essentially a reflex act. The preliminary making-ready of the muscles for the movement{123} means the excitement of the paths of discharge to a point just short of actual discharge before the signal comes in. In other words, it means the temporary formation of a real 'reflex-arc' in the centres, through which the incoming current instantly can pour out again. But when, on the other hand, the expectant attention is exclusively addressed to the signal, the excitement of the motor tracts can only begin after this latter has come in, and under this condition the reaction takes more time. In the hair-trigger condition in which we stand when making reactions by the 'muscular' method, we sometimes respond to a wrong signal, especially if it be of the same kind with the one we expect. The signal is but the spark which touches off a train already laid. There is no thought in the matter; the hand jerks by an involuntary start.
Simple Reactions.—Research shows that reaction time varies for the same person based on where their focused attention is directed. If a person thinks as little as possible about the movement they're going to make and focuses instead on the signal they're waiting for, their reaction time is longer. On the other hand, if they concentrate solely on the muscular response, their reaction time shortens. Lange, who first noticed this while working in Wundt's lab, found that his average 'muscular' reaction time was 0.123 seconds, while his 'sensorial' reaction time averaged 0.230 seconds. It's clear that for experiments to have any comparative value, they must always be done using the 'muscular' method, which minimizes the time and makes it more consistent. Generally, it ranges between one and two-tenths of a second. I believe that in these cases, the reaction is fundamentally a reflex action. The initial preparation of the muscles for movement{123} means activating the paths leading to action just before a signal arrives. In simpler terms, this creates a temporary 'reflex arc' in the centers, allowing the incoming signal to trigger an immediate response. However, if expectant attention is completely on the signal, motor pathways can only start activating after the signal is received, resulting in a delayed reaction. In the heightened state we experience when using the 'muscular' method, we sometimes react to an incorrect signal, especially if it's of the same kind as the one we expect. The signal simply acts as the spark igniting a pre-existing setup. There’s no thought involved; the hand jerks in an involuntary reflex.
These experiments are thus in no sense measurements of the swiftness of thought. Only when we complicate them is there a chance for anything like an intellectual operation to occur. They may be complicated in various ways. The reaction may be withheld until the signal has consciously awakened a distinct idea (Wundt's discrimination-time, association-time), and may then be performed. Or there may be a variety of possible signals, each with a different reaction assigned to it, and the reacter may be uncertain which one he is about to receive. The reaction would then hardly seem to occur without a preliminary recognition and choice. Even here, however, the discrimination and choice are widely different from the intellectual operations of which we are ordinarily conscious under those names. Meanwhile the simple reaction-time remains as the starting point of all these superinduced complications, and its own variations must be briefly passed in review.
These experiments are not at all measurements of the speed of thought. Only when we make them more complex is there a chance for something resembling an intellectual process to happen. They can be complicated in different ways. The reaction could be held back until the signal has consciously triggered a specific idea (Wundt's discrimination-time, association-time), and then it might be performed. Alternatively, there could be several possible signals, each linked to a different reaction, and the person reacting might not know which one is coming. In that case, the reaction wouldn’t really happen without some prior recognition and choice. However, even in this situation, the discrimination and choice are very different from the intellectual processes we usually think of with those terms. Meanwhile, the simple reaction time serves as the foundation for all these added complexities, and its own variations need to be reviewed briefly.
The reaction-time varies with the individual and his age. Old and uncultivated people have it long (nearly a second, in an old pauper observed by Exner). Children have it long (half a second, according to Herzen).
The reaction time varies with the individual and their age. Older and untrained people have longer reaction times (almost a second, based on an elderly person observed by Exner). Children also have longer reaction times (half a second, according to Herzen).
Fatigue lengthens it, and concentration of attention shortens it. The nature of the signal makes it vary. I here bring together the averages which have been obtained by some observers:
Fatigue makes it longer, and concentration of attention makes it shorter. The nature of the signal causes it to change. Here, I present the averages that some observers have gathered:
Hirsch. | Hankel. | Exner. | Wundt. | |
Sound | 0.149 | 0.1505 | 0.1360 | 0.167 |
Light | 0.200 | 0.2246 | 0.1506 | 0.222 |
Touch | 0.182 | 0.1546 | 0.1337 | 0.213 |
It will be observed that sound is more promptly reacted on than either sight or touch. Taste and smell are slower than either. The intensity of the signal makes a difference. The intenser the stimulus the shorter the time. Herzen compared the reaction from a corn on the toe with that from the skin of the hand of the same subject. The two places were stimulated simultaneously, and the subject tried to react simultaneously with both hand and foot, but the foot always went quickest. When the sound skin of the foot was touched instead of the corn, it was the hand which always reacted first. Intoxicants on the whole lengthen the time, but much depends on the dose.
It can be observed that sound gets a quicker reaction than both sight and touch. Taste and smell respond even slower than those. The intensity of the signal matters. The stronger the stimulus, the shorter the reaction time. Herzen compared the reaction to a corn on the toe with that from the skin of the hand of the same person. Both areas were stimulated at the same time, and the person tried to react simultaneously with both hand and foot, but the foot always responded faster. When the healthy skin of the foot was touched instead of the corn, it was the hand that reacted first. Intoxicants generally increase the reaction time, but it greatly depends on the dose.
Complicated Reactions.—These occur when some kind of intellectual operation accompanies the reaction. The rational place in which to report of them would be under the head of the various intellectual operations concerned. But certain persons prefer to see all these measurements bunched together regardless of context; so, to meet their views, I give the complicated reactions here.
Complicated Reactions.—These happen when some kind of mental process is involved in the reaction. The logical place to discuss them would be under the section about the different mental processes involved. However, some people prefer to group all these measurements together, no matter the context; so, to accommodate their preferences, I present the complicated reactions here.
When we have to think before reacting it is obvious that there is no definite reaction-time of which we can talk—it all depends on how long we think. The only times we can measure are the minimum times of certain determinate and very simple intellectual operations. The time required for discrimination has thus been made a subject of experimental measurement. Wundt calls it Unterscheidungszeit.{125} His subjects (whose simple reaction-time had previously been determined) were required to make a movement, always the same, the instant they discerned which of two or more signals they received. The excess of time occupied by these reactions over the simple reaction-time, in which only one signal was used and known in advance, measured, according to Wundt, the time required for the act of discrimination. It was found longer when four different signals were irregularly used than when only two were used. When two were used (the signals being the sudden appearance of a black or of a white object), the average times of three observers were respectively (in seconds)
When we need to think before reacting, it's clear that there's no fixed reaction time we can discuss—it all depends on how long we spend thinking. The only times we can measure are the minimum times for certain straightforward intellectual tasks. The time required for discrimination has been a subject of experimental measurement. Wundt refers to it as Unterscheidungszeit.{125} His participants (whose simple reaction times had already been measured) were instructed to make a movement, always the same, as soon as they figured out which of two or more signals they received. The excess time taken for these reactions over the simple reaction time, where only one signal was used and known beforehand, represented, according to Wundt, the time needed for the act of discrimination. It was found to be longer when four different signals were used randomly compared to when only two were used. When two signals were employed (the signals being the sudden appearance of a black or a white object), the average times for three observers were respectively (in seconds)
0.050 | 0.047 | 0.079 |
When four signals were used, a red and a green light being added to the others, it became, for the same observers,
When four signals were used, with a red and a green light added to the others, it became, for the same observers,
0.157 | 0.073 | 0.132 |
Prof. Cattell found he could get no results by this method, and reverted to one used by observers previous to Wundt and which Wundt had rejected. This is the einfache Wahlmethode, as Wundt calls it. The reacter awaits the signal and reacts if it is of one sort, but omits to act if it is of another sort. The reaction thus occurs after discrimination; the motor impulse cannot be sent to the hand until the subject knows what the signal is. Reacting in this way, Prof. Cattell found the increment of time required for distinguishing a white signal from no signal to be, in two observers,
Prof. Cattell discovered that he wasn’t getting any results with this method, so he went back to one that was used by observers before Wundt, which Wundt had discarded. This is the einfache Wahlmethode, as Wundt calls it. The person reacting waits for the signal and responds if it’s one type, but doesn’t act if it’s another type. The reaction happens after making a choice; the motor impulse can’t be sent to the hand until the person knows what the signal is. By reacting this way, Prof. Cattell found that the time taken to distinguish a white signal from no signal was, in two observers,
0.030 | and | 0.050; |
that for distinguishing one color from another was similarly
that for distinguishing one color from another was similarly
0.100 | and | 0.110; |
that for distinguishing a certain color from ten other colors,
that for distinguishing a specific color from ten other colors,
0.105 | and | 0.117; |
that for distinguishing the letter A in ordinary print from the letter Z,
that for distinguishing the letter A in regular print from the letter Z,
0.142 | and | 0.137; |
that for distinguishing a given letter from all the rest of the alphabet (not reacting until that letter appeared),
that for identifying a specific letter among all the others in the alphabet (not responding until that letter showed up),
0.119 | and | 0.116; |
that for distinguishing a word from any of twenty-five other words, from
that for distinguishing a word from any of twenty-five other words, from
0.118 | to | 0.158 sec. |
—the difference depending on the length of the words and the familiarity of the language to which they belonged.
—the difference depending on the length of the words and how familiar the language was to which they belonged.
Prof. Cattell calls attention to the fact that the time for distinguishing a word is often but little more than that for distinguishing a letter: "We do not, therefore," he says, "distinguish separately the letters of which a word is composed, but the word as a whole. The application of this in teaching children to read is evident."
Prof. Cattell points out that the time taken to recognize a word is often just slightly longer than that for recognizing a letter: "We do not, therefore," he says, "distinguish separately the letters that make up a word, but the word as a whole. The importance of this in teaching children to read is clear."
He also finds a great difference in the time with which various letters are distinguished, E being particularly bad.
He also notices a big difference in how quickly different letters are recognized, with E being especially slow.
The time required for association of one idea with another has been measured. Gallon, using a very simple apparatus, found that the sight of an unforeseen word would awaken an associated 'idea' in about ⅚ of a second. Wundt next made determinations in which the 'cue' was given by single-syllabled words called out by an assistant. The person experimented on had to press a key as soon as the sound of the word awakened an associated idea. Both word and reaction were chronographically registered, and the total time-interval between the two amounted, in four observers, to 1.009, 0.896, 1.037, and 1.154 seconds respectively. From this the simple reaction-time and the time of merely identifying the word's sound (the 'apperception-time,' as Wundt calls it) must be subtracted, to get the exact time required for the associated idea to arise. These times were separately determined and subtracted. The difference, called by Wundt association-time, amounted, in the same four persons, to 706, 723, 752, and 874 thousandths of a second respectively. The length of the last figure is due to the fact that the person reacting was an American, whose associations with German words would naturally be{127} slower than those of natives. The shortest association-time noted was when the word 'Sturm' suggested to Wundt the word 'Wind' in 0.341 second. Prof. Cattell made some interesting observations upon the association-time between the look of letters and their names. "I pasted letters," he says, "on a revolving drum, and determined at what rate they could be read aloud as they passed by a slit in a screen." He found it to vary according as one, or more than one, letter was visible at a time through the slit, and gives half a second as about the time which it takes to see and name a single letter seen alone. The rapidity of a man's reading is of course a measure of that of his associations, since each seen word must call up its name, at least, ere it is read. "I find," says Prof. Cattell, "that it takes about twice as long to read (aloud, as fast as possible) words which have no connection, as words which make sentences, and letters which have no connection, as letters which make words. When the words make sentences and the letters words, not only do the processes of seeing and naming overlap, but by one mental effort the subject can recognize a whole group of words or letters, and by one will-act choose the motions to be made in naming, so that the rate at which the words and letters are read is really only limited by the maximum rapidity at which the speech-organs can be moved.... For example, when reading as fast as possible the writer's rate was, English 138, French 167, German 250, Italian 327, Latin 434, and Greek 484; the figures giving the thousandths of a second taken to read each word. Experiments made on others strikingly confirm these results. The subject does not know that he is reading the foreign language more slowly than his own; this explains why foreigners seem to talk so fast....
The time required for connecting one idea to another has been measured. Gallon, using a straightforward setup, found that seeing an unexpected word would trigger an associated 'idea' in about ⅚ of a second. Wundt later conducted experiments where the 'cue' was provided by single-syllable words spoken by an assistant. The person being tested had to press a key as soon as they heard the word and thought of an associated idea. Both the word and the reaction were recorded with chronographs, resulting in total time intervals of 1.009, 0.896, 1.037, and 1.154 seconds for four different observers. To determine the exact time needed for the associated idea to come up, the simple reaction time and the time just to recognize the word's sound (which Wundt refers to as 'apperception-time') had to be subtracted. These times were measured separately and then deducted. The difference, which Wundt called association-time, ended up being 706, 723, 752, and 874 thousandths of a second for those same four people. The longer last figure is likely because the person reacting was American, and their associations with German words would naturally be{127} slower than that of native speakers. The quickest association time recorded was when Wundt connected the word 'Sturm' to 'Wind' in 0.341 seconds. Prof. Cattell made some interesting observations on the association time between the appearance of letters and their names. "I pasted letters," he recalls, "on a rotating drum, and measured how fast they could be read aloud as they passed by a slit in a screen." He found that the reading speed varied depending on whether one or more letters were visible at once through the slit, estimating about half a second as the time it takes to see and name a single letter in isolation. A person's reading speed is, of course, a measure of their association speed since each seen word must trigger its name before it can be read. "I find," says Prof. Cattell, "that it takes about twice as long to read (aloud, as quickly as possible) words that have no connection, compared to words that form sentences, and letters that have no connection compared to letters that form words. When the words form sentences and the letters form words, not only do the processes of seeing and naming overlap, but with one mental effort, the subject can recognize an entire group of words or letters, and with one act of will, decide on the movements needed for naming, so that the rate at which the words and letters are read is really only limited by the maximum speed of the speech organs.... For instance, when reading as fast as possible, the writer achieved rates of 138 milliseconds in English, 167 in French, 250 in German, 327 in Italian, 434 in Latin, and 484 in Greek, indicating the thousandths of a second taken to read each word. Experiments conducted on others strongly support these findings. The subject is often unaware that they are reading the foreign language more slowly than their own; this explains why foreigners seem to speak so rapidly....
"The time required to see and name colors and pictures of objects was determined in the same way. The time was found to be about the same (over ½ sec.) for colors as for pictures, and about twice as long as for words and letters. Other experiments I have made show that we can recognize{128} a single color or picture in a slightly shorter time than a word or letter, but take longer to name it. This is because, in the case of words and letters, the association between the idea and the name has taken place so often that the process has become automatic, whereas in the case of colors and pictures we must by a voluntary effort choose the name."
"The time it takes to see and identify colors and images of objects was measured in the same way. It turned out to be about the same (over ½ sec.) for colors as for images, and about twice as long for words and letters. Other experiments I've conducted show that we can recognize{128} a single color or image slightly faster than a word or letter, but it takes us longer to name it. This is because, with words and letters, the link between the concept and the name has been made so often that it becomes automatic, while with colors and images, we have to consciously choose the name."
Dr. Romanes has found "astonishing differences in the maximum rate of reading which is possible to different individuals, all of whom have been accustomed to extensive reading. That is to say, the difference may amount to 4 to 1; or, otherwise stated, in a given time one individual may be able to read four times as much as another. Moreover, it appeared that there was no relationship between slowness of reading and power of assimilation; on the contrary, when all the efforts are directed to assimilating as much as possible in a given time, the rapid readers (as shown by their written notes) usually give a better account of the portions of the paragraph which have been compassed by the slow readers than the latter are able to give; and the most rapid reader I have found is also the best at assimilating. I should further say," Dr. R. continues, "that there is no relationship between rapidity of perception as thus tested and intellectual activity as tested by the general results of intellectual work; for I have tried the experiment with several highly distinguished men in science and literature, most of whom I found to be slow readers."
Dr. Romanes has discovered "astonishing differences in the maximum reading speed that different individuals are capable of, even among those who are used to reading a lot. In other words, the difference can be as much as 4 to 1; that is, in the same amount of time, one person might read four times as much as another. Additionally, it turned out that there’s no connection between slow reading and the ability to understand; in fact, when all efforts focus on absorbing as much as possible in a given time, the fast readers (as indicated by their written notes) often provide a better summary of the sections that slow readers have read than the slow readers themselves can. Furthermore, the quickest reader I’ve encountered is also the best at understanding. I should add," Dr. R. continues, "that there’s no link between reading speed as tested here and intellectual activity as measured by general outcomes of intellectual work; I’ve conducted the experiment with several highly respected individuals in science and literature, most of whom turned out to be slow readers."
The degree of concentration of the attention has much to do with determining the reaction-time. Anything which baffles or distracts us beforehand, or startles us in the signal, makes the time proportionally long.
The level of focus of our attention greatly influences our reaction time. Anything that confuses or distracts us beforehand, or surprises us when we get the signal, makes the response time longer.
The Summation of Stimuli.—Throughout the nerve-centres it is a law that a stimulus which would be inadequate by itself to excite a nerve-centre to effective discharge may, by acting with one or more other stimuli (equally ineffectual by themselves alone) bring the discharge about.{129} The natural way to consider this is as a summation of tensions which at last overcome a resistance. The first of them produce a 'latent excitement' or a 'heightened irritability'—the phrase is immaterial so far as practical consequences go;—the last is the straw which breaks the camel's back.
The Summation of Stimuli.—Throughout the nerve centers, there's a principle that a stimulus that isn’t strong enough on its own to trigger a nerve center to effectively discharge can, when combined with one or more other stimuli (which are also ineffective on their own), lead to the discharge.{129} The natural way to think about this is as a buildup of tensions that eventually overcome a resistance. The initial ones create a 'latent excitement' or 'increased sensitivity'—the specific term doesn’t matter much regarding practical outcomes;—the final one is the straw that breaks the camel's back.
This is proved by many physiological experiments which cannot here be detailed; but outside of the laboratory we constantly apply the law of summation in our practical appeals. If a car-horse balks, the final way of starting him is by applying a number of customary incitements at once. If the driver uses reins and voice, if one bystander pulls at his head, another lashes his hind-quarters, the conductor rings the bell, and the dismounted passengers shove the car, all at the same moment, his obstinacy generally yields, and he goes on his way rejoicing. If we are striving to remember a lost name or fact, we think of as many 'cues' as possible, so that by their joint action they may recall what no one of them can recall alone. The sight of a dead prey will often not stimulate a beast to pursuit, but if the sight of movement be added to that of form, pursuit occurs. "Brücke noted that his brainless hen which made no attempt to peck at the grain under her very eyes, began pecking if the grain were thrown on the ground with force, so as to produce a rattling sound." "Dr. Allen Thomson hatched out some chickens on a carpet, where he kept them for several days. They showed no inclination to scrape, ... but when Dr. Thomson sprinkled a little gravel on the carpet, ... the chickens immediately began their scraping movements." A strange person, and darkness, are both of them stimuli to fear and mistrust in dogs (and for the matter of that, in men). Neither circumstance alone may awaken outward manifestations, but together, i.e. when the strange man is met in the dark, the dog will be excited to violent defiance. Street hawkers well know the efficacy of summation, for they arrange themselves in a line on the sidewalk, and{130} the passer often buys from the last one of them, through the effect of the reiterated solicitation, what he refused to buy from the first in the row.
This is supported by many physiological experiments that can’t be detailed here; however, outside of the lab, we often use the law of summation in our everyday actions. If a horse pulls back, the best way to get it moving is to use multiple familiar prompts at once. If the driver uses the reins and his voice, one bystander pulls on the horse's head, another hits its hindquarters, the conductor rings the bell, and the passengers push the carriage simultaneously, the horse typically gives in and moves along happily. When trying to remember a forgotten name or fact, we think of as many 'cues' as we can, so their combined effect can trigger what none of them can recall alone. Seeing dead prey might not make an animal chase, but if movement is also added to the sight of it, the chase instinct kicks in. "Brücke observed that his brainless hen, which didn't attempt to peck at the grain right in front of her, started pecking when the grain was thrown down forcefully, making a rattling sound." "Dr. Allen Thomson raised some chicks on a carpet for several days. They showed no interest in scratching, ... but when Dr. Thomson sprinkled a little gravel on the carpet, ... the chicks immediately began scratching." A strange person, along with darkness, both trigger fear and distrust in dogs (and honestly, in people, too). One of these factors alone might not provoke any visible reactions, but together—when a stranger is encountered in the dark—the dog will react with intense defiance. Street vendors are well aware of how powerful summation is, as they line up on the sidewalk, and the person walking by often ends up buying from the last vendor after repeatedly hearing their pitches, even though they refused to buy from the first one in line.

Fig. 50.—Sphygmographic pulse-tracing. A, during intellectual repose; B, during intellectual activity. (Mosso.)
Fig. 50.—Sphygmographic pulse-tracing. A, at rest during thinking; B, while engaged in thought. (Mosso.)
Cerebral Blood-supply.—All parts of the cortex, when electrically excited, produce alterations both of respiration and circulation. The blood-pressure somewhat rises, as a rule, all over the body, no matter where the cortical irritation is applied, though the motor zone is the most sensitive region for the purpose. Slowing and quickening of the heart are also observed. Mosso, using his 'plethysmograph' as an indicator, discovered that the blood-supply to the arms diminished during intellectual activity, and found furthermore that the arterial tension (as shown by the sphygmograph) was increased in these members (see Fig. 50). So slight an emotion as that produced by the entrance of Professor Ludwig into the laboratory was instantly followed by a shrinkage of the arms. The brain itself is an excessively vascular organ, a sponge full of blood, in fact; and another of Mosso's inventions showed that when less blood went to the legs, more went to the head. The subject to be observed lay on a delicately balanced table which could tip downward either at the head or at the foot if the weight of either end were increased. The moment emotional or intellectual activity began in the subject, down went the head-end, in consequence of the redistribution of blood in his system. But the best proof of the immediate afflux of blood to the brain during mental activity is due to Mosso's observations on three persons whose brain had been laid bare by lesion of the skull.{131} By means of apparatus described in his book, this physiologist was enabled to let the brain-pulse record itself directly by a tracing. The intra-cranial blood-pressure rose immediately whenever the subject was spoken to, or when he began to think actively, as in solving a problem in mental arithmetic. Mosso gives in his work a large number of reproductions of tracings which show the instantaneity of the change of blood-supply, whenever the mental activity was quickened by any cause whatever, intellectual or emotional. He relates of his female subject that one day whilst tracing her brain-pulse he observed a sudden rise with no apparent outer or inner cause. She however confessed to him afterwards that at that moment she had caught sight of a skull on top of a piece of furniture in the room, and that this had given her a slight emotion.
Cerebral Blood-supply.—All areas of the cortex, when electrically stimulated, cause changes in both respiration and circulation. Generally, blood pressure rises throughout the body, regardless of where the cortical irritation occurs, although the motor zone is the most sensitive area for this purpose. Both slowing and speeding up of the heart are also observed. Mosso, using his 'plethysmograph' as an indicator, found that the blood supply to the arms decreased during mental activity, and he also discovered that arterial tension (as shown by the sphygmograph) increased in these limbs (see Fig. 50). Even a slight emotion, like the entrance of Professor Ludwig into the lab, was quickly followed by a shrinkage of the arms. The brain itself is an extremely vascular organ, almost like a sponge filled with blood; and another of Mosso's inventions revealed that when less blood went to the legs, more went to the head. The subject being observed lay on a delicately balanced table that could tip downward at either the head or foot if the weight changed on either end. As soon as emotional or intellectual activity started in the subject, the head-end dropped due to the redistribution of blood in his body. But the best proof of the immediate influx of blood to the brain during mental activity comes from Mosso's observations on three individuals whose brains had been exposed due to skull lesions.{131} Using equipment described in his book, the physiologist was able to record the brain pulse directly through tracing. The intra-cranial blood pressure rose immediately whenever the subject was spoken to or when they began to think actively, like solving a mental math problem. Mosso provides numerous reproductions of tracings in his work that demonstrate the instantaneous changes in blood supply whenever mental activity was stimulated by any cause, whether intellectual or emotional. He recounts how, during one session with a female subject while tracing her brain pulse, he noticed a sudden rise with no apparent external or internal cause. She later admitted that at that moment, she had seen a skull on top of a piece of furniture in the room, and that had triggered a slight emotional response.
Cerebral Thermometry.—Brain-activity seems accompanied by a local disengagement of heat. The earliest careful work in this direction was by Dr. J. S. Lombard in 1867. He noted the changes in delicate thermometers and electric piles placed against the scalp in human beings, and found that any intellectual effort, such as computing, composing, reciting poetry silently or aloud, and especially that emotional excitement such as an angry fit, caused a general rise of temperature, which rarely exceeded a degree Fahrenheit. In 1870 the indefatigable Schiff took up the subject, experimenting on live dogs and chickens by plunging thermo-electric needles into the substance of their brain. After habituation was established, he tested the animals with various sensations, tactile, optic, olfactory, and auditory. He found very regularly an abrupt alteration of the intra-cerebral temperature. When, for instance, he presented an empty roll of paper to the nose of his dog as it lay motionless, there was a small deflection, but when a piece of meat was in the paper the deflection was much greater. Schiff concluded from these and other experiments that sensorial activity heats the brain-tissue, but he did not try to localize the increment of heat beyond finding{132} that it was in both hemispheres, whatever might be the sensation applied. Dr. Amidon in 1880 made a farther step forward, in localizing the heat produced by voluntary muscular contractions. Applying a number of delicate surface-thermometers simultaneously against the scalp, he found that when different muscles of the body were made to contract vigorously for ten minutes or more, different regions of the scalp rose in temperature, that the regions were well focalized, and that the rise of temperature was often considerably over a Fahrenheit degree. To a large extent these regions correspond to the centres for the same movements assigned by Ferrier and others on other grounds; only they cover more of the skull.
Cerebral Thermometry.—Brain activity appears to be linked with a local decrease in heat. The first detailed research in this area was conducted by Dr. J. S. Lombard in 1867. He observed changes in sensitive thermometers and electric devices placed against people's scalps and found that any mental effort, like doing math, composing, or reciting poetry—either silently or out loud—especially during emotional outbursts like anger, led to a general rise in temperature, which rarely exceeded one degree Fahrenheit. In 1870, the tireless Schiff continued this line of inquiry by experimenting on live dogs and chickens, inserting thermo-electric needles into their brain tissue. After the animals became accustomed to the setup, he tested them with different sensations, including touch, sight, smell, and sound. He consistently found a sudden change in the temperature within the brain. For instance, when he held an empty roll of paper near a still dog’s nose, there was a small temperature change, but when the roll contained a piece of meat, the change was significantly greater. From these and other experiments, Schiff concluded that sensory activity warms the brain tissue, but he didn't attempt to pinpoint the exact location of the heat increase, aside from determining{132} that it occurred in both hemispheres, regardless of the sensation presented. Dr. Amidon made further progress in 1880 by localizing the heat generated by voluntary muscle contractions. By using multiple sensitive surface thermometers at the same time on the scalp, he discovered that when various body muscles contracted vigorously for ten minutes or more, different areas of the scalp showed increased temperature. These areas were clearly defined, and the temperature increases often surpassed one degree Fahrenheit. To a large extent, these areas correspond to the centers for the same movements identified by Ferrier and others for different reasons; only they cover a larger portion of the skull.
Phosphorus and Thought.—Considering the large amount of popular nonsense which passes current on this subject I may be pardoned for a brief mention of it here. 'Ohne Phosphor, kein Gedanke,' was a noted war-cry of the 'materialists' during the excitement on that subject which filled Germany in the '60s. The brain, like every other organ of the body, contains phosphorus, and a score of other chemicals besides. Why the phosphorus should be picked out as its essence, no one knows. It would be equally true to say, 'Ohne Wasser, kein Gedanke,' or 'Ohne Kochsalz, kein Gedanke'; for thought would stop as quickly if the brain should dry up or lose its NaCl as if it lost its phosphorus. In America the phosphorus-delusion has twined itself round a saying quoted (rightly or wrongly) from Professor L. Agassiz, to the effect that fishermen are more intelligent than farmers because they eat so much fish, which contains so much phosphorus. All the alleged facts may be doubted.
Phosphorus and Thought.—Considering the large amount of popular nonsense that circulates on this topic, I hope to be excused for briefly mentioning it here. 'Without phosphorus, no thought' was a famous slogan of the 'materialists' during the excitement surrounding this issue in Germany in the '60s. The brain, like every other organ in the body, contains phosphorus, along with numerous other chemicals. No one knows why phosphorus is singled out as its essence. It would be just as accurate to say, 'Without water, no thought' or 'Without salt, no thought'; because thought would stop just as quickly if the brain dried out or lost its sodium chloride as it would if it lost its phosphorus. In America, the phosphorus myth has attached itself to a saying (whether rightly or wrongly) attributed to Professor L. Agassiz, suggesting that fishermen are more intelligent than farmers because they consume so much fish, which is high in phosphorus. All the supposed facts can be questioned.
The only straight way to ascertain the importance of phosphorus to thought would be to find whether more is excreted by the brain during mental activity than during rest. Unfortunately we cannot do this directly, but can only gauge the amount of PO5 in the urine, and this procedure has been adopted by a variety of observers, some of{133} whom found the phosphates in the urine diminished, whilst others found them increased, by intellectual work. On the whole, it is impossible to trace any constant relation. In maniacal excitement less phosphorus than usual seems to be excreted. More is excreted during sleep. The fact that phosphorus-preparations may do good in nervous exhaustion proves nothing as to the part played by phosphorus in mental activity. Like iron, arsenic, and other remedies it is a stimulant or tonic, of whose intimate workings in the system we know absolutely nothing, and which moreover does good in an extremely small number of the cases in which it is prescribed.
The only clear way to determine how important phosphorus is to thought would be to check if more is released by the brain during mental activity than during rest. Unfortunately, we can’t do this directly; we can only measure the amount of PO5 in the urine. This method has been used by various researchers, some of{133} whom found that the phosphates in urine decreased, while others found they increased during intellectual work. Overall, it’s impossible to establish a consistent relationship. During maniacal excitement, it seems that less phosphorus than usual is excreted. More phosphorus is released during sleep. The fact that phosphorus supplements can help with nervous exhaustion doesn't prove anything about phosphorus's role in mental activity. Like iron, arsenic, and other treatments, it acts as a stimulant or tonic, but we know absolutely nothing about its inner workings in the body, and it only benefits a very small number of cases in which it is prescribed.
The phosphorus-philosophers have often compared thought to a secretion. "The brain secretes thought, as the kidneys secrete urine, or as the liver secretes bile," are phrases which one sometimes hears. The lame analogy need hardly be pointed out. The materials which the brain pours into the blood (cholesterin, creatin, xanthin, or whatever they may be) are the analogues of the urine and the bile, being in fact real material excreta. As far as these matters go, the brain is a ductless gland. But we know of nothing connected with liver-and kidney-activity which can be in the remotest degree compared with the stream of thought that accompanies the brain's material secretions.{134}
Philosophers have often likened thought to a secretion. "The brain produces thought, just like the kidneys produce urine, or the liver produces bile," is something you might hear. The weak analogy is clear. The substances that the brain puts into the blood (cholesterol, creatine, xanthine, or whatever they are) are comparable to urine and bile, as they are actually real waste products. In this sense, the brain acts like a gland without ducts. However, we don't know anything related to liver and kidney functions that can even remotely compare to the flow of thought that comes with the brain's material secretions.{134}
CHAPTER X.
HABIT.
Its Importance for Psychology.—There remains a condition of general neural activity so important as to deserve a chapter by itself—I refer to the aptitude of the nerve-centres, especially of the hemispheres, for acquiring habits. An acquired habit, from the physiological point of view, is nothing but a new pathway of discharge formed in the brain, by which certain incoming currents ever after tend to escape. That is the thesis of this chapter; and we shall see in the later and more psychological chapters that such functions as the association of ideas, perception, memory, reasoning, the education of the will, etc., etc., can best be understood as results of the formation de novo of just such pathways of discharge.
Its Importance for Psychology.—There exists a state of general neural activity so significant that it deserves its own chapter—I’m referring to the ability of the nerve centers, particularly those in the hemispheres, to develop habits. An acquired habit, from a physiological standpoint, is simply a new pathway of discharge created in the brain, through which certain incoming signals tend to flow out continuously. This is the main idea of this chapter; and we will observe in the later, more psychological chapters that functions such as idea association, perception, memory, reasoning, willpower development, and so on, can be best understood as outcomes of the creation de novo of these types of discharge pathways.
Habit has a physical basis. The moment one tries to define what habit is, one is led to the fundamental properties of matter. The laws of Nature are nothing but the immutable habits which the different elementary sorts of matter follow in their actions and reactions upon each other. In the organic world, however, the habits are more variable than this. Even instincts vary from one individual to another of a kind; and are modified in the same individual, as we shall later see, to suit the exigencies of the case. On the principles of the atomistic philosophy the habits of an elementary particle of matter cannot change, because the particle is itself an unchangeable thing; but those of a compound mass of matter can change, because they are in the last instance due to the structure of the compound, and either outward forces or inward tensions can, from one hour to another, turn that structure{135} into something different from what it was. That is, they can do so if the body be plastic enough to maintain its integrity, and be not disrupted when its structure yields. The change of structure here spoken of need not involve the outward shape; it may be invisible and molecular, as when a bar of iron becomes magnetic or crystalline through the action of certain outward causes, or india-rubber becomes friable, or plaster 'sets.' All these changes are rather slow; the material in question opposes a certain resistance to the modifying cause, which it takes time to overcome, but the gradual yielding whereof often saves the material from being disintegrated altogether. When the structure has yielded, the same inertia becomes a condition of its comparative permanence in the new form, and of the new habits the body then manifests. Plasticity, then, in the wide sense of the word, means the possession of a structure weak enough to yield to an influence, but strong enough not to yield all at once. Each relatively stable phase of equilibrium in such a structure is marked by what we may call a new set of habits. Organic matter, especially nervous tissue, seems endowed with a very extraordinary degree of plasticity of this sort; so that we may without hesitation lay down as our first proposition the following: that the phenomena of habit in living beings are due to the plasticity of the organic materials of which their bodies are composed.
Habit has a physical basis. As soon as you try to define what habit is, you’re led to the basic properties of matter. The laws of Nature are simply the unchanging habits that different types of matter follow in how they act and react with each other. In the organic world, though, habits are more variable. Even instincts can differ from one individual to another of the same kind and can change within the same individual, as we will discuss later, to adapt to specific situations. According to atomistic philosophy, the habits of an individual particle of matter can’t change because the particle itself is an unchangeable entity; however, the habits of a compound mass of matter can change because they ultimately depend on the structure of the compound, which can be altered by external forces or internal pressures from one moment to the next, provided that the material is flexible enough to maintain its integrity and not be destroyed when its structure adjusts. The changes in structure mentioned don’t need to involve an outward shape; they can be invisible and molecular, like when a bar of iron becomes magnetic or crystalline due to certain external influences, or when rubber gets brittle, or plaster hardens. All these changes typically occur slowly; the material resists the modifying influence, which takes time to overcome, but this gradual release often prevents the material from falling apart completely. Once the structure gives way, the same inertia helps maintain its stability in the new form and the new habits that the body then shows. Plasticity, in a broad sense, refers to having a structure that’s weak enough to yield to an influence but strong enough not to change instantly. Each relatively stable phase in such a structure represents what we could call a new set of habits. Organic matter, especially nervous tissue, appears to have a remarkable degree of this kind of plasticity; therefore, we can confidently state our first proposition: the phenomena of habit in living beings are due to the plasticity of the organic materials that make up their bodies.
The philosophy of habit is thus, in the first instance, a chapter in physics rather than in physiology or psychology. That it is at bottom a physical principle, is admitted by all good recent writers on the subject. They call attention to analogues of acquired habits exhibited by dead matter. Thus, M. Léon Dumont writes:
The philosophy of habit is primarily a chapter in physics rather than in physiology or psychology. The fact that it is fundamentally a physical principle is recognized by all reputable recent authors on the topic. They highlight similarities of acquired habits shown by inanimate objects. Thus, M. Léon Dumont writes:
"Every one knows how a garment, after having been worn a certain time, clings to the shape of the body better than when it was new; there has been a change in the tissue, and this change is a new habit of cohesion. A lock works better after being used some time; at the outset more{136} force was required to overcome certain roughness in the mechanism. The overcoming of their resistance is a phenomenon of habituation. It costs less trouble to fold a paper when it has been folded already; ... and just so in the nervous system the impressions of outer objects fashion for themselves more and more appropriate paths, and these vital phenomena recur under similar excitements from without, when they have been interrupted a certain time."
"Everyone knows that clothing, after being worn for a while, fits the body better than when it was new; the fabric has changed, and this change is a new habit of sticking. A lock functions better once it has been used for some time; initially, more force was needed to get past certain rough spots in the mechanism. Overcoming that resistance is a sign of getting used to it. It's easier to fold a piece of paper after it has already been folded; ... and similarly, in the nervous system, the impressions from the outside world create more suitable pathways, and these vital experiences happen again under similar external stimuli, even after they've been interrupted for a while."
Not in the nervous system alone. A scar anywhere is a locus minoris resistentiæ, more liable to be abraded, inflamed, to suffer pain and cold, than are the neighboring parts. A sprained ankle, a dislocated arm, are in danger of being sprained or dislocated again; joints that have once been attacked by rheumatism or gout, mucous membranes that have been the seat of catarrh, are with each fresh recurrence more prone to a relapse, until often the morbid state chronically substitutes itself for the sound one. And in the nervous system itself it is well known how many so-called functional diseases seem to keep themselves going simply because they happen to have once begun; and how the forcible cutting short by medicine of a few attacks is often sufficient to enable the physiological forces to get possession of the field again, and to bring the organs back to functions of health. Epilepsies, neuralgias, convulsive affections of various sorts, insomnias, are so many cases in point. And, to take what are more obviously habits, the success with which a 'weaning' treatment can often be applied to the victims of unhealthy indulgence of passion, or of mere complaining or irascible disposition, shows us how much the morbid manifestations themselves were due to the mere inertia of the nervous organs, when once launched on a false career.
Not just in the nervous system. A scar anywhere is a locus minoris resistentiæ, more likely to get worn down, inflamed, and to experience pain and cold than nearby areas. A sprained ankle or a dislocated arm can easily get sprained or dislocated again; joints that have previously been affected by rheumatism or gout, and mucous membranes that have dealt with a cold, become more susceptible to recurring issues with each new occurrence, until often the unhealthy state becomes permanent instead of returning to normal. It’s also well established that many so-called functional diseases in the nervous system seem to persist simply because they started at some point. Medications can sometimes effectively stop a few episodes, allowing the body's natural healing processes to take over and restore health to the organs. Conditions like epilepsy, neuralgia, various types of convulsions, and insomnia are clear examples. Additionally, the success of 'weaning' treatments applied to those indulging in unhealthy habits or who have a tendency to complain or become irritable demonstrates how much of these issues stemmed from the inertia of the nervous system once it began on the wrong path.
Habits are due to pathways through the nerve-centres. If habits are due to the plasticity of materials to outward agents, we can immediately see to what outward influences, if to any, the brain-matter is plastic. Not to mechanical pressures, not to thermal changes, not to any of the forces{137} to which all the other organs of our body are exposed; for, as we saw on pp. 9-10, Nature has so blanketed and wrapped the brain about that the only impressions that can be made upon it are through the blood, on the one hand, and the sensory nerve-roots, on the other; and it is to the infinitely attenuated currents that pour in through these latter channels that the hemispherical cortex shows itself to be so peculiarly susceptible. The currents, once in, must find a way out. In getting out they leave their traces in the paths which they take. The only thing they can do, in short, is to deepen old paths or to make new ones; and the whole plasticity of the brain sums itself up in two words when we call it an organ in which currents pouring in from the sense-organs make with extreme facility paths which do not easily disappear. For, of course, a simple habit, like every other nervous event—the habit of snuffling, for example, or of putting one's hands into one's pockets, or of biting one's nails—is, mechanically, nothing but a reflex discharge; and its anatomical substratum must be a path in the system. The most complex habits, as we shall presently see more fully, are, from the same point of view, nothing but concatenated discharges in the nerve-centres, due to the presence there of systems of reflex paths, so organized as to wake each other up successively—the impression produced by one muscular contraction serving as a stimulus to provoke the next, until a final impression inhibits the process and closes the chain.
Habits are a result of pathways through the nerve centers. If habits arise from the brain's adaptability to external factors, we can quickly identify which external influences, if any, affect the brain's flexibility. It’s not mechanical pressure, temperature changes, or any of the forces{137} that impact the other organs in our body; as we noted on pp. 9-10, Nature has so carefully protected the brain that the only impressions it can receive come through the blood on one side and the sensory nerve roots on the other. The brain's hemispherical cortex is highly sensitive to the faint currents that flow through these channels. Once these currents enter, they must find a way out. In doing so, they leave their marks along the routes they travel. Essentially, they can either deepen existing pathways or create new ones; the brain's plasticity can be summed up in two words: it is an organ where currents from the sense organs easily carve out pathways that tend to stick around. A simple habit, like sniffling, putting hands in pockets, or biting nails, is, mechanically speaking, just a reflex response; its anatomical basis must be a pathway in the system. The most complex habits, as we will soon explore further, are, from the same perspective, merely linked responses in the nerve centers, resulting from networks of reflex pathways organized to activate each other successively—the effect of one muscle contraction serving as a trigger for the next, until a final impression interrupts the process and completes the loop.
It must be noticed that the growth of structural modification in living matter may be more rapid than in any lifeless mass, because the incessant nutritive renovation of which the living matter is the seat tends often to corroborate and fix the impressed modification, rather than to counteract it by renewing the original constitution of the tissue that has been impressed. Thus, we notice after exercising our muscles or our brain in a new way, that we can do so no longer at that time; but after a day or two of rest, when we resume the discipline, our increase in skill{138} not seldom surprises us. I have often noticed this in learning a tune; and it has led a German author to say that we learn to swim during the winter, and to skate during the summer.
It’s important to note that the growth of structural changes in living things can happen faster than in any non-living material. This is because the constant nutritional renewal in living matter often supports and solidifies the changes made, rather than undoing them by restoring the original form of the tissue that was changed. For example, after we exercise our muscles or brains in a new way, we often find we can't do it again right away; however, after a day or two of rest, when we practice again, we are sometimes surprised by how much our skills have improved{138}. I’ve seen this happen when learning a tune, and it has led a German author to remark that we learn to swim in the winter and to skate in the summer.
Practical Effects of Habit.—First, habit simplifies our movements, makes them accurate, and diminishes fatigue.
Practical Effects of Habit.—First, habit simplifies our actions, makes them precise, and reduces tiredness.
Man is born with a tendency to do more things than he has ready-made arrangements for in his nerve-centres. Most of the performances of other animals are automatic. But in him the number of them is so enormous that most of them must be the fruit of painful study. If practice did not make perfect, nor habit economize the expense of nervous and muscular energy, he would be in a sorry plight. As Dr. Maudsley says:[30]
Man is born with a tendency to do more things than he is set up for in his nervous system. Most behaviors in other animals are automatic. But in humans, the range is so vast that most actions come from intentional effort. If practice didn’t lead to improvement, and if habits didn’t save the use of nervous and muscular energy, he would be in serious trouble. As Dr. Maudsley says:[30]
"If an act became no easier after being done several times, if the careful direction of consciousness were necessary to its accomplishment on each occasion, it is evident that the whole activity of a lifetime might be confined to one or two deeds—that no progress could take place in development. A man might be occupied all day in dressing and undressing himself; the attitude of his body would absorb all his attention and energy; the washing of his hands or the fastening of a button would be as difficult to him on each occasion as to the child on its first trial; and he would, furthermore, be completely exhausted by his exertions. Think of the pains necessary to teach a child to stand, of the many efforts which it must make, and of the ease with which it at last stands, unconscious of any effort. For while secondarily-automatic acts are accomplished with comparatively little weariness—in this regard approaching the organic movements, or the original reflex movements—the conscious effort of the will soon produces exhaustion. A spinal cord without ... memory would simply be an idiotic spinal cord.... It is impossible for an individual{139} to realize how much he owes to its automatic agency until disease has impaired its functions."
"If doing something doesn't get any easier after repeating it several times, and if you have to focus your mind on it every single time, then it’s clear that a person's entire life could be spent on just one or two actions—there would be no real progress in development. A person could spend all day getting dressed and undressed; the position of their body would take up all their focus and energy; washing their hands or buttoning a shirt would be just as challenging each time as it is for a child on their first attempt. Plus, they would be completely worn out from trying. Think about how much effort it takes to teach a child to stand, how many tries they go through, and then how easily they can finally do it, without even thinking about it. While actions that become somewhat automatic use relatively little energy—similar to natural movements or instinctive reflexes—the conscious willpower quickly leads to fatigue. A spinal cord without... memory would simply be a useless spinal cord... One can’t fully appreciate how much they depend on its automatic functions until an illness disrupts them."
Secondly, habit diminishes the conscious attention with which our acts are performed.
Secondly, habits reduce the conscious attention we give to our actions.
One may state this abstractly thus: If an act require for its execution a chain, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, etc., of successive nervous events, then in the first performances of the action the conscious will must choose each of these events from a number of wrong alternatives that tend to present themselves; but habit soon brings it about that each event calls up its own appropriate successor without any alternative offering itself, and without any reference to the conscious will, until at last the whole chain, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, rattles itself off as soon as A occurs, just as if A and the rest of the chain were fused into a continuous stream. Whilst we are learning to walk, to ride, to swim, skate, fence, write, play, or sing, we interrupt ourselves at every step by unnecessary movements and false notes. When we are proficients, on the contrary, the results follow not only with the very minimum of muscular action requisite to bring them forth, but they follow from a single instantaneous 'cue.' The marksman sees the bird, and, before he knows it, he has aimed and shot. A gleam in his adversary's eye, a momentary pressure from his rapier, and the fencer finds that he has instantly made the right parry and return. A glance at the musical hieroglyphics, and the pianist's fingers have rippled through a shower of notes. And not only is it the right thing at the right time that we thus involuntarily do, but the wrong thing also, if it be an habitual thing. Who is there that has never wound up his watch on taking off his waistcoat in the daytime, or taken his latch-key out on arriving at the door-step of a friend? Persons in going to their bedroom to dress for dinner have been known to take off one garment after another and finally to get into bed, merely because that was the habitual issue of the first few movements when performed at a later hour. We all have a{140} definite routine manner of performing certain daily offices connected with the toilet, with the opening and shutting of familiar cupboards, and the like. But our higher thought-centres know hardly anything about the matter. Few men can tell off-hand which sock, shoe, or trousers-leg they put on first. They must first mentally rehearse the act; and even that is often insufficient—the act must be performed. So of the questions, Which valve of the shutters opens first? Which way does my door swing? etc. I cannot tell the answer; yet my hand never makes a mistake. No one can describe the order in which he brushes his hair or teeth; yet it is likely that the order is a pretty fixed one in all of us.
One could say it like this: If an action needs a sequence of nervous events, like A, B, C, D, E, F, G, to happen, then at first, the conscious will has to pick each of these events from several incorrect options that come up. However, with practice, each event will trigger its next appropriate one without any other options appearing and without any need for conscious thought, until eventually, the entire sequence A, B, C, D, E, F, G happens automatically as soon as A occurs, as if A and the rest were all part of a continuous flow. While we're learning to walk, ride, swim, skate, fence, write, play, or sing, we disrupt ourselves with unnecessary movements and mistakes. But once we master these skills, the results come with minimal effort and follow from a single instant cue. The marksman sees the bird and, before he realizes it, has aimed and fired. A glint in his opponent's eye or a slight pressure from his rapier, and the fencer immediately knows how to respond with the right parry and counterattack. A quick look at the musical notation, and the pianist's fingers effortlessly dance over the keys. Not only do we involuntarily do the right thing at the right time, but we also do the wrong thing if it's a habit. Who hasn’t wound up their watch when taking off their waistcoat during the day or pulled out their key upon reaching a friend’s doorstep? People getting ready for dinner have been known to take off one piece of clothing after another and end up in bed, just because that was the usual result of the first few movements when done at a later hour. We all have a{140} specific routine for certain daily tasks related to getting ready, opening and closing familiar cabinets, and so on. Yet, our higher thought processes hardly know anything about it. Few people can immediately recall which sock, shoe, or pant leg they put on first. They have to mentally go through the act first, and even that isn't always enough—the action has to be done. As for questions like, Which shutter valve opens first? Which way does my door swing? I can’t say the answer; still, my hand never makes a mistake. No one can describe the order in which they brush their hair or teeth, yet it's likely that we all follow a fairly consistent order.
These results may be expressed as follows:
These results can be stated as follows:
In action grown habitual, what instigates each new muscular contraction to take place in its appointed order is not a thought or a perception, but the sensation occasioned by the muscular contraction just finished. A strictly voluntary act has to be guided by idea, perception, and volition, throughout its whole course. In habitual action, mere sensation is a sufficient guide, and the upper regions of brain and mind are set comparatively free. A diagram will make the matter clear:
In actions that have become habits, what triggers each new muscle contraction to happen in order isn't a thought or perception, but the sensation caused by the muscle contraction that just occurred. A completely voluntary action has to be directed by ideas, perceptions, and willpower all the way through. In habitual actions, just the sensation is enough to guide us, and the higher levels of the brain and mind are relatively free. A diagram will clarify this:
Let A, B, C, D, E, F, G represent an habitual chain of muscular contractions, and let a, b, c, d, e, f stand for the several sensations which these contractions excite in us when they are successively performed. Such sensations{141} will usually be in the parts moved, but they may also be effects of the movement upon the eye or the ear. Through them, and through them alone, we are made aware whether or not the contraction has occurred. When the series, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, is being learned, each of these sensations becomes the object of a separate act of attention by the mind. We test each movement intellectually, to see if it have been rightly performed, before advancing to the next. We hesitate, compare, choose, revoke, reject, etc.; and the order by which the next movement is discharged is an express order from the ideational centres after this deliberation has been gone through.
Let A, B, C, D, E, F, G represent a habitual chain of muscle contractions, and let a, b, c, d, e, f stand for the various sensations these contractions create in us when they are performed one after the other. Such sensations{141} will usually be felt in the parts that move, but they can also be effects of the movement on the eye or the ear. These sensations are the only way we know if the contraction has happened. As we learn the series A, B, C, D, E, F, G, each of these sensations becomes the focus of a separate mental act of attention. We evaluate each movement intellectually to determine if it was executed correctly before moving on to the next. We hesitate, compare, choose, revoke, reject, etc.; and the order in which the next movement is carried out is a direct command from the thought centers after this careful consideration has been completed.
In habitual action, on the contrary, the only impulse which the intellectual centres need send down is that which carries the command to start. This is represented in the diagram by V; it may be a thought of the first movement or of the last result, or a mere perception of some of the habitual conditions of the chain, the presence, e.g., of the keyboard near the hand. In the present example, no sooner has this conscious thought or volition instigated movement A, than A, through the sensation a of its own occurrence, awakens B reflexly; B then excites C through b, and so on till the chain is ended, when the intellect generally takes cognizance of the final result. The intellectual perception at the end is indicated in the diagram by the sensible effect of the movement G being represented at G´, in the ideational centres above the merely sensational line. The sensational impressions, a, b, c, d, e, f, are all supposed to have their seat below the ideational level.
In routine actions, on the other hand, the only signal that the intellectual centers need to send down is the one that initiates the action. This is represented in the diagram by V; it could be a thought about the first movement, the final result, or even just an awareness of some of the usual conditions in the sequence, like having the keyboard nearby. In this example, as soon as this conscious thought or intention triggers movement A, then A, through the sensation a of what just happened, reflexively activates B; B then prompts C through b, and this continues until the sequence concludes, when the intellect usually acknowledges the final outcome. The intellectual awareness at the end is shown in the diagram by the noticeable effect of movement G, indicated at G´, in the idea centers above the purely sensory line. The sensory impressions, a, b, c, d, e, f, are all thought to be located below the idea level.
Habits depend on sensations not attended to. We have called a, b, c, d, e, f, by the name of 'sensations.' If sensations, they are sensations to which we are usually inattentive; but that they are more than unconscious nerve-currents seems certain, for they catch our attention if they go wrong. Schneider's account of these sensations deserves to be quoted. In the act of walking, he says, even when our attention is entirely absorbed elsewhere,{142} it is doubtful whether we could preserve equilibrium if no sensation of our body's attitude were there, and doubtful whether we should advance our leg if we had no sensation of its movement as executed, and not even a minimal feeling of impulse to set it down. Knitting appears altogether mechanical, and the knitter keeps up her knitting even while she reads or is engaged in lively talk. But if we ask her how this is possible, she will hardly reply that the knitting goes on of itself. She will rather say that she has a feeling of it, that she feels in her hands that she knits and how she must knit, and that therefore the movements of knitting are called forth and regulated by the sensations associated therewithal, even when the attention is called away...." Again: "When a pupil begins to play on the violin, to keep him from raising his right elbow in playing a book is placed under his right armpit, which he is ordered to hold fast by keeping the upper arm tight against his body. The muscular feelings, and feelings of contact connected with the book, provoke an impulse to press it tight. But often it happens that the beginner, whose attention gets absorbed in the production of the notes, lets drop the book. Later, however, this never happens; the faintest sensations of contact suffice to awaken the impulse to keep it in its place, and the attention may be wholly absorbed by the notes and the fingering with the left hand. The simultaneous combination of movements is thus in the first instance conditioned by the facility with which in us, alongside of intellectual processes, processes of inattentive feeling may still go on."
Habits rely on sensations we typically ignore. We have referred to a, b, c, d, e, f as 'sensations.' While these are sensations, they are usually ones we don't pay much attention to; however, it’s clear they are more than just unconscious nerve signals because they grab our attention when something goes wrong. Schneider’s description of these sensations is worth quoting. He states that while walking, even when our focus is on something else, {142} it's uncertain if we could maintain our balance without any sensation of our body's position, and it’s unclear if we would move our leg if we didn't have any sense of its motion or at least some impulse to place it down. Knitting seems entirely mechanical, and the knitter continues to knit even while reading or talking animatedly. But if you ask her how she does this, she won’t simply say that the knitting happens automatically. Instead, she would explain that she can feel the knitting in her hands and knows how to knit, which means the movements of knitting are triggered and controlled by the sensations linked to it, even when her attention is diverted...." Again: "When a student starts playing the violin, to prevent him from raising his right elbow, a book is placed under his right armpit, which he is instructed to hold by keeping his upper arm close to his body. The sensations from the muscles and the contact from the book encourage him to press it tightly. However, it often happens that the beginner, who becomes focused on producing the notes, drops the book. Later on, though, this rarely occurs; even the slightest sensations of contact are enough to trigger the impulse to keep it in place, allowing his attention to be fully absorbed by the notes and the finger positioning with the left hand. The simultaneous combination of movements is thus initially dependent on our ability to carry out processes of inattentive feeling alongside intellectual activities."
Ethical and Pedagogical Importance of the Principle of Habit.—"Habit a second nature! Habit is ten times nature," the Duke of Wellington is said to have exclaimed; and the degree to which this is true no one probably can appreciate as well as one who is a veteran soldier himself. The daily drill and the years of discipline end by fashioning a man completely over again, as to most of the possibilities of his conduct.{143}
Ethical and Pedagogical Importance of the Principle of Habit.—"Habit is like a second nature! Habit is ten times stronger than nature," the Duke of Wellington is said to have exclaimed; and no one probably understands this better than someone who is a seasoned soldier. The daily training and years of discipline ultimately reshape a person entirely, influencing many aspects of their behavior.{143}
"There is a story," says Prof. Huxley, "which is credible enough, though it may not be true, of a practical joker who, seeing a discharged veteran carrying home his dinner, suddenly called out, 'Attention!' whereupon the man instantly brought his hands down, and lost his mutton and potatoes in the gutter. The drill had been thorough, and its effects had become embodied in the man's nervous structure."
"There’s a story," says Prof. Huxley, "that seems believable enough, even if it might not be true, about a prankster who, seeing a discharged veteran carrying home his dinner, suddenly shouted, 'Attention!' The man immediately snapped to attention, losing his meat and potatoes in the gutter. The training had been intense, and its effects had become ingrained in the man's nervous system."
Riderless cavalry-horses, at many a battle, have been seen to come together and go through their customary evolutions at the sound of the bugle-call. Most domestic beasts seem machines almost pure and simple, undoubtingly, unhesitatingly doing from minute to minute the duties they have been taught, and giving no sign that the possibility of an alternative ever suggests itself to their mind. Men grown old in prison have asked to be readmitted after being once set free. In a railroad accident a menagerie-tiger, whose cage had broken open, is said to have emerged, but presently crept back again, as if too much bewildered by his new responsibilities, so that he was without difficulty secured.
Riderless cavalry horses have often been seen coming together and performing their usual movements at the sound of the bugle. Most domestic animals seem like simple machines, reliably doing their tasks without question or hesitation, showing no sign that any other options ever cross their minds. Men who have spent years in prison have requested to be let back in after being released. In a train wreck, a tiger from a traveling circus, whose cage had broken open, reportedly came out but then quickly returned, seemingly overwhelmed by his new responsibilities, making it easy for him to be captured again.
Habit is thus the enormous fly-wheel of society, its most precious conservative agent. It alone is what keeps us all within the bounds of ordinance, and saves the children of fortune from the envious uprisings of the poor. It alone prevents the hardest and most repulsive walks of life from being deserted by those brought up to tread therein. It keeps the fisherman and the deck-hand at sea through the winter; it holds the miner in his darkness, and nails the countryman to his log-cabin and his lonely farm through all the months of snow; it protects us from invasion by the natives of the desert and the frozen zone. It dooms us all to fight out the battle of life upon the lines of our nurture or our early choice, and to make the best of a pursuit that disagrees, because there is no other for which we are fitted, and it is too late to begin again. It keeps different social strata from mixing. Already at the age of twenty-five you{144} see the professional mannerism settling down on the young commercial traveller, on the young doctor, on the young minister, on the young counsellor-at-law. You see the little lines of cleavage running through the character, the tricks of thought, the prejudices, the ways of the 'shop,' in a word, from which the man can by-and-by no more escape than his coat-sleeve can suddenly fall into a new set of folds. On the whole, it is best he should not escape. It is well for the world that in most of us, by the age of thirty, the character has set like plaster, and will never soften again.
Habit is the huge flywheel of society, its most valuable conservative force. It’s what keeps us all within the limits of rules and prevents the fortunate from facing the jealousy of the less fortunate. It stops the most difficult and unpleasant jobs from being abandoned by those who were raised to do them. It keeps the fisherman and the deckhand working at sea during winter; it keeps the miner in his darkness, and ties the country dweller to his log cabin and lonely farm throughout the snowy months; it protects us from being invaded by those from the desert and the icy regions. It binds us all to fight the battle of life based on our upbringing or our early choices, making the best of a path that doesn’t suit us, because there’s no other that fits, and it’s too late to start over. It keeps different social classes from mixing. By the age of twenty-five, you{144} can see the professional habits forming in the young commercial traveler, the young doctor, the young minister, and the young lawyer. You notice the small divides in their personalities, the thought patterns, the biases, the ways of their profession, which, in time, they can escape no more than their coat sleeve can suddenly change its folds. Overall, it’s better that they don’t escape. It’s good for the world that in most of us, by age thirty, our character hardens like plaster and never softens again.
If the period between twenty and thirty is the critical one in the formation of intellectual and professional habits, the period below twenty is more important still for the fixing of personal habits, properly so called, such as vocalization and pronunciation, gesture, motion, and address. Hardly ever is a language learned after twenty spoken without a foreign accent; hardly ever can a youth transferred to the society of his betters unlearn the nasality and other vices of speech bred in him by the associations of his growing years. Hardly ever, indeed, no matter how much money there be in his pocket, can he even learn to dress like a gentleman-born. The merchants offer their wares as eagerly to him as to the veriest 'swell,' but he simply cannot buy the right things. An invisible law, as strong as gravitation, keeps him within his orbit, arrayed this year as he was the last; and how his better-clad acquaintances contrive to get the things they wear will be for him a mystery till his dying day.
If the time between twenty and thirty is crucial for developing intellectual and professional habits, the time before twenty is even more important for establishing personal habits like speaking, pronunciation, gestures, movement, and interaction. It's very rare for someone to learn a language after twenty without having a foreign accent; it's also unlikely that someone who comes from a less privileged background can shake off the nasal tone and other speech patterns formed in their youth. In fact, no matter how much money he has, he often can't learn to dress like someone from a wealthy background. Stores are just as eager to sell to him as they are to the high-flyers, but he simply cannot choose the right items. An invisible law, as powerful as gravity, keeps him stuck in his usual style, dressed this year just like last year; and how his better-dressed friends manage to wear what they do will remain a mystery to him for life.
The great thing, then, in all education, is to make our nervous system our ally instead of our enemy. It is to fund and capitalize our acquisitions, and live at ease upon the interest of the fund. For this we must make automatic and habitual, as early as possible, as many useful actions as we can, and guard against the growing into ways that are likely to be disadvantageous to us, as we should guard against the plague. The more of the details of our daily life we{145} can hand over to the effortless custody of automatism, the more our higher powers of mind will be set free for their own proper work. There is no more miserable human being than one in whom nothing is habitual but indecision, and for whom the lighting of every cigar, the drinking of every cup, the time of rising and going to bed every day, and the beginning of every bit of work, are subjects of express volitional deliberation. Full half the time of such a man goes to the deciding, or regretting, of matters which ought to be so ingrained in him as practically not to exist for his consciousness at all. If there be such daily duties not yet ingrained in any one of my readers, let him begin this very hour to set the matter right.
The key to education, then, is to make our nervous system our ally instead of our enemy. It’s about investing in our learning and enjoying the benefits of that investment. To achieve this, we need to make as many useful actions as automatic and habitual as possible, starting early, and avoid developing habits that could harm us, just as we would shield ourselves from an epidemic. The more of our daily routines we{145} can turn over to the effortless management of automation, the more our higher mental abilities will be available for their actual tasks. There’s no more wretched person than one who only has indecision as a habit; for whom lighting a cigar, grabbing a drink, deciding when to get up or go to bed each day, and starting any task requires conscious thought and deliberation. Half of this person's time is spent deciding or regretting choices that should be so automatic they barely register in their awareness. If any daily responsibilities aren’t yet ingrained for my readers, they should start working on that right now.
In Professor Bain's chapter on 'The Moral Habits' there are some admirable practical remarks laid down. Two great maxims emerge from his treatment. The first is that in the acquisition of a new habit, or the leaving off of an old one, we must take care to launch ourselves with as strong and decided an initiative as possible. Accumulate all the possible circumstances which shall re-enforce the right motives; put yourself assiduously in conditions that encourage the new way; make engagements incompatible with the old; take a public pledge, if the case allows; in short, envelop your resolution with every aid you know. This will give your new beginning such a momentum that the temptation to break down will not occur as soon as it otherwise might; and every day during which a breakdown is postponed adds to the chances of its not occurring at all.
In Professor Bain's chapter on 'The Moral Habits,' there are some excellent practical insights shared. Two main principles stand out from his discussion. The first is that when trying to form a new habit or break an old one, we must launch ourselves with as strong and determined an initiative as possible. Gather all the favorable circumstances that will support the right motives; put yourself in situations that promote the new behavior; make commitments that conflict with the old habits; take a public pledge if you can; in short, surround your decision with every support you know. This will give your fresh start enough momentum so that the urge to give up won’t hit you as soon as it otherwise might; and every day you delay giving up increases the chances that you won’t give up at all.
The second maxim is: Never suffer an exception to occur till the new habit is securely rooted in your life. Each lapse is like the letting fall of a ball of string which one is carefully winding up; a single slip undoes more than a great many turns will wind again. Continuity of training is the great means of making the nervous system act infallibly right. As Professor Bain says:
The second maxim is: Never let an exception happen until the new habit is firmly established in your life. Each slip is like dropping a ball of string that you’re carefully winding up; one mistake can undo more than a lot of successful turns can fix. Consistency in training is the key to making the nervous system operate perfectly. As Professor Bain says:
"The peculiarity of the moral habits, contradistinguishing{146} them from the intellectual acquisitions, is the presence of two hostile powers, one to be gradually raised into the ascendant over the other. It is necessary, above all things, in such a situation, never to lose a battle. Every gain on the wrong side undoes the effect of many conquests on the right. The essential precaution, therefore, is so to regulate the two opposing powers that the one may have a series of uninterrupted successes, until repetition has fortified it to such a degree as to enable it to cope with the opposition, under any circumstances. This is the theoretically best career of mental progress."
"The uniqueness of moral habits, distinguishing{146} them from intellectual skills, lies in the presence of two opposing forces, where one needs to gradually become stronger than the other. In this situation, it’s crucial never to lose a battle. Any victory on the wrong side can undo the impact of many successes on the right side. Therefore, the key precaution is to manage the two opposing forces so that one experiences a continuous stream of victories, until repetition strengthens it enough to handle the opposition in any situation. This represents the theoretically ideal path of mental growth."
The need of securing success at the outset is imperative. Failure at first is apt to damp the energy of all future attempts, whereas past experiences of success nerve one to future vigor. Goethe says to a man who consulted him about an enterprise but mistrusted his own powers: "Ach! you need only blow on your hands!" And the remark illustrates the effect on Goethe's spirits of his own habitually successful career.
The need to ensure success at the beginning is crucial. Failing at first can discourage all future efforts, while past successes motivate you for future challenges. Goethe advised a man who was uncertain about his abilities: "Ah! You just need to warm up your hands!" This comment reflects how Goethe's own consistently successful career boosts his spirits.
The question of "tapering-off," in abandoning such habits as drink and opium-indulgence comes in here, and is a question about which experts differ within certain limits, and in regard to what may be best for an individual case. In the main, however, all expert opinion would agree that abrupt acquisition of the new habit is the best way, if there be a real possibility of carrying it out. We must be careful not to give the will so stiff a task as to insure its defeat at the very outset; but, provided one can stand it, a sharp period of suffering, and then a free time, is the best thing to aim at, whether in giving up a habit like that of opium, or in simply changing one's hours of rising or of work. It is surprising how soon a desire will die of inanition if it be never fed.
The issue of "tapering off" when quitting habits like drinking and using opium comes into play here, and experts have varying opinions on what's best for different individuals. However, most experts generally agree that switching to a new habit abruptly is the best approach, if it can realistically be maintained. We need to be careful not to make the willpower challenge so daunting that it leads to failure right from the start; but, if one can handle it, enduring a tough period of withdrawal followed by a time of freedom is the best goal, whether in giving up something like opium or simply adjusting one’s wake-up or work hours. It's surprising how quickly a desire can fade away if it’s never satisfied.
"One must first learn, unmoved, looking neither to the right nor left, to walk firmly on the strait and narrow path, before one can begin 'to make one's self over again.' He who every day makes a fresh resolve is like one who,{147} arriving at the edge of the ditch he is to leap, forever stops and returns for a fresh run. Without unbroken advance there is no such thing as accumulation of the ethical forces possible, and to make this possible, and to exercise us and habituate us in it, is the sovereign blessing of regular work."[31]
"You have to first learn to walk steadily on the straight and narrow path, without looking to the right or left, before you can start 'transforming yourself.' Someone who makes a new resolution every day is like a person who, {147} when they reach the edge of a ditch they need to jump over, keeps stopping and going back for a fresh attempt. Without consistent progress, it’s impossible to build up ethical strength, and the ability to do this, along with helping us get used to it, is the great benefit of regular work."[31]
A third maxim may be added to the preceding pair: Seize the very first possible opportunity to act on every resolution you make, and on every emotional prompting you may experience in the direction of the habits you aspire to gain. It is not in the moment of their forming, but in the moment of their producing motor effects, that resolves and aspirations communicate the new 'set' to the brain. As the author last quoted remarks:
A third principle can be added to the previous two: Take advantage of the very first chance you get to act on every decision you make and on every emotional urge you feel toward the habits you want to develop. It's not at the moment of making these decisions, but at the moment they lead to action, that resolutions and aspirations create a new 'set' in the brain. As the last quoted author points out:
"The actual presence of the practical opportunity alone furnishes the fulcrum upon which the lever can rest, by means of which the moral will may multiply its strength, and raise itself aloft. He who has no solid ground to press against will never get beyond the stage of empty gesture-making."
"The real presence of a practical opportunity is the support that allows the moral will to increase its strength and rise higher. Someone who has no solid foundation to push against will never move beyond meaningless actions."
No matter how full a reservoir of maxims one may possess, and no matter how good one's sentiments may be, if one have not taken advantage of every concrete opportunity to act, one's character may remain entirely unaffected for the better. With mere good intentions, hell is proverbially paved. And this is an obvious consequence of the principles we have laid down. A 'character,' as J. S. Mill says, 'is a completely fashioned will'; and a will, in the sense in which he means it, is an aggregate of tendencies to act in a firm and prompt and definite way upon all the principal emergencies of life. A tendency to act only becomes effectively ingrained in us in proportion to the uninterrupted frequency with which the actions actually occur, and the brain 'grows' to their use. When a resolve or a fine glow of feeling is allowed to evaporate without{148} bearing practical fruit it is worse than a chance lost; it works so as positively to hinder future resolutions and emotions from taking the normal path of discharge. There is no more contemptible type of human character than that of the nerveless sentimentalist and dreamer, who spends his life in a weltering sea of sensibility and emotion, but who never does a manly concrete deed. Rousseau, inflaming all the mothers of France, by his eloquence, to follow Nature and nurse their babies themselves, while he sends his own children to the foundling hospital, is the classical example of what I mean. But every one of us in his measure, whenever, after glowing for an abstractly formulated Good, he practically ignores some actual case, among the squalid 'other particulars' of which that same Good lurks disguised, treads straight on Rousseau's path. All Goods are disguised by the vulgarity of their concomitants, in this work-a-day world; but woe to him who can only recognize them when he thinks them in their pure and abstract form! The habit of excessive novel-reading and theatre-going will produce true monsters in this line. The weeping of the Russian lady over the fictitious personages in the play, while her coachman is freezing to death on his seat outside, is the sort of thing that everywhere happens on a less glaring scale. Even the habit of excessive indulgence in music, for those who are neither performers themselves nor musically gifted enough to take it in a purely intellectual way, has probably a relaxing effect upon the character. One becomes filled with emotions which habitually pass without prompting to any deed, and so the inertly sentimental condition is kept up. The remedy would be, never to suffer one's self to have an emotion at a concert, without expressing it afterward in some active way. Let the expression be the least thing in the world—speaking genially to one's grandmother, or giving up one's seat in a horse-car, if nothing more heroic offers—but let it not fail to take place.
No matter how many maxims you have or how good your sentiments are, if you don’t take advantage of every real opportunity to act, your character might not improve at all. Good intentions alone are said to pave the road to hell. This is a clear consequence of the principles we've discussed. A 'character,' as J. S. Mill puts it, 'is a fully developed will'; and a will, in this context, is a collection of tendencies to act firmly, quickly, and decisively in all life’s major situations. A tendency to act truly becomes ingrained in us only when we consistently perform those actions, and the brain 'grows' to support their use. When a determination or a strong feeling fades away without {148} resulting in practical action, it's worse than losing an opportunity; it can actually hinder future resolutions and feelings from taking their usual course. There’s no more contemptible kind of person than the weak-willed sentimentalist and dreamer who drifts through life in a turbulent sea of emotions but never takes decisive action. Rousseau, who inspired mothers in France with his eloquence to embrace Nature and nurse their own babies while he sent his children to a foundling hospital, is a classic example of what I mean. Each of us, to some extent, follows Rousseau's path whenever, after feeling passionate about an abstract idea of Good, we ignore a real situation containing that same Good disguised among the messy details of life. All Goods are masked by the mundanity of their surroundings in this everyday world; but woe to anyone who can only see them in their pure, abstract form! Excessive reading of novels and watching plays can create true monsters in this regard. The tears of a Russian lady over fictional characters in a play, while her coachman freezes outside, represent a more obvious version of what happens everywhere on a smaller scale. Even excessive enjoyment of music, for those who are neither performers nor tuned into it intellectually, likely weakens character. You get filled with emotions that often don’t lead to any action, keeping you in a passive sentimental state. The solution is to never let yourself feel an emotion at a concert without expressing it in some active way afterward. Even if it’s something small—like chatting warmly with your grandmother or giving up your seat on a bus if no grander gesture comes to mind—make sure it happens.
These latter cases make us aware that it is not simply{149} particular lines of discharge, but also general forms of discharge, that seem to be grooved out by habit in the brain. Just as, if we let our emotions evaporate, they get into a way of evaporating; so there is reason to suppose that if we often flinch from making an effort, before we know it the effort-making capacity will be gone; and that, if we suffer the wandering of our attention, presently it will wander all the time. Attention and effort are, as we shall see later, but two names for the same psychic fact. To what brain-processes they correspond we do not know. The strongest reason for believing that they do depend on brain-processes at all, and are not pure acts of the spirit, is just this fact, that they seem in some degree subject to the law of habit, which is a material law. As a final practical maxim, relative to these habits of the will, we may, then, offer something like this: Keep the faculty of effort alive in you by a little gratuitous exercise every day. That is, be systematically ascetic or heroic in little unnecessary points, do every day or two something for no other reason than that you would rather not do it, so that when the hour of dire need draws nigh, it may find you not unnerved and untrained to stand the test. Asceticism of this sort is like the insurance which a man pays on his house and goods. The tax does him no good at the time, and possibly may never bring him a return. But if the fire does come, his having paid it will be his salvation from ruin. So with the man who has daily inured himself to habits of concentrated attention, energetic volition, and self-denial in unnecessary things. He will stand like a tower when everything rocks around him, and when his softer fellow-mortals are winnowed like chaff in the blast.
These recent cases remind us that it’s not just certain {149} ways of handling things that are shaped by habit in our brains, but also general approaches. Just like if we let our emotions fade away, they get into the habit of fading; it’s reasonable to think that if we frequently avoid making an effort, we’ll lose that ability before we realize it. Similarly, if we let our focus drift, soon it will be wandering all the time. Attention and effort are, as we’ll discuss later, just two terms for the same mental process. We don’t know exactly which brain processes they correspond to. The strongest reason to believe they are influenced by brain processes, rather than being purely mental actions, is that they appear to be somewhat governed by the law of habit, which is a tangible principle. As a final practical tip regarding these habits of will, we might suggest: Keep your ability to exert effort alive by practicing it a little every day. Specifically, be intentionally self-disciplined or brave in small, unnecessary ways; do something every day or two just because you’d prefer not to, so that when a real challenge arises, you won’t be unprepared or weak. This kind of self-discipline is like the insurance a person pays for their home and belongings. The payment doesn’t seem to help at the moment and may never yield a return. But if a fire does happen, that payment will save them from disaster. Likewise, someone who has trained themselves daily to focus, exert strong will, and practice self-denial in trivial matters will remain steady when everything around them is chaotic, while others may crumble like chaff in the wind.
The physiological study of mental conditions is thus the most powerful ally of hortatory ethics. The hell to be endured hereafter, of which theology tells, is no worse than the hell we make for ourselves in this world by habitually fashioning our characters in the wrong way. Could the young but realize how soon they will become mere walking{150} bundles of habits, they would give more heed to their conduct while in the plastic state. We are spinning our own fates, good or evil, and never to be undone. Every smallest stroke of virtue or of vice leaves its never so little scar. The drunken Rip Van Winkle, in Jefferson's play, excuses himself for every fresh dereliction by saying, 'I won't count this time!' Well! he may not count it, and a kind Heaven may not count it; but it is being counted none the less. Down among his nerve-cells and fibres the molecules are counting it, registering and storing it up to be used against him when the next temptation comes. Nothing we ever do is, in strict scientific literalness, wiped out. Of course this has its good side as well as its bad one. As we become permanent drunkards by so many separate drinks, so we become saints in the moral, and authorities and experts in the practical and scientific spheres, by so many separate acts and hours of work. Let no youth have any anxiety about the upshot of his education, whatever the line of it may be. If he keep faithfully busy each hour of the working day, he may safely leave the final result to itself. He can with perfect certainty count on waking up some fine morning, to find himself one of the competent ones of his generation, in whatever pursuit he may have singled out. Silently, between all the details of his business, the power of judging in all that class of matter will have built itself up within him as a possession that will never pass away. Young people should know this truth in advance. The ignorance of it has probably engendered more discouragement and faint-heartedness in youths embarking on arduous careers than all other causes put together.{151}
The study of how our bodies influence our mental states is the strongest support for encouraging ethics. The hell we’re told we’ll face after death isn’t worse than the hell we create for ourselves in this life by developing our characters in the wrong way. If young people realized how quickly they would become just walking bundles of habits, they would pay more attention to their actions while they are still forming. We are creating our own destinies, good or bad, and there's no turning back. Every small act of virtue or vice leaves a mark, no matter how tiny. The drunken Rip Van Winkle, in Jefferson’s play, excuses his repeated failures by saying, “I won’t count this time!” He may not count it, and maybe a kind Heaven won’t either, but it’s still being counted. Down among his nerve cells and fibers, the molecules are keeping track of it, registering it to be used against him when the next temptation arises. Nothing we do is ever truly erased. Of course, this has its positive aspects as well as negative ones. Just as we become lifelong drinkers through many individual drinks, we also become saints in moral matters and authorities and experts in practical and scientific fields through countless acts and hours of effort. Young people shouldn’t worry about the outcome of their education, no matter the direction they choose. If they stay dedicated and busy each hour of the working day, they can confidently let the final results unfold on their own. They can be sure that one fine morning, they’ll wake up to find themselves among the skilled members of their generation, whatever field they focus on. Silently, amid all the details of their work, the power of judgment in that area will have developed within them as a lasting asset. Young people should understand this truth in advance. Ignorance of it has likely caused more discouragement and lack of confidence in young people starting challenging careers than all other factors combined.{151}
CHAPTER XI.
THE STREAM OF CONSCIOUSNESS.
The order of our study must be analytic. We are now prepared to begin the introspective study of the adult consciousness itself. Most books adopt the so-called synthetic method. Starting with 'simple ideas of sensation,' and regarding these as so many atoms, they proceed to build up the higher states of mind out of their 'association,' 'integration,' or 'fusion,' as houses are built by the agglutination of bricks. This has the didactic advantages which the synthetic method usually has. But it commits one beforehand to the very questionable theory that our higher states of consciousness are compounds of units; and instead of starting with what the reader directly knows, namely his total concrete states of mind, it starts with a set of supposed 'simple ideas' with which he has no immediate acquaintance at all, and concerning whose alleged interactions he is much at the mercy of any plausible phrase. On every ground, then, the method of advancing from the simple to the compound exposes us to illusion. All pedants and abstractionists will naturally hate to abandon it. But a student who loves the fulness of human nature will prefer to follow the 'analytic' method, and to begin with the most concrete facts, those with which he has a daily acquaintance in his own inner life. The analytic method will discover in due time the elementary parts, if such exist, without danger of precipitate assumption. The reader will bear in mind that our own chapters on sensation have dealt mainly with the physiological conditions thereof. They were put first as a mere matter of convenience, because incoming currents come first. Psychologically they might better have come last. Pure sensations were{152} described on page 12 as processes which in adult life are well-nigh unknown, and nothing was said which could for a moment lead the reader to suppose that they were the elements of composition of the higher states of mind.
The order of our study needs to be analytical. We are now ready to start the introspective study of adult consciousness itself. Most books use what’s called the synthetic method. Beginning with 'simple ideas of sensation' and treating them as individual building blocks, they aim to construct higher mental states through 'association,' 'integration,' or 'fusion,' much like how houses are built from bricks. This approach has the teaching benefits typically associated with the synthetic method. However, it assumes the questionable theory that our higher states of consciousness are made up of units; instead of starting with what the reader knows directly—his overall concrete mental states—it begins with a set of so-called 'simple ideas' that he has no immediate familiarity with, making him vulnerable to any catchy terminology regarding their supposed interactions. For all these reasons, the method of moving from the simple to the compound puts us at risk of misunderstanding. Naturally, pedants and abstract thinkers will resist letting go of it. But a student who values the richness of human nature will choose to follow the 'analytical' method, starting with the most concrete facts, those he encounters daily in his own inner life. The analytical method will eventually reveal the basic components, if they exist, without jumping to hasty conclusions. The reader should remember that our chapters on sensation primarily focused on its physiological aspects. They were presented first simply for convenience, since incoming sensations come first. Psychologically, they might have been better placed last. Pure sensations were{152} described on page 12 as processes that are nearly unknown in adult life, and nothing was said that could even remotely suggest they were the elements of composition for higher mental states.
The Fundamental Fact.—The first and foremost concrete fact which every one will affirm to belong to his inner experience is the fact that consciousness of some sort goes on. 'States of mind' succeed each other in him. If we could say in English 'it thinks,' as we say 'it rains' or 'it blows,' we should be stating the fact most simply and with the minimum of assumption. As we cannot, we must simply say that thought goes on.
The Fundamental Fact.—The first and most basic truth that everyone will agree is part of their inner experience is the fact that some form of consciousness exists. 'States of mind' follow one another within us. If we could say in English 'it thinks,' like we say 'it rains' or 'it blows,' we would be stating the fact in the simplest way with the least amount of assumption. Since we can't, we must just say that thought continues.
Four Characters in Consciousness.—How does it go on? We notice immediately four important characters in the process, of which it shall be the duty of the present chapter to treat in a general way:
Four Characters in Consciousness.—How does it continue? We immediately notice four key aspects in the process, which this chapter will discuss in a general way:
1) Every 'state' tends to be part of a personal consciousness.
1) Every 'state' tends to be part of personal awareness.
2) Within each personal consciousness states are always changing.
2) In each person's consciousness, states are always changing.
3) Each personal consciousness is sensibly continuous.
3) Each person's awareness is consistently continuous.
4) It is interested in some parts of its object to the exclusion of others, and welcomes or rejects—chooses from among them, in a word—all the while.
4) It is focused on certain aspects of its object while ignoring others and constantly welcomes or rejects—chooses from among them, in short—all the time.
In considering these four points successively, we shall have to plunge in medias res as regards our nomenclature and use psychological terms which can only be adequately defined in later chapters of the book. But every one knows what the terms mean in a rough way; and it is only in a rough way that we are now to take them. This chapter is like a painter's first charcoal sketch upon his canvas, in which no niceties appear.
In looking at these four points one after the other, we need to dive in medias res when it comes to our terminology and use psychological terms that will only be clearly explained in later chapters of the book. However, everyone understands what these terms mean in a general sense, and that's how we will approach them for now. This chapter is like a painter's initial charcoal sketch on a canvas, where the details aren't yet clear.
When I say every 'state' or 'thought' is part of a personal consciousness, 'personal consciousness' is one of the terms in question. Its meaning we know so long as no one asks us to define it, but to give an accurate account of it is the most difficult of philosophic tasks. This task we must{153} confront in the next chapter; here a preliminary word will suffice.
When I say every 'state' or 'thought' is part of a personal consciousness, 'personal consciousness' is one of the terms we're discussing. We understand its meaning as long as no one asks us to define it, but providing a clear explanation is one of the toughest philosophical challenges. This challenge we must{153} tackle in the next chapter; for now, a brief note will do.
In this room—this lecture-room, say—there are a multitude of thoughts, yours and mine, some of which cohere mutually, and some not. They are as little each-for-itself and reciprocally independent as they are all-belonging-together. They are neither: no one of them is separate, but each belongs with certain others and with none beside. My thought belongs with my other thoughts, and your thought with your other thoughts. Whether anywhere in the room there be a mere thought, which is nobody's thought, we have no means of ascertaining, for we have no experience of its like. The only states of consciousness that we naturally deal with are found in personal consciousnesses, minds, selves, concrete particular I's and you's.
In this room—this lecture hall, let’s say—there are countless thoughts, yours and mine, some of which connect with each other, and some that don’t. They exist independently, yet they also belong together. They are neither completely separate nor entirely unified; none of them is isolated, but each one connects with certain others and with no one else. My thoughts connect with my other thoughts, and your thoughts connect with your other thoughts. We have no way of knowing if there’s a mere thought in the room that belongs to no one, since we have no experience of anything like it. The only states of consciousness that we naturally engage with are found in personal consciousnesses, minds, selves, specific I's and you's.
Each of these minds keeps its own thoughts to itself. There is no giving or bartering between them. No thought even comes into direct sight of a thought in another personal consciousness than its own. Absolute insulation, irreducible pluralism, is the law. It seems as if the elementary psychic fact were not thought or this thought or that thought, but my thought, every thought being owned. Neither contemporaneity, nor proximity in space, nor similarity of quality and content are able to fuse thoughts together which are sundered by this barrier of belonging to different personal minds. The breaches between such thoughts are the most absolute breaches in nature. Every one will recognize this to be true, so long as the existence of something corresponding to the term 'personal mind' is all that is insisted on, without any particular view of its nature being implied. On these terms the personal self rather than the thought might be treated as the immediate datum in psychology. The universal conscious fact is not 'feelings and thoughts exist,' but 'I think' and 'I feel.' No psychology, at any rate, can question the existence of personal selves. Thoughts connected as we feel them to{154} be connected are what we mean by personal selves. The worst a psychology can do is so to interpret the nature of these selves as to rob them of their worth.
Each of these minds keeps its own thoughts to itself. There's no sharing or trading between them. No thought even comes into direct sight of a thought in another person's consciousness. Complete isolation, irreducible diversity, is the rule. It seems like the basic psychological fact isn’t thought or this thought or that thought, but my thought, with every thought being owned. Neither being from the same time, nor being close in space, nor having similar qualities and content can merge thoughts that are separated by this barrier of belonging to different personal minds. The gaps between such thoughts are the most absolute gaps in nature. Everyone will recognize this as true, as long as what’s being insisted on is just the existence of something that corresponds to the term 'personal mind,' without implying any specific view of its nature. Based on this, the personal self rather than the thought could actually be seen as the primary focus in psychology. The universal conscious fact isn't 'feelings and thoughts exist,' but 'I think' and 'I feel.' No psychology, at least, can doubt the existence of personal selves. Thoughts that we feel are connected to{154} are what we mean by personal selves. The worst a psychology can do is interpret the nature of these selves in a way that diminishes their worth.
Consciousness is in constant change. I do not mean by this to say that no one state of mind has any duration—even if true, that would be hard to establish. What I wish to lay stress on is this, that no state once gone can recur and be identical with what it was before. Now we are seeing, now hearing; now reasoning, now willing; now recollecting, now expecting; now loving, now hating; and in a hundred other ways we know our minds to be alternately engaged. But all these are complex states, it may be said, produced by combination of simpler ones;—do not the simpler ones follow a different law? Are not the sensations which we get from the same object, for example, always the same? Does not the same piano-key, struck with the same force, make us hear in the same way? Does not the same grass give us the same feeling of green, the same sky the same feeling of blue, and do we not get the same olfactory sensation no matter how many times we put our nose to the same flask of cologne? It seems a piece of metaphysical sophistry to suggest that we do not; and yet a close attention to the matter shows that there is no proof that an incoming current ever gives us just the same bodily sensation twice.
Consciousness is always changing. I don’t mean to imply that no state of mind lasts for any time—even if that were true, it would be difficult to prove. What I want to emphasize is this: no state that has passed can return and be the same as it was before. Right now we are seeing, now hearing; now reasoning, now willing; now remembering, now expecting; now loving, now hating; and in countless other ways, we know our minds are constantly active. But all these are complex states, one could argue, arising from combinations of simpler ones;—don't the simpler ones follow a different set of rules? Aren't the sensations we get from the same object, for instance, always the same? Does the same piano key, struck with the same force, not make us hear the same note? Does the same patch of grass not give us the same sense of green, the same sky the same sense of blue, and do we not experience the same smell no matter how many times we put our nose to the same bottle of cologne? It seems like a piece of philosophical nonsense to suggest that we don’t; yet, if we pay close attention, we see that there is no evidence that an incoming sensation ever gives us exactly the same physical feeling twice.
What is got twice is the same OBJECT. We hear the same note over and over again; we see the same quality of green, or smell the same objective perfume, or experience the same species of pain. The realities, concrete and abstract, physical and ideal, whose permanent existence we believe in, seem to be constantly coming up again before our thought, and lead us, in our carelessness, to suppose that our 'ideas' of them are the same ideas. When we come, some time later, to the chapter on Perception, we shall see how inveterate is our habit of simply using our sensible impressions as stepping-stones to pass over to the recognition of the realities whose presence they reveal. The grass{155} out of the window now looks to me of the same green in the sun as in the shade, and yet a painter would have to paint one part of it dark brown, another part bright yellow, to give its real sensational effect. We take no heed, as a rule, of the different way in which the same things look and sound and smell at different distances and under different circumstances. The sameness of the things is what we are concerned to ascertain; and any sensations that assure us of that will probably be considered in a rough way to be the same with each other. This is what makes off-hand testimony about the subjective identity of different sensations well-nigh worthless as a proof of the fact. The entire history of what is called Sensation is a commentary on our inability to tell whether two sensible qualities received apart are exactly alike. What appeals to our attention far more than the absolute quality of an impression is its ratio to whatever other impressions we may have at the same time. When everything is dark a somewhat less dark sensation makes us see an object white. Helmholtz calculates that the white marble painted in a picture representing an architectural view by moonlight is, when seen by daylight, from ten to twenty thousand times brighter than the real moonlit marble would be.
What is gotten twice is the same OBJECT. We hear the same note repeatedly; we see the same shade of green, or smell the same perfume, or feel the same kind of pain. The realities, whether concrete or abstract, physical or ideal, that we believe exist permanently, seem to constantly recur in our thoughts, leading us, in our carelessness, to think that our 'ideas' about them are the same as well. When we get to the chapter on Perception later, we’ll see how ingrained our habit is of using our sensory impressions as stepping stones to recognize the realities they reveal. The grass{155} outside the window now appears to me as the same green in the sun as in the shade, yet a painter would need to depict one part as dark brown and another part as bright yellow to convey its true sensory effect. Usually, we don’t pay attention to how the same things look, sound, and smell at different distances and under various conditions. We focus on the sameness of the things, and any sensations that affirm that will likely be treated roughly as the same. This makes instant testimony about the subjective identity of different sensations almost worthless as evidence. The entire history of what we call Sensation highlights our inability to determine if two separate sensory qualities are exactly alike. What captures our attention more than the absolute quality of an impression is its relationship to any other impressions we may have simultaneously. When everything is dark, a somewhat less dark sensation can make us perceive an object as white. Helmholtz calculates that the white marble painted in a picture depicting an architectural view by moonlight is, when seen in daylight, from ten to twenty thousand times brighter than the actual moonlit marble would be.
Such a difference as this could never have been sensibly learned; it had to be inferred from a series of indirect considerations. These make us believe that our sensibility is altering all the time, so that the same object cannot easily give us the same sensation over again. We feel things differently accordingly as we are sleepy or awake, hungry or full, fresh or tired; differently at night and in the morning, differently in summer and in winter; and above all, differently in childhood, manhood, and old age. And yet we never doubt that our feelings reveal the same world, with the same sensible qualities and the same sensible things occupying it. The difference of the sensibility is shown best by the difference of our emotion about the things from one age to another, or when we are in different{156} organic moods. What was bright and exciting becomes weary, flat, and unprofitable. The bird's song is tedious, the breeze is mournful, the sky is sad.
Such a difference could never have been clearly realized; it had to be figured out from a series of indirect thoughts. These lead us to believe that our sensitivity is constantly changing, so the same thing can’t easily give us the same feeling again. We perceive things differently depending on whether we’re sleepy or awake, hungry or full, fresh or tired; differently at night and in the morning, differently in summer and in winter; and most importantly, differently in childhood, adulthood, and old age. Yet, we never doubt that our feelings point to the same world, with the same sensory qualities and the same tangible things in it. The change in sensitivity is best shown by how our emotions towards things vary from one age to another, or when we’re in different{156} physical moods. What was bright and exciting becomes dull, flat, and unfulfilling. The bird's song feels tedious, the breeze seems sorrowful, and the sky appears sad.
To these indirect presumptions that our sensations, following the mutations of our capacity for feeling, are always undergoing an essential change, must be added another presumption, based on what must happen in the brain. Every sensation corresponds to some cerebral action. For an identical sensation to recur it would have to occur the second time in an unmodified brain. But as this, strictly speaking, is a physiological impossibility, so is an unmodified feeling an impossibility; for to every brain-modification, however small, we suppose that there must correspond a change of equal amount in the consciousness which the brain subserves.
To these indirect assumptions that our sensations, influenced by changes in our ability to feel, are always experiencing a fundamental shift, we must add another assumption based on what occurs in the brain. Every sensation is linked to some action in the brain. For the same sensation to happen again, it would need to occur a second time in an unaltered brain. However, since this is, strictly speaking, a physiological impossibility, an unchanged feeling is also impossible; for every small change in the brain, we assume there must be a corresponding change in the consciousness that the brain supports.
But if the assumption of 'simple sensations' recurring in immutable shape is so easily shown to be baseless, how much more baseless is the assumption of immutability in the larger masses of our thought!
But if the idea of 'simple sensations' repeating in a fixed form is easily proven to be unfounded, how much more unfounded is the belief in unchangingness in the broader aspects of our thoughts!
For there it is obvious and palpable that our state of mind is never precisely the same. Every thought we have of a given fact is, strictly speaking, unique, and only bears a resemblance of kind with our other thoughts of the same fact. When the identical fact recurs, we must think of it in a fresh manner, see it under a somewhat different angle, apprehend it in different relations from those in which it last appeared. And the thought by which we cognize it is the thought of it-in-those-relations, a thought suffused with the consciousness of all that dim context. Often we are ourselves struck at the strange differences in our successive views of the same thing. We wonder how we ever could have opined as we did last month about a certain matter. We have outgrown the possibility of that state of mind, we know not how. From one year to another we see things in new lights. What was unreal has grown real, and what was exciting is insipid. The friends we used to care the world for are shrunken to shadows;{157} the women once so divine, the stars, the woods, and the waters, how now so dull and common!—the young girls that brought an aura of infinity, at present hardly distinguishable existences; the pictures so empty; and as for the books, what was there to find so mysteriously significant in Goethe, or in John Mill so full of weight? Instead of all this, more zestful than ever is the work; and fuller and deeper the import of common duties and of common goods.
Because it's clear that our state of mind is never exactly the same. Every thought we have about a certain fact is, technically speaking, unique and only vaguely resembles our other thoughts about that fact. When the same fact comes up again, we must think about it in a new way, view it from a slightly different perspective, and understand it in different contexts than we did before. The thought that helps us recognize it is the thought of it-in-those-contexts, a thought filled with the awareness of all that subtle background. Often, we ourselves are surprised by the strange differences in how we perceive the same thing over time. We wonder how we ever thought the way we did last month about a particular issue. We've outgrown that mindset, though we don't know how. Year after year, we see things in new ways. What once felt unreal has become real, and what was once exciting now seems bland. The friends we once cherished have faded into mere shadows;{157} the women who were once divine, the stars, the woods, and the waters now feel so dull and ordinary! The young girls who brought a sense of infinity now seem like hardly distinguishable beings; the art is so empty; and as for the books, what was there that felt so mysteriously significant in Goethe or so weighty in John Mill? Instead of all this, the work is more invigorating than ever, and the meaning of everyday duties and simple pleasures is richer and deeper.
I am sure that this concrete and total manner of regarding the mind's changes is the only true manner, difficult as it may be to carry it out in detail. If anything seems obscure about it, it will grow clearer as we advance. Meanwhile, if it be true, it is certainly also true that no two 'ideas' are ever exactly the same, which is the proposition we started to prove. The proposition is more important theoretically than it at first sight seems. For it makes it already impossible for us to follow obediently in the footprints of either the Lockian or the Herbartian school, schools which have had almost unlimited influence in Germany and among ourselves. No doubt it is often convenient to formulate the mental facts in an atomistic sort of way, and to treat the higher states of consciousness as if they were all built out of unchanging simple ideas which 'pass and turn again.' It is convenient often to treat curves as if they were composed of small straight lines, and electricity and nerve-force as if they were fluids. But in the one case as in the other we must never forget that we are talking symbolically, and that there is nothing in nature to answer to our words. A permanently existing 'Idea' which makes its appearance before the footlights of consciousness at periodical intervals is as mythological an entity as the Jack of Spades.
I’m confident that this straightforward and complete way of looking at the mind's changes is the only accurate approach, even if it's challenging to implement in detail. If anything seems unclear right now, it will become clearer as we move forward. In the meantime, if it’s true, it’s also true that no two "ideas" are ever exactly alike, which is the claim we began to prove. This claim is theoretically more significant than it might initially appear. It already makes it impossible for us to just follow either the Lockean or the Herbartian schools, which have had significant influence in Germany and here. Of course, it’s often convenient to break down mental facts in a simplistic, atomistic way and to think of higher states of consciousness as if they’re constructed from unchanging simple ideas that just come and go. It’s also convenient to treat curves as if they’re made up of tiny straight lines, and electricity and nerve-force as if they’re liquids. But in both cases, we must always remember that we’re speaking symbolically, and there’s nothing in nature that corresponds to our words. A consistently existing 'Idea' that shows up on the stage of consciousness at regular intervals is as mythical as the Jack of Spades.
Within each personal consciousness, thought is sensibly continuous. I can only define 'continuous' as that which is without breach, crack, or division. The only breaches that can well be conceived to occur within the limits of a{158} single mind would either be interruptions, time-gaps during which the consciousness went out; or they would be breaks in the content of the thought, so abrupt that what followed had no connection whatever with what went before. The proposition that consciousness feels continuous, means two things:
In each person's mind, thoughts flow seamlessly. I can only describe 'seamlessly' as something that has no breaks, cracks, or divisions. The only disruptions that could be imagined within a{158} single mind would be interruptions, periods where consciousness paused; or they would be sudden shifts in thought content that are so abrupt that what comes next is completely unrelated to what came before. The idea that consciousness feels seamless means two things:
a. That even where there is a time-gap the consciousness after it feels as if it belonged together with the consciousness before it, as another part of the same self;
a. That even when there is a time gap, the consciousness afterwards feels like it belongs with the consciousness before it, as another part of the same self;
b. That the changes from one moment to another in the quality of the consciousness are never absolutely abrupt.
b. That the shifts in the quality of consciousness from one moment to the next are never completely sudden.
The case of the time-gaps, as the simplest, shall be taken first.
The case of the time gaps, being the simplest, will be addressed first.
a. When Paul and Peter wake up in the same bed, and recognize that they have been asleep, each one of them mentally reaches back and makes connection with but one of the two streams of thought which were broken by the sleeping hours. As the current of an electrode buried in the ground unerringly finds its way to its own similarly buried mate, across no matter how much intervening earth; so Peter's present instantly finds out Peter's past, and never by mistake knits itself on to that of Paul. Paul's thought in turn is as little liable to go astray. The past thought of Peter is appropriated by the present Peter alone. He may have a knowledge, and a correct one too, of what Paul's last drowsy states of mind were as he sank into sleep, but it is an entirely different sort of knowledge from that which he has of his own last states. He remembers his own states, whilst he only conceives Paul's. Remembrance is like direct feeling; its object is suffused with a warmth and intimacy to which no object of mere conception ever attains. This quality of warmth and intimacy and immediacy is what Peter's present thought also possesses for itself. So sure as this present is me, is mine, it says, so sure is anything else that comes with the same warmth and intimacy and immediacy, me and mine. What the qualities called warmth and intimacy may in{159} themselves be will have to be matter for future consideration. But whatever past states appear with those qualities must be admitted to receive the greeting of the present mental state, to be owned by it, and accepted as belonging together with it in a common self. This community of self is what the time-gap cannot break in twain, and is why a present thought, although not ignorant of the time-gap, can still regard itself as continuous with certain chosen portions of the past.
a. When Paul and Peter wake up in the same bed and realize they have been sleeping, each of them mentally connects with just one of the two streams of thought that were interrupted by their sleep. Just like an electrode buried in the ground finds its way to its matching counterpart, no matter how much dirt is between them, Peter’s present instantly connects with his past and never mistakenly links to Paul’s. Paul’s thoughts are just as unlikely to go wrong. The memories of Peter's past are claimed solely by present Peter. He may have an understanding, and a correct one at that, of Paul’s last sleepy thoughts as he drifted off, but it's a completely different type of understanding from his own last thoughts. He remembers his own thoughts, while he merely conceives Paul’s. Remembrance feels like a direct experience; its subject is filled with a warmth and closeness that no mere idea can achieve. This quality of warmth, intimacy, and immediacy is also what Peter’s present thoughts possess for him. Just as this present is me, is mine, it asserts, anything else that comes with the same warmth and closeness and immediacy is also me and mine. What those qualities of warmth and intimacy might be will have to be explored later. But any past thoughts that come with those qualities must be recognized by the present mental state, owned by it, and accepted as part of the same self. This unity of self is what the time-gap cannot disrupt, which is why a present thought, even if aware of the time-gap, can still see itself as connected to certain selected parts of the past.
Consciousness, then, does not appear to itself chopped up in bits. Such words as 'chain' or 'train' do not describe it fitly as it presents itself in the first instance. It is nothing jointed; it flows. A 'river' or a 'stream' are the metaphors by which it is most naturally described. In talking of it hereafter, let us call it the stream of thought, of consciousness, or of subjective life.
Consciousness doesn't seem to present itself in disconnected fragments. Terms like 'chain' or 'train' don't adequately capture how it initially appears. It's not made up of separate parts; it flows. 'River' or 'stream' are the metaphors that describe it best. In discussing it later on, let's refer to it as the stream of thought, consciousness, or subjective life.
b. But now there appears, even within the limits of the same self, and between thoughts all of which alike have this same sense of belonging together, a kind of jointing and separateness among the parts, of which this statement seems to take no account. I refer to the breaks that are produced by sudden contrasts in the quality of the successive segments of the stream of thought. If the words 'chain' and 'train' had no natural fitness in them, how came such words to be used at all? Does not a loud explosion rend the consciousness upon which it abruptly breaks, in twain? No; for even into our awareness of the thunder the awareness of the previous silence creeps and continues; for what we hear when the thunder crashes is not thunder pure, but thunder-breaking-upon-silence-and-contrasting-with-it. Our feeling of the same objective thunder, coming in this way, is quite different from what it would be were the thunder a continuation of previous thunder. The thunder itself we believe to abolish and exclude the silence; but the feeling of the thunder is also a feeling of the silence as just gone; and it would be difficult to find in the actual concrete consciousness of man a{160} feeling so limited to the present as not to have an inkling of anything that went before.
b. But now there seems to be, even within the same self, and among thoughts that all share this sense of belonging together, a kind of connection and separation among the parts, which this statement doesn't seem to acknowledge. I’m referring to the breaks caused by sudden contrasts in quality of the successive pieces of the stream of thought. If the words 'chain' and 'train' had no natural connection, how did those words come to be used at all? Doesn’t a loud explosion split the consciousness it suddenly interrupts in two? No; because even in our awareness of the thunder, the awareness of the previous silence seeps in and remains; what we hear when the thunder crashes isn’t just thunder pure, but thunder-breaking-upon-silence-and-contrasting-with-it. Our perception of the same objective thunder, coming this way, is quite different from what it would be if it were just a continuation of previous thunder. We think the thunder itself cancels out and excludes the silence; but the feeling of the thunder also includes a feeling of the silence that has just passed; and it would be hard to find in the actual concrete consciousness of a person a{160} feeling so confined to the present that it doesn't have a hint of anything that came before.
'Substantive' and 'Transitive' States of Mind.—When we take a general view of the wonderful stream of our consciousness, what strikes us first is the different pace of its parts. Like a bird's life, it seems to be an alternation of flights and perchings. The rhythm of language expresses this, where every thought is expressed in a sentence, and every sentence closed by a period. The resting-places are usually occupied by sensorial imaginations of some sort, whose peculiarity is that they can be held before the mind for an indefinite time, and contemplated without changing; the places of flight are filled with thoughts of relations, static or dynamic, that for the most part obtain between the matters contemplated in the periods of comparative rest.
'Substantive' and 'Transitive' States of Mind.—When we take a broad look at the amazing flow of our consciousness, what stands out right away is the different pace of its components. Like a bird's life, it seems to alternate between soaring and resting. The rhythm of language captures this, where each thought is expressed in a sentence, and every sentence ends with a period. The resting points are typically filled with sensory images of some kind, which can be held in the mind for as long as we want and observed without changing; the flight moments are filled with thoughts about relationships, either static or dynamic, that mostly exist between the subjects we consider during those periods of relative stillness.
Let us call the resting-places the 'substantive parts,' and the places of flight the 'transitive parts,' of the stream of thought. It then appears that our thinking tends at all times towards some other substantive part than the one from which it has just been dislodged. And we may say that the main use of the transitive parts is to lead us from one substantive conclusion to another.
Let's refer to the resting points as the 'substantive parts' and the points of movement as the 'transitive parts' of our thoughts. It seems that our thinking is always aiming toward a different substantive part than the one we've just left behind. We can say that the primary role of the transitive parts is to guide us from one substantive conclusion to another.
Now it is very difficult, introspectively, to see the transitive parts for what they really are. If they are but flights to a conclusion, stopping them to look at them before the conclusion is reached is really annihilating them. Whilst if we wait till the conclusion be reached, it so exceeds them in vigor and stability that it quite eclipses and swallows them up in its glare. Let anyone try to cut a thought across in the middle and get a look at its section, and he will see how difficult the introspective observation of the transitive tracts is. The rush of the thought is so headlong that it almost always brings us up at the conclusion before we can arrest it. Or if our purpose is nimble enough and we do arrest it, it ceases forthwith to be itself. As a snowflake crystal caught in the warm hand{161} is no longer a crystal but a drop, so, instead of catching the feeling of relation moving to its term, we find we have caught some substantive thing, usually the last word we were pronouncing, statically taken, and with its function, tendency, and particular meaning in the sentence quite evaporated. The attempt at introspective analysis in these cases is in fact like seizing a spinning top to catch its motion, or trying to turn up the gas quickly enough to see how the darkness looks. And the challenge to produce these transitive states of consciousness, which is sure to be thrown by doubting psychologists at anyone who contends for their existence, is as unfair as Zeno's treatment of the advocates of motion, when, asking them to point out in what place an arrow is when it moves, he argues the falsity of their thesis from their inability to make to so preposterous a question an immediate reply.
Now it’s really hard, when we look inward, to see the transitional parts for what they actually are. If they’re just steps leading to a conclusion, pausing to examine them before we reach that conclusion actually destroys them. On the other hand, if we wait until the conclusion is reached, it’s so much more intense and stable that it completely overshadows and swallows them up. Anyone who tries to interrupt a thought mid-way to examine it will find it difficult to observe the transitional stages. Thoughts rush forward so quickly that we usually end up at the conclusion before we can stop ourselves. Or if we are quick enough to halt it, it immediately loses its original form. Just like a snowflake caught in a warm hand becomes a drop of water, when we try to capture the feeling of a relation moving toward its goal, we often end up with some concrete idea—usually the last word we were saying—taken out of context, with its function, direction, and specific meaning faded away. Attempting to analyze these states of consciousness introspectively is really like trying to grab a spinning top to feel its motion or turning up the gas fast enough to see how darkness looks. And the challenge to *produce* these transitional states of consciousness, which skeptical psychologists are bound to throw at anyone who argues for their existence, is as unfair as Zeno's questioning of those who advocate for motion when he asks them to point out where an arrow is when it's in flight, using their inability to answer such a ridiculous question as proof that their argument is false.
The results of this introspective difficulty are baleful. If to hold fast and observe the transitive parts of thought's stream be so hard, then the great blunder to which all schools are liable must be the failure to register them, and the undue emphasizing of the more substantive parts of the stream. Now the blunder has historically worked in two ways. One set of thinkers have been led by it to Sensationalism. Unable to lay their hands on any substantive feelings corresponding to the innumerable relations and forms of connection between the sensible things of the world, finding no named mental states mirroring such relations, they have for the most part denied that any such states exist; and many of them, like Hume, have gone on to deny the reality of most relations out of the mind as well as in it. Simple substantive 'ideas,' sensations and their copies, juxtaposed like dominoes in a game, but really separate, everything else verbal illusion,—such is the upshot of this view. The Intellectualists, on the other hand, unable to give up the reality of relations extra mentem, but equally unable to point to any distinct substantive feelings in which they were known, have made the same admission{162} that such feelings do not exist. But they have drawn an opposite conclusion. The relations must be known, they say, in something that is no feeling, no mental 'state,' continuous and consubstantial with the subjective tissue out of which sensations and other substantive conditions of consciousness are made. They must be known by something that lies on an entirely different plane, by an actus purus of Thought, Intellect, or Reason, all written with capitals and considered to mean something unutterably superior to any passing perishing fact of sensibility whatever.
The consequences of this introspective struggle are severe. If it's so difficult to hold on and observe the fleeting aspects of thought, then the major mistake that all schools tend to make is failing to recognize them and placing too much emphasis on the more solid parts of the thought stream. Historically, this mistake has manifested in two ways. One group of thinkers has been led to Sensationalism. Unable to identify any substantial feelings that correspond to the countless relationships and connections between the tangible things in the world, and finding no named mental states that reflect those relationships, they have mostly denied that any such states exist. Many, like Hume, have even gone so far as to deny the reality of most relationships out of the mind, as well as within it. Simple substantive 'ideas,' sensations and their copies, arranged like dominoes in a game but fundamentally separate, with everything else being a verbal illusion—such is the conclusion of this perspective. On the other hand, Intellectualists, unable to abandon the reality of relationships extra mentem, yet equally unable to identify distinct substantial feelings that encapsulate them, have reached the same conclusion{162} that such feelings do not exist. However, they have drawn an opposite inference. They argue that relationships must be known in something that is not a feeling, not a mental 'state,' but continuous and consubstantial with the subjective fabric from which sensations and other substantial conditions of consciousness are formed. They assert that relationships must be known by something that exists on an entirely different level, an actus purus of Thought, Intellect, or Reason, all written with capital letters and considered to represent something incomparably superior to any fleeting, perishable fact of sensibility.
But from our point of view both Intellectualists and Sensationalists are wrong. If there be such things as feelings at all, then so surely as relations between objects exist in rerum naturâ, so surely, and more surely, do feelings exist to which these relations are known. There is not a conjunction or a preposition, and hardly an adverbial phrase, syntactic form, or inflection of voice, in human speech, that does not express some shading or other of relation which we at some moment actually feel to exist between the larger objects of our thought. If we speak objectively, it is the real relations that appear revealed; if we speak subjectively, it is the stream of consciousness that matches each of them by an inward coloring of its own. In either case the relations are numberless, and no existing language is capable of doing justice to all their shades.
But from our perspective, both Intellectualists and Sensationalists are mistaken. If feelings do exist at all, then just as there are relationships between objects in reality, so too, and even more certainly, do feelings exist that correspond to these relationships. There isn’t a conjunction or a preposition, and barely an adverbial phrase, syntactic structure, or tone variation in human language that doesn’t convey some nuance of the relationship we genuinely feel exists between the bigger ideas we think about. When we speak objectively, the true relationships become clear; when we speak subjectively, it's the flow of consciousness that personalizes each of them with its own inner nuance. In both instances, the relationships are countless, and no existing language can accurately capture all their subtleties.
We ought to say a feeling of and, a feeling of if, a feeling of but, and a feeling of by, quite as readily as we say a feeling of blue or a feeling of cold. Yet we do not: so inveterate has our habit become of recognizing the existence of the substantive parts alone, that language almost refuses to lend itself to any other use. Consider once again the analogy of the brain. We believe the brain to be an organ whose internal equilibrium is always in a state of change—the change affecting every part. The pulses of change are doubtless more violent in one place than in{163} another, their rhythm more rapid at this time than at that. As in a kaleidoscope revolving at a uniform rate, although the figures are always rearranging themselves, there are instants during which the transformation seems minute and interstitial and almost absent, followed by others when it shoots with magical rapidity, relatively stable forms thus alternating with forms we should not distinguish if seen again; so in the brain the perpetual rearrangement must result in some forms of tension lingering relatively long, whilst others simply come and pass. But if consciousness corresponds to the fact of rearrangement itself, why, if the rearrangement stop not, should the consciousness ever cease? And if a lingering rearrangement brings with it one kind of consciousness, why should not a swift rearrangement bring another kind of consciousness as peculiar as the rearrangement itself?
We should talk about a feeling of and, a feeling of if, a feeling of but, and a feeling of by, just as easily as we talk about a feeling of blue or a feeling of cold. But we don’t: our habit of only recognizing the main parts has become so ingrained that language almost refuses to be used any other way. Think again about the analogy of the brain. We see the brain as an organ whose internal balance is constantly changing—the change affects every part. The intensity of these changes is likely more intense in some areas than in others, and their rhythm varies at different times. Like in a kaleidoscope that spins at a steady pace, even though the patterns are always shifting, there are moments when the change seems small and barely noticeable, followed by others when it happens with stunning speed. The relatively stable forms alternate with ones we wouldn’t recognize if we saw them again; in the brain, this constant rearrangement must mean some tensions last relatively long while others just come and go. But if consciousness matches the act of rearrangement itself, why, if the rearrangement never stops, should consciousness ever end? And if a lingering rearrangement leads to one specific kind of consciousness, why wouldn’t a quick rearrangement lead to another kind of consciousness just as unique as the rearrangement itself?
The object before the mind always has a 'Fringe.' There are other unnamed modifications of consciousness just as important as the transitive states, and just as cognitive as they. Examples will show what I mean.
The object in the mind always has a 'Fringe.' There are other unnamed changes in consciousness that are just as important as the transitive states and just as insightful. Examples will illustrate what I mean.
Suppose three successive persons say to us: 'Wait!' 'Hark!' 'Look!' Our consciousness is thrown into three quite different attitudes of expectancy, although no definite object is before it in any one of the three cases. Probably no one will deny here the existence of a real conscious affection, a sense of the direction from which an impression is about to come, although no positive impression is yet there. Meanwhile we have no names for the psychoses in question but the names hark, look, and wait.
Suppose three people in a row say to us: 'Wait!' 'Listen!' 'Look!' Our awareness shifts into three totally different states of anticipation, even though there's no specific object present in any of these situations. It's likely that no one would dispute that there’s a genuine conscious feeling, a sense of where an impression is about to come from, even if there isn't a clear impression yet. For now, we don't have any terms for these psychological states other than the terms listen, look, and wait.
Suppose we try to recall a forgotten name. The state of our consciousness is peculiar. There is a gap therein; but no mere gap. It is a gap that is intensely active. A sort of wraith of the name is in it, beckoning us in a given direction, making us at moments tingle with the sense of our closeness, and then letting us sink back without the longed-for term. If wrong names are proposed to us, this singularly definite gap acts immediately so as to negate{164} them. They do not fit into its mould. And the gap of one word does not feel like the gap of another, all empty of content as both might seem necessarily to be when described as gaps. When I vainly try to recall the name of Spalding, my consciousness is far removed from what it is when I vainly try to recall the name of Bowles. There are innumerable consciousnesses of want, no one of which taken in itself has a name, but all different from each other. Such a feeling of want is toto cœlo other than a want of feeling: it is an intense feeling. The rhythm of a lost word may be there without a sound to clothe it; or the evanescent sense of something which is the initial vowel or consonant may mock us fitfully, without growing more distinct. Every one must know the tantalizing effect of the blank rhythm of some forgotten verse, restlessly dancing in one's mind, striving to be filled out with words.
Imagine trying to remember a forgotten name. Our consciousness feels strange. There’s a gap, but not just any gap. It’s a gap that’s intensely active. A sort of ghost of the name is there, urging us in one direction, making us tingle with the sense of being close, only to let us fall back without the name we long for. If someone suggests the wrong names, this specific gap instantly rejects them. They don’t fit into its shape. And the gap of one word doesn’t feel the same as the gap of another, even if both seem entirely empty when called gaps. When I struggle to remember the name Spalding, my mind is in a different state than when I’m trying to recall the name Bowles. There are countless feelings of want, none of which on their own have a name, but all distinct from each other. This feeling of want is toto cœlo different from a lack of feeling: it’s a strong feeling. The rhythm of a lost word may be present without any sounds to express it; or the fleeting sense of something that is the initial vowel or consonant might tease us now and then, without becoming clearer. Everyone must know the frustrating experience of the empty rhythm of some forgotten verse, restlessly swirling in one’s mind, trying to be filled with words.
What is that first instantaneous glimpse of some one's meaning which we have, when in vulgar phrase we say we 'twig' it? Surely an altogether specific affection of our mind. And has the reader never asked himself what kind of a mental fact is his intention of saying a thing before he has said it? It is an entirely definite intention, distinct from all other intentions, an absolutely distinct state of consciousness, therefore; and yet how much of it consists of definite sensorial images, either of words or of things? Hardly anything! Linger, and the words and things come into the mind; the anticipatory intention, the divination is there no more. But as the words that replace it arrive, it welcomes them successively and calls them right if they agree with it, it rejects them and calls them wrong if they do not. The intention to-say-so-and-so is the only name it can receive. One may admit that a good third of our psychic life consists in these rapid premonitory perspective views of schemes of thought not yet articulate. How comes it about that a man reading something aloud for the first time is able immediately to{165} emphasize all his words aright, unless from the very first he have a sense of at least the form of the sentence yet to come, which sense is fused with his consciousness of the present word, and modifies its emphasis in his mind so as to make him give it the proper accent as he utters it? Emphasis of this kind almost altogether depends on grammatical construction. If we read 'no more,' we expect presently a 'than'; if we read 'however,' it is a 'yet,' a 'still,' or a 'nevertheless,' that we expect. And this foreboding of the coming verbal and grammatical scheme is so practically accurate that a reader incapable of understanding four ideas of the book he is reading aloud can nevertheless read it with the most delicately modulated expression of intelligence.
What is that first instant recognition of someone's meaning that we commonly say we 'get'? It’s clearly a unique mental reaction. Has the reader ever wondered what kind of mental state is their intention to say something before they actually say it? It's a very specific intention, separate from all other intentions, a completely distinct state of awareness, yet how much of it consists of clear sensory images, whether of words or things? Almost nothing! If you hesitate, the words and images start to form in your mind; that anticipatory intention, that intuition, disappears. But as the words that take its place come in, it accepts them one by one and judges them as right if they match, or calls them wrong if they don't. The intention to-say-such-and-such is the only name it can have. One might argue that a significant part of our mental life is made up of these quick, foresightful glimpses of thought patterns that haven’t been expressed yet. How does it happen that a person reading something aloud for the first time can immediately emphasize all their words correctly, unless they have some sense of at least the structure of the upcoming sentence, which blends with their awareness of the current word and influences its emphasis in their mind to allow them to give it the right accent as they speak? This kind of emphasis mainly relies on grammatical structure. If we read 'no more,’ we then expect a 'than' soon after; if we read 'however,' we anticipate a 'yet,' 'still,' or 'nevertheless.' And this prediction of the upcoming verbal and grammatical structure is so reliably accurate that a reader who can’t grasp four concepts from the book they’re reading aloud can still read it with a finely tuned expression of understanding.
It is, the reader will see, the reinstatement of the vague and inarticulate to its proper place in our mental life which I am so anxious to press on the attention. Mr. Galton and Prof. Huxley have, as we shall see in the chapter on Imagination, made one step in advance in exploding the ridiculous theory of Hume and Berkeley that we can have no images but of perfectly definite things. Another is made if we overthrow the equally ridiculous notion that, whilst simple objective qualities are revealed to our knowledge in 'states of consciousness,' relations are not. But these reforms are not half sweeping and radical enough. What must be admitted is that the definite images of traditional psychology form but the very smallest part of our minds as they actually live. The traditional psychology talks like one who should say a river consists of nothing but pailsful, spoonsful, quartpotsful, barrelsful, and other moulded forms of water. Even were the pails and the pots all actually standing in the stream, still between them the free water would continue to flow. It is just this free water of consciousness that psychologists resolutely overlook. Every definite image in the mind is steeped and dyed in the free water that flows round it. With it goes the sense of its relations, near and remote, the dying echo{166} of whence it came to us, the dawning sense of whither it is to lead. The significance, the value, of the image is all in this halo or penumbra that surrounds and escorts it,—or rather that is fused into one with it and has become bone of its bone and flesh of its flesh; leaving it, it is true, an image of the same thing it was before, but making it an image of that thing newly taken and freshly understood.
It’s clear to the reader that I’m eager to emphasize the importance of reinstating the vague and inarticulate aspects of our mental life. As we’ll explore in the chapter on Imagination, Mr. Galton and Prof. Huxley have made progress in debunking the absurd theory of Hume and Berkeley that we can only have images of completely defined things. We also take a step forward by rejecting the equally absurd idea that, while simple objective qualities can be revealed to us through 'states of consciousness,' relationships cannot. However, these changes are not nearly sweeping and radical enough. We must recognize that the clear images of traditional psychology make up only a tiny fraction of our actual mental life. Traditional psychology is like someone saying a river is made up solely of buckets, spoons, quart pots, barrels, and other shaped collections of water. Even if all these containers were placed in the stream, the free water would still flow between them. This free water of consciousness is what psychologists consistently ignore. Every clear image in the mind is immersed in this free flowing consciousness surrounding it. Along with it comes the sense of its relationships, both close and distant, the fading memory of where it originated, and the emerging sense of where it might lead. The meaning and value of the image lie in this halo or penumbra that surrounds it— or rather, that has merged with it, becoming part of its essence. While it remains an image of the same thing it was before, it transforms into an image of that thing seen in a new light and freshly understood.
Let us call the consciousness of this halo of relations around the image by the name of 'psychic overtone' or 'fringe.'
Let's refer to the awareness of this surrounding network of relationships related to the image as 'psychic overtone' or 'fringe.'
Cerebral Conditions of the 'Fringe.'—Nothing is easier than to symbolize these facts in terms of brain-action. Just as the echo of the whence, the sense of the starting point of our thought, is probably due to the dying excitement of processes but a moment since vividly aroused; so the sense of the whither, the foretaste of the terminus, must be due to the waxing excitement of tracts or processes whose psychical correlative will a moment hence be the vividly present feature of our thought. Represented by a curve, the neurosis underlying consciousness must at any moment be like this:
Cerebral Conditions of the 'Fringe.'—It's really easy to express these ideas in terms of brain activity. Just like the echo of the whence, which indicates the starting point of our thoughts, likely comes from the fading excitement of processes that were just recently triggered; the sense of the whither, or the anticipation of the endpoint, must arise from the growing excitement of pathways or processes whose mental counterpart will soon be the striking feature of our thoughts. If we represent it as a curve, the neurosis underlying consciousness at any given moment looks like this:
Let the horizontal in Fig. 52 be the line of time, and let the three curves beginning at a, b, and c respectively stand for the neural processes correlated with the thoughts of those three letters. Each process occupies a certain time during which its intensity waxes, culminates, and wanes. The process for a has not yet died out, the process{167} for c has already begun, when that for b is culminating. At the time-instant represented by the vertical line all three processes are present, in the intensities shown by the curve. Those before c's apex were more intense a moment ago; those after it will be more intense a moment hence. If I recite a, b, c, then, at the moment of uttering b, neither a nor c is out of my consciousness altogether, but both, after their respective fashions, 'mix their dim lights' with the stronger b, because their processes are both awake in some degree.
Let the horizontal line in Fig. 52 represent time, and let the three curves starting at a, b, and c represent the neural processes associated with the thoughts of those three letters. Each process lasts for a certain period during which its intensity increases, peaks, and then decreases. The process for a hasn’t completely faded yet, while the process for c has already started, as the process for b is peaking. At the moment indicated by the vertical line, all three processes are present, with their intensities shown by the curve. The processes before c's peak were more intense just a moment ago, while those after it will be more intense in the near future. So, when I say a, b, c, at the moment I say b, neither a nor c are completely out of my mind; instead, they both, in their own ways, 'mix their dim lights' with the stronger b, since their processes are still somewhat active.
It is just like 'overtones' in music: they are not separately heard by the ear; they blend with the fundamental note, and suffuse it, and alter it; and even so do the waxing and waning brain-processes at every moment blend with and suffuse and alter the psychic effect of the processes which are at their culminating point.
It’s similar to 'overtones' in music: we don’t hear them separately; they mix with the main note, enhance it, and change it. In the same way, the increasing and decreasing brain activity at any moment combines with, enhances, and alters the mental impact of the processes that are at their peak.
The 'Topic' of the Thought.—If we then consider the cognitive function of different states of mind, we may feel assured that the difference between those that are mere 'acquaintance' and those that are 'knowledges-about' is reducible almost entirely to the absence or presence of psychic fringes or overtones. Knowledge about a thing is knowledge of its relations. Acquaintance with it is limitation to the bare impression which it makes. Of most of its relations we are only aware in the penumbral nascent way of a 'fringe' of unarticulated affinities about it. And, before passing to the next topic in order, I must say a little of this sense of affinity, as itself one of the most interesting features of the subjective stream.
The 'Topic' of the Thought.—If we then look at the cognitive function of different states of mind, we can be confident that the difference between those that are just 'acquaintance' and those that are 'knowledges-about' mostly comes down to whether or not there are psychic fringes or overtones present. Knowledge about something involves understanding its relationships. Acquaintance with it only captures the basic impression it leaves. For most of its relationships, we only recognize them in a vague, emerging sense as a 'fringe' of unexpressed connections surrounding it. Before moving on to the next topic, I want to say a bit about this sense of affinity, as it is one of the most fascinating aspects of the subjective experience.
Thought may be equally rational in any sort of terms. In all our voluntary thinking there is some TOPIC or SUBJECT about which all the members of the thought revolve. Relation to this topic or interest is constantly felt in the fringe, and particularly the relation of harmony and discord, of furtherance or hindrance of the topic. Any thought the quality of whose fringe lets us feel ourselves 'all right,' may be considered a thought that furthers the{168} topic. Provided we only feel its object to have a place in the scheme of relations in which the topic also lies, that is sufficient to make of it a relevant and appropriate portion of our train of ideas.
Thinking can be rational in any way. In all our voluntary thoughts, there is some TOPIC or SUBJECT that all our thoughts relate to. Our connection to this topic or interest is always felt in the background, especially in terms of harmony and discord, or how it supports or hinders the topic. Any thought that makes us feel 'all right' can be seen as a thought that supports the {168} topic. As long as we feel its object fits within the network of relationships that includes the topic, that's enough to make it a relevant and fitting part of our stream of ideas.
Now we may think about our topic mainly in words, or we may think about it mainly in visual or other images, but this need make no difference as regards the furtherance of our knowledge of the topic. If we only feel in the terms, whatever they be, a fringe of affinity with each other and with the topic, and if we are conscious of approaching a conclusion, we feel that our thought is rational and right. The words in every language have contracted by long association fringes of mutual repugnance or affinity with each other and with the conclusion, which run exactly parallel with like fringes in the visual, tactile, and other ideas. The most important element of these fringes is, I repeat, the mere feeling of harmony or discord, of a right or wrong direction in the thought.
Now we can think about our topic mainly in words or primarily through visual or other images, but this shouldn't change how we expand our understanding of the topic. As long as we sense some kind of connection with each other and the topic, and if we're aware that we're nearing a conclusion, we feel that our thought is rational and correct. Words in any language have built up, over time, a range of associations—either positive or negative—with each other and with the conclusion, which parallels similar associations in visual, tactile, and other ideas. The most critical aspect of these associations is, once again, the simple feeling of harmony or discord, of whether the thought is heading in the right or wrong direction.
If we know English and French and begin a sentence in French, all the later words that come are French; we hardly ever drop into English. And this affinity of the French words for each other is not something merely operating mechanically as a brain-law, it is something we feel at the time. Our understanding of a French sentence heard never falls to so low an ebb that we are not aware that the words linguistically belong together. Our attention can hardly so wander that if an English word be suddenly introduced we shall not start at the change. Such a vague sense as this of the words belonging together is the very minimum of fringe that can accompany them, if 'thought' at all. Usually the vague perception that all the words we hear belong to the same language and to the same special vocabulary in that language, and that the grammatical sequence is familiar, is practically equivalent to an admission that what we hear is sense. But if an unusual foreign word be introduced, if the grammar trip, or if a term from an incongruous vocabulary suddenly appear,{169} such as 'rat-trap' or 'plumber's bill' in a philosophical discourse, the sentence detonates as it were, we receive a shock from the incongruity, and the drowsy assent is gone. The feeling of rationality in these cases seems rather a negative than a positive thing, being the mere absence of shock, or sense of discord, between the terms of thought.
If we know English and French and start a sentence in French, all the following words will also be in French; we rarely switch to English. This connection between French words isn't just a mechanical rule our brains follow; it's something we genuinely feel in the moment. Our understanding of a spoken French sentence never gets so low that we fail to notice that the words fit together linguistically. We can't lose focus to the point where the sudden introduction of an English word doesn't make us react to the change. That subtle awareness of the words belonging together is the bare minimum sensation that can accompany them when we’re 'thinking' at all. Usually, that vague perception that all the words we hear are from the same language and share a specific vocabulary, with a familiar grammatical sequence, essentially confirms that what we hear makes sense. But if an unusual foreign word is introduced, if the grammar stumbles, or if a term from an unrelated vocabulary suddenly pops up, like 'rat-trap' or 'plumber's bill' in a philosophical discussion, it feels like the sentence explodes; we get jolted by the mismatch, and that sleepy agreement disappears. In these cases, the sense of rationality seems more like a lack of shock or discord among the thoughts.
Conversely, if words do belong to the same vocabulary, and if the grammatical structure is correct, sentences with absolutely no meaning may be uttered in good faith and pass unchallenged. Discourses at prayer-meetings, re-shuffling the same collection of cant phrases, and the whole genus of penny-a-line-isms and newspaper-reporter's flourishes give illustrations of this. "The birds filled the tree-tops with their morning song, making the air moist, cool, and pleasant," is a sentence I remember reading once in a report of some athletic exercises in Jerome Park. It was probably written unconsciously by the hurried reporter, and read uncritically by many readers.
On the other hand, if words are part of the same vocabulary and the grammar is correct, sentences that make no sense at all can be spoken sincerely and go unchallenged. Speeches at prayer meetings, recycling the same set of clichéd phrases, along with the whole category of trite phrases and the over-the-top style of newspaper reporters, illustrate this well. "The birds filled the tree-tops with their morning song, making the air moist, cool, and pleasant," is a sentence I remember reading in a report about some athletic events at Jerome Park. It was likely written without much thought by the rushed reporter and accepted without question by many readers.
We see, then, that it makes little or no difference in what sort of mind-stuff, in what quality of imagery, our thinking goes on. The only images intrinsically important are the halting-places, the substantive conclusions, provisional or final, of the thought. Throughout all the rest of the stream, the feelings of relation are everything, and the terms related almost naught. These feelings of relation, these psychic overtones, halos, suffusions, or fringes about the terms, may be the same in very different systems of imagery. A diagram may help to accentuate this indifference of the mental means where the end is the same. Let A be some experience from which a number of thinkers start. Let Z be the practical conclusion rationally inferrible from it. One gets to this conclusion by one line, another{170} by another; one follows a course of English, another of German, verbal imagery. With one, visual images predominate; with another, tactile. Some trains are tinged with emotions, others not; some are very abridged, synthetic and rapid; others, hesitating and broken into many steps. But when the penultimate terms of all the trains, however differing inter se, finally shoot into the same conclusion, we say, and rightly say, that all the thinkers have had substantially the same thought. It would probably astound each of them beyond measure to be let into his neighbor's mind and to find how different the scenery there was from that in his own.
We see, then, that it really doesn’t matter what kind of mental content or imagery our thinking involves. The only images that are truly important are the stopping points, the significant conclusions, whether temporary or final, of the thought process. Throughout the rest of the flow, the feelings of connection are everything, and the specific terms matter little. These feelings of connection, these psychological nuances, halos, or fringes around the terms, can be similar across very different systems of imagery. A diagram might help emphasize this indifference of mental approaches when the end result is the same. Let A be some experience that various thinkers begin with. Let Z be the practical conclusion that can be logically drawn from it. One arrives at this conclusion by one path, while another takes a different one; one may follow a line of English language imagery, and another a line of German. With one thinker, visual images dominate; with another, tactile sensations do. Some thought processes are filled with emotions, while others are not; some are very concise, straightforward, and quick; others are tentative and broken into many steps. But when the final terms of all these different processes ultimately lead to the same conclusion, we say, and rightly so, that all the thinkers have had fundamentally the same thought. Each of them would probably be extremely surprised to step into their neighbor's mind and see how different the scenery there is from their own.
The last peculiarity to which attention is to be drawn in this first rough description of thought's stream is that—
The last thing to note in this initial rough description of the flow of thoughts is that—
Consciousness is always interested more in one part of its object than in another, and welcomes and rejects, or chooses, all the while it thinks.
Consciousness is always more interested in one aspect of its object than in another, and it constantly welcomes, rejects, or chooses while it thinks.
The phenomena of selective attention and of deliberative will are of course patent examples of this choosing activity. But few of us are aware how incessantly it is at work in operations not ordinarily called by these names. Accentuation and Emphasis are present in every perception we have. We find it quite impossible to disperse our attention impartially over a number of impressions. A monotonous succession of sonorous strokes is broken up into rhythms, now of one sort, now of another, by the different accent which we place on different strokes. The simplest of these rhythms is the double one, tick-tóck, tick-tóck, tick-tóck. Dots dispersed on a surface are perceived in rows and groups. Lines separate into diverse figures. The ubiquity of the distinctions, this and that, here and there, now and then, in our minds is the result of our laying the same selective emphasis on parts of place and time.
The concepts of selective attention and deliberate will are obvious examples of this choosing activity. Yet, many of us aren't aware of how constantly it operates in situations not typically identified by these terms. Accentuation and emphasis are present in every perception we have. We find it nearly impossible to spread our attention evenly across multiple impressions. A continuous series of sounds is broken up into rhythms, varying from one type to another, based on the different emphasis we place on different sounds. The simplest of these rhythms is the double one: tick-tóck, tick-tóck, tick-tóck. Dots scattered on a surface are seen in rows and groups. Lines separate into different shapes. The constant distinctions of this and that, here and there, now and then, in our minds result from the selective emphasis we place on different aspects of place and time.
To begin at the bottom, what are our very senses themselves, as we saw on pp. 10-12, but organs of selection? Out of the infinite chaos of movements, of which physics teaches us that the outer world consists, each sense-organ picks out those which fall within certain limits of velocity. To these it responds, but ignores the rest as completely as if they did not exist. Out of what is in itself an undistinguishable, swarming continuum, devoid of distinction or emphasis, our senses make for us, by attending to this motion and ignoring that, a world full of contrasts, of sharp accents, of abrupt changes, of picturesque light and shade.
To start from the basics, what are our senses, as we discussed on pp. 10-12, if not tools for selection? From the endless chaos of movements that physics tells us makes up the outside world, each sense organ identifies those that fit within specific ranges of speed. It responds to these, while completely ignoring the rest as if they don’t exist at all. Out of what is essentially an indistinguishable, buzzing continuum, lacking distinction or emphasis, our senses create for us a world filled with contrasts, clear highlights, sudden changes, and vibrant light and shadow by focusing on this movement and disregarding that.
If the sensations we receive from a given organ have their causes thus picked out for us by the conformation of the organ's termination, Attention, on the other hand, out of all the sensations yielded, picks out certain ones as worthy of its notice and suppresses all the rest. We notice only those sensations which are signs to us of things which happen practically or æsthetically to interest us, to which we therefore give substantive names, and which we exalt to this exclusive status of independence and dignity. But in itself, apart from my interest, a particular dust-wreath on a windy day is just as much of an individual thing, and just as much or as little deserves an individual name, as my own body does.
If the sensations we get from a specific organ have their sources identified for us by the way the organ is structured, then Attention, on the other hand, selectively highlights certain sensations as worthy of our focus and ignores all the rest. We only notice those sensations that signal to us things that either practically or aesthetically interest us, which is why we give them specific names and elevate them to a special status of importance and value. However, aside from my interest, a particular dust swirl on a windy day is just as much of an individual thing and deserves a specific name just as much as or as little as my own body does.
And then, among the sensations we get from each separate thing, what happens? The mind selects again. It chooses certain of the sensations to represent the thing most truly, and considers the rest as its appearances, modified by the conditions of the moment. Thus my table-top is named square, after but one of an infinite number of retinal sensations which it yields, the rest of them being sensations of two acute and two obtuse angles; but I call the latter perspective views, and the four right angles the true form of the table, and erect the attribute squareness into the table's essence, for æsthetic reasons of my own. In like manner, the real form of the circle is deemed to be{172} the sensation it gives when the line of vision is perpendicular to its centre—all its other sensations are signs of this sensation. The real sound of the cannon is the sensation it makes when the ear is close by. The real color of the brick is the sensation it gives when the eye looks squarely at it from a near point, out of the sunshine and yet not in the gloom; under other circumstances it gives us other color-sensations which are but signs of this—we then see it looks pinker or bluer than it really is. The reader knows no object which he does not represent to himself by preference as in some typical attitude, of some normal size, at some characteristic distance, of some standard tint, etc., etc. But all these essential characteristics, which together form for us the genuine objectivity of the thing and are contrasted with what we call the subjective sensations it may yield us at a given moment, are mere sensations like the latter. The mind chooses to suit itself, and decides what particular sensation shall be held more real and valid than all the rest.
And then, with all the sensations we get from each individual thing, what happens? The mind selects again. It picks certain sensations to represent the thing most truly and views the rest as variations influenced by the conditions at that moment. So, my table is called square, based on just one of the countless visual sensations it provides, while the others consist of two acute angles and two obtuse angles. I refer to these as perspective views, and I consider the four right angles to be the true shape of the table, elevating squareness to be the table's essence for my own aesthetic reasons. Similarly, the true form of a circle is thought to be{172} the sensation it produces when the line of sight is perpendicular to its center—while all its other sensations are just signs of that sensation. The actual sound of a cannon is the sensation it creates when you are close by. The true color of the brick is the sensation it gives when you look straight at it from a nearby spot, out of the sun but not in the shadows; under different circumstances, it may give us different color sensations that are just signs of this—sometimes it looks pinker or bluer than it really is. The reader has no object that he doesn't typically imagine in some standard position, at a normal size, at a specific distance, with a certain color, and so on. Yet, all these essential traits that create our genuine perception of the object, which we contrast with what we call the subjective sensations it may present at any moment, are just as much sensations as the latter. The mind picks what feels most real and valid amongst all the other sensations.
Next, in a world of objects thus individualized by our mind's selective industry, what is called our 'experience' is almost entirely determined by our habits of attention. A thing may be present to a man a hundred times, but if he persistently fails to notice it, it cannot be said to enter into his experience. We are all seeing flies, moths, and beetles by the thousand, but to whom, save an entomologist, do they say anything distinct? On the other hand, a thing met only once in a lifetime may leave an indelible experience in the memory. Let four men make a tour in Europe. One will bring home only picturesque impressions—costumes and colors, parks and views and works of architecture, pictures and statues. To another all this will be non-existent; and distances and prices, populations and drainage-arrangements, door-and window-fastenings, and other useful statistics will take their place. A third will give a rich account of the theatres, restaurants, and public halls, and naught beside; whilst the fourth will perhaps have been so{173} wrapped in his own subjective broodings as to be able to tell little more than a few names of places through which he passed. Each has selected, out of the same mass of presented objects, those which suited his private interest and has made his experience thereby.
Next, in a world where our minds pick and choose from objects around us, what we call our 'experience' is mostly shaped by how we focus our attention. A person might see something a hundred times, but if they consistently overlook it, it doesn’t really become part of their experience. We all see thousands of flies, moths, and beetles, but only an entomologist would find them meaningful. On the flip side, encountering something just once in a lifetime can create a lasting memory. Imagine four people touring Europe. One will come back with only beautiful impressions—costumes, colors, parks, views, architecture, paintings, and statues. For another, all of that might not matter; instead, distances, prices, populations, plumbing systems, and other practical details will take priority. A third person will focus on theaters, restaurants, and public venues, ignoring everything else. The fourth may be so wrapped up in their own thoughts that they can hardly recall anything beyond a few place names they passed through. Each has chosen from the same array of objects those that matched their personal interests, thus shaping their own unique experience.
If now, leaving the empirical combination of objects, we ask how the mind proceeds rationally to connect them, we find selection again to be omnipotent. In a future chapter we shall see that all Reasoning depends on the ability of the mind to break up the totality of the phenomenon reasoned about, into parts, and to pick out from among these the particular one which, in the given emergency, may lead to the proper conclusion. The man of genius is he who will always stick in his bill at the right point, and bring it out with the right element—'reason' if the emergency be theoretical, 'means' if it be practical—transfixed upon it.
If we set aside the practical combination of objects and consider how the mind connects them rationally, we see that selection plays a crucial role once again. In a future chapter, we'll explore how all reasoning relies on the mind's ability to break down the whole phenomenon being reasoned about into parts and to identify the specific one that, in the given situation, can lead to the correct conclusion. A genius is someone who always knows exactly where to focus and brings back the right element—'reason' if the situation is theoretical, 'means' if it's practical—nailed down precisely.
If now we pass to the æsthetic department, our law is still more obvious. The artist notoriously selects his items, rejecting all tones, colors, shapes, which do not harmonize with each other and with the main purpose of his work. That unity, harmony, 'convergence of characters,' as M. Taine calls it, which gives to works of art their superiority over works of nature, is wholly due to elimination. Any natural subject will do, if the artist has wit enough to pounce upon some one feature of it as characteristic, and suppress all merely accidental items which do not harmonize with this.
If we now turn to the aesthetic aspect, our rule becomes even clearer. The artist clearly chooses their elements, discarding any tones, colors, or shapes that do not blend well with each other and with the main intent of their work. That unity, harmony, or "convergence of characters," as M. Taine puts it, which gives artworks their edge over natural creations, is entirely due to elimination. Any natural subject can work, as long as the artist has the insight to focus on one defining feature and leave out all the random elements that do not fit with it.
Ascending still higher, we reach the plane of Ethics, where choice reigns notoriously supreme. An act has no ethical quality whatever unless it be chosen out of several all equally possible. To sustain the arguments for the good course and keep them ever before us, to stifle our longing for more flowery ways, to keep the foot unflinchingly on the arduous path, these are characteristic ethical energies. But more than these; for these but deal with the means of compassing interests already felt by the man{174} to be supreme. The ethical energy par excellence has to go farther and choose which interest out of several, equally coercive, shall become supreme. The issue here is of the utmost pregnancy, for it decides a man's entire career. When he debates, Shall I commit this crime? choose that profession? accept that office, or marry this fortune?—his choice really lies between one of several equally possible future Characters. What he shall become is fixed by the conduct of this moment. Schopenhauer, who enforces his determinism by the argument that with a given fixed character only one reaction is possible under given circumstances, forgets that, in these critical ethical moments, what consciously seems to be in question is the complexion of the character itself. The problem with the man is less what act he shall now resolve to do than what being he shall now choose to become.
Ascending even higher, we reach the realm of Ethics, where choice is undeniably king. An act has no ethical value at all unless it's chosen from several equally possible options. To support the arguments for the right path and keep them in our minds, to suppress our desire for more appealing alternatives, to stay steadfast on the challenging road—these are the key ethical energies. But it goes beyond that; these just deal with the means of pursuing interests that the person already feels are paramount. The ethical energy par excellence has to go further and decide which interest out of several equally compelling options will be considered supreme. This issue is incredibly significant because it determines a person's entire future. When he weighs the question, "Should I commit this crime? Choose that profession? Accept that position, or marry that person?"—his choice ultimately lies between different versions of possible future selves. What he will become is determined by the decisions made in this moment. Schopenhauer, who supports his determinism by claiming that with a fixed character only one response is possible under certain circumstances, overlooks that, in these critical ethical moments, what consciously seems to be at stake is the nature of the character itself. The real issue for the person is less about which action he will decide to take and more about what kind of person he will choose to become.
Taking human experience in a general way, the choosings of different men are to a great extent the same. The race as a whole largely agrees as to what it shall notice and name; and among the noticed parts we select in much the same way for accentuation and preference, or subordination and dislike. There is, however, one entirely extraordinary case in which no two men ever are known to choose alike. One great splitting of the whole universe into two halves is made by each of us; and for each of us almost all of the interest attaches to one of the halves; but we all draw the line of division between them in a different place. When I say that we all call the two halves by the same names, and that those names are 'me' and 'not-me' respectively, it will at once be seen what I mean. The altogether unique kind of interest which each human mind feels in those parts of creation which it can call me or mine may be a moral riddle, but it is a fundamental psychological fact. No mind can take the same interest in his neighbor's me as in his own. The neighbor's me falls together with all the rest of things in one foreign mass against which his own me stands out in startling relief.{175} Even the trodden worm, as Lotze somewhere says, contrasts his own suffering self with the whole remaining universe, though he have no clear conception either of himself or of what the universe may be. He is for me a mere part of the world; for him it is I who am the mere part. Each of us dichotomizes the Kosmos in a different place.
Taking human experience as a whole, the choices of different people are largely similar. Humanity tends to agree on what to notice and name; among those noticed things, we generally select for emphasis and preference, or for subordination and dislike, in much the same way. However, there is one completely unique case where no two people ever choose the same. Each of us makes a significant split in the entire universe into two halves, and for each of us, most of our interest is connected to one half; yet we all draw the line of division in different places. When I say that we all label the two halves with the same names—'me' and 'not-me'—it becomes clear what I mean. The unique kind of interest each human mind has in those parts of creation it can call me or mine may be a moral puzzle, but it is a fundamental psychological truth. No one can take the same interest in their neighbor's me as they do in their own. The neighbor's me blends in with everything else in a foreign mass, while their own me stands out sharply. {175} Even the trampled worm, as Lotze once said, contrasts its own suffering self with the rest of the universe, even if it has no clear idea of either itself or what the universe is. To me, the worm is just a part of the world; to it, I am merely a part. Each of us splits the cosmos in a different place.
CHAPTER XII.
THE SELF.
The Me and the I.—Whatever I may be thinking of, I am always at the same time more or less aware of myself, of my personal existence. At the same time it is I who am aware; so that the total self of me, being as it were duplex, partly known and partly knower, partly object and partly subject, must have two aspects discriminated in it, of which for shortness we may call one the Me and the other the I. I call these 'discriminated aspects,' and not separate things, because the identity of I with me, even in the very act of their discrimination, is perhaps the most ineradicable dictum of common-sense, and must not be undermined by our terminology here at the outset, whatever we may come to think of its validity at our inquiry's end.
The Me and the I.—No matter what I'm thinking about, I'm always somewhat aware of myself and my personal existence. At the same time, it’s I who am aware; so my entire self, being somewhat dual, is partly known and partly the one knowing, partially an object and partially a subject. This means it has two aspects that we can briefly refer to as the Me and the I. I call these 'discriminated aspects,' not separate entities, because the identity of I with me, even in the moment of their distinction, is perhaps the most undeniable principle of common sense, and we shouldn't undermine that with our terminology at the beginning, no matter how we may view its validity by the end of our inquiry.
I shall therefore treat successively of A) the self as known, or the me, the 'empirical ego' as it is sometimes called; and of B) the self as knower, or the I, the 'pure ego' of certain authors.
I will therefore discuss successively A) the self as known, or the me, the 'empirical ego' as it is sometimes referred to; and B) the self as knower, or the I, the 'pure ego' of certain authors.
A) The Self You Know.
The Empirical Self or Me.—Between what a man calls me and what he simply calls mine the line is difficult to draw. We feel and act about certain things that are ours very much as we feel and act about ourselves. Our fame, our children, the work of our hands, may be as dear to us as our bodies are, and arouse the same feelings and the same acts of reprisal if attacked. And our bodies themselves, are they simply ours, or are they us? Certainly{177} men have been ready to disown their very bodies and to regard them as mere vestures, or even as prisons of clay from which they should some day be glad to escape.
The Empirical Self or Me.—It's hard to distinguish between what someone calls me and what they refer to as mine. We have similar feelings and reactions toward certain things that belong to us as we do toward ourselves. Our reputation, our children, and the work we create can be as precious to us as our own bodies, and we may react with the same intensity if they are threatened. And our bodies themselves, are they just possessions, or are they a part of who we are? Certainly, many{177} individuals have been willing to reject their own bodies, seeing them merely as clothing or even as prisons made of flesh from which they hope to one day escape.
We see then that we are dealing with a fluctuating material; the same object being sometimes treated as a part of me, at other times as simply mine, and then again as if I had nothing to do with it at all. In its widest possible sense, however, a man's Me is the sum total of all that he CAN call his, not only his body and his psychic powers, but his clothes and his house, his wife and children, his ancestors and friends, his reputation and works, his lands and horses, and yacht and bank-account. All these things give him the same emotions. If they wax and prosper, he feels triumphant; if they dwindle and die away, he feels cast down,—not necessarily in the same degree for each thing, but in much the same way for all. Understanding the Me in this widest sense, we may begin by dividing the history of it into three parts, relating respectively to—
We can see that we’re working with something that changes; the same object can sometimes feel like a part of me, other times just something I own, and yet at other moments, as if I have no connection to it at all. In its broadest sense, though, a person's Me is everything that he CAN consider his, not just his body and mental abilities, but also his clothes and house, his wife and kids, his ancestors and friends, his reputation and creations, his land and horses, yacht and bank balance. All these things evoke similar feelings in him. If they increase and thrive, he feels proud; if they shrink and fade, he feels downcast—not necessarily to the same degree for each item, but generally in a similar way for all. By understanding the Me in this broad context, we can start by dividing its history into three parts, each related to—
a. Its constituents;
Its components;
b. The feelings and emotions they arouse,—self-appreciation;
b. The feelings and emotions they bring up,—self-appreciation;
c. The act to which they prompt,—self-seeking and self-preservation.
c. The action they encourage,—selfishness and self-preservation.
a. The constituents of the Me may be divided into two classes, those which make up respectively—
a. The parts of the Me can be divided into two categories, those that make up respectively—
The material me; |
The social me; and |
The spiritual me. |
The Material Me.—The body is the innermost part of the material me in each of us; and certain parts of the body seem more intimately ours than the rest. The clothes come next. The old saying that the human person is composed of three parts—soul, body and clothes—is more than a joke. We so appropriate our clothes and identify ourselves{178} with them that there are few of us who, if asked to choose between having a beautiful body clad in raiment perpetually shabby and unclean, and having an ugly and blemished form always spotlessly attired, would not hesitate a moment before making a decisive reply. Next, our immediate family is a part of ourselves. Our father and mother, our wife and babes, are bone of our bone and flesh of our flesh. When they die, a part of our very selves is gone. If they do anything wrong, it is our shame. If they are insulted, our anger flashes forth as readily as if we stood in their place. Our home comes next. Its scenes are part of our life; its aspects awaken the tenderest feelings of affection; and we do not easily forgive the stranger who, in visiting it, finds fault with its arrangements or treats it with contempt. All these different things are the objects of instinctive preferences coupled with the most important practical interests of life. We all have a blind impulse to watch over our body, to deck it with clothing of an ornamental sort, to cherish parents, wife, and babes, and to find for ourselves a house of our own which we may live in and 'improve.'
The Material Me.—The body is the core of our physical self, and some parts of it feel more personal than others. Then come our clothes. The saying that a person is made up of three parts—soul, body, and clothes—is more than a joke. We connect so deeply with our clothing and identify ourselves{178} through them that most of us wouldn't hesitate to choose between having a beautiful body in perpetually shabby and dirty clothing or an ugly and flawed body always dressed impeccably. Next, our immediate family feels like an extension of ourselves. Our parents, spouses, and children are literally part of us. When they pass away, we lose a piece of ourselves. If they do something wrong, we feel the shame. When they are insulted, our anger rises just as if we were the ones being attacked. Our home is next on this list. Its memories are woven into our lives; its features evoke our deepest emotions, and we find it hard to forgive a stranger who criticizes it or disrespects it when they visit. All of these elements are tied to our instinctive preferences and key practical interests in life. We have a natural urge to care for our bodies, adorn them with nice clothing, love our parents, spouses, and children, and create a home for ourselves that we can enhance and cherish.
An equally instinctive impulse drives us to collect property; and the collections thus made become, with different degrees of intimacy, parts of our empirical selves. The parts of our wealth most intimately ours are those which are saturated with our labor. There are few men who would not feel personally annihilated if a life-long construction of their hands or brains—say an entomological collection or an extensive work in manuscript—were suddenly swept away. The miser feels similarly towards his gold; and although it is true that a part of our depression at the loss of possessions is due to our feeling that we must now go without certain goods that we expected the possessions to bring in their train, yet in every case there remains, over and above this, a sense of the shrinkage of our personality, a partial conversion of ourselves to nothingness, which is a psychological phenomenon by itself. We{179} are all at once assimilated to the tramps and poor devils whom we so despise, and at the same time removed farther than ever away from the happy sons of earth who lord it over land and sea and men in the full-blown lustihood that wealth and power can give, and before whom, stiffen ourselves as we will by appealing to anti-snobbish first principles, we cannot escape an emotion, open or sneaking, of respect and dread.
An equally strong impulse drives us to accumulate possessions, and the things we gather become, to varying degrees, parts of who we are. The possessions that feel most personal to us are those that are infused with our effort. Few people would not feel utterly devastated if something they spent a lifetime creating—like a collection of insects or an extensive manuscript—were suddenly taken away. A miser feels the same way about his gold; and while part of our sadness over losing possessions is tied to the realization that we now have to do without things we expected those possessions to provide, there’s also a deeper feeling of our identity shrinking, a kind of loss of self that is a psychological experience in itself. We{179} suddenly find ourselves akin to the homeless and the downtrodden whom we look down upon, while at the same time, we feel even more distant from the fortunate individuals who possess the wealth and power to dominate land, sea, and people—people who command a respect and fear from us, no matter how much we try to convince ourselves otherwise.
The Social Me.—A man's social me is the recognition which he gets from his mates. We are not only gregarious animals, liking to be in sight of our fellows, but we have an innate propensity to get ourselves noticed, and noticed favorably, by our kind. No more fiendish punishment could be devised, were such a thing physically possible, than that one should be turned loose in society and remain absolutely unnoticed by all the members thereof. If no one turned round when we entered, answered when we spoke, or minded what we did, but if every person we met 'cut us dead,' and acted as if we were non-existing things, a kind of rage and impotent despair would ere long well up in us, from which the cruellest bodily tortures would be a relief; for these would make us feel that, however bad might be our plight, we had not sunk to such a depth as to be unworthy of attention at all.
The Social Me.—A man's social self is the recognition he receives from his peers. We are not only social creatures who enjoy being around others, but we also have a natural urge to stand out and be appreciated by our kind. There could be no worse punishment, if it were physically possible, than to be released into society and remain completely invisible to everyone around us. If no one turned to look when we walked in, responded when we talked, or cared about what we did, and if every person we encountered ignored us completely, a deep sense of rage and helpless despair would soon rise within us. In that situation, the most painful physical torment would feel like a relief, because at least it would remind us that, no matter how dire our situation might be, we hadn't sunk so low as to be unworthy of anyone's attention.
Properly speaking, a man has as many social selves as there are individuals who recognize him and carry an image of him in their mind. To wound any one of these his images is to wound him. But as the individuals who carry the images fall naturally into classes, we may practically say that he has as many different social selves as there are distinct groups of persons about whose opinion he cares. He generally shows a different side of himself to each of these different groups. Many a youth who is demure enough before his parents and teachers, swears and swaggers like a pirate among his 'tough' young friends. We do not show ourselves to our children as to our club-companions, to our customers as to the laborers we employ,{180} to our own masters and employers as to our intimate friends. From this there results what practically is a division of the man into several selves; and this may be a discordant splitting, as where one is afraid to let one set of his acquaintances know him as he is elsewhere; or it may be a perfectly harmonious division of labor, as where one tender to his children is stern to the soldiers or prisoners under his command.
Properly speaking, a person has as many social selves as there are individuals who recognize them and hold an image of them in their minds. Hurting any of these images is like hurting the person. However, since the individuals who have these images naturally fall into groups, we can practically say that a person has as many different social selves as there are distinct groups of people whose opinions matter to them. They usually show a different side of themselves to each of these groups. Many young people who are quite reserved around their parents and teachers might swear and act tough among their 'cool' friends. We don’t present ourselves to our children the same way we do to our club members, to our customers like we do to the workers we hire,{180} or to our bosses the same way we do to our close friends. This leads to a sort of division of the person into several selves; and this can result in a conflicting split, where someone fears letting one group of acquaintances see them as they are in other settings, or it might be a perfectly harmonious division of roles, like when someone is gentle with their kids but strict with the soldiers or prisoners under their command.
The most peculiar social self which one is apt to have is in the mind of the person one is in love with. The good or bad fortunes of this self cause the most intense elation and dejection—unreasonable enough as measured by every other standard than that of the organic feeling of the individual. To his own consciousness he is not, so long as this particular social self fails to get recognition, and when it is recognized his contentment passes all bounds.
The weirdest version of ourselves often exists in the mind of the person we love. The ups and downs of this version of ourselves bring about the strongest feelings of joy and sadness—absurd as they might seem by any standard other than our own feelings. To ourselves, we don’t really exist as long as this specific version isn’t acknowledged, and when it finally is recognized, our happiness knows no limits.
A man's fame, good or bad, and his honor or dishonor, are names for one of his social selves. The particular social self of a man called his honor is usually the result of one of those splittings of which we have spoken. It is his image in the eyes of his own 'set,' which exalts or condemns him as he conforms or not to certain requirements that may not be made of one in another walk of life. Thus a layman may abandon a city infected with cholera; but a priest or a doctor would think such an act incompatible with his honor. A soldier's honor requires him to fight or to die under circumstances where another man can apologize or run away with no stain upon his social self. A judge, a statesman, are in like manner debarred by the honor of their cloth from entering into pecuniary relations perfectly honorable to persons in private life. Nothing is commoner than to hear people discriminate between their different selves of this sort: "As a man I pity you, but as an official I must show you no mercy"; "As a politician I regard him as an ally, but as a moralist I loathe him"; etc., etc. What may be called 'club-opinion' is one of the very strongest forces in life. The thief must not steal from{181} other thieves; the gambler must pay his gambling-debts, though he pay no other debts in the world. The code of honor of fashionable society has throughout history been full of permissions as well as of vetoes, the only reason for following either of which is that so we best serve one of our social selves. You must not lie in general, but you may lie as much as you please if asked about your relations with a lady; you must accept a challenge from an equal, but if challenged by an inferior you may laugh him to scorn: these are examples of what is meant.
A man's fame, whether good or bad, and his honor or dishonor represent one of his social identities. The specific social identity referred to as honor typically arises from those divisions we've mentioned. It's how he is perceived by his own group, which either elevates or condemns him based on whether he meets certain expectations that might not apply to someone in a different profession. For example, a regular person might leave a city affected by cholera, but a priest or a doctor would see such an action as inconsistent with their honor. A soldier's honor demands that he fight or die in situations where another person can just apologize or flee without tarnishing his social identity. Similarly, a judge or a politician is prevented by their professional honor from engaging in financial dealings that would be perfectly acceptable for those in private life. It's quite common to hear people make distinctions between their various identities: "As a man, I feel for you, but as an official, I can't show you any mercy"; "As a politician, I see him as an ally, but as a moralist, I can't stand him"; and so on. What might be termed 'club-opinion' is one of the strongest forces in life. A thief shouldn't steal from other thieves; a gambler must pay off his gambling debts, even if he ignores all his other debts. The code of honor in high society has historically been filled with rules and exceptions that only exist because they best serve one of our social identities. You shouldn't lie in general, but you can lie freely when asked about your relationships with women; you must accept a challenge from someone of equal status, but if challenged by someone of lower status, you can dismiss him with scorn. These illustrate the point.
The Spiritual Me.—By the 'spiritual me,' so far as it belongs to the empirical self, I mean no one of my passing states of consciousness. I mean rather the entire collection of my states of consciousness, my psychic faculties and dispositions taken concretely. This collection can at any moment become an object to my thought at that moment and awaken emotions like those awakened by any of the other portions of the Me. When we think of ourselves as thinkers, all the other ingredients of our Me seem relatively external possessions. Even within the spiritual Me some ingredients seem more external than others. Our capacities for sensation, for example, are less intimate possessions, so to speak, than our emotions and desires; our intellectual processes are less intimate than our volitional decisions. The more active-feeling states of consciousness are thus the more central portions of the spiritual Me. The very core and nucleus of our self, as we know it, the very sanctuary of our life, is the sense of activity which certain inner states possess. This sense of activity is often held to be a direct revelation of the living substance of our Soul. Whether this be so or not is an ulterior question. I wish now only to lay down the peculiar internality of whatever states possess this quality of seeming to be active. It is as if they went out to meet all the other elements of our experience. In thus feeling about them probably all men agree.{182}
The Spiritual Me.—When I talk about the 'spiritual me' in relation to the empirical self, I'm not referring to any single moment of my awareness. Instead, I mean the complete collection of my states of consciousness, my mental abilities, and tendencies in a tangible way. This collection can become the focus of my thoughts at any given moment and trigger emotions just like any other aspect of my self. When we think of ourselves as thinkers, all the other components of our self seem more like external possessions. Even within the spiritual Me, some aspects feel more external than others. For instance, our ability to sense things is less personal than our emotions and desires; our thinking processes are less personal than our choices. The more active-feeling states of consciousness are therefore the more essential parts of the spiritual Me. The very heart of our self, as we understand it, the true center of our life, is the sense of activity that certain inner states have. This sense of activity is often seen as a direct expression of the living essence of our soul. Whether that’s true or not is a separate issue. Right now, I just want to emphasize the unique internality of those states that seem to have this quality of being active. It’s as if they went out to meet all the other aspects of our experience. In this feeling about them, likely all people agree.{182}
b. The feelings and emotions of self come after the constituents.
b. Feelings and emotions about oneself come after the components.
Self-appreciation.—This is of two sorts, self-complacency and self-dissatisfaction. 'Self-love' more properly belongs under the division C, of acts, since what men mean by that name is rather a set of motor tendencies than a kind of feeling properly so called.
Self-appreciation.—This comes in two forms, self-complacency and self-dissatisfaction. 'Self-love' fits better under the category C, of acts, since what people mean by that term is more a collection of behaviors than a specific type of feeling.
Language has synonyms enough for both kinds of self-appreciation. Thus pride, conceit, vanity, self-esteem, arrogance, vainglory, on the one hand; and on the other modesty, humility, confusion, diffidence, shame, mortification, contrition, the sense of obloquy, and personal despair. These two opposite classes of affection seem to be direct and elementary endowments of our nature. Associationists would have it that they are, on the other hand, secondary phenomena arising from a rapid computation of the sensible pleasures or pains to which our prosperous or debased personal predicament is likely to lead, the sum of the represented pleasures forming the self-satisfaction, and the sum of the represented pains forming the opposite feeling of shame. No doubt, when we are self-satisfied, we do fondly rehearse all possible rewards for our desert, and when in a fit of self-despair we forebode evil. But the mere expectation of reward is not the self-satisfaction, and the mere apprehension of the evil is not the self-despair; for there is a certain average tone of self-feeling which each one of us carries about with him, and which is independent of the objective reasons we may have for satisfaction or discontent. That is, a very meanly-conditioned man may abound in unfaltering conceit, and one whose success in life is secure, and who is esteemed by all, may remain diffident of his powers to the end.
Language has plenty of synonyms for both types of self-appreciation. On one hand, there’s pride, conceit, vanity, self-esteem, arrogance, and vainglory; on the other, modesty, humility, confusion, diffidence, shame, mortification, contrition, the feeling of disgrace, and personal despair. These two opposing emotional responses seem to be fundamental parts of our nature. Associationists argue that they are, instead, secondary outcomes stemming from a quick assessment of the pleasures or pains associated with our favorable or unfavorable personal situations, where the total of recognized pleasures creates self-satisfaction, and the total of recognized pains creates the feeling of shame. Certainly, when we feel self-satisfied, we reflect on all the possible rewards we deserve, and when we’re in a state of self-despair, we anticipate bad outcomes. But simply expecting a reward isn’t the same as feeling self-satisfaction, and just fearing negative consequences isn’t the same as feeling self-despair; there’s a certain average level of self-esteem that each of us carries with us, which is independent of the actual reasons we might have for feeling satisfied or dissatisfied. That is, a person in very poor circumstances may have unshakeable conceit, while someone who is successful and respected may still doubt their abilities until the end.
One may say, however, that the normal provocative of self-feeling is one's actual success or failure, and the good or bad actual position one holds in the world. "He put in his thumb and pulled out a plum, and said, 'What a good{183} boy am I!'" A man with a broadly extended empirical Ego, with powers that have uniformly brought him success, with place and wealth and friends and fame, is not likely to be visited by the morbid diffidences and doubts about himself which he had when he was a boy. "Is not this great Babylon, which I have planted?" Whereas he who has made one blunder after another, and still lies in middle life among the failures at the foot of the hill, is liable to grow all sicklied o'er with self-distrust, and to shrink from trials with which his powers can really cope.
One might say that the typical way we gauge our self-worth is based on our actual success or failure, and the good or bad position we hold in the world. "He put in his thumb and pulled out a plum, and said, 'What a good{183} boy am I!'" A person with a strong sense of self, who has consistently achieved success, with status, wealth, friends, and recognition, is unlikely to experience the self-doubt and insecurities he had as a child. "Is this not the great Babylon that I have built?" On the other hand, someone who has faced one failure after another, and still finds themselves struggling in midlife, is more likely to be consumed by self-doubt and to shy away from challenges they might actually be able to handle.
The emotions themselves of self-satisfaction and abasement are of a unique sort, each as worthy to be classed as a primitive emotional species as are, for example, rage or pain. Each has its own peculiar physiognomical expression. In self-satisfaction the extensor muscles are innervated, the eye is strong and glorious, the gait rolling and elastic, the nostril dilated, and a peculiar smile plays upon the lips. This whole complex of symptoms is seen in an exquisite way in lunatic asylums, which always contain some patients who are literally mad with conceit, and whose fatuous expression and absurdly strutting or swaggering gait is in tragic contrast with their lack of any valuable personal quality. It is in these same castles of despair that we find the strongest examples of the opposite physiognomy, in good people who think they have committed 'the unpardonable sin' and are lost forever, who crouch and cringe and slink from notice, and are unable to speak aloud or look us in the eye. Like fear and like anger, in similar morbid conditions, these opposite feelings of Self may be aroused with no adequate exciting cause. And in fact we ourselves know how the barometer of our self-esteem and confidence rises and falls from one day to another through causes that seem to be visceral and organic rather than rational, and which certainly answer to no corresponding variations in the esteem in which we are held by our friends.{184}
The feelings of self-satisfaction and humiliation are unique, each deserving to be considered a basic emotional type, just like rage or pain. Each has its own distinct physical expression. In self-satisfaction, the muscles extend, the eyes are bright and vivid, the walk is smooth and energetic, the nostrils flare, and a specific smile appears on the lips. This entire collection of signs is beautifully displayed in mental health facilities, which often have patients who are genuinely filled with arrogance, their foolish expressions and absurdly proud or swaggering walks tragically contrasting with their lack of any real personal worth. In these same places of despair, we also find strong examples of the opposite expression in good people who believe they have committed 'the unforgivable sin' and feel eternally lost; they crouch, shrink away, and avoid attention, unable to speak loudly or make eye contact. Like fear and anger in similar troubling states, these contrasting feelings of self can be triggered without any real cause. In fact, we all know how our self-esteem and confidence can fluctuate from day to day for reasons that seem more instinctive and biological than rational, and which certainly do not correlate with how others perceive us.{184}
c. Self-seeking and self-preservation come next.
Self-interest and self-preservation come next.
These words cover a large number of our fundamental instinctive impulses. We have those of bodily self-seeking, those of social self-seeking, and those of spiritual self-seeking.
These terms encompass many of our basic instinctual drives. We have those for physical self-interest, those for social self-interest, and those for spiritual self-interest.
Bodily Self-seeking.—All the ordinary useful reflex actions and movements of alimentation and defence are acts of bodily self-preservation. Fear and anger prompt to acts that are useful in the same way. Whilst if by self-seeking we mean the providing for the future as distinguished from maintaining the present, we must class both anger and fear, together with the hunting, the acquisitive, the home-constructing and the tool-constructing instincts, as impulses to self-seeking of the bodily kind. Really, however, these latter instincts, with amativeness, parental fondness, curiosity and emulation, seek not only the development of the bodily Me, but that of the material Me in the widest possible sense of the word.
Bodily Self-seeking.—All the regular, useful reflex actions and movements related to eating and self-defense are acts of bodily self-preservation. Fear and anger lead to actions that are similarly beneficial. If by self-seeking we mean preparing for the future, as opposed to just maintaining the present, we should include both anger and fear, along with instincts for hunting, acquiring, building homes, and making tools, as impulses for bodily self-seeking. However, these latter instincts, along with desire, parental affection, curiosity, and rivalry, not only aim for the development of the physical self but also for the growth of the material self in the broadest sense of the term.
Our social self-seeking, in turn, is carried on directly through our amativeness and friendliness, our desire to please and attract notice and admiration, our emulation and jealousy, our love of glory, influence, and power, and indirectly through whichever of the material self-seeking impulses prove serviceable as means to social ends. That the direct social self-seeking impulses are probably pure instincts is easily seen. The noteworthy thing about the desire to be 'recognized' by others is that its strength has so little to do with the worth of the recognition computed in sensational or rational terms. We are crazy to get a visiting-list which shall be large, to be able to say when any one is mentioned, "Oh! I know him well," and to be bowed to in the street by half the people we meet. Of course distinguished friends and admiring recognition are the most desirable—Thackeray somewhere asks his readers to confess whether it would not give each of them an exquisite pleasure to be met walking down Pall Mall with a duke on either arm. But in default of dukes{185} and envious salutions almost anything will do for some of us; and there is a whole race of beings to-day whose passion is to keep their names in the newspapers, no matter under what heading, 'arrivals and departures,' 'personal paragraphs,' 'interviews,'—gossip, even scandal, will suit them if nothing better is to be had. Guiteau, Garfield's assassin, is an example of the extremity to which this sort of craving for the notoriety of print may go in a pathological case. The newspapers bounded his mental horizon; and in the poor wretch's prayer on the scaffold, one of the most heart-felt expressions was: "The newspaper press of this land has a big bill to settle with thee, O Lord!"
Our social self-interest is driven by our desires for love and friendship, our need to please and attract attention and admiration, our feelings of rivalry and jealousy, and our love for fame, influence, and power. Additionally, we pursue our goals through material desires that help us achieve social outcomes. It's clear that these direct social impulses are likely pure instincts. What stands out about the desire to be 'recognized' by others is how its intensity has little to do with the actual value of the recognition measured in emotional or logical terms. We are eager to have a lengthy contact list, to be able to say, "Oh! I know him well," when someone's name comes up, and to be greeted on the street by many people we encounter. Naturally, having distinguished friends and receiving admiration is highly desirable—Thackeray at one point asks his readers to admit whether it wouldn't bring each of them immense joy to walk down Pall Mall with a duke on either arm. But in the absence of dukes{185} and envious greetings, almost anything will satisfy some of us; there is a whole group today whose passion is to stay in the news, regardless of the focus—'arrivals and departures,' 'personal columns,' 'interviews'—gossip or even scandal will do if nothing better is available. Guiteau, Garfield's assassin, exemplifies how extreme this craving for print notoriety can become in a pathological case. The newspapers limited his mental world, and in the poor man’s prayer on the scaffold, one of the most sincere expressions was: "The newspaper press of this land has a big bill to settle with thee, O Lord!"
Not only the people but the places and things I know enlarge my Self in a sort of metaphoric social way. 'Ça me connaît,' as the French workman says of the implement he can use well. So that it comes about that persons for whose opinion we care nothing are nevertheless persons whose notice we woo; and that many a man truly great, many a woman truly fastidious in most respects, will take a deal of trouble to dazzle some insignificant cad whose whole personality they heartily despise.
Not just the people but also the places and things I know expand my sense of self in a kind of metaphorical social way. 'Ça me connaît,' as the French worker says about a tool he can use well. This means that we often seek the attention of people whose opinion doesn’t matter to us, and many truly great men and very particular women will go out of their way to impress some unimportant jerk they actually can’t stand.
Under the head of spiritual self-seeking ought to be included every impulse towards psychic progress, whether intellectual, moral, or spiritual in the narrow sense of the term. It must be admitted, however, that much that commonly passes for spiritual self-seeking in this narrow sense is only material and social self-seeking beyond the grave. In the Mohammedan desire for paradise and the Christian aspiration not to be damned in hell, the materiality of the goods sought is undisguised. In the more positive and refined view of heaven, many of its goods, the fellowship of the saints and of our dead ones, and the presence of God, are but social goods of the most exalted kind. It is only the search of the redeemed inward nature, the spotlessness from sin, whether here or hereafter, that can count as spiritual self-seeking pure and undefiled.{186}
Under the term spiritual self-seeking, we should include all motivations for personal growth, whether they're intellectual, moral, or spiritual in the strictest sense. However, we have to acknowledge that much of what is typically seen as spiritual self-seeking in this strict sense is actually just material and social self-interest after death. In the Muslim pursuit of paradise and the Christian wish to avoid eternal damnation, the physical nature of what is sought is clear. In the more elevated and nuanced understanding of heaven, many of its rewards—such as the companionship of saints and loved ones, and the presence of God—are just the highest form of social benefits. Only the quest for a redeemed inner self, free from sin now or in the future, can truly be considered pure and genuine spiritual self-seeking.{186}
But this broad external review of the facts of the life of the Me will be incomplete without some account of the
But this broad external review of the facts of my life will be incomplete without some account of the
Rivalry and Conflict of the Different Mes.—With most objects of desire, physical nature restricts our choice to but one of many represented goods, and even so it is here. I am often confronted by the necessity of standing by one of my empirical selves and relinquishing the rest. Not that I would not, if I could, be both handsome and fat and well dressed, and a great athlete, and make a million a year, be a wit, a bon-vivant, and a lady-killer, as well as a philosopher; a philanthropist, statesman, warrior, and African explorer, as well as a 'tone-poet' and saint. But the thing is simply impossible. The millionaire's work would run counter to the saint's; the bon-vivant and the philanthropist would trip each other up; the philosopher and the lady-killer could not well keep house in the same tenement of clay. Such different characters may conceivably at the outset of life be alike possible to a man. But to make any one of them actual, the rest must more or less be suppressed. So the seeker of his truest, strongest, deepest self must review the list carefully, and pick out the one on which to stake his salvation. All other selves thereupon become unreal, but the fortunes of this self are real. Its failures are real failures, its triumphs real triumphs, carrying shame and gladness with them. This is as strong an example as there is of that selective industry of the mind on which I insisted some pages back (p. 173 ff.). Our thought, incessantly deciding, among many things of a kind, which ones for it shall be realities, here chooses one of many possible selves or characters, and forthwith reckons it no shame to fail in any of those not adopted expressly as its own.
Rivalry and Conflict of the Different Mes.—With most things we desire, our physical nature limits us to just one of many options available, and it's the same here. I often face the need to choose one version of myself and give up the rest. Not that I wouldn't, if I could, be both attractive and overweight, well-dressed, an exceptional athlete, make a million a year, be witty, a socialite, and a charmer, as well as a philosopher; a philanthropist, politician, warrior, and African explorer, along with being a 'tone-poet' and a saint. But it's simply not possible. The life of a millionaire would clash with that of a saint; the socialite and philanthropist would get in each other's way; the philosopher and the charmer can't easily coexist in the same body. Different versions of ourselves might seem possible at the start of life, but to actually become any one of them, the others must be somewhat suppressed. So, the seeker of their truest, strongest, deepest self must carefully examine the options and choose the one on which to focus their efforts. All other selves then become unreal, but the outcomes of this chosen self are very real. Its failures are genuine failures, its successes real successes, each bringing their own mix of shame and joy. This is a strong example of the mind's selective process I've talked about a few pages back (p. 173 ff.). Our thoughts constantly decide which things among many will become our realities, ultimately picking one of several possible selves or identities, and then it excuses itself for failing in any of those not explicitly chosen as its own.
So we have the paradox of a man shamed to death because he is only the second pugilist or the second oarsman in the world. That he is able to beat the whole population of the globe minus one is nothing; he has 'pitted' himself to beat that one; and as long as he doesn't{187} do that nothing else counts. He is to his own regard as if he were not, indeed he is not. Yonder puny fellow, however, whom every one can beat, suffers no chagrin about it, for he has long ago abandoned the attempt to 'carry that line,' as the merchants say, of self at all. With no attempt there can be no failure; with no failure, no humiliation. So our self-feeling in this world depends entirely on what we back ourselves to be and do. It is determined by the ratio of our actualities to our supposed potentialities; a fraction of which our pretensions are the denominator and the numerator our success: thus,
So we have the contradiction of a man who is embarrassed to death because he is only the second best boxer or the second best rower in the world. The fact that he can beat everyone on the planet except one doesn’t matter; he's focused on beating that one person, and until he does, nothing else matters. In his own eyes, he is as if he doesn’t exist—actually, he really doesn’t. On the other hand, that weak guy, whom anyone can beat, doesn't feel bad about it at all because he gave up trying to be someone special a long time ago. Without any effort, there can be no failure; with no failure, there’s no embarrassment. So, our self-esteem in this world entirely depends on what we think we can be and do. It's determined by the ratio of our actual achievements to our supposed potential; our pretensions form the denominator, and our successes form the numerator; thus,
Self-esteem | = | Success. |
Pretensions. |
Such a fraction may be increased as well by diminishing the denominator as by increasing the numerator. To give up pretensions is as blessed a relief as to get them gratified; and where disappointment is incessant and the struggle unending, this is what men will always do. The history of evangelical theology, with its conviction of sin, its self-despair, and its abandonment of salvation by works, is the deepest of possible examples, but we meet others in every walk of life. There is the strangest lightness about the heart when one's nothingness in a particular line is once accepted in good faith. All is not bitterness in the lot of the lover sent away by the final inexorable 'No.' Many Bostonians, crede experto (and inhabitants of other cities, too, I fear), would be happier women and men to-day, if they could once for all abandon the notion of keeping up a Musical Self, and without shame let people hear them call a symphony a nuisance. How pleasant is the day when we give up striving to be young,—or slender! Thank God! we say, those illusions are gone. Everything added to the Self is a burden as well as a pride. A certain man who lost every penny during our civil war went and actually rolled in the dust, saying he had not felt so free and happy since he was born.{188}
Such a fraction can be increased by either reducing the denominator or increasing the numerator. Letting go of pretensions is just as refreshing as having them satisfied; and when disappointment is constant and the struggle is endless, this is what people will always do. The history of evangelical theology, with its acknowledgment of sin, its sense of hopelessness, and its rejection of salvation through works, serves as one of the deepest examples, but we find similar cases in every area of life. There’s a strange lightness in the heart when one finally accepts their own insignificance in a certain area. Not everything is bitterness for the lover turned away by that final, unavoidable 'No.' Many Bostonians, crede experto (and people from other cities, too, I’m afraid), would be happier today if they could finally let go of the idea of maintaining a Musical Self and without shame admit they find a symphony annoying. How pleasant is the day when we stop trying to be young—or slim! Thank God! we say, those illusions are gone. Everything added to the Self is both a burden and a source of pride. A man who lost every penny during our civil war once rolled in the dust, saying he had never felt so free and happy since he was born.{188}
Once more, then, our self-feeling is in our power. As Carlyle says: "Make thy claim of wages a zero, then hast thou the world under thy feet. Well did the wisest of our time write, it is only with renunciation that life, properly speaking, can be said to begin."
Once again, our self-esteem is in our control. As Carlyle says: "If you make your demand for rewards nothing, then you have the world at your feet. The wisest among us wrote that it’s only through giving up that life, in the true sense, can be said to start."
Neither threats nor pleadings can move a man unless they touch some one of his potential or actual selves. Only thus can we, as a rule, get a 'purchase' on another's will. The first care of diplomatists and monarchs and all who wish to rule or influence is, accordingly, to find out their victim's strongest principle of self-regard, so as to make that the fulcrum of all appeals. But if a man has given up those things which are subject to foreign fate, and ceased to regard them as parts of himself at all, we are well-nigh powerless over him. The Stoic receipt for contentment was to dispossess yourself in advance of all that was out of your own power,—then fortune's shocks might rain down unfelt. Epictetus exhorts us, by thus narrowing and at the same time solidifying our Self to make it invulnerable: "I must die; well, but must I die groaning too? I will speak what appears to be right, and if the despot says, 'Then I will put you to death,' I will reply, 'When did I ever tell you that I was immortal? You will do your part, and I mine; it is yours to kill, and mine to die intrepid; yours to banish, mine to depart untroubled.' How do we act in a voyage? We choose the pilot, the sailors, the hour. Afterwards comes a storm. What have I to care for? My part is performed. This matter belongs to the pilot. But the ship is sinking; what then have I to do? That which alone I can do—submit to being drowned without fear, without clamor or accusing of God, but as one who knows that what is born must likewise die."
Neither threats nor pleas can sway a person unless they resonate with some part of who they are. Typically, this is how we can influence someone else’s will. The primary concern for diplomats, rulers, and anyone who wants to exert power or influence is to discover their target's strongest principle of self-worth so that they can leverage it in their appeals. However, if a person has relinquished those aspects that are susceptible to outside circumstances and no longer sees them as part of themselves, we are almost powerless to influence them. The Stoic approach to finding contentment was to detach yourself in advance from everything outside your control—then the blows of fate might come and go without affecting you. Epictetus advises us to narrow and solidify our understanding of Self to make it immune: "I have to die; okay, but do I have to die in agony too? I will speak what I believe is right, and if the tyrant says, 'Then I will kill you,' I will respond, 'When did I ever claim to be immortal? You will do your part, and I will do mine; it’s your job to kill, and mine to die fearlessly; yours to banish, mine to leave without worry.' How do we act when we set sail? We select the captain, the crew, the time. Then a storm hits. What do I have to worry about? I’ve done my part. This situation belongs to the captain. But the ship is sinking; what then should I do? The only thing I can do—accept drowning without fear, without noise or blaming God, but like someone who knows that everything born must eventually die."
This Stoic fashion, though efficacious and heroic enough in its place and time, is, it must be confessed, only possible as an habitual mood of the soul to narrow and unsympathetic characters. It proceeds altogether by exclusion. If I am a Stoic, the goods I cannot appropriate cease to be my{189} goods, and the temptation lies very near to deny that they are goods at all. We find this mode of protecting the Self by exclusion and denial very common among people who are in other respects not Stoics. All narrow people intrench their Me, they retract it,—from the region of what they cannot securely possess. People who don't resemble them, or who treat them with indifference, people over whom they gain no influence, are people on whose existence, however meritorious it may intrinsically be, they look with chill negation, if not with positive hate. Who will not be mine I will exclude from existence altogether; that is, as far as I can make it so, such people shall be as if they were not. Thus may a certain absoluteness and definiteness in the outline of my Me console me for the smallness of its content.
This Stoic mindset, while effective and commendable in its time and place, can only really be sustained as a consistent attitude by narrow-minded and unfeeling individuals. It works entirely through exclusion. If I identify as a Stoic, then the things I can’t have stop being my{189} possessions, and the temptation arises to deny that they even have value at all. We often see this way of protecting the Self through exclusion and denial in people who aren’t Stoics in other ways. All narrow-minded individuals build walls around their sense of self, pulling it back from anything they can’t securely own. Those who are different from them or treat them with indifference, those they cannot influence, are regarded with cold rejection, if not outright hatred, no matter how deserving those people might be. I will exclude from my reality anyone who doesn’t want to be mine; that is, as much as I can, I want those people to be as if they don’t exist. In this way, having a clear and defined sense of my self can comfort me about how limited its scope really is.
Sympathetic people, on the contrary, proceed by the entirely opposite way of expansion and inclusion. The outline of their self often gets uncertain enough, but for this the spread of its content more than atones. Nil humani a me alienum. Let them despise this little person of mine, and treat me like a dog, I shall not negate them so long as I have a soul in my body. They are realities as much as I am. What positive good is in them shall be mine too, etc., etc. The magnanimity of these expansive natures is often touching indeed. Such persons can feel a sort of delicate rapture in thinking that, however sick, ill-favored, mean-conditioned, and generally forsaken they may be, they yet are integral parts of the whole of this brave world, have a fellow's share in the strength of the dray-horses, the happiness of the young people, the wisdom of the wise ones, and are not altogether without part or lot in the good fortunes of the Vanderbilts and the Hohenzollerns themselves. Thus either by negating or by embracing, the Ego may seek to establish itself in reality. He who, with Marcus Aurelius, can truly say, "O Universe, I wish all that thou wishest," has a self from which every trace of negativeness and obstructiveness has been removed—no wind can blow except to fill its sails.{190}
Sympathetic people, on the other hand, go in the completely opposite direction of expanding and including. Their sense of self may become somewhat uncertain, but the breadth of their connections more than makes up for it. Nothing human is alien to me. Let them look down on my small existence and treat me poorly; I won’t reject them as long as I have a soul in my body. They are just as real as I am. Whatever positive qualities they possess are also a part of me, and so on. The generosity of these expansive individuals is often quite touching. They can experience a kind of profound joy in realizing that, no matter how sick, unattractive, or generally neglected they may be, they are still vital parts of this brave world, sharing in the strength of the workhorses, the happiness of the young, the wisdom of the knowledgeable, and they are not entirely excluded from the fortunes of the Vanderbilts and the Hohenzollerns themselves. Thus, by either rejecting or accepting, the Ego may try to establish itself in reality. He who, like Marcus Aurelius, can truly say, "O Universe, I wish all that you wish," has a self from which all traces of negativity and obstruction have been removed—no wind can blow except to fill its sails.{190}
The Hierarchy of the Mes.—A tolerably unanimous opinion ranges the different selves of which a man may be 'seized and possessed,' and the consequent different orders of his self-regard, in an hierarchical scale, with the bodily me at the bottom, the spiritual me at top, and the extra-corporeal material selves and the various social selves between. Our merely natural self-seeking would lead us to aggrandize all these selves; we give up deliberately only those among them which we find we cannot keep. Our unselfishness is thus apt to be a 'virtue of necessity'; and it is not without all show of reason that cynics quote the fable of the fox and the grapes in describing our progress therein. But this is the moral education of the race; and if we agree in the result that on the whole the selves we can keep are the intrinsically best, we need not complain of being led to the knowledge of their superior worth in such a tortuous way.
The Hierarchy of the Mes.—There's a pretty universal view that ranks the different aspects of a person—those parts of us that we can feel and identify with—on a hierarchical scale, with the physical self at the bottom, the spiritual self at the top, and the non-physical material selves along with various social selves in between. Our natural instinct for self-preservation would have us enhance all these aspects; we only intentionally let go of those we realize we can't hold onto. Our selflessness tends to be a 'virtue of necessity'; and it's not without reason that cynics reference the fable of the fox and the grapes when discussing our growth in this area. But this is the moral development of humanity; and if we agree that, overall, the selves we can maintain are the ones that are truly the best, we shouldn't mind being guided to recognize their greater value in such a complicated way.
Of course this is not the only way in which we learn to subordinate our lower selves to our higher. A direct ethical judgment unquestionably also plays its part, and last, not least, we apply to our own persons judgments originally called forth by the acts of others. It is one of the strangest laws of our nature that many things which we are well satisfied with in ourselves disgust us when seen in others. With another man's bodily 'hoggishness' hardly anyone has any sympathy; almost as little with his cupidity, his social vanity and eagerness, his jealousy, his despotism, and his pride. Left absolutely to myself I should probably allow all these spontaneous tendencies to luxuriate in me unchecked, and it would be long before I formed a distinct notion of the order of their subordination. But having constantly to pass judgment on my associates, I come ere long to see, as Herr Horwicz says, my own lusts in the mirror of the lusts of others, and to think about them in a very different way from that in which I simply feel. Of course, the moral generalities which from childhood have been instilled into me accelerate{191} enormously the advent of this reflective judgment on myself.
Of course, this isn't the only way we learn to put our lower selves behind our higher selves. A direct ethical judgment definitely plays a role, and let's not forget that we also judge ourselves based on the actions of others. It's one of the strangest aspects of human nature that many things we accept in ourselves appall us when we see them in others. Hardly anyone feels sympathy for another person's 'hoggishness'; the same goes for their greed, social vanity and eagerness, jealousy, tyranny, and pride. If I were left entirely to myself, I’d probably let all these spontaneous tendencies thrive in me without restraint, and it would take a while before I established a clear idea of how to rank them. However, since I constantly have to judge my peers, I soon start to see, as Herr Horwicz says, my own desires reflected in the desires of others, and I begin to think about them in a way that's very different from how I simply feel. Naturally, the moral lessons I’ve absorbed since childhood greatly speed up the arrival of this reflective judgment on myself.
So it comes to pass that, as aforesaid, men have arranged the various selves which they may seek in an hierarchical scale according to their worth. A certain amount of bodily selfishness is required as a basis for all the other selves. But too much sensuality is despised, or at best condoned on account of the other qualities of the individual. The wider material selves are regarded as higher than the immediate body. He is esteemed a poor creature who is unable to forego a little meat and drink and warmth and sleep for the sake of getting on in the world. The social self as a whole, again, ranks higher than the material self as a whole. We must care more for our honor, our friends, our human ties, than for a sound skin or wealth. And the spiritual self is so supremely precious that, rather than lose it, a man ought to be willing to give up friends and good fame, and property, and life itself.
So it turns out that, as mentioned earlier, people have organized the different versions of themselves they can pursue in a hierarchy based on their value. A certain level of basic self-interest is needed as a foundation for all the other versions. However, too much indulgence in physical pleasures is looked down upon, or at best tolerated because of the person’s other qualities. The broader material selves are viewed as superior to immediate physical needs. A person is considered lacking if they can't sacrifice a bit of food, drink, comfort, or sleep to improve their situation in life. The social self, in general, is ranked higher than the material self overall. We should care more about our honor, our friends, and our human connections than about having good looks or wealth. The spiritual self is so incredibly valuable that, rather than lose it, a person should be willing to give up friends, a good reputation, possessions, and even life itself.
In each kind of Me, material, social, and spiritual, men distinguish between the immediate and actual, and the remote and potential, between the narrower and the wider view, to the detriment of the former and the advantage of the latter. One must forego a present bodily enjoyment for the sake of one's general health; one must abandon the dollar in the hand for the sake of the hundred dollars to come; one must make an enemy of his present interlocutor if thereby one makes friends of a more valued circle; one must go without learning and grace and wit, the better to compass one's soul's salvation.
In every aspect of the self—material, social, and spiritual—people differentiate between what's immediate and real, and what's distant and possible, between the narrow view and the broader perspective, often to the detriment of the former and the benefit of the latter. One has to give up a current physical pleasure for the sake of overall health; one must let go of a dollar now for the promise of a hundred dollars later; one must create a rift with their current conversation partner if it leads to friendships with a more valued group; one may have to forgo learning and charm to better achieve salvation for the soul.
Of all these wider, more potential selves, the potential social Me is the most interesting, by reason of certain apparent paradoxes to which it leads in conduct, and by reason of its connection with our moral and religious life. When for motives of honor and conscience I brave the condemnation of my own family, club, and 'set'; when, as a Protestant, I turn Catholic; as a Catholic, freethinker; as a 'regular practitioner,' homœopath, or what not, I am{192} always inwardly strengthened in my course and steeled against the loss of my actual social self by the thought of other and better possible social judges than those whose verdict goes against me now. The ideal social self which I thus seek in appealing to their decision may be very remote: it may be represented as barely possible. I may not hope for its realization during my lifetime; I may even expect the future generations, which would approve me if they knew me, to know nothing about me when I am dead and gone. Yet still the emotion that beckons me on is indubitably the pursuit of an ideal social self, of a self that is at least worthy of approving recognition by the highest possible judging companion, if such companion there be. This self is the true, the intimate, the ultimate, the permanent me which I seek. This judge is God, the Absolute Mind, the 'Great Companion.' We hear, in these days of scientific enlightenment, a great deal of discussion about the efficacy of prayer; and many reasons are given us why we should not pray, whilst others are given us why we should. But in all this very little is said of the reason why we do pray, which is simply that we cannot help praying. It seems probable that, in spite of all that 'science' may do to the contrary, men will continue to pray to the end of time, unless their mental nature changes in a manner which nothing we know should lead us to expect. The impulse to pray is a necessary consequence of the fact that whilst the innermost of the empirical selves of a man is a Self of the social sort, it yet can find its only adequate Socius in an ideal world.
Of all these broader, more potential selves, the potential social Me is the most interesting due to certain obvious contradictions in behavior and its connection to our moral and spiritual lives. When I stand up against the disapproval of my family, friends, and social circle for reasons of honor and conscience; when, as a Protestant, I become Catholic; as a Catholic, I become a free thinker; or, as a 'regular practitioner,' I choose homeopathy or something else, I am{192} always inwardly encouraged in my path and fortified against losing my actual social self by the thought of other, better possible social judges than those whose judgment is currently against me. The ideal social self that I pursue by appealing to their approval may be very distant, almost out of reach. I may not expect to see it realized in my lifetime; I may even anticipate that future generations, who would support me if they understood me, will know nothing of me once I am gone. Yet still, the emotion that drives me forward is undeniably the pursuit of an ideal social self, one that is at least worthy of recognition from the highest possible judging companion, if such a companion exists. This self is the true, intimate, ultimate, and permanent me that I seek. This judge is God, the Absolute Mind, the 'Great Companion.' Nowadays, during our era of scientific enlightenment, there is a lot of talk about the effectiveness of prayer; many reasons are presented for why we shouldn’t pray, while other reasons are given for why we should. However, very little is said about why we actually do pray, which is simply because we can’t help but pray. It seems likely that, despite all that 'science' tries to accomplish against it, people will keep praying until the end of time, unless there is a fundamental change in human psychology that nothing we know suggests is forthcoming. The urge to pray is a necessary result of the fact that, while the innermost part of a person’s empirical self is a social self, it can only find its true Socius in an ideal world.
All progress in the social Self is the substitution of higher tribunals for lower; this ideal tribunal is the highest; and most men, either continually or occasionally, carry a reference to it in their breast. The humblest outcast on this earth can feel himself to be real and valid by means of this higher recognition. And, on the other hand, for most of us, a world with no such inner refuge when the outer social self failed and dropped from us would be{193} the abyss of horror. I say 'for most of us,' because it is probable that individuals differ a good deal in the degree in which they are haunted by this sense of an ideal spectator. It is a much more essential part of the consciousness of some men than of others. Those who have the most of it are possibly the most religious men. But I am sure that even those who say they are altogether without it deceive themselves, and really have it in some degree. Only a non-gregarious animal could be completely without it. Probably no one can make sacrifices for 'right,' without to some degree personifying the principle of right for which the sacrifice is made, and expecting thanks from it. Complete social unselfishness, in other words, can hardly exist; complete social suicide hardly occur to a man's mind. Even such texts as Job's, "Though He slay me, yet will I trust Him," or Marcus Aurelius's, "If gods hate me and my children, there is a reason for it," can least of all be cited to prove the contrary. For beyond all doubt Job revelled in the thought of Jehovah's recognition of the worship after the slaying should have been done; and the Roman emperor felt sure the Absolute Reason would not be all indifferent to his acquiescence in the gods' dislike. The old test of piety, "Are you willing to be damned for the glory of God?" was probably never answered in the affirmative except by those who felt sure in their heart of hearts that God would 'credit' them with their willingness, and set more store by them thus than if in His unfathomable scheme He had not damned them at all.
All progress in our social identity involves replacing lower standards with higher ones; this ideal standard is the highest, and most people, either constantly or sometimes, carry a reference to it in their hearts. The humblest outcast on this earth can feel real and validated through this higher recognition. On the flip side, for most of us, a world without this inner refuge when the outer social identity fails us would be{193} an unimaginable horror. I say 'for most of us' because individuals likely vary significantly in how much they are haunted by this sense of an ideal observer. This sense is a more essential part of some individuals' consciousness than others. Those who feel it the most are probably the most religious individuals. However, I believe that even those who claim to be completely without it are fooling themselves and actually possess it to some extent. Only a solitary animal could be entirely without it. Likely, no one can make sacrifices for 'what is right' without, to some degree, personifying the principle of right for which they are sacrificing and expecting some acknowledgment in return. Complete social selflessness, in other words, is almost impossible; complete social suicide is unlikely to even cross a person's mind. Even texts like Job's, "Though He slay me, yet will I trust Him," or Marcus Aurelius's, "If the gods hate me and my children, there is a reason for it," cannot be used to prove the opposite. Undoubtedly, Job thrived on the thought that Jehovah would recognize his worship after the sacrifice was made, and the Roman emperor was confident that the Absolute Reason would not be indifferent to his acceptance of the gods' disfavor. The old test of piety, "Are you willing to be damned for the glory of God?" was probably never answered affirmatively except by those who were certain in their hearts that God would 'reward' them for their willingness and value them more for it than if, in His unfathomable plan, He had not damned them at all.
Teleological Uses of Self-interest.—On zoölogical principles it is easy to see why we have been endowed with impulses of self-seeking and with emotions of self-satisfaction and the reverse. Unless our consciousness were something more than cognitive, unless it experienced a partiality for certain of the objects, which, in succession, occupy its ken, it could not long maintain itself in existence; for, by an inscrutable necessity, each human mind's appearance on this earth is conditioned upon the integrity{194} of the body with which it belongs, upon the treatment which that body gets from others, and upon the spiritual dispositions which use it as their tool, and lead it either towards longevity or to destruction. Its own body, then, first of all, its friends next, and finally its spiritual dispositions, MUST be the supremely interesting objects for each human mind. Each mind, to begin with, must have a certain minimum of selfishness in the shape of instincts of bodily self-seeking in order to exist. This minimum must be there as a basis for all farther conscious acts, whether of self-negation or of a selfishness more subtle still. All minds must have come, by the way of the survival of the fittest, if by no directer path, to take an intense interest in the bodies to which they are yoked, altogether apart from any interest in the pure Ego which they also possess.
Teleological Uses of Self-interest.—Based on zoological principles, it’s clear why we’ve been given instincts for self-seeking and feelings of self-satisfaction as well as the opposite. If our consciousness were just about understanding without showing a preference for certain objects that come into view, it wouldn’t be able to survive for long; because, due to an undeniable necessity, the existence of each human mind is tied to the health{194} of the body it belongs to, the way that body is treated by others, and the spiritual inclinations that use it as a tool, guiding it either toward a long life or toward destruction. Its own body comes first, then its friends, and finally its spiritual inclinations, MUST be the most interesting objects for every human mind. To begin with, every mind needs a certain level of selfishness in the form of instincts for bodily self-interest in order to exist. This minimum level must be present as a foundation for all further conscious actions, whether they involve self-denial or a more subtle kind of selfishness. All minds must have developed, through evolution if not more directly, an intense interest in the bodies they are connected to, completely separate from any interest in the pure self they also possess.
And similarly with the images of their person in the minds of others. I should not be extant now had I not become sensitive to looks of approval or disapproval on the faces among which my life is cast. Looks of contempt cast on other persons need affect me in no such peculiar way. My spiritual powers, again, must interest me more than those of other people, and for the same reason. I should not be here at all unless I had cultivated them and kept them from decay. And the same law which made me once care for them makes me care for them still.
And the same goes for how people see me in their minds. I wouldn’t even be here now if I hadn’t become aware of the looks of approval or disapproval from those around me. Looks of contempt directed at others don’t affect me in the same way. My own spiritual strengths should matter more to me than those of other people, and for the same reason. I wouldn't even exist if I hadn't nurtured them and prevented them from fading away. The same principle that made me care about them in the past still makes me care about them now.
All these three things form the natural Me. But all these things are objects, properly so called, to the thought which at any time may be doing the thinking; and if the zoölogical and evolutionary point of view is the true one, there is no reason why one object might not arouse passion and interest as primitively and instinctively as any other. The phenomenon of passion is in origin and essence the same, whatever be the target upon which it is discharged; and what the target actually happens to be is solely a question of fact. I might conceivably be as much fascinated, and as primitively so, by the care of my neighbor's body as by the care of my own. I am thus fascinated{195} by the care of my child's body. The only check to such exuberant non-egoistic interests is natural selection, which would weed out such as were very harmful to the individual or to his tribe. Many such interests, however, remain unweeded out—the interest in the opposite sex, for example, which seems in mankind stronger than is called for by its utilitarian need; and alongside of them remain interests, like that in alcoholic intoxication, or in musical sounds, which, for aught we can see, are without any utility whatever. The sympathetic instincts and the egoistic ones are thus coördinate. They arise, so far as we can tell, on the same psychologic level. The only difference between them is that the instincts called egoistic form much the larger mass.
All three of these things make up the natural Me. However, they are all objects in the sense that they can be thought about by whatever is thinking at any given moment; and if the zoological and evolutionary perspective is the correct one, there's no reason why one object couldn't spark passion and interest as primitively and instinctively as any other. The phenomenon of passion is fundamentally the same, regardless of the target it is directed towards; what the target actually is is simply a matter of fact. I might very well be just as captivated, and just as primitively so, by caring for my neighbor's body as I am by caring for my own. I am captivated{195} by the care of my child's body. The only limit to such boundless non-egoistic interests is natural selection, which would eliminate those that are really harmful to the individual or their tribe. However, many of these interests still persist—like the interest in the opposite sex, which seems to be stronger in humans than what is necessary for practical needs; and alongside them are interests like that in alcoholic intoxication or musical sounds, which, as far as we can tell, have no utility at all. The sympathetic instincts and egoistic ones are thus equal. They seem to develop, as far as we can see, on the same psychological level. The only difference between them is that the egoistic instincts make up a much larger portion.
Summary.—The following table may serve for a summary of what has been said thus far. The empirical life of Self is divided, as below, into
Summary.—The following table provides a summary of what has been discussed so far. The empirical life of Self is divided, as shown below, into
Material. | Social. | Spiritual. | |
Self-Seeking. | Bodily Appetites and Instincts. Love of Adornment, Foppery, Acquisitiveness, Constructiveness. Love of Home, etc. | Desire to Please, be Noticed, Admired, etc. Sociability, Emulation, Envy, Love, Pursuit of Honor, Ambition, etc. | Intellectual, Moral and Religious Aspirations, Conscientiousness. |
Self-Estimation. | Personal Vanity, Modesty, etc. Pride of Wealth, Fear of Poverty. | Social and Family Pride, Vainglory, Snobbery, Humility, Shame, etc. | Sense of Moral or Mental Superiority, Purity, etc. Sense of Inferiority or of Guilt. |
B) The Self as Knowledge Seeker.
The I, or 'pure ego,' is a very much more difficult subject of inquiry than the Me. It is that which at any given moment is conscious, whereas the Me is only one of the things which it is conscious of. In other words, it is{196} the Thinker; and the question immediately comes up, what is the thinker? Is it the passing state of consciousness itself, or is it something deeper and less mutable? The passing state we have seen to be the very embodiment of change (see p. 155 ff.). Yet each of us spontaneously considers that by 'I,' he means something always the same. This has led most philosophers to postulate behind the passing state of consciousness a permanent Substance or Agent whose modification or act it is. This Agent is the thinker; the 'state' is only its instrument or means. 'Soul,' 'transcendental Ego,' 'Spirit,' are so many names for this more permanent sort of Thinker. Not discriminating them just yet, let us proceed to define our idea of the passing state of consciousness more clearly.
The I, or 'pure ego,' is a much more complex topic to explore than the Me. It represents what is consciously active at any moment, while the Me is just one of the things it's conscious of. In other words, it is{196} the Thinker; and this raises the question, what is the thinker? Is it simply the current state of consciousness, or is it something deeper and more constant? The current state is clearly about change (see p. 155 ff.). Yet, each of us naturally assumes that by 'I', we refer to something that remains the same. This assumption has led many philosophers to theorize a permanent Substance or Agent that exists behind the fluctuating state of consciousness. This Agent is the thinker; the 'state' is merely its tool or means. 'Soul,' 'transcendental Ego,' and 'Spirit' are various terms for this more stable kind of Thinker. Without getting into those distinctions just yet, let's clarify our understanding of the passing state of consciousness more accurately.
The Unity of the Passing Thought.—Already, in speaking of 'sensations,' from the point of view of Fechner's idea of measuring them, we saw that there was no ground for calling them compounds. But what is true of sensations cognizing simple qualities is also true of thoughts with complex objects composed of many parts. This proposition unfortunately runs counter to a wide-spread prejudice, and will have to be defended at some length. Common-sense, and psychologists of almost every school, have agreed that whenever an object of thought contains many elements, the thought itself must be made up of just as many ideas, one idea for each element, all fused together in appearance, but really separate.
The Unity of the Passing Thought.—Earlier, when discussing 'sensations' in the context of Fechner's concept of measuring them, we established that there's no basis for labeling them as compounds. But what's true for sensations that recognize simple qualities also applies to thoughts about complex objects made up of many parts. Unfortunately, this idea goes against a common belief and will need to be defended extensively. Common sense, along with psychologists from nearly every school of thought, has generally agreed that whenever a thought involves multiple elements, the thought itself must consist of just as many ideas—one for each element—blended together in appearance, but actually distinct.
"There can be no difficulty in admitting that association does form the ideas of an indefinite number of individuals into one complex idea," says James Mill, "because it is an acknowledged fact. Have we not the idea of an army? And is not that precisely the ideas of an indefinite number of men formed into one idea?"
"There’s no doubt that association does combine the ideas of countless individuals into one complex idea," says James Mill, "because it’s a well-known fact. Don’t we have the concept of an army? And isn’t that exactly the ideas of an indefinite number of men merged into one idea?"
Similar quotations might be multiplied, and the reader's own first impressions probably would rally to their support. Suppose, for example, he thinks that "the pack of cards is on the table." If he begins to reflect, he is as{197} likely as not to say: "Well, isn't that a thought of the pack of cards? Isn't it of the cards as included in the pack? Isn't it of the table? And of the legs of the table as well? Hasn't my thought, then, all these parts—one part for the pack and another for the table? And within the pack-part a part for each card, as within the table-part a part for each leg? And isn't each of these parts an idea? And can thought, then, be anything but an assemblage or pack of ideas, each answering to some element of what it knows?"
Similar quotes could be multiplied, and the reader's initial impressions would likely support them. For instance, if he thinks that "the pack of cards is on the table," as he starts to reflect, he's as{197} likely as not to say: "Well, isn't that a thought about the pack of cards? Isn't it about the cards included in the pack? Isn't it about the table? And the legs of the table too? Doesn't my thought, then, have all these parts—one part for the pack and another for the table? And within the pack-part, a part for each card, just as within the table-part a part for each leg? And isn't each of these parts an idea? Can thought, then, be anything but a collection or pack of ideas, each corresponding to some element of what it knows?"
Plausible as such considerations may seem, it is astonishing how little force they have. In assuming a pack of ideas, each cognizant of some one element of the fact one has assumed, nothing has been assumed which knows the whole fact at once. The idea which, on the hypothesis of the pack of ideas, knows, e.g., the ace of spades must be ignorant of the leg of the table, since to account for that knowledge another special idea is by the same hypothesis invoked; and so on with the rest of the ideas, all equally ignorant of each other's objects. And yet in the actual living human mind what knows the cards also knows the table, its legs, etc., for all these things are known in relation to each other and at once. Our notion of the abstract numbers eight, four, two is as truly one feeling of the mind as our notion of simple unity. Our idea of a couple is not a couple of ideas. "But," the reader may say, "is not the taste of lemonade composed of that of lemon plus that of sugar?" No! I reply, this is taking the combining of objects for that of feelings. The physical lemonade contains both the lemon and the sugar, but its taste does not contain their tastes; for if there are any two things which are certainly not present in the taste of lemonade, those are the pure lemon-sour on the one hand and the pure sugar-sweet on the other. These tastes are absent utterly. A taste somewhat like both of them is there, but that is a distinct state of mind altogether.
As reasonable as these thoughts may appear, it's surprising how weak they actually are. When assuming a collection of ideas, each aware of a specific aspect of the fact being considered, nothing has been assumed that understands the entire fact at once. The idea that, based on the collection of ideas, knows, for example, the ace of spades must be unaware of the leg of the table, as understanding that would require another specific idea to be brought in according to the same assumption; and this goes for the other ideas as well, all of which are equally unaware of each other's subjects. However, in the real human mind, what knows the cards also knows the table, its legs, and so on, since all these things are understood in relation to each other and simultaneously. Our concept of the abstract numbers eight, four, and two is genuinely one feeling of the mind just like our notion of simple unity. Our idea of a couple is not merely two separate ideas. “But,” one might argue, “isn’t the taste of lemonade made up of the taste of lemon plus the taste of sugar?” No! I say, this confuses the combining of objects with that of feelings. The physical lemonade contains both lemon and sugar, but its taste does not include their individual tastes; for if there are two things that are definitely not present in the taste of lemonade, they are the pure lemon-sour on one end and the pure sugar-sweet on the other. Those tastes are completely absent. A taste somewhat like both of them exists, but that represents an entirely different state of mind.
All the 'combinations' which we actually know are EFFECTS, wrought by the units said to be 'combined,' UPON SOME ENTITY OTHER THAN THEMSELVES. Without this feature of a medium or vehicle, the notion of combination has no sense.
All the 'combinations' that we actually know are EFFECTS, created by the units that are said to be 'combined,' ON SOME ENTITY OTHER THAN THEMSELVES. Without this aspect of a medium or vehicle, the idea of combination doesn’t make sense.
In other words, no possible number of entities (call them as you like, whether forces, material particles, or mental elements) can sum themselves together. Each remains, in the sum, what it always was; and the sum itself exists only for a bystander who happens to overlook the units and to apprehend the sum as such; or else it exists in the shape of some other effect on an entity external to the sum itself. When H2 and O are said to combine into 'water,' and thenceforward to exhibit new properties, the 'water' is just the old atoms in the new position, H-O-H; the 'new properties' are just their combined effects, when in this position, upon external media, such as our sense-organs and the various reagents on which water may exert its properties and be known. Just so, the strength of many men may combine when they pull upon one rope, of many muscular fibres when they pull upon one tendon.
In other words, no number of entities (call them whatever you want, whether forces, material particles, or mental elements) can combine to change their fundamental nature. Each one remains what it always was, and the sum only exists for an observer who overlooks the individual units and recognizes the sum as a whole; or it exists in the form of some other effect on something outside of the sum itself. When H2 and O are said to combine into 'water' and then show new properties, 'water' is simply the same atoms in a new arrangement, H-O-H; the 'new properties' are just their combined effects in this arrangement on external factors, like our senses and the various substances that water interacts with and is recognized by. Similarly, the strength of many people can come together when they pull on one rope, just as many muscle fibers work together when they pull on one tendon.
In the parallelogram of forces, the 'forces' do not combine themselves into the diagonal resultant; a body is needed on which they may impinge, to exhibit their resultant effect. No more do musical sounds combine per se into concords or discords. Concord and discord are names for their combined effects on that external medium, the ear.
In the parallelogram of forces, the 'forces' don't just merge into the diagonal resultant by themselves; a body is required for them to act upon to show their resultant effect. Similarly, musical sounds don't just naturally combine into harmonies or clashes. Harmony and disharmony are terms for their combined effects on that external medium, the ear.
Where the elemental units are supposed to be feelings, the case is in no wise altered. Take a hundred of them, shuffle them and pack them as close together as you can (whatever that may mean); still each remains the same{199} feeling it always was, shut in its own skin, windowless, ignorant of what the other feelings are and mean. There would be a hundred-and-first feeling there, if, when a group or series of such feelings were set up, a consciousness belonging to the group as such should emerge, and this one hundred and first feeling would be a totally new fact. The one hundred original feelings might, by a curious physical law, be a signal for its creation, when they came together—we often have to learn things separately before we know them as a sum—but they would have no substantial identity with the new feeling, nor it with them; and one could never deduce the one from the others, or (in any intelligible sense) say that they evolved it out of themselves.
Where the basic units are supposed to be feelings, the situation doesn't change. Take a hundred of them, mix them up and pack them together as closely as possible (whatever that may mean); still, each one remains the same{199} feeling it always was, trapped in its own shell, windowless, unaware of what the other feelings are and mean. There would be a hundred-and-first feeling present if, when a group or series of such feelings came together, a consciousness belonging to the group as such were to emerge, and this hundred and first feeling would be a completely new reality. The original hundred feelings might, through some strange physical law, trigger its creation when they come together—we often have to learn things separately before we can understand them as a whole—but they would have no true identity with the new feeling, nor it with them; and one could never deduce the one from the others, or (in any clear sense) say that they evolved it from themselves.
Take a sentence of a dozen words, and take twelve men and tell to each one word. Then stand the men in a row or jam them in a bunch, and let each think of his word as intently as he will: nowhere will there be a consciousness of the whole sentence. We talk, it is true, of the 'spirit of the age,' and the 'sentiment of the people,' and in various ways we hypostatize 'public opinion.' But we know this to be symbolic speech, and never dream that the spirit, opinion, or sentiment constitutes a consciousness other than, and additional to, that of the several individuals whom the words 'age,' 'people,' or 'public' denote. The private minds do not agglomerate into a higher compound mind. This has always been the invincible contention of the spiritualists against the associationists in Psychology. The associationists say the mind is constituted by a multiplicity of distinct 'ideas' associated into a unity. There is, they say, an idea of a, and also an idea of b. Therefore, they say, there is an idea of a + b, or of a and b together. Which is like saying that the mathematical square of a plus that of b is equal to the square of a + b, a palpable untruth. Idea of a + idea of b is not identical with idea of (a + b). It is one, they are two; in it, what knows a also knows b; in them, what knows a is expressly posited as not knowing b; etc. In short, the two separate ideas{200} can never by any logic be made to figure as one idea. If one idea (of a + b, for example) come as a matter of fact after the two separate ideas (of a and of b), then we must hold it to be as direct a product of the later conditions as the two separate ideas were of the earlier conditions.
Take a sentence of twelve words, and gather twelve men, telling each one a single word. Then have them stand in a line or crowd together, and let each of them focus on their word as deeply as they can: there will be no awareness of the entire sentence. We do talk about the 'spirit of the age' and the 'sentiment of the people,' and in various ways we personify 'public opinion.' But we know this is symbolic language, and we don't actually believe that the spirit, opinion, or sentiment forms a consciousness beyond that of the individual people represented by the words 'age,' 'people,' or 'public.' Private minds do not merge into a greater collective mind. This has always been the strong claim of spiritualists against associationists in Psychology. The associationists argue that the mind is made up of many separate 'ideas' combined into a single whole. They say there’s an idea of a, and also an idea of b. Therefore, they argue, there’s an idea of a + b, or of a and b together. This is similar to saying that the mathematical square of a plus that of b equals the square of a + b, which is clearly false. The idea of a + the idea of b is not the same as the idea of (a + b). It is one, while they are two; in it, what knows a also knows b; in them, what knows a is specifically understood as not knowing b; etc. In short, the two separate ideas{200} can never logically be treated as one idea. If one idea (like a + b, for example) comes into existence only after the two separate ideas (of a and of b), then we must consider it a result of later conditions, just as the two separate ideas arose from earlier conditions.
The simplest thing, therefore, if we are to assume the existence of a stream of consciousness at all, would be to suppose that things that are known together are known in single pulses of that stream. The things may be many, and may occasion many currents in the brain. But the psychic phenomenon correlative to these many currents is one integral 'state,' transitive or substantive (see p. 161), to which the many things appear.
The easiest assumption, if we accept that a stream of consciousness exists, is to think that things known together are experienced in single bursts of that stream. There can be many things, creating multiple currents in the brain. However, the mental experience related to these various currents is a single, unified 'state,' whether it's temporary or lasting (see p. 161), in which the many things are perceived.
The Soul as a Combining Medium.—The spiritualists in philosophy have been prompt to see that things which are known together are known by one something, but that something, they say, is no mere passing thought, but a simple and permanent spiritual being on which many ideas combine their effects. It makes no difference in this connection whether this being be called Soul, Ego, or Spirit, in either case its chief function is that of a combining medium. This is a different vehicle of knowledge from that in which we just said that the mystery of knowing things together might be most simply lodged. Which is the real knower, this permanent being, or our passing state? If we had other grounds, not yet considered, for admitting the Soul into our psychology, then getting there on those grounds, she might turn out to be the knower too. But if there be no other grounds for admitting the Soul, we had better cling to our passing 'states' as the exclusive agents of knowledge; for we have to assume their existence anyhow in psychology, and the knowing of many things together is just as well accounted for when we call it one of their functions as when we call it a reaction of the Soul. Explained it is not by either conception, and has to figure in psychology as a datum that is ultimate.{201}
The Soul as a Combining Medium.—Philosophical spiritualists recognize that things known together are understood through one thing, but that thing is not just a fleeting thought; it’s a simple and permanent spiritual entity that combines many ideas and their effects. It doesn’t matter whether we call this being the Soul, Ego, or Spirit; its main role is to act as a combining medium. This represents a different form of knowledge than the one we previously described, where the mystery of knowing things together might be most clearly understood. Which is the true knower—this permanent being or our momentary state? If we had additional reasons, yet to be discussed, for including the Soul in our psychology, then it could potentially be the knower too. But if there are no other reasons to consider the Soul, it’s better to focus on our transient 'states' as the sole agents of knowledge; we have to accept their existence in psychology anyway, and knowing multiple things together can be just as easily explained as one of their functions as it can as a reaction of the Soul. Ultimately, neither explanation fully clarifies it, and it must be acknowledged in psychology as a fundamental data point.{201}
But there are other alleged grounds for admitting the Soul into psychology, and the chief of them is
But there are other supposed reasons for including the Soul in psychology, and the main one is
The Sense of Personal Identity.—In the last chapter it was stated (see p. 154) that the thoughts which we actually know to exist do not fly about loose, but seem each to belong to some one thinker and not to another. Each thought, out of a multitude of other thoughts of which it may think, is able to distinguish those which belong to it from those which do not. The former have a warmth and intimacy about them of which the latter are completely devoid, and the result is a Me of yesterday, judged to be in some peculiarly subtle sense the same with the I who now make the judgment. As a mere subjective phenomenon the judgment presents no special mystery. It belongs to the great class of judgments of sameness; and there is nothing more remarkable in making a judgment of sameness in the first person than in the second or the third. The intellectual operations seem essentially alike, whether I say 'I am the same as I was,' or whether I say 'the pen is the same as it was, yesterday.' It is as easy to think this as to think the opposite and say 'neither of us is the same.' The only question which we have to consider is whether it be a right judgment. Is the sameness predicated really there?
The Sense of Personal Identity.—In the last chapter, it was mentioned (see p. 154) that the thoughts we actually know exist aren’t just floating around; each seems to belong to a particular thinker. Each thought, out of many other thoughts it may have, can tell which ones belong to it and which do not. The former have a warmth and closeness that the latter completely lack, leading to a "Me" from yesterday, considered to be in a uniquely subtle way the same as the "I" who is currently making the judgment. As a purely subjective experience, the judgment is not particularly mysterious. It falls into the broader category of judgments of sameness; and there's nothing especially remarkable about making a judgment of sameness in the first person compared to the second or third. The thought processes seem fundamentally similar, whether I say 'I am the same as I was,' or I say 'the pen is the same as it was yesterday.' It’s just as easy to think this as it is to think the opposite and say 'neither of us is the same.' The only question we need to consider is whether it’s the right judgment. Is the sameness being claimed really there?
Sameness in the Self as Known.—If in the sentence "I am the same that I was yesterday," we take the 'I' broadly, it is evident that in many ways I am not the same. As a concrete Me, I am somewhat different from what I was: then hungry, now full; then walking, now at rest; then poorer, now richer; then younger, now older; etc. And yet in other ways I am the same, and we may call these the essential ways. My name and profession and relations to the world are identical, my face, my faculties and store of memories, are practically indistinguishable, now and then. Moreover the Me of now and the Me of then are continuous: the alterations were gradual and never affected the whole of me at once. So far, then, my personal identity is{202} just like the sameness predicated of any other aggregate thing. It is a conclusion grounded either on the resemblance in essential respects, or on the continuity of the phenomena compared. And it must not be taken to mean more than these grounds warrant, or treated as a sort of metaphysical or absolute Unity in which all differences are overwhelmed. The past and present selves compared are the same just so far as they are the same, and no farther. They are the same in kind. But this generic sameness coexists with generic differences just as real; and if from the one point of view I am one self, from another I am quite as truly many. Similarly of the attribute of continuity: it gives to the self the unity of mere connectedness, or unbrokenness, a perfectly definite phenomenal thing—but it gives not a jot or tittle more.
Sameness in the Self as Known.—If we consider the sentence "I am the same as I was yesterday," and take the 'I' in a broad sense, it's clear that in many ways I am not the same. As a specific individual, I am somewhat different from what I was: then hungry, now full; then walking, now resting; then poorer, now richer; then younger, now older; etc. Yet in other ways I am the same, and we can call these the essential ways. My name, profession, and relationships remain unchanged; my face, abilities, and memories are practically the same, now and then. Moreover, the 'Me' of now and the 'Me' of then are continuous: the changes were gradual and never affected my entire self all at once. So far, my personal identity is{202} just like the sameness we attribute to any other aggregate thing. This is a conclusion based either on the similarities in essential respects or on the continuity of the compared phenomena. It shouldn't be interpreted to mean more than what these foundations allow, nor treated as some kind of metaphysical or absolute Unity where all differences disappear. The past and present selves are the same only to the extent that they are the same, and no more. They are the same in kind. However, this generic sameness exists alongside genuine, generic differences just as real; and while from one perspective I am one self, from another perspective I am just as much many. Similarly, in terms of continuity: it provides the self with the unity of simple connectedness or unbrokenness, a clearly defined phenomenal entity—but it offers nothing more than that.
Sameness in the Self as Knower.—But all this is said only of the Me, or Self as known. In the judgment 'I am the same,' etc., the 'I' was taken broadly as the concrete person. Suppose, however, that we take it narrowly, as the Thinker, as 'that to which' all the concrete determinations of the Me belong and are known: does there not then appear an absolute identity at different times? That something which at every moment goes out and knowingly appropriates the Me of the past, and discards the non-me as foreign, is it not a permanent abiding principle of spiritual activity identical with itself wherever found?
Sameness in the Self as Knower.—But all this refers only to the Me, or Self as known. In the statement 'I am the same,' etc., the 'I' was understood broadly as the concrete person. However, if we look at it more narrowly, as the Thinker, as 'that to which' all the specific characteristics of the Me belong and are recognized: does there not then emerge an absolute identity at different times? That aspect which at every moment extends out and consciously connects with the Me of the past, while rejecting the non-me as external, is it not a consistent ongoing principle of spiritual activity that remains identical wherever it is found?
That it is such a principle is the reigning doctrine both of philosophy and common-sense, and yet reflection finds it difficult to justify the idea. If there were no passing states of consciousness, then indeed we might suppose an abiding principle, absolutely one with itself, to be the ceaseless thinker in each one of us. But if the states of consciousness be accorded as realities, no such 'substantial' identity in the thinker need be supposed. Yesterday's and to-day's states of consciousnesses have no substantial identity, for when one is here the other is irrevocably dead and gone. But they have a functional identity, for both{203} know the same objects, and so far as the by-gone me is one of those objects, they react upon it in an identical way, greeting it and calling it mine, and opposing it to all the other things they know. This functional identity seems really the only sort of identity in the thinker which the facts require us to suppose. Successive thinkers, numerically distinct, but all aware of the same past in the same way, form an adequate vehicle for all the experience of personal unity and sameness which we actually have. And just such a train of successive thinkers is the stream of mental states (each with its complex object cognized and emotional and selective reaction thereupon) which psychology treated as a natural science has to assume (see p. 2).
That it is such a principle is the prevailing belief in both philosophy and common sense, yet upon reflection, it's hard to justify this idea. If there were no temporary states of consciousness, then we might think of a constant principle, completely unified within itself, as the never-ending thinker in each of us. However, if we acknowledge that states of consciousness are real, we don't need to assume any 'substantial' identity in the thinker. The states of consciousness from yesterday and today have no substantial identity, because when one is present, the other is completely gone. But they do share a functional identity, as both{203} recognize the same objects, and to the extent that the past version of ourselves is one of those objects, they react to it in the same way, acknowledging it and calling it mine, while contrasting it with all the other things they know. This functional identity appears to be the only type of identity in the thinker that the facts suggest we should accept. Successive thinkers, distinct in number but all perceiving the same past in the same way, provide an adequate foundation for the experience of personal unity and consistency that we actually have. Such a series of successive thinkers represents the stream of mental states (each with its complex object understood and emotional and selective reactions attached) that psychology, when treated as a natural science, must assume (see p. 2).
The logical conclusion seems then to be that the states of consciousness are all that psychology needs to do her work with. Metaphysics or theology may prove the Soul to exist; but for psychology the hypothesis of such a substantial principle of unity is superfluous.
The logical conclusion seems to be that the states of consciousness are all psychology needs to do its work. Metaphysics or theology might prove that the Soul exists; but for psychology, the idea of such a substantial principle of unity is unnecessary.
How the I appropriates the Me.—But why should each successive mental state appropriate the same past Me? I spoke a while ago of my own past experiences appearing to me with a 'warmth and intimacy' which the experiences thought of by me as having occurred to other people lack. This leads us to the answer sought. My present Me is felt with warmth and intimacy. The heavy warm mass of my body is there, and the nucleus of the 'spiritual me,' the sense of intimate activity (p. 184), is there. We cannot realize our present self without simultaneously feeling one or other of these two things. Any other object of thought which brings these two things with it into consciousness will be thought with a warmth and an intimacy like those which cling to the present me.
How the I appropriates the Me.—But why should each new mental state claim the same past Me? I mentioned earlier that my own past experiences come to me with a 'warmth and intimacy' that the experiences I think of as belonging to other people don't have. This leads us to the answer we’re looking for. My present Me is experienced with warmth and intimacy. The heavy warm mass of my body is there, and the core of the 'spiritual me,' the sense of intimate activity (p. 184), is there. We can't truly recognize our present self without also feeling one or the other of these two things. Any other thought that brings these two feelings into consciousness will be thought of with a warmth and an intimacy similar to those that are associated with the present me.
Any distant object which fulfils this condition will be thought with such warmth and intimacy. But which distant objects do fulfil the condition, when represented?
Any distant object that meets this condition will be thought of with such warmth and intimacy. But which distant objects do meet the condition when shown?
Obviously those, and only those, which fulfilled it when they were alive. Them we shall still represent with the{204} animal warmth upon them; to them may possibly still cling the flavor of the inner activity taken in the act. And by a natural consequence, we shall assimilate them to each other and to the warm and intimate self we now feel within us as we think, and separate them as a collection from whatever objects have not this mark, much as out of a herd of cattle let loose for the winter on some wide Western prairie the owner picks out and sorts together, when the round-up comes in the spring, all the beasts on which he finds his own particular brand. Well, just such objects are the past experiences which I now call mine. Other men's experiences, no matter how much I may know about them, never bear this vivid, this peculiar brand. This is why Peter, awakening in the same bed with Paul, and recalling what both had in mind before they went to sleep, reidentifies and appropriates the 'warm' ideas as his, and is never tempted to confuse them with those cold and pale-appearing ones which he ascribes to Paul. As well might he confound Paul's body, which he only sees, with his own body, which he sees but also feels. Each of us when he awakens says, Here's the same old Me again, just as he says, Here's the same old bed, the same old room, the same old world.
Obviously, only those who truly lived it when they were alive matter. They are still represented with the{204} warmth of life on them; to them, the essence of their inner experience may still linger from the moments they lived. Naturally, we will connect them to each other and to the warm, intimate self we now feel within us as we think, and we will separate them from anything that doesn't share this mark, much like a rancher identifying and sorting out the cattle in the spring from a herd that was left out on a wide Western prairie during the winter, picking out those that bear his particular brand. Just as those are the past experiences I now claim as mine. Other people's experiences, no matter how much I know about them, never have that vivid, unique brand. This is why when Peter wakes up in the same bed as Paul, recalling what they both thought before going to sleep, he recognizes and claims the 'warm' ideas as his own, never tempted to mix them up with those cold, pale ones he attributes to Paul. He’d confuse Paul’s body, which he can only see, with his own body, which he sees and also feels. Each of us, when we wake up, says, "Here's the same old Me again," just as he says, "Here's the same old bed, the same old room, the same old world."
And similarly in our waking hours, though each pulse of consciousness dies away and is replaced by another, yet that other, among the things it knows, knows its own predecessor, and finding it 'warm,' in the way we have described, greets it, saying: "Thou art mine, and part of the same self with me." Each later thought, knowing and including thus the thoughts that went before, is the final receptacle—and appropriating them is the final owner—of all that they contain and own. As Kant says, it is as if elastic balls were to have not only motion but knowledge of it, and a first ball were to transmit both its motion and its consciousness to a second, which took both up into its consciousness and passed them to a third, until the last ball held all that the other balls had held, and realized it{205} as its own. It is this trick which the nascent thought has of immediately taking up the expiring thought and 'adopting' it, which leads to the appropriation of most of the remoter constituents of the self. Who owns the last self owns the self before the last, for what possesses the possessor possesses the possessed. It is impossible to discover any verifiable features in personal identity which this sketch does not contain, impossible to imagine how any transcendent principle of Unity (were such a principle there) could shape matters to any other result, or be known by any other fruit, than just this production of a stream of consciousness each successive part of which should know, and knowing, hug to itself and adopt, all those that went before,—thus standing as the representative of an entire past stream with which it is in no wise to be identified.
And just like in our waking moments, even though each beat of awareness fades away and is replaced by another, that new thought, among other things it recognizes, acknowledges its predecessor, and finding it 'warm,' as we've described, embraces it, saying: "You are mine, and a part of the same self as me." Each later thought, recognizing and incorporating the thoughts that came before, becomes the ultimate container—and the final owner—of everything they hold. As Kant suggests, it's like if elastic balls not only moved but also had awareness of that movement, with the first ball passing both its movement and consciousness to a second, which then absorbed both into its own awareness and transmitted them to a third, until the last ball contained everything that the other balls had, fully realizing it{205} as its own. This ability of emerging thoughts to immediately incorporate fading thoughts and 'adopt' them is what leads to claiming most of the distant parts of the self. Whoever owns the most recent self owns the self that came before it, because what possesses the possessor also possesses the possessed. It's impossible to find any verifiable characteristics of personal identity that this description doesn't cover, and it's hard to imagine how any ultimate principle of Unity (if such a principle existed) could lead to anything other than this creation of a stream of consciousness, each subsequent part of which recognizes, and in recognizing, embraces and adopts, all that came before,—thus acting as the representative of an entire past stream with which it cannot be directly identified.
Mutations and Multiplications of the Self.—The Me, like every other aggregate, changes as it grows. The passing states of consciousness, which should preserve in their succession an identical knowledge of its past, wander from their duty, letting large portions drop from out of their ken, and representing other portions wrong. The identity which we recognize as we survey the long procession can only be the relative identity of a slow shifting in which there is always some common ingredient retained. The commonest element of all, the most uniform, is the possession of some common memories. However different the man may be from the youth, both look back on the same childhood and call it their own.
Mutations and Multiplications of the Self.—The Self, like any collection of things, changes as it develops. The fleeting moments of awareness, which should maintain a consistent understanding of the past, often fail to do so, allowing significant parts to fade from view and misrepresenting other parts. The identity we recognize when we look back over time can only be the relative consistency of a gradual shift, where there is always some shared element retained. The most common element of all, the one that remains consistent, is the presence of shared memories. No matter how much a person transforms from their younger self, both still reflect on the same childhood and claim it as their own.
Thus the identity found by the I in its Me is only a loosely construed thing, an identity 'on the whole,' just like that which any outside observer might find in the same assemblage of facts. We often say of a man 'he is so changed one would not know him'; and so does a man, less often, speak of himself. These changes in the Me, recognized by the I, or by outside observers, may be grave or slight. They deserve some notice here.{206}
Thus, the identity that the I discovers in its Me is just a loosely defined concept, an identity 'overall,' similar to what any outside observer might find in the same collection of facts. We often say about a person, 'he's so different you wouldn't recognize him'; and occasionally a person will note this about themselves. These changes in the Me, acknowledged by the I or by outside observers, can be significant or minor. They deserve some attention here.{206}
The mutations of the Self may be divided into two main classes:
The changes in the Self can be grouped into two main categories:
a. Alterations of memory; and
Memory changes; and
b. Alterations in the present bodily and spiritual selves.
b. Changes in our current physical and spiritual selves.
a. Of the alterations of memory little need be said—they are so familiar. Losses of memory are a normal incident in life, especially in advancing years, and the person's me, as 'realized,' shrinks pari passu with the facts that disappear. The memory of dreams and of experiences in the hypnotic trance rarely survives.
a. We don’t need to say much about changes in memory—they’re pretty common. Memory loss is a normal part of life, especially as we get older, and the person's sense of self, as it’s experienced, decreases along with the facts that fade away. The memories of dreams and experiences during hypnosis hardly ever last.
False memories, also, are by no means rare occurrences, and whenever they occur they distort our consciousness of our Me. Most people, probably, are in doubt about certain matters ascribed to their past. They may have seen them, may have said them, done them, or they may only have dreamed or imagined they did so. The content of a dream will oftentimes insert itself into the stream of real life in a most perplexing way. The most frequent source of false memory is the accounts we give to others of our experiences. Such accounts we almost always make both more simple and more interesting than the truth. We quote what we should have said or done, rather than what we really said or did; and in the first telling we may be fully aware of the distinction. But ere long the fiction expels the reality from memory and reigns in its stead alone. This is one great source of the fallibility of testimony meant to be quite honest. Especially where the marvellous is concerned, the story takes a tilt that way, and the memory follows the story.
False memories are actually pretty common, and whenever they happen, they mess with our understanding of ourselves. Most people probably have doubts about certain things they think happened in their past. They might have actually experienced them, said them, or done them, or they might just have dreamed or imagined that they did. The content of a dream can often blend into real life in a confusing way. The most common source of false memories comes from the way we explain our experiences to others. We usually make these accounts simpler and more exciting than what really happened. We tend to quote what we wish we had said or done rather than what we actually did; and in the first telling, we might fully recognize the difference. But soon, that fiction takes over and pushes the reality out of our memory. This is a major reason why honest testimony can be unreliable. Especially when it comes to extraordinary events, the story tends to lean in that direction, and our memory adjusts to fit the narrative.
b. When we pass beyond alterations of memory to abnormal alterations in the present self we have graver disturbances. These alterations are of three main types, but our knowledge of the elements and causes of these changes of personality is so slight that the division into types must not be regarded as having any profound significance. The types are:{207}
b. When we move from changes in memory to unusual changes in the present self, we encounter more serious disturbances. There are three main types of these changes, but our understanding of the elements and causes behind these shifts in personality is so limited that categorizing them into types shouldn’t be seen as particularly important. The types are:{207}
α. Insane delusions; |
β. Alternating selves; |
γ. Mediumships or possessions. |
α. In insanity we often have delusions projected into the past, which are melancholic or sanguine according to the character of the disease. But the worst alterations of the self come from present perversions of sensibility and impulse which leave the past undisturbed, but induce the patient to think that the present Me is an altogether new personage. Something of this sort happens normally in the rapid expansion of the whole character, intellectual as well as volitional, which takes place after the time of puberty. The pathological cases are curious enough to merit longer notice.
α. In cases of insanity, people often have delusions about the past that can be either sad or optimistic, depending on the nature of the illness. However, the most significant changes in self-perception come from current distortions in feelings and impulses, which leave the past unchanged but make the patient believe that the current Me is a completely different person. A similar phenomenon occurs naturally during the rapid development of personality—both intellectually and in terms of willpower—that happens after puberty. The pathological cases are interesting enough to deserve more attention.
The basis of our personality, as M. Ribot says, is that feeling of our vitality which, because it is so perpetually present, remains in the background of our consciousness.
The foundation of our personality, as M. Ribot states, is that sense of our vitality which, because it is always there, stays in the background of our awareness.
"It is the basis because, always present, always acting, without peace or rest, it knows neither sleep nor fainting, and lasts as long as life itself, of which it is one form. It serves as a support to that self-conscious me which memory constitutes, it is the medium of association among its other parts.... Suppose now that it were possible at once to change our body and put another into its place: skeleton, vessels, viscera, muscles, skin, everything made new, except the nervous system with its stored-up memory of the past. There can be no doubt that in such a case the afflux of unaccustomed vital sensations would produce the gravest disorders. Between the old sense of existence engraved on the nervous system, and the new one acting with all the intensity of its reality and novelty, there would be irreconcilable contradiction."
"It is the foundation because it’s always there, always active, without peace or rest. It knows neither sleep nor fatigue and lasts as long as life itself, which is one of its forms. It supports that self-aware me that memory creates, and it is the medium through which its other parts connect.... Now imagine if it were possible to completely change our body and replace it with another: skeleton, blood vessels, organs, muscles, skin—everything new, except for the nervous system with its memories of the past. There’s no doubt that in such a case, the rush of unfamiliar sensations would cause significant issues. Between the old sense of existence stored in the nervous system and the new one, which would act with the full force of its reality and novelty, there would be an unresolvable conflict."
What the particular perversions of the bodily sensibility may be which give rise to these contradictions is, for the most part, impossible for a sound-minded person to conceive.{208} One patient has another self that repeats all his thoughts for him. Others, amongst whom are some of the first characters in history, have internal dæmons who speak with them and are replied to. Another feels that someone 'makes' his thoughts for him. Another has two bodies, lying in different beds. Some patients feel as if they had lost parts of their bodies, teeth, brain, stomach, etc. In some it is made of wood, glass, butter, etc. In some it does not exist any longer, or is dead, or is a foreign object quite separate from the speaker's self. Occasionally, parts of the body lose their connection for consciousness with the rest, and are treated as belonging to another person and moved by a hostile will. Thus the right hand may fight with the left as with an enemy. Or the cries of the patient himself are assigned to another person with whom the patient expresses sympathy. The literature of insanity is filled with narratives of such illusions as these. M. Taine quotes from a patient of Dr. Krishaber an account of sufferings, from which it will be seen how completely aloof from what is normal a man's experience may suddenly become:
What the specific distortions of physical sensation are that lead to these contradictions is, for the most part, impossible for a rational person to understand.{208} One patient has another self that repeats all his thoughts for him. Others, including some of the most notable figures in history, have internal demons that talk to them and respond to them. Another person feels like someone else is 'making' his thoughts for him. Another has two bodies, lying in separate beds. Some patients feel as if they've lost parts of their bodies—teeth, brain, stomach, etc. In some cases, these parts feel like they're made of wood, glass, butter, etc. For others, they no longer exist or are dead, or are a foreign object completely separate from the person's self. Sometimes, parts of the body lose their connection to consciousness with the rest and are treated as if they belong to someone else and are moved by an opposing will. For example, the right hand might fight the left as if it were an enemy. Or the patient's own cries may be attributed to another person whom the patient feels sympathy for. The literature on insanity is filled with stories of such illusions. M. Taine quotes a patient of Dr. Krishaber, detailing sufferings that illustrate how completely detached a person’s experience can suddenly become:
"After the first or second day it was for some weeks impossible to observe or analyze myself. The suffering—angina pectoris—was too overwhelming. It was not till the first days of January that I could give an account to myself of what I experienced.... Here is the first thing of which I retain a clear remembrance. I was alone, and already a prey to permanent visual trouble, when I was suddenly seized with a visual trouble infinitely more pronounced. Objects grew small and receded to infinite distances—men and things together. I was myself immeasurably far away. I looked about me with terror and astonishment; the world was escaping from me.... I remarked at the same time that my voice was extremely far away from me, that it sounded no longer as if mine. I struck the ground with my foot, and perceived its resistance; but this resistance seemed illusory—not that the{209} soil was soft, but that the weight of my body was reduced to almost nothing.... I had the feeling of being without weight...." In addition to being so distant, "objects appeared to me flat. When I spoke with anyone, I saw him like an image cut out of paper with no relief.... This sensation lasted intermittently for two years.... Constantly it seemed as if my legs did not belong to me. It was almost as bad with my arms. As for my head, it seemed no longer to exist.... I appeared to myself to act automatically, by an impulsion foreign to myself.... There was inside of me a new being, and another part of myself, the old being, which took no interest in the newcomer. I distinctly remember saying to myself that the sufferings of this new being were to me indifferent. I was never really dupe of these illusions, but my mind grew often tired of incessantly correcting the new impressions, and I let myself go and live the unhappy life of this new entity. I had an ardent desire to see my old world again, to get back to my old self. This desire kept me from killing myself.... I was another, and I hated, I despised this other; he was perfectly odious to me; it was certainly another who had taken my form and assumed my functions."[32]
"After the first or second day, it was impossible for several weeks to observe or analyze myself. The pain—angina pectoris—was too overwhelming. It wasn't until the first days of January that I could reflect on what I experienced.... Here is the first thing I clearly remember. I was alone and already dealing with ongoing visual issues when I suddenly experienced a much more intense visual problem. Objects shrank and seemed to retreat to infinite distances—people and things alike. I felt incredibly far away. I looked around me in terror and astonishment; the world was slipping away from me.... I noticed at the same time that my voice sounded extremely distant, like it wasn't even mine. I kicked the ground with my foot and felt its resistance; but this resistance felt illusory—not because the{209} ground was soft, but because the weight of my body felt almost nonexistent.... I felt weightless.... In addition to feeling so distant, "objects seemed flat to me. When I talked to someone, I saw them like an image cut out of paper, with no depth.... This sensation lasted intermittently for two years.... I constantly felt as if my legs didn't belong to me. My arms felt almost the same. As for my head, it seemed to no longer exist.... I felt like I was acting automatically, driven by something outside myself.... Inside me was a new being, while another part of me, the old self, showed no interest in this newcomer. I distinctly remember thinking that the sufferings of this new being were indifferent to me. I was never completely fooled by these illusions, but my mind often grew tired of constantly correcting the new impressions, and I let myself live the unhappy life of this new entity. I had a strong desire to see my old world again, to return to my old self. This desire kept me from ending my life.... I was someone else, and I hated, I despised this other person; it was definitely another who had taken my form and assumed my functions."[32]
In cases like this, it is as certain that the I is unaltered as that the Me is changed. That is to say, the present Thought of the patient is cognitive of both the old Me and the new, so long as its memory holds good. Only, within that objective sphere which formerly lent itself so simply to the judgment of recognition and of egoistic appropriation, strange perplexities have arisen. The present and the past, both seen therein, will not unite. Where is my old Me? What is this new one? Are they the same? Or have I two? Such questions, answered by whatever theory the patient is able to conjure up as plausible, form the beginning of his insane life.{210}
In situations like this, it's as clear that the I remains unchanged as it is that the Me has transformed. In other words, the patient's current thought is aware of both the old Me and the new one, as long as their memory is intact. However, within that objective realm that used to easily allow for recognition and personal appropriation, confusing issues have emerged. The present and the past, both visible in that space, won't come together. Where is my old Me? What is this new one? Are they the same? Or do I have two? The answers to these questions, based on whatever theory the patient can come up with, mark the start of their journey into insanity.{210}
β. The phenomenon of alternating personality in its simplest phases seems based on lapses of memory. Any man becomes, as we say, inconsistent with himself if he forgets his engagements, pledges, knowledges, and habits; and it is merely a question of degree at what point we shall say that his personality is changed. But in the pathological cases known as those of double or alternate personality the loss of memory is abrupt, and is usually preceded by a period of unconsciousness or syncope lasting a variable length of time. In the hypnotic trance we can easily produce an alteration of the personality, either by telling the subject to forget all that has happened to him since such or such a date, in which case he becomes (it may be) a child again, or by telling him he is another altogether imaginary personage, in which case all facts about himself seem for the time being to lapse from out his mind, and he throws himself into the new character with a vivacity proportionate to the amount of histrionic imagination which he possesses. But in the pathological cases the transformation is spontaneous. The most famous case, perhaps, on record is that of Félida X., reported by Dr. Azam of Bordeaux. At the age of fourteen this woman began to pass into a 'secondary' state characterized by a change in her general disposition and character, as if certain 'inhibitions,' previously existing, were suddenly removed. During the secondary state she remembered the first state, but on emerging from it into the first state she remembered nothing of the second. At the age of forty-four the duration of the secondary state (which was on the whole superior in quality to the original state) had gained upon the latter so much as to occupy most of her time. During it she remembers the events belonging to the original state, but her complete oblivion of the secondary state when the original state recurs is often very distressing to her, as, for example, when the transition takes place in a carriage on her way to a funeral, and she has no idea which one of her friends may be dead. She actually became{211} pregnant during one of her early secondary states, and during her first state had no knowledge of how it had come to pass. Her distress at these blanks of memory is sometimes intense and once drove her to attempt suicide.
β. The phenomenon of alternating personality in its simplest forms seems to be based on memory lapses. A person becomes, as we say, inconsistent with themselves if they forget their commitments, promises, knowledge, and habits; and it’s just a matter of degree when we decide that their personality has changed. However, in the pathological cases known as double or alternate personality, the memory loss is sudden and is usually preceded by a period of unconsciousness or fainting that can last for varying lengths of time. In a hypnotic trance, we can easily trigger a personality change, either by instructing the subject to forget everything that has happened since a certain date, in which case they may revert to being a child, or by telling them they are a completely fictional character, during which all memories about themselves seem to disappear, and they throw themselves into the new role with energy that matches their level of imagination. But in pathological cases, the change happens spontaneously. The most famous case on record is probably that of Félida X., reported by Dr. Azam of Bordeaux. At fourteen, this woman began to shift into a 'secondary' state marked by changes in her overall mood and character, as if certain 'inhibitions' that were previously there suddenly disappeared. During her secondary state, she remembers her original state, but when she goes back to her original state, she has no memory of the secondary one. By the age of forty-four, the secondary state (which was generally of better quality than the original state) had taken up most of her time. During it, she remembers events from her original state, but her complete lack of memory of the secondary state when returning to the original can often be very distressing for her, like when the transition happens in a car on her way to a funeral, and she has no idea which of her friends has died. She actually became{211} pregnant during one of her early secondary states and had no knowledge during her original state of how that happened. Her distress over these memory gaps can be overwhelming at times, and it once drove her to attempt suicide.
M. Pierre Janet describes a still more remarkable case as follows: "Léonie B., whose life sounds more like an improbable romance than a genuine history, has had attacks of natural somnambulism since the age of three years. She has been hypnotized constantly by all sorts of persons from the age of sixteen upwards, and she is now forty-five. Whilst her normal life developed in one way in the midst of her poor country surroundings, her second life was passed in drawing-rooms and doctors' offices, and naturally took an entirely different direction. To-day, when in her normal state, this poor peasant woman is a serious and rather sad person, calm and slow, very mild with every one, and extremely timid: to look at her one would never suspect the personage which she contains. But hardly is she put to sleep hypnotically when a metamorphosis occurs. Her face is no longer the same. She keeps her eyes closed, it is true, but the acuteness of her other senses supplies their place. She is gay, noisy, restless, sometimes insupportably so. She remains good-natured, but has acquired a singular tendency to irony and sharp jesting. Nothing is more curious than to hear her after a sitting when she has received a visit from strangers who wished to see her asleep. She gives a word-portrait of them, apes their manners, claims to know their little ridiculous aspects and passions, and for each invents a romance. To this character must be added the possession of an enormous number of recollections, whose existence she does not even suspect when awake, for her amnesia is then complete.... She refuses the name of Léonie and takes that of Léontine (Léonie 2) to which her first magnetizers had accustomed her. 'That good woman is not myself,' she says, 'she is too stupid!' To herself, Léontine, or Léonie 2, she attributes all the sensations and all the{212} actions, in a word all the conscious experiences, which she has undergone in somnambulism, and knits them together to make the history of her already long life. To Léonie 1 [as M. Janet calls the waking woman], on the other hand, she exclusively ascribes the events lived through in waking hours. I was at first struck by an important exception to the rule, and was disposed to think that there might be something arbitrary in this partition of her recollections. In the normal state Léonie has a husband and children; but Léonie 2, the somnambulist, whilst acknowledging the children as her own, attributes the husband to 'the other.' This choice was perhaps explicable, but it followed no rule. It was not till later that I learned that her magnetizers in early days, as audacious as certain hypnotizers of recent date, had somnambulized her for her first accouchements, and that she had lapsed into that state spontaneously in the later ones. Léonie 2 was thus quite right in ascribing to herself the children—it was she who had had them, and the rule that her first trance-state forms a different personality was not broken. But it is the same with her second or deepest state of trance. When after the renewed passes, syncope, etc., she reaches the condition which I have called Léonie 3, she is another person still. Serious and grave, instead of being a restless child, she speaks slowly and moves but little. Again she separates herself from the waking Léonie 1. 'A good but rather stupid woman,' she says, 'and not me.' And she also separates herself from Léonie 2: 'How can you see anything of me in that crazy creature?' she says. 'Fortunately I am nothing for her.'"
M. Pierre Janet describes an even more astonishing case as follows: "Léonie B., whose life seems more like an unbelievable story than a real history, has experienced episodes of natural sleepwalking since she was three years old. From the age of sixteen up to now, at forty-five, she has been hypnotized regularly by all kinds of people. While her everyday life unfolded in a certain way amidst her impoverished rural surroundings, her second life took place in drawing rooms and doctors' offices, leading it in a completely different direction. Today, when she is in her normal state, this poor peasant woman is a serious and somewhat sad individual—calm, slow, very gentle with everyone, and incredibly timid. At first glance, one would never suspect the persona she holds within. But as soon as she is hypnotized, a transformation happens. Her face changes. True, her eyes are closed, but the sharpness of her other senses makes up for it. She becomes lively, noisy, restless—sometimes annoyingly so. While she remains kind-hearted, she develops a curious tendency toward irony and sharp humor. It’s fascinating to hear her after a session when she has had visitors wanting to see her asleep. She paints a verbal picture of them, mimics their behavior, insists she knows their little ridiculous traits and passions, and invents stories for each of them. Additionally, she possesses a vast number of memories that she doesn’t even recognize when she’s awake, as her amnesia is then complete... She rejects the name Léonie and adopts Léontine (Léonie 2), which her early hypnotists got her used to. 'That good woman is not me,' she says, 'she's too foolish!' To herself, Léontine, or Léonie 2, she assigns all the sensations and actions, in short, all the conscious experiences she's had during sleepwalking, weaving them together to create the narrative of her already long life. On the other hand, she solely attributes the events experienced while awake to Léonie 1 [as M. Janet refers to the waking woman]. Initially, I was struck by a significant exception to this rule, leading me to think that there might be something arbitrary about how she partitioned her memories. In her normal state, Léonie has a husband and kids; however, Léonie 2, the sleepwalker, while recognizing the children as her own, assigns the husband to 'the other.' This reasoning might be understandable, but it followed no clear logic. It wasn’t until later that I discovered that her early hypnotists, as bold as some hypnotists today, had put her into a trance for her first births, and that she had naturally entered that state during the later ones. Léonie 2 was therefore correct in claiming the children as her own—it was she who had them, and the rule that her first trance state creates a different personality wasn’t violated. The same holds true for her second or deepest trance state. When, after the renewed gestures, fainting, etc., she reaches the state I call Léonie 3, she transforms again. Serious and composed, as opposed to the restless child, she speaks slowly and moves very little. Once more, she distinguishes herself from waking Léonie 1. 'A good but somewhat foolish woman,' she says, 'and not me.' She also distances herself from Léonie 2: 'How can you see anything of me in that crazy being?' she says. 'Fortunately, I mean nothing to her.'"
λ. In 'mediumships' or 'possessions' the invasion and the passing away of the secondary state are both relatively abrupt, and the duration of the state is usually short—i.e., from a few minutes to a few hours. Whenever the secondary state is well developed, no memory for aught that happened during it remains after the primary consciousness{213} comes back. The subject during the secondary consciousness speaks, writes, or acts as if animated by a foreign person, and often names this foreign person and gives his history. In old times the foreign 'control' was usually a demon, and is so now in communities which favor that belief. With us he gives himself out at the worst for an Indian or other grotesquely speaking but harmless personage. Usually he purports to be the spirit of a dead person known or unknown to those present, and the subject is then what we call a 'medium.' Mediumistic possession in all its grades seems to form a perfectly natural special type of alternate personality, and the susceptibility to it in some form is by no means an uncommon gift, in persons who have no other obvious nervous anomaly. The phenomena are very intricate, and are only just beginning to be studied in a proper scientific way. The lowest phase of mediumship is automatic writing, and the lowest grade of that is where the Subject knows what words are coming, but feels impelled to write them as if from without. Then comes writing unconsciously, even whilst engaged in reading or talk. Inspirational speaking, playing on musical instruments, etc., also belong to the relatively lower phases of possession, in which the normal self is not excluded from conscious participation in the performance, though their initiative seems to come from elsewhere. In the highest phase the trance is complete, the voice, language, and everything are changed, and there is no after-memory whatever until the next trance comes. One curious thing about trance-utterances is their generic similarity in different individuals. The 'control' here in America is either a grotesque, slangy, and flippant personage ('Indian' controls, calling the ladies 'squaws,' the men 'braves,' the house a 'wigwam,' etc., etc., are excessively common; or, if he ventures on higher intellectual flights, he abounds in a curiously vague optimistic philosophy-and-water, in which phrases about spirit, harmony, beauty, law, progression, development, etc., keep recurring. It seems{214} exactly as if one author composed more than half of the trance-messages, no matter by whom they are uttered. Whether all sub-conscious selves are peculiarly susceptible to a certain stratum of the Zeitgeist, and get their inspiration from it, I know not; but this is obviously the case with the secondary selves which become 'developed' in spiritualist circles. There the beginnings of the medium trance are indistinguishable from effects of hypnotic suggestion. The subject assumes the rôle of a medium simply because opinion expects it of him under the conditions which are present; and carries it out with a feebleness or a vivacity proportionate to his histrionic gifts. But the odd thing is that persons unexposed to spiritualist traditions will so often act in the same way when they become entranced, speak in the name of the departed, go through the motions of their several death-agonies, send messages about their happy home in the summer-land, and describe the ailments of those present.
λ. In 'mediumships' or 'possessions', the onset and departure of the secondary state are both relatively quick, and the duration of the state is usually brief—i.e., from a few minutes to a few hours. When the secondary state is well developed, there’s no memory of anything that happened during it once the primary consciousness{213} returns. During the secondary consciousness, the person speaks, writes, or acts as if influenced by another being, often naming this being and sharing its background. In the past, this foreign 'control' was often seen as a demon, and it still is in communities that hold that belief. In our case, it tends to be portrayed at worst as an Indian or some other oddly speaking but harmless character. Usually, this being claims to be the spirit of a deceased person, known or unknown to those present, and the individual is then referred to as a 'medium.' Mediumistic possession in all its forms appears to be a completely natural type of alternate personality, and many people who exhibit no other obvious nervous issues have some susceptibility to it. The phenomena are very complex and are just beginning to be studied in a proper scientific manner. The most basic form of mediumship is automatic writing, where the Subject may know what words are coming but feels compelled to write them as if prompted from the outside. This is followed by unconscious writing, even while reading or speaking. Inspirational speaking, playing musical instruments, etc., also fall into the relatively lower phases of possession, where the normal self remains consciously involved in the act, even though the initiative seems to originate from elsewhere. In the highest phase, the trance is deep, with changes in voice, language, and everything else, and there is no memory of what occurred until the next trance begins. One interesting aspect of trance utterances is their generic similarity across different individuals. The 'control' here in America is often a quirky, slangy, and irreverent character ('Indian' controls, who refer to the women as 'squaws' and the men as 'braves', calling the house a 'wigwam,' etc., are very common; or, if they attempt to engage in higher intellectual discussions, they are filled with oddly vague optimistic phrases about spirit, harmony, beauty, law, progress, development, etc., which keep repeating. It seems{214} as if one author is responsible for more than half of the trance messages, regardless of who delivers them. Whether all subconscious selves are uniquely responsive to a specific level of the Zeitgeist and draw their inspiration from it, I can't say; but this appears to be the case with the secondary selves that get 'developed' in spiritualist circles. There, the initial stages of the medium trance are indistinguishable from the effects of hypnotic suggestion. The subject takes on the role of a medium simply because it’s expected under the given circumstances and performs it with a lack of energy or enthusiasm corresponding to their acting abilities. But the unusual thing is that people who have not been exposed to spiritualist traditions often behave in the same manner when entranced, speaking in the name of the deceased, reenacting their various death scenes, sending messages about their joyful afterlife, and describing the illnesses of those present.
I have no theory to publish of these cases, the actual beginning of several of which I have personally seen. I am, however, persuaded by abundant acquaintance with the trances of one medium that the 'control' may be altogether different from any possible waking self of the person. In the case I have in mind, it professes to be a certain departed French doctor; and is, I am convinced, acquainted with facts about the circumstances, and the living and dead relatives and acquaintances, of numberless sitters whom the medium never met before, and of whom she has never heard the names. I record my bare opinion here unsupported by the evidence, not, of course, in order to convert anyone to my view, but because I am persuaded that a serious study of these trance-phenomena is one of the greatest needs of psychology, and think that my personal confession may possibly draw a reader or two into a field which the soidisant 'scientist' usually refuses to explore.[33]
I don’t have a theory to publish about these cases, several of which I have personally witnessed. However, I’m convinced from my extensive experience with the trances of one medium that the 'control' can be completely different from any possible waking self of the individual. In the case I’m referring to, it claims to be a certain deceased French doctor, and I believe it knows details about the circumstances, as well as the living and deceased relatives and acquaintances of numerous sitters whom the medium has never met before and about whom she has never heard their names. I share my opinion here without evidence, not to try to convince anyone to adopt my view, but because I believe that a serious study of these trance phenomena is one of the greatest needs in psychology, and I think that my personal insight may attract a reader or two into a field that the so-called 'scientist' typically avoids.[33]
Review, and Psychological Conclusion.—To sum up this long chapter:—The consciousness of Self involves a stream of thought, each part of which as 'I' can remember those which went before, know the things they knew, and care paramountly for certain ones among them as 'Me,' and appropriate to these the rest. This Me is an empirical aggregate of things objectively known. The I which knows them cannot itself be an aggregate; neither for psychological purposes need it be an unchanging metaphysical entity like the Soul, or a principle like the transcendental Ego, viewed as 'out of time.' It is a thought, at each moment different from that of the last moment, but appropriative of the latter, together with all that the latter called its own. All the experiential facts find their place in this description, unencumbered with any hypothesis save that of the existence of passing thoughts or states of mind.
Review, and Psychological Conclusion.—To sum up this long chapter:—The awareness of Self involves a continuous flow of thoughts, with each part as 'I' able to remember those that came before, understand what they understood, and prioritize certain ones as 'Me,' while relating the rest to these. This Me is a collection of things that are known objectively. The I that knows them isn't just a collection itself; for psychological reasons, it doesn’t have to be a constant metaphysical entity like the Soul, or a principle like the transcendental Ego, seen as 'outside of time.' It is a thought, changing from one moment to the next, but connected to the previous one, along with everything that the previous one identified as its own. All the experiential facts fit into this description, free from any assumptions other than the existence of fleeting thoughts or mental states.
If passing thoughts be the directly verifiable existents which no school has hitherto doubted them to be, then they are the only 'Knower' of which Psychology, treated as a natural science, need take any account. The only pathway that I can discover for bringing in a more transcendental Thinker would be to deny that we have any such direct knowledge of the existence of our 'states of consciousness' as common-sense supposes us to possess. The existence of the 'states' in question would then be a mere hypothesis, or one way of asserting that there must be a knower correlative to all this known; but the problem who that knower is would have become a metaphysical problem. With the question once stated in these terms, the notion either of a Spirit of the world which thinks through us, or that of a set of individual substantial souls, must be considered as primâ facie on a par with our own 'psychological' solution, and discussed impartially. I myself believe that{216} room for much future inquiry lies in this direction. The 'states of mind' which every psychologist believes in are by no means clearly apprehensible, if distinguished from their objects. But to doubt them lies beyond the scope of our natural-science (see p. 1) point of view. And in this book the provisional solution which we have reached must be the final word: the thoughts themselves are the thinkers.{217}
If passing thoughts are the directly verifiable realities that no school has ever questioned, then they are the only 'Knower' that psychology, as a natural science, needs to consider. The only way I can think of to incorporate a more transcendental thinker would be to argue that we don’t actually have the kind of direct knowledge of our 'states of consciousness' that common sense assumes we do. The existence of these 'states' would then just be a hypothesis or a way of saying that there must be a knower connected to everything known; however, the question of who that knower is would become a metaphysical issue. Once we frame the question this way, the idea of a Spirit of the world thinking through us or a group of individual substantial souls must be seen as on the same level as our own 'psychological' explanation and can be discussed fairly. I personally believe there is a lot of room for further exploration in this area. The 'states of mind' that every psychologist believes in are not at all clear if we separate them from their objects. But doubting them falls outside the boundaries of our natural science perspective (see p. 1). In this book, the provisional conclusion we've reached must be the final word: the thoughts themselves are the thinkers.
CHAPTER XIII.
ATTENTION.
The Narrowness of Consciousness.—One of the most extraordinary facts of our life is that, although we are besieged at every moment by impressions from our whole sensory surface, we notice so very small a part of them. The sum total of our impressions never enters into our experience, consciously so called, which runs through this sum total like a tiny rill through a broad flowery mead. Yet the physical impressions which do not count are there as much as those which do, and affect our sense-organs just as energetically. Why they fail to pierce the mind is a mystery, which is only named and not explained when we invoke die Enge des Bewusstseins, 'the narrowness of consciousness,' as its ground.
The Narrowness of Consciousness.—One of the most amazing facts about our lives is that, even though we are constantly bombarded by impressions from our entire sensory experience, we notice only a tiny fraction of them. The totality of our impressions never truly becomes part of our experience, which flows through this total like a small stream through a wide, flower-filled meadow. Still, the physical impressions that don’t register are there just as much as the ones that do and stimulate our senses just as intensely. Why they don’t break through to the mind is a mystery, which we merely name, without explanation, when we refer to die Enge des Bewusstseins, 'the narrowness of consciousness,' as its cause.
Its Physiological Ground.—Our consciousness certainly is narrow, when contrasted with the breadth of our sensory surface and the mass of incoming currents which are at all times pouring in. Evidently no current can be recorded in conscious experience unless it succeed in penetrating to the hemispheres and filling their pathways by the processes get up. When an incoming current thus occupies the hemispheres with its consequences, other currents are for the time kept out. They may show their faces at the door, but are turned back until the actual possessors of the place are tired. Physiologically, then, the narrowness of consciousness seems to depend on the fact that the activity of the hemispheres tends at all times to be a consolidated and unified affair, determinable now by this current and now by that, but determinable only as a whole. The ideas correlative to the reigning system of processes{218} are those which are said to 'interest' us at the time; and thus that selective character of our attention on which so much stress was laid on pp. 173 ff. appears to find a physiological ground. At all times, however, there is a liability to disintegration of the reigning system. The consolidation is seldom quite complete, the excluded currents are not wholly abortive, their presence affects the 'fringe' and margin of our thought.
Its Physiological Ground.—Our consciousness is definitely limited when compared to the vastness of our sensory surface and the constant flow of incoming information. Clearly, no information can enter our conscious experience unless it manages to penetrate the hemispheres and occupy their pathways through the processes that arise. When an incoming current successfully occupies the hemispheres with its effects, other currents are temporarily blocked out. They might make their presence known at the door, but they are pushed back until the current occupants are exhausted. From a physiological standpoint, the limitation of consciousness seems to hinge on the fact that the activity of the hemispheres tends to be a consolidated and unified matter, determined by one current or another, but only as an entire system. The ideas that relate to the dominant processes{218} are what 'interest' us at that moment; thus, the selective nature of our attention that was emphasized in pp. 173 ff. appears to have a physiological basis. Nevertheless, there is always a risk of disintegration of the dominant system. The consolidation is rarely entirely complete, and the excluded currents aren’t completely ineffective; their presence influences the 'fringe' and margin of our thoughts.
Dispersed Attention.—Sometimes, indeed, the normal consolidation seems hardly to exist. At such moments it is possible that cerebral activity sinks to a minimum. Most of us probably fall several times a day into a fit somewhat like this: The eyes are fixed on vacancy, the sounds of the world melt into confused unity, the attention is dispersed so that the whole body is felt, as it were, at once, and the foreground of consciousness is filled, if by anything, by a sort of solemn sense of surrender to the empty passing of time. In the dim background of our mind we know meanwhile what we ought to be doing: getting up, dressing ourselves, answering the person who has spoken to us, trying to make the next step in our reasoning. But somehow we cannot start; the pensée de derrière la tête fails to pierce the shell of lethargy that wraps our state about. Every moment we expect the spell to break, for we know no reason why it should continue. But it does continue, pulse after pulse, and we float with it, until—also without reason that we can discover—an energy is given, something—we know not what—enables us to gather ourselves together, we wink our eyes, we shake our heads, the background-ideas become effective, and the wheels of life go round again.
Dispersed Attention.—Sometimes, it feels like normal focus barely exists. During those times, our brain activity might drop to a low. Many of us probably experience something like this several times a day: our eyes stare into space, the sounds around us blend into a noisy blur, and our attention is scattered, so we feel our entire body at once. The forefront of our mind is filled, if anything, with a heavy sense of giving in to the endless passage of time. Meanwhile, in the back of our minds, we know what we should be doing: getting up, getting dressed, replying to the person talking to us, trying to move forward with our thoughts. But for some reason, we can’t start; the pensée de derrière la tête fails to break through the lethargy that surrounds us. Every moment, we hope this spell will break because we can’t figure out why it’s still happening. Yet it persists, pulse after pulse, and we drift along with it until—also for an unknown reason—suddenly we feel a spark of energy, something—we don’t know what—allows us to pull ourselves together. We blink, shake our heads, our background thoughts become clear, and the wheels of life start turning again.
This is the extreme of what is called dispersed attention. Between this extreme and the extreme of concentrated attention, in which absorption in the interest of the moment is so complete that grave bodily injuries may be unfelt, there are intermediate degrees, and these have been studied experimentally. The problem is known as that of{219} The Span of Consciousness.—How many objects can we attend to at once when they are not embraced in one conceptual system? Prof. Cattell experimented with combinations of letters exposed to the eye for so short a fraction of a second that attention to them in succession seemed to be ruled out. When the letters formed familiar words, three times as many of them could be named as when their combination was meaningless. If the words formed a sentence, twice as many could be caught as when they had no connection. "The sentence was then apprehended as a whole. If not apprehended thus, almost nothing is apprehended of the several words; but if the sentence as a whole is apprehended, then the words appear very distinct."
This is the extreme of what we call scattered attention. Between this extreme and the extreme of focused attention, where you’re so absorbed in the moment that you might not even notice serious injuries, there are various degrees. These have been studied in experiments. The issue is known as{219} The Span of Consciousness.—How many objects can we focus on at one time when they aren’t part of a single conceptual system? Professor Cattell conducted experiments with combinations of letters shown for such a brief moment that attending to them one after another seemed impossible. When the letters formed familiar words, participants could name three times as many compared to when the combinations were random. If the words created a sentence, twice as many could be recognized compared to when they were unrelated. "The sentence was then understood as a whole. If it wasn’t understood that way, almost nothing was grasped of the individual words; but if the sentence as a whole is understood, then the words stand out very clearly."
A word is a conceptual system in which the letters do not enter consciousness separately, as they do when apprehended alone. A sentence flashed at once upon the eye is such a system relatively to its words. A conceptual system may mean many sensible objects, may be translated later into them, but as an actual existent mental state, it does not consist of the consciousnesses of these objects. When I think of the word man as a whole, for instance, what is in my mind is something different from what is there when I think of the letters m, a, and n, as so many disconnected data.
A word is a conceptual system where the letters aren't recognized individually, like they would be if seen alone. A sentence that flashes before your eyes is a system in relation to its words. A conceptual system can represent many tangible objects and may later be linked to them, but as an actual mental state, it doesn't consist of the awareness of these objects. For example, when I think of the word man as a whole, what’s in my mind is different from when I consider the letters m, a, and n as separate pieces of information.
When data are so disconnected that we have no conception which embraces them together it is much harder to apprehend several of them at once, and the mind tends to let go of one whilst it attends to another. Still, within limits this can be avoided. M. Paulhan has experimented on the matter by declaiming one poem aloud whilst he repeated a different one mentally, or by writing one sentence whilst speaking another, or by performing calculations on paper whilst reciting poetry. He found that "the most favorable condition for the doubling of the mind was its simultaneous application to two heterogeneous operations. Two operations of the same sort, two multiplications, two recitations,{220} or the reciting of one poem and writing of another, render the process more uncertain and difficult."
When data is so disconnected that we can't find a way to connect them, it becomes much harder to understand several of them at once, and our minds tend to let go of one while focusing on another. However, this can be managed to some extent. M. Paulhan experimented with this by reading one poem out loud while mentally reciting a different one, or by writing one sentence while speaking another, or by doing calculations on paper while reciting poetry. He discovered that "the best condition for the mind to multitask effectively was its simultaneous engagement in two different activities. Two similar tasks, like doing two multiplications, two recitations,{220} or reciting one poem while writing another, make the process more uncertain and challenging."
M. Paulhan compared the time occupied by the same two operations done simultaneously or in succession, and found that there was often a considerable gain of time from doing them simultaneously. For instance:
M. Paulhan compared the time it took to perform the same two tasks either at the same time or one after the other, and found that there was often a significant time savings when doing them at the same time. For example:
"I multiply 421 312 212 by 2; the operation takes 6 seconds; the recitation of four verses also takes 6 seconds. But the two operations done at once only take 6 seconds, so that there is no loss of time from combining them."
"I multiply 421,312,212 by 2; the process takes 6 seconds; reciting four verses also takes 6 seconds. But when I do both at the same time, it still only takes 6 seconds, so there's no time wasted combining them."
If, then, by the original question, how many objects can we attend to at once, be meant how many entirely disconnected systems or processes can go on simultaneously, the answer is, not easily more than one, unless the processes are very habitual; but then two, or even three, without very much oscillation of the attention. Where, however, the processes are less automatic, as in the story of Julius Cæsar dictating four letters whilst he writes a fifth, there must be a rapid oscillation of the mind from one to the next, and no consequent gain of time.
If the original question about how many things we can focus on at once refers to how many completely separate systems or processes can occur simultaneously, the answer is, not easily more than one, unless the processes are very habitual; but then two, or even three, without a lot of shifting of attention. However, when the processes are less automatic, like in the story of Julius Caesar dictating four letters while writing a fifth, there must be a quick switching of the mind from one task to another, with no actual time saved.
When the things to be attended to are minute sensations, and when the effort is to be exact in noting them, it is found that attention to one interferes a good deal with the perception of the other. A good deal of fine work has been done in this field by Professor Wundt. He tried to note the exact position on a dial of a rapidly revolving hand, at the moment when a bell struck. Here were two disparate sensations, one of vision, the other of sound, to be noted together. But it was found that in a long and patient research, the eye-impression could seldom or never be noted at the exact moment when the bell actually struck. An earlier or a later point were all that could be seen.
When it comes to small sensations, and the goal is to accurately observe them, it turns out that focusing on one often distracts from noticing the other. A lot of detailed work has been done in this area by Professor Wundt. He attempted to determine the precise position on a dial of a quickly rotating hand at the moment a bell rang. There were two different sensations to see at the same time—one visual and the other auditory. However, after extensive and careful research, it was found that the visual impression could rarely, if ever, be recorded at the exact moment the bell actually rang. Only earlier or later moments could be observed.
The Varieties of Attention.—Attention may be divided into kinds in various ways. It is either to
The Varieties of Attention.—Attention can be categorized in several ways. It is either to
b) Ideal or represented objects (intellectual attention). It is either
b) Ideal or represented objects (intellectual attention). It is either
c) Immediate; or
Immediate; or
d) Derived: immediate, when the topic or stimulus is interesting in itself, without relation to anything else; derived, when it owes its interest to association with some other immediately interesting thing. What I call derived attention has been named 'apperceptive' attention. Furthermore, Attention may be either
d) Derived: immediate, when the topic or stimulus is interesting on its own, without connection to anything else; derived, when it gains its interest from association with another interesting thing. What I refer to as derived attention is also known as 'apperceptive' attention. Additionally, Attention may be either
e) Passive, reflex, involuntary, effortless; or
e) Passive, reflex, involuntary, effortless; or
f) Active and voluntary.
Active and voluntary.
Voluntary attention is always derived; we never make an effort to attend to an object except for the sake of some remote interest which the effort will serve. But both sensorial and intellectual attention may be either passive or voluntary.
Voluntary attention always comes from; we never make an effort to focus on something unless it serves some distant interest. However, both sensory and intellectual attention can be either passive or voluntary.
In involuntary attention of the immediate sensorial sort the stimulus is either a sense-impression, very intense, voluminous, or sudden; or it is an instinctive stimulus, a perception which, by reason of its nature rather than its mere force, appeals to some one of our congenital impulses and has a directly exciting quality. In the chapter on Instinct we shall see how these stimuli differ from one animal to another, and what most of them are in man: strange things, moving things, wild animals, bright things, pretty things, metallic things, words, blows, blood, etc., etc., etc.
In involuntary attention of the immediate sensory type, the stimulus can either be a very strong, large, or sudden sense impression, or it can be an instinctive stimulus, a perception that, because of its nature rather than just its intensity, resonates with one of our inherent impulses and has an immediately exciting quality. In the chapter on Instinct, we'll explore how these stimuli vary from one animal to another and what most of them are in humans: strange things, moving things, wild animals, bright things, pretty things, metallic objects, words, blows, blood, and so on.
Sensitiveness to immediately exciting sensorial stimuli characterizes the attention of childhood and youth. In mature age we have generally selected those stimuli which are connected with one or more so-called permanent interests, and our attention has grown irresponsive to the rest. But childhood is characterized by great active energy, and has few organized interests by which to meet new impressions and decide whether they are worthy of notice or not, and the consequence is that extreme mobility of the attention with which we are all familiar in children, and which{222} makes of their first lessons such chaotic affairs. Any strong sensation whatever produces accommodation of the organs which perceive it, and absolute oblivion, for the time being, of the task in hand. This reflex and passive character of the attention which, as a French writer says, makes the child seem to belong less to himself than to every object which happens to catch his notice, is the first thing which the teacher must overcome. It never is overcome in some people, whose work, to the end of life, gets done in the interstices of their mind-wandering.
Sensitivity to immediate and exciting sensory stimuli defines the attention of childhood and youth. In adulthood, we generally focus on stimuli linked to one or more so-called permanent interests, and our attention becomes less responsive to the rest. However, childhood is marked by high energy and lacks organized interests to help handle new impressions and determine if they are worth paying attention to. Consequently, this leads to the extreme fluctuation of attention that we often see in children, making their first lessons quite chaotic. Any strong sensation causes a shift in the sensory organs and complete distraction from the task at hand. This reflexive and passive nature of attention, which, as a French writer suggests, makes a child seem to belong less to themselves and more to whatever catches their attention, is the first challenge for teachers to address. For some people, this never gets resolved, and they end up doing their work amidst a constant stream of daydreaming.
The passive sensorial attention is derived when the impression, without being either strong or of an instinctively exciting nature, is connected by previous experience and education with things that are so. These things may be called the motives of the attention. The impression draws an interest from them, or perhaps it even fuses into a single complex object with them; the result is that it is brought into the focus of the mind. A faint tap per se is not an interesting sound; it may well escape being discriminated from the general rumor of the world. But when it is a signal, as that of a lover on the window-pane, hardly will it go unperceived. Herbart writes:
The passive sensory attention is derived when an impression, without being particularly strong or instinctively exciting, connects through past experiences and education with things that are. These things can be called the motives of attention. The impression draws interest from them, or perhaps it even merges into a single complex object with them; as a result, it comes into focus in the mind. A faint tap per se isn’t an interesting sound; it might easily be overlooked amid the general noise of the world. But when it serves as a signal, like a lover tapping on the window pane, it’s hard to miss. Herbart writes:
"How a bit of bad grammar wounds the ear of the purist! How a false note hurts the musician! or an offence against good manners the man of the world! How rapid is progress in a science when its first principles have been so well impressed upon us that we reproduce them mentally with perfect distinctness and ease! How slow and uncertain, on the other hand, is our learning of the principles themselves, when familiarity with the still more elementary percepts connected with the subject has not given us an adequate predisposition!—Apperceptive attention may be plainly observed in very small children when, hearing the speech of their elders, as yet unintelligible to them, they suddenly catch a single known word here and there, and repeat it to themselves; yes! even in the dog who looks round at us when we speak of him and pronounce{223} his name. Not far removed is the talent which mind-wandering school-boys display during the hours of instruction, of noticing every moment in which the teacher tells a story. I remember classes in which, instruction being uninteresting, and discipline relaxed, a buzzing murmur was always to be heard, which invariably stopped for as long a time as an anecdote lasted. How could the boys, since they seemed to hear nothing, notice when the anecdote began? Doubtless most of them always heard something of the teacher's talk; but most of it had no connection with their previous knowledge and occupations, and therefore the separate words no sooner entered their consciousness than they fell out of it again; but, on the other hand, no sooner did the words awaken old thoughts, forming strongly-connected series with which the new impression easily combined, than out of new and old together a total interest resulted which drove the vagrant ideas below the threshold of consciousness, and brought for a while settled attention into their place."
"How a bit of bad grammar annoys the purist! How a wrong note pains the musician! Or how an offense against good manners bothers the socialite! How quickly progress happens in a field when its basic principles are so well established in us that we can mentally reproduce them with perfect clarity and ease! Yet, how slow and uncertain is our understanding of those principles themselves when familiarity with the even more fundamental concepts related to the subject hasn’t given us a sufficient foundation!—We can clearly observe focused attention in very young children when they hear the speech of adults, as yet unintelligible to them. They suddenly pick up a single known word here and there and repeat it to themselves; yes! even in the dog that looks over at us when we talk about him and say his name. Similarly, there is the tendency of daydreaming schoolboys during lessons to notice every moment when the teacher shares a story. I remember classes where, with uninteresting instruction and relaxed discipline, there was always a buzzing murmur, which would instantly stop whenever an anecdote began. How could the boys, since they seemed to hear nothing, notice when the story started? Surely, most of them always caught something of what the teacher said, but much of it didn’t connect with their prior knowledge and interests, so the individual words would enter their consciousness only to slip away again. However, as soon as those words triggered familiar thoughts—forming strong connections with which the new impression easily combined—a shared interest emerged from both new and old that pushed the wandering thoughts below the threshold of consciousness and temporarily replaced them with focused attention."
Involuntary intellectual attention is immediate when we follow in thought a train of images exciting or interesting per se; derived, when the images are interesting only as means to a remote end, or merely because they are associated with something which makes them dear. The brain-currents may then form so solidly unified a system, and the absorption in their object be so deep, as to banish not only ordinary sensations, but even the severest pain. Pascal, Wesley, Robert Hall, are said to have had this capacity. Dr. Carpenter says of himself that "he has frequently begun a lecture whilst suffering neuralgic pain so severe as to make him apprehend that he would find it impossible to proceed; yet no sooner has he by a determined effort fairly launched himself into the stream of thought, than he has found himself continuously borne along without the least distraction, until the end has come, and the attention has been released; when the pain has recurred with a force that has overmastered all resistance,{224} making him wonder how he could have ever ceased to feel it."[34]
Involuntary intellectual attention happens instantly when we follow a stream of images that are exciting or interesting in themselves; it’s derived when the images are interesting only as a way to achieve a distant goal or simply because they are connected to something that makes them meaningful. The brain's activity can become so unified, and our focus on these thoughts so intense, that it can block out not just normal sensations but even severe pain. It's said that Pascal, Wesley, and Robert Hall possessed this ability. Dr. Carpenter mentions that "he has often started a lecture while dealing with neuralgic pain so intense that he feared he wouldn’t be able to continue; yet as soon as he made a determined effort to immerse himself in the flow of thought, he found himself carried along without any distraction until the end, and only then did the attention relax, at which point the pain returned with such intensity that it overwhelmed all resistance, making him wonder how he could have stopped feeling it."{224}
Voluntary Attention.—Dr. Carpenter speaks of launching himself by a determined effort. This effort characterizes what we called active or voluntary attention. It is a feeling which everyone knows, but which most people would call quite indescribable. We get it in the sensorial sphere whenever we seek to catch an impression of extreme faintness, be it of sight, hearing, taste, smell, or touch; we get it whenever we seek to discriminate a sensation merged in a mass of others that are similar; we get it whenever we resist the attractions of more potent stimuli and keep our mind occupied with some object that is naturally unimpressive. We get it in the intellectual sphere under exactly similar conditions: as when we strive to sharpen and make distinct an idea which we but vaguely seem to have; or painfully discriminate a shade of meaning from its similars; or resolutely hold fast to a thought so discordant with our impulses that, if left unaided, it would quickly yield place to images of an exciting and impassioned kind. All forms of attentive effort would be exercised at once by one whom we might suppose at a dinner-party resolutely to listen to a neighbor giving him insipid and unwelcome advice in a low voice, whilst all around the guests were loudly laughing and talking about exciting and interesting things.
Voluntary Attention.—Dr. Carpenter talks about pushing himself forward through a determined effort. This effort defines what we refer to as active or voluntary attention. It's a feeling that everyone experiences but most would describe as quite indescribable. We feel it in our senses whenever we try to catch an impression of very faintness, whether in sight, sound, taste, smell, or touch; we feel it when we attempt to discriminate a sensation that is blended with many others that are similar; we feel it whenever we resist the attractions of stronger stimuli and focus our mind on something that is naturally unremarkable. We also experience it in the intellectual realm under the same conditions: when we work to clarify and define an idea that we only vaguely grasp; or struggle to differentiate a subtle meaning from similar ones; or hold onto a thought that clashes with our natural impulses so strongly that, without help, it would quickly be replaced by more exciting and passionate imagery. All types of attentive effort would be put to the test for someone at a dinner party who is determinedly listening to a neighbor quietly giving them dull and unwanted advice while all around, the guests are laughing and chatting loudly about engaging and interesting topics.
There is no such thing as voluntary attention sustained for more than a few seconds at a time. What is called sustained voluntary attention is a repetition of successive efforts which bring back the topic to the mind. The topic once brought back, if a congenial one, develops; and if its development is interesting it engages the attention passively for a time. Dr. Carpenter, a moment back, described the stream of thought, once entered, as 'bearing him along.'{225} This passive interest may be short or long. As soon as it flags, the attention is diverted by some irrelevant thing, and then a voluntary effort may bring it back to the topic again; and so on, under favorable conditions, for hours together. During all this time, however, note that it is not an identical object in the psychological sense, but a succession of mutually related objects forming an identical topic only, upon which the attention is fixed. No one can possibly attend continuously to an object that does not change.
There’s no such thing as voluntary attention that lasts more than a few seconds. What people refer to as sustained voluntary attention is actually a series of repeated efforts to bring the topic back to mind. Once the topic is recalled, if it resonates, it can develop; and if this development is captivating, it can hold the attention passively for a while. Dr. Carpenter just described the flow of thought, once engaged, as 'carrying him along.'{225} This passive interest can be brief or extended. Once it starts to fade, attention gets drawn away by something unrelated, and then a voluntary effort may bring it back to the topic again; this can continue, under the right conditions, for hours. However, throughout all this, it's important to note that it's not an identical object in the psychological sense, but a sequence of interconnected objects that create a consistent topic to which attention is focused. No one can possibly focus continuously on an object that doesn’t change.
Now there are always some objects that for the time being will not develop. They simply go out; and to keep the mind upon anything related to them requires such incessently renewed effort that the most resolute Will ere long gives out and lets its thoughts follow the more stimulating solicitations after it has withstood them for what length of time it can. There are topics known to every man from which he shies like a frightened horse, and which to get a glimpse of is to shun. Such are his ebbing assets to the spendthrift in full career. But why single out the spendthrift, when to every man actuated by passion the thought of interests which negate the passion can hardly for more than a fleeting instant stay before the mind? It is like 'memento mori' in the heydey of the pride of life. Nature rises at such suggestions, and excludes them from the view:—How long, O healthy reader, can you now continue thinking of your tomb?—In milder instances the difficulty is as great, especially when the brain is fagged. One snatches at any and every passing pretext, no matter how trivial or external, to escape from the odiousness of the matter in hand. I know a person, for example, who will poke the fire, set chairs straight, pick dust-specks from the floor, arrange his table, snatch up the newspaper, take down any book which catches his eye, trim his nails, waste the morning anyhow, in short, and all without premeditation,—simply because the only thing he ought to attend to is the preparation of a noonday{226} lesson in formal logic which he detests. Anything but that!
Now there are always some things that for the moment won't develop. They simply fade away; and keeping your mind on anything related to them takes such constant effort that even the strongest will eventually gives in and lets its thoughts chase after the more exciting distractions once it has resisted them for as long as it can. There are subjects known to everyone that they avoid like a startled horse, and just glimpsing them is something to steer clear of. Such are his diminishing resources to the spendthrift living it up. But why focus solely on the spendthrift? For anyone driven by passion, the thought of interests that contradict that passion can hardly stay in their mind for more than a brief moment. It’s like 'memento mori' in the peak of life’s pride. Nature reacts to such thoughts and pushes them out of sight:—How long, O healthy reader, can you keep thinking about your grave?—In less extreme cases, the struggle is just as tough, especially when the mind is tired. One grabs at any and every distraction, no matter how trivial or surface-level, to escape the unpleasantness of the current issue. I know someone, for instance, who will tend the fire, straighten chairs, pick dust bunnies off the floor, arrange his table, grab the newspaper, take down any book that catches his eye, trim his nails, waste the morning anyway, basically, all without any forethought—simply because the one thing he should focus on is preparing a midday{226} lesson in formal logic that he loathes. Anything but that!
Once more, the object must change. When it is one of sight, it will actually become invisible; when of hearing, inaudible,—if we attend to it too unmovingly. Helmholtz, who has put his sensorial attention to the severest tests, by using his eyes on objects which in common life are expressly overlooked, makes some interesting remarks on this point in his section on retinal rivalry. The phenomenon called by that name is this, that if we look with each eye upon a different picture (as in the annexed stereoscopic slide), sometimes one picture, sometimes the other, or parts of both, will come to consciousness, but hardly ever both combined. Helmholtz now says:
Once again, the object needs to change. When it’s something to see, it can become invisible; when it’s something to hear, it can become inaudible—if we focus on it too intently. Helmholtz, who has rigorously tested his sensory focus by observing objects that are usually overlooked in everyday life, makes some interesting points about this in his section on retinal rivalry. This phenomenon, known by that name, occurs when we look at different images with each eye (like in the attached stereoscopic slide); sometimes one image comes into focus, sometimes the other, or parts of both, but rarely do we perceive both together. Helmholtz now states:
"I find that I am able to attend voluntarily, now to one and now to the other system of lines; and that then this system remains visible alone for a certain time, whilst the other completely vanishes. This happens, for example, whenever I try to count the lines first of one and then of the other system.... But it is extremely hard to chain the attention down to one of the systems for long, unless we associate with our looking some distinct purpose which keeps the activity of the attention perpetually renewed.{227} Such a one is counting the lines, comparing their intervals, or the like. An equilibrium of the attention, persistent for any length of time, is under no circumstances attainable. The natural tendency of attention when left to itself is to wander to ever new things; and so soon as the interest of its object is over, so soon as nothing new is to be noticed there, it passes, in spite of our will, to something else. If we wish to keep it upon one and the same object, we must seek constantly to find out something new about the latter, especially if other powerful impressions are attracting us away."
"I notice that I can voluntarily focus on one system of lines or the other; and when I do, one system is visible while the other completely disappears for a while. This happens, for instance, when I try to count the lines from one system and then the other.... However, it's really tough to keep my attention fixed on one system for long, unless I connect my observation to a specific goal that keeps my focus constantly refreshed.{227} Examples of this are counting the lines, comparing their spaces, or similar tasks. A balanced focus that lasts for a while is impossible to maintain. When left alone, attention naturally drifts to new things; and as soon as the interest in its current object fades or nothing new catches my eye, it inevitably shifts to something else, despite my efforts. If we want to keep our attention on one object, we must continually search for something new about it, especially if other strong distractions arise."
These words of Helmholtz are of fundamental importance. And if true of sensorial attention, how much more true are they of the intellectual variety! The conditio sine quâ non of sustained attention to a given topic of thought is that we should roll it over and over incessantly and consider different aspects and relations of it in turn. Only in pathological states will a fixed and ever monotonously recurring idea possess the mind.
These words from Helmholtz are extremely important. And if they apply to sensory attention, they're even more relevant to intellectual attention! The conditio sine quâ non for maintaining focus on a particular subject is that we should continuously examine it from various angles and perspectives. Only in pathological conditions will a rigid and repetitively recurring thought occupy the mind.
Genius and Attention.—And now we can see why it is that what is called sustained attention is the easier, the richer in acquisitions and the fresher and more original the mind. In such minds, subjects bud and sprout and grow. At every moment, they please by a new consequence and rivet the attention afresh. But an intellect unfurnished with materials, stagnant, unoriginal, will hardly be likely to consider any subject long. A glance exhausts its possibilities of interest. Geniuses are commonly believed to excel other men in their power of sustained attention. In most of them, it is to be feared, the so-called 'power' is of the passive sort. Their ideas coruscate, every subject branches infinitely before their fertile minds, and so for hours they may be rapt. But it is their genius making them attentive, not their attention making geniuses of them. And, when we come down to the root of the matter, we see that they differ from ordinary men less in the character of their attention than in the nature of the objects upon{228} which it is successively bestowed. In the genius, these form a concatenated series, suggesting each other mutually by some rational law. Therefore we call the attention 'sustained' and the topic of meditation for hours 'the same.' In the common man the series is for the most part incoherent, the objects have no rational bond, and we call the attention wandering and unfixed.
Genius and Attention.—Now we can understand why what we call sustained attention is easier, leading to richer knowledge and a more vibrant, original mind. In these minds, topics bloom, sprout, and grow. At every moment, they engage with fresh ideas that capture attention again. But a mind lacking material, stagnant and unoriginal, will barely linger on any topic. A quick glance wears out its potential for interest. Geniuses are often thought to surpass others in their ability to maintain sustained attention. However, in many cases, this so-called "power" is more passive. Their ideas sparkle, every subject branches out infinitely before their creative minds, and for hours they can be engrossed. But it's their genius that keeps them focused, not their focus turning them into geniuses. When we look closely, we see that they differ from ordinary people not so much in the way they pay attention but in the kinds of subjects they focus on{228}. For geniuses, these topics form a connected series, suggesting one another through some rational principle. That's why we describe their attention as "sustained" and the topic of contemplation for hours as "the same." For the average person, the series is mostly chaotic, and the subjects lack a rational connection, so we call their attention wandering and unfocused.
It is probable that genius tends actually to prevent a man from acquiring habits of voluntary attention, and that moderate intellectual endowments are the soil in which we may best expect, here as elsewhere, the virtues of the will, strictly so called, to thrive. But, whether the attention come by grace of genius or by dint of will, the longer one does attend to a topic the more mastery of it one has. And the faculty of voluntarily bringing back a wandering attention over and over again is the very root of judgment, character, and will. No one is compos sui if he have it not. An education which should improve this faculty would be the education par excellence. But it is easier to define this ideal than to give practical directions for bringing it about. The only general pedagogic maxim bearing on attention is that the more interests the child has in advance in the subject, the better he will attend. Induct him therefore in such a way as to knit each new thing on to some acquisition already there; and if possible awaken curiosity, so that the new thing shall seem to come as an answer, or part of an answer, to a question preëxisting in his mind.
It’s likely that genius actually makes it harder for someone to develop habits of focused attention, and that average intellectual abilities are where we can best expect, here and elsewhere, the virtues of willpower to flourish. However, whether attention comes from the gift of genius or sheer will, the longer someone focuses on a topic, the more they understand it. The ability to repeatedly bring back a wandering focus is the foundation of judgment, character, and will. No one is truly in control of themselves if they lack this skill. An education designed to enhance this ability would be the ideal education. But it’s easier to describe this ideal than to provide practical steps to achieve it. The only general teaching principle regarding attention is that the more interest a child has in a subject beforehand, the better they will focus. So, introduce new concepts in a way that connects them to what they already know; and if possible, spark curiosity, so that the new information feels like an answer, or part of an answer, to a question they already have in their mind.
The Physiological Conditions of Attention.—These seem to be the following:
The Physiological Conditions of Attention.—These appear to be the following:
1) The appropriate cortical centre must be excited ideationally as well as sensorially, before attention to an object can take place.
The right part of the brain needs to be activated both mentally and through the senses before we can focus on an object.
2) The sense-organ must then adapt itself to clearest reception of the object, by the adjustment of its muscular apparatus.
2) The sense organ must then adjust itself for the clearest reception of the object by tweaking its muscular structure.
Of this third condition I will say no more, since we have no proof of it in detail, and I state it on the faith of general analogies. Conditions 1) and 2), however, are verifiable; and the best order will be to take the latter first.
Of this third condition, I won’t say much more since we don’t have detailed proof of it, and I’m bringing it up based on general analogies. However, conditions 1) and 2) can be verified, so it makes sense to address the latter first.
The Adaptation of the Sense-organ.—This occurs not only in sensorial but also in intellectual attention to an object.
The Adaptation of the Sense-organ.—This happens not just in sensory interaction but also in mental focus on an object.
That it is present when we attend to sensible things is obvious. When we look or listen we accommodate our eyes and ears involuntarily, and we turn our head and body as well; when we taste or smell we adjust the tongue, lips, and respiration to the object; in feeling a surface we move the palpatory organ in a suitable way; in all these acts, besides making involuntary muscular contractions of a positive sort, we inhibit others which might interfere with the result—we close the eyes in tasting, suspend the respiration in listening, etc. The result is a more or less massive organic feeling that attention is going on. This organic feeling we usually treat as part of the sense of our own activity, although it comes in to us from our organs after they are accommodated. Any object, then, if immediately exciting, causes a reflex accommodation of the sense-organ, which has two results—first, the feeling of activity in question; and second, the object's increase in clearness.
It’s clear that when we focus on sensible things, we automatically adjust our eyes and ears without thinking about it, and we also move our heads and bodies. When we taste or smell, we make adjustments with our tongue, lips, and breathing to engage with the object. When we feel a surface, we appropriately move our hands. In all these actions, we not only make involuntary muscle movements but also hold back others that could disrupt the process—we close our eyes when tasting and hold our breath when listening, for example. As a result, we experience a noticeable physical feeling that attention is in play. We typically see this physical feeling as part of our own activity, even though it comes from our senses after we’ve made adjustments. So, any object that is immediately stimulating triggers a reflexive adjustment in our sense organs, leading to two outcomes: first, the sensation of the activity itself, and second, the object appears clearer.
But in intellectual attention similar feelings of activity occur. Fechner was the first, I believe, to analyze these feelings, and discriminate them from the stronger ones just named. He writes:
But in intellectual attention, similar feelings of activity happen. Fechner was the first, I think, to analyze these feelings and distinguish them from the stronger ones mentioned earlier. He writes:
"When we transfer the attention from objects of one sense to those of another, we have an indescribable feeling (though at the same time one perfectly determinate, and reproducible at pleasure), of altered direction or differently localized tension (Spannung). We feel a strain forward in the eyes, one directed sidewise in the ears, increasing with the degree of our attention, and changing according as we look at an object carefully, or listen to something{230} attentively; and we speak accordingly of straining the attention. The difference is most plainly felt when the attention oscillates rapidly between eye and ear; and the feeling localizes itself with most decided difference in regard to the various sense-organs, according as we wish to discriminate a thing delicately by touch, taste, or smell.
"When we shift our focus from one sense to another, we experience an indescribable feeling (though it is also clearly defined and can be reproduced at will) of altered direction or differently localized tension (Spannung). We sense a strain moving forward in our eyes and a sideways strain in our ears, which intensifies with the level of our attention and changes depending on whether we are looking closely at something or listening intently to it{230}; hence, we refer to straining the attention. The difference is most noticeable when our attention rapidly shifts back and forth between our eyes and ears; the feeling is distinctly localized for each sense organ, depending on whether we want to feel something delicately through touch, taste, or smell."
"But now I have, when I try to vividly recall a picture of memory or fancy, a feeling perfectly analogous to that which I experience when I seek to apprehend a thing keenly by eye or ear; and this analogous feeling is very differently localized. While in sharpest possible attention to real objects (as well as to after-images) the strain is plainly forwards, and (when the attention changes from one sense to another) only alters its direction between the several external sense-organs, leaving the rest of the head free from strain, the case is different in memory or fancy, for here the feeling withdraws entirely from the external sense-organs, and seems rather to take refuge in that part of the head which the brain fills. If I wish, for example, to recall a place or person, it will arise before me with vividness, not according as I strain my attention forwards, but rather in proportion as I, so to speak, retract it backwards."
"But now, when I try to clearly remember a picture in my mind or imagine something, I feel something very similar to what I experience when I focus on something sharply with my eyes or ears; and this feeling is located very differently. When I concentrate as much as possible on real objects (as well as on afterimages), the tension is clearly directed forward, and when I shift my attention from one sense to another, it only changes direction between the different external sense organs, leaving the rest of my head relaxed. However, it’s different with memory or imagination, because here the feeling completely withdraws from the external sense organs and seems to take refuge in that area of my head where the brain is. For example, if I want to recall a place or person, it comes to mind with clarity, not based on how much I strain my attention forward, but rather in proportion to how I, so to speak, pull it backward."
In myself the 'backward retraction' which is felt during attention to ideas of memory, etc., seems to be principally constituted by the feeling of an actual rolling outwards and upwards of the eyeballs, such as occurs in sleep, and is the exact opposite of their behavior when we look at a physical thing.
In my experience, the 'backward retraction' that happens when I focus on memories and similar thoughts feels mainly like my eyeballs actually rolling outward and upward, similar to what happens in sleep. This reaction is the complete opposite of what occurs when we look at something physical.
This accommodation of the sense-organ is not, however, the essential process, even in sensorial attention. It is a secondary result which may be prevented from occurring, as certain observations show. Usually, it is true that no object lying in the marginal portions of the field of vision can catch our attention without at the same time 'catching our eye'—that is, fatally provoking such movements of rotation and accommodation as will focus its image{231} on the fovea, or point of greatest sensibility. Practice, however, enables us, with effort, to attend to a marginal object whilst keeping the eyes immovable. The object under these circumstances never becomes perfectly distinct—the place of its image on the retina makes distinctness impossible—but (as anyone can satisfy himself by trying) we become more vividly conscious of it than we were before the effort was made. Teachers thus notice the acts of children in the school-room at whom they appear not to be looking. Women in general train their peripheral visual attention more than men. Helmholtz states the fact so strikingly that I will quote his observation in full. He was trying to combine in a single solid percept pairs of stereoscopic pictures illuminated instantaneously by the electric spark. The pictures were in a dark box which the spark from time to time lighted up; and, to keep the eyes from wandering betweenwhiles, a pin-hole was pricked through the middle of each picture, through which the light of the room came, so that each eye had presented to it during the dark intervals a single bright point. With parallel optical axes these points combined into a single image; and the slightest movement of the eyeballs was betrayed by this image at once becoming double. Helmholtz now found that simple linear figures could, when the eyes were thus kept immovable, be perceived as solids at a single flash of the spark. But when the figures were complicated photographs, many successive flashes were required to grasp their totality.
This adjustment of the sense organ isn’t the essential process, even in sensory attention. It’s a secondary result that can be prevented, as some observations indicate. Generally, it's true that no object in the outer areas of our field of vision can grab our attention without simultaneously capturing our gaze—meaning it inevitably triggers movements of rotation and accommodation that focus its image{231} on the fovea, or the point of highest sensitivity. However, with practice, we can, with effort, focus on a peripheral object while keeping our eyes still. In this case, the object never becomes perfectly clear—the positioning of its image on the retina makes clarity impossible—but (as anyone can see by trying) we become more acutely aware of it than we were before putting in the effort. Teachers often notice the actions of students in the classroom whom they seem not to be watching. Women typically develop their peripheral visual attention more than men. Helmholtz highlights this fact so clearly that I will quote his observation in full. He was attempting to combine pairs of stereoscopic images into a single solid perception, illuminated momentarily by an electric spark. The images were in a dark box, which the spark lit up from time to time; to prevent the eyes from wandering in between, a pinhole was made in the center of each picture, allowing the room's light to shine through, so each eye saw just a single bright point during the dark moments. With aligned optical axes, these points merged into one image, and the slightest movement of the eyeballs instantly caused this image to become double. Helmholtz found that simple linear shapes could be perceived as solids in a single flash of the spark when the eyes remained still. However, with complex photographs, many successive flashes were needed to comprehend the whole picture.
"Now it is interesting," he says, "to find that, although we keep steadily fixating the pin-holes and never allow their combined image to break into two, we can nevertheless, before the spark comes, keep our attention voluntarily turned to any particular portion we please of the dark field, so as then, when the spark comes, to receive an impression only from such parts of the picture as lie in this region. In this respect, then, our attention is quite independent of the position and accommodation of the eyes,{232} and of any known alteration in these organs, and free to direct itself by a conscious and voluntary effort upon any selected portion of a dark and undifferenced field of view. This is one of the most important observations for a future theory of attention."[35]
"Now it's interesting," he says, "to see that, even though we keep focusing on the pinholes and never let their combined image split into two, we can still, right before the spark happens, consciously choose to direct our attention to any specific part of the dark field. This way, when the spark occurs, we only get an impression from the sections of the picture that are in this area. In this sense, our attention is completely independent of the position and adjustment of our eyes,{232} and any known changes in these organs, allowing us to consciously and voluntarily focus on any chosen part of an unvaried dark field of view. This is one of the most significant insights for a future theory of attention."[35]
The Ideational Excitement of the Centre.—But if the peripheral part of the picture in this experiment be not physically accommodated for, what is meant by its sharing our attention? What happens when we 'distribute' or 'disperse' the latter upon a thing for which we remain unwilling to 'adjust'? This leads us to that second feature in the process, the 'ideational excitement' of which we spoke. The effort to attend to the marginal region of the picture consists in nothing more nor less than the effort to form as clear an IDEA as is possible of what is there portrayed. The idea is to come to the help of the sensation and make it more distinct. It may come with effort, and such a mode of coming is the remaining part of what we know as our attention's 'strain' under the circumstances. Let us show how universally present in our acts of attention is this anticipatory thinking of the thing to which we attend. Mr. Lewes's name of preperception seems the best possible designation for this imagining of an experience before it occurs.
The Ideational Excitement of the Center.—But if the outer part of the picture in this experiment isn't physically adjusted for, what does it mean for it to capture our attention? What happens when we 'distribute' or 'spread' our focus on something we’re not willing to 'adjust' to? This brings us to the second aspect of the process, the 'ideational excitement' we mentioned earlier. The effort to pay attention to the edges of the picture is simply the effort to create as clear an IDEA as possible of what is depicted there. The idea serves to support the sensation and clarify it. It may require effort, and that effort reflects what we recognize as the 'strain' of our attention in such situations. Let’s demonstrate how this anticipatory thinking about the thing we focus on is universally present in our acts of attention. Mr. Lewes's term preperception seems to be the most fitting label for this envisioning of an experience before it actually happens.
It must as a matter of course be present when the attention is of the intellectual variety, for the thing attended to then is nothing but an idea, an inward reproduction or conception. If then we prove ideal construction of the object to be present in sensorial attention, it will be present everywhere. When, however, sensorial attention is at its height, it is impossible to tell how much of the percept comes from without and how much from within; but if we find that the preparation we make for it always partly consists of the creation of an imaginary duplicate of the object in the mind, that will be enough to establish the point in dispute.{233}
It must naturally be there when the focus is on intellectual matters, because what we're focused on is just an idea, a mental recreation or concept. If we can demonstrate that ideal construction of the object is part of sensorial attention, then it will be everywhere. However, when sensorial attention is at its peak, it’s hard to determine how much of what we perceive comes from the outside and how much comes from within. But if we can see that the preparation we do for it always includes creating a mental copy of the object, that will be enough to settle the argument.{233}
In reaction-time experiments, keeping our mind intent upon the motion about to be made shortens the time. This shortening we ascribed in Chap. VIII to the fact that the signal when it comes finds the motor-centre already charged almost to the explosion-point in advance. Expectant attention to a reaction thus goes with sub-excitement of the centre concerned.
In reaction-time experiments, focusing our mind on the movement we're about to make reduces the time it takes. We attributed this reduction in Chap. VIII to the idea that when the signal arrives, the motor center is already nearly at the point of firing. This kind of focused attention on a reaction is linked to a heightened state of readiness in the relevant center.
Where the impression to be caught is very weak, the way not to miss it is to sharpen our attention for it by preliminary contact with it in a stronger form. Helmholtz says: "If we wish to begin to observe overtones, it is advisable, just before the sound which is to be analyzed, to sound very softly the note of which we are in search.... If you place the resonator which corresponds to a certain overtone, for example g´ of the sound c, against your ear, and then make the note c sound, you will hear g´ much strengthened by the resonator.... This strengthening by the resonator can be used to make the naked ear attentive to the sound which it is to catch. For when the resonator is gradually removed, the g´ grows weaker; but the attention, once directed to it, holds it now more easily fast, and the observer hears the tone g´ now in the natural unaltered sound of the note with his unaided ear."
When the impression we want to capture is very faint, the way to ensure we don’t miss it is to sharpen our focus by first encountering it in a stronger way. Helmholtz says, "If we want to start noticing overtones, it's a good idea to softly play the note we're looking for right before the sound we want to analyze.... If you hold the resonator that corresponds to a specific overtone, for example, g´ of the sound c, up to your ear, and then play the note c, you will hear g´ much louder because of the resonator.... This amplification by the resonator can help the unaided ear to pay attention to the sound we're trying to capture. As the resonator is gradually pulled away, the g´ becomes quieter; but once our attention is drawn to it, we can hold onto it more easily, and the listener can now hear the tone g´ in the natural, unmodified sound of the note with their own ear."
Wundt, commenting on experiences of this sort, says that "The same thing is to be noticed in weak or fugitive visual impressions. Illuminate a drawing by electric sparks separated by considerable intervals, and after the first, and often after the second and third spark, hardly anything will be recognized. But the confused image is held fast in memory; each successive illumination completes it; and so at last we attain to a clearer perception. The primary motive to this inward activity proceeds usually from the outer impression itself. We hear a sound in which, from certain associations, we suspect a certain overtone; the next thing is to recall the overtone in memory; and finally we catch it in the sound we hear. Or perhaps we see some mineral substance we have met before; the{234} impression awakens the memory-image, which again more or less completely melts with the impression itself.... Different qualities of impression require disparate adaptations. And we remark that our feeling of the strain of our inward attentiveness increases with every increase in the strength of the impressions on whose perception we are intent."
Wundt, commenting on experiences like these, says that "The same thing happens with weak or fleeting visual impressions. If you illuminate a drawing with electric sparks spaced out over time, after the first, and often after the second and third sparks, hardly anything will be recognizable. But the vague image stays in memory; each new illumination fills it in, and eventually we achieve a clearer understanding. The main drive for this internal activity usually comes from the external impression itself. We hear a sound and, due to certain associations, we suspect there’s a specific overtone; the next step is recalling that overtone in memory, and finally we identify it in the sound we hear. Or we might see a mineral we’ve encountered before; the{234} impression triggers a memory-image, which then somewhat merges with the impression itself.... Different qualities of impression require different adjustments. And we notice that our sense of the strain of our inward focus grows stronger with every increase in the intensity of the impressions we are concentrating on."
The natural way of conceiving all this is under the symbolic form of a brain-cell played upon from two directions. Whilst the object excites it from without, other brain-cells arouse it from within. The plenary energy of the brain-cell demands the co-operation of both factors: not when merely present, but when both present and inwardly imagined, is the object fully attended to and perceived.
The natural way to understand all this is through the symbolic idea of a brain cell being influenced from two directions. While the object stimulates it from the outside, other brain cells activate it from the inside. The full energy of the brain cell requires both factors to work together: not just when they are simply present, but when both are present and actively imagined, is the object fully focused on and perceived.
A few additional experiences will now be perfectly clear. Helmholtz, for instance, adds this observation concerning the stereoscopic pictures lit by the electric spark. "In pictures," he says, "so simple that it is relatively difficult for me to see them double, I can succeed in seeing them double, even when the illumination is only instantaneous, the moment I strive to imagine in a lively way how they ought then to look. The influence of attention is here pure; for all eye-movements are shut out."
A few more experiences will now be completely clear. Helmholtz, for example, adds this observation about the stereoscopic images illuminated by the electric spark. "In images," he says, "so simple that it’s relatively hard for me to see them double, I can manage to see them double, even when the light is just momentary, as soon as I try to vividly imagine how they should look. The effect of attention here is straightforward; because all eye movements are eliminated."
Again, writing of retinal rivalry, Helmholtz says:
Again, talking about retinal rivalry, Helmholtz says:
"It is not a trial of strength between two sensations, but depends on our fixing or failing to fix the attention. Indeed, there is scarcely any phenomenon so well fitted for the study of the causes which are capable of determining the attention. It is not enough to form the conscious intention of seeing first with one eye and then with the other; we must form as clear a notion as possible of what we expect to see. Then it will actually appear."
"It’s not a competition between two sensations; it relies on whether we manage to focus our attention or not. In fact, there’s hardly any phenomenon better suited for studying the factors that can influence our attention. It’s not enough to consciously decide to look first with one eye and then the other; we also need to have a clear idea of what we expect to see. Only then will it actually appear."
In Figs. 55 and 56, where the result is ambiguous, we can make the change from one apparent form to the other by imagining strongly in advance the form we wish to see. Similarly in those puzzles where certain lines in a picture form by their combination an object that has no connection{235} with what the picture obviously represents; or indeed in every case where an object is inconspicuous and hard to discern from the background; we may not be able to see it for a long time; but, having once seen it, we can attend to it again whenever we like, on account of the mental duplicate of it which our imagination now bears. In the meaningless French words 'pas de lieu Rhône que nous,' who can recognize immediately the English 'paddle your own canoe'? But who that has once noticed the identity can fail to have it arrest his attention again? When watching for the distant clock to strike, our mind is so filled with its image that at every moment we think we hear the longed-for or dreaded sound. So of an awaited footstep. Every stir in the wood is for the hunter his game; for the fugitive his pursuers. Every bonnet in the street is momentarily taken by the lover to enshroud the head of his idol. The image in the mind is the attention; the preperception is half of the perception of the looked-for thing.
In Figs. 55 and 56, where the outcome is unclear, we can shift from one apparent form to another by strongly envisioning the form we want to see. Similarly, in those puzzles where certain lines in a drawing combine to create an object unrelated to what the picture obviously depicts; or in any situation where an object is subtle and difficult to see against the background; we might not notice it for a long time; but once we do, we can focus on it again whenever we want, thanks to the mental image we've formed in our minds. In the meaningless French phrase 'pas de lieu Rhône que nous,' who can instantly recognize the English 'paddle your own canoe'? But once someone has caught on to the similarity, how can they not be alerted to it again? When we are waiting to hear a distant clock strike, our minds are so filled with its image that we feel like we’re hearing the longed-for or dreaded sound at every moment. The same goes for an anticipated footstep. Every rustle in the woods is, for the hunter, his prey; for the fugitive, his pursuers. Every hat in the street is briefly imagined by the lover to be worn by their beloved. The image in our mind is the focus; what we expect plays a big part in how we perceive the thing we’re looking for.
It is for this reason that men have no eyes but for those aspects of things which they have already been taught to discern. Any one of us can notice a phenomenon after it has once been pointed out, which not one in ten thousand could ever have discovered for himself. Even in poetry and the arts, some one has to come and tell us what{236} aspects to single out, and what effects to admire, before our æsthetic nature can 'dilate' to its full extent and never 'with the wrong emotion.' In kindergarten-instruction one of the exercises is to make the children see how many features they can point out in such an object as a flower or a stuffed bird. They readily name the features they know already, such as leaves, tail, bill, feet. But they may look for hours without distinguishing nostrils, claws, scales, etc., until their attention is called to these details; thereafter, however, they see them every time. In short, the only things which we commonly see are those which we preperceive, and the only things which we preperceive are those which have been labelled for us, and the labels stamped into our mind. If we lost our stock of labels we should be intellectually lost in the midst of the world.
It's for this reason that people only notice the aspects of things they've already been taught to see. Anyone can notice a phenomenon once it’s been pointed out, something that not one in ten thousand could have discovered on their own. Even in poetry and the arts, someone has to come along and tell us which aspects to focus on and what effects to appreciate before our aesthetic sense can fully engage without the wrong emotion. In kindergarten, one of the exercises is to help children identify as many features as they can in an object like a flower or a stuffed bird. They quickly name the features they already know, like leaves, tail, beak, and feet. But they might spend hours without noticing nostrils, claws, scales, etc., until their attention is drawn to those details; however, once they are aware, they see them every time. In short, the only things we commonly see are those we have preconceived, and the only things we preconceive are those that have been labeled for us, with the labels firmly embedded in our minds. Without our stock of labels, we would be intellectually lost in the world.
Educational Corollaries.—First, to strengthen attention in children who care nothing for the subject they are studying and let their wits go wool-gathering. The interest here must be 'derived' from something that the teacher associates with the task, a reward or a punishment if nothing less internal comes to mind. If a topic awakens no spontaneous attention it must borrow an interest from elsewhere. But the best interest is internal, and we must always try, in teaching a class, to knit our novelties by rational links on to things of which they already have preperceptions. The old and familiar is readily attended to by the mind and helps to hold in turn the new, forming, in Herbartian phraseology, an 'Apperceptionsmasse' for it. Of course the teacher's talent is best shown by knowing what 'Apperceptionsmasse' to use. Psychology can only lay down the general rule.
Educational Corollaries.—First, to strengthen attention in children who have no interest in the subject they are studying and let their minds wander. The interest here must be 'derived' from something that the teacher connects with the task, whether it's a reward or a punishment if nothing internal comes to mind. If a topic doesn’t spark any natural attention, it needs to borrow interest from somewhere else. However, the best interest is internal, and we should always strive, when teaching a class, to connect our new information through rational links to things they already have some understanding of. The old and familiar captures the mind's attention easily and helps to hold onto the new, forming, in Herbart's terms, an 'Apperceptionsmasse' for it. Of course, the teacher's skill is best shown by knowing which 'Apperceptionsmasse' to use. Psychology can only outline the general rule.
Second, take that mind-wandering which at a later age may trouble us whilst reading or listening to a discourse. If attention be the reproduction of the sensation from within, the habit of reading not merely with the eye, and of listening not merely with the ear, but of articulating to one's self the words seen or heard, ought to deepen one's{237} attention to the latter. Experience shows that this is the case. I can keep my wandering mind a great deal more closely upon a conversation or a lecture if I actively re-echo to myself the words than if I simply hear them; and I find a number of my students who report benefit from voluntarily adopting a similar course.
Secondly, consider that mind-wandering which may later distract us while reading or listening to a talk. If paying attention is about recalling sensations from within, developing the habit of reading not just with our eyes and listening not just with our ears, but also saying the words we see or hear to ourselves, should enhance our{237} focus on those words. Experience shows this is true. I can keep my wandering mind much more engaged in a conversation or lecture if I actively repeat the words to myself rather than just hearing them; and I've noticed many of my students report benefits from taking this approach.
Attention and Free Will.—I have spoken as if our attention were wholly determined by neural conditions. I believe that the array of things we can attend to is so determined. No object can catch our attention except by the neural machinery. But the amount of the attention which an object receives after it has caught our mental eye is another question. It often takes effort to keep the mind upon it. We feel that we can make more or less of the effort as we choose. If this feeling be not deceptive, if our effort be a spiritual force, and an indeterminate one, then of course it contributes coequally with the cerebral conditions to the result. Though it introduce no new idea, it will deepen and prolong the stay in consciousness of innumerable ideas which else would fade more quickly away. The delay thus gained might not be more than a second in duration—but that second may be critical; for in the constant rising and falling of considerations in the mind, where two associated systems of them are nearly in equilibrium it is often a matter of but a second more or less of attention at the outset, whether one system shall gain force to occupy the field and develop itself, and exclude the other, or be excluded itself by the other. When developed, it may make us act; and that act may seal our doom. When we come to the chapter on the Will, we shall see that the whole drama of the voluntary life hinges on the amount of attention, slightly more or slightly less, which rival motor ideas may receive. But the whole feeling of reality, the whole sting and excitement of our voluntary life, depends on our sense that in it things are really being decided from one moment to another, and that it is not the dull rattling off of a chain that was{238} forged innumerable ages ago. This appearance, which makes life and history tingle with such a tragic zest, may not be an illusion. Effort may be an original force and not a mere effect, and it may be indeterminate in amount. The last word of sober insight here is ignorance, for the forces engaged are too delicate ever to be measured in detail. Psychology, however, as a would-be 'Science,' must, like every other Science, postulate complete determinism in its facts, and abstract consequently from the effects of free will, even if such a force exist. I shall do so in this book like other psychologists; well knowing, however, that such a procedure, although a methodical device justified by the subjective need of arranging the facts in a simple and 'scientific' form, does not settle the ultimate truth of the free-will question one way or the other.{239}
Attention and Free Will.—I've spoken as if our attention is completely controlled by neural conditions. I believe that the range of things we can focus on is indeed determined by these conditions. No object can capture our attention without the neural mechanisms at play. However, the amount of attention that an object gets after it has caught our interest is a different issue. It often takes effort to keep our minds on it. We feel we can choose how much effort to exert. If this feeling isn't misleading, if our effort is a genuine force and an undefined one, then it contributes equally with the brain's conditions to the outcome. Although it doesn't introduce any new ideas, it can prolong and deepen the presence of numerous ideas that would otherwise quickly fade away. The additional time gained might be only a second, but that second can be critical; in the continual rise and fall of thoughts in our minds, where two linked systems are almost in balance, it often comes down to just a second more or less of attention at the start that determines whether one system will gain momentum to dominate the scene and develop itself, and push out the other, or be pushed out itself by the other. Once developed, it may lead us to act; and that action could change our fate. When we reach the chapter on the Will, we will see that the entire drama of our voluntary life is based on the slight variations in the amount of attention that competing motor ideas can get. However, the entire sensation of reality, the intensity and excitement of our voluntary life, depends on our perception that things are really being decided from moment to moment, rather than it being just the dull sequence of events in a chain that was{238} formed eons ago. This impression, which gives life and history such a tragic thrill, may not be an illusion. Effort might be a fundamental force and not merely a consequence, and it might be undefined in terms of its magnitude. The most honest insight here is our ignorance, as the forces at play are too subtle to ever be precisely measured. Psychology, however, as an aspiring 'Science,' must, like every other science, assume complete determinism in its findings and thus ignore the influence of free will, even if such a force really exists. I will do the same in this book like other psychologists; fully aware, however, that this approach, although a systematic method justified by the need to arrange the facts in a straightforward and 'scientific' manner, does not resolve the ultimate truth of the free-will debate either way.{239}
CHAPTER XIV.
CONCEPTION.
Different states of mind can mean the same. The function by which we mark off, discriminate, draw a line round, and identify a numerically distinct subject of discourse is called conception. It is plain that whenever one and the same mental state thinks of many things, it must be the vehicle of many conceptions. If it has such a multiple conceptual function, it may be called a state of compound conception.
Different states of mind can mean the same. The process by which we distinguish, separate, define, and identify a distinct subject of discussion is called conception. It's clear that whenever one mental state considers many things, it must be the means of many conceptions. If it serves this multiple conceptual purpose, it can be referred to as a state of compound conception.
We may conceive realities supposed to be extra-mental, as steam-engine; fictions, as mermaid; or mere entia rationis, like difference or nonentity. But whatever we do conceive, our conception is of that and nothing else—nothing else, that is, instead of that, though it may be of much else in addition to that. Each act of conception results from our attention's having singled out some one part of the mass of matter-for-thought which the world presents, and from our holding fast to it, without confusion. Confusion occurs when we do not know whether a certain object proposed to us is the same with one of our meanings or not; so that the conceptual function requires, to be complete, that the thought should not only say 'I mean this,' but also say 'I don't mean that.'
We can imagine realities that are thought to exist outside of our minds, like a steam engine; fictional creations like a mermaid; or purely conceptual ideas like difference or nothingness. But whatever we do imagine, that’s all we are imagining—nothing else instead of that, though it might include plenty of other things in addition to it. Each act of imagination comes from our focus picking out one specific part of the vast array of ideas the world offers, and from our holding onto it clearly. Confusion happens when we can't tell if a certain object being presented to us is the same as one of our concepts. Therefore, to be complete, the conceptual process must do more than just assert 'I mean this'; it must also assert 'I don’t mean that.'
Each conception thus eternally remains what it is, and never can become another. The mind may change its states, and its meanings, at different times; may drop one conception and take up another: but the dropped conception itself can in no intelligible sense be said to change into its successor. The paper, a moment ago white, I may now see to be scorched black. But my conception 'white'{240} does not change into my conception 'black.' On the contrary, it stays alongside of the objective blackness, as a different meaning in my mind, and by so doing lets me judge the blackness as the paper's change. Unless it stayed, I should simply say 'blackness' and know no more. Thus, amid the flux of opinions and of physical things, the world of conceptions, or things intended to be thought about, stands stiff and immutable, like Plato's Realm of Ideas.
Each idea always remains what it is and can never become something else. The mind can change its states and meanings at different times; it may let go of one idea and pick up another: but the idea that is let go cannot really be said to change into its successor. The paper, which was white a moment ago, may now appear scorched black. But my idea of 'white'{240} does not change into my idea of 'black.' Instead, it exists next to the actual blackness as a different meaning in my mind, allowing me to recognize the blackness as a change in the paper. If it didn't exist, I would simply say 'blackness' and understand nothing more. Thus, amidst the flow of opinions and physical things, the world of ideas, or things intended to be thought about, remains solid and unchanging, like Plato's Realm of Ideas.
Some conceptions are of things, some of events, some of qualities. Any fact, be it thing, event, or quality, may be conceived sufficiently for purposes of identification, if only it be singled out and marked so as to separate it from other things. Simply calling it 'this' or 'that' will suffice. To speak in technical language, a subject may be conceived by its denotation, with no connotation, or a very minimum of connotation, attached. The essential point is that it should be re-identified by us as that which the talk is about; and no full representation of it is necessary for this, even when it is a fully representable thing.
Some ideas are about things, some are about events, and some are about qualities. Any fact—whether it's a thing, event, or quality—can be identified if it's highlighted and distinguished from other things. Just referring to it as 'this' or 'that' is enough. In technical terms, a subject can be understood by its denotation, with little to no connotation involved. The key point is that we need to recognize it as the subject of the discussion, and we don’t need a complete representation of it for that, even if it is something that can be fully described.
In this sense, creatures extremely low in the intellectual scale may have conception. All that is required is that they should recognize the same experience again. A polyp would be a conceptual thinker if a feeling of 'Hollo! thingumbob again!' ever flitted through its mind. This sense of sameness is the very keel and backbone of our consciousness. The same matters can be thought of in different states of mind, and some of these states can know that they mean the same matters which the other states meant. In other words, the mind can always intend, and know when it intends, to think the Same.
In this way, creatures that are very low on the intelligence scale might have some understanding. All that's needed is for them to recognize the same experience again. A polyp would be a conceptual thinker if it ever thought, 'Hey! That thing again!' This sense of familiarity is the core of our consciousness. The same subjects can be considered in different mental states, and some of these states can recognize that they refer to the same subjects that the other states did. In other words, the mind can always intend, and know when it intends, to think the Same.
Conceptions of Abstract, of Universal, and of Problematic Objects.—The sense of our meaning is an entirely peculiar element of the thought. It is one of those evanescent and 'transitive' facts of mind which introspection cannot turn round upon, and isolate and hold up for examination, as an entomologist passes round an insect on a pin. In the{241} (somewhat clumsy) terminology I have used, it has to do with the 'fringe' of the object, and is a 'feeling of tendency,' whose neural counterpart is undoubtedly a lot of dawning and dying processes too faint and complex to be traced. (See p. 169.) The geometer, with his one definite figure before him, knows perfectly that his thoughts apply to countless other figures as well, and that although he sees lines of a certain special bigness, direction, color, etc., he means not one of these details. When I use the word man in two different sentences, I may have both times exactly the same sound upon my lips and the same picture in my mental eye, but I may mean, and at the very moment of uttering the word and imagining the picture know that I mean, two entirely different things. Thus when I say: "What a wonderful man Jones is!" I am perfectly aware that I mean by man to exclude Napoleon Bonaparte or Smith. But when I say: "What a wonderful thing Man is!" I am equally well aware that I mean no such exclusion. This added consciousness is an absolutely positive sort of feeling, transforming what would otherwise be mere noise or vision into something understood; and determining the sequel of my thinking, the later words and images, in a perfectly definite way.
Concepts of Abstract, Universal, and Problematic Objects.—The understanding of our meaning is a completely unique aspect of thought. It’s one of those fleeting and ‘transitive’ mental facts that introspection can’t really focus on, isolate, or examine, like an entomologist showcasing an insect on a pin. In the{241} (somewhat awkward) terminology I’ve used, it relates to the 'fringe' of the object and is a 'feeling of tendency,' whose neural counterpart is definitely a mix of unclear and transient processes too faint and intricate to trace. (See p. 169.) The geometer, with his single clear figure in front of him, knows very well that his thoughts apply to countless other figures as well, and that although he sees lines of a specific size, direction, color, etc., he means none of those details. When I use the word man in two different sentences, I might pronounce exactly the same sound and have the same image in my mind, but I could mean—and at that moment be aware that I mean—two entirely different things. So when I say: "What a wonderful man Jones is!" I am fully aware that by "man" I’m excluding Napoleon Bonaparte or Smith. However, when I say: "What a wonderful thing Man is!" I am equally aware that I’m not excluding anyone. This added awareness is a distinctly positive sort of feeling, transforming what would otherwise just be noise or an image into something understood; and it shapes the progression of my thoughts, influencing the later words and images in a very specific way.
No matter how definite and concrete the habitual imagery of a given mind may be, the things represented appear always surrounded by their fringe of relations, and this is as integral a part of the mind's object as the things themselves are. We come, by steps with which everyone is sufficiently familiar, to think of whole classes of things as well as of single specimens; and to think of the special qualities or attributes of things as well as of the complete things—in other words, we come to have universals and abstracts, as the logicians call them, for our objects. We also come to think of objects which are only problematic, or not yet definitely representable, as well as of objects imagined in all their details. An object which is problematic is defined by its relations only. We think of a thing{242} about which certain facts must obtain. But we do not yet know how the thing will look when realized—that is, although conceiving it we cannot imagine it. We have in the relations, however, enough to individualize our topic and distinguish it from all the other meanings of our mind. Thus, for example, we may conceive of a perpetual-motion machine. Such a machine is a quæsitum of a perfectly definite kind,—we can always tell whether the actual machines offered us do or do not agree with what we mean by it. The natural possibility or impossibility of the thing never touches the question of its conceivability in this problematic way. 'Round-square,' again, or 'black-white-thing,' are absolutely definite conceptions; it is a mere accident, as far as conception goes, that they happen to stand for things which nature never shows us, and of which we consequently can make no picture.
No matter how clear and specific the common imagery in someone's mind might be, the things represented always seem to be surrounded by their network of relationships, which is just as essential to the mind's object as the things themselves. We gradually learn to think not just about individual items but also about entire categories of things; and we start to consider the specific qualities or characteristics of things in addition to the complete things—in other words, we come to have universals and abstracts, as logicians refer to them, for our objects. We also begin to think about objects that are only problematic, or not yet clearly defined, as well as about objects we can visualize in detail. A problematic object is only defined by its relationships. We think of something{242} that must meet certain conditions. But we don’t yet know what it will look like when actualized—that is, while we can conceive of it, we cannot imagine it. However, the relationships give us enough to identify our topic and set it apart from all the other meanings in our mind. For instance, we might imagine a perpetual-motion machine. Such a machine is a quæsitum of a very specific type—we can always determine whether the actual machines presented to us align with our idea of it. The natural possibility or impossibility of the thing doesn’t affect whether we can conceive of it in this problematic manner. Likewise, 'round-square' or 'black-white-thing' are absolutely clear concepts; it’s purely coincidental, in terms of conception, that they refer to things which nature never presents to us, and therefore we cannot create a picture of them.
The nominalists and conceptualists carry on a great quarrel over the question whether "the mind can frame abstract or universal ideas." Ideas, it should be said, of abstract or universal objects. But truly in comparison with the wonderful fact that our thoughts, however different otherwise, can still be of the same, the question whether that same be a single thing, a whole class of things, an abstract quality or something unimaginable, is an insignificant matter of detail. Our meanings are of singulars, particulars, indefinites, problematics, and universals, mixed together in every way. A singular individual is as much conceived when he is isolated and identified away from the rest of the world in my mind, as is the most rarefied and universally applicable quality he may possess—being, for example, when treated in the same way. From every point of view, the overwhelming and portentous character ascribed to universal conceptions is surprising. Why, from Socrates downwards, philosophers should have vied with each other in scorn of the knowledge of the particular, and in adoration of that of the general, is hard to understand, seeing that the more adorable knowledge ought to be{243} that of the more adorable things, and that the things of worth are all concretes and singulars. The only value of universal characters is that they help us, by reasoning, to know new truths about individual things. The restriction of one's meaning, moreover, to an individual thing, probably requires even more complicated brain-processes than its extension to all the instances of a kind; and the mere mystery, as such, of the knowledge, is equally great, whether generals or singulars be the things known. In sum, therefore, the traditional Universal-worship can only be called a bit of perverse sentimentalism, a philosophic 'idol of the cave.'
Nominalists and conceptualists are having a big debate about whether "the mind can create abstract or universal ideas." Specifically, they’re discussing ideas about abstract or universal objects. But when you think about the amazing fact that our thoughts, despite their differences, can still be about the same thing, the question of whether that same thing is a single object, a whole category of things, an abstract quality, or something beyond imagination feels like a minor detail. Our ideas include singulars, particulars, indefinites, problematics, and universals, all mixed together in various ways. A single individual is as much conceived when I isolate and identify him in my mind as the most refined and universally applicable quality he might have—like being, for instance, when examined similarly. From every perspective, the overwhelming importance given to universal ideas is surprising. It’s hard to grasp why, from Socrates onward, philosophers have looked down on the knowledge of specific instances while worshipping that of the general, especially since the more worthy knowledge should focus on more admirable things, and the things that truly matter are all concrete and singular. The main value of universal concepts is that they help us reason and uncover new truths about individual things. In fact, narrowing one's meaning to an individual likely involves even more complex thought processes than broadening it to include all instances of a kind; and the mystery of knowledge is just as significant, whether it involves generals or singulars. In conclusion, the traditional reverence for Universals can only be seen as a form of misguided sentimentalism, a philosophical 'idol of the cave.'
Nothing can be conceived as the same without being conceived in a novel state of mind. It seems hardly necessary to add this, after what was said on p. 156. Thus, my arm-chair is one of the things of which I have a conception; I knew it yesterday and recognized it when I looked at it. But if I think of it to-day as the same arm-chair which I looked at yesterday, it is obvious that the very conception of it as the same is an additional complication to the thought, whose inward constitution must alter in consequence. In short, it is logically impossible that the same thing should be known as the same by two successive copies of the same thought. As a matter of fact, the thoughts by which we know that we mean the same thing are apt to be very different indeed from each other. We think the thing now substantively, now transitively; now in a direct image, now in one symbol, and now in another symbol; but nevertheless we somehow always do know which of all possible subjects we have in mind. Introspective psychology must here throw up the sponge; the fluctuations of subjective life are too exquisite to be described by its coarse terms. It must confine itself to bearing witness to the fact that all sorts of different subjective states do form the vehicle by which the same is known; and it must contradict the opposite view.{244}
Nothing can be understood the same way without being viewed from a fresh perspective. It hardly needs to be said after what was discussed on p. 156. So, my armchair is one of the things I have a clear idea of; I recognized it yesterday and acknowledged it when I looked at it. But if I think of it today as the same armchair I saw yesterday, it’s clear that the very idea of it as the same adds a layer of complexity to my thought, which must change as a result. In short, it’s logically impossible for the same thing to be recognized as the same by two successive instances of the same thought. In reality, the thoughts that lead us to believe we mean the same thing can be very different from one another. We think about the object now in a substantial way, now in a transitive way; sometimes with a direct image, sometimes with one symbol, and sometimes with another; yet somehow we always do understand which of all the possible subjects we’re considering. Introspective psychology has to admit defeat here; the nuances of subjective experience are too delicate to be captured by its rough terminology. It has to focus on confirming that all kinds of different subjective states play a role in how the same is understood, and it must oppose the contrary perspective.{244}
CHAPTER XV.
DISCRIMINATION.
Discrimination versus Association.—On p. 15 I spoke of the baby's first object being the germ out of which his whole later universe develops by the addition of new parts from without and the discrimination of others within. Experience, in other words, is trained both by association and dissociation, and psychology must be writ both in synthetic and in analytic terms. Our original sensible totals are, on the one hand, subdivided by discriminative attention, and, on the other, united with other totals,—either through the agency of our own movements, carrying our senses from one part of space to another, or because new objects come successively and replace those by which we were at first impressed. The 'simple impression' of Hume, the 'simple idea' of Locke are abstractions, never realized in experience. Life, from the very first, presents us with concreted objects, vaguely continuous with the rest of the world which envelops them in space and time, and potentially divisible into inward elements and parts. These objects we break asunder and reunite. We must do both for our knowledge of them to grow; and it is hard to say, on the whole, which we do most. But since the elements with which the traditional associationism performs its constructions—'simple sensations,' namely—are all products of discrimination carried to a high pitch, it seems as if we ought to discuss the subject of analytic attention and discrimination first.
Discrimination versus Association.—On p. 15 I talked about how a baby's first object is the germ that eventually becomes their entire universe through the addition of new parts from the outside and the discrimination of others from within. Experience, in other words, is shaped both by association and dissociation, and psychology needs to be expressed both in synthetic and analytic terms. Our original sensory totals are, on one hand, broken down by focused attention, and on the other, connected with other totals—either through our own movements, which take our senses from one area to another, or because new objects come along and replace the ones that initially caught our attention. The 'simple impression' of Hume and the 'simple idea' of Locke are just abstractions that we never actually experience. From the very beginning, life presents us with concrete objects that are vaguely continuous with the surrounding world in space and time and can potentially be divided into internal elements and parts. We separate these objects and bring them back together. We need to do both for our understanding of them to grow; it's hard to say which we do more overall. However, since the elements that traditional associationism relies on—those 'simple sensations'—are all products of high-level discrimination, it seems we should first discuss analytic attention and discrimination.
Discrimination defined.—The noticing of any part whatever of our object is an act of discrimination. Already on p. 218 I have described the manner in which we often spontaneously{245} lapse into the undiscriminating state, even with regard to objects which we have already learned to distinguish. Such anæsthetics as chloroform, nitrous oxide, etc., sometimes bring about transient lapses even more total, in which numerical discrimination especially seems gone; for one sees light and hears sound, but whether one or many lights and sounds is quite impossible to tell. Where the parts of an object have already been discerned, and each made the object of a special discriminative act, we can with difficulty feel the object again in its pristine unity; and so prominent may our consciousness of its composition be, that we may hardly believe that it ever could have appeared undivided. But this is an erroneous view, the undeniable fact being that any number of impressions, from any number of sensory sources, falling simultaneously on a mind WHICH HAS NOT YET EXPERIENCED THEM SEPARATELY, will yield a single undivided object to that mind. The law is that all things fuse that can fuse, and that nothing separates except what must. What makes impressions separate is what we have to study in this chapter.
Discrimination defined.—Noticing any part of our object is an act of discrimination. Already on p. 218 I have described how we often spontaneously{245} slip into an undifferentiated state, even with things we have already learned to tell apart. Anesthetics like chloroform and nitrous oxide can sometimes cause temporary lapses that are even more complete, where especially numerical discrimination seems to vanish; you can see light and hear sound, but it's completely impossible to tell if there’s one or many lights and sounds. When we have already identified the parts of an object and each has been the focus of a specific discrimination act, we struggle to perceive the object again as a whole; our awareness of its composition may be so strong that we might hardly believe it ever appeared undivided. But this is an incorrect perspective, as the undeniable truth is that any number of impressions from any number of sensory sources, occurring at the same time in a mind WHICH HAS NOT YET EXPERIENCED THEM INDIVIDUALLY, will present a single undivided object to that mind. The principle is that all things blend that can blend, and that nothing separates except what must. What causes impressions to separate is what we need to study in this chapter.
Conditions which favor Discrimination.—I will treat successively of differences:
Conditions that Encourage Discrimination.—I will discuss differences one by one:
(1) So far as they are directly felt;
(1) As far as they are directly felt;
(2) So far as they are inferred;
(2) As far as they are inferred;
(3) So far as they are singled out in compounds.
(3) As long as they are identified in compounds.
Differences directly felt.—The first condition is that the things to be discriminated must BE different, either in time, place, or quality. In other words, and physiologically speaking, they must awaken neural processes which are distinct. But this, as we have just seen, though an indispensable condition, is not a sufficient condition. To begin with, the several neural processes must be distinct enough. No one can help singling out a black stripe on a white ground, or feeling the contrast between a bass note and a high one sounded immediately after it. Discrimination is here involuntary. But where the objective difference is{246} less, discrimination may require considerable effort of attention to be performed at all.
Differences directly felt.—The first condition is that the things to be distinguished must BE different, whether in time, place, or quality. In other words, they need to trigger distinct neural processes. However, as we've just seen, while this is a necessary condition, it’s not enough on its own. First, the various neural processes must be distinct enough. No one can miss noticing a black stripe on a white background or feeling the contrast between a deep bass note and a high pitch played right after it. Discrimination in these cases is involuntary. But when the objective difference is{246} smaller, it may take a lot of effort and attention to make the distinction at all.
Secondly, the sensations excited by the differing objects must not fall simultaneously, but must fall in immediate SUCCESSION upon the same organ. It is easier to compare successive than simultaneous sounds, easier to compare two weights or two temperatures by testing one after the other with the same hand, than by using both hands and comparing both at once. Similarly it is easier to discriminate shades of light or color by moving the eye from one to the other, so that they successively stimulate the same retinal tract. In testing the local discrimination of the skin, by applying compass-points, it is found that they are felt to touch different spots much more readily when set down one after the other than when both are applied at once. In the latter case they may be two or three inches apart on the back, thighs, etc., and still feel as if they were set down in one spot. Finally, in the case of smell and taste it is well-nigh impossible to compare simultaneous impressions at all. The reason why successive impression so much favors the result seems to be that there is a real sensation of difference, aroused by the shock of transition from one perception to another which is unlike the first. This sensation of difference has its own peculiar quality, no matter what the terms may be, between which it obtains. It is, in short, one of those transitive feelings, or feelings of relation, of which I treated in a former place (p. 161); and, when once aroused, its object lingers in the memory along with the substantive terms which precede and follow, and enables our judgments of comparison to be made.
Secondly, the sensations triggered by different objects must not occur at the same time, but must happen in immediate SUCCESSION on the same organ. It’s easier to compare sounds that happen one after the other than at the same time, easier to compare two weights or temperatures by testing one after the other with the same hand than by using both hands to compare at once. Similarly, it’s easier to distinguish shades of light or color by moving the eye from one to the other, so that they stimulate the same area of the retina successively. When testing how well the skin can differentiate areas by using compass points, people find the points are felt to touch different spots much more easily when they are applied one after the other than when both are applied at the same time. In the latter case, they might be two or three inches apart on the back, thighs, etc., and still feel like they’re touching the same spot. Finally, with smell and taste, it’s nearly impossible to compare simultaneous sensations at all. The reason successive impressions favor a clearer result seems to be that there’s a genuine sensation of difference, sparked by the transition from one perception to another that is unlike the first. This sensation of difference has its own unique quality, regardless of what the terms are that it connects. In short, it’s one of those transitive feelings, or feelings of relation, which I discussed earlier (p. 161); and, once this feeling is triggered, its object remains in memory along with the terms that come before and after, allowing us to make our judgments of comparison.
Where the difference between the successive sensations is but slight, the transition between them must be made as immediate as possible, and both must be compared in memory, in order to get the best results. One cannot judge accurately of the difference between two similar wines whilst the second is still in one's mouth. So of sounds, warmths, etc.—we must get the dying phases of both sensations{247} of the pair we are comparing. Where, however, the difference is strong, this condition is immaterial, and we can then compare a sensation actually felt with another carried in memory only. The longer the interval of time between the sensations, the more uncertain is their discrimination.
When the difference between two sensations is minimal, the shift between them should be as immediate as possible, and both should be compared in memory to achieve the best outcomes. You can’t accurately judge the difference between two similar wines while the second one is still in your mouth. This applies to sounds, temperatures, etc.—we need to capture the fading aspects of both sensations{247} of the pair we’re comparing. However, when the difference is significant, this condition doesn’t matter, and we can compare a sensation currently experienced with one that exists only in memory. The longer the gap between the sensations, the more difficult it is to tell them apart.
The difference, thus immediately felt between two terms, is independent of our ability to say anything about either of the terms by itself. I can feel two distinct spots to be touched on my skin, yet not know which is above and which below. I can observe two neighboring musical tones to differ, and still not know which of the two is the higher in pitch. Similarly I may discriminate two neighboring tints, whilst remaining uncertain which is the bluer or the yellower, or how either differs from its mate.
The difference I feel right away between two terms doesn't depend on my ability to say anything about either one on its own. I can feel two separate spots being touched on my skin, but I can't tell which one is higher or lower. I can notice that two nearby musical notes are different, yet still not know which one has the higher pitch. Likewise, I can tell two adjacent colors apart while not being sure which one is bluer or yellower, or how either one differs from the other.
I said that in the immediate succession of m upon n the shock of their difference is felt. It is felt repeatedly when we go back and forth from m to n; and we make a point of getting it thus repeatedly (by alternating our attention at least) whenever the shock is so slight as to be with difficulty perceived. But in addition to being felt at the brief instant of transition, the difference also feels as if incorporated and taken up into the second term, which feels 'different-from-the-first' even while it lasts. It is obvious that the 'second term' of the mind in this case is not bald n, but a very complex object; and that the sequence is not simply first 'm,' then 'difference,' then 'n'; but first 'm,' then 'difference,' then 'n-different-from-m.' The first and third states of mind are substantive, the second transitive. As our brains and minds are actually made, it is impossible to get certain m's and n's in immediate sequence and to keep them pure. If kept pure, it would mean that they remained uncompared. With us, inevitably, by a mechanism which we as yet fail to understand, the shock of difference is felt between them, and the second object is not n pure, but n-as-different-from-m. The pure idea of n is never in the mind at all when m has gone before.{248}
I mentioned that when m follows n, the impact of their difference is felt. It's experienced repeatedly as we switch back and forth between m and n; we make an effort to notice it this way whenever the shock is so subtle that it’s hard to detect. Besides being felt during the quick transition, the difference seems to be integrated and absorbed into the second term, which feels 'different-from-the-first' even as it persists. It’s clear that the 'second term' in this case isn’t just a simple n, but a very complex concept; and the sequence is not just first 'm', then 'difference', then 'n'; but first 'm', then 'difference', then 'n-different-from-m'. The first and third mental states are substantial, while the second is transitive. Given how our brains and minds work, it's impossible to directly place certain m's and n's in immediate succession and keep them pure. If they were kept pure, it would imply they remained uncompared. In our case, due to a process we don’t fully grasp yet, the shock of difference is noticed between them, and the second object is not n pure, but n-as-different-from-m. The pure concept of n is never in the mind at all once m has come before.{248}
Differences inferred.—With such direct perceptions of difference as this, we must not confound those entirely unlike cases in which we infer that two things must differ because we know enough about each of them taken by itself to warrant our classing them under distinct heads. It often happens, when the interval is long between two experiences, that our judgments are guided, not so much by a positive image or copy of the earlier one, as by our recollection of certain facts about it. Thus I know that the sunshine to-day is less bright than on a certain day last week, because I then said it was quite dazzling, a remark I should not now care to make. Or I know myself to feel livelier now than I did last summer, because I can now psychologize, and then I could not. We are constantly comparing feelings with whose quality our imagination has no sort of acquaintance at the time—pleasures, or pains, for example. It is notoriously hard to conjure up in imagination a lively image of either of these classes of feeling. The associationists may prate of an idea of pleasure being a pleasant idea, of an idea of pain being a painful one, but the unsophisticated sense of mankind is against them, agreeing with Homer that the memory of griefs when past may be a joy, and with Dante that there is no greater sorrow than, in misery, to recollect one's happier time.
Differences inferred.—With such direct perceptions of difference as this, we must not confuse those cases that are completely different where we infer that two things must differ because we know enough about each of them taken individually to justify categorizing them separately. It often happens, when there's a long gap between two experiences, that our judgments are influenced, not so much by a clear image of the earlier one, but by our memory of certain facts about it. For example, I know that the sunshine today is less bright than it was on a certain day last week because I mentioned that it was quite dazzling, a comment I wouldn’t make now. Or I recognize that I feel more energetic now than I did last summer because I can now think through my feelings in a way I couldn’t then. We’re constantly comparing feelings with qualities that our imagination is not familiar with at the moment—like pleasures or pains, for instance. It’s notoriously difficult to vividly imagine either of these kinds of feelings. The associationists might claim that the idea of pleasure is a pleasant idea, and the idea of pain is a painful one, but common sense disagrees, aligning with Homer that memories of past grief can bring joy, and with Dante that there is no greater sorrow than remembering happier times while in misery.
The 'Singling out' of Elements in a Compound.—It is safe to lay it down as a fundamental principle that any total impression made on the mind must be unanalyzable so long as its elements have never been experienced apart or in other combinations elsewhere. The components of an absolutely changeless group of not-elsewhere-occurring attributes could never be discriminated. If all cold things were wet, and all wet things cold; if all hard things pricked our skin, and no other things did so: is it likely that we should discriminate between coldness and wetness, and hardness and pungency, respectively? If all liquids were transparent and no non-liquid were{249} transparent, it would be long before we had separate names for liquidity and transparency. If heat were a function of position above the earth's surface, so that the higher a thing was the hotter it became, one word would serve for hot and high. We have, in fact, a number of sensations whose concomitants are invariably the same, and we find it, accordingly, impossible to analyze them out from the totals in which they are found. The contraction of the diaphragm and the expansion of the lungs, the shortening of certain muscles and the rotation of certain joints, are examples. We learn that the causes of such groups of feelings are multiple, and therefore we frame theories about the composition of the feelings themselves, by 'fusion,' 'integration,' 'synthesis,' or what not. But by direct introspection no analysis of the feelings is ever made. A conspicuous case will come to view when we treat of the emotions. Every emotion has its 'expression,' of quick breathing, palpitating heart, flushed face, or the like. The expression gives rise to bodily feelings; and the emotion is thus necessarily and invariably accompanied by these bodily feelings. The consequence is that it is impossible to apprehend it as a spiritual state by itself, or to analyze it away from the lower feelings in question. It is in fact impossible to prove that it exists as a distinct psychic fact. The present writer strongly doubts that it does so exist.
Identifying Elements in a Compound.—It is safe to establish a basic principle that any overall impression made on the mind is unanalyzable as long as its elements have never been experienced separately or in different combinations before. The parts of a completely unchanged group of attributes that don’t occur elsewhere could never be distinguished. If all cold things were also wet, and all wet things were cold; if all hard things pricked our skin, and no other things did: would we likely differentiate between coldness and wetness, or hardness and sharpness, respectively? If all liquids were transparent and no non-liquids were{249} transparent, it would take a long time before we had separate names for liquidity and transparency. If heat depended on height above the earth’s surface, making things hotter the higher they were, one word would cover hot and high. In fact, there are several sensations whose accompanying feelings are always the same, making it impossible to analyze them separately from the total experiences in which they occur. Examples include the contraction of the diaphragm and the expansion of the lungs, the shortening of certain muscles, and the rotation of certain joints. We learn that the causes of such groups of feelings are numerous, leading us to develop theories about the makeup of the feelings themselves, through 'fusion,' 'integration,' 'synthesis,' or other terms. However, through direct introspection, no analysis of the feelings is actually made. A clear case arises when we look at emotions. Every emotion has its 'expression,' like quick breathing, a racing heart, or a flushed face. This expression results in physical sensations, meaning the emotion is always and inevitably linked to these bodily feelings. The result is that it’s impossible to understand it as a purely spiritual state or to analyze it apart from the associated physical sensations. In fact, it’s impossible to prove that it exists as a separate psychological fact. The author strongly doubts that it does exist in this way.
In general, then, if an object affects us simultaneously in a number of ways, abcd, we get a peculiar integral impression, which thereafter characterizes to our mind the individuality of that object, and becomes the sign of its presence; and which is only resolved into a, b, c, and d, respectively, by the aid of farther experiences. These we now may turn to consider.
In general, if an object impacts us in several ways at once, abcd, we get a unique overall impression that defines its individuality in our minds and indicates its presence. This impression can only be broken down into a, b, c, and d through further experiences. Now, we can look at those experiences.
If any single quality or constituent, a, of such an object have previously been known by us isolatedly, or have in any other manner already become an object of separate acquaintance on our part, so that we have an image of it,{250} distinct or vague, in our mind, disconnected with bcd, then that constituent a may be analyzed out from the total impression. Analysis of a thing means separate attention to each of its parts. In Chapter XIII we saw that one condition of attending to a thing was the formation from within of a separate image of that thing, which should, as it were, go out to meet the impression received. Attention being the condition of analysis, and separate imagination being the condition of attention, it follows also that separate imagination is the condition of analysis. Only such elements as we are acquainted with, and can imagine separately, can be discriminated within a total sense-impression. The image seems to welcome its own mate from out of the compound, and to separate it from the other constituents; and thus the compound becomes broken for our consciousness into parts.
If we've previously known a specific quality or element, a, of an object on its own, or if we've encountered it in any other way that has allowed us to have some image of it,{250} whether clear or vague, in our minds, separated from bcd, then we can break down that element a from the overall impression. Analyzing something means paying individual attention to each of its parts. In Chapter XIII, we learned that one requirement for focusing on something was the internal creation of a distinct image of that thing, which would, so to speak, reach out to connect with the impression we receive. Since attention is necessary for analysis, and separate imagination is required for attention, it follows that separate imagination is also necessary for analysis. Only elements we know and can imagine separately can be distinguished within an overall sensory impression. The image seems to seek out its counterpart from the mixture, separating it from the other components; thus, our consciousness breaks the compound down into parts.
All the facts cited in Chapter XIII to prove that attention involves inward reproduction prove that discrimination involves it as well. In looking for any object in a room, for a book in a library, for example, we detect it the more readily if, in addition to merely knowing its name, etc., we carry in our mind a distinct image of its appearance. The assafœdita in 'Worcestershire sauce' is not obvious to anyone who has not tasted assafœtida per se. In a 'cold' color an artist would never be able to analyze out the pervasive presence of blue, unless he had previously made acquaintance with the color blue by itself. All the colors we actually experience are mixtures. Even the purest primaries always come to us with some white. Absolutely pure red or green or violet is never experienced, and so can never be discerned in the so-called primaries with which we have to deal: the latter consequently pass for pure.—The reader will remember how an overtone can only be attended to in the midst of its consorts in the voice of a musical instrument, by sounding it previously alone. The imagination, being then full of it, hears the like of it in the compound tone.
All the facts mentioned in Chapter XIII to show that attention involves inward reproduction also demonstrate that discrimination does too. When searching for something in a room, like a book in a library, we find it more easily if, beyond just knowing its name, we have a clear mental image of what it looks like. The assafœtida in 'Worcestershire sauce' is not recognizable to anyone who hasn't tasted assafœtida by itself. An artist can't really analyze the strong presence of blue in a 'cold' color unless they have previously experienced the color blue on its own. All the colors we actually perceive are mixtures. Even the purest primary colors always come to us with some white. We never experience absolutely pure red, green, or violet, so we can't identify them in the so-called primaries we work with: these are accepted as pure. The reader will recall that an overtone can only be recognized among its companions in the sound of a musical instrument if it has been heard alone before. Once the imagination is filled with it, it can recognize something similar in the combined sound.
Non-isolable elements may be discriminated, provided{251} their concomitants change. Very few elements of reality are experienced by us in absolute isolation. The most that usually happens to a constituent a of a compound phenomenon abcd is that its strength relatively to bcd varies from a maximum to a minimum; or that it appears linked with other qualities, in other compounds, as aefg or ahik. Either of these vicissitudes in the mode of our experiencing a may, under favorable circumstances, lead us to feel the difference between it and its concomitants, and to single it out—not absolutely, it is true, but approximately—and so to analyze the compound of which it is a part. The act of singling out is then called abstraction, and the element disengaged is an abstract.
Non-isolable elements can be differentiated, as long as{251} their accompanying factors change. Very few aspects of reality are experienced by us in complete isolation. What usually happens to a component a of a compound phenomenon abcd is that its strength in relation to bcd varies from a maximum to a minimum; or that it seems connected with other qualities, in other combinations, like aefg or ahik. Any of these changes in how we experience a may, under favorable conditions, allow us to perceive the difference between it and its accompanying factors, and to identify it—not absolutely, it’s true, but approximately—and thus to analyze the compound of which it is a part. The act of identifying is then called abstraction, and the isolated element is an abstract.
Fluctuation in a quality's intensity is a less efficient aid to our abstracting of it than variety in the combinations in which it appears. What is associated now with one thing and now with another tends to become dissociated from either, and to grow into an object of abstract contemplation by the mind. One might call this the law of dissociation by varying concomitants. The practical result of this law is that a mind which has once dissociated and abstracted a character by its means can analyze it out of a total whenever it meets with it again.
Fluctuation in the intensity of a quality is a less effective way for us to abstract it than the variety of combinations in which it shows up. What is linked to one thing at one moment and to another at another tends to become detached from both, evolving into an object of abstract thought for the mind. This could be called the law of dissociation through varying associations. The practical outcome of this law is that a mind that has once separated and abstracted a quality through this means can dissect it from a whole whenever it encounters it again.
Dr. Martineau gives a good example of the law: "When a red ivory ball, seen for the first time, has been withdrawn, it will leave a mental representation of itself, in which all that it simultaneously gave us will indistinguishably coexist. Let a white ball succeed to it; now, and not before, will an attribute detach itself, and the color, by force of contrast, be shaken out into the foreground. Let the white ball be replaced by an egg, and this new difference will bring the form into notice from its previous slumber, and thus that which began by being simply an object cut out from the surrounding scene becomes for us first a red object, then a red round object, and so on."
Dr. Martineau provides a clear example of the principle: "When we first see a red ivory ball and it’s taken away, it leaves a mental image of itself, where everything it showed us remains together. If a white ball comes next, only then will an attribute stand out, and the color, through contrast, will emerge prominently. If the white ball is swapped for an egg, this new difference will make the form noticeable after being ignored, and what started as just an object in the background becomes, for us, first a red object, then a red round object, and so on."
Practice improves Discrimination.—Any personal or practical interest in the results to be obtained by distinguishing, makes one's wits amazingly sharp to detect differences. And long training and practice in distinguishing has the same effect as personal interest. Both of these agencies give to small amounts of objective difference the same effectiveness upon the mind that, under other circumstances, only large ones would have.
Practice improves Discrimination.—Any personal or practical interest in the results gained by distinguishing things makes your mind incredibly sharp at noticing differences. And extensive training and practice in distinguishing has a similar impact as personal interest. Both of these factors make small amounts of objective difference have the same effect on the mind that, in other circumstances, only larger differences would have.
That 'practice makes perfect' is notorious in the field of motor accomplishments. But motor accomplishments depend in part on sensory discrimination. Billiard-playing, rifle-shooting, tight-rope-dancing demand the most delicate appreciation of minute disparities of sensation, as well as the power to make accurately graduated muscular response thereto. In the purely sensorial field we have the well-known virtuosity displayed by the professional buyers and testers of various kinds of goods. One man will distinguish by taste between the upper and the lower half of a bottle of old Madeira. Another will recognize, by feeling the flour in a barrel, whether the wheat was grown in Iowa or Tennessee. The blind deaf-mute, Laura Bridgman, so improved her touch as to recognize, after a year's interval, the hand of a person who once had shaken hers; and her sister in misfortune, Julia Brace, is said to have been employed in the Hartford Asylum to sort the linen of its multitudinous inmates, after it came from the wash, by her wonderfully educated sense of smell.
The saying "practice makes perfect" is well-known in the area of physical skills. However, these skills also rely on sensory discrimination. Playing billiards, shooting rifles, and tightrope walking require a keen awareness of tiny differences in sensation, as well as the ability to respond with precise muscle control. In the realm of pure sensory ability, we see impressive talent in professional buyers and testers of various products. One person can identify by taste the difference between the top and bottom halves of a bottle of old Madeira. Another can tell whether flour in a barrel comes from Iowa or Tennessee just by feeling it. The blind deaf-mute, Laura Bridgman, developed her sense of touch so well that she could recognize a person's hand after a year had passed since their last handshake. Similarly, her counterpart, Julia Brace, is said to have worked at the Hartford Asylum sorting through the laundry of its many residents, thanks to her exceptionally refined sense of smell.
The fact is so familiar that few, if any, psychologists have even recognized it as needing explanation. They have seemed to think that practice must, in the nature of things, improve the delicacy of discernment, and have let the matter rest. At most they have said, "Attention accounts for it; we attend more to habitual things, and what we attend to we perceive more minutely." This answer, though true, is too general; but we can say nothing more about the matter here.{253}
The fact is so common that very few, if any, psychologists have seen it as something needing an explanation. They seem to believe that practice naturally sharpens our ability to notice details and have left it at that. At most, they've suggested, "Attention explains it; we pay more attention to familiar things, and what we focus on, we notice more closely." While this explanation is true, it's too broad; we can't elaborate further on this here.{253}
CHAPTER XVI.
ASSOCIATION.
The Order of our Ideas.—After discrimination, association! It is obvious that all advance in knowledge must consist of both operations; for in the course of our education, objects at first appearing as wholes are analyzed into parts, and objects appearing separately are brought together and appear as new compound wholes to the mind. Analysis and synthesis are thus the incessantly alternating mental activities, a stroke of the one preparing the way for a stroke of the other, much as, in walking, a man's two legs are alternately brought into use, both being indispensable for any orderly advance.
The Order of our Ideas.—After distinguishing, we connect! It's clear that any progress in knowledge relies on both processes; during our education, things that initially seem like complete units are broken down into their components, while separate items are combined to form new, complex ideas in our minds. Analysis and synthesis are constantly shifting mental activities, with one process paving the way for the other, similar to how a person alternates using their two legs when walking, both being essential for any organized movement forward.
The manner in which trains of imagery and consideration follow each other through our thinking, the restless flight of one idea before the next, the transitions our minds make between things wide as the poles asunder, transitions which at first sight startle us by their abruptness, but which, when scrutinized closely, often reveal intermediating links of perfect naturalness and propriety—all this magical, imponderable streaming has from time immemorial excited the admiration of all whose attention happened to be caught by its omnipresent mystery. And it has furthermore challenged the race of philosophers to banish something of the mystery by formulating the process in simpler terms. The problem which the philosophers have set themselves is that of ascertaining, between the thoughts which thus appear to sprout one out of the other, principles of connection whereby their peculiar succession or coexistence may be explained.
The way images and thoughts flow through our minds, the constant movement of one idea jumping to the next, the leaps our minds make between concepts that seem worlds apart—these shifts can initially surprise us with their suddenness, but when we take a closer look, they often show clear links that make perfect sense. This fascinating, intangible stream has captivated anyone who has paused to appreciate its ever-present mystery for ages. It has also prompted philosophers to try to break down this mystery by explaining the process in simpler terms. The challenge philosophers have taken on is to find the principles of connection between these thoughts that seem to emerge from one another, explaining their unique order or coexistence.
But immediately an ambiguity arises: which sort of{254} connection is meant? connection thought-of, or connection between thoughts? These are two entirely different things, and only in the case of one of them is there any hope of finding 'principles.' The jungle of connections thought of can never be formulated simply. Every conceivable connection may be thought of—of coexistence, succession, resemblance, contrast, contradiction, cause and effect, means and end, genus and species, part and whole, substance and property, early and late, large and small, landlord and tenant, master and servant,—Heaven knows what, for the list is literally inexhaustible. The only simplification which could possibly be aimed at would be the reduction of the relations to a small number of types, like those which some authors call the 'categories' of the understanding. According as we followed one category or another we should sweep, from any object with our thought, in this way or in that, to others. Were this the sort of connection sought between one moment of our thinking and another, our chapter might end here. For the only summary description of these categories is that they are all thinkable relations, and that the mind proceeds from one object to another by some intelligible path.
But immediately, a question arises: which kind of {254} connection is being referred to? Is it a connection thought of or a connection between thoughts? These are two completely different things, and only in the case of one of them is there any hope of finding 'principles.' The variety of connections thought of can never be simply formulated. Every conceivable connection can be imagined—whether it's coexistence, succession, resemblance, contrast, contradiction, cause and effect, means and ends, genus and species, part and whole, substance and property, early and late, large and small, landlord and tenant, master and servant—who knows what else, because the list is literally endless. The only simplification that could possibly be aimed at would be to reduce the relations to a small number of types, similar to what some authors refer to as the 'categories' of understanding. Depending on which category we follow, we would link one object of thought to others in a certain way. If this is the type of connection sought between one moment of our thinking and another, then our chapter could conclude here. The only concise description of these categories is that they represent all thinkable relations, and the mind moves from one object to another along some understandable path.
Is it determined by any laws? But as a matter of fact, What determines the particular path? Why do we at a given time and place proceed to think of b if we have just thought of a, and at another time and place why do we think, not of b, but of c? Why do we spend years straining after a certain scientific or practical problem, but all in vain—our thought unable to evoke the solution we desire? And why, some day, walking in the street with our attention miles away from that quest, does the answer saunter into our minds as carelessly as if it had never been called for—suggested, possibly, by the flowers on the bonnet of the lady in front of us, or possibly by nothing that we can discover?
Is it determined by any laws? But really, what determines the specific path? Why do we, at a certain time and place, think of b right after thinking of a, and at another time and place, think of c instead of b? Why do we spend years struggling with a particular scientific or practical problem, yet still can't find the solution we want? And why, one day, while walking down the street with our mind miles away from that problem, does the answer casually pop into our heads as if it had never been needed—perhaps suggested by the flowers on the hat of the woman in front of us, or maybe by something we can't even identify?
The truth must be admitted that thought works under strange conditions. Pure 'reason' is only one out of a{255} thousand possibilities in the thinking of each of us. Who can count all the silly fancies, the grotesque suppositions, the utterly irrelevant reflections he makes in the course of a day? Who can swear that his prejudices and irrational opinions constitute a less bulky part of his mental furniture than his clarified beliefs? And yet, the mode of genesis of the worthy and the worthless in our thinking seems the same.
The truth is that our thoughts operate under strange conditions. Pure 'reason' is just one out of a{255} thousand possibilities in each of our minds. Who can keep track of all the silly ideas, bizarre assumptions, and completely irrelevant thoughts that pop up throughout the day? Who can confidently say that their biases and unreasonable beliefs take up less space in their minds than their clear convictions? Yet, the way both valuable and worthless thoughts originate seems to be the same.
The laws are cerebral laws. There seem to be mechanical conditions on which thought depends, and which, to say the least, determine the order in which, the objects for her comparisons and selections are presented. It is a suggestive fact that Locke, and many more recent Continental psychologists, have found themselves obliged to invoke a mechanical process to account for the aberrations of thought, the obstructive prepossessions, the frustrations of reason. This they found in the law of habit, or what we now call association by contiguity. But it never occurred to these writers that a process which could go the length of actually producing some ideas and sequences in the mind might safely be trusted to produce others too; and that those habitual associations which further thought may also come from the same mechanical source as those which hinder it. Hartley accordingly suggested habit as a sufficient explanation of the sequence of our thoughts, and in so doing planted himself squarely upon the properly causal aspect of the problem, and sought to treat both rational and irrational associations from a single point of view. How does a man come, after having the thought of A, to have the thought of B the next moment? or how does he come to think A and B always together? These were the phenomena which Hartley undertook to explain by cerebral physiology. I believe that he was, in essential respects, on the right track, and I propose simply to revise his conclusions by the aid of distinctions which he did not make.
The laws are brain-based laws. There appear to be mechanical conditions that thought relies on, which, to put it mildly, determine the sequence in which the objects for her comparisons and choices are presented. It’s interesting that Locke, along with many other modern Continental psychologists, have felt the need to mention a mechanical process to explain the distortions of thought, the obstructive biases, and the setbacks of reason. They identified this in the law of habit, or what we now refer to as association by contiguity. However, it never crossed the minds of these authors that a process capable of generating certain ideas and sequences in the mind could also reliably produce others; and that the habitual associations that enhance thought might originate from the same mechanical source as those that obstruct it. Hartley therefore proposed habit as a sufficient explanation for the sequence of our thoughts, and by doing so focused on the properly causal dimension of the issue, aiming to analyze both rational and irrational associations from a single perspective. How does a person go from thinking of A to thinking of B the next moment? Or how does a person come to think of A and B together consistently? These were the phenomena Hartley sought to explain through brain physiology. I believe that, in many key ways, he was on the right path, and I intend to refine his conclusions using distinctions he didn’t make.
Objects are associated, not ideas. We shall avoid confusion{256} if we consistently speak as if association, so far as the word stands for an effect, were between THINGS THOUGHT OF—as if it were THINGS, not ideas, which are associated in the mind. We shall talk of the association of objects, not of the association of ideas. And so far as association stands for a cause, it is between processes in the brain—it is these which, by being associated in certain ways, determine what successive objects shall be thought.
Objects are linked, not ideas. We will avoid confusion{256} if we consistently talk as if association, as the term refers to an effect, is between THINGS THOUGHT OF—as if it were THINGS, not ideas, that are linked in the mind. We will discuss the association of objects, not of the association of ideas. And as far as association refers to a cause, it is between processes in the brain—it is these that, by being linked in certain ways, decide what successive objects will be thought about.
The Elementary Principle.—I shall now try to show that there is no other elementary causal law of association than the law of neural habit. All the materials of our thought are due to the way in which one elementary process of the cerebral hemispheres tends to excite whatever other elementary process it may have excited at any former time. The number of elementary processes at work, however, and the nature of those which at any time are fully effective in rousing the others, determine the character of the total brain-action, and, as a consequence of this, they determine the object thought of at the time. According as this resultant object is one thing or another, we call it a product of association by contiguity or of association by similarity, or contrast, or whatever other sorts we may have recognized as ultimate. Its production, however, is, in each one of these cases, to be explained by a merely quantitative variation in the elementary brain-processes momentarily at work under the law of habit.
The Elementary Principle.—I will now attempt to demonstrate that there is no other elementary causal law of association besides the law of neural habit. All the materials of our thoughts arise from how one elementary process in the brain tends to trigger whatever other elementary process it may have activated in the past. The number of elementary processes involved and the nature of those that are fully active at any moment influence the overall brain activity, which in turn determines the object we focus on at that time. Depending on whether this resulting object is one thing or another, we refer to it as a product of association by contiguity, similarity, contrast, or any other categories we may recognize as fundamental. Its production, however, in each of these cases, can be explained by a simple quantitative change in the elementary brain processes currently operating under the law of habit.
My thesis, stated thus briefly, will soon become more clear; and at the same time certain disturbing factors, which coöperate with the law of neural habit, will come to view.
My thesis, stated briefly like this, will soon become clearer; and at the same time, some disturbing factors that work with the law of neural habit will emerge.
Let us then assume as the basis of all our subsequent reasoning this law: When two elementary brain-processes have been active together or in immediate succession, one of them, on re-occurring, tends to propagate its excitement into the other.
Let’s take this law as the foundation for all our future reasoning: When two basic brain processes have been active at the same time or one after the other, one of them, when it happens again, tends to pass its excitement onto the other.
But, as a matter of fact, every elementary process has unavoidably found itself at different times excited in conjunction{257} with many other processes. Which of these others it shall awaken now becomes a problem. Shall b or c be aroused next by the present a? To answer this, we must make a further postulate, based on the fact of tension in nerve-tissue, and on the fact of summation of excitements, each incomplete or latent in itself, into an open resultant (see p. 128). The process b, rather than c, will awake, if in addition to the vibrating tract a some other tract d is in a state of sub-excitement, and formerly was excited with b alone and not with a. In short, we may say:
But actually, every basic process has inevitably found itself, at different times, triggered alongside{257} many other processes. Which of these others will be triggered next is now the question. Will b or c be activated next by the current a? To figure this out, we need to establish another assumption, based on the idea of tension in nerve tissue and the concept of summation of excitements, each being incomplete or latent on its own, into a clear outcome (see p. 128). The process b, rather than c, will be activated if, in addition to the active path a, some other path d is in a state of sub-excitement, and previously was activated with b alone and not with a. In short, we can say:
The amount of activity at any given point in the brain-cortex is the sum of the tendencies of all other points to discharge into it, such tendencies being proportionate (1) to the number of times the excitement of each other point may have accompanied that of the point in question; (2) to the intensity of such excitements; and (3) to the absence of any rival point functionally disconnected with the first point, into which the discharges might be diverted.
The level of activity at any specific spot in the brain's cortex is determined by the combined influence of all other spots trying to send signals to it. This influence depends on (1) how often the activation of each spot has coincided with that of the spot in question; (2) how strong those activations are; and (3) whether there are any competing spots that aren't functionally linked to the first one, where the signals could be redirected.
Expressing the fundamental law in this most complicated way leads to the greatest ultimate simplification. Let us, for the present, only treat of spontaneous trains of thought and ideation, such as occur in revery or musing. The case of voluntary thinking toward a certain end shall come up later.
Expressing the basic principle in this complicated manner results in the greatest ultimate simplification. For now, let's focus on spontaneous trains of thought and ideas that happen during daydreaming or reflection. We'll discuss the case of intentional thinking aimed at a specific goal later.
Spontaneous Trains of Thought.—Take, to fix our ideas, the two verses from 'Locksley Hall':
Spontaneous Trains of Thought.—To clarify our ideas, let’s consider these two lines from 'Locksley Hall':
and—
and—
Why is it that when we recite from memory one of these lines, and get as far as the ages, that portion of the other line which follows and, so to speak, sprouts out of the ages does not also sprout out of our memory and confuse the sense of our words? Simply because the word that follows the ages has its brain-process awakened not simply by{258} the brain-process of the ages alone, but by it plus the brain-processes of all the words preceding the ages. The word ages at its moment of strongest activity would, per se, indifferently discharge into either 'in' or 'one.' So would the previous words (whose tension is momentarily much less strong than that of ages) each of them indifferently discharge into either of a large number of other words with which they have been at different times combined. But when the processes of 'I, the heir of all the ages,' simultaneously vibrate in the brain, the last one of them in a maximal, the others in a fading, phase of excitement, then the strongest line of discharge will be that which they all alike tend to take. 'In' and not 'one' or any other word will be the next to awaken, for its brain-process has previously vibrated in unison not only with that of ages, but with that of all those other words whose activity is dying away. It is a good case of the effectiveness over thought of what we called on p. 168 a 'fringe.'
Why is it that when we memorize one of these lines and get as far as the ages, that part of the other line that follows and, in a way, branches out from the ages doesn’t also come to mind and confuse the meaning of our words? It’s simply because the word that comes after the ages is activated not just by the thought process of the ages alone, but by it plus the thought processes of all the words that came before the ages. The word ages, at its peak of activity, could just as easily lead to either 'in' or 'one.' The earlier words (which have a much weaker tension than ages) could also easily connect to a whole bunch of other words they’ve been paired with at different times. But when the thoughts of 'I, the heir of all the ages' resonate together in the brain, the last one at full strength, and the others in a fading state of excitement, then the strongest connection will be to what they all tend to reach for. 'In' and not 'one' or any other word will be the next to come to mind, because its thought process has previously resonated in harmony not just with ages, but with all those other words whose activity is tapering off. This nicely illustrates the influence of what we called on p. 168 a 'fringe.'
But if some one of these preceding words—'heir,' for example—had an intensely strong association with some brain-tracts entirely disjoined in experience from the poem of 'Locksley Hall'—if the reciter, for instance, were tremulously awaiting the opening of a will which might make him a millionaire—it is probable that the path of discharge through the words of the poem would be suddenly interrupted at the word 'heir.' His emotional interest in that word would be such that its own special associations would prevail over the combined ones of the other words. He would, as we say, be abruptly reminded of his personal situation, and the poem would lapse altogether from his thoughts.
But if any of the earlier words—like 'heir,' for example—had a super strong connection with some parts of the brain completely unrelated to the poem 'Locksley Hall'—if the person reciting it, for instance, was nervously waiting for the reading of a will that could make him a millionaire—it’s likely that his focus on the poem would be suddenly disrupted at the word 'heir.' His emotional connection to that word would be so strong that its specific associations would take over the combined meanings of the other words. He would, as we put it, be suddenly reminded of his personal situation, and the poem would completely fade from his mind.
The writer of these pages has every year to learn the names of a large number of students who sit in alphabetical order in a lecture-room. He finally learns to call them by name, as they sit in their accustomed places. On meeting one in the street, however, early in the year, the face hardly ever recalls the name, but it may recall the place of{259} its owner in the lecture-room, his neighbors' faces, and consequently his general alphabetical position: and then, usually as the common associate of all these combined data, the student's name surges up in his mind.
The writer of these pages has to learn the names of many students each year who sit in alphabetical order in a lecture room. He eventually gets to know them by name as they occupy their usual spots. However, when he runs into one of them on the street, especially early on in the year, he rarely remembers their name right away. Instead, he might recall where they sat in the lecture room, the faces of their neighbors, and their general alphabetical position. Usually, as these combined memories come together, the student’s name pops into his mind.
A father wishes to show to some guests the progress of his rather dull child in kindergarten-instruction. Holding the knife upright on the table, he says, "What do you call that, my boy?" "I calls it a knife, I does," is the sturdy reply, from which the child cannot be induced to swerve by any alteration in the form of question, until the father, recollecting that in the kindergarten a pencil was used and not a knife, draws a long one from his pocket, holds it in the same way, and then gets the wished-for answer, "I calls it vertical." All the concomitants of the kindergarten experience had to recombine their effect before the word 'vertical' could be reawakened.
A father wants to show his guests how much his rather uninspired child has learned in kindergarten. Holding a knife upright on the table, he asks, "What do you call this, my boy?" The child confidently replies, "I call it a knife," and he won't change his answer no matter how the question is phrased. Finally, remembering that a pencil is used in kindergarten instead of a knife, the father pulls a long pencil from his pocket, holds it the same way, and finally gets the answer he wanted: "I call it vertical." Everything related to the kindergarten experience had to come together again for the word 'vertical' to be remembered.
Total Recall.—The ideal working of the law of compound association, as Prof. Bain calls it, were it unmodified by any extraneous influence, would be such as to keep the mind in a perpetual treadmill of concrete reminiscences from which no detail could be omitted. Suppose, for example, we begin by thinking of a certain dinner-party. The only thing which all the components of the dinner-party could combine to recall would be the first concrete occurrence which ensued upon it. All the details of this occurrence could in turn only combine to awaken the next following occurrence, and so on. If a, b, c, d, e, for instance, be the elementary nerve-tracts excited by the last act of the dinner-party, call this act A, and l, m, n, o, p be those of walking home through the frosty night, which we may call B, then the thought of A must awaken that of B, because a, b, c, d, e will each and all discharge into l through the paths by which their original discharge took place. Similarly they will discharge into m, n, o, and p; and these latter tracts will also each reinforce the other's action because, in the experience B, they have already vibrated in unison. The lines in Fig. 57 symbolize the{260} summation of discharges into each of the components of B, and the consequent strength of the combination of influences by which B in its totality is awakened.
Total Recall.—The ideal functioning of the law of compound association, as Professor Bain describes it, if unaffected by any outside influence, would keep the mind on a never-ending cycle of specific memories where no detail could be left out. For instance, if we start by thinking about a particular dinner party, the only thing that all elements of the dinner party could collectively recall would be the first specific event that followed it. The details of this event would then only lead to the next one, and so on. If a, b, c, d, e are the basic nerve pathways activated by the last action of the dinner party, which we’ll call A, and l, m, n, o, p are related to walking home through the cold night, which we can call B, then thinking of A must bring up thoughts of B, because a, b, c, d, e will all trigger l through the same pathways that initially activated them. Similarly, they'll trigger m, n, o, and p; and these pathways will also strengthen each other's response because, during the experience B, they already resonated together. The lines in Fig. 57 represent the{260} combined discharges into each component of B, along with the resulting strength of the overall influences that awaken B in its entirety.
Hamilton first used the word 'redintegration' to designate all association. Such processes as we have just described might in an emphatic sense be termed redintegrations, for they would necessarily lead, if unobstructed, to the reinstatement in thought of the entire content of large trains of past experience. From this complete redintegration there could be no escape save through the irruption of some new and strong present impression of the senses, or through the excessive tendency of some one of the elementary brain-tracts to discharge independently into an aberrant quarter of the brain. Such was the tendency of the word 'heir' in the verse from 'Locksley Hall,' which was our first example. How such tendencies are constituted we shall have soon to inquire with some care. Unless they are present, the panorama of the past, once opened, must unroll itself with fatal literality to the end, unless some outward sound, sight, or touch divert the current of thought.{261}
Hamilton first used the term 'redintegration' to describe all associations. The processes we've just discussed could definitely be labeled redintegrations, as they would necessarily lead, if undisturbed, to the restoration in our thoughts of the entire content of extensive past experiences. There would be no way to avoid this complete redintegration, except through the sudden intrusion of some new and strong impression from the senses, or through the overwhelming tendency of one of the basic brain pathways to discharge in a different area of the brain. This was the case with the word 'heir' in the passage from 'Locksley Hall,' which was our first example. We will soon need to carefully explore how such tendencies are formed. If they aren't present, the panorama of the past, once it begins to unfold, will continue to do so with a relentless accuracy until the end, unless some external sound, sight, or touch interrupts the flow of thought.{261}
Let us call this process impartial redintegration, or, still better, total recall. Whether it ever occurs in an absolutely complete form is doubtful. We all immediately recognize, however, that in some minds there is a much greater tendency than in others for the flow of thought to take this form. Those insufferably garrulous old women, those dry and fanciless beings who spare you no detail, however petty, of the facts they are recounting, and upon the thread of whose narrative all the irrelevant items cluster as pertinaciously as the essential ones, the slaves of literal fact, the stumblers over the smallest abrupt step in thought, are figures known to all of us. Comic literature has made her profit out of them. Juliet's nurse is a classical example. George Eliot's village characters and some of Dickens's minor personages supply excellent instances.
Let’s call this process impartial redintegration, or, even better, total recall. Whether it ever happens in an absolutely complete form is questionable. However, we all recognize that some minds are much more inclined than others for the flow of thought to take this shape. Those annoyingly talkative old women, those dull and unimaginative people who spare no detail, no matter how trivial, of the facts they are sharing, and on whose narrative irrelevant items cluster just as stubbornly as the important ones, the slaves to literal facts, the ones who trip over the smallest abrupt shifts in thought, are figures familiar to all of us. Comic literature has benefitted from them. Juliet's nurse is a classic example. George Eliot's village characters and some of Dickens's minor characters provide excellent instances.
Perhaps as successful a rendering as any of this mental type is the character of Miss Bates in Miss Austen's 'Emma.' Hear how she redintegrates:
Perhaps one of the most successful portrayals of this type of character is Miss Bates in Austen’s 'Emma.' Listen to how she comes back together:
"'But where could you hear it?' cried Miss Bates. 'Where could you possibly hear it, Mr. Knightley? For it is not five minutes since I received Mrs. Cole's note—no, it cannot be more than five—or at least ten—for I had got my bonnet and spencer on, just ready to come out—I was only gone down to speak to Patty again about the pork—Jane was standing in the passage—were not you, Jane?—for my mother was so afraid that we had not any salting-pan large enough. So I said I would go down and see, and Jane said: "Shall I go down instead? for I think you have a little cold, and Patty has been washing the kitchen." "Oh, my dear," said I—well, and just then came the note. A Miss Hawkins—that's all I know—a Miss Hawkins, of Bath. But, Mr. Knightley, how could you possibly have heard it? for the very moment Mr. Cole told Mrs. Cole of it, she sat down and wrote to me. A Miss Hawkins—'"
"I'm sorry, there doesn't appear to be text provided. Please share the text you'd like me to modernize.But where could you have heard it?' exclaimed Miss Bates. 'Where could you possibly have heard it, Mr. Knightley? It’s been no more than five minutes since I got Mrs. Cole's note—no, it can't be more than five—or maybe ten—because I had just put on my bonnet and spencer, ready to head out—I had only gone downstairs to talk to Patty again about the pork—Jane was standing in the hallway—weren’t you, Jane?—because my mother was so worried that we didn't have a salting-pan big enough. So I said I would check, and Jane said, "Should I go instead? I think you have a bit of a cold, and Patty has been cleaning the kitchen." "Oh, my dear," I said—well, and just then I got the note. A Miss Hawkins—that's all I know—a Miss Hawkins, from Bath. But, Mr. Knightley, how could you possibly have heard it? The very moment Mr. Cole told Mrs. Cole about it, she sat down and wrote to me. A Miss Hawkins—'"
Partial Recall.—This case helps us to understand why it is that the ordinary spontaneous flow of our ideas does not{262} follow the law of total recall. In no revival of a past experience are all the items of our thought equally operative in determining what the next thought shall be. Always some ingredient is prepotent over the rest. Its special suggestions or associations in this case will often be different from those which it has in common with the whole group of items; and its tendency to awaken these outlying associates will deflect the path of our revery. Just as in the original sensible experience our attention focalized itself upon a few of the impressions of the scene before us, so here in the reproduction of those impressions an equal partiality is shown, and some items are emphasized above the rest. What these items shall be is, in most cases of spontaneous revery, hard to determine beforehand. In subjective terms we say that the prepotent items are those which appeal most to our INTEREST.
Partial Recall.—This case helps us understand why the normal spontaneous flow of our ideas doesn’t{262} follow the law of total recall. In no revival of a past experience are all the elements of our thoughts equally influential in deciding what the next thought will be. Some aspects always dominate the others. The specific suggestions or associations in this case will often differ from those shared with the entire group of items; and its ability to bring about these peripheral connections will change the direction of our daydreaming. Just like in the original sensory experience where our attention focused on a few of the impressions in front of us, in the recreation of those impressions, a similar partiality occurs, with certain items standing out more than others. It's usually challenging to predict what these standout items will be in cases of spontaneous daydreaming. In subjective terms, we say that the dominant items are those that resonate most with our INTEREST.
Expressed in brain-terms, the law of interest will be: some one brain-process is always prepotent above its concomitants in arousing action elsewhere.
Expressed in brain terms, the law of interest will be: some brain process is always more dominant than its accompanying processes in triggering action elsewhere.
"Two processes," says Mr. Hodgson, "are constantly going on in redintegration. The one a process of corrosion, melting, decay; the other a process of renewing, arising, becoming.... No object of representation remains long before consciousness in the same state, but fades, decays, and becomes indistinct. Those parts of the object, however, which possess an interest resist this tendency to gradual decay of the whole object.... This inequality in the object—some parts, the uninteresting, submitting to decay; others, the interesting parts, resisting it—when it has continued for a certain time, ends in becoming a new object."
"Two processes," Mr. Hodgson says, "are always happening in redintegration. One is a process of corrosion, melting, and decay; the other is a process of renewal, emergence, and transformation.... No representation stays in the same state for long in our consciousness; it fades, deteriorates, and becomes unclear. However, the parts of the object that are interesting resist this tendency to gradually fade away.... This disparity in the object—some parts, the uninteresting ones, succumbing to decay; others, the interesting parts, resisting it—eventually leads to the creation of a new object."
Only where the interest is diffused equally over all the parts is this law departed from. It will be least obeyed by those minds which have the smallest variety and intensity of interests—those who, by the general flatness and poverty of their æsthetic nature, are kept for ever rotating among the literal sequences of their local and personal history.{263}
Only in situations where the interest is spread out evenly across all areas is this law ignored. It is least followed by those individuals who have the least variety and engagement with their interests—those who, due to the overall dullness and lack of richness in their aesthetic nature, are constantly stuck cycling through the straightforward events of their local and personal history.{263}
Most of us, however, are better organized than this, and our musings pursue an erratic course, swerving continually into some new direction traced by the shifting play of interest as it ever falls on some partial item in each complex representation that is evoked. Thus it so often comes about that we find ourselves thinking at two nearly adjacent moments of things separated by the whole diameter of space and time. Not till we carefully recall each step of our cogitation do we see how naturally we came by Hodgson's law to pass from one to the other. Thus, for instance, after looking at my clock just now (1879), I found myself thinking of a recent resolution in the Senate about our legal-tender notes. The clock called up the image of the man who had repaired its gong. He suggested the jeweller's shop where I had last seen him; that shop, some shirt-studs which I had bought there; they, the value of gold and its recent decline; the latter, the equal value of greenbacks, and this, naturally, the question of how long they were to last, and of the Bayard proposition. Each of these images offered various points of interest. Those which formed the turning-points of my thought are easily assigned. The gong was momentarily the most interesting part of the clock, because, from having begun with a beautiful tone, it had become discordant and aroused disappointment. But for this the clock might have suggested the friend who gave it to me, or any one of a thousand circumstances connected with clocks. The jeweller's shop suggested the studs, because they alone of all its contents were tinged with the egoistic interest of possession. This interest in the studs, their value, made me single out the material as its chief source, etc., to the end. Every reader who will arrest himself at any moment and say, "How came I to be thinking of just this?" will be sure to trace a train of representations linked together by lines of contiguity and points of interest inextricably combined. This is the ordinary process of the association of ideas as it spontaneously goes on in average minds. We may call it{264} ordinary, or mixed, association, or, if we like better, partial recall.
Most of us, though, are better organized than this, and our thoughts follow a crazy path, constantly shifting into new directions based on what captures our interest in each complex idea that comes to mind. It often happens that we find ourselves thinking about things that are far apart in space and time within just a few moments. Only when we carefully trace each step of our thinking do we realize how naturally we moved from one thought to the other. For example, after glancing at my clock just now (1879), I started thinking about a recent Senate resolution regarding our legal-tender notes. The clock reminded me of the person who fixed its gong. He brought to mind the jeweler's shop where I last saw him; that shop reminded me of some shirt studs I bought there; those led me to think about the value of gold and its recent drop; that made me consider the equal value of greenbacks, and naturally, I began questioning how long they would last, along with the Bayard proposition. Each of these thoughts offered different points of interest. The key turning points in my thinking are clear. The gong was the most interesting part of the clock at that moment because it had started with a beautiful tone but had become discordant and disappointing. Otherwise, the clock might have reminded me of the friend who gave it to me or any number of associations with clocks. The jeweler's shop suggested the studs, because they were the only items there that held a personal interest for me. My interest in the studs and their value made me focus on the material as its main source, and so on. Any reader who pauses at any moment and asks, "How did I end up thinking about this?" can trace a chain of associations connected by moments of closeness and intertwined points of interest. This is the usual way that ideas get associated as it naturally happens in typical minds. We may call it{264} ordinary, or mixed, association, or, if we prefer, partial recall.
Which Associates come up, in Partial Recall?—Can we determine, now, when a certain portion of the going thought has, by dint of its interest, become so prepotent as to make its own exclusive associates the dominant features of the coming thought—can we, I say, determine which of its own associates shall be evoked? For they are many. As Hodgson says:
Which Associates come up, in Partial Recall?—Can we figure out, now, when a certain part of our current thoughts has become so compelling that it creates its own exclusive associations as the main elements of our upcoming thoughts—can we, I ask, identify which of these associations will be called forth? Because there are a lot of them. As Hodgson mentions:
"The interesting parts of the decaying object are free to combine again with any objects or parts of objects with which at any time they have been combined before. All the former combinations of these parts may come back into consciousness; one must, but which will?"
"The fascinating aspects of the deteriorating object can merge again with any objects or parts of objects they've been connected to in the past. All the previous combinations of these parts might resurface in our awareness; one must, but which will?"
Mr. Hodgson replies:
Mr. Hodgson responds:
"There can be but one answer: that which has been most habitually combined with them before. This new object begins at once to form itself in consciousness, and to group its parts round the part still remaining from the former object; part after part comes out and arranges itself in its old position; but scarcely has the process begun, when the original law of interest begins to operate on this new formation, seizes on the interesting parts and impresses them on the attention to the exclusion of the rest, and the whole process is repeated again with endless variety. I venture to propose this as a complete and true account of the whole process of redintegration."
"There can only be one answer: the one that has been most habitually associated with them before. This new object immediately starts to form in our awareness and organizes its parts around the part that still remains from the previous object; one part after another emerges and arranges itself in its original position. But just as the process begins, the original principle of interest kicks in on this new formation, focuses on the interesting parts, and highlights them while ignoring the rest, repeating the entire process with endless variations. I propose this as a complete and accurate explanation of the whole process of redintegration."
In restricting the discharge from the interesting item into that channel which is simply most habitual in the sense of most frequent, Hodgson's account is assuredly imperfect. An image by no means always revives its most frequent associate, although frequency is certainly one of the most potent determinants of revival. If I abruptly utter the word swallow, the reader, if by habit an ornithologist, will think of a bird; if a physiologist or a medical specialist in throat-diseases, he will think of deglutition. If I say date, he will, if a fruit-merchant or an{265} Arabian traveller, think of the produce of the palm; if an habitual student of history, figures with A.D. or B.C. before them will rise in his mind. If I say bed, bath, morning, his own daily toilet will be invincibly suggested by the combined names of three of its habitual associates. But frequent lines of transition are often set at naught. The sight of a certain book has most frequently awakened in me thoughts of the opinions therein propounded. The idea of suicide has never been connected with the volume. But a moment since, as my eye fell upon it, suicide was the thought that flashed into my mind. Why? Because but yesterday I received a letter informing me that the author's recent death was an act of self-destruction. Thoughts tend, then, to awaken their most recent as well as their most habitual associates. This is a matter of notorious experience, too notorious, in fact, to need illustration. If we have seen our friend this morning, the mention of his name now recalls the circumstances of that interview, rather than any more remote details concerning him. If Shakespeare's plays are mentioned, and we were last night reading 'Richard II.,' vestiges of that play rather than of 'Hamlet' or 'Othello' float through our mind. Excitement of peculiar tracts, or peculiar modes of general excitement in the brain, leave a sort of tenderness or exalted sensibility behind them which takes days to die away. As long as it lasts, those tracts or those modes are liable to have their activities awakened by causes which at other times might leave them in repose. Hence, recency in experience is a prime factor in determining revival in thought.[36]
In limiting the release from the interesting item into the channel that's just the most habitual, meaning the most frequent, Hodgson's account is definitely incomplete. An image doesn’t always bring back its most frequent associate, even though frequency is certainly one of the strongest factors for recall. If I suddenly say the word swallow, the reader, if they’re into birds, will think of a bird; if they’re a physiologist or a throat specialist, they’ll think of swallowing. If I say date, a fruit merchant or an {265}Arabian traveler will picture the fruit from a palm tree; if someone studies history often, they might think of dates with A.D. or B.C. in front of them. If I say bed, bath, morning, his daily routine will definitely come to mind because of these three familiar words. But usual connections can sometimes be ignored. The sight of a certain book has often made me think about the ideas presented in it. The thought of suicide has never been linked to that book. But just now, when I saw it, suicide was the first thought that came to my mind. Why? Because just yesterday, I got a letter saying that the author’s recent death was a suicide. Thoughts tend to trigger not just their most frequent companions but also their most recent ones. This is something we all know too well to need examples. If we saw our friend this morning, mentioning his name now will bring back the details of that meeting instead of anything more distant about him. When Shakespeare's plays come up, and we read 'Richard II.' last night, memories of that play, rather than 'Hamlet' or 'Othello', will come to mind. Unique paths of thought, or specific ways of general stimulation in the brain, leave a sort of sensitivity or heightened awareness that can linger for days. While it lasts, those paths or ways can be activated by triggers that otherwise wouldn’t affect them. Therefore, recency in experience is a key factor in sparking thoughts.[36]
Vividness in an original experience may also have the same effect as habit or recency in bringing about likelihood{266} of revival. If we have once witnessed an execution, any subsequent conversation or reading about capital punishment will almost certainly suggest images of that particular scene. Thus it is that events lived through only once, and in youth, may come in after-years, by reason of their exciting quality or emotional intensity, to serve as types or instances used by our mind to illustrate any and every occurring topic whose interest is most remotely pertinent to theirs. If a man in his boyhood once talked with Napoleon, any mention of great men or historical events, battles or thrones, or the whirligig of fortune, or islands in the ocean, will be apt to draw to his lips the incidents of that one memorable interview. If the word tooth now suddenly appears on the page before the reader's eye, there are fifty chances out of a hundred that, if he gives it time to awaken any image, it will be an image of some operation of dentistry in which he has been the sufferer. Daily he has touched his teeth and masticated with them; this very morning he brushed, used, and picked them; but the rarer and remoter associations arise more promptly because they were so much more intense.
Vividness in a firsthand experience can have the same effect as habits or recent events in making it likely{266} that memories will be revived. If we've seen an execution, any later discussion or reading about capital punishment will almost definitely bring to mind images of that specific event. As a result, experiences we’ve only had once, especially in our youth, can resurface later in life, due to their emotional intensity or excitement, to serve as references for any topic that relates, even slightly, to those memories. For example, if a man talked to Napoleon as a child, any mention of great figures or historical events, battles or thrones, the ups and downs of life, or islands in the sea, will likely remind him of that one unforgettable conversation. If the word tooth suddenly appears on the page in front of a reader, there’s a good chance that, if he pauses to recall, the image that comes to mind will be of a dental procedure he has experienced. Every day he uses his teeth to eat; just this morning he brushed, used, and picked at them; but the less frequent and more intense memories come to mind more readily.
A fourth factor in tracing the course of reproduction is congruity in emotional tone between the reproduced idea and our mood. The same objects do not recall the same associates when we are cheerful as when we are melancholy. Nothing, in fact, is more striking than our inability to keep up trains of joyous imagery when we are depressed in spirits. Storm, darkness, war, images of disease, poverty, perishing, and dread afflict unremittingly the imaginations of melancholiacs. And those of sanguine temperament, when their spirits are high, find it impossible to give any permanence to evil forebodings or to gloomy thoughts. In an instant the train of association dances off to flowers and sunshine, and images of spring and hope. The records of Arctic or African travel perused in one mood awaken no thoughts but those of horror at the malignity of Nature; read at another time they suggest{267} only enthusiastic reflections on the indomitable power and pluck of man. Few novels so overflow with joyous animal spirits as 'The Three Guardsmen' of Dumas. Yet it may awaken in the mind of a reader depressed with sea-sickness (as the writer can personally testify) a most woful consciousness of the cruelty and carnage of which heroes like Athos, Porthos, and Aramis make themselves guilty.
A fourth factor in understanding reproduction is the consistency of emotional tone between the idea being recalled and our current mood. The same objects don’t remind us of the same associations when we’re happy compared to when we’re sad. In fact, nothing is more surprising than how hard it is to maintain positive thoughts when we’re feeling low. Storms, darkness, war, images of disease, poverty, death, and fear constantly plague the minds of those who are melancholic. Meanwhile, those with a sunnier disposition, when they’re feeling good, find it impossible to hold on to bad feelings or dark thoughts. In an instant, their stream of associations shifts to flowers and sunshine, along with images of spring and hope. Accounts of Arctic or African adventures read in one mood evoke only feelings of horror at the cruelty of nature; when read at another time, they inspire{267} nothing but enthusiastic thoughts about the resilience and courage of humanity. Few novels are as filled with vibrant spirit as Dumas’s 'The Three Musketeers.' Yet it might trigger in a reader feeling nauseous from seasickness (as the writer can personally attest) a profound awareness of the violence and destruction that heroes like Athos, Porthos, and Aramis engage in.
Habit, recency, vividness, and emotional congruity are, then, all reasons why one representation rather than another should be awakened by the interesting portion of a departing thought. We may say with truth that in the majority of cases the coming representation will have been either habitual, recent, or vivid, and will be congruous. If all these qualities unite in any one absent associate, we may predict almost infallibly that that associate of the going object will form an important ingredient in the object which comes next. In spite of the fact, however, that the succession of representations is thus redeemed from perfect indeterminism and limited to a few classes whose characteristic quality is fixed by the nature of our past experience, it must still be confessed that an immense number of terms in the linked chain of our representations fall outside of all assignable rule. To take the instance of the clock given on page 263. Why did the jeweller's shop suggest the shirt-studs rather than a chain which I had bought there more recently, which had cost more, and whose sentimental associations were much more interesting? Any reader's experience will easily furnish similar instances. So we must admit that to a certain extent, even in those forms of ordinary mixed association which lie nearest to impartial redintegration, which associate of the interesting item shall emerge must be called largely a matter of accident—accident, that is, for our intelligence. No doubt it is determined by cerebral causes, but they are too subtile and shifting for our analysis.
Habit, recency, vividness, and emotional relevance are all reasons why one representation rather than another is triggered by the interesting part of a departing thought. We can truthfully say that in most cases, the upcoming representation will be either habitual, recent, or vivid, and will be relevant. If all these qualities converge in a single absent associate, we can predict with almost complete certainty that it will significantly contribute to the next object. However, despite the fact that this sequence of representations is somewhat organized and restricted to a few categories defined by our past experiences, we must acknowledge that a vast number of terms in the flow of our representations fall outside any definite rules. For example, consider the clock mentioned on page 263. Why did the jeweler's shop remind me of the shirt-studs instead of a chain I had bought there more recently, which was more expensive and had much more sentimental value? Any reader can easily come up with similar examples from their own experiences. So, we must accept that to some degree, even in those common forms of mixed association that are closest to unbiased recall, which associate of the interesting item comes to mind largely depends on chance—chance, that is, from our perspective. No doubt it is influenced by brain processes, but these are too subtle and variable for us to analyze.
Focalized Recall, or Association by Similarity.—In partial or mixed association we have all along supposed the interesting{268} portion of the disappearing thought to be of considerable extent, and to be sufficiently complex to constitute by itself a concrete object. Sir William Hamilton relates, for instance, that after thinking of Ben Lomond he found himself thinking of the Prussian system of education, and discovered that the links of association were a German gentleman whom he had met on Ben Lomond, Germany, etc. The interesting part of Ben Lomond as he had experienced it, the part operative in determining the train of his ideas, was the complex image of a particular man. But now let us suppose that the interested attention refines itself still further and accentuates a portion of the passing object, so small as to be no longer the image of a concrete thing, but only of an abstract quality or property. Let us moreover suppose that the part thus accentuated persists in consciousness (or, in cerebral terms, has its brain-process continue) after the other portions of the object have faded. This small surviving portion will then surround itself with its own associates after the fashion we have already seen, and the relation between the new thought's object and the object of the faded thought will be a relation of similarity. The pair of thoughts will form an instance of what is called 'association by similarity.'
Focalized Recall, or Association by Similarity.—In partial or mixed association, we have always assumed that the intriguing{268} part of the fading thought is quite extensive and complex enough to stand alone as a concrete object. For example, Sir William Hamilton mentions that after thinking about Ben Lomond, he found himself thinking about the Prussian education system, and recognized that the connections were a German gentleman he had met on Ben Lomond, Germany, etc. The fascinating aspect of Ben Lomond that he experienced, which influenced his flow of thoughts, was the complex image of a specific man. Now, let’s imagine that the focused attention becomes even more refined and emphasizes a part of the passing object that is so small it’s no longer the image of a concrete thing, but just an abstract quality or property. Let’s also assume that this emphasized part remains in consciousness (or, in brain terms, continues its brain-process) after the other parts of the object have faded away. This small surviving portion will then gather its own associations in the way we've already discussed, and the connection between the new thought’s object and the object of the faded thought will be a relation of similarity. The two thoughts will illustrate an example of what is called 'association by similarity.'
The similars which are here associated, or of which the first is followed by the second in the mind, are seen to be compounds. Experience proves that this is always the case. There is no tendency on the part of SIMPLE 'ideas,' attributes, or qualities to remind us of their like. The thought of one shade of blue does not summon up that of another shade of blue, etc., unless indeed we have in mind some general purpose of nomenclature or comparison which requires a review of several blue tints.
The similar things grouped here, where the first leads to the second in our thoughts, are recognized as compounds. Experience shows this is always true. There's no tendency for SIMPLE 'ideas,' attributes, or qualities to remind us of their counterparts. Thinking of one shade of blue doesn’t automatically bring to mind another shade of blue, unless we’re considering a general purpose of naming or comparing that requires looking at several blue tones.
Now two compound things are similar when some one quality or group of qualities is shared alike by both, although as regards their other qualities they may have nothing in common. The moon is similar to a gas-jet, it is{269} also similar to a foot-ball; but a gas-jet and a foot-ball are not similar to each other. When we affirm the similarity of two compound things, we should always say in what respect it obtains. Moon and gas-jet are similar in respect of luminosity, and nothing else; moon and foot-ball in respect of rotundity, and nothing else. Foot-ball and gas-jet are in no respect similar—that is, they possess no common point, no identical attribute. Similarity, in compounds, is partial identity. When the same attribute appears in two phenomena, though it be their only common property, the two phenomena are similar in so far forth. To return now to our associated representations. If the thought of the moon is succeeded by the thought of a foot-ball, and that by the thought of one of Mr. X's railroads, it is because the attribute rotundity in the moon broke away from all the rest and surrounded itself with an entirely new set of companions—elasticity, leathery integument, swift mobility in obedience to human caprice, etc.; and because the last-named attribute in the foot-ball in turn broke away from its companions, and, itself persisting, surrounded itself with such new attributes as make up the notions of a 'railroad king,' of a rising and falling stock-market, and the like.
Now two complex things are similar when they share at least one quality or group of qualities, even if they have nothing else in common. The moon is similar to a gas jet, and it is also similar to a football; however, a gas jet and a football are not similar to each other. When we talk about the similarity of two complex things, we should always specify in what respect it applies. The moon and the gas jet are similar in terms of luminosity, and nothing else; the moon and the football are similar in terms of roundness, and nothing else. The football and the gas jet are not similar in any way—that is, they share no common characteristics, no identical attributes. Similarity, in complex things, is partial identity. When the same attribute appears in two phenomena, even if it's their only shared trait, the two phenomena are considered similar in that regard. Now, returning to our associated representations, if the thought of the moon is followed by the thought of a football, and then that is followed by the thought of one of Mr. X's railroads, it's because the quality of roundness in the moon detached itself from everything else and grouped with a completely new set of qualities—elasticity, leathery covering, swift movement based on human whims, etc.; and because the last-mentioned quality in the football also broke away from its original companions, and, while remaining itself, grouped with new qualities that form the concepts of a 'railroad king,' a fluctuating stock market, and so on.
The gradual passage from total to focalized, through what we have called ordinary partial, recall may be symbolized by diagrams. Fig. 58 is total, Fig. 59 is partial, and Fig. 60 focalized, recall. A in each is the passing,{270} B the coming, thought. In 'total recall,' all parts of A are equally operative in calling up B. In 'partial recall,' most parts of A are inert. The part M alone breaks out and awakens B. In similar association or 'focalized recall,' the part M is much smaller than in the previous case, and after awakening its new set of associates, instead of fading out itself, it continues persistently active along with them, forming an identical part in the two ideas, and making these, pro tanto, resemble each other.[37]
The gradual transition from total to focused recall, through what we refer to as ordinary partial recall, can be illustrated with diagrams. Fig. 58 represents total recall, Fig. 59 shows partial recall, and Fig. 60 depicts focused recall. In each, A represents the input, {270} and B signifies the thought being recalled. In 'total recall,' all parts of A are equally effective in triggering B. In 'partial recall,' most parts of A are inactive. Only part M breaks through and activates B. In the case of similar association or 'focused recall,' part M is much smaller than in the previous scenario, and after activating its new group of associates, it doesn't fade away; instead, it remains actively engaged with them, creating a shared element in the two ideas and making them, pro tanto, similar to each other.[37]
Why a single portion of the passing thought should break out from its concert with the rest and act, as we say, on its own hook, why the other parts should become inert, are mysteries which we can ascertain but not explain.{271} Possibly a minuter insight into the laws of neural action will some day clear the matter up; possibly neural laws will not suffice, and we shall need to invoke a dynamic reaction of the consciousness itself. But into this we cannot enter now.
Why a single thought should break away from the rest and act independently, while the other thoughts become inactive, are mysteries we can identify but not explain.{271} Perhaps a deeper understanding of how our brain functions will eventually clarify this; perhaps understanding the brain alone won’t be enough, and we’ll need to consider a dynamic reaction of consciousness itself. But we can’t dive into that right now.
Voluntary Trains of Thought.—Hitherto we have assumed the process of suggestion of one object by another to be spontaneous. The train of imagery wanders at its own sweet will, now trudging in sober grooves of habit, now with a hop, skip, and jump, darting across the whole field of time and space. This is revery, or musing; but great segments of the flux of our ideas consist of something very different from this. They are guided by a distinct purpose or conscious interest; and the course of our ideas is then called voluntary.
Voluntary Trains of Thought.—Up until now, we assumed that the process of one object suggesting another happens naturally. The flow of imagery moves freely, sometimes following familiar paths, and other times jumping around across the vast landscape of time and space. This is daydreaming or thinking. However, large parts of our stream of ideas consist of something quite different. They are directed by a specific goal or conscious interest, and the progression of our thoughts is then referred to as voluntary.
Physiologically considered, we must suppose that a purpose means the persistent activity of certain rather definite brain-processes throughout the whole course of thought. Our most usual cogitations are not pure reveries, absolute driftings, but revolve about some central interest or topic to which most of the images are relevant, and towards which we return promptly after occasional digressions.{272} This interest is subserved by the persistently active brain-tracts we have supposed. In the mixed associations which we have hitherto studied, the parts of each object which form the pivots on which our thoughts successively turn have their interest largely determined by their connection with some general interest which for the time has seized upon the mind. If we call Z the brain-tract of general interest, then, if the object abc turns up, and b has more associations with Z than have either a or c, b will become the object's interesting, pivotal portion, and will call up its own associates exclusively. For the energy of b's brain-tract will be augmented by Z's activity,—an activity which, from lack of previous connection between Z and a and Z and c, does not influence a or c. If, for instance, I think of Paris whilst I am hungry, I shall not improbably find that its restaurants have become the pivot of my thought, etc., etc.
Physiologically speaking, we should think of a purpose as the ongoing activity of specific brain processes throughout the entirety of our thoughts. Our typical thoughts aren't just random daydreams or aimless wanderings; they focus on a central interest or topic that connects most of the images we consider and to which we quickly return after brief distractions.{272} This interest is supported by the consistently active brain pathways we've discussed. In the mixed associations we've examined so far, the aspects of each object that serve as the centers of our thinking are largely influenced by their relation to some general interest that currently occupies our mind. If we refer to Z as the brain pathway of general interest, then when the object abc appears, if b has more connections to Z than a or c, b will become the focal point of the object's interest and will only bring up its own related thoughts. The energy of b's brain pathway will be boosted by Z's activity—an activity that, due to the lack of prior connections between Z and a and between Z and c, does not affect a or c. For example, if I think of Paris while I’m hungry, I’m likely to find that its restaurants have become the focus of my thoughts, etc., etc.
Problems.—But in the theoretic as well as in the practical life there are interests of a more acute sort, taking the form of definite images of some achievement which we desire to effect. The train of ideas arising under the influence of such an interest constitutes usually the thought of the means by which the end shall be attained. If the end by its simple presence does not instantaneously suggest the means, the search for the latter becomes a problem; and the discovery of the means forms a new sort of end, of an entirely peculiar nature—an end, namely, which we intensely desire before we have attained it, but of the nature of which, even whilst most strongly craving it, we have no distinct imagination whatever (compare pp. 241-2).
Problems.—In both theory and practical life, there are more pressing interests that take the form of specific images of achievements we want to accomplish. The flow of ideas that emerges from these interests usually centers around the means by which we can reach those goals. If the goal doesn’t immediately suggest how to achieve it, the search for that method becomes a problem; and finding the means creates a new type of goal, one that is entirely unique—specifically, a goal we strongly desire even before we achieve it, but for which we have no clear image at all, even while we crave it the most (compare pp. 241-2).
The same thing occurs whenever we seek to recall something forgotten, or to state the reason for a judgment which we have made intuitively. The desire strains and presses in a direction which it feels to be right, but towards a point which it is unable to see. In short, the absence of an item is a determinant of our representations quite as positive as its presence can ever be. The gap becomes no{273} mere void, but what is called an aching void. If we try to explain in terms of brain-action how a thought which only potentially exists can yet be effective, we seem driven to believe that the brain-tract thereof must actually be excited, but only in a minimal and sub-conscious way. Try, for instance, to symbolize what goes on in a man who is racking his brains to remember a thought which occurred to him last week. The associates of the thought are there, many of them at least, but they refuse to awaken the thought itself. We cannot suppose that they do not irradiate at all into its brain-tract, because his mind quivers on the very edge of its recovery. Its actual rhythm sounds in his ears; the words seem on the imminent point of following, but fail (see p. 165). Now the only difference between the effort to recall things forgotten and the search after the means to a given end is that the latter have not, whilst the former have, already formed a part of our experience. If we first study the mode of recalling a thing forgotten, we can take up with better understanding the voluntary quest of the unknown.
The same thing happens whenever we try to remember something we've forgotten or explain why we made a judgment intuitively. The desire pushes us toward what feels right, but we can't see the exact point we're aiming for. In short, the absence of something influences our thoughts just as strongly as its presence does. The gap becomes no{273} mere void, but what is called an aching void. If we try to explain how a thought that only potentially exists can still be effective in terms of brain function, we might feel compelled to believe that the neural pathways related to it must be slightly activated, even if just subconsciously. For instance, consider what happens when someone is trying hard to remember a thought that came to him last week. The associations related to that thought are there, at least many of them, but they can't bring the thought itself to mind. We can't assume they don't have any effect on the relevant brain area because his mind is right on the edge of retrieving it. The actual rhythm of the thought echoes in his mind; the words seem ready to follow but then get stuck (see p. 165). The only difference between trying to recall forgotten things and looking for solutions to a specific problem is that the latter hasn’t been part of our experience yet, while the former has. If we first examine how to recall something forgotten, we can better understand the intentional search for the unknown.
Their Solution.—The forgotten thing is felt by us as a gap in the midst of certain other things. We possess a dim idea of where we were and what we were about when it last occurred to us. We recollect the general subject to which it pertains. But all these details refuse to shoot together into a solid whole, for the lack of the missing thing, so we keep running over them in our mind, dissatisfied, craving something more. From each detail there radiate lines of association forming so many tentative guesses. Many of these are immediately seen to be irrelevant, are therefore void of interest, and lapse immediately from consciousness. Others are associated with the other details present, and with the missing thought as well. When these surge up, we have a peculiar feeling that we are 'warm,' as the children say when they play hide and seek; and such associates as these we clutch at and keep before the attention. Thus we recollect successively that when we last were considering the{274} matter in question we were at the dinner-table; then that our friend J. D. was there; then that the subject talked about was so and so; finally, that the thought came à propos of a certain anecdote, and then that it had something to do with a French quotation. Now all these added associates arise independently of the will, by the spontaneous processes we know so well. All that the will does is to emphasize and linger over those which seem pertinent, and ignore the rest. Through this hovering of the attention in the neighborhood of the desired object, the accumulation of associates becomes so great that the combined tensions of their neural processes break through the bar, and the nervous wave pours into the tract which has so long been awaiting its advent. And as the expectant, sub-conscious itching, so to speak, bursts into the fulness of vivid feeling, the mind finds an inexpressible relief.
Their Solution.—The forgotten thing feels like a gap amidst certain other things. We have a vague idea of where we were and what we were doing when we last thought of it. We remember the general topic it relates to. But all these pieces refuse to come together into a complete picture because of the missing thing, so we keep going over them in our minds, feeling unsatisfied and wanting something more. Each detail sends out lines of connection that form many tentative guesses. Many of these are quickly recognized as irrelevant, lacking interest, and fade from our awareness. Others connect with the details present and with the missing thought as well. When these come to mind, we feel a strange sense that we're 'warm,' like kids say when playing hide and seek; we grasp onto these connections and keep them in focus. Thus, we remember that when we last discussed the{274} matter at hand, we were at the dinner table; then that our friend J. D. was there; then that the topic was this and that; finally, that the thought came up because of a certain story, and that it had to do with a French quote. Now all these added connections come up without any effort, through the spontaneous processes we know so well. All the will does is to highlight and focus on those that seem relevant and disregard the rest. By keeping our attention near the desired object, the buildup of connections becomes so significant that the combined tensions in their neural processes push through the barrier, and a nervous wave rushes into the pathway that has been waiting for so long. As the expectant, subconscious itch, so to speak, breaks into a flood of vivid feeling, the mind experiences an indescribable relief.
The whole process can be rudely symbolized in a diagram. Call the forgotten thing Z, the first facts with which we felt it was related a, b, and c, and the details finally operative in calling it up l, m, and n. Each circle will then stand for the brain-process principally concerned in the thought of the fact lettered within it. The activity in Z will at first be a mere tension; but as the activities in a, b, and c little by little irradiate into l, m, and n, and as{275} all these processes are somehow connected with Z, their combined irradiations upon Z, represented by the centripetal arrows, succeed in rousing Z also to full activity.
The whole process can be roughly represented in a diagram. Let’s call the forgotten thing Z, the first facts we felt were connected to it a, b, and c, and the details that ultimately trigger its recall l, m, and n. Each circle will then represent the brain process primarily involved in thinking about the fact noted within it. The activity in Z will initially be just a tension; but as the activities in a, b, and c gradually feed into l, m, and n, and as {275} all these processes are somehow linked to Z, their combined inputs on Z, shown by the inward arrows, manage to stimulate Z to full activity.
Turn now to the case of finding the unknown means to a distinctly conceived end. The end here stands in the place of a, b, c, in the diagram. It is the starting-point of the irradiations of suggestion; and here, as in that case, what the voluntary attention does is only to dismiss some of the suggestions as irrelevant, and hold fast to others which are felt to be more pertinent—let these be symbolized by l, m, n. These latter at last accumulate sufficiently to discharge all together into Z, the excitement of which process is, in the mental sphere, equivalent to the solution of our problem. The only difference between this and the previous case is that in this one there need be no original sub-excitement in Z, coöperating from the very first. In the solving of a problem, all that we are aware of in advance seems to be its relations. It must be a cause, or it must be an effect, or it must contain an attribute, or it must be a means, or what not. We know, in short, a lot about it, whilst as yet we have no acquaintance with it. Our perception that one of the objects which turn up is, at last, our quæsitum, is due to our recognition that its relations are identical with those we had in mind, and this may be a rather slow act of judgment. Every one knows that an object may be for some time present to his mind before its relations to other matters are perceived. Just so the relations may be there before the object is.
Now, let's look at the situation where we need to find the unknown means to a clearly defined goal. The goal here represents a, b, c in the diagram. It's the starting point for the flow of suggestions; in this scenario, just like before, what our voluntary attention does is to ignore some suggestions as irrelevant and focus on others that seem more relevant—let's symbolize these as l, m, n. These relevant suggestions gradually build up until they all converge into Z, and the excitement generated by this process, in our minds, is equivalent to solving our problem. The only difference from the previous scenario is that in this case, there doesn't have to be any initial excitement in Z from the very beginning. When we tackle a problem, what we’re aware of ahead of time seems to be its relations. It must be a cause, or an effect, or it must have an attribute, or it must be a means, or something similar. Essentially, we know a lot about it, but we don't have any direct acquaintance with it yet. Our realization that one of the objects we encounter is, in fact, our quæsitum comes from recognizing that its relations match those we had in mind, and this recognition can be a rather slow process of judgment. Everyone is aware that an object can be present in their mind for a while before they grasp its relations to other things. Similarly, the relations can exist before the object does.
From the guessing of newspaper enigmas to the plotting of the policy of an empire there is no other process than this. We must trust to the laws of cerebral nature to present us spontaneously with the appropriate idea, but we must know it for the right one when it comes.
From solving newspaper puzzles to strategizing for an empire, there’s really no other way to do it. We have to rely on the laws of our brains to bring us the right idea when it’s needed, but we also need to recognize it as the right one when it appears.
It is foreign to my purpose here to enter into any detailed analysis of the different classes of mental pursuit. In a scientific research we get perhaps as rich an example as can be found. The inquirer starts with a fact of which{276} he seeks the reason, or with an hypothesis of which he seeks the proof. In either case he keeps turning the matter incessantly in his mind until, by the arousal of associate upon associate, some habitual, some similar, one arises which he recognizes to suit his need. This, however, may take years. No rules can be given by which the investigator may proceed straight to his result; but both here and in the case of reminiscence the accumulation of helps in the way of associations may advance more rapidly by the use of certain routine methods. In striving to recall a thought, for example, we may of set purpose run through the successive classes of circumstance with which it may possibly have been connected, trusting that when the right member of the class has turned up it will help the thought's revival. Thus we may run through all the places in which we may have had it. We may run through the persons whom we remember to have conversed with, or we may call up successively all the books we have lately been reading. If we are trying to remember a person we may run through a list of streets or of professions. Some item out of the lists thus methodically gone over will very likely be associated with the fact we are in need of, and may suggest it or help to do so. And yet the item might never have arisen without such systematic procedure. In scientific research this accumulation of associates has been methodized by Mill under the title of 'The Four Methods of Experimental Inquiry.' By the 'method of agreement,' by that of 'difference,' by those of 'residues' and 'concomitant variations' (which cannot here be more nearly defined), we make certain lists of cases; and by ruminating these lists in our minds the cause we seek will be more likely to emerge. But the final stroke of discovery is only prepared, not effected, by them. The brain-tracts must, of their own accord, shoot the right way at last, or we shall still grope in darkness. That in some brains the tracts do shoot the right way much oftener than in others, and that we cannot tell why,—these are ultimate facts to which we must never{277} close our eyes. Even in forming our lists of instances according to Mill's methods, we are at the mercy of the spontaneous workings of Similarity in our brain. How are a number of facts, resembling the one whose cause we seek, to be brought together in a list unless one will rapidly suggest another through association by similarity?
It’s not my intention here to dive into a detailed analysis of the different types of mental pursuits. In scientific research, we get maybe the best example available. The researcher starts with a fact for which{276} they're looking for an explanation or with a hypothesis that needs proof. In both scenarios, they constantly think about the matter until, through a chain of associations, an idea emerges that fits what they need. This, however, can take years. There are no strict rules that guide the investigator directly to their answer; however, in both this scenario and in recalling memories, the collection of associations may progress faster with certain routine methods. For instance, when trying to remember a thought, we might purposefully go through relevant circumstances that might be linked to it, hoping that when the right context appears, it will trigger the memory. So, we might consider all the places where we might have had that thought. We could think of the people we've conversed with, or recall all the books we've recently read. When trying to remember someone, we could compile a list of streets or professions. Some item from these systematically reviewed lists will likely connect to the fact we need and may help us recall it. Yet, that item might never come to mind without such an organized approach. In scientific research, this accumulation of associations is organized by Mill under the term 'The Four Methods of Experimental Inquiry.' Through the 'method of agreement,' 'method of difference,' and the methods of 'residues' and 'concomitant variations' (which I can’t define here in detail), we create specific lists of cases, and by considering these lists in our minds, the cause we're seeking is more likely to surface. However, the actual moment of discovery is only prepared, not guaranteed, by them. The brain pathways must eventually align correctly on their own, or we'll continue to search in the dark. It’s a fact that in some brains, these pathways do connect correctly much more often than in others, and we can't explain why—these are fundamental facts we must never{277} ignore. Even when we create our lists based on Mill's methods, we rely on the spontaneous operations of Similarity in our brains. How can a series of facts that resemble the one whose cause we’re searching for be gathered in a list unless one fact quickly suggests another through similarity?
Similarity no Elementary Law.—Such is the analysis I propose, first of the three main types of spontaneous, and then of voluntary, trains of thought. It will be observed that the object called up may bear any logical relation whatever to the one which suggested it. The law requires only that one condition should be fulfilled. The fading object must be due to a brain-process some of whose elements awaken through habit some of the elements of the brain-process of the object which comes to view. This awakening is the causal agency in the kind of association called Similarity, as in any other sort. The similarity itself between the objects has no causal agency in carrying us from one to the other. It is but a result—the effect of the usual causal agent when this happens to work in a certain way. Ordinary writers talk as if the similarity of the objects were itself an agent, coördinate with habit, and independent of it, and like it able to push objects before the mind. This is quite unintelligible. The similarity of two things does not exist till both things are there—it is meaningless to talk of it as an agent of production of anything, whether in the physical or the psychical realms. It is a relation which the mind perceives after the fact, just as it may perceive the relations of superiority, of distance, of causality, of container and content, of substance and accident, or of contrast, between an object and some second object which the associative machinery calls up.
Similarity is Not an Elementary Law.—This is the analysis I suggest, first of the three main types of spontaneous and then of voluntary trains of thought. You will notice that the object brought to mind can have any logical connection to the one that triggered it. The law only requires one condition to be met. The fading object must be a result of a brain process that, through habit, activates some elements of the brain process related to the object that comes to mind. This activation is the causal force behind the kind of association known as Similarity, just like in any other type. The similarity itself between the objects doesn't play a role in moving us from one to the other. It's merely a result—an effect of the usual causal agent when it happens to function in a particular way. Common writers suggest that the similarity of the objects is an agent itself, working alongside habit and independent of it, and capable of pushing objects into our awareness. This is completely unclear. The similarity between two things only exists when both are present—it makes no sense to refer to it as an agent of production for anything, whether in the physical or psychological realms. It is a relationship that the mind recognizes after the fact, just as it can recognize the relationships of superiority, distance, causality, containment, substance and accident, or contrast, between one object and another that the associative process brings to mind.
Conclusion.—To sum up, then, we see that the difference between the three kinds of association reduces itself to a simple difference in the amount of that portion of the nerve-tract supporting the going thought which is operative in calling up the thought which comes. But the{278} modus operandi of this active part is the same, be it large or be it small. The items constituting the coming object waken in every instance because their nerve-tracts once were excited continuously with those of the going object or its operative part. This ultimate physiological law of habit among the neural elements is what runs the train. The direction of its course and the form of its transitions are due to the unknown conditions by which in some brains action tends to focalize itself in small spots, while in others it fills patiently its broad bed. What these differing conditions are, it seems impossible to guess. Whatever they are, they are what separate the man of genius from the prosaic creature of habit and routine thinking. In the chapter on Reasoning we shall need to recur again to this point. I trust that the student will now feel that the way to a deeper understanding of the order of our ideas lies in the direction of cerebral physiology. The elementary process of revival can be nothing but the law of habit. Truly the day is distant when physiologists shall actually trace from cell-group to cell-group the irradiations which we have hypothetically invoked. Probably it will never arrive. The schematism we have used is, moreover, taken immediately from the analysis of objects into their elementary parts, and only extended by analogy to the brain. And yet it is only as incorporated in the brain that such a schematism can represent anything causal. This is, to my mind, the conclusive reason for saying that the order of presentation of the mind's materials is due to cerebral physiology alone.
Conclusion.—In summary, we see that the difference between the three types of association comes down to a simple difference in the amount of the nerve pathways involved in the current thought that triggers the recalled thought. However, the{278} modus operandi of this active part remains the same, whether it’s large or small. The elements that make up the incoming object awaken every time because their nerve pathways were once consistently activated alongside those of the outgoing object or its active part. This basic physiological law of habit among the neural elements is what drives the process. The direction it takes and the way it transitions are determined by the unknown conditions that cause some brains to focus action in small areas, while others spread it out broadly. It seems impossible to guess what these differing conditions are. Whatever they may be, they are what distinguish the genius from the ordinary person stuck in habit and routine thinking. We will revisit this issue in the chapter on Reasoning. I hope the student now understands that a deeper grasp of how our ideas are ordered leads us to explore cerebral physiology. The basic process of revival can only be explained by the law of habit. The day when physiologists can trace the connections from one group of cells to another through direct observation seems far off, and it probably will never come. The framework we’ve used is directly taken from analyzing objects into their basic parts and is only extended by analogy to the brain. Yet, it’s only within the brain that such a framework can represent anything causal. To me, this is the definitive reason for stating that the order of presentation of the mind's materials is solely the result of cerebral physiology.
The law of accidental prepotency of certain processes over others falls also within the sphere of cerebral probabilities. Granting such instability as the brain-tissue requires, certain points must always discharge more quickly and strongly than others; and this prepotency would shift its place from moment to moment by accidental causes, giving us a perfect mechanical diagram of the capricious{279} play of similar association in the most gifted mind. A study of dreams confirms this view. The usual abundance of paths of irradiation seems, in the dormant brain, reduced. A few only are pervious, and the most fantastic sequences occur because the currents run—'like sparks in burnt-up paper'—wherever the nutrition of the moment creates an opening, but nowhere else.
The law of accidental dominance of certain processes over others also relates to brain probabilities. Considering the instability that brain tissue needs, certain areas will always activate more quickly and strongly than others. This dominance will shift constantly due to random factors, giving us a clear mechanical outline of the unpredictable play of similar connections in the most talented minds. A study of dreams supports this idea. The usual abundance of pathways seems reduced in the inactive brain. Only a few are open, and the most bizarre sequences happen because the currents flow—"like sparks in burnt-up paper"—wherever the moment's nutrients create an opening, but nowhere else.
The effects of interested attention and volition remain. These activities seem to hold fast to certain elements and, by emphasizing them and dwelling on them, to make their associates the only ones which are evoked. This is the point at which an anti-mechanical psychology must, if anywhere, make its stand in dealing with association. Everything else is pretty certainly due to cerebral laws. My own opinion on the question of active attention and spiritual spontaneity is expressed elsewhere (see p. 237). But even though there be a mental spontaneity, it can certainly not create ideas or summon them ex abrupto. Its power is limited to selecting amongst those which the associative machinery introduces. If it can emphasize, reinforce, or protract for half a second either one of these, it can do all that the most eager advocate of free will need demand; for it then decides the direction of the next associations by making them hinge upon the emphasized term; and determining in this wise the course of the man's thinking, it also determines his acts.{280}
The effects of focused attention and intention persist. These activities seem to cling to certain elements and, by highlighting and concentrating on them, make their related concepts the only ones that come to mind. This is where an anti-mechanical psychology should, if anywhere, take a stand in discussing association. Everything else is almost certainly a result of brain processes. My personal views on the issue of active attention and mental spontaneity are outlined elsewhere (see p. 237). However, even if there is mental spontaneity, it definitely can't create ideas or bring them forth out of nowhere. Its power is limited to selecting from those introduced by the associative mechanism. If it can highlight, strengthen, or extend for just half a second any one of these, it can provide all that the most passionate supporter of free will could ask for; because at that point, it determines the direction of the next associations by making them dependent on the emphasized term; and by shaping the flow of a person's thoughts in this way, it also influences their actions.{280}
CHAPTER XVII.
THE SENSE OF TIME.
The sensible present has duration. Let any one try, I will not say to arrest, but to notice or attend to, the present moment of time. One of the most baffling experiences occurs. Where is it, this present? It has melted in our grasp, fled ere we could touch it, gone in the instant of becoming. As a poet, quoted by Mr. Hodgson, says,
The present moment actually lasts. Try to notice or focus on the present moment of time. It’s one of the most puzzling experiences. Where is this present? It slips away from us, disappears before we can grasp it, gone in the blink of an eye. As a poet quoted by Mr. Hodgson says,
and it is only as entering into the living and moving organization of a much wider tract of time that the strict present is apprehended at all. It is, in fact, an altogether ideal abstraction, not only never realized in sense, but probably never even conceived of by those unaccustomed to philosophic meditation. Reflection leads us to the conclusion that it must exist, but that it does exist can never be a fact of our immediate experience. The only fact of our immediate experience is what has been well called 'the specious' present, a sort of saddle-back of time with a certain length of its own, on which we sit perched, and from which we look in two directions into time. The unit of composition of our perception of time is a duration, with a bow and a stern, as it were—a rearward-and a forward-looking end. It is only as parts of this duration-block that the relation of succession of one end to the other is perceived. We do not first feel one end and then feel the other after it, and from the perception of the succession infer an interval of time between, but we seem to feel the interval of time as a whole, with its two ends embedded in it. The experience is from the outset a synthetic datum, not a{281} simple one; and to sensible perception its elements are inseparable, although attention looking back may easily decompose the experience, and distinguish its beginning from its end.
and it's only by stepping into the dynamic and living framework of a much broader timeline that the strict present is grasped at all. In reality, it's completely an ideal abstraction, never realized in sensory experience, and probably never even thought of by those who aren't used to philosophical contemplation. Reflection leads us to the conclusion that it must exist, but that it does exist can never be a fact of our immediate experience. The only fact we experience right now is what has been aptly referred to as 'the specious' present, a sort of peak of time with a certain length, where we sit, looking both forward and backward. The basic unit of our perception of time is a duration, with a front and a back, so to speak—a past end and a future end. It's only as parts of this duration-block that we perceive the relationship of succession from one end to the other. We don't first feel one end and then the other afterwards, inferring a time interval between them; rather, we seem to sense the entire interval of time at once, with both ends embedded within it. The experience is inherently a synthetic datum, not a{281} simple one; and to our sensory perception, its elements are inseparable, even though focusing back may easily break down the experience and distinguish its beginning from its end.
The moment we pass beyond a very few seconds our consciousness of duration ceases to be an immediate perception and becomes a construction more or less symbolic. To realize even an hour, we must count 'now! now! now! now!' indefinitely. Each 'now' is the feeling of a separate bit of time, and the exact sum of the bits never makes a clear impression on our mind. The longest bit of duration which we can apprehend at once so as to discriminate it from longer and shorter bits of time would seem (from experiments made for another purpose in Wundt's laboratory) to be about 12 seconds. The shortest interval which we can feel as time at all would seem to be 1/500 of a second. That is, Exner recognized two electric sparks to be successive when the second followed the first at that interval.
The moment we go beyond just a few seconds, our awareness of time stops being an immediate experience and turns into something more symbolic. To grasp even an hour, we need to keep counting 'now! now! now! now!' endlessly. Each 'now' represents a distinct bit of time, and the total of these bits never leaves a clear impression on our mind. The longest bit of time we can perceive at once, allowing us to differentiate it from longer and shorter bits of time, seems to be about 12 seconds, according to experiments conducted for a different purpose in Wundt's lab. The shortest interval we can actually feel as time appears to be 1/500 of a second. In other words, Exner identified two electric sparks as successive when the second spark followed the first with that interval.
We have no sense for empty time. Let one sit with closed eyes and, abstracting entirely from the outer world, attend exclusively to the passage of time, like one who wakes, as the poet says, "to hear time flowing in the middle of the night, and all things moving to a day of doom." There seems under such circumstances as these no variety in the material content of our thought, and what we notice appears, if anything, to be the pure series of durations budding, as it were, and growing beneath our indrawn gaze. Is this really so or not? The question is important; for, if the experience be what it roughly seems, we have a sort of special sense for pure time—a sense to which empty duration is an adequate stimulus; while if it be an illusion, it must be that our perception of time's flight, in the experiences quoted, is due to the filling of the time, and to our memory of a content which it had a moment previous, and which we feel to agree or disagree with its content now.{282}
We have no perception of empty time. One can sit with their eyes closed and, completely disconnecting from the outside world, focus solely on the passage of time, like someone who wakes, as the poet puts it, "to hear time flowing in the middle of the night, and everything moving towards a day of doom." In these moments, there seems to be no variety in the content of our thoughts, and what we notice appears to be just the pure sequence of durations blossoming, as if growing, under our inward gaze. Is this really the case or not? This question is important because if our experience is what it seems, we possess a kind of special sense for pure time—a sense that empty duration is enough of a trigger; yet if it's an illusion, then our perception of time passing, in the mentioned experiences, stems from the filling of time and from our memory of the content that was there just a moment ago, which we feel either matches or clashes with its content now.{282}
It takes but a small exertion of introspection to show that the latter alternative is the true one, and that we can no more perceive a duration than we can perceive an extension, devoid of all sensible content. Just as with closed eyes we see a dark visual field in which a curdling play of obscurest luminosity is always going on; so, be we never so abstracted from distinct outward impressions, we are always inwardly immersed in what Wundt has somewhere called the twilight of our general consciousness. Our heart-beats, our breathing, the pulses of our attention, fragments of words or sentences that pass through our imagination, are what people this dim habitat. Now, all these processes are rhythmical, and are apprehended by us, as they occur, in their totality; the breathing and pulses of attention, as coherent successions, each with its rise and fall; the heart-beats similarly, only relatively far more brief; the words not separately, but in connected groups. In short, empty our minds as we may, some form of changing process remains for us to feel, and cannot be expelled. And along with the sense of the process and its rhythm goes the sense of the length of time it lasts. Awareness of change is thus the condition on which our perception of time's flow depends; but there exists no reason to suppose that empty time's own changes are sufficient for the awareness of change to be aroused. The change must be of some concrete sort.
It takes just a little introspection to show that the latter option is the correct one, and that we can no more perceive a duration than we can perceive an extension, devoid of all sensible content. Just as when we close our eyes, we see a dark visual field in which a swirling play of faint light is always happening; similarly, even if we’re completely disconnected from clear outside impressions, we are always inwardly surrounded by what Wundt has referred to as the twilight of our general consciousness. Our heartbeats, our breathing, the fluctuations of our attention, bits of words or sentences that drift through our imagination, are what fill this dim space. Now, all these processes are rhythmic, and we perceive them, as they happen, in their entirety; the breathing and attention pulses, as coherent sequences, each with their rise and fall; the heartbeats similarly, but generally much shorter; and the words not individually, but in connected groups. In short, no matter how much we try to empty our minds, some form of changing process remains for us to feel and cannot be pushed away. And along with the sense of the process and its rhythm comes the awareness of how long it lasts. Our awareness of change is therefore the basis for our perception of the flow of time; however, there’s no reason to think that the changes in empty time alone are enough to trigger the awareness of change. The change needs to be of some concrete nature.
Appreciation of Longer Durations.—In the experience of watching empty time flow—'empty' to be taken hereafter in the relative sense just set forth—we tell it off in pulses. We say 'now! now! now!' or we count 'more! more! more!' as we feel it bud. This composition out of units of duration is called the law of time's discrete flow. The discreteness is, however, merely due to the fact that our successive acts of recognition or apperception of what it is are discrete. The sensation is as continuous as any sensation can be. All continuous sensations are named in beats. We notice that a certain finite 'more' of them is{283} passing or already past. To adopt Hodgson's image, the sensation is the measuring-tape, the perception the dividing-engine which stamps its length. As we listen to a steady sound, we take it in in discrete pulses of recognition, calling it successively 'the same! the same! the same!' The case stands no otherwise with time.
Understanding Longer Durations.—While watching time pass, we often perceive it in intervals. We say 'now! now! now!' or we count 'more! more! more!' as we sense it developing. This way of breaking down time into units is known as the law of time's discrete flow. The discreteness, however, is simply because our successive acts of recognition or apperception of what it is are distinct. The sensation itself is as continuous as any sensation can be. All continuous sensations are marked in beats. We realize that a certain finite 'more' of them is{283} either passing or has already passed. To use Hodgson's analogy, the sensation is like a measuring tape, while the perception is the tool that measures and marks its length. As we listen to a steady sound, we absorb it in distinct pulses of recognition, repeatedly calling it 'the same! the same! the same!' The same principle applies to time.
After a small number of beats our impression of the amount we have told off becomes quite vague. Our only way of knowing it accurately is by counting, or noticing the clock, or through some other symbolic conception. When the times exceed hours or days, the conception is absolutely symbolic. We think of the amount we mean either solely as a name, or by running over a few salient dates therein, with no pretence of imagining the full durations that lie between them. No one has anything like a perception of the greater length of the time between now and the first century than of that between now and the tenth. To an historian, it is true, the longer interval will suggest a host of additional dates and events, and so appear a more multitudinous thing. And for the same reason most people will think they directly perceive the length of the past fortnight to exceed that of the past week. But there is properly no comparative time-intuition in these cases at all. It is but dates and events representing time, their abundance symbolizing its length. I am sure that this is so, even where the times compared are no more than an hour or so in length. It is the same with spaces of many miles, which we always compare with each other by the numbers that measure them.
After a few moments, our sense of how much time has passed becomes pretty vague. The only ways we can know it accurately are by counting, checking the clock, or using some other symbolic idea. When time stretches into hours or days, the concept is entirely symbolic. We think about the time we mean either just as a name or by recalling a few key dates in it, without pretending to imagine the full spans of time in between. No one really has a sense of the longer duration from now to the first century compared to that from now to the tenth. For an historian, it’s true that the longer gap will bring to mind many more dates and events, making it seem much more multitudinous. Similarly, most people tend to feel that the past two weeks feel longer than the past week. But in reality, there’s no true time-intuition in these cases at all. It’s just dates and events representing time, and their quantity symbolizes its length. I’m confident this is the case, even when the times compared are no more than an hour apart. It’s the same with distances measured in miles, which we always compare by the numbers that define them.
From this we pass naturally to speak of certain familiar variations in our estimation of lengths of time. In general, a time filled with varied and interesting experiences seems short in passing, but long as we look back. On the other hand, a tract of time empty of experiences seems long in passing, but in retrospect short. A week of travel and sight-seeing may subtend an angle more like three weeks in the memory; and a month of sickness yields hardly{284} more memories than a day. The length in retrospect depends obviously on the multitudinousness of the memories which the time affords. Many objects, events, changes, many subdivisions, immediately widen the view as we look back. Emptiness, monotony, familiarity, make it shrivel up.
From this, we naturally move to discuss some familiar variations in how we perceive lengths of time. In general, a time filled with diverse and interesting experiences feels short as it goes by, but long when we reflect back on it. Conversely, a period lacking in experiences seems long while it’s happening, but short in hindsight. A week of traveling and sightseeing might feel more like three weeks in memory, while a month of illness barely provides more memories than a single day. The perceived length in hindsight clearly depends on the abundance of memories that time offers. Numerous objects, events, changes, and subdivisions expand our perspective as we look back. In contrast, emptiness, monotony, and familiarity make our memories shrink.
The same space of time seems shorter as we grow older—that is, the days, the months, and the years do so; whether the hours do so is doubtful, and the minutes and seconds to all appearance remain about the same. An old man probably does not feel his past life to be any longer than he did when he was a boy, though it may be a dozen times as long. In most men all the events of manhood's years are of such familiar sorts that the individual impressions do not last. At the same time more and more of the earlier events get forgotten, the result being that no greater multitude of distinct objects remains in the memory.
As we get older, the same amount of time feels shorter—that is, the days, months, and years do; whether the hours feel shorter is questionable, and minutes and seconds seem to stay pretty much the same. An older person probably doesn’t feel that their past life is any longer than it did when they were a kid, even if it’s actually a dozen times longer. For most men, all the experiences of adult life are so familiar that the individual memories don’t stick. At the same time, more and more of the earlier events get forgotten, resulting in no larger collection of distinct items remaining in memory.
So much for the apparent shortening of tracts of time in retrospect. They shorten in passing whenever we are so fully occupied with their content as not to note the actual time itself. A day full of excitement, with no pause, is said to pass 'ere we know it.' On the contrary, a day full of waiting, of unsatisfied desire for change, will seem a small eternity. Tædium, ennui, Langweile, boredom, are words for which, probably, every language known to man has its equivalent. It comes about whenever, from the relative emptiness of content of a tract of time, we grow attentive to the passage of the time itself. Expecting, and being ready for, a new impression to succeed; when it fails to come, we get an empty time instead of it; and such experiences, ceaselessly renewed, make us most formidably aware of the extent of the mere time itself. Close your eyes and simply wait to hear somebody tell you that a minute has elapsed, and the full length of your leisure with it seems incredible. You engulf yourself into its bowels as into those of that interminable first week of an ocean voyage, and find yourself wondering that history can have{285} overcome many such periods in its course. All because you attend so closely to the mere feeling of the time per se, and because your attention to that is susceptible of such fine-grained successive subdivision. The odiousness of the whole experience comes from its insipidity; for stimulation is the indispensable requisite for pleasure in an experience, and the feeling of bare time is the least stimulating experience we can have. The sensation of tedium is a protest, says Volkmann, against the entire present.
So much for the apparent shortening of time when we look back. Time seems to fly by when we are so caught up in what we're doing that we don't even notice it. A day filled with excitement, with no breaks, is said to pass ‘before we know it.’ On the flip side, a day filled with waiting and unfulfilled longing for change can feel like a small eternity. Words like tædium, ennui, Langweile, and boredom probably have equivalents in every language out there. This feeling arises when we become aware of time itself due to the relative emptiness of what’s happening during that time. When we expect and prepare for a new experience but it doesn’t arrive, we end up with an empty stretch of time instead; and those moments, repeated endlessly, make us painfully aware of just how long that time really is. Close your eyes and just wait for someone to tell you that a minute has gone by, and suddenly that stretch of free time seems unbelievable. You sink into it like you're stuck in that never-ending first week of an ocean voyage, and you may wonder how history has managed to endure so many similar stretches. This happens because you focus so intensely on the feeling of time itself, and that attention can be broken down into such fine details. The unpleasantness of the whole experience stems from its blandness; after all, stimulation is essential for enjoyment, and simply feeling the passage of time is the least stimulating experience we can have. The sensation of boredom is a protest, according to Volkmann, against the entire present.
The feeling of past time is a present feeling. In reflecting on the modus operandi of our consciousness of time, we are at first tempted to suppose it the easiest thing in the world to understand. Our inner states succeed each other. They know themselves as they are; then of course, we say, they must know their own succession. But this philosophy is too crude; for between the mind's own changes being successive, and knowing their own succession, lies as broad a chasm as between the object and subject of any case of cognition in the world. A succession of feelings, in and of itself, is not a feeling of succession. And since, to our successive feelings, a feeling of their succession is added, that must be treated as an additional fact requiring its own special elucidation, which this talk about the feelings knowing their time-relations as a matter of course leaves all untouched.
The feeling of past time is a feeling we have in the present. When we think about how our consciousness perceives time, we might first think it's one of the simplest things to grasp. Our inner experiences follow one another. They recognize themselves as they are, so naturally, we assume they must also be aware of their own sequence. However, this way of thinking is too simplistic; there is a vast difference between the mind's own changes being sequential and actually knowing about that sequence. A series of feelings, by themselves, does not equate to a feeling of succession. And since we add a sense of their succession to our sequential feelings, this must be understood as a separate fact that needs its own explanation, which the idea of feelings automatically knowing their time relationships does not address.
If we represent the actual time-stream of our thinking by an horizontal line, the thought of the stream or of any segment of its length, past, present, or to come, might be figured in a perpendicular raised upon the horizontal at a certain point. The length of this perpendicular stands for a certain object or content, which in this case is the time thought of at the actual moment of the stream upon which the perpendicular is raised.
If we show the actual flow of our thoughts as a horizontal line, the idea of that flow or any part of it—whether it's from the past, present, or future—could be represented by a vertical line rising from the horizontal at a specific point. The height of this vertical line represents a particular object or concept, which in this case is the time we’re considering at that specific moment in the flow where the vertical line is drawn.
There is thus a sort of perspective projection of past objects upon present consciousness, similar to that of wide landscapes upon a camera-screen.
There is therefore a kind of perspective projection of past objects onto present consciousness, just like wide landscapes on a camera screen.
And since we saw a while ago that our maximum distinct{286} perception of duration hardly covers more than a dozen seconds (while our maximum vague perception is probably not more than that of a minute or so), we must suppose that this amount of duration is pictured fairly steadily in each passing instant of consciousness by virtue of some fairly constant feature in the brain-process to which the consciousness is tied. This feature of the brain-process, whatever it be, must be the cause of our perceiving the fact of time at all. The duration thus steadily perceived is hardly more than the 'specious present,' as it was called a few pages back. Its content is in a constant flux, events dawning into its forward end as fast as they fade out of its rearward one, and each of them changing its time-coefficient from 'not yet,' or 'not quite yet,' to 'just gone,' or 'gone,' as it passes by. Meanwhile, the specious present, the intuited duration, stands permanent, like the rainbow on the waterfall, with its own quality unchanged by the events that stream through it. Each of these, as it slips out, retains the power of being reproduced; and when reproduced, is reproduced with the duration and neighbors which it originally had. Please observe, however, that the reproduction of an event, after it has once completely dropped out of the rearward end of the specious present, is an entirely different psychic fact from its direct perception in the specious present as a thing immediately past. A creature might be entirely devoid of reproductive memory, and yet have the time-sense; but the latter would be limited, in his case, to the few seconds immediately passing by. In the next chapter, assuming the sense of time as given, we will turn to the analysis of what happens in reproductive memory, the recall of dated things.{287}
And since we saw earlier that our maximum clear{286} perception of duration doesn’t really exceed a dozen seconds (while our maximum vague perception probably doesn’t go beyond a minute or so), we have to assume that this amount of duration is represented fairly consistently in each moment of consciousness due to some fairly stable aspect of the brain process linked to that consciousness. This aspect of the brain process, whatever it may be, must be the reason we even perceive time at all. The duration we perceive continuously is barely more than the 'specious present,' as mentioned a few pages back. Its content is in constant flux, with events emerging at its front end just as quickly as they fade out at the back end, and each of them shifting its time reference from 'not yet,' or 'not quite yet,' to 'just gone,' or 'gone,' as it passes. Meanwhile, the specious present, the immediate duration we sense, remains fixed, like a rainbow over a waterfall, with its quality unchanged by the events that flow through it. Each of these events, as it slips away, keeps the potential to be recalled; and when recalled, it is brought back with the duration and context it originally had. However, keep in mind that recalling an event, after it has completely faded from the back end of the specious present, is a completely different psychological experience from directly perceiving it in the specious present as something just past. An organism could lack reproductive memory entirely and still have a sense of time, but for that individual, it would be limited to the few seconds currently passing. In the next chapter, assuming the sense of time is established, we will analyze what happens in reproductive memory, the recall of dated things.{287}
CHAPTER XVIII.
MEMORY.
Analysis of the Phenomenon of Memory.—Memory proper, or secondary memory as it might be styled, is the knowledge of a former state of mind after it has already once dropped from consciousness; or rather it is the knowledge of an event, or fact, of which meantime we have not been thinking, with the additional consciousness that we have thought or experienced it before.
Analysis of the Phenomenon of Memory.—Memory, or what could be called secondary memory, is the awareness of a previous state of mind after it has slipped from consciousness; or rather it is the awareness of an event or fact that we haven't been actively thinking about, along with the added awareness that we have thought about or experienced it before.
The first element which such a knowledge involves would seem to be the revival in the mind of an image or copy of the original event. And it is an assumption made by many writers that such revival of an image is all that is needed to constitute the memory of the original occurrence. But such a revival is obviously not a memory, whatever else it may be; it is simply a duplicate, a second event, having absolutely no connection with the first event except that it happens to resemble it. The clock strikes to-day; it struck yesterday; and may strike a million times ere it wears out. The rain pours through the gutter this week; it did so last week; and will do so in sæcula sæculorum. But does the present clock-stroke become aware of the past ones, or the present stream recollect the past stream, because they repeat and resemble them? Assuredly not. And let it not be said that this is because clock-strokes and gutters are physical and not psychical objects; for psychical objects (sensations, for example) simply recurring in successive editions will remember each other on that account no more than clock-strokes do. No memory is involved in the mere fact of recurrence. The successive editions of a feeling are so many independent events, each snug in its{288} own skin. Yesterday's feeling is dead and buried; and the presence of to-day's is no reason why it should resuscitate along with to-day's. A farther condition is required before the present image can be held to stand for a past original.
The first thing this kind of knowledge involves seems to be the revival of an image or copy of the original event in our minds. Many writers assume that simply reviving an image is enough to create a memory of the original occurrence. But this revival is clearly not a memory, no matter what else it might be; it's just a duplicate, a second event that has no real connection to the first event other than that it happens to look like it. The clock strikes today; it struck yesterday; and it may keep striking a million times until it wears out. The rain pours through the gutter this week; it did so last week; and it will do so in sæcula sæculorum. But does the current clock stroke recognize the past ones, or does the current stream remember the past stream just because they repeat and look alike? Definitely not. And let’s not say this is because clock strokes and gutters are physical rather than psychological objects; because psychological objects (like sensations, for example) simply recurring in different instances won’t remember one another for that reason any more than clock strokes do. No memory is involved just from the fact of recurrence. The different instances of a feeling are separate events, each contained in its own{288} boundaries. Yesterday's feeling is dead and gone; and today’s feeling doesn’t mean it should come back to life with today’s. Another condition is needed before the present image can be considered a past original.
That condition is that the fact imaged be expressly referred to the past, thought as in the past. But how can we think a thing as in the past, except by thinking of the past together with the thing, and of the relation of the two? And how can we think of the past? In the chapter on Time-perception we have seen that our intuitive or immediate consciousness of pastness hardly carries us more than a few seconds backward of the present instant of time. Remoter dates are conceived, not perceived; known symbolically by names, such as 'last week,' '1850'; or thought of by events which happened in them, as the year in which we attended such a school, or met with such a loss. So that if we wish to think of a particular past epoch, we must think of a name or other symbol, or else of certain concrete events, associated therewithal. Both must be thought of, to think the past epoch adequately. And to 'refer' any special fact to the past epoch is to think that fact with the names and events which characterize its date, to think it, in short, with a lot of contiguous associates.
That condition is that the fact being represented is explicitly linked to the past, considered as in the past. But how can we think of something as being in the past, if not by thinking about the past along with that thing, and the relationship between the two? And how can we think about the past? In the chapter on Time-perception, we've seen that our immediate awareness of past moments only stretches back a few seconds from the present moment. Further back dates are understood, not directly experienced; they are known symbolically by names like 'last week' or '1850'; or they're recalled through events that occurred during those times, like the year we attended a certain school or faced a significant loss. So, if we want to think of a specific past period, we need to recall a name or some other symbol, or certain concrete events associated with it. Both aspects must be considered to adequately think about the past period. To 'link' any specific fact to the past period means to think of that fact along with the names and events that define its time, essentially thinking of it with a lot of related associations.
But even this would not be memory. Memory requires more than mere dating of a fact in the past. It must be dated in my past. In other words, I must think that I directly experienced its occurrence. It must have that 'warmth and intimacy' which were so often spoken of in the chapter on the Self, as characterizing all experiences 'appropriated' by the thinker as his own.
But even this wouldn’t count as memory. Memory needs more than just noting a fact from the past. It has to be tied to my past. In other words, I have to feel like I actually experienced it myself. It needs that 'warmth and intimacy' that we often talked about in the chapter on the Self, which defines all experiences 'appropriated' by the thinker as their own.
Retention and Recall.—Such being the phenomenon of memory, or the analysis of its object, can we see how it comes to pass? can we lay bare its causes?
Retention and Recall.—Given the nature of memory and the examination of its subject, can we understand how this occurs? Can we uncover its causes?
Its complete exercise presupposes two things:
Its complete exercise assumes two things:
1) The retention of the remembered fact; and
1) The keeping of the remembered fact; and
2) Its reminiscence, recollection, reproduction, or recall.
Its memory, recollection, reproduction, or recall.
Now the cause both of retention and of recollection is the law of habit in the nervous system, working as it does in the 'association of ideas.'
Now the reason we both remember and forget things is the law of habit in the nervous system, which operates in the 'association of ideas.'
Association explains Recall.—Associationists have long explained recollection by association. James Mill gives an account of it which I am unable to improve upon, unless it might be by translating his word 'idea' into 'thing thought of,' or 'object.'
Association explains Recall.—Associationists have long explained recollection through association. James Mill provides an explanation that I can't improve on, except perhaps by changing his word 'idea' to 'thing thought of' or 'object.'
"There is," he says, "a state of mind familiar to all men, in which we are said to remember. In this state it is certain we have not in the mind the idea which we are trying to have in it. How is it, then, that we proceed, in the course of our endeavor, to procure its introduction into the mind? If we have not the idea itself, we have certain ideas connected with it. We run over those ideas, one after another, in hopes that some one of them will suggest the idea we are in quest of; and if any one of them does, it is always one so connected with it as to call it up in the way of association. I meet an old acquaintance, whose name I do not remember, and wish to recollect. I run over a number of names, in hopes that some of them may be associated with the idea of the individual. I think of all the circumstances in which I have seen him engaged; the time when I knew him, the persons along with whom I knew him, the things he did, or the things he suffered; and if I chance upon any idea with which the name is associated, then immediately I have the recollection; if not, my pursuit of it is vain. There is another set of cases, very familiar, but affording very important evidence on the subject. It frequently happens that there are matters which we desire not to forget. What is the contrivance{290} to which we have recourse for preserving the memory—that is, for making sure that it will be called into existence when it is our wish that it should? All men invariably employ the same expedient. They endeavor to form an association between the idea of the thing to be remembered and some sensation, or some idea, which they know beforehand will occur at or near the time when they wish the remembrance to be in their minds. If this association is formed and the association or idea with which it has been formed occurs, the sensation, or idea, calls up the remembrance, and the object of him who formed the association is attained. To use a vulgar instance: a man receives a commission from his friend, and, that he may not forget it, ties a knot in his handkerchief. How is this fact to be explained? First of all, the idea of the commission is associated with the making of the knot. Next, the handkerchief is a thing which it is known beforehand will be frequently seen, and of course at no great distance of time from the occasion on which the memory is desired. The handkerchief being seen, the knot is seen, and this sensation recalls the idea of the commission, between which and itself the association had been purposely formed."
"There is," he says, "a state of mind that everyone knows, where we are said to remember. In this state, it's clear that we do not have the idea we're trying to recall in our minds. So how do we go about bringing it into our consciousness? If we don't have the idea itself, we have certain related ideas. We go through those ideas one by one, hoping that one of them will trigger the idea we’re searching for; and if any of them do, it’s always one that’s connected in such a way that it brings it up through association. I run into an old friend whose name I can't remember and I want to recall it. I try to think of a bunch of names, hoping that one of them is linked to that person. I consider all the situations where I’ve seen him; the time when I knew him, the people I knew him with, the things he did, or the things he endured; and if I happen upon any idea related to the name, then I instantly remember; if not, my search is pointless. There’s another common situation, which provides important insights on this topic. It often happens that there are things we want to remember. What strategy{290} do we use to ensure that these memories will come back to us when we want them to? Everyone consistently uses the same method. They try to create a link between the idea of what they want to remember and some sensation, or another idea, which they already know will come up around the time when they want to recall that memory. If this connection is established and the associated idea or sensation appears, it brings back the memory, and the person who made the connection achieves their goal. To illustrate with a simple example: a man gets a favor from his friend, and to make sure he doesn’t forget it, he ties a knot in his handkerchief. How can we explain this? First, the idea of the favor is linked to making the knot. Next, the handkerchief is something that will be seen often, and obviously, it will be around close to the time when he wants to remember. When the handkerchief is seen, the knot is visible, and that triggers the thought of the favor, thanks to the connection that was deliberately made."
In short, we make search in our memory for a forgotten idea, just as we rummage our house for a lost object. In both cases we visit what seems to us the probable neighborhood of that which we miss. We turn over the things under which, or within which, or alongside of which, it may possibly be; and if it lies near them, it soon comes to view. But these matters, in the case of a mental object sought, are nothing but its associates. The machinery of recall is thus the same as the machinery of association, and the machinery of association, as we know, is nothing but the elementary law of habit in the nerve-centres.
In short, we search our memory for a forgotten idea just like we dig through our house for a lost item. In both situations, we check what seems to be the likely area where what we’re looking for might be. We move aside things that could possibly be hiding it; if it’s close by, it usually becomes clear soon enough. However, in the case of a mental object we're trying to find, these are just its associates. The process of remembering works the same way as the process of association, and the process of association, as we know, is simply the basic law of habit in the nerve centers.
It also explains retention. And this same law of habit is the machinery of retention also. Retention means liability to recall, and it means nothing more than such liability. The only proof of there being retention is that{291} recall actually takes place. The retention of an experience is, in short, but another name for the possibility of thinking it again, or the tendency to think it again, with its past surroundings. Whatever accidental cue may turn this tendency into an actuality, the permanent ground of the tendency itself lies in the organized neural paths by which the cue calls up the memorable experience, the past associates, the sense that the self was there, the belief that it all really happened, etc., as previously described. When the recollection is of the 'ready' sort, the resuscitation takes place the instant the cue arises; when it is slow, resuscitation comes after delay. But be the recall prompt or slow, the condition which makes it possible at all (or, in other words, the 'retention' of the experience) is neither more nor less than the brain-paths which associate the experience with the occasion and cue of the recall. When slumbering, these paths are the condition of retention; when active, they are the condition of recall.
It also explains retention. And this same law of habit is the mechanism of retention as well. Retention means the ability to recall, and it literally means nothing more than that ability. The only proof that retention exists is that{291} recall actually happens. In short, the retention of an experience is just another way of saying the possibility of thinking about it again, or the tendency to think about it again, along with its past context. Whatever random cue may turn this tendency into reality, the permanent foundation of the tendency itself lies in the organized neural pathways that the cue uses to bring up the memorable experience, the past associations, the sense that the self was present, the belief that it all really happened, etc., as previously described. When the memory is of the 'ready' variety, the recall happens the moment the cue appears; when it is slow, memory retrieval takes some time. But whether the recall is quick or slow, the condition that makes it possible at all (or, in other words, the 'retention' of the experience) is simply the brain pathways that connect the experience with the situation and cue of the recall. When dormant, these pathways facilitate retention; when active, they enable recall.
Brain-scheme.—A simple scheme will now make the whole cause of memory plain. Let n be a past event, o its 'setting' (concomitants, date, self present, warmth and intimacy, etc., etc., as already set forth), and m some present thought or fact which may appropriately become the occasion of its recall. Let the nerve-centres, active in the thought of m, n, and o, be represented by M, N, and O, respectively; then the existence of the paths symbolized by the lines between M and N and N and O will be the fact indicated by the phrase 'retention of the event n in the memory,' and the excitement of the brain along these paths will be the condition of the event n's actual recall. The retention of n, it will be observed, is no mysterious storing up of an 'idea' in an unconscious state. It is not a fact of the mental order at all. It is a{292} purely physical phenomenon, a morphological feature, the presence of these 'paths,' namely, in the finest recesses of the brain's tissue. The recall or recollection, on the other hand, is a psycho-physical phenomenon, with both a bodily and a mental side. The bodily side is the excitement of the paths in question; the mental side is the conscious representation of the past occurrence, and the belief that we experienced it before.
Brain-scheme.—A simple model will now clarify the whole concept of memory. Let n be a past event, o its 'setting' (surroundings, date, our presence, warmth and intimacy, etc., as previously described), and m some current thought or fact that can trigger its recall. Let the nerve centers involved in the thoughts of m, n, and o be represented by M, N, and O, respectively; then the existence of the paths indicated by the lines between M and N and N and O will represent what we mean by 'retention of the event n in memory,' and the excitement of the brain along these paths will be the condition necessary for the actual recall of the event n. It should be noted that the retention of n is not some mysterious storage of an 'idea' in an unconscious state. It is not a mental fact at all. It is a{292} purely physical phenomenon, a structural feature, that is, the presence of these 'paths' in the intricate layers of brain tissue. The recall or memory, on the other hand, is a psycho-physical phenomenon, involving both a physical and a mental aspect. The physical aspect is the activation of the relevant paths; the mental aspect is the conscious awareness of the past event and the belief that we have experienced it before.
The only hypothesis, in short, to which the facts of inward experience give countenance is that the brain-tracts excited by the event proper, and those excited in its recall, are in part DIFFERENT from each other. If we could revive the past event without any associates we should exclude the possibility of memory, and simply dream that we were undergoing the experience as if for the first time. Wherever, in fact, the recalled event does appear without a definite setting, it is hard to distinguish it from a mere creation of fancy. But in proportion as its image lingers and recalls associates which gradually become more definite, it grows more and more distinctly into a remembered thing. For example, I enter a friend's room and see on the wall a painting. At first I have the strange, wondering consciousness, 'Surely I have seen that before,' but when or how does not become clear. There only clings to the picture a sort of penumbra of familiarity,—when suddenly I exclaim: "I have it! It is a copy of part of one of the Fra Angelicos in the Florentine Academy—I recollect it there." Only when the image of the Academy arises does the picture become remembered, as well as seen.
The only hypothesis, in short, that the facts of internal experience support is that the brain pathways activated by the actual event, and those activated when recalling it, are partly DIFFERENT from each other. If we could bring back the past event without any connections, we would eliminate the possibility of memory and simply imagine that we were experiencing it as if for the first time. In fact, whenever the recalled event appears without a clear context, it's difficult to tell it apart from a mere figment of imagination. However, as its image persists and recalls associations that gradually become clearer, it transforms more distinctly into something we remember. For example, I walk into a friend's room and see a painting on the wall. At first, I have this strange, curious feeling, thinking, 'I’ve definitely seen that before,' but I can’t remember when or how. There’s only a vague sense of familiarity with the picture—until suddenly I exclaim: "I’ve got it! It’s a copy of part of one of the Fra Angelicos in the Florentine Academy—I remember it from there." Only when the image of the Academy comes to mind does the painting become something I remember, as well as something I can see.
The Conditions of Goodness in Memory.—The remembered fact being n, then, the path N—O is what arouses for n its setting when it is recalled, and makes it other than a mere imagination. The path M—N, on the other hand, gives the cue or occasion of its being recalled at all. Memory being thus altogether conditioned on brain-paths, its excellence in a given individual will depend partly on the NUMBER and partly on the PERSISTENCE of these paths.{293}
The Conditions of Goodness in Memory.—When the fact being remembered is n, the path N—O activates its context when it is recalled, making it more than just a simple imagination. On the other hand, the path M—N provides the cue or reason for its retrieval at all. Memory is entirely based on brain pathways, so its effectiveness in an individual depends partly on the NUMBER and partly on the PERSISTENCE of these pathways.{293}
The persistence or permanence of the paths is a physiological property of the brain-tissue of the individual, whilst their number is altogether due to the facts of his mental experience. Let the quality of permanence in the paths be called the native tenacity, or physiological retentiveness. This tenacity differs enormously from infancy to old age, and from one person to another. Some minds are like wax under a seal—no impression, however disconnected with others, is wiped out. Others, like a jelly, vibrate to every touch, but under usual conditions retain no permanent mark. These latter minds, before they can recollect a fact, must weave it into their permanent stores of knowledge. They have no desultory memory. Those persons, on the contrary who retain names, dates and addresses, anecdotes, gossip, poetry, quotations, and all sorts of miscellaneous facts, without an effort, have desultory memory in a high degree, and certainly owe it to the unusual tenacity of their brain-substance for any path once formed therein. No one probably was ever effective on a voluminous scale without a high degree of this physiological retentiveness. In the practical as in the theoretic life, the man whose acquisitions stick is the man who is always achieving and advancing, whilst his neighbors, spending most of their time in relearning what they once knew but have forgotten, simply hold their own. A Charlemagne, a Luther, a Leibnitz, a Walter Scott, any example, in short, of your quarto or folio editions of mankind, must needs have amazing retentiveness of the purely physiological sort. Men without this retentiveness may excel in the quality of their work at this point or at that, but will never do such mighty sums of it, or be influential contemporaneously on such a scale.
The persistence or permanence of the brain's pathways is a physiological trait of an individual's brain tissue, while their number is entirely a result of mental experiences. Let's refer to the quality of permanence in these pathways as native tenacity or physiological retentiveness. This tenacity varies significantly from infancy to old age and from one person to another. Some minds are like wax under a seal—no impression, regardless of how different, is removed. Others, like jelly, respond to every touch but usually don't hold a lasting imprint. These latter minds need to integrate information into their permanent knowledge before they can remember it. They lack a desultory memory. In contrast, people who effortlessly remember names, dates, addresses, anecdotes, gossip, poetry, quotations, and various miscellaneous facts possess a high degree of desultory memory and clearly benefit from the unusual tenacity of their brain substance once a path has been formed. It's unlikely anyone has ever been highly effective on a large scale without a strong degree of this physiological retentiveness. In both practical and theoretical life, the person whose knowledge sticks is the one who is continually achieving and progressing, while others, who spend most of their time refreshing their memory on what they've forgotten, simply maintain the status quo. Figures like Charlemagne, Luther, Leibnitz, and Walter Scott—any example from major historical figures—must have had remarkable physiological retentiveness. Individuals without this retentiveness might excel in the quality of their work in certain areas, but they will never produce such a substantial amount of work or have a wide-ranging influence during their time.
But there comes a time of life for all of us when we can do no more than hold our own in the way of acquisitions, when the old paths fade as fast as the new ones form in our brain, and when we forget in a week quite as much as we can learn in the same space of time. This equilibrium may{294} last many, many years. In extreme old age it is upset in the reverse direction, and forgetting prevails over acquisition, or rather there is no acquisition. Brain-paths are so transient that in the course of a few minutes of conversation the same question is asked and its answer forgotten half a dozen times. Then the superior tenacity of the paths formed in childhood becomes manifest: the dotard will retrace the facts of his earlier years after he has lost all those of later date.
But there comes a point in life for all of us when we can do no more than maintain what we have, when the old ways fade just as quickly as new thoughts form in our minds, and when we forget just as much as we can learn within the same week. This balance may{294} last for many, many years. In very old age, this balance shifts, and forgetting takes over acquisition, or rather, there’s no new acquisition at all. Our brain pathways are so fleeting that during just a few minutes of conversation, the same question can be asked and its answer forgotten multiple times. Then, the stronger memory pathways formed in childhood become clear: an elderly person can recall facts from their early years after losing track of more recent ones.
So much for the permanence of the paths. Now for their number.
So much for the permanence of the paths. Now, let's talk about how many there are.
It is obvious that the more there are of such paths as M—N in the brain, and the more of such possible cues or occasions for the recall of n in the mind, the prompter and surer, on the whole, the memory of n will be, the more frequently one will be reminded of it, the more avenues of approach to it one will possess. In mental terms, the more other facts a fact is associated with in the mind, the better possession of it our memory retains. Each of its associates becomes a hook to which it hangs, a means to fish it up by when sunk beneath the surface. Together, they form a network of attachments by which it is woven into the entire tissue of our thought. The 'secret of a good memory' is thus the secret of forming diverse and multiple associations with every fact we care to retain. But this forming of associations with a fact, what is it but thinking about the fact as much as possible? Briefly, then, of two men with the same outward experiences and the same amount of mere native tenacity, the one who THINKS over his experiences most, and weaves them into systematic relations with each other, will be the one with the best memory. We see examples of this on every hand. Most men have a good memory for facts connected with their own pursuits. The college athlete who remains a dunce at his books will astonish you by his knowledge of men's 'records' in various feats and games, and will be a walking dictionary of sporting statistics. The reason is that he is constantly{295} going over these things in his mind, and comparing and making series of them. They form for him not so many odd facts, but a concept-system—so they stick. So the merchant remembers prices, the politician other politicians' speeches and votes, with a copiousness which amazes outsiders, but which the amount of thinking they bestow on these subjects easily explains. The great memory for facts which a Darwin and a Spencer reveal in their books is not incompatible with the possession on their part of a brain with only a middling degree of physiological retentiveness. Let a man early in life set himself the task of verifying such a theory as that of evolution, and facts will soon cluster and cling to him like grapes to their stem. Their relations to the theory will hold them fast; and the more of these the mind is able to discern, the greater the erudition will become. Meanwhile the theorist may have little, if any, desultory memory. Unutilizable facts may be unnoted by him and forgotten as soon as heard. An ignorance almost as encyclopædic as his erudition may coexist with the latter, and hide, as it were, in the interstices of its web. Those who have had much to do with scholars and savants will readily think of examples of the class of mind I mean.
It’s clear that the more pathways like M—N exist in the brain, and the more cues or events there are to help recall n, the quicker and more reliably the memory of n will be. This means that you’ll be reminded of it more often, and will have more ways to access it. In mental terms, the more facts a fact is connected to in the mind, the better we remember it. Each of its connections acts as a hook that helps pull it up when it's buried deep. Together, these connections create a web that integrates it into the fabric of our thoughts. The ‘secret to having a good memory’ is really about forming diverse associations with every piece of information we want to keep. But what does forming these associations mean if not thinking about the information as much as possible? So, when comparing two people with the same experiences and natural memory ability, the one who THINKS about his experiences the most and links them systematically will have the better memory. We see evidence of this everywhere. Most people have good memories for facts related to their interests. A college athlete might struggle with academics, yet amaze you with his knowledge of athletic records and statistics; he often reflects on these facts, organizing them into sequences. They aren’t just random facts to him; they're part of a conceptual framework—this is why they stick. Similarly, a merchant remembers prices, while a politician recalls other politicians’ speeches and votes with surprising detail, which is simply due to the amount of thought they invest in these topics. The impressive memory for facts that figures like Darwin and Spencer show in their writings doesn’t conflict with them having only an average level of memory retention biologically. If someone commits early in life to exploring a concept like evolution, facts will soon connect to him like grapes on a vine. The relationships to the theory will anchor these facts, and the more connections the mind makes, the greater the knowledge will be. Meanwhile, the theorist might possess little, if any, random memory. He might overlook irrelevant facts and forget them as soon as he hears them. An ignorance that is almost as vast as his knowledge may coexist with it, hidden within the gaps of his understanding. Those who have interacted extensively with scholars and savants will easily recall examples of the type of mindset I mean.
In a system, every fact is connected with every other by some thought-relation. The consequence is that every fact is retained by the combined suggestive power of all the other facts in the system, and forgetfulness is well-nigh impossible.
In a system, every fact is linked to every other fact through some kind of thought connection. As a result, every fact is preserved by the collective suggestive influence of all the other facts in the system, making forgetfulness almost impossible.
The reason why cramming is such a bad mode of study is now made clear. I mean by cramming that way of preparing for examinations by committing 'points' to memory during a few hours or days of intense application immediately preceding the final ordeal, little or no work having been performed during the previous course of the term. Things learned thus in a few hours, on one occasion, for one purpose, cannot possibly have formed many associations with other things in the mind. Their brain-processes{296} are led into by few paths, and are relatively little liable to be awakened again. Speedy oblivion is the almost inevitable fate of all that is committed to memory in this simple way. Whereas, on the contrary, the same materials taken in gradually, day after day, recurring in different contexts, considered in various relations, associated with other external incidents, and repeatedly reflected on, grow into such a system, form such connections with the rest of the mind's fabric, lie open to so many paths of approach, that they remain permanent possessions. This is the intellectual reason why habits of continuous application should be enforced in educational establishments. Of course there is no moral turpitude in cramming. Did it lead to the desired end of secure learning, it were infinitely the best method of study. But it does not; and students themselves should understand the reason why.
The reason cramming is such a poor way to study is now clear. By cramming, I mean the practice of preparing for exams by memorizing 'points' in just a few hours or days of intense focus right before the final test, with little or no effort being put in during the rest of the term. Things learned like this in a short time, for one occasion, cannot create many connections with other information in the mind. The brain processes{296} are accessed via few pathways and are much less likely to be triggered again. Quick forgetting is almost the inevitable outcome of anything memorized in this straightforward manner. In contrast, the same material learned gradually, day by day, appearing in different contexts, examined in various ways, linked to other experiences, and repeatedly thought about, develops into a system, forms connections with the rest of the mind’s structure, and is accessible through many pathways, resulting in lasting knowledge. This is the intellectual reason why habits of consistent study should be encouraged in educational institutions. Of course, there’s no moral failing in cramming. If it led to true understanding, it would be the best method of study. But it doesn’t, and students should grasp why that is.
One's native retentiveness is unchangeable. It will now appear clear that all improvement of the memory lies in the line of ELABORATING THE ASSOCIATES of each of the several things to be remembered. No amount of culture would seem capable of modifying a man's GENERAL retentiveness. This is a physiological quality, given once for all with his organization, and which he can never hope to change. It differs no doubt in disease and health; and it is a fact of observation that it is better in fresh and vigorous hours than when we are fagged or ill. We may say, then, that a man's native tenacity will fluctuate somewhat with his hygiene, and that whatever is good for his tone of health will also be good for his memory. We may even say that whatever amount of intellectual exercise is bracing to the general tone and nutrition of the brain will also be profitable to the general retentiveness. But more than this we cannot say; and this, it is obvious, is far less than most people believe.
A person's natural ability to remember is fixed. It's now clear that all memory improvement depends on DEVELOPING THE ASSOCIATIONS of each item to be remembered. No level of education seems able to change a person's OVERALL memory capacity. This is a physiological trait, given at birth, and it's something he can never expect to alter. It certainly varies between health and illness; and it's been observed that memory is better during fresh and energetic times than when we're tired or unwell. We can say that a person's natural memory will vary somewhat with their overall health, and that whatever is good for their health will also benefit their memory. We might even say that any amount of mental exercise that enhances the overall function and nourishment of the brain will be beneficial for memory retention. But that's about all we can say; and it’s clear that this is much less than what most people think.
It is, in fact, commonly thought that certain exercises, systematically repeated, will strengthen, not only a man's remembrance of the particular facts used in the exercises,{297} but his faculty for remembering facts at large. And a plausible case is always made out by saying that practice in learning words by heart makes it easier to learn new words in the same way. If this be true, then what I have just said is false, and the whole doctrine of memory as due to 'paths' must be revised. But I am disposed to think the alleged fact untrue. I have carefully questioned several mature actors on the point, and all have denied that the practice of learning parts has made any such difference as is alleged. What it has done for them is to improve their power of studying a part systematically. Their mind is now full of precedents in the way of intonation, emphasis, gesticulation; the new words awaken distinct suggestions and decisions; are caught up, in fact, into a preëxisting network, like the merchant's prices, or the athlete's store of 'records,' and are recollected easier, although the mere native tenacity is not a whit improved, and is usually, in fact, impaired by age. It is a case of better remembering by better thinking. Similarly when schoolboys improve by practice in ease of learning by heart, the improvement will, I am sure, be always found to reside in the mode of study of the particular piece (due to the greater interest, the greater suggestiveness, the generic similarity with other pieces, the more sustained attention, etc., etc.), and not at all to any enhancement of the brute retentive power.
It's commonly believed that certain exercises, when repeated regularly, will strengthen not only a person's recall of the specific facts used in those exercises,{297} but also their overall ability to remember facts. People often argue that practicing memorizing words makes it easier to learn new words in the same way. If that's true, then what I just said is incorrect, and the whole idea of memory being based on 'paths' needs to be adjusted. However, I tend to think this claim is false. I've asked several experienced actors about this, and they all denied that learning lines has made any significant difference as suggested. Instead, it has helped them improve their ability to study a part methodically. Their minds are now filled with examples of intonation, emphasis, and gestures; new words trigger specific associations and decisions; they essentially fit into an existing network, much like a merchant's prices or an athlete's records, making them easier to recall, while their natural memory retention has not actually improved and often declines with age. It's a case of better remembering through better thinking. Similarly, when students get better at memorizing through practice, that improvement is always linked to the way they study the specific material (thanks to increased interest, greater suggestiveness, similarities to other pieces, more focused attention, etc.), and not due to any enhancement of basic memory retention.
The error I speak of pervades an otherwise useful and judicious book, 'How to Strengthen the Memory,' by Dr. M. C. Holbrook of New York. The author fails to distinguish between the general physiological retentiveness and the retention of particular things, and talks as if both must be benefited by the same means.
The mistake I'm referring to affects an otherwise helpful and wise book, 'How to Strengthen the Memory,' by Dr. M. C. Holbrook from New York. The author doesn't differentiate between the overall ability to retain information and the retention of specific details, and suggests that both can be improved with the same methods.
"I am now treating," he says, "a case of loss of memory in a person advanced in years, who did not know that his memory had failed most remarkably till I told him of it. He is making vigorous efforts to bring it back again, and with partial success. The method pursued is to spend two hours daily, one in the morning and one in the evening, in{298} exercising this faculty. The patient is instructed to give the closest attention to all that he learns, so that it shall be impressed on his mind clearly. He is asked to recall every evening all the facts and experiences of the day, and again the next morning. Every name heard is written down and impressed on his mind clearly, and an effort made to recall it at intervals. Ten names from among public men are ordered to be committed to memory every week. A verse of poetry is to be learned, also a verse from the Bible, daily. He is asked to remember the number of the page in any book where any interesting fact is recorded. These and other methods are slowly resuscitating a failing memory."
"I am currently treating," he says, "a case of memory loss in an elderly person who didn't even realize how significantly his memory had declined until I pointed it out. He is putting in a lot of effort to regain it, with some success. The approach involves spending two hours each day—one in the morning and one in the evening—exercising this skill. The patient is instructed to pay close attention to everything he learns so that it sticks in his mind clearly. Each evening, he is asked to recall all the facts and experiences from the day, and again the following morning. Every name he hears is written down and impressed on his mind, and he makes an effort to recall it at intervals. He is required to memorize ten names of public figures every week. A verse of poetry and a verse from the Bible are to be learned daily. He is also asked to remember the page number in any book where interesting facts are recorded. These and other techniques are gradually reviving a failing memory."
I find it very hard to believe that the memory of the poor old gentleman is a bit the better for all this torture except in respect of the particular facts thus wrought into it, and other matters that may have been connected therewithal.
I find it really hard to believe that the memory of the poor old man is any better from all this torture, except for the specific details added to it and other things that might be related to it.
Improving the Memory.—All improvement of memory consists, then, in the improvement of one's habitual methods of recording facts. Methods have been divided into the mechanical, the ingenious, and the judicious.
Improving the Memory.—All improvement of memory is about enhancing one's regular ways of recording information. Methods are categorized into mechanical, clever, and wise.
The mechanical methods consist in the intensification, prolongation, and repetition of the impression to be remembered. The modern method of teaching children to read by blackboard work, in which each word is impressed by the fourfold channel of eye, ear, voice, and hand, is an example of an improved mechanical method of memorizing.
The mechanical methods involve enhancing, extending, and repeating the impression that needs to be remembered. A contemporary example of an enhanced mechanical method for teaching kids to read is the use of blackboard work, where each word is learned through four channels: sight, sound, speech, and touch.
Judicious methods of remembering things are nothing but logical ways of conceiving them and working them into rational systems, classifying them, analyzing them into parts, etc., etc. All the sciences are such methods.
Smart ways of remembering things are just logical approaches to understanding them and organizing them into rational systems, sorting them, breaking them down into parts, and so on. All the sciences are examples of such methods.
Of ingenious methods many have been invented, under the name of technical memories. By means of these systems it is often possible to retain entirely disconnected facts, lists of names, numbers, and so forth, so multitudinous as to be entirely unrememberable in a natural way.{299} The method consists usually in a framework learned mechanically, of which the mind is supposed to remain in secure and permanent possession. Then, whatever is to be remembered is deliberately associated by some fanciful analogy or connection with some part of this framework, and this connection thenceforward helps its recall. The best known and most used of these devices is the figure-alphabet. To remember numbers, e.g., a figure-alphabet is first formed, in which each numerical digit is represented by one or more letters. The number is then translated into such letters as will best make a word, if possible a word suggestive of the object to which the number belongs. The word will then be remembered when the numbers alone might be forgotten.[38] The recent system of Loisette is a method, much less mechanical, of weaving the thing into associations which may aid its recall.
Many clever techniques have been created, known as technical memories. These systems often make it possible to remember completely unrelated facts, lists of names, numbers, and so on, that are too numerous to recall naturally.{299} The method usually involves a structure that is learned mechanically and is meant to stay securely in the mind. Then, anything to be remembered is intentionally linked through some imaginative analogy or connection to parts of this structure, and this connection helps with recall afterwards. The most well-known and widely used of these tools is the figure-alphabet. To remember numbers, for example, a figure-alphabet is created where each numerical digit corresponds to one or more letters. The number is then translated into these letters to form a word, ideally one that relates to the object of the number. This word will then be remembered even when the numbers might be forgotten.[38] Loisette's recent system is a method that is much less mechanical, focusing on intertwining associations to aid recall.
Recognition.—If, however, a phenomenon be met with too often, and with too great a variety of contexts, although its image is retained and reproduced with correspondingly great facility, it fails to come up with any one particular setting, and the projection of it backwards to a particular past date consequently does not come about. We recognize but do not remember it—its associates form too confused a cloud. A similar result comes about when a definite setting is only nascently aroused. We then feel that we have seen the object already, but when or where we cannot say, though we may seem to ourselves to be on the brink of saying it. That nascent cerebral excitations can thus affect consciousness is obvious from what happens when we seek to remember a name. It tingles, it trembles on the verge, but does not come. Just such a tingling and trembling of unrecovered{300} associates is the penumbra of recognition that may surround any experience and make it seem familiar, though we know not why.
Recognition.—If we encounter a phenomenon too frequently and in too many different contexts, even though its image is easily remembered and reproduced, it doesn’t connect to any specific situation, making it impossible to trace it back to a particular time in the past. We recognize it but do not remember it—its connections create too muddled a mix. A similar situation occurs when a definite context is only vaguely triggered. We feel like we’ve seen the object before, but we can’t specify when or where, even if it seems like we’re close to recalling it. It’s clear that such initial brain activity can influence consciousness, as seen when we try to recall a name. It’s just out of reach, tingling and trembling on the edge, but it doesn’t come. This sensation of unrecovered{300} associations forms the shadow of recognition that can surround any experience and make it feel familiar, even if we don’t know why.
There is a curious experience which everyone seems to have had—the feeling that the present moment in its completeness has been experienced before—we were saying just this thing, in just this place, to just these people, etc. This 'sense of preëxistence' has been treated as a great mystery and occasioned much speculation. Dr. Wigan considered it due to a dissociation of the action of the two hemispheres, one of them becoming conscious a little later than the other, but both of the same fact. I must confess that the quality of mystery seems to me here a little strained. I have over and over again in my own case succeeded in resolving the phenomenon into a case of memory, so indistinct that whilst some past circumstances are presented again, the others are not. The dissimilar portions of the past do not arise completely enough at first for the date to be identified. All we get is the present scene with a general suggestion of pastness about it. That faithful observer, Prof. Lazarus, interprets the phenomenon in the same way; and it is noteworthy that just as soon as the past context grows complete and distinct the emotion of weirdness fades from the experience.
There's a strange experience that everyone seems to have—the feeling that the current moment has happened before—we were saying the exact same thing, in the exact same place, to the exact same people, etc. This 'sense of déjà vu' has been treated as a great mystery and has sparked a lot of speculation. Dr. Wigan thought it was due to a disconnect between the two hemispheres of the brain, where one becomes aware slightly later than the other, but both are recognizing the same thing. I have to admit that the mysterious aspect seems a bit stretched to me. Personally, I have repeatedly been able to explain the phenomenon as a kind of memory, so vague that while some past details come back, others don’t. The different parts of the past don’t fully come back at first, making it hard to pinpoint when it happened. All we experience is the current scene, along with a vague sense of familiarity. The keen observer, Prof. Lazarus, interprets this phenomenon similarly; and it's interesting to note that as soon as the past context becomes clear and distinct, the feeling of weirdness disappears from the experience.
Forgetting.—In the practical use of our intellect, forgetting is as important a function as remembering. 'Total recall' (see p. 261) we saw to be comparatively rare in association. If we remembered everything, we should on most occasions be as ill off as if we remembered nothing. It would take as long for us to recall a space of time as it took the original time to elapse, and we should never get ahead with our thinking. All recollected times undergo, accordingly, what M. Ribot calls foreshortening; and this foreshortening is due to the omission of an enormous number of the facts which filled them. "We thus reach the paradoxical result," says M. Ribot, "that one condition of remembering is that we should forget. Without totally{301} forgetting a prodigious number of states of consciousness, and momentarily forgetting a large number, we could not remember at all. Oblivion, except in certain cases, is thus no malady of memory, but a condition of its health and its life."
Forgetting.—In how we use our minds, forgetting is just as important as remembering. 'Total recall' (see p. 261) is relatively rare in our associations. If we remembered everything, we would often be just as worse off as if we remembered nothing at all. It would take us just as long to recall a period of time as it did for that time to actually pass, and we wouldn’t be able to think ahead. All the times we remember experience what M. Ribot calls foreshortening; this foreshortening happens because we leave out a huge number of the details that filled those times. "We thus reach the paradoxical result," says M. Ribot, "that one condition of remembering is that we should forget. Without completely forgetting an enormous number of states of consciousness, and temporarily forgetting many others, we couldn't remember anything at all. Oblivion, except in certain cases, is not a disease of memory, but a vital condition for its health and existence."
Pathological Conditions.—Hypnotic subjects as a rule forget all that has happened in their trance. But in a succeeding trance they will often remember the events of a past one. This is like what happens in those cases of 'double personality' in which no recollection of one of the lives is to be found in the other. The sensibility in these cases often differs from one of the alternate personalities to another, the patient being often anæsthetic in certain respects in one of the secondary states. Now the memory may come and go with the sensibility. M. Pierre Janet proved in various ways that what his patients forgot when anæsthetic they remembered when the sensibility returned. For instance, he restored their tactile sense temporarily by means of electric currents, passes, etc., and then made them handle various objects, such as keys and pencils, or make particular movements, like the sign of the cross. The moment the anæsthesia returned they found it impossible to recollect the objects or the acts. 'They had had nothing in their hands, they had done nothing,' etc. The next day, however, sensibility being again restored by similar processes, they remembered perfectly the circumstance, and told what they had handled or done.
Pathological Conditions.—Hypnotic subjects generally forget everything that happens during their trance. However, in a subsequent trance, they often remember events from a previous one. This resembles cases of 'double personality,' where there's no memory of one persona in the other. The sensitivity can vary from one personality to another, with the patient often being numb in certain ways in one of the alternate states. Memory can fluctuate along with this sensitivity. M. Pierre Janet demonstrated in various ways that what his patients forgot when numb, they remembered when their sensitivity returned. For example, he temporarily restored their sense of touch using electric currents, passes, etc., and then made them handle objects like keys and pencils or perform specific actions, like making the sign of the cross. The moment the numbness returned, they found it impossible to recall the objects or actions. 'They hadn't held anything, they hadn't done anything,' etc. The next day, when sensitivity was restored again through similar methods, they perfectly remembered what they had handled or done.
All these pathological facts are showing us that the sphere of possible recollection may be wider than we think, and that in certain matters apparent oblivion is no proof against possible recall under other conditions. They give no countenance, however, to the extravagant opinion that absolutely no part of our experience can be forgotten.{302}
All these abnormal facts show us that the range of what we can remember might be broader than we realize, and in some cases, seeming forgetfulness doesn’t mean we can’t recall things under different circumstances. However, they do not support the extreme view that we can’t forget any part of our experiences.{302}
CHAPTER XIX.
IMAGINATION.
What it is.—Sensations, once experienced, modify the nervous organism, so that copies of them arise again in the mind after the original outward stimulus is gone. No mental copy, however, can arise in the mind, of any kind of sensation which has never been directly excited from without.
What it is.—When we experience sensations, they change our nervous system, allowing us to recall them in our minds even after the original external stimulus is gone. However, no mental representation can form in our minds for any sensation that hasn’t been directly triggered from the outside.
The blind may dream of sights, the deaf of sounds, for years after they have lost their vision or hearing; but the man born deaf can never be made to imagine what sound is like, nor can the man born blind ever have a mental vision. In Locke's words, already quoted, "the mind can frame unto itself no one new simple idea." The originals of them all must have been given from without. Fantasy, or Imagination, are the names given to the faculty of reproducing copies of originals once felt. The imagination is called 'reproductive' when the copies are literal; 'productive' when elements from different originals are recombined so as to make new wholes.
The blind might dream of seeing things, and the deaf might dream of hearing sounds, for years after they've lost their sight or hearing; but a person who was born deaf can never truly understand what sound is like, nor can someone who was born blind ever visualize things in their mind. As Locke noted, "the mind can frame unto itself no one new simple idea." All originals must come from outside. The terms Fantasy or Imagination refer to the ability to recreate copies of originals that were once experienced. Imagination is called 'reproductive' when the copies are exact; it's called 'productive' when elements from different originals are combined to create something new.
When represented with surroundings concrete enough to constitute a date, these pictures, when they revive, form recollections. We have just studied the machinery of recollection. When the mental pictures are of data freely combined, and reproducing no past combination exactly, we have acts of imagination properly so called.
When shown in settings detailed enough to create a date, these images, when they come to life, create memories. We have just examined how memories work. When the mental images are of information mixed together without exactly reproducing any previous combination, we have true acts of imagination.
Men differ in visual imagination. Our ideas or images of past sensible experiences may be either distinct and adequate or dim, blurred, and incomplete. It is likely that the different degrees in which different men are able to make them sharp and complete has had something to do with keeping up such philosophic disputes as that of Berkeley with Locke over abstract ideas. Locke had{303} spoken of our possessing 'the general idea of a triangle' which "must be neither oblique nor rectangle, neither equilateral, equicrural, nor scalenon, but all and none of these at once." Berkeley says: "If any man has the faculty of framing in his mind such an idea of a triangle as is here described, it is in vain to pretend to dispute him out of it, nor would I go about it. All I desire is that the reader would fully and certainly inform himself whether he has such an idea or no."
Men have different levels of visual imagination. Our ideas or images of past sensory experiences can either be clear and complete or fuzzy, unclear, and incomplete. It's likely that the varying abilities of different people to sharpen and complete these images have contributed to ongoing philosophical debates, like Berkeley's disagreement with Locke about abstract ideas. Locke mentioned{303} that we have 'the general idea of a triangle,' which "must be neither oblique nor right, neither equilateral, isosceles, nor scalene, but all and none of these at the same time." Berkeley responds, "If anyone can create in their mind such an idea of a triangle as described here, it's pointless to argue them out of it, and I wouldn't attempt to. All I ask is that the reader takes a moment to truly and definitively figure out whether they have such an idea or not."
Until very recent years it was supposed by philosophers that there was a typical human mind which all individual minds were like, and that propositions of universal validity could be laid down about such faculties as 'the Imagination.' Lately, however, a mass of revelations have poured in which make us see how false a view this is. There are imaginations, not 'the Imagination,' and they must be studied in detail.
Until very recently, philosophers believed there was a typical human mind that all individual minds resembled, and that universal truths could be established about faculties like 'Imagination.' However, lately, a flood of new insights has shown us how incorrect this viewpoint is. There are imaginations, not 'the Imagination,' and they need to be studied in detail.
Mr. Galton in 1880 began a statistical inquiry which may be said to have made an era in descriptive psychology. He addressed a circular to large numbers of persons asking them to describe the image in their mind's eye of their breakfast-table on a given morning. The variations were found to be enormous; and, strange to say, it appeared that eminent scientific men on the average had less visualizing power than younger and more insignificant persons.
Mr. Galton in 1880 started a statistical study that marked a significant point in descriptive psychology. He sent out a survey to many people, asking them to describe the image in their mind's eye of their breakfast table on a specific morning. The differences in responses were vast; oddly enough, it turned out that well-known scientists, on average, had less ability to visualize than younger and less notable individuals.
The reader will find details in Mr. Galton's 'Inquiries into Human Faculty,' pp. 83-114. I have myself for many years collected from each and all of my psychology-students descriptions of their own visual imagination; and found (together with some curious idiosyncrasies) corroboration of all the variations which Mr. Galton reports. As examples, I subjoin extracts from two cases near the ends of the scale. The writers are first cousins, grandsons of a distinguished man of science. The one who is a good visualizer says:
The reader can find details in Mr. Galton's 'Inquiries into Human Faculty,' pp. 83-114. For many years, I've collected descriptions of visual imagination from all my psychology students and found, along with some interesting quirks, confirmation of all the variations Mr. Galton discusses. As examples, I’m including extracts from two cases near the ends of the spectrum. The authors are first cousins and grandsons of a distinguished scientist. The one who has strong visualization skills says:
"This morning's breakfast-table is both dim and bright;{304} it is dim if I try to think of it when my eyes are open upon any object; it is perfectly clear and bright if I think of it with my eyes closed.—All the objects are clear at once, yet when I confine my attention to any one object it becomes far more distinct.—I have more power to recall color than any other one thing: if, for example, I were to recall a plate decorated with flowers I could reproduce in a drawing the exact tone, etc. The color of anything that was on the table is perfectly vivid.—There is very little limitation to the extent of my images: I can see all four sides of a room, I can see all four sides of two, three, four, even more rooms with such distinctness that if you should ask me what was in any particular place in any one, or ask me to count the chairs, etc., I could do it without the least hesitation.—The more I learn by heart the more clearly do I see images of my pages. Even before I can recite the lines I see them so that I could give them very slowly word for word, but my mind is so occupied in looking at my printed image that I have no idea of what I am saying, of the sense of it, etc. When I first found myself doing this I used to think it was merely because I knew the lines imperfectly; but I have quite convinced myself that I really do see an image. The strongest proof that such is really the fact is, I think, the following:
"This morning's breakfast table is both dim and bright; {304} it feels dim when I try to think about it while looking at any object; but it's perfectly clear and bright when I think about it with my eyes closed. I can see all the objects clearly at once, yet when I focus on any single object, it stands out even more. I find it easier to recall color than anything else: for example, if I try to remember a plate decorated with flowers, I could draw it exactly as I see it. The colors of everything on the table are incredibly vivid. There are hardly any limits to how extensive my mental images are: I can visualize all four sides of a room, and I can see all four sides of two, three, four, or even more rooms with such clarity that if you asked me what was in any specific spot in any one of them, or to count the chairs, I could do it without any hesitation. The more I memorize, the clearer the images of my pages become. Even before I can recite the lines, I can see them so well that I could go through them very slowly, word for word. However, my mind is so focused on the printed image that I don’t have any idea of what I’m actually saying or its meaning. When I first noticed this happening, I thought it was just because I didn’t know the lines well enough, but I've come to realize I genuinely see an image. The strongest proof of this, I think, is the following:"
"I can look down the mentally seen page and see the words that commence all the lines, and from any one of these words I can continue the line. I find this much easier to do if the words begin in a straight line than if there are breaks. Example:
"I can look down the mentally visualized page and see the words that start all the lines, and from any of these words I can continue the line. I find it much easier to do this if the words begin in a straight line rather than if there are breaks. Example:
Étant fait.... |
Tous.... |
A des.... |
Que fit.... |
Céres.... |
Avec |
Un fleur.... |
As.... |
(La Fontaine 8. iv.)" |
The poor visualizer says:
The inadequate visualizer says:
"My ability to form mental images seems, from what I have studied of other people's images, to be defective and somewhat peculiar. The process by which I seem to remember any particular event is not by a series of distinct images, but a sort of panorama, the faintest impressions of which are perceptible through a thick fog.—I cannot shut my eyes and get a distinct image of anyone, although I used to be able to a few years ago, and the faculty seems to have gradually slipped away.—In my most vivid dreams, where the events appear like the most real facts, I am often troubled with a dimness of sight which causes the images to appear indistinct.—To come to the question of the breakfast-table, there is nothing definite about it. Everything is vague. I cannot say what I see. I could not possibly count the chairs, but I happen to know that there are ten. I see nothing in detail.—The chief thing is a general impression that I cannot tell exactly what I do see. The coloring is about the same, as far as I can recall it, only very much washed out. Perhaps the only color I can see at all distinctly is that of the table-cloth, and I could probably see the color of the wall-paper if I could remember what color it was."
"My ability to visualize things seems, based on what I've learned about how others do it, to be flawed and a bit unusual. When I remember any specific event, it's not through a series of clear images but more like a blurry panorama, with the faintest impressions showing through a thick fog. I can't just shut my eyes and get a clear image of anyone, even though I used to be able to do that a few years ago, and that ability seems to have gradually faded away. In my most vivid dreams, where the events feel like they are really happening, I'm often bothered by a dimness that makes the images look fuzzy. As for the breakfast table, there's nothing clear about it. Everything is vague. I can’t say what I see. I couldn’t count the chairs, but I know there are ten. I see nothing in detail. The main thing is a general impression, and I can't really describe what I do see. The colors are about the same, as far as I can recall, but very washed out. The only color I can see distinctly is the tablecloth, and I might be able to recall the wall color if I could remember what it was."
A person whose visual imagination is strong finds it hard to understand how those who are without the faculty can think at all. Some people undoubtedly have no visual images at all worthy of the name, and instead of seeing their breakfast-table, they tell you that they remember it or know what was on it. The 'mind-stuff' of which this 'knowing' is made seems to be verbal images exclusively. But if the words 'coffee,' 'bacon,' 'muffins,' and 'eggs' lead a man to speak to his cook, to pay his bills, and to take measures for the morrow's meal exactly as visual and gustatory memories would, why are they not, for all practical intents and purposes, as good a kind of material in which to think? In fact, we may suspect them to be for most purposes better than terms with a richer imaginative{306} coloring. The scheme of relationship and the conclusion being the essential things in thinking, that kind of mind-stuff which is handiest will be the best for the purpose. Now words, uttered or unexpressed, are the handiest mental elements we have. Not only are they very rapidly revivable, but they are revivable as actual sensations more easily than any other items of our experience. Did they not possess some such advantage as this, it would hardly be the case that the older men are and the more effective as thinkers, the more, as a rule, they have lost their visualizing power, as Mr. Galton found to be the case with members of the Royal Society.
A person with a strong visual imagination finds it difficult to understand how those without it can think at all. Some people clearly don't have any visual images that qualify as such, and instead of seeing their breakfast table, they say they remember it or know what was on it. The "mind-stuff" that makes up this "knowing" seems to consist entirely of verbal images. But if the words "coffee," "bacon," "muffins," and "eggs" prompt someone to talk to their cook, settle their bills, and plan for tomorrow's meal just like visual and taste memories would, then why aren't they, for all practical purposes, just as effective for thinking? In fact, we might even think they are better for most purposes than terms with richer imaginative{306} connotations. The structure of relationships and conclusions are the key components of thought, so the type of mind-stuff that is most accessible will be the best fit for the job. Now words, whether spoken or internalized, are the most accessible mental elements we have. They are not only very quickly retrievable, but they can also be recalled as actual sensations more easily than any other aspects of our experience. If they didn’t have this advantage, it wouldn’t be the case that older individuals tend to be more effective thinkers, as Mr. Galton found with members of the Royal Society, even though they typically lose their visualizing ability.
Images of Sounds.—These also differ in individuals. Those who think by preference in auditory images are called audiles by Mr. Galton. This type, says M. Binet, "appears to be rarer than the visual. Persons of this type imagine what they think of in the language of sound. In order to remember a lesson they impress upon their mind, not the look of the page, but the sound of the words. They reason, as well as remember, by ear. In performing a mental addition they repeat verbally the names of the figures, and add, as it were, the sounds, without any thought of the graphic signs. Imagination also takes the auditory form. 'When I write a scene,' said Legouvé to Scribe, 'I hear; but you see. In each phrase which I write, the voice of the personage who speaks strikes my ear. Vous, qui êtes le théâtre même, your actors walk, gesticulate before your eyes; I am a listener, you a spectator.'—'Nothing more true,' said Scribe; 'do you know where I am when I write a piece? In the middle of the parterre.' It is clear that the pure audile, seeking to develop only a single one of his faculties, may, like the pure visualizer, perform astounding feats of memory—Mozart, for example, noting from memory the Miserere of the Sistine Chapel after two hearings; the deaf Beethoven, composing and inwardly repeating his enormous symphonies. On the other hand, the man of auditory{307} type, like the visual, is exposed to serious dangers; for if he lose his auditory images, he is without resource and breaks down completely."
Images of Sounds.—These also vary among individuals. Those who prefer to think in auditory images are referred to as audiles by Mr. Galton. This type, M. Binet notes, "seems to be less common than the visual. People of this type imagine their thoughts in the language of sound. To remember a lesson, they focus on the sound of the words rather than the appearance of the page. They think, as well as recall, by ear. When doing mental addition, they verbally repeat the names of the numbers and mentally add the sounds without considering the written symbols. Their imagination also has an auditory dimension. 'When I write a scene,' Legouvé said to Scribe, 'I hear; but you see. In every phrase I write, the voice of the character speaking resonates in my ear. You, who are the theater itself, have your actors walking and gesturing before your eyes; I am a listener, you are a spectator.'—'Nothing could be more accurate,' Scribe replied; 'do you know where I am when I write a piece? Right in the middle of the audience.' It’s clear that the pure audile, focusing solely on one of his abilities, can, like the pure visualizer, perform remarkable feats of memory—Mozart, for instance, recalling the Miserere from the Sistine Chapel after hearing it just twice; the deaf Beethoven, composing and mentally repeating his vast symphonies. Conversely, the person with an auditory{307} type, similar to the visual type, faces serious risks; if he loses his auditory images, he becomes completely lost and breaks down entirely."
Images of Muscular Sensations.—Professor Stricker of Vienna, who seems to be a 'motile' or to have this form of imagination developed in unusual strength, has given a careful analysis of his own case. His recollections both of his own movements and of those of other things are accompanied invariably by distinct muscular feelings in those parts of his body which would naturally be used in effecting or in following the movement. In thinking of a soldier marching, for example, it is as if he were helping the image to march by marching himself in his rear. And if he suppresses this sympathetic feeling in his own legs and concentrates all his attention on the imagined soldier, the latter becomes, as it were, paralyzed. In general his imagined movements, of whatsoever objects, seem paralyzed, the moment no feelings of movement either in his own eyes or in his own limbs accompany them. The movements of articulate speech play a predominant part in his mental life. "When, after my experimental work," he says, "I proceed to its description, as a rule I reproduce in the first instance only words which I had already associated with the perception of the various details of the observation whilst the latter was going on. For speech plays in all my observing so important a part that I ordinarily clothe phenomena in words as fast as I observe them."
Images of Muscular Sensations.—Professor Stricker from Vienna, who seems to have an exceptionally strong capacity for 'motile' imagination, has provided a detailed analysis of his own experience. His memories of his own movements and those of other objects are always accompanied by distinct muscular sensations in the parts of his body that would naturally be used during the movement. For instance, when imagining a soldier marching, it feels as if he is assisting the image by marching himself in the background. If he suppresses this feeling in his own legs and focuses entirely on the imagined soldier, the soldier seems to become, in a way, paralyzed. Generally, any imagined movements, regardless of the objects involved, appear to become paralyzed the moment there are no sensations of movement in his own eyes or limbs accompanying them. The movements of speaking play a significant role in his mental processes. "When, after my experimental work," he says, "I move on to describing it, I usually start by expressing only those words that I had already associated with the perception of the various details during the observation. For speech is so crucial in all my observations that I typically express phenomena in words as quickly as I observe them."
Most persons, on being asked in what sort of terms they imagine words, will say, 'In terms of hearing.' It is not until their attention is expressly drawn to the point that they find it difficult to say whether auditory images or motor images connected with the organs of articulation predominate. A good way of bringing the difficulty to consciousness is that proposed by Stricker: Partly open your mouth and then imagine any word with labials or dentals in it, such as 'bubble,' 'toddle.' Is your image under these conditions distinct? To most people the{308} image is at first 'thick,' as the sound of the word would be if they tried to pronounce it with the lips parted. Many can never imagine the words clearly with the mouth open; others succeed after a few preliminary trials. The experiment proves how dependent our verbal imagination is on actual feelings in lips, tongue, throat, larynx, etc. Prof. Bain says that "a suppressed articulation is in fact the material of our recollection, the intellectual manifestation, the idea of speech." In persons whose auditory imagination is weak, the articulatory image does indeed seem to constitute the whole material for verbal thought. Professor Stricker says that in his own case no auditory image enters into the words of which he thinks.
Most people, when asked how they picture words, will say, 'In terms of sound.' It's not until their attention is specifically directed to the question that they find it hard to determine whether auditory images or motor images related to the speech organs are more dominant. A good way to bring this difficulty to awareness is the method proposed by Stricker: Partly open your mouth and then imagine any word containing labials or dentals, like 'bubble' or 'toddle.' Is your image clear under these conditions? To most people, the{308} image initially feels 'thick,' similar to how the sound of the word would be if they tried to say it with their lips apart. Many cannot clearly imagine the words with their mouth open; others can after a few tries. This experiment demonstrates how much our verbal imagination relies on real sensations in the lips, tongue, throat, larynx, and so on. Prof. Bain states that "a suppressed articulation is in fact the material of our recollection, the intellectual expression, the idea of speech." For people whose auditory imagination is weak, the articulatory image seems to provide the entire basis for verbal thinking. Professor Stricker notes that in his own experience, no auditory image is involved in the words he thinks of.
Images of Touch.—These are very strong in some people. The most vivid touch-images come when we ourselves barely escape local injury, or when we see another injured. The place may then actually tingle with the imaginary sensation—perhaps not altogether imaginary, since goose-flesh, paling or reddening, and other evidences of actual muscular contraction in the spot, may result.
Images of Touch.—These can be quite intense for some people. The most vivid sensations of touch happen when we narrowly avoid getting hurt or when we witness someone else getting hurt. In those moments, the area may actually feel like it’s tingling with the imagined sensation—maybe not entirely imagined, since we might experience goosebumps, paleness or reddening, and other signs of real muscular contraction in that spot.
"An educated man," says Herr G. H. Meyer, "told me once that on entering his house one day he received a shock from crushing the finger of one of his little children in the door. At the moment of his fright he felt a violent pain in the corresponding finger of his own body, and this pain abode with him three days."
"An educated man," says Herr G. H. Meyer, "told me once that one day, when he got home, he accidentally crushed the finger of one of his little kids in the door. At that moment of fear, he felt a sharp pain in the matching finger of his own hand, and this pain lingered for three days."
The imagination of a blind deaf-mute like Laura Bridgman must be confined entirely to tactile and motor material. All blind persons must belong to the 'tactile' and 'motile' types of the French authors. When the young man whose cataracts were removed by Dr. Franz was shown different geometric figures, he said he "had not been able to form from them the idea of a square and a disk until he perceived a sensation of what he saw in the points of his fingers, as if he really touched the objects."
The imagination of a blind and deaf person like Laura Bridgman must rely completely on touch and movement. All blind people fit into the 'tactile' and 'motor' categories noted by French authors. When the young man who had his cataracts removed by Dr. Franz was shown various geometric shapes, he stated that he "couldn't understand what a square or a circle was until he felt a sensation of what he was seeing through his fingertips, as if he was actually touching the objects."
Pathological Differences.—The study of Aphasia (see p. 114) has of late years shown how unexpectedly individuals{309} differ in the use of their imagination. In some the habitual 'thought-stuff,' if one may so call it, is visual; in others it is auditory, articulatory, or motor; in most, perhaps, it is evenly mixed. These are the "indifferents" of Charcot. The same local cerebral injury must needs work different practical results in persons who differ in this way. In one what is thrown out of gear is a much-used brain-tract; in the other an unimportant region is affected. A particularly instructive case was published by Charcot in 1883. The patient was a merchant, an exceedingly accomplished man, but a visualizer of the most exclusive type. Owing to some intra-cerebral accident he suddenly lost all his visual images, and with them much of his intellectual power, without any other perversion of faculty. He soon discovered that he could carry on his affairs by using his memory in an altogether new way, and described clearly the difference between his two conditions. "Every time he returns to A., from which place business often calls him, he seems to himself as if entering a strange city. He views the monuments, houses, and streets with the same surprise as if he saw them for the first time. When asked to describe the principal public place of the town, he answered, 'I know that it is there, but it is impossible to imagine it, and I can tell you nothing about it.'"
Pathological Differences.—Recent studies on Aphasia (see p. 114) have revealed how surprisingly different individuals are in their use of imagination. For some, the usual 'thought-stuff,' if we can call it that, is visual; for others, it’s auditory, articulatory, or motor; and for many, it might be a mix of all these. These are the "indifferents" defined by Charcot. The same brain injury can lead to different outcomes in people who vary in this way. For one person, a crucial brain pathway may be disrupted; for another, a less significant area might be affected. A particularly enlightening case was reported by Charcot in 1883. The patient was a merchant, a very skilled individual, but he was a visualizer in the most exclusive sense. Due to an intra-cerebral incident, he suddenly lost all his visual images, along with a significant part of his intellectual ability, without any other distortion of faculties. He soon realized that he could manage his affairs by using his memory in a completely new manner, and he articulated the difference between his two states clearly. "Every time he goes back to A., from which business frequently calls him, it feels like entering a foreign city. He sees the landmarks, buildings, and streets with the same wonder as if he were seeing them for the first time. When asked to describe the main public area of the town, he replied, 'I know it's there, but I can't imagine it, and I can't tell you anything about it.'"
He can no more remember his wife and children's face than he can remember A. Even after being with them some time they seem unusual to him. He forgets his own face, and once spoke to his image in a mirror, taking it for a stranger. He complains of his loss of feeling for colors. "My wife has black hair, this I know; but I can no more recall its color than I can her person and features." This visual amnesia extends to objects dating from his childhood's years—paternal mansion, etc., forgotten. No other disturbances but this loss of visual images. Now when he seeks something in his correspondence, he must rummage among the letters like other men, until he meets the passage. He can recall only the first few verses of the Iliad,{310} and must grope to recite Homer, Virgil, and Horace. Figures which he adds he must now whisper to himself. He realizes clearly that he must help his memory out with auditory images, which he does with effort. The words and expressions which he recalls seem now to echo in his ear, an altogether novel sensation for him. If he wishes to learn by heart anything, a series of phrases for example, he must read them several times aloud, so as to impress his ear. When later he repeats the thing in question, the sensation of inward hearing which precedes articulation rises up in his mind. This feeling was formerly unknown to him.
He can't remember the faces of his wife and kids any more than he can remember A. Even after spending time with them, they feel strange to him. He forgets his own face and once spoke to his reflection in a mirror, mistaking it for a stranger. He complains about losing his ability to perceive colors. "My wife has black hair; I know that, but I can't remember its color any more than I can recall her appearance and features." This visual memory loss goes back to things from his childhood—like his father's house—now forgotten. There are no other issues except this loss of visual images. Now, when he looks for something in his correspondence, he has to sift through the letters like everyone else until he finds the right passage. He can only recall the first few lines of the Iliad,{310} and needs to struggle to recite Homer, Virgil, and Horace. He has to whisper figures to himself. He realizes he has to rely on auditory images to assist his memory, which takes effort. The words and phrases he remembers now seem to resonate in his ear, a completely new sensation for him. If he wants to memorize something, like a series of phrases, he has to read them out loud several times to imprint them in his mind. Later, when he tries to repeat what he learned, the feeling of hearing it in his head before he speaks it comes to him. This sensation was unknown to him before.
Such a man would have suffered relatively little inconvenience if his images for hearing had been those suddenly destroyed.
Such a man would have experienced relatively little inconvenience if the images he relied on for hearing had been suddenly destroyed.
The Neural Process in Imagination.—Most medical writers assume that the cerebral activity on which imagination depends occupies a different seat from that subserving sensation. It is, however, a simpler interpretation of the facts to suppose that the same nerve-tracts are concerned in the two processes. Our mental images are aroused always by way of association; some previous idea or sensation must have 'suggested' them. Association is surely due to currents from one cortical centre to another. Now all we need suppose is that these intra-cortical currents are unable to produce in the cells the strong explosions which currents from the sense-organs occasion, to account for the subjective difference between images and sensations, without supposing any difference in their local seat. To the strong degree of explosion corresponds the character of 'vividness' or sensible presence, in the object of thought; to the weak degree, that of 'faintness' or outward unreality.
The Neural Process in Imagination.—Most medical writers think that the brain activity involved in imagination comes from a different area than that related to sensation. However, a simpler interpretation of the facts is to assume that the same nerve pathways are involved in both processes. Our mental images are always triggered through association; some previous idea or sensation must have 'suggested' them. Association is likely caused by signals traveling from one part of the brain to another. All we need to assume is that these internal brain signals are not powerful enough to create the strong reactions that signals from the senses produce, which explains the subjective difference between images and sensations, without suggesting any difference in their location. The strong reaction corresponds to the quality of 'vividness' or tangible presence in the object of thought; the weak reaction corresponds to 'faintness' or a sense of unreality.
If we admit that sensation and imagination are due to the activity of the same parts of the cortex, we can see a very good teleological reason why they should correspond to discrete kinds of process in these centres, and why the process which gives the sense that the object is really there ought normally to be arousable only by currents entering{311} from the periphery and not by currents from the neighboring cortical parts. We can see, in short, why the sensational process OUGHT TO be discontinuous with all normal ideational processes, however intense. For, as Dr. Münsterberg justly observes, "Were there not this peculiar arrangement we should not distinguish reality and fantasy, our conduct would not be accommodated to the facts about us, but would be inappropriate and senseless, and we could not keep ourselves alive."
If we accept that sensation and imagination come from the same areas of the brain, we can understand why these should relate to different types of processes in those areas, and why the feeling that an object is truly present should typically be triggered only by signals from outside our body, rather than by signals from nearby brain regions. Essentially, we can understand why the sensational process SHOULD be separate from all normal thought processes, no matter how strong. As Dr. Münsterberg rightly points out, "If we didn’t have this special arrangement, we wouldn’t be able to tell the difference between reality and imagination, our actions wouldn’t align with the facts around us, leading to inappropriate and nonsensical behavior, and we wouldn’t be able to survive."
Sometimes, by exception, the deeper sort of explosion may take place from intra-cortical excitement alone. In the sense of hearing, sensation and imagination are hard to discriminate where the sensation is so weak as to be just perceptible. At night, hearing a very faint striking of the hour by a far-off clock, our imagination reproduces both rhythm and sound, and it is often difficult to tell which was the last real stroke. So of a baby crying in a distant part of the house, we are uncertain whether we still hear it, or only imagine the sound. Certain violin-players take advantage of this in diminuendo terminations. After the pianissimo has been reached they continue to bow as if still playing, but are careful not to touch the strings. The listener hears in imagination a degree of sound fainter than the pianissimo. Hallucinations, whether of sight or hearing, are another case in point, to be touched on in the next chapter. I may mention as a fact still unexplained that several observers (Herr G. H. Meyer, M. Ch. Féré, Professor Scott of Ann Arbor, and Mr. T. C. Smith, one of my students) have noticed negative after-images of objects which they had been imagining with the mind's eye. It is as if the retina itself were locally fatigued by the act.{312}
Sometimes, in rare cases, a deeper kind of explosion can happen from excitement within the cortex alone. In terms of hearing, sensation and imagination are hard to distinguish when the sensation is so faint it's barely noticeable. At night, when we hear a very distant clock chiming, our imagination recreates both the rhythm and sound, making it hard to tell which was the last real chime. Similarly, when a baby cries in another part of the house, we can’t be sure if we’re actually hearing it or just imagining the noise. Some violinists take advantage of this with their quiet endings. Once they reach a soft volume, they keep bowing as if they are still playing, but they don’t touch the strings. The listener imagines a sound that is quieter than the softest playing. Hallucinations, whether visual or auditory, are another instance to discuss in the next chapter. It's worth noting that several observers (Herr G. H. Meyer, M. Ch. Féré, Professor Scott of Ann Arbor, and Mr. T. C. Smith, one of my students) have reported negative after-images of objects they were imagining. It’s as if the retina itself becomes temporarily fatigued from the act.{312}
CHAPTER XX.
PERCEPTION.
Perception and Sensation compared.—A pure sensation we saw above, p. 12, to be an abstraction never realized in adult life. Anything which affects our sense-organs does also more than that: it arouses processes in the hemispheres which are partly due to the organization of that organ by past experiences, and the results of which in consciousness are described as ideas which the sensation suggests. The first of these ideas is that of the thing to which the sensible quality belongs. The consciousness of particular material things present to sense is nowadays called perception. The consciousness of such things may be more or less complete; it may be of the mere name of the thing and its other essential attributes, or it may be of the thing's various remoter relations. It is impossible to draw any sharp line of distinction between the barer and the richer consciousness, because the moment we get beyond the first crude sensation all our consciousness is of what is suggested, and the various suggestions shade gradually into each other, being one and all products of the same psychological machinery of association. In the directer consciousness fewer, in the remoter more, associative processes are brought into play.
Comparison of Perception and Sensation.—A pure sensation, as we discussed above on p. 12, is an idea that is never fully realized in adult life. Anything that affects our sense organs goes beyond that; it triggers processes in the brain that are influenced by how that organ has been shaped by past experiences, and the outcome in our awareness is described as ideas suggested by the sensation. The first of these ideas is the thing to which the sensory quality belongs. The awareness of specific material objects that we sense is currently referred to as perception. Our awareness of these objects can be more or less complete; it may only involve the name of the object and its basic attributes, or it may include the object's various more distant relationships. It's impossible to draw a clear line between the simplest and the more complex forms of awareness because as soon as we go beyond the initial raw sensation, all our awareness relates to what is suggested, and the different suggestions gradually blend into one another, all being products of the same psychological system of association. In more direct awareness, fewer associative processes are involved, while in more distant awareness, more processes come into play.
Sensational and reproductive brain-processes combined, then, are what give us the content of our perceptions. Every concrete particular material thing is a conflux of sensible qualities, with which we have become acquainted at various times. Some of these qualities, since they are more constant, interesting, or practically important, we regard as essential constituents of the thing. In a general{313} way, such are the tangible shape, size, mass, etc. Other properties, being more fluctuating, we regard as more or less accidental or inessential. We call the former qualities the reality, the latter its appearances. Thus, I hear a sound, and say 'a horse-car'; but the sound is not the horse-car, it is one of the horse-car's least important manifestations. The real horse-car is a feelable, or at most a feelable and visible, thing which in my imagination the sound calls up. So when I get, as now, a brown eye-picture with lines not parallel, and with angles unlike, and call it my big solid rectangular walnut library-table, that picture is not the table. It is not even like the table as the table is for vision, when rightly seen. It is a distorted perspective view of three of the sides of what I mentally perceive (more or less) in its totality and undistorted shape. The back of the table, its square corners, its size, its heaviness, are features of which I am conscious when I look, almost as I am conscious of its name. The suggestion of the name is of course due to mere custom. But no less is that of the back, the size, weight, squareness, etc.
Sensational and reproductive brain processes combined are what give us the content of our perceptions. Every specific material object is a mix of sensory qualities that we’ve come to know at different times. Some of these qualities are seen as more consistent, interesting, or practically significant, so we consider them essential parts of the object. Generally, these include the shape, size, mass, etc. The other properties, being more variable, we see as somewhat accidental or not essential. We refer to the former qualities as reality and the latter as appearances. For example, when I hear a sound and say 'a horse-car,' the sound itself isn't the horse-car; it's just one of the least important aspects of it. The real horse-car is something I can feel, or at most, something I can feel and see, which the sound brings to my mind. So when I see an image of a brown eye with lines that aren’t parallel and angles that don’t match up, and I call it my large solid rectangular walnut library table, that image isn’t the table. It doesn’t even resemble the table as it truly appears to the eye when seen correctly. It's a distorted perspective showing three of the sides of what I mentally perceive (to some degree) in its entirety and true shape. The back of the table, its square corners, its size, and its weight are aspects I recognize when I look at it, just as I acknowledge its name. The association with the name comes from habit, but the awareness of the back, size, weight, squareness, etc., comes from the same source.
Nature, as Reid says, is frugal in her operations, and will not be at the expense of a particular instinct to give us that knowledge which experience and habit will soon produce. Reproduced attributes tied together with presently felt attributes in the unity of a thing with a name, these are the materials out of which my actually perceived table is made. Infants must go through a long education of the eye and ear before they can perceive the realities which adults perceive. Every perception is an acquired perception.
Nature, as Reid points out, is economical in how it operates and won’t bother creating a special instinct to provide us with knowledge that experience and habit will quickly teach us. The attributes we reproduce, combined with those we currently experience, form the unity of a thing with a name; these are the building blocks of what I actually see as a table. Babies must undergo a lengthy process of learning through sight and sound before they can grasp the realities that adults understand. Every perception is an acquired perception.
The Perceptive State of Mind is not a Compound.—There is no reason, however, for supposing that this involves a 'fusion' of separate sensations and ideas. The thing perceived is the object of a unique state of thought; due no doubt in part to sensational, and in part to ideational currents, but in no wise 'containing' psychically the identical 'sensations' and images which these currents would severally{314} have aroused if the others were not simultaneously there. We can often directly notice a sensible difference in the consciousness, between the latter case and the former. The sensible quality changes under our very eye. Take the already-quoted catch, Pas de lieu Rhône que nous: one may read this over and over again without recognizing the sounds to be identical with those of the words paddle your own canoe. As the English associations arise, the sound itself appears to change. Verbal sounds are usually perceived with their meaning at the moment of being heard. Sometimes, however, the associative irradiations are inhibited for a few moments (the mind being preoccupied with other thoughts), whilst the words linger on the ear as mere echoes of acoustic sensation. Then, usually, their interpretation suddenly occurs. But at that moment one may often surprise a change in the very feel of the word. Our own language would sound very different to us if we heard it without understanding, as we hear a foreign tongue. Rises and falls of voice, odd sibilants and other consonants, would fall on our ear in a way of which we can now form no notion. Frenchmen say that English sounds to them like the gazouillement des oiseaux—an impression which it certainly makes on no native ear. Many of us English would describe the sound of Russian in similar terms. All of us are conscious of the strong inflections of voice and explosives and gutturals of German speech in a way in which no German can be conscious of them.
The Perceptive State of Mind is not a Compound.—However, there's no reason to think that this means a 'fusion' of separate sensations and ideas. The thing being perceived is the focus of a distinct thought process; this is partly due to sensory experiences and partly to the flow of ideas, but it doesn't psychically 'contain' the same 'sensations' and images that these experiences would individually have triggered if the others weren't also present{314}. We can often notice a tangible difference in consciousness between these two scenarios. The sensory quality shifts right in front of us. Take the previously mentioned phrase, Pas de lieu Rhône que nous: one can read this repeatedly without realizing that the sounds are identical to the words paddle your own canoe. As the English associations come to mind, the sound itself seems to change. We usually hear verbal sounds along with their meaning instantly. However, sometimes, the associative responses are temporarily blocked (because the mind is occupied with other thoughts), while the words remain in our ears as mere echoes of sound. At that point, their meaning usually strikes us suddenly. But often, during that moment, we can catch a shift in the very feel of the word. Our own language would sound very different to us if we heard it without understanding, like how we perceive a foreign language. The rises and falls in tone, strange sibilants, and other consonants would resonate differently than we can currently imagine. French speakers say that English sounds to them like the gazouillement des oiseaux—an impression that certainly doesn’t resonate with any native speaker. Many of us English would describe the sound of Russian in similar ways. We all recognize the strong inflections and explosive gutturals of German speech in ways that no German speaker can grasp.
This is probably the reason why, if we look at an isolated printed word and repeat it long enough, it ends by assuming an entirely unnatural aspect. Let the reader try this with any word on this page. He will soon begin to wonder if it can possibly be the word he has been using all his life with that meaning. It stares at him from the paper like a glass eye, with no speculation in it. Its body is indeed there, but its soul is fled. It is reduced, by this new way of attending to it, to its sensational nudity. We{315} never before attended to it in this way, but habitually got it clad with its meaning the moment we caught sight of it, and rapidly passed from it to the other words of the phrase. We apprehended it, in short, with a cloud of associates, and thus perceiving it, we felt it quite otherwise than as we feel it now divested and alone.
This is probably why if we look at an isolated printed word and repeat it long enough, it eventually starts to look completely unnatural. Let the reader try this with any word on this page. They will soon begin to wonder if it can really be the word they've been using all their life with that meaning. It stares back at them from the page like a glass eye, with no expression in it. Its form is there, but its essence is gone. This new way of focusing on it reduces it to its bare minimum. We{315} have never looked at it this way before; we usually saw it dressed in its meaning the moment we noticed it and quickly moved on to the other words in the phrase. We understood it, in short, with a network of associations, and perceiving it this way, we felt it very differently than we do now, stripped and alone.
Another well-known change is when we look at a landscape with our head upside-down. Perception is to a certain extent baffled by this manœuvre; gradations of distance and other space-determinations are made uncertain; the reproductive or associative processes, in short, decline; and, simultaneously with their diminution, the colors grow richer and more varied, and the contrasts of light and shade more marked. The same thing occurs when we turn a painting bottom-upward. We lose much of its meaning, but, to compensate for the loss, we feel more freshly the value of the mere tints and shadings, and become aware of any lack of purely sensible harmony or balance which they may show. Just so, if we lie on the floor and look up at the mouth of a person talking behind us. His lower lip here takes the habitual place of the upper one upon our retina, and seems animated by the most extraordinary and unnatural mobility, a mobility which now strikes us because (the associative processes being disturbed by the unaccustomed point of view) we get it as a naked sensation and not as part of a familiar object perceived.
Another well-known change happens when we look at a landscape with our head upside-down. Our perception becomes confused by this position; the differences in distance and other spatial cues become unclear; the processes of memory or association decline; and, as these diminish, the colors become richer and more varied, and the contrasts of light and shadow become more pronounced. The same thing happens when we turn a painting upside down. We lose much of its meaning, but in exchange, we more vividly appreciate the value of the colors and shading, and we notice any lack of pure visual harmony or balance they may have. Similarly, if we lie on the floor and look up at someone's mouth as they talk behind us, their lower lip appears in the usual position of the upper lip on our retina and seems to move in an incredibly strange and unnatural way. This movement stands out to us because, with our view altered, we perceive it as a raw sensation rather than as part of a familiar object.
Once more, then, we find ourselves driven to admit that when qualities of an object impress our sense and we thereupon perceive the object, the pure sensation as such of those qualities does not still exist inside of the perception and form a constituent thereof. The pure sensation is one thing and the perception another, and neither can take place at the same time with the other, because their cerebral conditions are not the same. They may resemble each other, but in no respect are they identical states of mind.{316}
Once again, we have to acknowledge that when the qualities of an object catch our attention and we then perceive the object, the pure sensation of those qualities doesn't actually exist within the perception and isn't a part of it. The pure sensation is one thing, while the perception is another, and neither can happen simultaneously because their mental states are different. They may resemble each other, but they are by no means identical states of mind.{316}
Perception is of Definite and Probable Things.—The chief cerebral conditions of perception are old paths of association radiating from the sense-impression. If a certain impression be strongly associated with the attributes of a certain thing, that thing is almost sure to be perceived when we get the impression. Examples of such things would be familiar people, places, etc., which we recognize and name at a glance. But where the impression is associated with more than one reality, so that either of two discrepant sets of residual properties may arise, the perception is doubtful and vacillating, and the most that can then be said of it is that it will be of a PROBABLE thing, of the thing which would most usually have given us that sensation.
Perception is of Definite and Probable Things.—The main mental factors in perception are established associations stemming from our sensory experiences. When a particular impression is strongly linked to the traits of something specific, that thing is likely to be recognized when we encounter the impression. Examples include familiar faces or places that we can identify and name quickly. However, when the impression is associated with more than one reality, leading to conflicting groups of retained characteristics, the perception becomes uncertain and fluctuating, and the best we can say about it is that it will be of a PROBABLE thing, specifically the thing that most commonly would have produced that sensation.
In these ambiguous cases it is interesting to note that perception is rarely abortive; some perception takes place. The two discrepant sets of associates do not neutralize each other or mix and make a blur. What we more commonly get is first one object in its completeness, and then the other in its completeness. In other words, all brain-processes are such as give rise to what we may call FIGURED consciousness. If paths are shot-through at all, they are shot-through in consistent systems, and occasion thoughts of definite objects, not mere hodge-podges of elements. Even where the brain's functions are half thrown out of gear, as in aphasia or dropping asleep, this law of figured consciousness holds good. A person who suddenly gets sleepy whilst reading aloud will read wrong; but instead of emitting a mere broth of syllables, he will make such mistakes as to read 'supper-time' instead of 'sovereign,' 'overthrow' instead of 'opposite,' or indeed utter entirely imaginary phrases, composed of several definite words, instead of phrases of the book. So in aphasia: where the disease is mild the patient's mistakes consist in using entire wrong words instead of right ones. It is only in grave lesions that he becomes quite inarticulate. These facts show how subtle is the associative link; how delicate{317} yet how strong that connection among brain-paths which makes any number of them, once excited together, thereafter tend to vibrate as a systematic whole. A small group of elements, 'this,' common to two systems, A and B, may touch off A or B according as accident decides the next step (see Fig. 63). If it happen that a single point leading from 'this' to B is momentarily a little more pervious than any leading from 'this' to A, then that little advantage will upset the equilibrium in favor of the entire system B. The currents will sweep first through that point and thence into all the paths of B, each increment of advance making A more and more impossible. The thoughts correlated with A and B, in such a case, will have objects different, though similar. The similarity will, however, consist in some very limited feature if the 'this' be small. Thus the faintest sensations will give rise to the perception of definite things if only they resemble those which the things are wont to arouse.
In these unclear situations, it's interesting to see that perception rarely fails; some perception happens. The two conflicting sets of associations don’t cancel each other out or blend into a blur. What usually happens is that we first see one object completely, and then the other one completely. In other words, all brain processes lead to what we can call FIGURED consciousness. If pathways are interrupted at all, they are interrupted in consistent systems, leading to thoughts about specific objects, not just random mixes of elements. Even when the brain's functions are somewhat disrupted, like in aphasia or while falling asleep, this principle of figured consciousness still applies. A person who suddenly feels sleepy while reading aloud will make mistakes; instead of just stringing together a jumble of sounds, they might say 'supper-time' instead of 'sovereign,' 'overthrow' instead of 'opposite,' or even create entirely made-up phrases with several specific words instead of the phrases from the book. Similarly, in cases of aphasia: when the condition is mild, a patient’s mistakes consist of using entirely wrong words instead of the correct ones. It's only in severe cases that they become completely unable to speak. These observations reveal how subtle the associative links are; how delicate{317}, yet how strong the connections among brain pathways are, making any number of them, once activated together, tend to resonate as a cohesive whole. A small group of elements, 'this', common to two systems, A and B, may trigger A or B depending on how chance determines the next step (see Fig. 63). If it happens that a single pathway from 'this' to B is momentarily a little more open than any paths from 'this' to A, that slight edge will disrupt the balance in favor of system B. The energy will flow first through that point and then into all the paths of B, with each step forward making A increasingly unlikely. The thoughts connected to A and B in such a scenario will have different objects, though they will be similar. However, the similarity will consist of a very limited aspect if 'this' is small. Thus, the faintest sensations will lead to the perception of specific things if they merely resemble the things they usually evoke.
Illusions.—Let us now, for brevity's sake, treat A and B in Fig. 63 as if they stood for objects instead of brain-processes. And let us furthermore suppose that A and B are, both of them, objects which might probably excite the sensation which I have called 'this,' but that on the present occasion A and not B is the one which actually does so. If, then, on this occasion 'this' suggests A and not B, the result is a correct perception. But if, on the contrary, 'this' suggests B and not A, the result is a false perception, or, as it is technically called, an illusion. But the process is the same, whether the perception be true or false.{318}
Illusions.—Now, for the sake of brevity, let’s treat A and B in Fig. 63 as if they represent objects instead of brain processes. Let's also assume that both A and B are objects that could potentially cause the sensation I’ve called 'this,' but in this case, it’s A that actually does. So, if 'this' points to A and not B, we have a correct perception. However, if it points to B and not A, then we have a false perception, which is technically referred to as an illusion. But the process is the same, whether the perception is true or false.{318}
Note that in every illusion what is false is what is inferred, not what is immediately given. The 'this,' if it were felt by itself alone, would be all right; it only becomes misleading by what it suggests. If it is a sensation of sight, it may suggest a tactile object, for example, which later tactile experiences prove to be not there. The so-called 'fallacy of the senses,' of which the ancient sceptics made so much account, is not fallacy of the senses proper, but rather of the intellect, which interprets wrongly what the senses give.[39]
Note that in every illusion, what’s false is what we infer, not what’s immediately presented. The 'this,' if experienced by itself, would be fine; it only becomes misleading based on what it implies. If it’s a visual sensation, it might suggest a physical object, for instance, which later tactile experiences show isn’t really there. The so-called 'fallacy of the senses,' which the ancient skeptics focused on, isn’t actually a fallacy of the senses themselves, but rather a mistake made by the intellect, which misinterprets what the senses provide.[39]
So much premised, let us look a little closer at these illusions. They are due to two main causes. The wrong object is perceived either because
So with that in mind, let's take a closer look at these illusions. They arise from two main causes. The wrong object is perceived either because
1) Although not on this occasion the real cause, it is yet the habitual, inveterate, or most probable cause of 'this'; or because
1) While not the actual reason this time, it is still the usual, deep-rooted, or most likely reason for 'this'; or because
2) The mind is temporarily full of the thought of that object, and therefore 'this' is peculiarly prone to suggest it at this moment.
2) The mind is currently occupied with the thought of that object, so 'this' is particularly likely to bring it to mind right now.
I will give briefly a number of examples under each head. The first head is the more important, because it includes a number of constant illusions to which all men are subject, and which can only be dispelled by much experience.
I will briefly provide several examples for each point. The first point is the most significant, as it includes various constant illusions that all people are susceptible to, which can only be cleared away through extensive experience.
Illusions of the First Type.—One of the oldest instances dates from Aristotle. Cross two fingers and roll a pea, penholder, or other small object between them. It will seem double. Professor Croom Robertson has given the clearest analysis of this illusion. He observes that if the object be brought into{319} contact first with the forefinger and next with the second finger, the two contacts seem to come in at different points of space. The forefinger-touch seems higher, though the finger is really lower; the second-finger-touch seems lower, though the finger is really higher. "We perceive the contacts as double because we refer them to two distinct parts of space." The touched sides of the two fingers are normally not together in space, and customarily never do touch one thing; the one thing which now touches them, therefore, seems in two places, i.e. seems two things.
Illusions of the First Type.—One of the oldest examples comes from Aristotle. If you cross two fingers and roll a pea, penholder, or another small object between them, it will look like there are two. Professor Croom Robertson provides the clearest analysis of this illusion. He notes that if the object first touches the forefinger and then the second finger, the two touches appear to happen at different points in space. The touch on the forefinger feels higher, even though the finger is actually lower; the touch on the second finger feels lower, even though that finger is actually higher. "We perceive the touches as double because we assign them to two separate parts of space." The areas touched on the two fingers generally don’t come together in space and usually never touch the same object; thus, the one object that is touching them seems to be in two places, or seems to be two things.
There is a whole batch of illusions which come from optical sensations interpreted by us in accordance with our usual rule, although they are now produced by an unusual object. The stereoscope is an example. The eyes see a picture apiece, and the two pictures are a little disparate, the one seen by the right eye being a view of the object taken from a point slightly to the right of that from which the left eye's picture is taken. Pictures thrown on the two eyes by solid objects present this sort of disparity, so that we react on the sensation in our usual way, and perceive a solid. If the pictures be exchanged we perceive a hollow mould of the object, for a hollow mould would cast just such disparate pictures as these. Wheatstone's instrument, the pseudoscope, allows us to look at solid objects and see with each eye the other eye's picture. We then perceive the solid object hollow, if it be an object which might probably be hollow, but not otherwise. Thus the perceptive process is true to its law, which is always to react on the sensation in a determinate and figured fashion if possible, and in as probable a fashion as the case admits. A human face, e.g., never appears hollow to the pseudoscope, for to couple faces and hollowness violates all our habits. For the same reason it is very easy to make an intaglio cast of a face, or the painted inside of a pasteboard mask, look convex, instead of concave as they are.
There are a whole bunch of illusions that come from how we interpret optical sensations based on our usual rules, even though they’re created by something unusual. The stereoscope is one example. Each eye sees a different picture, and the two images are slightly different, with the right eye viewing the object from a spot a bit to the right of where the left eye sees it. Solid objects project this kind of disparity onto each eye, so we react to the sensation in our typical way and perceive it as solid. If the images are switched, we see a hollow shape of the object, since a hollow shape would project exactly these types of differing pictures. Wheatstone's device, the pseudoscope, lets us look at solid objects while each eye sees the other eye's image. We then perceive the solid object as hollow, provided it’s something that could actually be hollow, but not otherwise. So, the perceptive process faithfully follows its principle, which is to always respond to the sensation in a clear and defined way whenever possible, and in as likely a way as the situation allows. For instance, a human face never looks hollow through the pseudoscope because linking faces with hollowness goes against all our usual patterns. That's why it's pretty easy to make a reverse image of a face or the painted inside of a cardboard mask look convex instead of concave, as they really are.
Curious illusions of movement in objects occur whenever the eyeballs move without our intending it. We{320} have learned in an earlier chapter (p. 72) that the original visual feeling of movement is produced by any image passing over the retina. Originally, however, this sensation is definitely referred neither to the object nor to the eyes. Such definite reference grows up later, and obeys certain simple laws. For one thing, we believe objects to move whenever we get the retinal movement-feeling, but think our eyes are still. This gives rise to an illusion when, after whirling on our heel, we stand still; for then objects appear to continue whirling in the same direction in which, a moment previous, our body actually whirled. The reason is that our eyes are animated, under these conditions, by an involuntary nystagmus or oscillation in their orbits, which may easily be observed in anyone with vertigo after whirling. As these movements are unconscious, the retinal movement-feelings which they occasion are naturally referred to the objects seen. The whole phenomenon fades out after a few seconds. And it ceases if we voluntarily fix our eyes upon a given point.
Curious illusions of movement in objects happen whenever our eyes move without us wanting them to. We{320} learned in an earlier chapter (p. 72) that the initial visual feeling of movement comes from any image passing over the retina. However, this sensation isn’t immediately linked to either the object or our eyes. That clear connection develops later and follows certain simple rules. For one thing, we believe that objects are moving whenever we have the feeling of retinal movement, but we think our eyes are still. This creates an illusion when, after spinning around on our heel, we stop; then objects seem to keep spinning in the direction our body had just moved. This happens because our eyes experience an involuntary nystagmus or oscillation in their positions, which can be easily seen in anyone feeling dizzy after spinning. Since these movements are unconscious, the resulting retinal movement-feelings are naturally attributed to the objects we see. The whole phenomenon disappears after a few seconds. And it stops if we intentionally focus our eyes on a specific point.
There is an illusion of movement of the opposite sort, with which every one is familiar at railway stations. Habitually, when we ourselves move forward, our entire field of view glides backward over our retina. When our movement is due to that of the windowed carriage, car, or boat in which we sit, all stationary objects visible through the window give us a sensation of gliding in the opposite direction. Hence, whenever we get this sensation, of a window with all objects visible through it moving in one direction, we react upon it in our customary way, and perceive a stationary field of view, over which the window, and we ourselves inside of it, are passing by a motion of our own. Consequently when another train comes alongside of ours in a station, and fills the entire window, and, after standing still awhile, begins to glide away, we judge that it is our train which is moving, and that the other train is still. If, however, we catch a glimpse of any part of the station through the windows, or between the cars, of{321} the other train, the illusion of our own movement instantly disappears, and we perceive the other train to be the one in motion. This, again, is but making the usual and probable inference from our sensation.
There’s an illusion of movement that everyone knows well at train stations. Normally, when we move forward, everything around us seems to slide backward across our field of vision. When our movement comes from being in a moving carriage, car, or boat, all the stationary objects we see through the window create the feeling that we’re gliding in the opposite direction. So, whenever we get this feeling, with a window showing all objects moving in one direction, we respond as usual and perceive a stationary scene while the window—and we, inside it—seem to be passing by due to our own movement. Therefore, when another train pulls up next to ours at a station, fills the entire window, and then starts moving after a brief stop, we might think that our train is the one that’s moving, making the other train seem still. However, if we catch a glimpse of any part of the station through the windows or between the cars of{321} the other train, the illusion of our movement disappears instantly, and we realize that it’s the other train that’s in motion. This is simply us making the typical and likely inference from our sensation.
Another illusion due to movement is explained by Helmholtz. Most wayside objects, houses, trees, etc., look small when seen from the windows of a swift train. This is because we perceive them in the first instance unduly near. And we perceive them unduly near because of their extraordinarily rapid parallactic flight backwards. When we ourselves move forward all objects glide backwards, as aforesaid; but the nearer they are, the more rapid is this apparent translocation. Relative rapidity of passage backwards is thus so familiarly associated with nearness that when we feel it we perceive nearness. But with a given size of retinal image the nearer an object is, the smaller do we judge its actual size to be. Hence in the train, the faster we go, the nearer do the trees and houses seem; and the nearer they seem, the smaller (with that size of retinal image) must they look.
Another illusion caused by movement is explained by Helmholtz. Most objects by the side of the road, like houses and trees, appear small when viewed from the windows of a fast train. This happens because we initially perceive them as being closer than they actually are. We perceive them as being too close because of their incredibly rapid movement away from us. As we move forward, all objects seem to move backward, as mentioned earlier; however, the closer they are, the quicker this perceived movement appears. The relative speed of things moving backward is so closely linked to the idea of closeness that when we experience it, we interpret it as being near. But with a given size of retinal image, the closer an object is, the smaller we think its actual size is. So, in the train, the faster we go, the closer the trees and houses seem, and the closer they appear, the smaller they must look with that size of retinal image.
The feelings of our eyes' convergence, of their accommodation, the size of the retinal image, etc., may give rise to illusions about the size and distance of objects, which also belong to this first type.
The sensation of our eyes focusing together, adjusting, the size of the image on the retina, and so on, can create misconceptions about the size and distance of objects, which also fall into this first category.
Illusions of the Second Type.—In this type we perceive a wrong object because our mind is full of the thought of it at the time, and any sensation which is in the least degree connected with it touches off, as it were, a train already laid, and gives us a sense that the object is really before us. Here is a familiar example:
Illusions of the Second Type.—In this type, we mistakenly perceive an object because our minds are preoccupied with the thought of it at the moment. Any sensation even slightly related to it triggers what feels like a pre-existing reaction, making us think the object is actually in front of us. Here is a familiar example:
"If a sportsman, while shooting woodcock in cover, sees a bird about the size and color of a woodcock get up and fly through the foliage, not having time to see more than that it is a bird of such a size and color, he immediately supplies by inference the other qualities of a woodcock, and is afterwards disgusted to find that he has shot a thrush. I have done so myself, and could hardly believe{322} that the thrush was the bird I fired at, so complete was my mental supplement to my visual perception."[40]
"If a hunter, while shooting woodcock in the underbrush, sees a bird about the size and color of a woodcock take off and fly through the trees, without time to notice more than that it’s a bird of that size and color, they immediately assume it has all the other characteristics of a woodcock, only to be disappointed later when they realize they shot a thrush instead. I’ve done this myself and could hardly believe{322} that the thrush was the bird I aimed at, so complete was my mental addition to my visual perception."[40]
As with game, so with enemies, ghosts, and the like. Anyone waiting in a dark place and expecting or fearing strongly a certain object will interpret any abrupt sensation to mean that object's presence. The boy playing 'I spy,' the criminal skulking from his pursuers, the superstitious person hurrying through the woods or past the churchyard at midnight, the man lost in the woods, the girl who tremulously has made an evening appointment with her swain, all are subject to illusions of sight and sound which make their hearts beat till they are dispelled. Twenty times a day the lover, perambulating the streets with his preoccupied fancy, will think he perceives his idol's bonnet before him.
Just like in games, the same goes for enemies, ghosts, and similar fears. Anyone waiting in a dark place and strongly expecting or fearing a specific object will interpret any sudden sensation as a sign of that object’s presence. The boy playing 'I spy,' the criminal hiding from his pursuers, the superstitious person rushing through the woods or past the cemetery at midnight, the man lost in the forest, the girl nervously anticipating her evening date with her boyfriend—all of them are prone to illusions of sight and sound that make their hearts race until those fears are gone. Multiple times a day, the lover strolling through the streets with his wandering thoughts will believe he sees his beloved’s hat in front of him.
The Proof-reader's Illusion.—I remember one night in Boston, whilst waiting for a 'Mount Auburn' car to bring me to Cambridge, reading most distinctly that name upon the signboard of a car on which (as I afterwards learned) 'North Avenue' was painted. The illusion was so vivid that I could hardly believe my eyes had deceived me. All reading is more or less performed in this way.
The Proof-reader's Illusion.—I remember one night in Boston, while waiting for a 'Mount Auburn' train to take me to Cambridge, I clearly read that name on the sign of a train that was actually labeled 'North Avenue.' The illusion was so strong that I could hardly believe my eyes had tricked me. All reading happens in a similar way.
"Practised novel-or newspaper-readers could not possibly get on so fast if they had to see accurately every single letter of every word in order to perceive the words. More than half of the words come out of their mind, and hardly half from the printed page. Were this not so, did we perceive each letter by itself, typographic errors in well-known words would never be overlooked. Children, whose ideas are not yet ready enough to perceive words at a glance, read them wrong if they are printed wrong, that is, right according to the way of printing. In a foreign language, although it may be printed with the same letters, we read by so much the more slowly as we do not understand, or are unable promptly to perceive, the words. But we notice{323} misprints all the more readily. For this reason Latin and Greek, and still better Hebrew, works are more correctly printed, because the proofs are better corrected, than in German works. Of two friends of mine, one knew much Hebrew, the other little; the latter, however, gave instruction in Hebrew in a gymnasium; and when he called the other to help correct his pupils' exercises, it turned out that he could find out all sorts of little errors better than his friend, because the latter's perception of the words as totals was too swift."[41]
"Experienced novel or newspaper readers can’t possibly read that quickly if they had to focus on every single letter of each word to understand them. More than half of the words come from their memory, while hardly half come from the printed page. If this weren't the case, we would never overlook typographical errors in familiar words. Children, whose minds aren’t developed enough to recognize words at a glance, read incorrectly if they are printed incorrectly, meaning according to the printing style. In a foreign language, even if it’s printed with the same letters, we read much more slowly because we don’t understand or can’t quickly recognize the words. But we notice{323} typos more easily. This is why Latin, Greek, and especially Hebrew texts are printed more accurately; their proofs are corrected more thoroughly than in German texts. I have two friends; one knows a lot of Hebrew, while the other knows a little. However, the latter teaches Hebrew at a gymnasium, and when he asked the other for help correcting his students’ exercises, it turned out that he was better at spotting all kinds of small mistakes than his friend, because the latter was too fast in perceiving the words as complete units." [41]
Testimony to personal identity is proverbially fallacious for similar reasons. A man has witnessed a rapid crime or accident, and carries away his mental image. Later he is confronted by a prisoner whom he forthwith perceives in the light of that image, and recognizes or 'identifies' as the criminal, although he may never have been near the spot. Similarly at the so-called 'materializing séances' which fraudulent mediums give: in a dark room a man sees a gauze-robed figure who in a whisper tells him she is the spirit of his sister, mother, wife, or child, and falls upon his neck. The darkness, the previous forms, and the expectancy have so filled his mind with premonitory images that it is no wonder he perceives what is suggested. These fraudulent 'séances' would furnish most precious documents to the psychology of perception, if they could only be satisfactorily inquired into. In the hypnotic trance any suggested object is sensibly perceived. In certain subjects this happens more or less completely after waking from the trance. It would seem that under favorable conditions a somewhat similar susceptibility to suggestion{324} may exist in certain persons who are not otherwise entranced at all.
Personal identity testimony is notoriously unreliable for similar reasons. A person witnesses a sudden crime or accident and forms a mental image of it. Later, when faced with a suspect, he sees that individual through the lens of that image and recognizes or 'identifies' him as the criminal, even if he was never actually near the scene. The same applies to the so-called 'materializing séances' put on by fraudulent mediums: in a dark room, a man sees a figure in gauzy robes who whispers that she is the spirit of his sister, mother, wife, or child, and embraces him. The darkness, previous impressions, and his expectations have filled his mind with premonitory images, making it unsurprising that he perceives what is suggested. These fraudulent 'séances' would provide valuable insights into the psychology of perception if they could be properly investigated. In a hypnotic trance, any suggested object is clearly perceived. In some individuals, this can occur to varying extents after they wake from the trance. It seems that under certain conditions, a similar susceptibility to suggestion{324} may exist in individuals who are otherwise not in a trance at all.
This suggestibility obtains in all the senses, although high authorities have doubted this power of imagination to falsify present impressions of sense. Everyone must be able to give instances from the smell-sense. When we have paid the faithless plumber for pretending to mend our drains, the intellect inhibits the nose from perceiving the same unaltered odor, until perhaps several days go by. As regards the ventilation or heating of rooms, we are apt to feel for some time as we think we ought to feel. If we believe the ventilator is shut, we feel the room close. On discovering it open, the oppression disappears.
This suggestibility exists in all the senses, although some experts have questioned the power of imagination to distort our current sensory impressions. Everyone can probably recall examples related to smell. After we've paid the unreliable plumber for supposedly fixing our drains, our mind prevents us from noticing the same unchanged odor, sometimes for several days. When it comes to the ventilation or heating of rooms, we tend to feel a certain way based on our beliefs about the situation. If we think the vent is closed, we feel the room is stuffy. Once we find out it's actually open, that heaviness lifts.
It is the same with touch. Everyone must have felt the sensible quality change under his hand, as sudden contact with something moist or hairy, in the dark, awoke a shock of disgust or fear which faded into calm recognition of some familiar object. Even so small a thing as a crumb of potato on the table-cloth, which we pick up, thinking it a crumb of bread, feels horrible for a few moments to our fancy, and different from what it is.
It’s the same with touch. Everyone has probably experienced how the feeling changes under their hand; suddenly touching something moist or hairy in the dark can trigger a jolt of disgust or fear that quickly subsides into the calm recognition of a familiar object. Even something as small as a crumb of potato on the tablecloth, which we pick up thinking it’s a crumb of bread, can feel awful for a moment and very different from what it actually is.
In the sense of hearing, similar mistakes abound. Everyone must recall some experience in which sounds have altered their character as soon as the intellect referred them to a different source. The other day a friend was sitting in my room, when the clock, which has a rich low chime, began to strike. "Hollo!" said he, "hear that hand-organ in the garden," and was surprised at finding the real source of the sound. I have had myself a striking illusion of the sort. Sitting reading, late one night, I suddenly heard a most formidable noise proceeding from the upper part of the house, which it seemed to fill. It ceased, and in a moment renewed itself. I went into the hall to listen, but it came no more. Resuming my seat in the room, however, there it was again, low, mighty, alarming, like a rising flood or the avant-courier of an awful gale. It came from all space. Quite startled, I again went into the{325} hall, but it had already ceased once more. On returning a second time to the room, I discovered that it was nothing but the breathing of a little Scotch terrier which lay asleep on the floor. The noteworthy thing is that as soon as I recognized what it was, I was compelled to think it a different sound, and could not then hear it as I had heard it a moment before.
In terms of hearing, similar mistakes happen all the time. Everyone can remember an experience where sounds changed in nature as soon as the mind connected them to a different source. The other day, a friend was in my room when the clock, which has a deep, low chime, started to strike. "Hey!" he said, "do you hear that music box in the garden?" He was surprised to find out the real source of the sound. I’ve had a similar shocking experience myself. One late night while I was reading, I suddenly heard a loud noise coming from the upper part of the house that seemed to fill the space. It stopped for a moment, then started again. I went into the hall to listen, but it didn’t return. However, when I sat back down in the room, it was there again—deep, powerful, and alarming, like a rising flood or the precursor of a terrible storm. It seemed to come from everywhere. Quite startled, I went back into the hall, but it had stopped once more. When I returned for the second time to the room, I realized it was just the breathing of a little Scottish terrier that was asleep on the floor. The interesting thing is that as soon as I figured out what it was, I had to think of it as a different sound, and I couldn’t hear it the way I had just a moment before.
The sense of sight is pregnant with illusions of both the types considered. No sense gives such fluctuating impressions of the same object as sight does. With no sense are we so apt to treat the sensations immediately given as mere signs; with none is the invocation from memory of a thing, and the consequent perception of the latter, so immediate. The 'thing' which we perceive always resembles, as we shall hereafter see, the object of some absent sensation, usually another optical figure which in our mind has come to be a standard bit of reality; and it is this incessant reduction of our immediately given optical objects to more standard and 'real' forms which has led some authors into the mistake of thinking that our optical sensations are originally and natively of no particular form at all.
The sense of sight is full of illusions of both types discussed. No other sense gives such changing impressions of the same object as vision does. We tend to treat the sensations we get from sight as mere symbols; no sense makes it so easy to call up a memory of a thing and immediately perceive it. The 'thing' we see always resembles, as we will explore later, the object of some absent sensation, usually another visual image that has become a standard representation of reality in our minds. It is this constant process of reducing our immediate visual experiences to more standard and 'real' forms that has led some writers to mistakenly believe that our visual sensations originally lack any specific form at all.
Of accidental and occasional illusions of sight many amusing examples might be given. Two will suffice. One is a reminiscence of my own. I was lying in my berth in a steamer listening to the sailors 'at their devotions with the holystones' outside; when, on turning my eyes to the window, I perceived with perfect distinctness that the chief-engineer of the vessel had entered my state-room, and was standing looking through the window at the men at work upon the guards. Surprised at his intrusion, and also at his intentness and immobility, I remained watching him and wondering how long he would stand thus. At last I spoke; but getting no reply, sat up in my berth, and then saw that what I had taken for the engineer was my own cap and coat hanging on a peg beside the window. The illusion was complete; the engineer was a peculiar-looking{326} man; and I saw him unmistakably; but after the illusion had vanished I found it hard voluntarily to make the cap and coat look like him at all.
Of accidental and occasional visual illusions, many amusing examples could be shared. Two will do. One is a memory of my own. I was lying in my bunk on a steamer, listening to the sailors 'at their devotions with the holystones' outside. When I turned my eyes to the window, I distinctly saw the chief engineer of the vessel enter my state room and stand there, looking through the window at the men working on the guards. Surprised by his intrusion and also by his intense focus and stillness, I kept watching him, wondering how long he would stay like that. Finally, I spoke, but when I got no reply, I sat up in my bunk and saw that what I thought was the engineer was actually my cap and coat hanging on a peg by the window. The illusion was complete; the engineer was a rather unusual-looking man, and I saw him clearly. But once the illusion faded, I found it difficult to see the cap and coat as resembling him at all.
'Apperception.'—In Germany since Herbart's time psychology has always had a great deal to say about a process called Apperception. The incoming ideas or sensations are said to be 'apperceived' by 'masses' of ideas already in the mind. It is plain that the process we have been describing as perception is, at this rate, an apperceptive process. So are all recognition, classing, and naming; and passing beyond these simplest suggestions, all farther thoughts about our percepts are apperceptive processes as well. I have myself not used the word apperception, because it has carried very different meanings in the history of philosophy, and 'psychic reaction,' 'interpretation,' 'conception,' 'assimilation,' 'elaboration,' or simply 'thought,' are perfect synonyms for its Herbartian meaning, widely taken. It is, moreover, hardly worth while to pretend to analyze the so-called apperceptive performances beyond the first or perceptive stage, because their variations and degrees are literally innumerable. 'Apperception' is a name for the sum total of the effects of what we have studied as association; and it is obvious that the things which a given experience will suggest to a man depend on what Mr. Lewes calls his entire psychostatical conditions, his nature and stock of ideas, or, in other words, his character, habits, memory, education, previous experience, and momentary mood. We gain no insight into what really occurs either in the mind or in the brain by calling all these things the 'apperceiving mass,' though of course this may upon occasion be convenient. On the whole I am inclined to think Mr. Lewes's term of 'assimilation' the most fruitful one yet used.
'Apperception.'—In Germany since Herbart's time, psychology has often discussed a process called Apperception. Incoming ideas or sensations are said to be 'apperceived' by existing 'masses' of ideas already in the mind. Clearly, the process we've described as perception is, in this sense, an apperceptive process. So are all forms of recognition, categorization, and labeling; and beyond these simplest suggestions, any further thoughts about our perceptions are also apperceptive processes. I haven't personally used the term apperception because it has had very different meanings throughout the history of philosophy, and terms like 'psychic reaction,' 'interpretation,' 'conception,' 'assimilation,' 'elaboration,' or simply 'thought' are perfect synonyms for its Herbartian meaning in a broad sense. Furthermore, it's hardly worth trying to analyze what are called apperceptive actions beyond the initial or perceptive stage, because their variations and degrees are practically endless. 'Apperception' refers to the total effect of what we've studied as association; it's clear that the things a given experience will suggest to a person depend on what Mr. Lewes refers to as their entire psychostatical conditions—essentially, their character, habits, memory, education, prior experience, and current mood. Using the term 'apperceiving mass' doesn't give us any real insight into what actually happens in the mind or the brain, although this might occasionally be useful. Overall, I tend to think that Mr. Lewes's term 'assimilation' is the most productive one we've encountered so far.
The 'apperceiving mass' is treated by the Germans as the active factor, the apperceived sensation as the passive one; the sensation being usually modified by the ideas in the mind. Out of the interaction of the two, cognition is{327} produced. But as Steinthal remarks, the apperceiving mass is itself often modified by the sensation. To quote him: "Although the a priori moment commonly shows itself to be the more powerful, apperception-processes can perfectly well occur in which the new observation transforms or enriches the apperceiving group of ideas. A child who hitherto has seen none but four-cornered tables apperceives a round one as a table; but by this the apperceiving mass ('table') is enriched. To his previous knowledge of tables comes this new feature that they need not be four-cornered, but may be round. In the history of science it has happened often enough that some discovery, at the same time that it was apperceived, i.e. brought into connection with the system of our knowledge, transformed the whole system. In principle, however, we must maintain that, although either factor is both active and passive, the a priori factor is almost always the more active of the two."[42]
The "apperceiving mass" is seen by the Germans as the active element, while the apperceived sensation is the passive one; the sensation is usually influenced by the ideas in the mind. From the interaction of both, cognition is{327} created. But as Steinthal points out, the apperceiving mass can also be influenced by the sensation. To quote him: "Even though the a priori aspect usually appears to be the stronger one, apperception processes can happen in which the new observation changes or enhances the apperceiving group of ideas. A child who has only seen square tables perceives a round one as a table; however, this enriches the apperceiving mass ('table'). Now, in addition to knowing that tables can be square, he learns that they can also be round. Throughout the history of science, there have been many instances where a discovery, as it was understood, simultaneously reshaped the entire knowledge system. In principle, however, we must assert that although both elements can be active and passive, the a priori factor is typically the more active one."[42]
Genius and Old-fogyism.—This account of Steinthal's brings out very clearly the difference between our psychological conceptions and what are called concepts in logic. In logic a concept is unalterable; but what are popularly called our 'conceptions of things' alter by being used. The aim of 'Science' is to attain conceptions so adequate and exact that we shall never need to change them. There is an everlasting struggle in every mind between the tendency to keep unchanged, and the tendency to renovate, its ideas. Our education is a ceaseless compromise between the conservative and the progressive factors. Every new experience must be disposed of under some old head. The great point is to find the head which has to be least altered to take it in. Certain Polynesian natives, seeing horses for the first time, called them pigs, that being the nearest head. My child of two played for a week with the first orange that was given him, calling it a 'ball.' He{328} called the first whole eggs he saw 'potatoes,' having been accustomed to see his 'eggs' broken into a glass, and his potatoes without the skin. A folding pocket-corkscrew he unhesitatingly called 'bad-scissors.' Hardly any one of us can make new heads easily when fresh experiences come. Most of us grow more and more enslaved to the stock conceptions with which we have once become familiar, and less and less capable of assimilating impressions in any but the old ways. Old-fogyism, in short, is the inevitable terminus to which life sweeps us on. Objects which violate our established habits of 'apperception' are simply not taken account of at all; or, if on some occasion we are forced by dint of argument to admit their existence, twenty-four hours later the admission is as if it were not, and every trace of the unassimilable truth has vanished from our thought. Genius, in truth, means little more than the faculty of perceiving in an unhabitual way.
Genius and Old-fogyism.—This account of Steinthal clearly highlights the difference between our psychological concepts and what are referred to as concepts in logic. In logic, a concept is fixed; however, what we commonly refer to as our 'conceptions of things' change through use. The goal of 'Science' is to achieve concepts that are so clear and precise that we will never need to revise them. There is a constant struggle in every mind between the desire to keep ideas unchanged and the desire to refresh them. Our education is an ongoing compromise between conservative and progressive elements. Every new experience must fit under some established category. The key is to find the category that requires the least adjustment to accommodate it. Certain Polynesian natives, seeing horses for the first time, called them pigs, as that was the closest category they had. My two-year-old played for a week with the first orange he was given, calling it a 'ball.' He referred to the first whole eggs he saw as 'potatoes,' since he was used to seeing his 'eggs' broken into a glass and his potatoes peeled. A folding pocket corkscrew he confidently called 'bad-scissors.' Almost all of us struggle to create new categories when faced with new experiences. Many of us become more and more attached to the familiar concepts we’ve learned and less able to incorporate new impressions except in the traditional ways. In short, old-fogyism is the inevitable endpoint life leads us to. Objects that challenge our established habits of 'apperception' are simply ignored; or, if we are persuaded to acknowledge their existence, after a day, it’s as if we never admitted it, and all traces of that unassimilated truth disappear from our minds. Genius, in essence, is just the ability to perceive in an uncommon way.
On the other hand, nothing is more congenial, from babyhood to the end of life, than to be able to assimilate the new to the old, to meet each threatening violator or burster of our well-known series of concepts, as it comes in, see through its unwontedness, and ticket it off as an old friend in disguise. This victorious assimilation of the new is in fact the type of all intellectual pleasure. The lust for it is scientific curiosity. The relation of the new to the old, before the assimilation is performed, is wonder. We feel neither curiosity nor wonder concerning things so far beyond us that we have no concepts to refer them to or standards by which to measure them.[43] The Fuegians, in{329} Darwin's voyage, wondered at the small boats, but took the big ship as a 'matter of course.' Only what we partly know already inspires us with a desire to know more. The more elaborate textile fabrics, the vaster works in metal, to most of us are like the air, the water, and the ground, absolute existences which awaken no ideas. It is a matter of course that an engraving or a copper-plate inscription should possess that degree of beauty. But if we are shown a pen-drawing of equal perfection, our personal sympathy with the difficulty of the task makes us immediately wonder at the skill. The old lady admiring the Academician's picture says to him: "And is it really all done by hand?"
On the other hand, nothing is more enjoyable, from childhood to the end of life, than being able to connect the new with the old, to face each challenging disruptor of our familiar concepts as it appears, see through its strangeness, and recognize it as an old friend in disguise. This successful blending of the new is actually the source of all intellectual enjoyment. The desire for it is scientific curiosity. The relationship between the new and the old, before we make the connection, is wonder. We don't feel curiosity or wonder about things that are so far beyond our understanding that we have no concepts to relate them to or standards to measure them against.[43] The Fuegians, during{329} Darwin's voyage, were amazed by the small boats but took the big ship for granted. Only what we somewhat know already sparks our desire to learn more. The more intricate textile fabrics and larger metalworks are, to most of us, like air, water, and soil—absolute realities that evoke no thoughts. It's expected that an engraving or a copper-plate inscription would have that level of beauty. But if we see a pen-drawing of the same quality, our personal appreciation for the difficulty of the task instantly makes us marvel at the skill. The elderly lady admiring the Academician's painting asks him: "And is it really all done by hand?"
The Physiological Process in Perception.—Enough has now been said to prove the general law of perception, which is this: that whilst part of what we perceive comes through our senses from the object before us, another part (and it may be the larger part) always comes out of our own mind.
The Physiological Process in Perception.—Enough has now been said to prove the general law of perception, which is this: that while some of what we perceive comes through our senses from the object in front of us, another part (and it may be the larger part) always comes from our own mind.
At bottom this is but a case of the general fact that our nerve-centres are organs for reacting on sense-impressions, and that our hemispheres, in particular, are given us that records of our past private experience may coöperate in the reaction. Of course such a general statement is vague. If we try to put an exact meaning into it, what we find most natural to believe is that the brain reacts by paths which the previous experiences have worn, and which make us perceive the probable thing, i.e., the thing by which on the previous occasions the reaction was most frequently aroused. The reaction of the hemispheres consists in the lighting up of a certain system of paths by{330} the current entering from the outer world. What corresponds to this mentally is a certain special pulse of thought, the thought, namely, of that most probable object. Farther than this in the analysis we can hardly go.
At its core, this is just a reflection of the fact that our nerve centers are designed to respond to sensory information, and that our brain hemispheres specifically allow our past personal experiences to influence this response. Naturally, such a broad statement can seem unclear. When we try to clarify it, we tend to believe that the brain reacts through pathways shaped by our previous experiences, which help us recognize what seems most likely, meaning the things that have often triggered a reaction before. The response of the hemispheres involves activating a specific network of pathways through{330} the incoming signals from the outside world. Mentally, this corresponds to a particular wave of thought, which is the idea of that most likely object. Beyond this point, the analysis becomes quite complex.
Hallucinations.—Between normal perception and illusion we have seen that there is no break, the process being identically the same in both. The last illusions we considered might fairly be called hallucinations. We must now consider the false perceptions more commonly called by that name. In ordinary parlance hallucination is held to differ from illusion in that, whilst there is an object really there in illusion, in hallucination there is no objective stimulus at all. We shall presently see that this supposed absence of objective stimulus in hallucination is a mistake, and that hallucinations are often only extremes of the perceptive process, in which the secondary cerebral reaction is out of all normal proportion to the peripheral stimulus which occasions the activity. Hallucinations usually appear abruptly and have the character of being forced upon the subject. But they possess various degrees of apparent objectivity. One mistake in limine must be guarded against. They are often talked of as images projected outwards by mistake. But where an hallucination is complete, it is much more than a mental image. An hallucination, subjectively considered, is a sensation, as good and true a sensation as if there were a real object there. The object happens not to be there, that is all.
Hallucinations.—We've established that there's no clear distinction between normal perception and illusion; the process is essentially the same in both cases. The last examples of illusions we looked at could easily be classified as hallucinations. Now, let's explore the false perceptions that are commonly referred to as hallucinations. In everyday language, hallucination is understood to differ from illusion in that, while there is a real object in an illusion, in a hallucination, there isn't any objective stimulus at all. However, we will soon realize that this belief about the absence of objective stimulus in hallucination is incorrect, and that hallucinations are often just extremes of the perceptive process, where the brain's secondary reaction is vastly disproportionate to the peripheral stimulus that triggers the activity. Hallucinations typically emerge suddenly and feel imposed on the person experiencing them. Yet, they can have varying degrees of apparent objectivity. One common misconception in limine should be avoided. They are frequently described as images mistakenly projected outward. But when a hallucination is complete, it goes far beyond just a mental image. A hallucination, when considered subjectively, is a sensation—just as real and valid as if there were an actual object present. The object simply isn't there; that's all.
The milder degrees of hallucination have been designated as pseudo-hallucinations. Pseudo-hallucinations and hallucinations have been sharply distinguished from each other only within a few years. From ordinary images of memory and fancy, pseudo-hallucinations differ in being much more vivid, minute, detailed, steady, abrupt, and spontaneous, in the sense that all feeling of our own activity in producing them is lacking. Dr. Kandinsky had a patient who, after taking opium or haschisch, had abundant pseudo-hallucinations and hallucinations. As he also{331} had strong visualizing power and was an educated physician, the three sorts of phenomena could be easily compared. Although projected outwards (usually not farther than the limit of distinctest vision, a foot or so), the pseudo-hallucinations lacked the character of objective reality which the hallucinations possessed, but, unlike the pictures of imagination, it was almost impossible to produce them at will. Most of the 'voices' which people hear (whether they give rise to delusions or not) are pseudo-hallucinations. They are described as 'inner' voices, although their character is entirely unlike the inner speech of the subject with himself. I know several persons who hear such inner voices making unforeseen remarks whenever they grow quiet and listen for them. They are a very common incident of delusional insanity, and may at last grow into vivid or completely exteriorized hallucinations. The latter are comparatively frequent occurrences in sporadic form; and certain individuals are liable to have them often. From the results of the 'Census of Hallucinations,' which was begun by Edmund Gurney, it would appear that, roughly speaking, one person at least in every ten is likely to have had a vivid hallucination at some time in his life. The following case from a healthy person will give an idea of what these hallucinations are:
The milder types of hallucination are called pseudo-hallucinations. Recently, pseudo-hallucinations and hallucinations have been clearly distinguished from one another. Pseudo-hallucinations differ from regular images of memory and imagination in that they are much more vivid, detailed, steady, sudden, and spontaneous, lacking any sense of our own involvement in creating them. Dr. Kandinsky had a patient who experienced numerous pseudo-hallucinations and hallucinations after using opium or hashish. Since this patient was also an educated physician with strong visualization skills, it was easy to compare the three types of phenomena. Although these pseudo-hallucinations are projected outward (usually not more than about a foot away), they lack the quality of objective reality that hallucinations have. Unlike imagined images, it’s nearly impossible to create them on command. Most of the 'voices' that people hear, regardless of whether they lead to delusions, are pseudo-hallucinations. They are described as 'inner' voices, but they feel completely different from the inner dialogue a person has with themselves. I know several individuals who hear such inner voices making unexpected comments when they become quiet and pay attention. These are quite common in cases of delusional insanity and can eventually develop into vivid or fully externalized hallucinations. The latter occurs frequently in sporadic instances, and some individuals are prone to having them often. Based on the results of the 'Census of Hallucinations' started by Edmund Gurney, it seems that roughly one in ten people is likely to experience a vivid hallucination at some point in their life. The following case from a healthy person illustrates what these hallucinations are like:
"When a girl of eighteen, I was one evening engaged in a very painful discussion with an elderly person. My distress was so great that I took up a thick ivory knitting-needle that was lying on the mantelpiece of the parlor and broke it into small pieces as I talked. In the midst of the discussion I was very wishful to know the opinion of a brother with whom I had an unusually close relationship. I turned round and saw him sitting at the farther side of a centre-table, with his arms folded (an unusual position with him), but, to my dismay, I perceived from the sarcastic expression of his mouth that he was not in sympathy with me, was not 'taking my side,' as I should{332} then have expressed it. The surprise cooled me, and the discussion was dropped.
"When I was eighteen, one evening I had a really intense argument with an older person. I was so upset that I picked up a thick ivory knitting needle from the mantelpiece in the living room and broke it into small pieces as I talked. During the argument, I really wanted to know what my brother, with whom I had a very close bond, thought about the situation. I looked over at him sitting on the other side of the center table with his arms crossed (which was unusual for him), but to my disappointment, I could see from the sarcastic look on his face that he wasn't on my side, wasn't 'taking my side,' as I would have put it at the time. The surprise cooled my emotions, and we dropped the discussion."
"Some minutes after, having occasion to speak to my brother, I turned towards him, but he was gone. I inquired when he left the room, and was told that he had not been in it, which I did not believe, thinking that he had come in for a minute and had gone out without being noticed. About an hour and a half afterwards he appeared, and convinced me, with some trouble, that he had never been near the house that evening. He is still alive and well."
"Some minutes later, when I needed to talk to my brother, I turned to him, but he was gone. I asked when he left the room, and I was told that he hadn't been in it, which I didn't believe, thinking he must have stepped in for a minute and left without anyone noticing. About an hour and a half later, he showed up and, after some effort, convinced me that he had never been near the house that evening. He is still alive and well."
The hallucinations of fever-delirium are a mixture of pseudo-hallucination, true hallucination, and illusion. Those of opium, haschish, and belladonna resemble them in this respect. The commonest hallucination of all is that of hearing one's own name called aloud. Nearly one half of the sporadic cases which I have collected are of this sort.
The hallucinations from fever delirium are a combination of pseudo-hallucinations, true hallucinations, and illusions. Those caused by opium, hashish, and belladonna are similar in this way. The most common hallucination is hearing someone call one's name loudly. Almost half of the sporadic cases I've recorded fall into this category.
Hallucination and Illusion.—Hallucinations are easily produced by verbal suggestion in hypnotic subjects. Thus, point to a dot on a sheet of paper, and call it 'General Grant's photograph,' and your subject will see a photograph of the General there instead of the dot. The dot gives objectivity to the appearance, and the suggested notion of the General gives it form. Then magnify the dot by a lens; double it by a prism or by nudging the eyeball; reflect it in a mirror; turn it upside-down; or wipe it out; and the subject will tell you that the 'photograph' has been enlarged, doubled, reflected, turned about, or made to disappear. In M. Binet's language, the dot is the outward point de repère which is needed to give objectivity to your suggestion, and without which the latter will only produce an inner image in the subject's mind. M. Binet has shown that such a peripheral point de repère is used in an enormous number, not only of hypnotic hallucinations, but of hallucinations of the insane. These latter are often unilateral; that is, the patient hears the voices always on one{333} side of him, or sees the figure only when a certain one of his eyes is open. In many of these cases it has been distinctly proved that a morbid irritation in the internal ear, or an opacity in the humors of the eye, was the starting point of the current which the patient's diseased acoustic or optical centres clothed with their peculiar products in the way of ideas. Hallucinations produced in this way are 'illusions'; and M. Binet's theory, that all hallucinations must start in the periphery, may be called an attempt to reduce hallucination and illusion to one physiological type, the type, namely, to which normal perception belongs. In every case, according to M. Binet, whether of perception, of hallucination, or of illusion, we get the sensational vividness by means of a current from the peripheral nerves. It may be a mere trace of a current. But that trace is enough to kindle the maximal process of disintegration in the cells (cf. p. 310), and to give to the object perceived the character of externality. What the nature of the object shall be will depend wholly on the particular system of paths in which the process is kindled. Part of the thing in all cases comes from the sense-organ, the rest is furnished by the mind. But we cannot by introspection distinguish between these parts; and our only formula for the result is that the brain has reacted on the impression in the resulting way.
Hallucination and Illusion.—Hallucinations can be easily triggered by verbal suggestions in people under hypnosis. For example, if you point to a dot on a piece of paper and label it 'General Grant's photograph,' the person will perceive it as an actual photo of the General instead of just a dot. The dot provides an anchor for the appearance, while the suggestion of the General shapes that perception. Now, if you enlarge the dot with a lens, double it with a prism, or nudge the person's eye, reflect it in a mirror, flip it upside down, or erase it, the subject will claim that the 'photograph' has been enlarged, doubled, reflected, turned, or made to vanish. As M. Binet puts it, the dot serves as an external point de repère that helps give reality to your suggestion; without it, the suggestion would only create a mental image for the individual. M. Binet has demonstrated that such a peripheral point de repère is utilized in countless cases, not only of hypnotic hallucinations but also of hallucinations experienced by the mentally ill. These cases are often unilateral; meaning the patient hears voices only from one side or sees a figure only when a specific eye is open. In many instances, it has been clearly established that abnormal irritation in the inner ear or cloudiness in the eye's fluids triggered the response, which the patient's damaged auditory or visual centers then interpreted into distinct ideas. Hallucinations produced in this manner are considered 'illusions'; and M. Binet's theory posits that all hallucinations originate from the periphery, aiming to classify hallucination and illusion under one physiological category, the same kind that normal perception fits into. In every scenario, according to M. Binet, whether involving perception, hallucination, or illusion, we derive the vividness of sensation from a current originating in the peripheral nerves. It might be just a faint trace of a current, but that trace is sufficient to ignite the maximum disintegration process within the cells (cf. p. 310), granting the perceived object the quality of externality. The particular characteristics of the object will completely depend on the specific neural pathways involved in initiating the process. A portion of the experience comes from the sensory organ, while the rest is provided by the mind. However, we cannot distinguish between these components through introspection; our only conclusion is that the brain has reacted to the impression in the resulting way.
M. Binet's theory accounts indeed for a multitude of cases, but certainly not for all. The prism does not always double the false appearance, nor does the latter always disappear when the eyes are closed. For Binet, an abnormally or exclusively active part of the cortex gives the nature of what shall appear, whilst a peripheral sense-organ alone can give the intensity sufficient to make it appear projected into real space. But since this intensity is after all but a matter of degree, one does not see why, under rare conditions, the degree in question might not be attained by inner causes exclusively. In that case we should have certain hallucinations centrally initiated, as well as the peripherally initiated hallucinations which are{334} the only sort that M. Binet's theory allows. It seems probable on the whole, therefore, that centrally initiated hallucinations can exist. How often they do exist is another question. The existence of hallucinations which affect more than one sense is an argument for central initiation. For, grant that the thing seen may have its starting point in the outer world, the voice which it is heard to utter must be due to an influence from the visual region, i.e. must be of central origin.
M. Binet's theory accounts for many cases, but definitely not all. The prism doesn't always double the false appearance, nor does that appearance always vanish when the eyes are closed. For Binet, an unusually or exclusively active part of the cortex determines what will be perceived, while a peripheral sense organ can provide the intensity needed to make it seem like it's projected into real space. However, since this intensity is simply a matter of degree, it raises questions about whether, under rare conditions, that degree might be reached solely by internal causes. In that scenario, we would have certain hallucinations that originate in the center, in addition to the peripheral ones that are the only type M. Binet's theory allows. It seems likely that centrally initiated hallucinations can exist overall. How often they actually occur is another question. The existence of hallucinations affecting more than one sense supports the idea of central initiation. Because, even if the thing seen originates in the outer world, the voice it is heard to make must come from an influence of the visual area, meaning it must have a central origin.
Sporadic cases of hallucination, visiting people only once in a lifetime (which seem to be a quite frequent type), are on any theory hard to understand in detail. They are often extraordinarily complete; and the fact that many of them are reported as veridical, that is, as coinciding with real events, such as accidents, deaths, etc., of the persons seen, is an additional complication of the phenomenon. The first really scientific study of hallucination in all its possible bearings, on the basis of a large mass of empirical material, was begun by Mr. Edmund Gurney and is continued by other members of the Society for Psychical Research; and the 'Census' is now being applied to several countries under the auspices of the International Congress of Experimental Psychology. It is to be hoped that out of these combined labors something solid will eventually grow. The facts shade off into the phenomena of motor automatism, trance, etc.; and nothing but a wide comparative study can give really instructive results.[44]
Sporadic cases of hallucinations, where people only experience them once in a lifetime (which seems to be quite common), are difficult to understand in detail from any theory. They are often incredibly vivid; and the fact that many of these experiences are reported as veridical, meaning they align with real events like accidents or deaths of the individuals seen, adds complexity to the phenomenon. The first thorough scientific investigation of hallucinations in all their possible aspects, based on a significant amount of empirical data, was initiated by Mr. Edmund Gurney and continues with other members of the Society for Psychical Research. The 'Census' is now being conducted in several countries under the guidance of the International Congress of Experimental Psychology. It is hoped that these combined efforts will eventually lead to something substantial. The facts blend into phenomena such as motor automatism, trance states, etc.; and only through extensive comparative studies can we derive genuinely informative insights.[44]
CHAPTER XXI.
THE PERCEPTION OF SPACE.
As adult thinkers we have a definite and apparently instantaneous knowledge of the sizes, shapes, and distances of the things amongst which we live and move; and we have moreover a practically definite notion of the whole great infinite continuum of real space in which the world swings and in which all these things are located. Nevertheless it seems obvious that the baby's world is vague and confused in all these respects. How does our definite knowledge of space grow up? This is one of the quarrelsome problems in psychology. This chapter must be so brief that there will be no room for the polemic and historic aspects of the subject, and I will state simply and dogmatically the conclusions which seem most plausible to me.
As adult thinkers, we have a clear and seemingly instant understanding of the sizes, shapes, and distances of the things around us; plus, we have a fairly solid idea of the vast, infinite continuum of real space in which the world exists and in which all these things are placed. However, it’s clear that a baby's perception of the world is vague and confused in these aspects. How does our clear understanding of space develop? This is one of the contentious issues in psychology. This chapter will be so brief that there won't be space for the debate and historical perspectives on the topic, so I'll simply and directly state the conclusions that seem most reasonable to me.
The quality of voluminousness exists in all sensations, just as intensity does. We call the reverberations of a thunder-storm more voluminous than the squeaking of a slate-pencil; the entrance into a warm bath gives our skin a more massive feeling than the prick of a pin; a little neuralgic pain, fine as a cobweb, in the face, seems less extensive than the heavy soreness of a boil or the vast discomfort of a colic or a lumbago; and a solitary star looks smaller than the noonday sky. Muscular sensations and semicircular-canal sensations have volume. Smells and tastes are not without it; and sensations from our inward organs have it in a marked degree.
The quality of volume exists in all sensations, just like intensity does. We say the sound of a thunderstorm is more powerful than the squeak of a pencil; stepping into a warm bath makes our skin feel more substantial than the prick of a pin; a slight neuralgic pain, delicate as a cobweb, feels less extensive than the heavy ache of a boil or the deep discomfort of colic or lower back pain; and a single star looks smaller than the sky at noon. Muscular sensations and those from our semicircular canals have volume too. Smells and tastes aren't without it; and sensations from our internal organs show it quite clearly.
Repletion and emptiness, suffocation, palpitation, headache, are examples of this, and certainly not less spatial is the consciousness we have of our general bodily condition{336} in nausea, fever, heavy drowsiness, and fatigue. Our entire cubic content seems then sensibly manifest to us as such, and feels much larger than any local pulsation, pressure, or discomfort. Skin and retina are, however, the organs in which the space-element plays the most active part. Not only does the maximal vastness yielded by the retina surpass that yielded by any other organ, but the intricacy with which our attention can subdivide this vastness and perceive it to be composed of lesser portions simultaneously coexisting alongside of each other is without a parallel elsewhere. The ear gives a greater vastness than the skin, but is considerably less able to subdivide it. The vastness, moreover, is as great in one direction as in another. Its dimensions are so vague that in it there is no question as yet of surface as opposed to depth; 'volume' being the best short name for the sensation in question.
Repletion and emptiness, suffocation, heart palpitations, headaches are some examples of this, and our awareness of our overall physical state, like nausea, fever, extreme drowsiness, and fatigue, is certainly just as spatial{336}. At those times, our entire bodily volume seems very apparent to us and feels much larger than any local throbbing, pressure, or discomfort. However, the skin and eyes are the organs where the sense of space is most actively involved. Not only does the maximal extent provided by the eyes exceed that of any other organ, but the way we can break down this vastness into smaller parts that coexist simultaneously is unmatched elsewhere. The ear offers a greater sense of space than the skin but is much less capable of dividing it. The vastness, furthermore, is as great in one direction as in another. Its dimensions are so unclear that there isn't yet a distinction between surface and depth; 'volume' is the best brief term for the sensation being described.
Sensations of different orders are roughly comparable with each other as to their volumes. Persons born blind are said to be surprised at the largeness with which objects appear to them when their sight is restored. Franz says of his patient cured of cataract: "He saw everything much larger than he had supposed from the idea obtained by his sense of touch. Moving, and especially living, objects appeared very large." Loud sounds have a certain enormousness of feeling. 'Glowing' bodies as Hering says, give us a perception "which seems roomy (raumhaft) in comparison with that of strictly surface-color. A glowing iron looks luminous through and through, and so does a flame." The interior of one's mouth-cavity feels larger when explored by the tongue than when looked at. The crater of a newly-extracted tooth, and the movements of a loose tooth in its socket, feel quite monstrous. A midge buzzing against the drum of the ear will often seem as big as a butterfly. The pressure of the air in the tympanic cavity upon the membrane gives an astonishingly large sensation.
Different sensations can be roughly compared in terms of their intensity. People who are born blind often express surprise at how large objects appear to them once their sight is restored. Franz describes a patient he treated for cataracts: "He saw everything much larger than he had imagined based on what he felt with his hands. Moving, especially living, objects seemed very large." Loud sounds create a feeling of significant size. As Hering points out, 'glowing' objects give us a perception that feels "roomy" compared to that of flat color. A glowing piece of iron appears luminous all the way through, and the same goes for a flame. The inside of your mouth feels bigger when you explore it with your tongue than when you just look at it. The hole left by an extracted tooth, and the movement of a loose tooth in its socket, feel quite exaggerated. A tiny midge buzzing against your eardrum may often seem as large as a butterfly. The pressure of air in the ear cavity against the eardrum gives a surprisingly large sensation.
The voluminousness of the feeling seems to bear very little relation to the size of the organ that yields it. The ear and{337} eye are comparatively minute organs, yet they give us feelings of great volume. The same lack of exact proportion between size of feeling and size of organ affected obtains within the limits of particular sensory organs. An object appears smaller on the lateral portions of the retina than it does on the fovea, as may be easily verified by holding the two forefingers parallel and a couple of inches apart, and transferring the gaze of one eye from one to the other. Then the finger not directly looked at will appear to shrink. On the skin, if two points kept equidistant (blunted compass-or scissors-points, for example) be drawn along so as really to describe a pair of parallel lines, the lines will appear farther apart in some spots than in others. If, for example, we draw them across the face, the person experimented upon will feel as if they began to diverge near the mouth and to include it in a well-marked ellipse.
The intensity of a feeling doesn’t really match the size of the organ that produces it. The ear and{337} eye are relatively small organs, yet they create feelings that can be quite intense. The same discrepancy between the feeling's intensity and the size of the affected organ exists within specific sensory organs. An object seems smaller on the edges of the retina than it does in the fovea, which can easily be observed by holding two fingers parallel and a couple of inches apart, then shifting the gaze of one eye from one finger to the other. The finger that isn’t being directly looked at will seem to shrink. On the skin, if two points kept at the same distance apart (like the ends of dull compass points or scissors) are drawn in a way that creates parallel lines, those lines will look farther apart in some areas than in others. For instance, if we draw them across the face, the person being tested will feel as if the lines start to diverge near the mouth and form a noticeable ellipse around it.

Fig. 65 (after Weber).
Fig. 65 (after Weber).
The dotted lines give the real course of the points, the continuous lines the course as felt.
The dotted lines show the actual path of the points, while the solid lines represent the path as experienced.
Now my first thesis is that this extensity, discernible in each and every sensation, though more developed in some than in others, IS THE ORIGINAL SENSATION OF SPACE, out of which all the exact knowledge about space that we afterwards come to have is woven by processes of discrimination, association, and selection.
My first point is that this extent, which can be seen in every sensation, though it appears more prominently in some than in others, IS THE BASIC SENSATION OF SPACE, from which all the precise understanding of space that we eventually gain is formed through processes of differentiation, association, and selection.
The Construction of Real Space.—To the babe who first opens his senses upon the world, though the experience is one of vastness or extensity, it is of an extensity within{338} which no definite divisions, directions, sizes, or distances are yet marked out. Potentially, the room in which the child is born is subdivisible into a multitude of parts, fixed or movable, which at any given moment of time have definite relations to each other and to his person. Potentially, too, this room taken as a whole can be prolonged in various directions by the addition to it of those farther-lying spaces which constitute the outer world. But actually the further spaces are unfelt, and the subdivisions are undiscriminated, by the babe; the chief part of whose education during his first year of life consists in his becoming acquainted with them and recognizing and identifying them in detail. This process may be called that of the construction of real space, as a newly apprehended object, out of the original chaotic experiences of vastness. It consists of several subordinate processes:
The Construction of Real Space.—To a baby who first experiences the world, although it feels vast and expansive, it's an expanse that lacks clear divisions, directions, sizes, or distances. The room where the child is born can potentially be divided into many parts, whether fixed or movable, which at any moment have specific relationships to one another and to the baby. This room, as a whole, can also be extended in different directions by adding the farther spaces that make up the outside world. However, these additional spaces are not yet experienced by the baby, and the divisions are not yet recognized; the primary part of the baby's education during the first year is learning about them, recognizing, and identifying them in detail. This process can be called the construction of real space, as it forms a newly understood object from the original chaotic feelings of vastness. It includes several smaller processes:
First, the total object of vision or of feeling at any time must have smaller objects definitely discriminated within it;
First, the overall object of vision or feeling at any time must clearly include smaller objects that are distinguishable within it;
Secondly, objects seen or tasted must be identified with objects felt, heard, etc., and vice versa, so that the same 'thing' may come to be recognized, although apprehended in such widely differing ways;
Secondly, objects that are seen or tasted need to be matched with objects that are felt, heard, etc., and vice versa, so that the same 'thing' can be recognized, even though it is experienced in such different ways;
Third, the total extent felt at any time must be conceived as definitely located in the midst of the surrounding extents of which the world consists;
Third, the total extent felt at any time should be thought of as clearly situated among the surrounding extents that make up the world;
Fourth, these objects must appear arranged in definite order in the so-called three dimensions; and
Fourth, these objects must be arranged in a specific order in the so-called three dimensions; and
Fifth, their relative sizes must be perceived—in other words, they must be measured.
Fifth, their relative sizes need to be understood—in other words, they must be measured.
Let us take these processes in regular order.
Let's go through these processes step by step.
1) Subdivision or Discrimination.—Concerning this there is not much to be added to what was set forth in Chapter XIV. Moving parts, sharp parts, brightly colored parts of the total field of perception 'catch the attention' and are then discerned as special objects surrounded by the remainder of the field of view or touch. That when{339} such objects are discerned apart they should appear as thus surrounded, must be set down as an ultimate fact of our sensibility of which no farther account can be given. Later, as one partial object of this sort after another has become familiar and identifiable, the attention can be caught by more than one at once. We then see or feel a number of distinct objects alongside of each other in the general extended field. The 'alongsideness' is in the first instance vague—it may not carry with it the sense of definite directions or distances—and it too must be regarded as an ultimate fact of our sensibility.
1) Subdivision or Discrimination.—Not much can be added to what was discussed in Chapter XIV. Moving parts, sharp edges, and bright colors in our overall perception grab our attention and are recognized as specific objects set against the rest of what we can see or touch. When{339} these objects are recognized as separate, it's important to acknowledge that they appear surrounded by everything else, which is a fundamental aspect of our perception that needs no further explanation. Over time, as we become familiar and able to identify these individual objects, we can focus on more than one at a time. We begin to see or feel multiple distinct objects next to each other in the wider field. Initially, this "next to each other" sensation is unclear—it may not convey precise directions or distances—and it too should be accepted as a basic element of our sensory experience.
2) Coalescence of Different Sensations into the Same 'Thing.'—When two senses are impressed simultaneously we tend to identify their objects as one thing. When a conductor is brought near the skin, the snap heard, the spark seen, and the sting felt, are all located together and believed to be different aspects of one entity, the 'electric discharge.' The space of the seen object fuses with the space of the heard object and with that of the felt object by an ultimate law of our consciousness, which is that we simplify, unify, and identify as much as we possibly can. Whatever sensible data can be attended to together we locate together. Their several extents seem one extent. The place at which each clears is held to be the same with the place at which the others appear. This is the first and great 'act' by which our world gets spatially arranged.
2) Coalescence of Different Sensations into the Same 'Thing.'—When two senses are stimulated at the same time, we tend to see their objects as one thing. When a conductor comes close to the skin, the snap we hear, the spark we see, and the sting we feel are all perceived together and thought of as different aspects of one entity, the 'electric discharge.' The space of the seen object merges with the space of the heard object and the space of the felt object due to a fundamental principle of our consciousness: we aim to simplify, unify, and connect as much as we can. Anything we can perceive together, we tend to locate together. Their different extents feel like one extent. The point where each sensation clears is seen as the same place where the others occur. This is the first and significant 'act' by which our world organizes itself spatially.
In this coalescence in a 'thing,' one of the coalescing sensations is held to be the thing, the other sensations are taken for its more or less accidental properties, or modes of appearance. The sensation chosen to be essentially the thing is the most constant and practically important of the lot; most often it is hardness or weight. But the hardness or weight is never without tactile bulk; and as we can always see something in our hand when we feel something there, we equate the bulk felt with the bulk seen, and thenceforward this common bulk is also apt to figure as of the essence of the 'thing.' Frequently a shape so figures,{340} sometimes a temperature, a taste, etc.; but for the most part temperature, smell, sound, color, or whatever other phenomena may vividly impress us simultaneously with the bulk felt or seen, figure among the accidents. Smell and sound impress us, it is true, when we neither see nor touch the thing; but they are strongest when we see or touch, so we locate the source of these properties within the touched or seen space, whilst the properties themselves we regard as overflowing in a weakened form into the spaces filled by other things. In all this, it will be observed, the sense-data whose spaces coalesce into one are yielded by different sense-organs. Such data have no tendency to displace each other from consciousness, but can be attended to together all at once. Often indeed they vary concomitantly and reach a maximum together. We may be sure, therefore, that the general rule of our mind is to locate IN each other all sensations which are associated in simultaneous experience and do not interfere with each other's perception.
In this coming together in a 'thing,' one of the sensations that come together is considered to be the thing itself, while the other sensations are seen as its more or less accidental properties or modes of appearance. The sensation chosen as essentially the thing is usually the most constant and practically important one; most often, it’s hardness or weight. However, hardness or weight is never without a tactile bulk; and since we can always see something in our hand when we feel something there, we equate the bulk felt with the bulk seen, making this common bulk also seem essential to the 'thing.' Often, a shape does this,{340} sometimes a temperature, a taste, etc.; but for the most part, temperature, smell, sound, color, or any other phenomena that may vividly impress us simultaneously with the bulk felt or seen are considered accidents. Smell and sound do impress us, it’s true, when we neither see nor touch the thing; but they are strongest when we see or touch, so we locate the source of these properties within the touched or seen space, while we see the properties themselves as overflowing in a weakened form into spaces occupied by other things. It should be noted that the sense-data whose spaces come together as one come from different sense organs. These data do not tend to displace each other from awareness but can be focused on together all at once. Indeed, they often vary together and reach their peak at the same time. We can be sure, therefore, that the general rule of our mind is to locate IN each other all sensations that are linked in simultaneous experience and do not interfere with each other's perception.
3) The Sense of the Surrounding World.—Different impressions on the same sense-organ do interfere with each other's perception and cannot well be attended to at once. Hence we do not locate them in each other's spaces, but arrange them in a serial order of exteriority, each alongside of the rest, in a space larger than that which any one sensation brings. We can usually recover anything lost from our sight by moving our eyes back in its direction; and it is through these constant changes that every field of seen things comes at last to be thought of as always having a fringe of other things possible to be seen spreading in all directions round about it. Meanwhile the movements concomitantly with which the various fields alternate are also felt and remembered; and gradually (through association) this and that movement come in our thought to suggest this or that extent of fresh objects introduced. Gradually, too, since the objects vary indefinitely in kind, we abstract from their several natures and think separately{341} of their mere extents, of which extents the various movements remain as the only constant introducers and associates. More and more, therefore, do we think of movement and seen extent as mutually involving each other, until at last we may get to regard them as synonymous; and, empty space then meaning for us mere room for movement, we may, if we are psychologists, readily but erroneously assign to the 'muscular sense' the chief rôle in perceiving extensiveness at all.
3) The Sense of the Surrounding World.—Different impressions on the same sense organ interfere with each other's perception and can't easily be focused on simultaneously. As a result, we don't place them in each other's spaces, but instead arrange them in a sequence of externality, each beside the others, in a space larger than what any single sensation produces. We can usually find anything we've lost from view by shifting our gaze back in its direction; and it’s through these constant shifts that we eventually think of every visible field as always having a fringe of other things that could be seen spreading all around it. At the same time, the movements that coincide with the changes in these fields are also felt and remembered; and gradually (through association), these movements come to suggest different new objects being introduced. Over time, since the objects vary endlessly in nature, we abstract from their specific characteristics and think separately{341} of their mere extents, while the various movements remain as the only constant indicators and connectors. Thus, we increasingly see movement and visible extent as interrelated, until eventually, we might even consider them synonymous; and empty space then becomes for us merely room for movement, leading us, if we are psychologists, to mistakenly attribute the primary role in perceiving extensiveness to the 'muscular sense.'
4) The Serial Order of Locations.—The muscular sense has much to do with defining the order of position of things seen, felt, or heard. We look at a point; another point upon the retina's margin catches our attention, and in an instant we turn the fovea upon it, letting its image successively fall upon all the points of the intervening retinal line. The line thus traced so rapidly by the second point is itself a visual object, with the first and second point at its respective ends. It separates the points, which become located by its length with reference to each other. If a third point catch the attention, more peripheral still than the second point, then a still greater movement of the eyeball and a continuation of the line will result, the second point now appearing between the first and third. Every moment of our life, peripherally-lying objects are drawing lines like this between themselves and other objects which they displace from our attention as we bring them to the centre of our field of view. Each peripheral retinal point comes in this way to suggest a line at the end of which it lies, a line which a possible movement will trace; and even the motionless field of vision ends at last by signifying a system of positions brought out by possible movements between its centre and all peripheral parts.
4) The Serial Order of Locations.—The muscular sense plays a big role in determining the order of position of things we see, feel, or hear. We focus on one point; another point on the edge of our vision grabs our attention, and in a flash, we shift our focus to it, allowing its image to touch every point along the line of our retina in between. The line that is quickly traced by the second point becomes a visual object itself, with the first and second points marking its ends. It separates the points, which become positioned by its length in relation to each other. If a third point attracts our attention, even further out than the second point, a larger movement of the eyeball and an extension of the line will happen, making the second point now appear between the first and third. Every moment of our lives, objects off to the sides are drawing lines like this between themselves and other objects, shifting them from our focus as we bring them into the center of our view. Each peripheral point on the retina in this way suggests a line at its end, which a potential movement would trace; and even the still field of vision eventually signifies a system of positions defined by possible movements between its center and all the surrounding areas.
It is the same with our skin and joints. By moving our hand over objects we trace lines of direction, and new impressions arise at their ends. The 'lines' are sometimes on the articular surfaces, sometimes on the skin as well; in either case they give a definite order of arrangement to the{342} successive objects between which they intervene. Similarly with sounds and smells. With our heads in a certain position, a certain sound or a certain smell is most distinct. Turning our head makes this experience fainter and brings another sound, or another smell, to its maximum. The two sounds or smells are thus separated by the movement located at its ends, the movement itself being realized as a sweep through space whose value is given partly by the semicircular-canal feeling, partly by the articular cartilages of the neck, and partly by the impressions produced upon the eye.
It's the same with our skin and joints. When we move our hand over objects, we create lines of direction, and new impressions appear at their ends. These 'lines' can be found on the joint surfaces and sometimes on the skin; in both cases, they provide a clear order of arrangement to the{342} successive objects they connect. The same goes for sounds and smells. With our heads positioned a certain way, a particular sound or smell is most noticeable. Turning our head makes this experience less intense and highlights another sound or smell. The two sounds or smells are therefore separated by the movement at their endpoints, which is perceived as a sweep through space, with its significance coming partly from the feeling in the semicircular canals, partly from the joint cartilage in the neck, and partly from the impressions made on the eye.
By such general principles of action as these everything looked at, felt, smelt, or heard comes to be located in a more or less definite position relatively to other collateral things either actually presented or only imagined as possibly there. I say 'collateral' things, for I prefer not to complicate the account just yet with any special consideration of the 'third dimension,' distance, or depth, as it has been called.
By using general principles of action like these, everything that is seen, touched, smelled, or heard is placed in a more or less definite position in relation to other related things that are either actually present or just thought to possibly exist. I refer to these as 'related' things because I prefer not to complicate the explanation at this point with any specific discussion of the 'third dimension,' which is known as distance or depth.
3) The Measurement of Things in Terms of Each Other.—Here the first thing that seems evident is that we have no immediate power of comparing together with any accuracy the extents revealed by different sensations. Our mouth-cavity feels indeed to the tongue larger than it feels to the finger or eye, our lips feel larger than a surface equal to them on our thigh. So much comparison is immediate; but it is vague; and for anything exact we must resort to other help.
3) The Measurement of Things in Terms of Each Other.—The first clear point is that we can’t directly compare the sizes shown by different sensations with any precision. The inside of our mouth feels bigger to our tongue than it does to our finger or eye, and our lips feel larger than an equally sized surface on our thigh. So, we can make some immediate comparisons, but they are quite vague; for anything precise, we need to use additional methods.
The great agent in comparing the extent felt by one sensory surface with that felt by another is superposition—superposition of one surface upon another, and superposition of one outer thing upon many surfaces.
The key factor in comparing the sensations experienced by one sensory surface to those experienced by another is superposition—layering one surface over another, and layering one external object over multiple surfaces.
Two surfaces of skin superposed on each other are felt simultaneously, and by the law laid down on p. 339 are judged to occupy an identical place. Similarly of our hand, when seen and felt at the same time by its resident sensibility.{343}
Two layers of skin overlapping each other are felt at the same time, and according to the rule stated in p. 339, they are considered to be in the same place. The same goes for our hand when it is both seen and felt simultaneously by our inherent sense of touch.{343}
In these identifications and reductions of the many to the one it must be noticed that when the resident sensations of largeness of two opposed surfaces conflict, one of the sensations is chosen as the true standard and the other treated as illusory. Thus an empty tooth-socket is believed to be really smaller than the finger-tip which it will not admit, although it may feel larger; and in general it may be said that the hand, as the almost exclusive organ of palpation, gives its own magnitude to the other parts, instead of having its size determined by them.
In identifying and simplifying the many into one, it's important to note that when the feelings of size from two opposing surfaces clash, one sensation is accepted as the true standard while the other is dismissed as an illusion. So, an empty tooth socket is thought to be actually smaller than the fingertip that it can't accommodate, even if it may seem larger; and generally, it can be said that the hand, being the primary organ for touch, sets its own size relative to other parts rather than having its size defined by them.
But even though exploration of one surface by another were impossible, we could always measure our various surfaces against each other by applying the same extended object first to one and then to another. We might of course at first suppose that the object itself waxed and waned as it glided from one place to another (cf. above, Fig. 65); but the principle of simplifying as much as possible our world would soon drive us out of that assumption into the easier one that objects as a rule keep their sizes, and that most of our sensations are affected by errors for which a constant allowance must be made.
But even though it would be impossible to explore one surface with another, we could always compare our different surfaces by using the same object first on one and then the other. We might initially think that the object itself changed size as it moved from one place to another (cf. above, Fig. 65); however, the principle of simplifying our understanding of the world would quickly lead us to abandon that idea in favor of the simpler notion that objects typically maintain their sizes, and that many of our perceptions are influenced by errors that we need to account for.
In the retina there is no reason to suppose that the bignesses of two impressions (lines or blotches) falling on different regions are at first felt to stand in any exact mutual ratio. But if the impressions come from the same object, then we might judge their sizes to be just the same. This, however, only when the relation of the object to the eye is believed to be on the whole unchanged. When the object, by moving, changes its relations to the eye, the sensation excited by its image even on the same retinal region becomes so fluctuating that we end by ascribing no absolute import whatever to the retinal space-feeling which at any moment we may receive. So complete does this overlooking of retinal magnitude become that it is next to impossible to compare the visual magnitudes of objects at different distances without making the experiment of superposition. We cannot say beforehand how much of a{344} distant house or tree our finger will cover. The various answers to the familiar question, How large is the moon?—answers which vary from a cartwheel to a wafer—illustrate this most strikingly. The hardest part of the training of a young draughtsman is his learning to feel directly the retinal (i.e. primitively sensible) magnitudes which the different objects in the field of view subtend. To do this he must recover what Ruskin calls the 'innocence of the eye'—that is, a sort of childish perception of stains of color merely as such, without consciousness of what they mean.
In the retina, there's no reason to believe that the sizes of two impressions (like lines or patches) hitting different areas are initially perceived as having any precise relationship. However, if the impressions come from the same object, we might assume their sizes are identical. This assumption holds only if we think the object's position relative to the eye remains largely unchanged. When the object moves and alters its relationship to the eye, the sensation generated by its image—even in the same area of the retina—becomes so variable that we ultimately attach no real meaning to the retinal perception we might have at any moment. This neglect of retinal size is so complete that it's nearly impossible to compare the visual sizes of objects at various distances without overlapping them. We can't predict how much of a{344} distant house or tree our finger will obscure. The wide range of responses to the common question, "How big is the moon?"—responses that range from the size of a cartwheel to a wafer—illustrate this very clearly. The most challenging part of training a young artist is getting them to directly sense the retinal (i.e., fundamentally perceived) sizes of the different objects in their view. To achieve this, they must regain what Ruskin terms the 'innocence of the eye'—a kind of childlike perception of colors as purely colors, without awareness of their significance.
With the rest of us this innocence is lost. Out of all the visual magnitudes of each known object we have selected one as the 'real' one to think of, and degraded all the others to serve as its signs. This real magnitude is determined by æsthetic and practical interests. It is that which we get when the object is at the distance most propitious for exact visual discrimination of its details. This is the distance at which we hold anything we are examining. Farther than this we see it too small, nearer too large. And the larger and the smaller feeling vanish in the act of suggesting this one, their more important meaning. As I look along the dining-table I overlook the fact that the farther plates and glasses feel so much smaller than my own, for I know that they are all equal in size; and the feeling of them, which is a present sensation, is eclipsed in the glare of the knowledge, which is a merely imagined one.
With the rest of us, this innocence is gone. Out of all the visual sizes of each known object, we have chosen one as the 'real' one to think about, and downgraded all the others to be its symbols. This real size is determined by aesthetic and practical interests. It is what we perceive when the object is at the distance that’s best for seeing its details clearly. This is the distance at which we hold anything we’re examining. If it’s farther away, it looks too small; if it’s too close, it looks too large. The perception of larger and smaller disappears when we focus on this one, their more significant meaning. As I look along the dining table, I ignore the fact that the plates and glasses farther away feel so much smaller than my own, because I know that they are all the same size; and the sensation of them, which is immediate, gets overshadowed by the knowledge, which is just a mental image.
It is the same with shape as with size. Almost all the visible shapes of things are what we call perspective 'distortions.' Square table-tops constantly present two acute and two obtuse angles; circles drawn on our wall-papers, our carpets, or on sheets of paper, usually show like ellipses; parallels approach as they recede; human bodies are foreshortened; and the transitions from one to another of these altering forms are infinite and continual. Out of the flux, however, one phase always stands prominent. It is the form the object has when we see it easiest and best: and{345} that is when our eyes and the object both are in what may be called the normal position. In this position our head is upright and our optic axes either parallel or symmetrically convergent; the plane of the object is perpendicular to the visual plane; and if the object is one containing many lines, it is turned so as to make them, as far as possible, either parallel or perpendicular to the visual plane. In this situation it is that we compare all shapes with each other; here every exact measurement and every decision is made.
It’s the same with shape as it is with size. Almost all the visible shapes of objects are what we refer to as perspective 'distortions.' Square tables consistently show two acute angles and two obtuse angles; circles drawn on our wallpaper, carpets, or sheets of paper usually appear as ellipses; parallel lines seem to converge as they move away; human bodies are shortened; and the transitions between these changing forms are endless and ongoing. However, amid this flux, one phase always stands out. It’s the form the object takes when we see it most clearly and accurately: and{345} that happens when our eyes and the object are in what can be called the normal position. In this position, our head is upright and our line of sight is either parallel or symmetrically converging; the plane of the object is perpendicular to our line of vision; and if the object has many lines, it is oriented to make them, as much as possible, either parallel or perpendicular to our line of sight. It is in this situation that we compare all shapes with one another; here is where every precise measurement and decision is made.
Most sensations are signs to us of other sensations whose space-value is held to be more real. The thing as it would appear to the eye if it were in the normal position is what we think of whenever we get one of the other optical views. Only as represented in the normal position do we believe we see the object as it is; elsewhere, only as it seems. Experience and custom soon teach us, however, that the seeming appearance passes into the real one by continuous gradations. They teach us, moreover, that seeming and being may be strangely interchanged. Now a real circle may slide into a seeming ellipse; now an ellipse may, by sliding in the same direction, become a seeming circle; now a rectangular cross grows slant-legged; now a slant-legged one grows rectangular.
Most sensations are signs of other sensations that we consider more real. We think of the way something would look to the eye if it were in its normal position whenever we have one of those different visual perspectives. We believe we see the object as it is only when it's represented in the normal position; anywhere else, we only see how it appears. However, experience and habit quickly teach us that appearances can gradually shift into reality. They also show us that seeming and being can be oddly interchangeable. A real circle can change into a seeming ellipse; an ellipse can, by moving in the same direction, become a seeming circle; a rectangular cross can become slanted; and a slanted shape can turn rectangular.
Almost any form in oblique vision may be thus a derivative of almost any other in 'primary' vision; and we must learn, when we get one of the former appearances, to translate it into the appropriate one of the latter class; we must learn of what optical 'reality' it is one of the optical signs. Having learned this, we do but obey that law of economy or simplification which dominates our whole psychic life, when we think exclusively of the 'reality' and ignore as much as our consciousness will let us the 'sign' by which we came to apprehend it. The signs of each probable real thing being multiple and the thing itself one and fixed, we gain the same mental relief by abandoning the former for the latter that we do when we abandon mental images, with all their fluctuating characters, for the definite and{346} unchangeable names which they suggest. The selection of the several 'normal' appearances from out of the jungle of our optical experiences, to serve as the real sights of which we shall think, has thus some analogy to the habit of thinking in words, in that by both we substitute terms few and fixed for terms manifold and vague.
Almost any shape in indirect vision can be derived from almost any other in 'direct' vision; and we need to learn that when we see one of those first appearances, we should translate it into the right one from the second group. We need to understand what optical 'reality' it represents as one of the optical signs. Once we grasp this, we simply follow the principle of economy or simplification that governs our entire mental life, focusing solely on the 'reality' and ignoring, as much as we can, the 'sign' that led us to recognize it. Since the signs for each likely real thing are numerous while the thing itself is singular and fixed, we achieve the same mental relief by letting go of the signs for the real thing as we do when we discard mental images, with all their changing qualities, for the clear and{346} unchanging names that they represent. Choosing the various 'normal' appearances from the clutter of our optical experiences to serve as the real images we think about is similar to the habit of thinking in words, as both involve replacing many vague terms with a few fixed ones.
If an optical sensation can thus be a mere sign to recall another sensation of the same sense, judged more real, a fortiori can sensations of one sense be signs of realities which are objects of another. Smells and tastes make us believe the visible cologne-bottle, strawberry, or cheese to be there. Sights suggest objects of touch, touches suggest objects of sight, etc. In all this substitution and suggestive recall the only law that holds good is that in general the most interesting of the sensations which the 'thing' can give us is held to represent its real nature most truly. It is a case of the selective activity mentioned on p. 170 ff.
If an optical sensation can simply be a cue to trigger another sensation of the same kind, which is considered more genuine, then even more so can sensations from one sense signal realities that belong to another. Smells and tastes make us perceive the visible cologne bottle, strawberry, or cheese as actually present. What we see suggests what we can touch, and what we touch suggests what we see, and so on. In all this replacement and suggestive recall, the only consistent principle is that, generally, the most interesting sensation that the 'thing' can provide is seen as the best representation of its true nature. This illustrates the selective activity mentioned on p. 170 ff.
The Third Dimension or Distance.—This service of sensations as mere signs, to be ignored when they have evoked the other sensations which are their significates, was noticed first by Berkeley in his new theory of vision. He dwelt particularly on the fact that the signs were not natural signs, but properties of the object merely associated by experience with the more real aspects of it which they recall. The tangible 'feel' of a thing, and the 'look' of it to the eye, have absolutely no point in common, said Berkeley; and if I think of the look of it when I get the feel, or think of the feel when I get the look, that is merely due to the fact that I have on so many previous occasions had the two sensations at once. When we open our eyes, for example, we think we see how far off the object is. But this feeling of distance, according to Berkeley, cannot possibly be a retinal sensation, for a point in outer space can only impress our retina by the single dot which it projects 'in the fund of the eye,' and this dot is the same for all distances. Distance from the eye, Berkeley considered not to be an optical object at all, but an object of{347} touch, of which we have optical signs of various sorts, such as the image's apparent magnitude, its 'faintness' or 'confusion,' and the 'strain' of accommodation and convergence. By distance being an object of 'touch,' Berkeley meant that our notion of it consists in ideas of the amount of muscular movement of arm or legs which would be required to place our hand upon the object. Most authors have agreed with Berkeley that creatures unable to move either their eyes or limbs would have no notion whatever of distance or the third dimension.
The Third Dimension or Distance.—This idea that sensations are just signs, which we can ignore once they trigger other sensations they represent, was first pointed out by Berkeley in his new theory of vision. He emphasized that these signs are not natural signs, but rather properties of the object that are merely linked through experience to its more concrete aspects that they remind us of. The tangible 'feel' of something and how it 'looks' to the eye have no real connection, Berkeley argued; if I think of how something looks when I feel it, or think of how it feels when I see it, that's just because I've experienced both sensations together on many previous occasions. For instance, when we open our eyes, we believe we can see how far away something is. However, Berkeley claimed that this feeling of distance can't possibly be a sensation of the retina, because an object in space only projects a single dot onto our retina, and that dot is the same for all distances. Berkeley thought of distance not as an optical object at all, but as something we perceive through{347} touch, indicated by various optical signs like the apparent size of an image, its 'faintness' or 'blurriness,' and the 'effort' needed to focus and converge our vision. By saying that distance is an object of 'touch,' Berkeley meant that our understanding of it is based on the idea of how much muscular movement of our arms or legs would be needed to reach the object. Most writers have agreed with Berkeley that beings unable to move their eyes or limbs would have no understanding of distance or the third dimension at all.
This opinion seems to me unjustifiable. I cannot get over the fact that all our sensations are of volume, and that the primitive field of view (however imperfectly distance may be discriminated or measured in it) cannot be of something flat, as these authors unanimously maintain. Nor can I get over the fact that distance, when I see it, is a genuinely optical feeling, even though I be at a loss to assign any one physiological process in the organ of vision to the varying degrees of which the variations of the feeling uniformly correspond. It is awakened by all the optical signs which Berkeley mentioned, and by more besides, such as Wheatstone's binocular disparity, and by the parallax which follows on slightly moving the head. When awakened, however, it seems optical, and not heterogeneous with the other two dimensions of the visual field.
This opinion seems totally unjustifiable to me. I can't shake the idea that all our sensations are about volume, and that the basic field of vision (even if we can't perfectly discriminate or measure distance in it) can't be flat, as these authors all claim. I also can't ignore the fact that when I perceive distance, it's a real optical feeling, even though I struggle to pinpoint a specific physiological process in the visual system that corresponds to the varying levels of this feeling. It's triggered by all the optical cues Berkeley mentioned, along with others like Wheatstone's binocular disparity, and the parallax that occurs when I slightly move my head. However, when it is triggered, it feels optical, rather than being mixed with the other two dimensions of the visual field.
The mutual equivalencies of the distance-dimension with the up-and-down and right-to-left dimensions of the field of view can easily be settled without resorting to experiences of touch. A being reduced to a single eyeball would perceive the same tridimensional world which we do, if he had our intellectual powers. For the same moving things, by alternately covering different parts of his retina, would determine the mutual equivalencies of the first two dimensions of the field of view; and by exciting the physiological cause of his perception of depth in various degrees, they would establish a scale of equivalency between the first two and the third.{348}
The relationships between distance and the up-and-down and right-to-left dimensions of what we can see can be easily understood without needing to rely on touch experiences. If a creature had just one eye, it would see the same three-dimensional world that we do, as long as it had our level of intelligence. By covering different parts of its retina while observing the same moving objects, it would recognize the relationships between the first two dimensions of its field of view. Additionally, by stimulating the physiological aspect of its depth perception to different extents, it would create a scale of equivalency between the first two dimensions and the third.{348}
First of all, one of the sensations given by the object would be chosen to represent its 'real' size and shape, in accordance with the principles so lately laid down. One sensation would measure the 'thing' present, and the 'thing' would measure the other sensations—the peripheral parts of the retina would be equated with the central by receiving the image of the same object. This needs no elucidation in case the object does not change its distance or its front. But suppose, to take a more complicated case, that the object is a stick, seen first in its whole length, and then rotated round one of its ends; let this fixed end be the one near the eye. In this movement the stick's image will grow progressively shorter; its farther end will appear less and less separated laterally from its fixed near end; soon it will be screened by the latter, and then reappear on the opposite side, the image there finally resuming its original length. Suppose this movement to become a familiar experience; the mind will presumably react upon it after its usual fashion (which is that of unifying all data which it is in any way possible to unify), and consider it the movement of a constant object rather than the transformation of a fluctuating one. Now, the sensation of depth which it receives during the experience is awakened more by the far than by the near end of the object. But how much depth? What shall measure its amount? Why, at the moment the far end is about to be eclipsed, the difference of its distance from the near end's distance must be judged equal to the stick's whole length; but that length has already been seen and measured by a certain visual sensation of breadth. So we find that given amounts of the visual depth-feeling become signs of given amounts of the visual breadth-feeling, depth becoming equated with breadth. The measurement of distance is, as Berkeley truly said, a result of suggestion and experience. But visual experience alone is adequate to produce it, and this he erroneously denied.{349}
First of all, one of the sensations produced by the object would be selected to represent its 'real' size and shape, according to the principles recently established. One sensation would measure the present 'thing,' and the 'thing' would measure the other sensations—the peripheral parts of the retina would be aligned with the central part by capturing the image of the same object. This doesn’t need further explanation as long as the object doesn’t change its distance or orientation. But suppose, to take a more complex example, that the object is a stick, seen first in its full length, and then rotated around one of its ends; let’s say this fixed end is the one closest to the eye. During this movement, the image of the stick will progressively appear shorter; its far end will seem less and less separated laterally from its fixed near end; soon it will be blocked by the latter, and then reappear on the opposite side, finally returning to its original length. If this movement becomes a familiar occurrence, the mind will likely respond in its usual way (which is to unify all data that can be unified in any way), and interpret it as the movement of a constant object rather than the transformation of a variable one. Now, the sensation of depth that it experiences during this event is triggered more by the far end than by the near end of the object. But how much depth? What will measure its extent? Well, at the moment the far end is about to be blocked, the difference in distance from the near end must be considered equal to the stick's entire length; but that length has already been perceived and measured by a specific visual sensation of width. Thus, we find that certain amounts of the visual depth sensation become indicators of specific amounts of the visual width sensation, with depth equating to width. The measurement of distance is, as Berkeley rightly said, a result of suggestion and experience. However, visual experience alone is sufficient to produce it, which he mistakenly denied.{349}
The Part played by the Intellect in Space-perception.—But although Berkeley was wrong in his assertion that out of optical experience alone no perception of distance can be evolved, he gave a great impetus to psychology by showing how originally incoherent and incommensurable in respect of their extensiveness our different sensations are, and how our actually so rapid space-perceptions are almost altogether acquired by education. Touch-space is one world; sight-space is another world. The two worlds have no essential or intrinsic congruence, and only through the 'association of ideas' do we know what a seen object signifies in terms of touch. Persons with congenital cataracts relieved by surgical aid, whose world until the operation has been a world of tangibles exclusively, are ludicrously unable at first to name any of the objects which newly fall upon their eye. "It might very well be a horse," said the latest patient of this sort of whom we have an account, when a 10-litre bottle was held up a foot from his face.[45] Neither do such patients have any accurate notion in motor terms of the relative distances of things from their eyes. All such confusions very quickly disappear with practice, and the novel optical sensations translate themselves into the familiar language of touch. The facts do not prove in the least that the optical sensations are not spatial, but only that it needs a subtler sense for analogy than most people have, to discern the same spatial aspects and relations in them which previously-known tactile and motor experiences have yielded.
The Role of Intellect in Space Perception.—Even though Berkeley was mistaken in claiming that we can't develop a perception of distance from optical experiences alone, he significantly advanced psychology by demonstrating how originally chaotic and incomparable our various sensations are, and how our rapid space perceptions are mostly learned through experience. Touch space is one realm; sight space is another. These two realms have no inherent connection, and we only understand what a seen object represents in tactile terms through the 'association of ideas.' People born with cataracts, who have their vision restored through surgery, initially struggle comically to identify objects that they can suddenly see but have never encountered visually before. "It might very well be a horse," remarked one recent patient when a 10-litre bottle was held just a foot from his face.[45] They also lack an accurate understanding in motor terms of how far away things are from their eyes. However, these confusions quickly fade with practice, as new visual experiences are translated into the familiar language of touch. These observations do not indicate that optical sensations are not spatial, but rather that it requires a more refined sense of analogy than most people possess to recognize the same spatial characteristics and relationships that their previously known tactile and motor experiences have provided.
Conclusion.—To sum up, the whole history of space-perception is explicable if we admit on the one hand sensations with certain amounts of extensity native to them, and on the other the ordinary powers of discrimination, selection, and association in the mind's dealings with them. The fluctuating import of many of our optical{350} sensations, the same sensation being so ambiguous as regards size, shape, locality, and the like, has led many to believe that such attributes as these could not possibly be the result of sensation at all, but must come from some higher power of intuition, synthesis, or whatever it might be called. But the fact that a present sensation can at any time become the sign of a represented one judged to be more real, sufficiently accounts for all the phenomena without the need of supposing that the quality of extensity is created out of non-extensive experiences by a super-sensational faculty of the mind.{351}
Conclusion.—In summary, the entire history of how we perceive space can be explained if we accept that, on one hand, sensations have inherent extensity, and on the other, the usual mental abilities of discrimination, selection, and association play a role in how we process them. The varying significance of many of our optical {350} sensations, with the same sensation being unclear regarding size, shape, location, and similar aspects, has led some to think that these attributes cannot possibly arise from sensation alone and must result from some higher power of intuition or synthesis, or whatever it might be called. However, the fact that a current sensation can anytime signify a represented sensation considered more real sufficiently explains all the phenomena without needing to assume that the quality of extensity is created from non-extensive experiences by a super-sensory faculty of the mind.{351}
CHAPTER XXII.
REASONING.
What Reasoning is.—We talk of man being the rational animal; and the traditional intellectualist philosophy has always made a great point of treating the brutes as wholly irrational creatures. Nevertheless, it is by no means easy to decide just what is meant by reason, or how the peculiar thinking process called reasoning differs from other thought-sequences which may lead to similar results.
What Reasoning Is.—We refer to humans as the rational animal, and traditional intellectualist philosophy has always emphasized that animals are completely irrational beings. However, it’s not easy to determine what we really mean by reason or how the unique thinking process known as reasoning differs from other thought patterns that can produce similar outcomes.
Much of our thinking consists of trains of images suggested one by another, of a sort of spontaneous revery of which it seems likely enough that the higher brutes should be capable. This sort of thinking leads nevertheless to rational conclusions, both practical and theoretical. The links between the terms are either 'contiguity' or 'similarity,' and with a mixture of both these things we can hardly be very incoherent. As a rule, in this sort of irresponsible thinking, the terms which fall to be coupled together are empirical concretes, not abstractions. A sunset may call up the vessel's deck from which I saw one last summer, the companions of my voyage, my arrival into port, etc.; or it may make me think of solar myths, of Hercules' and Hector's funeral pyres, of Homer and whether he could write, of the Greek alphabet, etc. If habitual contiguities predominate, we have a prosaic mind; if rare contiguities, or similarities, have free play, we call the person fanciful, poetic, or witty. But the thought as a rule is of matters taken in their entirety. Having been thinking of one, we find later that we are thinking of another, to which we have been lifted along, we hardly know how. If an abstract{352} quality figures in the procession, it arrests our attention but for a moment, and fades into something else; and is never very abstract. Thus, in thinking of the sun-myths, we may have a gleam of admiration at the gracefulness of the primitive human mind, or a moment of disgust at the narrowness of modern interpreters. But, in the main, we think less of qualities than of concrete things, real or possible, just as we may experience them.
A lot of our thinking consists of chains of images that suggest one another, a kind of spontaneous daydreaming that higher animals might also be capable of. Still, this kind of thinking leads to rational conclusions, both practical and theoretical. The connections between ideas are either 'contiguity' or 'similarity,' and with a mix of both, it's hard for us to be very incoherent. Usually, in this kind of carefree thinking, the ideas that we connect are concrete experiences, not abstractions. A sunset might remind me of the ship's deck where I watched one last summer, the friends I traveled with, my arrival at port, etc.; or it could prompt thoughts about solar myths, Hercules and Hector's funeral pyres, Homer and whether he could write, the Greek alphabet, etc. If habitual associations dominate, we have a practical mind; if rare associations or similarities take over, we call the person imaginative, poetic, or witty. But the thought, as a rule, is about things taken as a whole. After thinking of one thing, we suddenly find we're thinking of another, carried along without really knowing how. If an abstract{352} quality comes up, it grabs our attention for just a moment before fading into something else; it’s never purely abstract. So, when we think of sun-myths, we might briefly admire the elegance of primitive human thought or feel disgusted by the narrowness of modern interpretations. But in general, we focus less on qualities and more on concrete things, whether real or possible, just as we might experience them.
Our thought here may be rational, but it is not reasoned, is not reasoning in the strict sense of the term. In reasoning, although our results may be thought of as concrete things, they are not suggested immediately by other concrete things, as in the trains of simply associative thought. They are linked to the concretes which precede them by intermediate steps, and these steps are formed by abstract general characters articulately denoted and expressly analyzed out. A thing inferred by reasoning need neither have been an habitual associate of the datum from which we infer it, nor need it be similar to it. It may be a thing entirely unknown to our previous experience, something which no simple association of concretes could ever have evoked. The great difference, in fact, between that simpler kind of rational thinking which consists in the concrete objects of past experience merely suggesting each other, and reasoning distinctively so called, is this: that whilst the empirical thinking is only reproductive, reasoning is productive. An empirical, or 'rule-of-thumb,' thinker can deduce nothing from data with whose behavior and associates in the concrete he is unfamiliar. But put a reasoner amongst a set of concrete objects which he has neither seen nor heard of before, and with a little time, if he is a good reasoner, he will make such inferences from them as will quite atone for his ignorance. Reasoning helps us out of unprecedented situations—situations for which all our common associative wisdom, all the 'education' which we share in common with the beasts, leaves us without resource.{353}
Our thinking here might be logical, but it isn't reasoned; it doesn't follow reasoning in the strict sense. In reasoning, even though we consider our outcomes as concrete things, they are not directly suggested by other concrete things, unlike simple associative thinking. They connect to the previous concrete things through intermediate steps, and these steps are formed by abstract general ideas that are clearly expressed and analyzed. A conclusion drawn from reasoning doesn't need to have been a common associate of the data we start with, nor does it have to be similar. It could be something entirely new to our past experiences, something that no simple association of concrete things could have triggered. The major distinction between that simpler type of rational thinking, where concrete objects from past experiences merely suggest one another, and reasoning as it is distinctly understood, is this: while empirical thinking is merely reproductive, reasoning is productive. An empirical, or 'rule-of-thumb,' thinker can't deduce anything from data with which they are unfamiliar in terms of behavior and associations. However, if you introduce a reasoner to a set of concrete objects they have never encountered before, and give them a bit of time, if they are skilled at reasoning, they will make inferences that compensate for their ignorance. Reasoning helps us navigate unprecedented situations—scenarios where all our usual associative knowledge, including all the 'education' we share with animals, fails to provide us with any solutions.{353}
Exact Definition of it.—Let us make this ability to deal with novel data the technical differentia of reasoning. This will sufficiently mark it out from common associative thinking, and will immediately enable us to say just what peculiarity it contains.
Exact Definition of it.—Let's define this ability to handle new information as the technical difference of reasoning. This will clearly set it apart from regular associative thinking and will allow us to pinpoint the specific traits it includes.
It contains analysis and abstraction. Whereas the merely empirical thinker stares at a fact in its entirety, and remains helpless, or gets 'stuck,' if it suggests no concomitant or similar, the reasoner breaks it up and notices some one of its separate attributes. This attribute he takes to be the essential part of the whole fact before him. This attribute has properties or consequences which the fact until then was not known to have, but which, now that it is noticed to contain the attribute, it must have.
It includes analysis and abstraction. While the purely empirical thinker looks at a fact as a whole and feels lost or becomes 'stuck' if it doesn’t suggest anything similar, the reasoner breaks it down and focuses on one of its individual characteristics. This characteristic is considered the essential part of the overall fact in front of him. This characteristic has properties or consequences that were previously unknown to be associated with the fact, but now that it’s recognized to include this characteristic, it must possess them.
Call the fact or concrete datum S;
the essential attribute M;
the attribute's property P.
Call the fact or specific data S;
the key attribute M
the attribute's characteristic P.
Then the reasoned inference of P from S cannot be made without M's intermediation. The 'essence' M is thus that third or middle term in the reasoning which a moment ago was pronounced essential. For his original concrete S the reasoner substitutes its abstract property M. What is true of M, what is coupled with M, thereupon holds true of S, is coupled with S. As M is properly one of the parts of the entire S, reasoning may then be very well defined as the substitution of parts and their implications or consequences for wholes. And the art of the reasoner will consist of two stages:
Then the logical conclusion of P from S can't happen without M's involvement. The 'essence' of M is essentially that third or middle term in the reasoning that was just mentioned as essential. For his original concrete S, the reasoner replaces it with its abstract property M. What is true about M, and what is associated with M, also applies to S and is associated with S. Since M is properly one of the parts of the whole S, reasoning can be clearly defined as the substitution of parts and their implications or consequences for wholes. The skill of the reasoner will consist of two stages:
First, sagacity, or the ability to discover what part, M, lies embedded in the whole S which is before him;
First, wisdom, or the ability to find out what part, M, is hidden within the whole S that is in front of him;
Second, learning, or the ability to recall promptly M's consequences, concomitants, or implications.
Second, learning, or the ability to quickly remember the consequences, related factors, or implications of M.
If we glance at the ordinary syllogism—
If we look at the typical syllogism—
⁂ | M is P; |
S is M; | |
S is P |
—we see that the second or minor premise, the 'subsumption' as it is sometimes called, is the one requiring the sagacity; the first or major the one requiring the fertility, or fulness of learning. Usually the learning is more apt to be ready than the sagacity, the ability to seize fresh aspects in concrete things being rarer than the ability to learn old rules; so that, in most actual cases of reasoning, the minor premise, or the way of conceiving the subject, is the one that makes the novel step in thought. This is, to be sure, not always the case; for the fact that M carries P with it may also be unfamiliar and now formulated for the first time.
—we see that the second or minor premise, sometimes referred to as 'subsumption,' is the one that requires insight; the first or major premise requires a depth of knowledge. Generally, knowledge tends to be more readily available than insight, since the ability to perceive new angles in real situations is less common than the ability to apply established rules. Therefore, in most practical reasoning scenarios, the minor premise, or the way of understanding the subject, is what brings about a new perspective in thought. Of course, this isn’t always true; the fact that M includes P might also be new and formulated for the first time.
The perception that S is M is a mode of conceiving S. The statement that M is P is an abstract or general proposition. A word about both is necessary.
The idea that S is M is a way of thinking about S. The claim that M is P is an abstract or general statement. It's important to say something about both.
What is meant by a Mode of Conceiving.—When we conceive of S merely as M (of vermilion merely as a mercury-compound, for example), we neglect all the other attributes which it may have, and attend exclusively to this one. We mutilate the fulness of S's reality. Every reality has an infinity of aspects or properties. Even so simple a fact as a line which you trace in the air may be considered in respect to its form, its length, its direction, and its location. When we reach more complex facts, the number of ways in which we may regard them is literally endless. Vermilion is not only a mercury-compound, it is vividly red, heavy, and expensive, it comes from China, and so on, ad infinitum. All objects are well-springs of properties, which are only little by little developed to our knowledge, and it is truly said that to know one thing thoroughly would be to know the whole universe. Mediately or immediately, that one thing is related to everything else; and to know all about it, all its relations need be known. But each relation forms one of its attributes, one angle by which some one may conceive it, and while so conceiving it may ignore the rest of it. A man is such a complex fact. But out of the complexity all that an army commissary{355} picks out as important for his purposes is his property of eating so many pounds a day; the general, of marching so many miles; the chair-maker, of having such a shape; the orator, of responding to such and such feelings; the theatre-manager, of being willing to pay just such a price, and no more, for an evening's amusement. Each of these persons singles out the particular side of the entire man which has a bearing on his concerns, and not till this side is distinctly and separately conceived can the proper practical conclusions for that reasoner be drawn; and when they are drawn the man's other attributes may be ignored.
What is meant by a Mode of Conceiving.—When we think of S only as M (like viewing vermilion just as a mercury compound, for instance), we overlook all the other attributes it might have, focusing only on this one aspect. We distort the full reality of S. Every reality has countless aspects or properties. Even something as simple as a line drawn in the air can be considered in terms of its shape, length, direction, and position. As we move to more complex facts, the number of ways we can look at them is truly infinite. Vermilion isn't just a mercury compound; it's bright red, heavy, and pricey, and it originates from China, and so on, ad infinitum. Every object is a source of properties that we gradually come to understand, and it’s often said that knowing one thing thoroughly means knowing the entire universe. Directly or indirectly, that one thing is connected to everything else, and to know all about it, we need to understand all its relationships. Each relationship forms one of its attributes, one perspective through which someone might understand it, and while focusing on that perspective, they may ignore the rest. A person is such a complex fact. However, from this complexity, what an army commissary{355} focuses on as important for his needs is just the amount he can eat per day; for the general, it's how far he can march; for the chairmaker, it's the shape; for the orator, it's resonating with certain feelings; for the theatre manager, it's the exact price he’s willing to pay for an evening’s entertainment. Each of these individuals highlights the specific aspect of the whole person that relates to his interests, and only when that aspect is clearly and separately understood can practical conclusions for that reasoner be drawn; and once those conclusions are reached, the person's other attributes can be disregarded.
All ways of conceiving a concrete fact, if they are true ways at all, are equally true ways. There is no property ABSOLUTELY essential to any one thing. The same property which figures as the essence of a thing on one occasion becomes a very inessential feature upon another. Now that I am writing, it is essential that I conceive my paper as a surface for inscription. If I failed to do that, I should have to stop my work. But if I wished to light a fire, and no other materials were by, the essential way of conceiving the paper would be as combustible material; and I need then have no thought of any of its other destinations. It is really all that it is: a combustible, a writing surface, a thin thing, a hydrocarbonaceous thing, a thing eight inches one way and ten another, a thing just one furlong east of a certain stone in my neighbor's field, an American thing, etc., etc., ad infinitum. Whichever one of these aspects of its being I temporarily class it under makes me unjust to the other aspects. But as I always am classing it under one aspect or another, I am always unjust, always partial, always exclusive. My excuse is necessity—the necessity which my finite and practical nature lays upon me. My thinking is first and last and always for the sake of my doing, and I can only do one thing at a time. A God who is supposed to drive the whole universe abreast may also be supposed, without{356} detriment to his activity, to see all parts of it at once and without emphasis. But were our human attention so to disperse itself, we should simply stare vacantly at things at large and forfeit our opportunity of doing any particular act. Mr. Warner, in his Adirondack story, shot a bear by aiming, not at his eye or heart, but 'at him generally.' But we cannot aim 'generally' at the universe; or if we do, we miss our game. Our scope is narrow, and we must attack things piecemeal, ignoring the solid fulness in which the elements of Nature exist, and stringing one after another of them together in a serial way, to suit our little interests as they change from hour to hour. In this, the partiality of one moment is partly atoned for by the different sort of partiality of the next. To me now, writing these words, emphasis and selection seem to be the essence of the human mind. In other chapters other qualities have seemed, and will again seem, more important parts of psychology.
All ways of understanding a concrete fact, if they're true at all, are equally true. There is no property ABSOLUTELY essential to any one thing. The same property that is seen as the essence of a thing on one occasion can become a less important feature on another. While I’m writing, it's crucial that I think of my paper as a surface for writing. If I didn't, I’d have to stop my work. But if I wanted to start a fire and had no other materials nearby, the essential way to view the paper would be as something that can catch fire; at that moment, I wouldn't need to consider any of its other uses. It's really all that it is: something that burns, something to write on, a thin object, a hydrocarbon material, a piece that measures eight inches in one direction and ten in another, a thing located just one furlong east of a certain stone in my neighbor's field, an American object, and so on, ad infinitum. Whatever aspect of its existence I focus on makes me overlook the other aspects. Since I'm always focusing on one aspect or another, I'm always being unfair, always biased, always exclusive. My justification is necessity—the necessity that my limited and practical nature places on me. My thinking is primarily for the sake of my actions, and I can only do one thing at a time. A God who is supposed to govern the entire universe might also be assumed, without affecting his activity, to see all its parts at once and without any particular focus. But if our human attention were to spread itself out like that, we would just stare blankly at things and miss the chance to do anything specific. Mr. Warner, in his Adirondack story, shot a bear by aiming, not at its eye or heart, but 'at it generally.' But we can’t aim 'generally' at the universe; if we do, we miss our target. Our focus is narrow, and we must tackle things one at a time, ignoring the full complexity in which the elements of nature exist, linking them together in a sequential way to fit our little interests as they change from hour to hour. In this, the bias of one moment is somewhat balanced out by the different kind of bias of the next. To me now, as I write these words, emphasis and selection seem to be the essence of the human mind. In other chapters, different qualities have seemed, and will again seem, to be more important parts of psychology.
Men are so ingrainedly partial that, for common-sense and scholasticism (which is only common-sense grown articulate), the notion that there is no one quality genuinely, absolutely, and exclusively essential to anything is almost unthinkable. "A thing's essence makes it what it is. Without an exclusive essence it would be nothing in particular, would be quite nameless, we could not say it was this rather than that. What you write on, for example,—why talk of its being combustible, rectangular, and the like, when you know that these are mere accidents, and that what it really is, and was made to be, is just paper and nothing else?" The reader is pretty sure to make some such comment as this. But he is himself merely insisting on an aspect of the thing which suits his own petty purpose, that of naming the thing; or else on an aspect which suits the manufacturer's purpose, that of producing an article for which there is a vulgar demand. Meanwhile the reality overflows these purposes at every pore. Our usual purpose with it, our commonest title for{357} it, and the properties which this title suggests, have in reality nothing sacramental. They characterize us more than they characterize the thing. But we are so stuck in our prejudices, so petrified intellectually, that to our vulgarest names, with their suggestions, we ascribe an eternal and exclusive worth. The thing must be, essentially, what the vulgarest name connotes; what less usual names connote, it can be only in an 'accidental' and relatively unreal sense.[46]
Men are so fundamentally biased that, for common sense and academic reasoning (which is just common sense made clear), the idea that there’s no single quality that is genuinely, absolutely, and exclusively essential to anything is nearly unimaginable. “A thing’s essence defines what it is. Without a unique essence, it would be just nothing in particular, completely nameless; we couldn’t say it’s this rather than that. Take what you write on, for instance—why bother calling it combustible, rectangular, and so on when you know those are just accidental traits, and what it truly is, and was meant to be, is simply paper and nothing else?” The reader is likely to make some remark like this. But really, they’re just emphasizing an aspect of the thing that fits their own limited purpose of naming it; or possibly highlighting an aspect that serves the manufacturer’s goal, which is producing an item that has common demand. Meanwhile, the reality of the thing exceeds these purposes at every turn. Our usual purpose for it, our most common name for{357} it, and the qualities that this name suggests, are in fact not sacred at all. They define us more than they define the thing itself. Yet we are so entrenched in our biases, so mentally rigid, that we attribute eternal and exclusive value to our most basic names, with all their implications. The thing must be, essentially, what the most basic name implies; anything indicated by less common names can only exist in an 'accidental' and relatively unreal sense.[46]
Locke undermined the fallacy. But none of his successors, so far as I know, have radically escaped it, or seen that the only meaning of essence is teleological, and that classification and conception are purely teleological weapons of the mind. The essence of a thing is that one of its properties which is so important for my interests that in comparison with it I may neglect the rest. Amongst those other things which have this important property I class it, after this property I name it, as a thing endowed with this property I conceive it; and whilst so classing, naming, and conceiving it, all other truth about it becomes to me as naught. The properties which are important vary from man to man and from hour to hour. Hence divers appellations and conceptions for the same thing. But many objects of daily use—as paper, ink, butter, overcoat—have properties of such constant unwavering importance, and have such stereotyped names, that we end by believing that to conceive them in those ways is to conceive them in the only true way. Those are no truer ways of conceiving{358} them than any others; they are only more frequently serviceable ways to us.
Locke challenged the misconception. However, none of his followers, as far as I know, have completely moved past it or realized that the only meaning of essence is teleological, and that classification and conception are purely teleological tools of the mind. The essence of a thing is the property that is so important for my interests that I can ignore everything else in comparison. Among the other things that share this important property, I categorize it, I name it based on this property, and I understand it as something that has this property; while doing this categorizing, naming, and understanding, all other truths about it become irrelevant to me. The properties that matter can change from person to person and from moment to moment. That's why we have different names and ideas for the same thing. However, many everyday items—like paper, ink, butter, and overcoats—have properties that are consistently significant and have such standardized names that we start to believe that understanding them this way is the only correct approach. Those ways of understanding{358} them aren't any truer than any other ways; they are just the ones that are more often useful to us.
Reasoning is always for a subjective interest. To revert now to our symbolic representation of the reasoning process:
Reasoning always serves a personal interest. To return to our symbolic depiction of the reasoning process:
M is P |
S is M |
S is P |
M is discerned and picked out for the time being to be the essence of the concrete fact, phenomenon, or reality, S. But M in this world of ours is inevitably conjoined with P; so that P is the next thing that we may expect to find conjoined with the fact S. We may conclude or infer P, through the intermediation of the M which our sagacity began by discerning, when S came before it, to be the essence of the case.
M is identified and chosen for now as the core of the concrete fact, phenomenon, or reality, S. However, M in our world is inevitably linked with P; thus, P is the next thing we might expect to find connected with the fact S. We can conclude or infer P through the M that our insight initially recognized as the essence of the situation when S was presented to it.
Now note that if P have any value or importance for us, M was a very good character for our sagacity to pounce upon and abstract. If, on the contrary, P were of no importance, some other character than M would have been a better essence for us to conceive of S by. Psychologically, as a rule, P overshadows the process from the start. We are seeking P, or something like P. But the bare totality of S does not yield it to our gaze; and casting about for some point in S to take hold of which will lead us to P, we hit, if we are sagacious, upon M, because M happens to be just the character which is knit up with P. Had we wished Q instead of P, and were N a property of S conjoined with Q, we ought to have ignored M, noticed N, and conceived of S as a sort of N exclusively.
Now, keep in mind that if P holds any value or importance for us, M was a great character for us to focus on and understand. On the other hand, if P was not important, some other character besides M would have been a better basis for us to think about S. Usually, P dominates our thinking right from the start. We are looking for P, or something similar to P. But the complete picture of S doesn’t reveal it to us; and while searching for some aspect of S to grab onto that will lead us to P, we discover, if we’re insightful, that M is the character closely connected to P. If we had wanted Q instead of P, and N was a trait of S linked with Q, we should have overlooked M, focused on N, and viewed S primarily as a kind of N.
Reasoning is always to attain some particular conclusion, or to gratify some special curiosity. It not only breaks up the datum placed before it and conceives it abstractly; it must conceive it rightly too; and conceiving it rightly means conceiving it by that one particular abstract character which leads to the one sort of conclusion which it is the reasoner's temporary interest to attain.{359}
Reasoning is always aimed at reaching a specific conclusion or satisfying a particular curiosity. It not only analyzes the information presented but also has to interpret it accurately; and interpreting it accurately means understanding it through the specific abstract quality that leads to the type of conclusion the reasoner is currently interested in. {359}
The results of reasoning may be hit upon by accident. The stereoscope was actually a result of reasoning; it is conceivable, however that a man playing with pictures and mirrors might accidentally have hit upon it. Cats have been known to open doors by pulling latches, etc. But no cat, if the latch got out of order, could open the door again, unless some new accident of random fumbling taught her to associate some new total movement with the total phenomenon of the closed door. A reasoning man, however, would open the door by first analyzing the hindrance. He would ascertain what particular feature of the door was wrong. The lever, e.g., does not raise the latch sufficiently from its slot—case of insufficient elevation: raise door bodily on hinges! Or door sticks at bottom by friction against sill: raise it bodily up! How it is obvious that a child or an idiot might without this reasoning learn the rule for opening that particular door. I remember a clock which the maid-servant had discovered would not go unless it were supported so as to tilt slightly forwards. She had stumbled on this method after many weeks of groping. The reason of the stoppage was the friction of the pendulum-bob against the back of the clock-case, a reason which an educated man would have analyzed out in five minutes. I have a student's lamp of which the flame vibrates most unpleasantly unless the chimney be raised about a sixteenth of an inch. I learned the remedy after much torment by accident, and now always keep the chimney up with a small wedge. But my procedure is a mere association of two totals, diseased object and remedy. One learned in pneumatics could have abstracted the cause of the disease, and thence inferred the remedy immediately. By many measurements of triangles one might find their area always equal to their height multiplied by half their base, and one might formulate an empirical law to that effect. But a reasoner saves himself all this trouble by seeing that it is the essence (pro hac vice) of a triangle to be the half of a parallelogram whose area is the height into the entire base.{360} To see this he must invent additional lines; and the geometer must often draw such to get at the essential property he may require in a figure. The essence consists in some relation of the figure to the new lines, a relation not obvious at all until they are put in. The geometer's genius lies in the imagining of the new lines, and his sagacity in the perceiving of the relation.
The results of reasoning can sometimes be stumbled upon accidentally. The stereoscope, for example, was actually a product of reasoning, but it’s possible that a person playing around with pictures and mirrors could have discovered it by chance. Cats have been known to open doors by pulling latches, but if something goes wrong with the latch, a cat wouldn’t be able to open the door again unless it accidentally figured out a new way to associate some new movement with the closed door. A reasoning person, on the other hand, would analyze what’s stopping the door. They would pinpoint exactly what was wrong with it. For instance, if the lever doesn't lift the latch high enough, they might think: "Just lift the door on its hinges!" Or, if the door is sticking at the bottom because of friction against the sill, they would think: "Just lift it up!" It’s clear that a child or a fool could learn the rule for opening that door without any reasoning. I remember a clock that the maid had discovered wouldn’t work unless it was tilted slightly forward. She figured this out after weeks of trial and error. The reason it stopped was due to the pendulum bob rubbing against the back of the clock case—a reason an educated person would have figured out in five minutes. I have a student’s lamp whose flame flickers annoyingly unless the chimney is raised about a sixteenth of an inch. I found that solution after a lot of frustration and now always keep the chimney propped up with a small wedge. But my method is just an association of two situations: a broken object and a fix. Someone knowledgeable about pneumatics could have identified the cause of the issue and deduced the solution right away. Through various measurements of triangles, one might notice that their area is always equal to their height times half their base and could come up with an empirical law based on that. However, a reasoner avoids all that hassle by realizing that the essence (pro hac vice) of a triangle is that it is half of a parallelogram, whose area is determined by height multiplied by the full base.{360} To understand this, they need to add extra lines, and a geometer often has to draw these to uncover the essential properties needed in a figure. The essence lies in some relation of the figure to the new lines, a relationship that isn't obvious until those lines are included. The geometer's skill is in imagining those new lines and their connection.
Thus, there are two great points in reasoning. First, an extracted character is taken as equivalent to the entire datum from which it comes; and,
So, there are two main points in reasoning. First, an extracted character is considered equivalent to the whole data from which it originates; and,
Second, the character thus taken suggests a certain consequence more obviously than it was suggested by the total datum as it originally came. Take these points again, successively.
Secondly, the character taken this way indicates a certain consequence more clearly than it was indicated by the overall information as it originally appeared. Let's go through these points again, one by one.
1) Suppose I say, when offered a piece of cloth, "I won't buy that; it looks as if it would fade," meaning merely that something about it suggests the idea of fading to my mind,—my judgment, though possibly correct, is not reasoned, but purely empirical; but if I can say that into the color there enters a certain dye which I know to be chemically unstable, and that therefore the color will fade, my judgment is reasoned. The notion of the dye, which is one of the parts of the cloth, is the connecting link between the latter and the notion of fading. So, again, an uneducated man will expect from past experience to see a piece of ice melt if placed near the fire, and the tip of his finger look coarse if he view it through a convex glass. In neither of these cases could the result be anticipated without full previous acquaintance with the entire phenomenon. It is not a result of reasoning.
1) If I say, when offered a piece of fabric, "I won't buy that; it looks like it will fade," I'm just expressing that something about it makes me think of fading—my judgment, while possibly accurate, is not based on reasoning but is purely observational. However, if I can explain that the color contains a dye that I know is chemically unstable, and that therefore the color will fade, my judgment is based on reasoning. The idea of the dye, which is part of the fabric, connects the fabric to the concept of fading. Similarly, an uneducated person might expect to see a piece of ice melt if placed near a fire, or notice that their fingertip looks coarse when viewed through a magnifying glass. In neither case can the outcome be predicted without having a complete understanding of the whole situation. It’s not a product of reasoning.
But a man who should conceive heat as a mode of motion, and liquefaction as identical with increased motion of molecules; who should know that curved surfaces bend light-rays in special ways, and that the apparent size of anything is connected with the amount of the 'bend' of its light-rays as they enter the eye,—such a man would make the right inferences for all these objects, even though he{361} had never in his life had any concrete experience of them: and he would do this because the ideas which we have above supposed him to possess would mediate in his mind between the phenomena he starts with and the conclusions he draws. But these ideas are all mere extracted portions or circumstances. The motions which form heat, the bending of the light-waves, are, it is true, excessively recondite ingredients; the hidden pendulum I spoke of above is less so; and the sticking of a door on its sill in the earlier example would hardly be so at all. But each and all agree in this, that they bear a more evident relation to the conclusion than did the facts in their immediate totality.
But a man who thinks of heat as a type of movement and understands that liquefaction is really just increased molecular motion; who knows that curved surfaces bend light rays in specific ways, and that the apparent size of an object relates to how much its light rays bend as they enter the eye—such a man would make the right conclusions about all these things, even if he{361} has never encountered them in real life. He would do this because the ideas we've assumed he has would connect in his mind the phenomena he observes and the conclusions he makes. However, these ideas are just isolated parts or details. The movements that create heat and the bending of light waves are indeed quite complex; the hidden pendulum I mentioned earlier is less so; and the door sticking on its sill in the previous example is hardly complex at all. But all these examples share one thing: they relate more clearly to the conclusion than the facts did in their immediate entirety.
2) And now to prove the second point: Why are the couplings, consequences, and implications of extracts more evident and obvious than those of entire phenomena? For two reasons.
2) And now to prove the second point: Why are the connections, consequences, and implications of extracts clearer and more apparent than those of whole phenomena? For two reasons.
First, the extracted characters are more general than the concretes, and the connections they may have are, therefore, more familiar to us, having been more often met in our experience. Think of heat as motion, and whatever is true of motion will be true of heat; but we have had a hundred experiences of motion for every one of heat. Think of the rays passing through this lens as bending towards the perpendicular, and you substitute for the comparatively unfamiliar lens the very familiar notion of a particular change in direction of a line, of which notion every day brings us countless examples.
First, the extracted concepts are more general than the specific ones, and the connections they have are, therefore, more familiar to us, as we encounter them more frequently in our experiences. Consider heat as motion; whatever applies to motion will also apply to heat, but we've experienced motion a hundred times more than we've experienced heat. Imagine the rays passing through this lens bending toward the perpendicular, and you replace the relatively unfamiliar lens with the very familiar idea of a specific change in the direction of a line, a concept we see countless examples of every day.
The other reason why the relations of the extracted characters are so evident is that their properties are so few, compared with the properties of the whole, from which we derived them. In every concrete fact the characters and their consequences are so inexhaustibly numerous that we may lose our way among them before noticing the particular consequence it behooves us to draw. But, if we are lucky enough to single out the proper character, we take in, as it were, by a single glance all its possible{362} consequences. Thus the character of scraping the sill has very few suggestions, prominent among which is the suggestion that the scraping will cease if we raise the door; whilst the entire refractory door suggests an enormous number of notions to the mind. Such examples may seem trivial, but they contain the essence of the most refined and transcendental theorizing. The reason why physics grows more deductive the more the fundamental properties it assumes are of a mathematical sort, such as molecular mass or wave-length, is that the immediate consequences of these notions are so few that we can survey them all at once, and promptly pick out those which concern us.
The other reason why the relationships between the extracted characters are so clear is that their properties are so few compared to the properties of the whole from which we derived them. In every concrete fact, the characters and their consequences are so countless that we might get lost among them before noticing the specific consequence we need to focus on. But if we manage to identify the right character, we can grasp, in a single glance, all its possible {362} consequences. For example, the character of scraping the sill has very few implications, the most notable being that the scraping will stop if we lift the door; meanwhile, the entire stubborn door brings to mind a vast number of ideas. These examples may seem trivial, but they hold the essence of the most sophisticated and abstract theorizing. The reason why physics becomes more deductive as it relies on fundamental properties that are mathematical, like molecular mass or wavelength, is that the immediate consequences of these concepts are so few that we can review them all at once and quickly identify those that are relevant to us.
Sagacity.—To reason, then, we must be able to extract characters,—not any characters, but the right characters for our conclusion. If we extract the wrong character, it will not lead to that conclusion. Here, then, is the difficulty: How are characters extracted, and why does it require the advent of a genius in many cases before the fitting character is brought to light? Why cannot anybody reason as well as anybody else? Why does it need a Newton to notice the law of the squares, a Darwin to notice the survival of the fittest? To answer these questions we must begin a new research, and see how our insight into facts naturally grows.
Wisdom.—To reason, we need to be able to identify key traits—not just any traits, but the correct ones for our conclusion. If we identify the wrong trait, it won't lead to that conclusion. Here lies the challenge: How do we identify these traits, and why does it often take a genius to reveal the right trait? Why can't everyone reason as well as anyone else? Why does it take a Newton to discover the law of squares, or a Darwin to recognize the survival of the fittest? To answer these questions, we need to start a new inquiry and explore how our understanding of facts naturally develops.
All our knowledge at first is vague. When we say that a thing is vague, we mean that it has no subdivisions ab intra, nor precise limitations ab extra; but still all the forms of thought may apply to it. It may have unity, reality, externality, extent, and what not—thinghood, in a word, but thinghood only as a whole. In this vague way, probably, does the room appear to the babe who first begins to be conscious of it as something other than his moving nurse. It has no subdivisions in his mind, unless, perhaps, the window is able to attract his separate notice. In this vague way, certainly, does every entirely new experience appear to the adult. A library, a museum, a machine-shop, are mere confused wholes to the uninstructed,{363} but the machinist, the antiquary, and the bookworm perhaps hardly notice the whole at all, so eager are they to pounce upon the details. Familiarity has in them bred discrimination. Such vague terms as 'grass,' 'mould,' and 'meat' do not exist for the botanist or the anatomist. They know too much about grasses, moulds, and muscles. A certain person said to Charles Kingsley, who was showing him the dissection of a caterpillar, with its exquisite viscera, "Why, I thought it was nothing but skin and squash!" A layman present at a shipwreck, a battle, or a fire is helpless. Discrimination has been so little awakened in him by experience that his consciousness leaves no single point of the complex situation accented and standing out for him to begin to act upon. But the sailor, the fireman, and the general know directly at what corner to take up the business. They 'see into the situation'—that is, they analyze it—with their first glance. It is full of delicately differenced ingredients which their education has little by little brought to their consciousness, but of which the novice gains no clear idea.
All our knowledge starts out as unclear. When we say something is unclear, we mean it has no internal subdivisions or precise boundaries; yet all forms of thought can still apply to it. It might have unity, reality, externality, extent, and so on—essentially, it represents 'thinghood,' but only as a whole. In this unclear way, that's how a baby perceives a room when they first become aware of it as something separate from their moving caretaker. It has no subdivisions in their mind unless, maybe, the window catches their attention. This unclear perception applies to every completely new experience for adults as well. A library, a museum, a machine shop are just jumbled wholes to someone who isn't familiar with them, but the machinist, the historian, and the book lover probably barely notice the whole because they are so focused on the details. Their familiarity has developed their ability to discern. Vague terms like 'grass,' 'mold,' and 'meat' don’t hold meaning for the botanist or the anatomist. They know too much about different grasses, molds, and muscles. Once, a person told Charles Kingsley, who was showing off the dissection of a caterpillar with its delicate insides, "Wow, I thought it was just skin and squash!" A layperson at a shipwreck, a battle, or a fire feels helpless. Their lack of experience hasn’t helped them develop the ability to distinguish details, so their awareness doesn’t highlight any single part of the complex situation for them to act upon. But the sailor, the firefighter, and the general instantly know where to jump in. They 'see into the situation'—meaning they analyze it with just a glance. It’s filled with subtly different elements that their training has gradually brought to their awareness, while the novice has no clear understanding of them.
How this power of analysis was brought about we saw in our chapters on Discrimination and Attention. We dissociate the elements of originally vague totals by attending to them or noticing them alternately, of course. But what determines which element we shall attend to first? There are two immediate and obvious answers: first, our practical or instinctive interests; and second, our æsthetic interests. The dog singles out of any situation its smells, and the horse its sounds, because they may reveal facts of practical moment, and are instinctively exciting to these several creatures. The infant notices the candle-flame or the window, and ignores the rest of the room, because those objects give him a vivid pleasure. So, the country boy dissociates the blackberry, the chestnut, and the wintergreen, from the vague mass of other shrubs and trees, for their practical uses, and the savage is delighted with the beads, the bits of looking-glass, brought by an exploring vessel, and{364} gives no heed to the features of the vessel itself, which is too much beyond his sphere. These æsthetic and practical interests, then, are the weightiest factors in making particular ingredients stand out in high relief. What they lay their accent on, that we notice; but what they are in themselves we cannot say. We must content ourselves here with simply accepting them as irreducible ultimate factors in determining the way our knowledge grows.
How this power of analysis came about was discussed in our chapters on Discrimination and Attention. We separate the elements of originally vague groups by focusing on them or noticing them alternately, of course. But what decides which element we focus on first? There are two immediate and obvious answers: first, our practical or instinctive interests; and second, our aesthetic interests. A dog picks out its smells from any situation, and a horse distinguishes its sounds, because these can reveal important practical facts and are instinctively exciting to these creatures. An infant notices the candle flame or the window, ignoring the rest of the room, because those objects provide him with vivid pleasure. Similarly, the country boy distinguishes the blackberry, the chestnut, and the wintergreen from the vague mass of other shrubs and trees for their practical uses, while a savage is captivated by the beads and pieces of glass brought by an exploring ship and doesn’t pay attention to the features of the ship itself, which is too far outside his experience. Thus, these aesthetic and practical interests are the most significant factors in making certain elements stand out clearly. We notice what they emphasize, but we can't say what they are in themselves. We must be content to accept them as fundamental factors in shaping how our knowledge develops.
Now, a creature which has few instinctive impulses, or interests practical or æsthetic, will dissociate few characters, and will, at best, have limited reasoning powers; whilst one whose interests are very varied will reason much better. Man, by his immensely varied instincts, practical wants, and æsthetic feelings, to which every sense contributes, would, by dint of these alone, be sure to dissociate vastly more characters than any other animal; and accordingly we find that the lowest savages reason incomparably better than the highest brutes. The diverse interests lead, too, to a diversification of experiences, whose accumulation becomes a condition for the play of that law of dissociation by varying concomitants of which I treated on p. 251.
Now, a creature with few instinctual impulses or practical or aesthetic interests will connect few characteristics and will have, at best, limited reasoning abilities; whereas one with a wide range of interests will reason much better. Humans, with their incredibly diverse instincts, practical needs, and aesthetic feelings that engage all their senses, are bound to connect far more characteristics than any other animal; and thus, we see that even the simplest societies can reason incomparably better than the most advanced animals. These diverse interests also lead to a variety of experiences, and this accumulation becomes essential for the operation of that law of dissociation by varying concomitants that I discussed on p. 251.
The Help given by Association by Similarity.—It is probable, also, that man's superior association by similarity has much to do with those discriminations of character on which his higher flights of reasoning are based. As this latter is an important matter, and as little or nothing was said of it in the chapter on Discrimination, it behooves me to dwell a little upon it here.
The Help Provided by Similarity-Based Associations.—It's likely that human superior association by similarity plays a significant role in the distinctions of character that support our advanced reasoning. Since this is an important topic and wasn't covered much in the chapter on Discrimination, I should take a moment to elaborate on it here.
What does the reader do when he wishes to see in what the precise likeness or difference of two objects lies? He transfers his attention as rapidly as possible, backwards and forwards, from one to the other. The rapid alteration in consciousness shakes out, as it were, the points of difference or agreement, which would have slumbered forever unnoticed if the consciousness of the objects compared had occurred at widely distant periods of time. What does{365} the scientific man do who searches for the reason or law embedded in a phenomenon? He deliberately accumulates all the instances he can find which have any analogy to that phenomenon; and, by simultaneously filling his mind with them all, he frequently succeeds in detaching from the collection the peculiarity which he was unable to formulate in one alone; even though that one had been preceded in his former experience by all of those with which he now at once confronts it. These examples show that the mere general fact of having occurred at some time in one's experience, with varying concomitants, is not by itself a sufficient reason for a character to be dissociated now. We need something more; we need that the varying concomitants should in all their variety be brought into consciousness at once. Not till then will the character in question escape from its adhesion to each and all of them and stand alone. This will immediately be recognized by those who have read Mill's Logic as the ground of Utility in his famous 'four methods of experimental inquiry,' the methods of agreement, of difference, of residues, and of concomitant variations. Each of these gives a list of analogous instances out of the midst of which a sought-for character may roll and strike the mind.
What does a reader do when they want to see the exact similarities or differences between two objects? They quickly shift their focus back and forth between them. This rapid change in awareness helps bring out the points of difference or agreement that would have gone unnoticed if the comparison had been made at different times. What does{365} a scientist do when looking for the reason or law behind a phenomenon? They intentionally gather all the instances they can find that relate to that phenomenon. By filling their mind with all of these instances at once, they often manage to isolate the specific detail they couldn’t pinpoint in just one instance, even if that one was previously encountered among the others. These examples indicate that simply having experienced something at some point, with different factors involved, is not enough for a characteristic to be recognized now. We need more; we need all those varying factors to be brought into awareness at once. Only then will the characteristic break free from its connection to each of them and stand on its own. This will be familiar to those who have studied Mill's Logic as the basis for Utility in his well-known 'four methods of experimental inquiry': the methods of agreement, difference, residues, and concomitant variations. Each of these methods provides a list of analogous cases from which a sought-after characteristic may emerge and capture the attention.
Now it is obvious that any mind in which association by similarity is highly developed is a mind which will spontaneously form lists of instances like this. Take a present fact A, with a character m in it. The mind may fail at first to notice this character m at all. But if A calls up C, D, E, and F,—these being phenomena which resemble A in possessing m, but which may not have entered for months into the experience of the animal who now experiences A, why, plainly, such association performs the part of the reader's deliberately rapid comparison referred to above, and of the systematic consideration of like cases by the scientific investigator, and may lead to the noticing of m in an abstract way. Certainly this is obvious; and no conclusion is left to us but to assert that, after the few{366} most powerful practical and æsthetic interests, our chief help towards noticing those special characters of phenomena which, when once possessed and named, are used as reasons, class names, essences, or middle terms, is this association by similarity. Without it, indeed, the deliberate procedure of the scientific man would be impossible: he could never collect his analogous instances. But it operates of itself in highly-gifted minds without any deliberation, spontaneously collecting analogous instances, uniting in a moment what in nature the whole breadth of space and time keeps separate, and so permitting a perception of identical points in the midst of different circumstances, which minds governed wholly by the law of contiguity could never begin to attain.
It's clear that any mind that has a strong ability to associate by similarity will naturally create lists of examples like this. Consider a current fact A that has a characteristic m. At first, the mind might not notice this characteristic m at all. However, if A brings to mind C, D, E, and F—which are phenomena that share m but may not have been experienced by the individual for months—then this association acts like the rapid comparison mentioned earlier and the systematic analysis of similar cases by a scientific investigator. It may lead to recognizing m in a more abstract way. This is certainly evident, and we can only conclude that, after the most significant practical and aesthetic interests, our main aid in identifying those specific characteristics of phenomena—which, once recognized and labeled, serve as reasons, class names, essences, or middle terms—is this association by similarity. Without it, the careful work of a scientist would be impossible; they would struggle to gather their analogous instances. Yet, it functions independently in highly gifted minds without any conscious effort, spontaneously bringing together analogous instances and connecting what, in reality, the vast expanse of space and time keeps apart, allowing for the perception of identical points amid different circumstances that minds solely governed by the law of contiguity could never hope to achieve.
Figure 66 shows this. If m, in the present representation A, calls up B, C, D, and E, which are similar to A in possessing it, and calls them up in rapid succession, then m, being associated almost simultaneously with such varying concomitants, will 'roll out' and attract our separate notice.{367}
Figure 66 demonstrates this. If m, in the current representation A, brings up B, C, D, and E, which are like A in having it, and calls them up quickly one after the other, then m, being connected almost at the same time with such different associates, will 'roll out' and capture our individual attention.{367}
If so much is clear to the reader, he will be willing to admit that the mind in which this mode of association most prevails will, from its better opportunity of extricating characters, be the one most prone to reasoned thinking; whilst, on the other hand, a mind in which we do not detect reasoned thinking will probably be one in which association by contiguity holds almost exclusive sway.
If the reader understands this much, he will likely agree that the mind where this type of association is most common will, due to its greater ability to clarify ideas, be the one most likely to engage in logical thinking; meanwhile, a mind where we don’t see logical thinking will probably be one where association by proximity dominates almost completely.
Geniuses are, by common consent, considered to differ from ordinary minds by an unusual development of association by similarity. One of Professor Bain's best strokes of work is the exhibition of this truth. It applies to geniuses in the line of reasoning as well as in other lines.
Geniuses are widely regarded as different from ordinary minds because of their exceptional ability to make connections through similarities. One of Professor Bain's strongest contributions is showcasing this idea. It applies to geniuses in reasoning as well as in other areas.
The Reasoning Powers of Brutes.—As the genius is to the vulgarian, so the vulgar human mind is to the intelligence of a brute. Compared with men, it is probable that brutes neither attend to abstract characters, nor have associations by similarity. Their thoughts probably pass from one concrete object to its habitual concrete successor far more uniformly than is the case with us. In other words, their associations of ideas are almost exclusively by contiguity. So far, however, as any brute might think by abstract characters instead of by the association of concretes, he would have to be admitted to be a reasoner in the true human sense. How far this may take place is quite uncertain. Certain it is that the more intelligent brutes obey abstract characters, whether they mentally single them out as such or not. They act upon things according to their class. This involves some sort of emphasizing, if not abstracting, of the class-essence by the animal's mind. A concrete individual with none of his characters emphasized is one thing; a sharply conceived attribute marked off from everything else by a name is another. But between no analysis of a concrete, and complete analysis; no abstraction of an embedded character, and complete abstraction, every possible intermediary grade must lie. And some of these grades ought to have names, for they are certainly represented in the mind. Dr. Romanes has proposed{368} the name recept, and Prof. Lloyd Morgan the name construct, for the idea of a vaguely abstracted and generalized object-class. A definite abstraction is called an isolate by the latter author. Neither construct nor recept seems to me a felicitous word; but poor as both are, they form a distinct addition to psychology, so I give them here. Would such a word as influent sound better than recept in the following passage from Romanes?
The Reasoning Powers of Animals.—Just as genius is to an average person, the average human mind is to the intelligence of an animal. Compared to humans, it’s likely that animals don’t focus on abstract concepts or make connections based on similarities. Their thoughts probably move from one concrete object to its usual concrete successor much more consistently than ours do. In other words, their connections of ideas are mostly based on proximity. However, if any animal were to think in abstract terms instead of by linking concrete objects, it would need to be recognized as reasoning in the true human sense. How much this occurs is quite uncertain. What is clear is that the more intelligent animals respond to abstract concepts, whether they consciously recognize them or not. They act on things according to their category. This entails some form of highlighting, if not abstracting, the essence of the category in the animal's mind. A concrete individual without any emphasized characteristics is one thing; a clearly defined attribute that is set apart from everything else by a name is another. But between no analysis of a concrete object and full analysis; no abstraction of an inherent characteristic and complete abstraction, there must be every possible intermediate level. And some of these levels ought to have names, as they are certainly represented in the mind. Dr. Romanes has proposed{368} the term recept, and Prof. Lloyd Morgan suggested construct for the idea of a vaguely abstracted and generalized object-category. A specific abstraction is referred to as an isolate by the latter author. Neither construct nor recept seems like a great choice; but despite their shortcomings, they add a distinct element to psychology, so I present them here. Would a term like influent be better than recept in the following passage from Romanes?
"Water-fowl adopt a somewhat different mode of alighting upon land, or even upon ice, from that which they adopt when alighting upon water; and those kinds which dive from a height (such as terns and gannets) never do so upon land or upon ice. These facts prove that the animals have one recept answering to a solid surface, and another answering to a fluid. Similarly a man will not dive from a height over hard ground or over ice, nor will he jump into water in the same way as he jumps upon dry land. In other words, like the water-fowl he has two distinct recepts, one of which answers to solid ground, and the other to an unresisting fluid. But unlike the water-fowl he is able to bestow upon each of these recepts a name, and thus to raise them both to the level of concepts. So far as the practical purposes of locomotion are concerned, it is of course immaterial whether or not he thus raises his recepts into concepts; but ... for many other purposes it is of the highest importance that he is able to do this."[47]
"Waterfowl have a different way of landing on land or even on ice compared to how they land on water, and species that dive from a height (like terns and gannets) never do so on land or ice. These facts show that these animals have one type of response for solid surfaces and another for fluid ones. Similarly, a person won't dive from a height onto hard ground or ice, nor will they jump into water in the same way they would jump on dry land. In other words, like waterfowl, humans have two distinct responses: one for solid ground and another for a fluid environment. However, unlike waterfowl, humans can give each of these responses a name, elevating them to concepts. For practical purposes of movement, it doesn't really matter whether or not they elevate their responses to concepts; but for many other reasons, it's extremely important that they can do this." [47]
A certain well-bred retriever of whom I know never bit his birds. But one day having to bring two birds at once, which, though unable to fly, were 'alive and kicking,' he deliberately gave one a bite which killed it, took the other one still alive to his master, and then returned for the first. It is impossible not to believe that some such abstract thoughts as 'alive—get away—must kill,' ... etc., passed in rapid succession through this dog's mind, whatever the{369} sensible imagery may have been with which they were blended. Such practical obedience to the special aspects of things which may be important involves the essence of reasoning. But the characters whose presence impress brutes are very few, being only those which are directly connected with their most instinctive interests. They never extract characters for the mere fun of the thing, as men do. One is tempted to explain this as the result in them of an almost entire absence of such association by similarity as characterizes the human mind. A thing may remind a brute of its full similars, but not of things to which it is but slightly similar; and all that dissociation by varying concomitants, which in man is based so largely on association by similarity, hardly seems to take place at all in the infra-human mind. One total object suggests another total object, and the lower mammals find themselves acting with propriety, they know not why. The great, the fundamental, defect of their minds seems to be the inability of their groups of ideas to break across in unaccustomed places. They are enslaved to routine, to cut-and-dried thinking; and if the most prosaic of human beings could be transported into his dog's soul, he would be appalled at the utter absence of fancy which there reigns. Thoughts would not be found to call up their similars, but only their habitual successors. Sunsets would not suggest heroes' deaths, but supper-time. This is why man is the only metaphysical animal. To wonder why the universe should be as it is presupposes the notion of its being different, and a brute, who never reduces the actual to fluidity by breaking up its literal sequences in his imagination, can never form such a notion. He takes the world simply for granted, and never wonders at it at all.{370}
A certain well-bred retriever I know never bit his birds. But one day, when he had to bring back two birds at once, which, although unable to fly, were still 'alive and kicking,' he deliberately bit one to death, took the other one, still alive, to his master, and then returned for the first. It's hard not to believe that some thoughts like 'alive—get away—must kill,' or something similar, raced through this dog's mind, no matter what sensible imagery was mixed in with them. Such practical obedience to the specific aspects of things that matter captures the essence of reasoning. However, the characters that make an impression on animals are very few, being only those directly connected to their most instinctive interests. They don’t seek out characters for the sake of it, like humans do. One might explain this as the result of their almost complete lack of the associative thinking that characterizes the human mind. A thing might remind an animal of its complete likenesses, but not of things that are only slightly similar; and all that dissociation through varied associations, which in humans is largely based on similarity, hardly seems to happen in non-human minds. One complete object suggests another complete object, and lower mammals act appropriately without knowing why. The main flaw in their minds seems to be their inability to link ideas in unexpected ways. They are stuck in routine, in rigid thinking; and if even the most practical human were to enter a dog's mind, he would be shocked by the complete lack of imagination there. Thoughts wouldn’t summon up their similarities but only their usual next steps. Sunsets wouldn’t evoke heroic deaths, but dinner time. This is why humans are the only metaphysical creatures. To ponder why the universe is as it is requires the idea that it could be different, and an animal, which never disrupts the reality by reimagining its literal sequences, can never grasp such a notion. It accepts the world as it is without questioning it at all.
CHAPTER XXIII.
CONSCIOUSNESS AND MOVEMENT.
All consciousness is motor. The reader will not have forgotten, in the jungle of purely inward processes and products through which the last chapters have borne him, that the final result of them all must be some form of bodily activity due to the escape of the central excitement through outgoing nerves. The whole neural organism, it will be remembered, is, physiologically considered, but a machine for converting stimuli into reactions; and the intellectual part of our life is knit up with but the middle or 'central' part of the machine's operations. We now go on to consider the final or emergent operations, the bodily activities, and the forms of consciousness consequent thereupon.
All consciousness is about movement. The reader should keep in mind, amid the maze of purely internal processes and outcomes we've explored in the last chapters, that the ultimate result of them all must be some kind of physical action triggered by the release of central excitement through outgoing nerves. The entire neural system, as we recall, is, from a physiological standpoint, just a machine that transforms stimuli into reactions; and the intellectual aspect of our lives is only connected to the central part of the machine's functions. We will now proceed to examine the final or emerging actions, the physical activities, and the forms of consciousness that follow from them.
Every impression which impinges on the incoming nerves produces some discharge down the outgoing ones, whether we be aware of it or not. Using sweeping terms and ignoring exceptions, we might say that every possible feeling produces a movement, and that the movement is a movement of the entire organism, and of each and all its parts. What happens patently when an explosion or a flash of lightning startles us, or when we are tickled, happens latently with every sensation which we receive. The only reason why we do not feel the startle or tickle in the case of insignificant sensations is partly its very small amount, partly our obtuseness. Professor Bain many years ago gave the name of the Law of Diffusion to this phenomenon of general discharge, and expressed it thus: "According as an impression is accompanied with Feeling, the aroused currents diffuse themselves over the brain,{371} leading to a general agitation of the moving organs, as well as affecting the viscera."
Every impression that hits our incoming nerves triggers a response down the outgoing ones, whether we notice it or not. Using broad terms and overlooking exceptions, we can say that every possible feeling causes a movement, and that movement involves the entire organism and all of its parts. What clearly happens when an explosion or a flash of lightning shocks us, or when we get tickled, also happens subtly with every sensation we experience. The only reason we don't feel the shock or tickle with trivial sensations is due to their very small intensity and partly our own dullness. Professor Bain many years ago termed this phenomenon of general response the Law of Diffusion, stating: "As an impression is accompanied by Feeling, the activated currents spread over the brain,{371} leading to a general agitation of the moving organs, as well as impacting the viscera."
There are probably no exceptions to the diffusion of every impression through the nerve-centres. The effect of a new wave through the centres may, however, often be to interfere with processes already going on there; and the outward consequence of such interference may be the checking of bodily activities in process of occurrence. When this happens it probably is like the siphoning of certain channels by currents flowing through others; as when, in walking, we suddenly stand still because a sound, sight, smell, or thought catches our attention. But there are cases of arrest of peripheral activity which depend, not on inhibition of centres, but on stimulation of centres which discharge outgoing currents of an inhibitory sort. Whenever we are startled, for example, our heart momentarily stops or slows its beating, and then palpitates with accelerated speed. The brief arrest is due to an outgoing current down the pneumogastric nerve. This nerve, when stimulated, stops or slows the heart-beats, and this particular effect of startling fails to occur if the nerve be cut.
There are likely no exceptions to how every impression spreads through the nerve centres. However, the effect of a new wave passing through these centres can often disrupt ongoing processes. The result of this disruption may be a pause in bodily activities that are currently happening. When this occurs, it’s similar to how certain pathways can be siphoned off by currents in other pathways; for example, when we suddenly stop walking because a sound, sight, smell, or thought grabs our attention. But there are also instances where the stopping of peripheral activity is not caused by inhibition of the centres, but rather by stimulation of the centres that send out inhibitory currents. For instance, when we are startled, our heart momentarily stops or slows down before beating rapidly again. This brief pause is caused by an outgoing current through the pneumogastric nerve. When this nerve is stimulated, it either stops or slows heartbeats, and this specific reaction to being startled does not happen if the nerve is severed.
In general, however, the stimulating effects of a sense-impression proponderate over the inhibiting effects, so that we may roughly say, as we began by saying, that the wave of discharge produces an activity in all parts of the body. The task of tracing out all the effects of any one incoming sensation has not yet been performed by physiologists. Recent years have, however, begun to enlarge our information; and we have now experimental proof that the heart-beats, the arterial pressure, the respiration, the sweat-glands, the pupil, the bladder, bowels, and uterus, as well as the voluntary muscles, may have their tone and degree of contraction altered even by the most insignificant sensorial stimuli. In short, a process set up anywhere in the centres reverberates everywhere, and in some way or other affects the organism throughout, making its activities{372} either greater or less. It is as if the nerve-central mass were like a good conductor charged with electricity, of which the tension cannot be changed at all without changing it everywhere at once.
In general, though, the stimulating effects of sensory input outweigh the inhibiting effects, so we can say, as we did at the start, that the wave of discharge causes activity in all parts of the body. The job of mapping out all the effects of a single incoming sensation has not yet been accomplished by physiologists. However, recent years have begun to expand our knowledge, and we now have experimental evidence that heartbeats, blood pressure, breathing, sweat glands, the pupils, the bladder, bowels, and uterus, as well as voluntary muscles, can have their tone and degree of contraction influenced even by the slightest sensory stimuli. In short, a process initiated anywhere in the brain reverberates throughout the body and affects the organism in some way, making its activities either greater or less. It’s like the nerve central mass is a good conductor charged with electricity, where the tension can't change in one place without changing it everywhere at once.
Herr Schneider has tried to show, by an ingenious zoölogical review, that all the special movements which highly evolved animals make are differentiated from the two originally simple movements of contraction and expansion in which the entire body of simple organisms takes part. The tendency to contract is the source of all the self-protective impulses and reactions which are later developed, including that of flight. The tendency to expand splits up, on the contrary, into the impulses and instincts of an aggressive kind, feeding, fighting, sexual intercourse, etc. I cite this as a sort of evolutionary reason to add to the mechanical a priori reason why there ought to be the diffusive wave which a posteriori instances show to exist.
Herr Schneider has tried to demonstrate, through a clever zoological review, that all the special movements made by highly evolved animals are distinct from the two originally simple movements of contraction and expansion that the entire body of simple organisms participates in. The tendency to contract is the source of all the self-protective impulses and reactions that develop later, including the instinct to flee. The tendency to expand, on the other hand, splits into aggressive impulses and instincts such as feeding, fighting, sexual activity, and so on. I mention this as a type of evolutionary rationale to supplement the mechanical a priori reasoning for why there ought to be the diffusive wave that a posteriori examples show exists.
I shall now proceed to a detailed study of the more important classes of movement consequent upon cerebromental change. They may be enumerated as—
I will now move on to a detailed study of the more significant types of movement resulting from changes in the brain and mind. They can be listed as—
1) Expressions of Emotion; |
2) Instinctive or Impulsive Performances; and |
3) Voluntary Deeds; |
CHAPTER XXIV.
EMOTION.
Emotions compared with Instincts.—An emotion is a tendency to feel, and an instinct is a tendency to act, characteristically, when in presence of a certain object in the environment. But the emotions also have their bodily 'expression,' which may involve strong muscular activity (as in fear or anger, for example); and it becomes a little hard in many cases to separate the description of the 'emotional' condition from that of the 'instinctive' reaction which one and the same object may provoke. Shall fear be described in the chapter on Instincts or in that on Emotions? Where shall one describe curiosity, emulation, and the like? The answer is quite arbitrary from the scientific point of view, and practical convenience may decide. As inner mental conditions, emotions are quite indescribable. Description, moreover, would be superfluous, for the reader knows already how they feel. Their relations to the objects which prompt them and to the reactions which they provoke are all that one can put down in a book.
Emotions Compared with Instincts.—An emotion is a tendency to feel, while an instinct is a tendency to act, typically in response to certain objects in our environment. Emotions also have physical 'expressions' that may involve significant muscle activity (like in fear or anger, for instance); thus, it can be difficult in many cases to separate the description of the 'emotional' state from that of the 'instinctive' reaction that the same object might trigger. Should fear be discussed in the chapter on Instincts or in the one on Emotions? Where should curiosity, emulation, and similar feelings be explained? From a scientific perspective, the answer is somewhat arbitrary, and practical convenience may determine the choice. As internal mental conditions, emotions are quite hard to describe. Moreover, describing them would be unnecessary, since the reader already knows how they feel. The relationships to the objects that trigger them and the reactions they lead to are all that can be effectively documented in a book.
Every object that excites an instinct excites an emotion as well. The only distinction one may draw is that the reaction called emotional terminates in the subject's own body, whilst the reaction called instinctive is apt to go farther and enter into practical relations with the exciting object. In both instinct and emotion the mere memory or imagination of the object may suffice to liberate the excitement. One may even get angrier in thinking over one's insult than one was in receiving it; and melt more over a mother who is dead than one ever did when she was living. In{374} the rest of the chapter I shall use the word object of emotion indifferently to mean one which is physically present or one which is merely thought of.
Every object that triggers an instinct also triggers an emotion. The only difference is that the emotional reaction is confined to the person's own body, while the instinctive reaction tends to extend further and engage in practical interactions with the triggering object. In both instinct and emotion, simply remembering or imagining the object can be enough to release the excitement. Someone might even feel angrier when reflecting on an insult than they did when it happened, and feel sadder about a mother who has passed away than they did while she was alive. In{374} the rest of the chapter, I will use the term object of emotion interchangeably to refer to one that is physically present or just thought of.
The varieties of emotion are innumerable. Anger, fear, love, hate, joy, grief, shame, pride, and their varieties, may be called the coarser emotions, being coupled as they are with relatively strong bodily reverberations. The subtler emotions are the moral, intellectual, and æsthetic feelings, and their bodily reaction is usually much less strong. The mere description of the objects, circumstances, and varieties of the different species of emotion may go to any length. Their internal shadings merge endlessly into each other, and have been partly commemorated in language, as, for example, by such synonyms as hatred, antipathy, animosity, resentment, dislike, aversion, malice, spite, revenge, abhorrence, etc., etc. Dictionaries of synonyms have discriminated them, as well as text-books of psychology—in fact, many German psychological text-books are nothing but dictionaries of synonyms when it comes to the chapter on Emotion. But there are limits to the profitable elaboration of the obvious, and the result of all this flux is that the merely descriptive literature of the subject, from Descartes downwards, is one of the most tedious parts of psychology. And not only is it tedious, but you feel that its subdivisions are to a great extent either fictitious or unimportant, and that its pretences to accuracy are a sham. But unfortunately there is little psychological writing about the emotions which is not merely descriptive. As emotions are described in novels, they interest us, for we are made to share them. We have grown acquainted with the concrete objects and emergencies which call them forth, and any knowing touch of introspection which may grace the page meets with a quick and feeling response. Confessedly literary works of aphoristic philosophy also flash lights into our emotional life, and give us a fitful delight. But as far as the 'scientific psychology' of the emotions goes, I may have been surfeited by too much{375} reading of classic works on the subject, but I should as lief read verbal descriptions of the shapes of the rocks on a New Hampshire farm as toil through them again. They give one nowhere a central point of view, or a deductive or generative principle. They distinguish and refine and specify in infinitum without ever getting on to another logical level. Whereas the beauty of all truly scientific work is to get to ever deeper levels. Is there no way out from this level of individual description in the case of the emotions? I believe there is a way out, if one will only take it.
There are countless types of emotions. Anger, fear, love, hate, joy, grief, shame, pride, and their variations can be considered the stronger emotions since they are closely tied to significant physical reactions. The subtler emotions are the moral, intellectual, and aesthetic feelings, which usually have much weaker bodily responses. The mere description of the objects, circumstances, and types of these different emotions can be extensive. Their nuances blend seamlessly with one another and have been partially captured in language, as seen in synonyms like hatred, antipathy, animosity, resentment, dislike, aversion, malice, spite, revenge, abhorrence, and so on. Synonym dictionaries and psychology textbooks have distinguished these terms—indeed, many German psychology textbooks are essentially synonym dictionaries when it comes to the chapter on Emotion. However, there are limits to how much one can profitably elaborate on the obvious, and the outcome of all this complexity is that the purely descriptive literature on the subject, from Descartes onward, is one of the most boring aspects of psychology. Not only is it tedious, but it often feels like its subdivisions are largely either made-up or trivial, and its claims to precision are misleading. Unfortunately, there's little psychological writing about emotions that isn’t just descriptive. In novels, emotions capture our interest because they let us experience them. We become familiar with the concrete objects and situations that evoke them, and any insightful touches of introspection that enrich the narrative resonate deeply with us. Indeed, aphoristic philosophical literary works also illuminate our emotional lives and provide us with fleeting enjoyment. But as far as the 'scientific psychology' of emotions is concerned, I might be weary from too much{375} reading of classic texts on the subject; I would rather read about the shapes of rocks on a New Hampshire farm than slog through them again. They don’t provide a central perspective or a deductive or generative principle. They distinguish and refine endlessly without advancing to a different logical level. In contrast, the beauty of truly scientific work lies in reaching ever deeper insights. Is there no escape from this level of individual description regarding emotions? I believe there is a way out, if one is willing to find it.
The Cause of their Varieties.—The trouble with the emotions in psychology is that they are regarded too much as absolutely individual things. So long as they are set down as so many eternal and sacred psychic entities, like the old immutable species in natural history, so long all that can be done with them is reverently to catalogue their separate characters, points, and effects. But if we regard them as products of more general causes (as 'species' are now regarded as products of heredity and variation), the mere distinguishing and cataloguing becomes of subsidiary importance. Having the goose which lays the golden eggs, the description of each egg already laid is a minor matter. I will devote the next few pages to setting forth one very general cause of our emotional feeling, limiting myself in the first instance to what may be called the coarser emotions.
The Cause of their Varieties.—The problem with emotions in psychology is that they are often seen as entirely individual things. As long as they are treated as fixed and sacred psychological entities, like the old unchanging species in natural history, all we can do is respectfully list their separate traits, aspects, and effects. But if we view them as products of broader causes (just as 'species' are now seen as products of heredity and variation), the simple act of distinguishing and cataloging them becomes less important. Having the goose that lays the golden eggs, describing each egg that has already been laid is a minor issue. I will spend the next few pages discussing one very general cause of our emotional experiences, initially focusing on what might be called the coarser emotions.
The feeling, in the coarser emotions, results from the bodily expression. Our natural way of thinking about these coarser emotions is that the mental perception of some fact excites the mental affection called the emotion, and that this latter state of mind gives rise to the bodily expression. My theory, on the contrary, is that the bodily changes follow directly the perception of the exciting fact, and that our feeling of the same changes as they occur IS the emotion. Common-sense says, we lose our fortune, are sorry and weep; we meet a bear, are frightened and run;{376} we are insulted by a rival, are angry and strike. The hypothesis here to be defended says that this order of sequence is incorrect, that the one mental state is not immediately induced by the other, that the bodily manifestations must first be interposed between, and that the more rational statement is that we feel sorry because we cry, angry because we strike, afraid because we tremble, and not that we cry, strike, or tremble because we are sorry, angry, or fearful, as the case may be. Without the bodily states following on the perception, the latter would be purely cognitive in form, pale, colorless, destitute of emotional warmth. We might then see the bear and judge it best to run, receive the insult and deem it right to strike, but we should not actually feel afraid or angry.
The feeling, in the stronger emotions, comes from our physical expression. We usually think that the mental perception of something triggers the emotion, and that this emotional state leads to physical reactions. My theory, on the other hand, is that the physical changes happen right after we perceive the triggering fact, and that our awareness of those changes as they happen IS the emotion. Common sense says we lose our fortune, feel sad, and cry; we encounter a bear, get scared, and run; {376} we are insulted by a rival, feel angry, and retaliate. The argument I’m supporting claims that this sequence is wrong, that one emotional state isn’t directly caused by another, that the physical responses have to come in between, and the more logical explanation is that we feel sad because we cry, angry because we strike, and scared because we tremble—not that we cry, strike, or tremble because we are sad, angry, or scared, depending on the situation. Without the physical states following the perception, the perception itself would just be cognitive, lifeless, and lacking emotional depth. We might see the bear and decide it’s best to run, receive the insult and think it’s right to retaliate, but we wouldn’t actually feel afraid or angry.
Stated in this crude way, the hypothesis is pretty sure to meet with immediate disbelief. And yet neither many nor far-fetched considerations are required to mitigate its paradoxical character, and possibly to produce conviction of its truth.
Stated like this, the hypothesis is likely to be met with immediate skepticism. However, neither extensive nor exaggerated arguments are needed to lessen its paradoxical nature and possibly convince people of its truth.
To begin with, particular perceptions certainly do produce wide-spread bodily effects by a sort of immediate physical influence, antecedent to the arousal of an emotion or emotional idea. In listening to poetry, drama, or heroic narrative we are often surprised at the cutaneous shiver which like a sudden wave flows over us, and at the heart-swelling and the lachrymal effusion that unexpectedly catch us at intervals. In hearing music the same is even more strikingly true. If we abruptly see a dark moving form in the woods, our heart stops beating, and we catch our breath instantly and before any articulate idea of danger can arise. If our friend goes near to the edge of a precipice, we get the well-known feeling of 'all-overishness,' and we shrink back, although we positively know him to be safe, and have no distinct imagination of his fall. The writer well remembers his astonishment, when a boy of seven or eight, at fainting when he saw a horse bled. The blood was in a bucket, with a stick in it, and, if memory does not{377} deceive him, he stirred it round and saw it drip from the stick with no feeling save that of childish curiosity. Suddenly the world grew black before his eyes, his ears began to buzz, and he knew no more. He had never heard of the sight of blood producing faintness or sickness, and he had so little repugnance to it, and so little apprehension of any other sort of danger from it, that even at that tender age, as he well remembers, he could not help wondering how the mere physical presence of a pailful of crimson fluid could occasion in him such formidable bodily effects.
To start with, particular perceptions definitely create widespread bodily effects through a kind of immediate physical influence, which happens before any emotion or emotional idea is triggered. When we listen to poetry, drama, or heroic stories, we often feel a sudden shiver that washes over us like a wave, and the swelling in our hearts along with unexpected tears catch us off guard at times. The same is even more noticeable with music. If we suddenly spot a dark moving shape in the woods, our hearts stop, and we hold our breath immediately, even before we can think about the danger. When a friend approaches the edge of a cliff, we experience that familiar feeling of uneasiness and instinctively pull back, even though we absolutely know they are safe and can't visualize them falling. The writer clearly remembers being astonished at the age of seven or eight when he fainted at the sight of a horse being bled. The blood was in a bucket, with a stick in it, and if memory serves him right, he stirred it around and watched it drip from the stick without feeling anything but childish curiosity. Suddenly, everything went black before his eyes, his ears started buzzing, and he lost consciousness. He had never heard that seeing blood could cause faintness or sickness, and he felt so little repulsion towards it, and had no real sense of danger from it, that even at that young age, he vividly remembers wondering how just the physical presence of a bucket full of red liquid could cause such intense bodily effects in him.
The best proof that the immediate cause of emotion is a physical effect on the nerves is furnished by those pathological cases in which the emotion is objectless. One of the chief merits, in fact, of the view which I propose seems to be that we can so easily formulate by its means pathological cases and normal cases under a common scheme. In every asylum we find examples of absolutely unmotived fear, anger, melancholy, or conceit; and others of an equally unmotived apathy which persists in spite of the best of outward reasons why it should give way. In the former cases we must suppose the nervous machinery to be so 'labile' in some one emotional direction that almost every stimulus (however inappropriate) causes it to upset in that way, and to engender the particular complex of feelings of which the psychic body of the emotion consists. Thus, to take one special instance, if inability to draw deep breath, fluttering of the heart, and that peculiar epigastric change felt as 'precordial anxiety,' with an irresistible tendency to take a somewhat crouching attitude and to sit still, and with perhaps other visceral processes not now known, all spontaneously occur together in a certain person, his feeling of their combination is the emotion of dread, and he is the victim of what is known as morbid fear. A friend who has had occasional attacks of this most distressing of all maladies tells me that in his case the whole drama seems to centre about the region of the heart and respiratory apparatus, that his main effort during the{378} attacks is to get control of his inspirations and to slow his heart, and that the moment he attains to breathing deeply and to holding himself erect, the dread, ipso facto, seems to depart.
The best evidence that the immediate cause of emotion is a physical effect on the nerves comes from those pathological cases in which there is no clear cause for the emotion. One of the main advantages of the perspective I’m suggesting is that it allows us to easily categorize both pathological and normal cases under a shared framework. In every mental health facility, we find examples of completely unmotivated fear, anger, sadness, or arrogance, as well as instances of equally unmotivated apathy that continue despite clear reasons for them to fade away. In the former cases, we should assume that the nervous system is so 'unstable' in one emotional direction that almost any stimulus (no matter how inappropriate) triggers it, creating the specific mix of feelings that make up the emotional experience. For example, if someone experiences difficulty breathing, heart fluttering, and that specific stomach sensation known as 'precordial anxiety,' along with a strong urge to crouch and stay still—and possibly other unknown bodily reactions—all occurring together, then their perception of this combination is the emotion of dread, and they are suffering from what is called morbid fear. A friend who has experienced episodes of this particularly distressing condition told me that, for him, everything seems to focus on the area around his heart and lungs, and his main effort during these{378} episodes is to control his breathing and slow his heart rate. The moment he manages to breathe deeply and stand tall, the dread, ipso facto, seems to fade away.
The emotion here is nothing but the feeling of a bodily state, and it has a purely bodily cause.
The emotion here is just the sensation of a physical state, and it comes from a purely physical cause.
The next thing to be noticed is this, that every one of the bodily changes, whatsoever it be, is FELT, acutely or obscurely, the moment it occurs. If the reader has never paid attention to this matter, he will be both interested and astonished to learn how many different local bodily feelings he can detect in himself as characteristic of his various emotional moods. It would be perhaps too much to expect him to arrest the tide of any strong gust of passion for the sake of any such curious analysis as this; but he can observe more tranquil states, and that may be assumed here to be true of the greater which is shown to be true of the less. Our whole cubic capacity is sensibly alive; and each morsel of it contributes its pulsations of feeling, dim or sharp, pleasant, painful, or dubious, to that sense of personality that every one of us unfailingly carries with him. It is surprising what little items give accent to these complexes of sensibility. When worried by any slight trouble, one may find that the focus of one's bodily consciousness is the contraction, often quite inconsiderable, of the eyes and brows. When momentarily embarrassed, it is something in the pharynx that compels either a swallow, a clearing of the throat, or a slight cough; and so on for as many more instances as might be named. The various permutations of which these organic changes are susceptible make it abstractly possible that no shade of emotion should be without a bodily reverberation as unique, when taken in its totality, as is the mental mood itself. The immense number of parts modified is what makes it so difficult for us to reproduce in cold blood the total and integral expression of any one emotion. We may catch the trick with the voluntary muscles, but fail{379} with the skin, glands, heart, and other viscera. Just as an artificially imitated sneeze lacks something of the reality, so the attempt to imitate grief or enthusiasm in the absence of its normal instigating cause is apt to be rather 'hollow.'
The next thing to notice is that every single physical change, no matter what it is, is FELT, whether sharply or vaguely, the moment it happens. If the reader hasn’t considered this before, they will be both interested and amazed to discover how many different physical sensations they can recognize in themselves that are linked to their various emotional states. It might be too much to expect anyone to stop the rush of any strong emotion just for the sake of this kind of analysis; however, they can observe calmer states, and it can be assumed that what is true for these smaller experiences holds true for larger ones as well. Our entire physical being is undeniably alive; and every part contributes its feelings, whether dull or intense, pleasant, painful, or uncertain, to the sense of self that each of us constantly carries with us. It’s surprising what small things can emphasize these complex sensations. When bothered by a minor concern, someone might find that their bodily awareness focuses on the somewhat minor tightening of their eyes and brows. When briefly embarrassed, there’s often something happening in the throat that leads to a swallow, a throat clearing, or a slight cough; and this pattern can be seen in many more examples. The various ways these physical changes can occur suggest that no emotion is without a physical reaction that is as distinctive, when considered in its entirety, as the mental feeling itself. The large number of body parts affected makes it challenging to accurately reproduce the complete expression of any single emotion when we’re feeling detached. We might manage to mimic certain voluntary muscle movements, but miss{379} the responses of the skin, glands, heart, and other internal organs. Just as a forced sneeze lacks authenticity, so too does trying to fake grief or excitement without its natural trigger tend to feel somewhat 'hollow.'
I now proceed to urge the vital point of my whole theory, which is this: If we fancy some strong emotion, and then try to abstract from our consciousness of it all the feelings of its bodily symptoms, we find we have nothing left behind, no 'mind-stuff' out of which the emotion can be constituted, and that a cold and neutral state of intellectual perception is all that remains. It is true that, although most people, when asked, say that their introspection verifies this statement, some persist in saying theirs does not. Many cannot be made to understand the question. When you beg them to imagine away every feeling of laughter and of tendency to laugh from their consciousness of the ludicrousness of an object, and then to tell you what the feeling of its ludicrousness would be like, whether it be anything more than the perception that the object belongs to the class 'funny,' they persist in replying that the thing proposed is a physical impossibility, and that they always must laugh if they see a funny object. Of course the task proposed is not the practical one of seeing a ludicrous object and annihilating one's tendency to laugh. It is the purely speculative one of subtracting certain elements of feeling from an emotional state supposed to exist in its fulness, and saying what the residual elements are. I cannot help thinking that all who rightly apprehend this problem will agree with the proposition above laid down. What kind of an emotion of fear would be left if the feeling neither of quickened heart-beats nor of shallow breathing, neither of trembling lips nor of weakened limbs, neither of goose-flesh nor of visceral stirrings, were present, it is quite impossible for me to think. Can one fancy the state of rage and picture no ebullition in the chest, no flushing of the face, no dilatation of the nostrils, no clenching{380} of the teeth, no impulse to vigorous action, but in their stead limp muscles, calm breathing, and a placid face? The present writer, for one, certainly cannot. The rage is as completely evaporated as the sensation of its so-called manifestations, and the only thing that can possibly be supposed to take its place is some cold-blooded and dispassionate judicial sentence, confined entirely to the intellectual realm, to the effect that a certain person or persons merit chastisement for their sins. In like manner of grief: what would it be without its tears, its sobs, its suffocation of the heart, its pang in the breast-bone? A feelingless cognition that certain circumstances are deplorable, and nothing more. Every passion in turn tells the same story. A disembodied human emotion is a sheer nonentity. I do not say that it is a contradiction in the nature of things, or that pure spirits are necessarily condemned to cold intellectual lives; but I say that for us emotion dissociated from all bodily feeling is inconceivable. The more closely I scrutinize my states, the more persuaded I become that whatever 'coarse' affections and passions I have are in very truth constituted by, and made up of, those bodily changes which we ordinarily call their expression or consequence; and the more it seems to me that, if I were to become corporeally anæsthetic, I should be excluded from the life of the affections, harsh and tender alike, and drag out an existence of merely cognitive or intellectual form. Such an existence, although it seems to have been the ideal of ancient sages, is too apathetic to be keenly sought after by those born after the revival of the worship of sensibility, a few generations ago.
I’m now going to highlight the crucial aspect of my whole theory, which is this: If we imagine a strong emotion and then try to strip away the bodily sensations associated with it, we find we have nothing left, no 'mind-stuff' from which the emotion can be formed, and all that remains is a cold, neutral state of intellectual perception. It's true that most people say their introspection backs this statement, but some insist it doesn't apply to them. Many can't grasp the question. When you ask them to imagine removing all feelings of laughter and the urge to laugh from their awareness of something funny, and then to describe what the feeling of its funniness would be like—whether it is something beyond just perceiving that the object is 'funny'—they insist that what you're asking is physically impossible, and that they always must laugh if they see something funny. Of course, the task isn't practically about looking at something funny and suppressing the urge to laugh. It's a purely speculative exercise of taking away certain feelings from an emotional state assumed to exist fully and identifying what remains. I can’t help but think that anyone who truly understands this issue will agree with the statement above. What kind of fear would be left if there were no quickened heartbeats, shallow breathing, trembling lips, weak limbs, goosebumps, or visceral reactions present? It's hard for me to imagine. Can one envision the state of rage and picture no tension in the chest, no reddening of the face, no flare of the nostrils, no clenching{380} of the teeth, no impulse for vigorous action, but instead relaxed muscles, calm breathing, and a serene face? I certainly can’t. The rage evaporates just like its so-called expressions, leaving only a cold and detached judgment confined to the intellect, deciding that certain individuals deserve punishment for their wrongdoings. Similarly with grief: what would it be without tears, sobs, heart-wrenching pain, or pangs in the chest? Just a feeling-less recognition that certain situations are unfortunate, and nothing more. Every emotion tells the same story. A disembodied human emotion is simply non-existent. I’m not claiming it's a contradiction in the nature of things, or that pure spirits are doomed to cold intellectual lives; I’m saying that for us, emotion separated from all physical sensation is unimaginable. The more I examine my feelings, the more convinced I become that whatever 'coarse' emotions and passions I have are truly made up of those bodily changes we typically call their expressions or consequences; and it seems to me that if I were to become physically numb, I would be excluded from experiencing emotions, both harsh and tender, and would lead a life of just cognitive or intellectual form. Such a life, while it seems to have been the ideal of ancient philosophers, is too indifferent to be actively pursued by those born after the revival of the appreciation of sensitivity, a few generations ago.
Let not this view be called materialistic. It is neither more nor less materialistic than any other view which says that our emotions are conditioned by nervous processes. No reader of this hook is likely to rebel against such a saying so long as it is expressed in general terms; and if any one still finds materialism in the thesis now defended, that must be because of the special processes invoked.{381} They are sensational processes, processes due to inward currents set up by physical happenings. Such processes have, it is true, always been regarded by the platonizers in psychology as having something peculiarly base about them. But our emotions must always be inwardly what they are, whatever be the physiological ground of their apparition. If they are deep, pure, worthy, spiritual facts on any conceivable theory of their physiological source, they remain no less deep, pure, spiritual, and worthy of regard on this present sensational theory. They carry their own inner measure of worth with them; and it is just as logical to use the present theory of the emotions for proving that sensational processes need not be vile and material, as to use their vileness and materiality as a proof that such a theory cannot be true.
Don't call this view materialistic. It's no more or less materialistic than any other perspective that says our emotions are shaped by nervous processes. No one reading this book is likely to disagree with that statement as long as it's presented in broad terms; and if someone still sees materialism in the argument being made, it's likely due to the specific processes mentioned.{381} These are sensational processes, stemming from internal currents triggered by physical events. It's true that these processes have historically been viewed by psychological idealists as somewhat base. However, our emotions must always be internally what they are, regardless of their physiological basis. If they are deep, pure, worthy, and spiritual under any theory of their physiological origins, they remain just as deep, pure, spiritual, and worthy of consideration under this current sensational theory. They carry their own intrinsic value; and it's just as reasonable to use the current theory of emotions to demonstrate that sensational processes don't have to be vile and material, as it is to use their perceived vileness and materiality to argue that such a theory can't be true.
This view explains the great variability of emotion. If such a theory is true, then each emotion is the resultant of a sum of elements, and each element is caused by a physiological process of a sort already well known. The elements are all organic changes, and each of them is the reflex effect of the exciting object. Definite questions now immediately arise—questions very different from those which were the only possible ones without this view. Those were questions of classification: "Which are the proper genera of emotion, and which the species under each?"—or of description: "By what expression is each emotion characterized?" The questions now are causal: "Just what changes does this object and what changes does that object excite?" and "How come they to excite these particular changes and not others?" We step from a superficial to a deep order of inquiry. Classification and description are the lowest stage of science. They sink into the background the moment questions of causation are formulated, and remain important only so far as they facilitate our answering these. Now the moment an emotion is causally accounted for, as the arousal by an object of a lot of reflex acts which are forthwith felt, we immediately{382} see why there is no limit to the number of possible different emotions which may exist, and why the emotions of different individuals may vary indefinitely, both as to their constitution and as to the objects which call them forth. For there is nothing sacramental or eternally fixed in reflex action. Any sort of reflex effect is possible, and reflexes actually vary indefinitely, as we know.
This perspective explains the significant variability of emotions. If this theory holds true, then each emotion is the result of a combination of elements, and each element is triggered by a physiological process that is already well understood. The elements consist of all organic changes, and each one is a direct response to the stimulating object. Clear questions arise now—questions very different from those that could only be considered prior to this perspective. Previously, the questions were about classification: "What are the correct categories of emotion, and what are the subcategories within each?"—or about description: "What expression characterizes each emotion?" Now the questions are causal: "What changes does this object provoke, and what changes does that object provoke?" and "Why do they trigger these specific changes and not others?" We move from a superficial level of inquiry to a deeper one. Classification and description represent the most basic stage of science. They fade into the background as soon as causation questions are posed and remain relevant only insofar as they help us answer those questions. Once an emotion is explained in causal terms, as the response to an object triggering a series of reflex actions that are then felt, we immediately{382} understand why there is no limit to the variety of possible emotions that can exist, and why the emotions of different individuals can vary infinitely, both in their makeup and in the objects that evoke them. There is nothing sacred or eternally fixed in reflex actions. Any type of reflex response is possible, and reflexes actually vary infinitely, as we know.
In short, any classification of the emotions is seen to be as true and as 'natural' as any other, if it only serves some purpose; and such a question as "What is the 'real' or 'typical' expression of anger, or fear?" is seen to have no objective meaning at all. Instead of it we now have the question as to how any given 'expression' of anger or fear may have come to exist; and that is a real question of physiological mechanics on the one hand, and of history on the other, which (like all real questions) is in essence answerable, although the answer may be hard to find. On a later page I shall mention the attempts to answer it which have been made.
In short, any way of classifying emotions is considered just as valid and 'natural' as any other, as long as it serves a purpose; and questions like "What is the 'real' or 'typical' expression of anger or fear?" are seen as having no objective meaning at all. Instead, we now ask how any given 'expression' of anger or fear came to exist; and that is a real question of physiological mechanics on one side and history on the other, which (like all real questions) is fundamentally answerable, although the answer may be difficult to find. Later on, I will discuss the attempts that have been made to answer it.
A Corollary verified.—If our theory be true, a necessary corollary of it ought to be this: that any voluntary and cold-blooded arousal of the so-called manifestations of a special emotion should give us the emotion itself. Now within the limits in which it can be verified, experience corroborates rather than disproves this inference. Everyone knows how panic is increased by flight, and how the giving way to the symptoms of grief or anger increases those passions themselves. Each fit of sobbing makes the sorrow more acute, and calls forth another fit stronger still, until at last repose only ensues with lassitude and with the apparent exhaustion of the machinery. In rage, it is notorious how we 'work ourselves up' to a climax by repeated outbreaks of expression. Refuse to express a passion, and it dies. Count ten before venting your anger, and its occasion seems ridiculous. Whistling to keep up courage is no mere figure of speech. On the other hand, sit all day in a moping posture, sigh, and reply to everything{383} with a dismal voice, and your melancholy lingers. There is no more valuable precept in moral education than this, as all who have experience know: if we wish to conquer undesirable emotional tendencies in ourselves, we must assiduously, and in the first instance cold-bloodedly, go through the outward movements of those contrary dispositions which we prefer to cultivate. The reward of persistency will infallibly come, in the fading out of the sullenness or depression, and the advent of real cheerfulness and kindliness in their stead. Smooth the brow, brighten the eye, contract the dorsal rather than the ventral aspect of the frame, and speak in a major key, pass the genial compliment, and your heart must be frigid indeed if it do not gradually thaw!
A Verified Corollary.—If our theory is correct, then a necessary implication of it should be this: any deliberate and unemotional expression of a particular emotion should lead us to actually feel that emotion. In the contexts where it can be tested, experience supports this conclusion rather than contradicts it. Everyone knows how panic increases with the act of fleeing, and how giving in to feelings of grief or anger amplifies those emotions. Each bout of sobbing makes the sorrow more intense and triggers another even stronger bout, until finally, we find peace only in exhaustion and the apparent depletion of our emotions. It's well-known that in anger, we can 'work ourselves up' to a peak through repeated expressions of it. If you hold back your feelings, they fade away. Count to ten before expressing your anger, and the reason for it can suddenly seem absurd. Whistling to boost your courage isn’t just a saying. Conversely, if you spend all day slumped over, sighing, and responding to everything{383} in a gloomy tone, your sadness sticks around. There’s no more important principle in moral education than this, as anyone with experience will tell you: if we want to overcome unwanted emotional patterns in ourselves, we must earnestly—and at first, unemotionally—perform the outward movements of the opposite emotions we want to develop. If we keep at it, we will eventually see the gloom or depression fade away and real happiness and warmth take their place. Smooth your brow, brighten your eyes, hold yourself upright instead of drooping, speak in an upbeat tone, and give a friendly compliment; your heart must be pretty cold if it doesn’t start to warm up!
Against this it is to be said that many actors who perfectly mimic the outward appearances of emotion in face, gait, and voice declare that they feel no emotion at all. Others, however, according to Mr. Wm. Archer, who has made a very instructive statistical inquiry among them, say that the emotion of the part masters them whenever they play it well. The explanation for the discrepancy amongst actors is probably simple. The visceral and organic part of the expression can be suppressed in some men, but not in others, and on this it must be that the chief part of the felt emotion depends. Those actors who feel the emotion are probably unable, those who are inwardly cold are probably able, to affect the dissociation in a complete way.
Against this, it can be argued that many actors who perfectly mimic the outward signs of emotion in their faces, movements, and voices claim they don’t feel any emotion at all. However, others, according to Mr. Wm. Archer, who conducted a very insightful statistical study among them, say that the emotion of the role takes over whenever they perform it well. The reason for the differences among actors is likely straightforward. The visceral and organic part of the expression can be controlled in some individuals, but not in others, and that’s probably where the primary part of the felt emotion comes from. Those actors who experience the emotion are likely unable, while those who are emotionally detached are likely able, to fully manage the dissociation.
An Objection replied to.—It may be objected to the general theory which I maintain that stopping the expression of an emotion often makes it worse. The funniness becomes quite excruciating when we are forbidden by the situation to laugh, and anger pent in by fear turns into tenfold hate. Expressing either emotion freely, however, gives relief.
An Objection replied to.—One might argue against my overall theory that holding back the expression of an emotion often makes it worse. The humor can become unbearable when we’re not allowed to laugh due to the situation, and anger held back by fear can escalate into even greater hatred. However, expressing either emotion freely provides relief.
This objection is more specious than real. During the expression the emotion is always felt. After it, the centres having normally discharged themselves, we feel it no{384} more. But where the facial part of the discharge is suppressed the thoracic and visceral may be all the more violent and persistent, as in suppressed laughter; or the original emotion may be changed, by the combination of the provoking object with the restraining pressure, into another emotion altogether, in which different and possibly profounder organic disturbance occurs. If I would kill my enemy but dare not, my emotion is surely altogether other than that which would possess me if I let my anger explode.—On the whole, therefore this objection has no weight.
This objection is more misleading than valid. During the expression, the emotion is always felt. After it, once the centers have typically discharged, we don't feel it any{384} more. However, when the facial aspect of the discharge is suppressed, the thoracic and visceral responses may become even more intense and persistent, like in suppressed laughter; or the original emotion might transform, due to the combination of the provoking object and the restraining pressure, into a completely different emotion, which can lead to different and possibly deeper organic disturbances. If I want to kill my enemy but don't allow myself to, my emotion is definitely different from what I would feel if I let my anger out.—Overall, this objection is not convincing.
The Subtler Emotions.—In the æsthetic emotions the bodily reverberation and the feeling may both be faint. A connoisseur is apt to judge a work of art dryly and intellectually, and with no bodily thrill. On the other hand, works of art may arouse intense emotion; and whenever they do so, the experience is completely covered by the terms of our theory. Our theory requires that incoming currents be the basis of emotion. But, whether secondary organic reverberations be or be not aroused by it, the perception of a work of art (music, decoration, etc.) is always in the first instance at any rate an affair of incoming currents. The work itself is an object of sensation; and, the perception of an object of sensation being a 'coarse' or vivid experience, what pleasure goes with it will partake of the 'coarse' or vivid form.
The Subtler Emotions.—In aesthetic emotions, both the physical response and the feeling can be subtle. A connoisseur tends to evaluate a piece of art in a detached and intellectual way, without any physical excitement. On the flip side, artworks can provoke strong emotions; when they do, the experience aligns perfectly with our theory. Our theory states that incoming currents are the foundation of emotion. However, regardless of whether secondary physical reactions are triggered, experiencing a work of art (like music, design, etc.) is primarily about those incoming currents. The artwork itself is something we sense, and since sensing an object involves a 'coarse' or vivid experience, any pleasure that comes along with it will also have that 'coarse' or vivid quality.
That there may be subtle pleasure too, I do not deny. In other words, there may be purely cerebral emotion, independent of all currents from outside. Such feelings as moral satisfaction, thankfulness, curiosity, relief at getting a problem solved, may be of this sort. But the thinness and paleness of these feelings, when unmixed with bodily effects, is in very striking contrast to the coarser emotions. In all sentimental and impressionable people the bodily effects mix in: the voice breaks and the eyes moisten when the moral truth is felt, etc. Wherever there is anything like rapture, however intellectual its ground, we find these{385} secondary processes ensue. Unless we actually laugh at the neatness of the demonstration or witticism; unless we thrill at the case of justice, or tingle at the act of magnanimity, our state of mind can hardly be called emotional at all. It is in fact a mere intellectual perception of how certain things are to be called—neat, right, witty, generous, and the like. Such a judicial state of mind as this is to be classed among cognitive rather than among emotional acts.
There can definitely be subtle pleasure, and I won’t argue against that. In other words, there can be purely mental emotions that don’t rely on external influences. Feelings like moral satisfaction, gratitude, curiosity, and relief from solving a problem can fall into this category. However, the weakness and lack of intensity in these feelings, when not mixed with physical effects, sharply contrasts with stronger emotions. In people who are sentimental and easily moved, physical reactions are involved: their voices crack, and their eyes get moist when they truly connect with moral truths, etc. Whenever there's a sense of rapture, no matter how intellectual the basis might be, these{385} physical responses follow. Unless we actually laugh at the cleverness of a demonstration or joke; unless we feel a thrill at an act of justice or a warmth from a generous gesture, our emotional state is hard to define. It’s really just an intellectual understanding of how certain things should be described—clever, right, witty, generous, and so on. This kind of judgmental mindset is better classified as a cognitive process rather than an emotional one.
Description of Fear.—For the reasons given on p. 374, I will append no inventory or classification of emotions or description of their symptoms. The reader has practically almost all the facts in his own hand. As an example, however, of the best sort of descriptive work on the symptoms, I will quote Darwin's account of them in fear.
Description of Fear.—For the reasons stated on p. 374, I won't provide any list or categorization of emotions or detail their symptoms. The reader already has most of the information available. However, as a good example of descriptive work on the symptoms, I will quote Darwin's description of fear.
"Fear is often preceded by astonishment, and is so far akin to it that both lead to the senses of sight and hearing being instantly aroused. In both cases the eyes and mouth are widely opened and the eyebrows raised. The frightened man at first stands like a statue, motionless and breathless, or crouches down as if instinctively to escape observation. The heart beats quickly and violently, so that it palpitates or knocks against the ribs; but it is very doubtful if it then works more efficiently than usual, so as to send a greater supply of blood to all parts of the body; for the skin instantly becomes pale as during incipient faintness. This paleness of the surface, however, is probably in large part, or is exclusively, due to the vaso-motor centre being affected in such a manner as to cause the contraction of the small arteries of the skin. That the skin is much affected under the sense of great fear, we see in the marvellous manner in which perspiration immediately exudes from it. This exudation is all the more remarkable, as the surface is then cold, and hence the term, a cold sweat; whereas the sudorific glands are properly excited into action when the surface is heated. The hairs also on the skin stand erect, and the superficial muscles shiver.{386} In connection with the disturbed action of the heart the breathing is hurried. The salivary glands act imperfectly; the mouth becomes dry and is often opened and shut. I have also noticed that under slight fear there is strong tendency to yawn. One of the best marked symptoms is the trembling of all the muscles of the body; and this is often first seen in the lips. From this cause, and from the dryness of the mouth, the voice becomes husky or indistinct or may altogether fail. 'Obstupui steteruntque comæ, et vox faucibus hæsit.'... As fear increases into an agony of terror, we behold, as under all violent emotions, diversified results. The heart beats wildly or must fail to act and faintness ensue; there is a death-like pallor; the breathing is labored; the wings of the nostrils are widely dilated; there is a gasping and convulsive motion of the lips, a tremor on the hollow cheek, a gulping and catching of the throat; the uncovered and protruding eyeballs are fixed on the object of terror; or they may roll restlessly from side to side, huc illuc volens oculos totumque pererrat. The pupils are said to be enormously dilated. All the muscles of the body may become rigid or may be thrown into convulsive movements. The hands are alternately clenched and opened, often with a twitching movement. The arms may be protruded as if to avert some dreadful danger, or may be thrown wildly over the head. The Rev. Mr. Hagenauer has seen this latter action in a terrified Australian. In other cases there is a sudden and uncontrollable tendency to headlong flight; and so strong is this that the boldest soldiers may be seized with a sudden panic."[48]
"Fear often follows surprise, and is so closely related that both immediately trigger the senses of sight and hearing. In both situations, people’s eyes and mouths open wide, and their eyebrows raise. A scared person might freeze like a statue, completely still and breathless, or crouch down as if to avoid being seen. The heart races quickly and forcefully, pounding against the ribs; however, it’s debatable whether it pumps more effectively than usual to circulate blood throughout the body because the skin becomes pale, similar to the early signs of fainting. This paleness is likely caused by the vaso-motor center affecting the contraction of small skin arteries. We can see the skin's reaction to intense fear in the way perspiration suddenly appears. This reaction is striking, as the surface is cold, hence the phrase, a cold sweat; usually, sweat glands are activated when the body is warm. The hairs on the skin also stand up, and superficial muscles twitch.{386} Along with the irregular heartbeat, breathing becomes rapid. The salivary glands don’t function well; the mouth gets dry and frequently opens and closes. I have also noticed that slight fear often leads to yawning. A clear sign of fear is trembling in all the body’s muscles, often starting with the lips. Because of this, along with the dry mouth, a person’s voice can become hoarse or unclear, or it may even completely fail. 'Obstupui steteruntque comæ, et vox faucibus hæsit.'... As fear escalates into extreme terror, we observe various reactions, similar to other intense emotions. The heart may beat erratically or may stop, leading to fainting; the skin can turn deathly pale; breathing becomes laborious; the nostrils flare wide; the lips may tremble and convulse, the cheeks may quiver, and one may have difficulty swallowing; the wide-open, protruding eyes are fixed on the source of fear, or they could dart back and forth, huc illuc volens oculos totumque pererrat. The pupils are reported to be greatly dilated. All muscle groups can end up stiff or start convulsing. The hands may alternate between being clenched and open, often twitching. The arms might extend as if trying to fend off some dreadful threat or may be wildly thrown over the head. The Rev. Mr. Hagenauer observed this behavior in a frightened Australian. In other instances, there’s an immediate and uncontrollable urge to flee, so powerful that even the bravest soldiers may suddenly panic."[48]
Genesis of the Emotional Reactions.—How come the various objects which excite emotion to produce such special and different bodily effects? This question was not asked till quite recently, but already some interesting suggestions towards answering it have been made.
Genesis of the Emotional Reactions.—Why do different objects that provoke emotions create such unique and different physical responses? This question hasn't been around for long, but there have already been some intriguing ideas put forward to answer it.
Some movements of expression can be accounted for as{387} weakened repetitions of movements which formerly (when they were stronger) were of utility to the subject. Others are similarly weakened repetitions of movements which under other conditions were physiologically necessary concomitants of the useful movements. Of the latter reactions the respiratory disturbances in anger and fear might be taken as examples—organic reminiscences, as it were, reverberations in imagination of the blowings of the man making a series of combative efforts, of the pantings of one in precipitate flight. Such at least is a suggestion made by Mr. Spencer which has found approval. And he also was the first, so far as I know, to suggest that other movements in anger and fear could be explained by the nascent excitation of formerly useful acts.
Some expressions can be seen as{387} weakened repetitions of movements that used to (when they were more intense) serve a purpose for the individual. Others are also diminished versions of movements that were physiologically necessary companions to the useful movements. For example, the respiratory changes that happen with anger and fear could be seen as organic memories—kind of like echoes in the mind of the heavy breathing from someone engaged in a fight, or the panting of someone running away quickly. At least, that’s a suggestion made by Mr. Spencer, which has received some agreement. He was also the first, as far as I know, to suggest that other reactions in anger and fear could be explained by the awakening of previously useful actions.
"To have in a slight degree," he says, "such psychical states as accompany the reception of wounds, and are experienced during flight, is to be in a state of what we call fear. And to have in a slight degree such psychical states as the processes of catching, killing, and eating imply, is to have the desires to catch, kill, and eat. That the propensities to the acts are nothing else than nascent excitations of the psychical state involved in the acts, is proved by the natural language of the propensities. Fear, when strong, expresses itself in cries, in efforts to escape, in palpitations, in tremblings; and these are just the manifestations that go along with an actual suffering of the evil feared. The destructive passion is shown in a general tension of the muscular system, in gnashing of teeth and protrusion of the claws, in dilated eyes and nostrils in growls; and these are weaker forms of the actions that accompany the killing of prey. To such objective evidences every one can add subjective evidences. Everyone can testify that the psychical state called fear consists of mental representations of certain painful results; and that the one called anger consists of mental representations of the actions and impressions which would occur while inflicting some kind of pain."{388}
"Having a slight experience of the mental states that come with getting hurt and feeling scared during a flight response is what we refer to as fear. Similarly, having a minor experience of the mental states involved in catching, killing, and eating reflects the desires to hunt, kill, and eat. The urges to perform these actions are nothing more than the early stages of the mental state tied to them, as shown by the natural expression of these urges. Strong fear is expressed through screams, attempts to run away, rapid heartbeat, and shaking; these are the signs that accompany the real experience of the fearsome situation. The intense emotion of anger manifests as an overall tension in the muscles, grinding of teeth, claws extended, dilated eyes, and growling; these are milder versions of the actions that happen when killing prey. Anyone can add their subjective experiences to these observable signs. Everyone can confirm that the mental state known as fear is made up of thoughts about particular painful outcomes, while the state known as anger consists of thoughts about the actions and feelings that would arise when causing pain." {388}
The principle of revival, in weakened form, of reactions useful in more violent dealings with the object inspiring the emotion, has found many applications. So slight a symptom as the snarl or sneer, the one-sided uncovering of the upper teeth, is accounted for by Darwin as a survival from the time when our ancestors had large canines, and unfleshed them (as dogs now do) for attack. Similarly the raising of the eyebrows in outward attention, the opening of the mouth in astonishment, come, according to the same author, from the utility of these movements in extreme cases. The raising of the eyebrows goes with the opening of the eye for better vision; the opening of the mouth with the intensest listening, and with the rapid catching of the breath which precedes muscular effort. The distention of the nostrils in anger is interpreted by Spencer as an echo of the way in which our ancestors had to breathe when, during combat, their "mouth was filled up by a part of an antagonist's body that had been seized" (!). The trembling of fear is supposed by Mantegazza to be for the sake of warming the blood (!). The reddening of the face and neck is called by Wundt a compensatory arrangement for relieving the brain of the blood-pressure which the simultaneous excitement of the heart brings with it. The effusion of tears is explained both by this author and by Darwin to be a blood-withdrawing agency of a similar sort. The contraction of the muscles around the eyes, of which the primitive use is to protect those organs from being too much gorged with blood during the screaming fits of infancy, survives in adult life in the shape of the frown, which instantly comes over the brow when anything difficult or displeasing presents itself either to thought or action.
The principle of revival, in a weakened form, of reactions useful in more intense interactions with the object triggering the emotion has found numerous applications. A minor sign like a snarl or sneer, where only the upper teeth are exposed, is explained by Darwin as a remnant from when our ancestors had larger canines and would bare them (like dogs do now) for attacks. In a similar vein, raising the eyebrows to signal attention and opening the mouth in surprise are said by the same author to stem from the usefulness of these movements in extreme situations. Raising the eyebrows goes hand in hand with widening the eyes for better vision; opening the mouth correlates with intense listening and the quick inhalation that comes before physical exertion. The flaring of the nostrils when angry is interpreted by Spencer as a remnant of how our ancestors had to breathe when their "mouth was filled up by a part of an antagonist's body that had been seized" (!). Mantegazza suggests that trembling in fear is meant to warm the blood (!). Wundt refers to the reddening of the face and neck as a compensatory mechanism to relieve the brain of blood pressure caused by the simultaneous excitement of the heart. Both he and Darwin explain the shedding of tears as a similar blood-withdrawing function. The contraction of the muscles around the eyes, which originally served to protect those organs from being overwhelmed by blood during infancy's screaming fits, continues into adulthood as a frown that quickly appears on the brow when faced with something challenging or unpleasant.
"As the habit of contracting the brows has been followed by infants during innumerable generations, at the commencement of every crying or screaming fit," says Darwin, "it has become firmly associated with the incipient sense of something distressing or disagreeable. Hence,{389} under similar circumstances, it would be apt to be continued during maturity, although never then developed, into a crying fit. Screaming or weeping begins to be voluntarily restrained at an early period of life, whereas frowning is hardly ever restrained at any age."
"As infants have frowned for countless generations at the start of every crying or screaming episode," says Darwin, "it has become strongly linked to the initial feeling of something upsetting or unpleasant. Therefore, {389} in similar situations, this behavior might continue into adulthood, although it often doesn't lead to a crying fit. Crying or screaming starts to be voluntarily controlled early in life, while frowning is rarely controlled at any age."
Another principle, to which Darwin perhaps hardly does sufficient justice, may be called the principle of reacting similarly to analogous-feeling stimuli. There is a whole vocabulary of descriptive adjectives common to impressions belonging to different sensible spheres—experiences of all classes are sweet, impressions of all classes rich or solid, sensations of all classes sharp. Wundt and Piderit accordingly explain many of our most expressive reactions upon moral causes as symbolic gustatory movements. As soon as any experience arises which has an affinity with the feeling of sweet, or bitter, or sour, the same movements are executed which would result from the taste in point. "All the states of mind which language designates by the metaphors bitter, harsh, sweet, combine themselves, therefore, with the corresponding mimetic movements of the mouth." Certainly the emotions of disgust and satisfaction do express themselves in this mimetic way. Disgust is an incipent regurgitation or retching, limiting its expression often to the grimace of the lips and nose; satisfaction goes with a sucking smile, or tasting motion of the lips. The ordinary gesture of negation—among us, moving the head about its axis from side to side—is a reaction originally used by babies to keep disagreeables from getting into their mouth, and may be observed in perfection in any nursery. It is now evoked where the stimulus is only an unwelcome idea. Similarly the nod forward in affirmation is after the analogy of taking food into the mouth. The connection of the expression of moral or social disdain or dislike, especially in women, with movements having a perfectly definite original olfactory function, is too obvious for comment. Winking{390} is the effect of any threatening surprise, not only of what puts the eyes in danger; and a momentary aversion of the eyes is very apt to be one's first symptom of response to an unexpectedly unwelcome proposition.—These may suffice as examples of movements expressive from analogy.
Another principle, which Darwin might not fully acknowledge, can be called the principle of reacting similarly to feelings from similar stimuli. There’s a whole set of descriptive adjectives that we use for different types of sensations—experiences of all kinds are sweet, impressions are rich or solid, and sensations are sharp. Wundt and Piderit explain that many of our strongest reactions to moral stimuli are similar to the movements we make while tasting. Whenever we experience something that feels sweet, bitter, or sour, we often perform the same actions we would if we were tasting those flavors. "All the mental states that language describes with metaphors like bitter, harsh, or sweet naturally come with the corresponding mimetic movements of the mouth." Clearly, emotions like disgust and satisfaction are expressed this way. Disgust might show up as a partial gag reflex or retching, often just reflected in a facial grimace, while satisfaction can be seen in a gentle smile or a motion like tasting with the lips. The common gesture for saying no—shaking our head from side to side—originated as a reaction from babies trying to keep unpleasant things from entering their mouths, and you can see it perfectly in any nursery. Nowadays, it’s triggered even when the stimulus is just an unwanted thought. Similarly, the nodding motion for yes is based on the action of bringing food to the mouth. The connection between expressing moral or social disdain—especially in women—with movements that have a clear original smell-related function is too evident to ignore. Winking{390} results from any surprise that poses a threat, not just what might harm the eyes; a sudden aversion of the eyes is often the first reaction to an unexpectedly unwelcome idea.—These examples illustrate movements that are expressive by analogy.
But if certain of our emotional reactions can be explained by the two principles invoked—and the reader will himself have felt how conjectural and fallible in some of the instances the explanation is—there remain many reactions which cannot so be explained at all, and these we must write down for the present as purely idiopathic effects of the stimulus. Amongst them are the effects on the viscera and internal glands, the dryness of the mouth and diarrhœa and nausea of fear, the liver-disturbances which sometimes produce jaundice after excessive rage, the urinary secretion of sanguine excitement, and the bladder-contraction of apprehension, the gaping of expectancy, the 'lump in the throat' of grief, the tickling there and the swallowing of embarrassment, the 'precordial anxiety' of dread, the changes in the pupil, the various sweatings of the skin, cold or hot, local or general, and its flushings, together with other symptoms which probably exist but are too hidden to have been noticed or named. Trembling, which is found in many excitements besides that of terror, is, pace Mr. Spencer and Sig. Mantegazza, quite pathological. So are terror's other strong symptoms: they are harmful to the creature who presents them. In an organism as complex as the nervous system there must be many incidental reactions which would never themselves have been evolved independently, for any utility they might possess. Sea-sickness, ticklishness, shyness, the love of music, of the various intoxicants, nay, the entire æsthetic life of man, must be traced to this accidental origin. It would be foolish to suppose that none of the reactions called emotional could have arisen in this quasi-accidental way.{391}
But while some of our emotional reactions can be explained by the two principles mentioned—and the reader may sense how uncertain and sometimes flawed those explanations are—there are many responses that can't be explained this way at all. For now, we should consider these as purely idiopathic effects of the stimulus. These include the effects on the internal organs and glands, dry mouth, diarrhea, and nausea caused by fear, liver disturbances that can lead to jaundice after intense anger, the urinary response to excitement, and the bladder contractions from anxiety, the anticipation that makes you feel restless, the "lump in the throat" from grief, the tickling sensation and swallowing when embarrassed, the "precordial anxiety" from dread, changes in pupil size, various sweating reactions of the skin—whether hot or cold, local or general—and its flushing, along with other symptoms that likely exist but are too subtle to be recognized or named. Trembling, which can occur in many emotional triggers beyond just fear, is, despite what Mr. Spencer and Sig. Mantegazza might say, clearly pathological. The other intense symptoms of fear are also harmful to the individual experiencing them. In such a complex system as the nervous system, there must be many incidental reactions that would never have developed independently based on any usefulness they might have. Motion sickness, sensitivity to touch, shyness, a love for music, various intoxicants, or even the entire aesthetic experience of humanity can all be traced back to this accidental origin. It would be naive to think that none of the reactions we call emotional could have emerged in such a quasi-accidental manner.{391}
CHAPTER XXV.
INSTINCT.
Its Definition.—Instinct is usually defined as the faculty of acting in such a way as to produce certain ends, without foresight of the ends, and without previous education in the performance. Instincts are the functional correlatives of structure. With the presence of a certain organ goes, one may say, almost always a native aptitude for its use.
Its Definition.—Instinct is generally described as the ability to act in a way that achieves specific goals, without anticipating those goals or having prior training in doing so. Instincts are closely linked to physical structures. Where there is a specific organ, there typically exists a natural ability to use it.
The actions we call instinctive all conform to the general reflex type; they are called forth by determinate sensory stimuli in contact with the animal's body, or at a distance in his environment. The cat runs after the mouse, runs or shows fight before the dog, avoids falling from walls and trees, shuns fire and water, etc., not because he has any notion either of life or of death, or of self, or of preservation. He has probably attained to no one of these conceptions in such a way as to react definitely upon it. He acts in each case separately, and simply because he cannot help it; being so framed that when that particular running thing called a mouse appears in his field of vision he must pursue; that when that particular barking and obstreperous thing called a dog appears there he must retire, if at a distance, and scratch if close by; that he must withdraw his feet from water and his face from flame, etc. His nervous system is to a great extent a preorganized bundle of such reactions—they are as fatal as sneezing, and as exactly correlated to their special excitants as it is to its own. Although the naturalist may, for his own convenience, class these reactions under general heads, he must not forget that in the animal it is a particular sensation or perception or image which calls them forth.{392}
The actions we describe as instinctive follow a general reflex pattern; they are triggered by specific sensory stimuli either touching the animal's body or present in its environment. A cat chases a mouse, reacts defensively against a dog, avoids falling from walls and trees, and steers clear of fire and water, not because it understands life or death, self-preservation, or anything like that. It likely doesn't have a clear understanding of these concepts that would influence its actions. It responds to each situation separately, simply because it can't do otherwise; it's built in such a way that when a particular moving object, like a mouse, appears in its line of sight, it must chase it; when it sees a particular loud and aggressive object, like a dog, it must back away if it's at a distance and scratch if it's nearby; it must pull its feet away from water and its face away from flames, etc. Its nervous system is largely a prearranged bundle of these reactions—they occur as naturally as sneezing and are specifically linked to their specific triggers just like sneezing is to its own cause. While the naturalist may categorize these reactions for convenience, he shouldn't forget that for the animal, it's a specific sensation, perception, or image that brings them about.{392}
At first this view astounds us by the enormous number of special adjustments it supposes animals to possess ready-made in anticipation of the outer things among which they are to dwell. Can mutual dependence be so intricate and go so far? Is each thing born fitted to particular other things, and to them exclusively, as locks are fitted to their keys? Undoubtedly this must be believed to be so. Each nook and cranny of creation, down to our very skin and entrails, has its living inhabitants, with organs suited to the place, to devour and digest the food it harbors and to meet the dangers it conceals; and the minuteness of adaptation thus shown in the way of structure knows no bounds. Even so are there no bounds to the minuteness of adaptation in the way of conduct which the several inhabitants display.
At first, this view shocks us with the huge number of specific adjustments it suggests animals must have, ready and waiting for the environments they live in. Can mutual dependence really be that complex and extensive? Is everything born tailored to certain other things, and only those, just like locks are designed for their keys? It seems we must accept that this is true. Every little part of the world, down to our skin and organs, is home to living beings with adaptations suited to their environments, capable of consuming and digesting the food they find and dealing with the threats around them; the level of structural adaptation is truly limitless. Similarly, there are no limits to the subtle ways of adaptation in the behaviors exhibited by these various inhabitants.
The older writings on instinct are ineffectual wastes of words, because their authors never came down to this definite and simple point of view, but smothered everything in vague wonder at the clairvoyant and prophetic power of the animals—so superior to anything in man—and at the beneficence of God in endowing them with such a gift. But God's beneficence endows them, first of all, with a nervous system; and, turning our attention to this, makes instinct immediately appear neither more nor less wonderful than all the other facts of life.
The older writings on instinct are just pointless ramblings because their authors never got to this clear and straightforward perspective. Instead, they buried everything under vague amazement at the animals' clairvoyant and prophetic abilities—far beyond anything humans have—and at the goodness of God for giving them such gifts. But God’s goodness first gives them a nervous system; when we focus on that, instinct doesn't seem any more or less amazing than all the other facts of life.
Every instinct is an impulse. Whether we shall call such impulses as blushing, sneezing, coughing, smiling, or dodging, or keeping time to music, instincts or not, is a mere matter of terminology. The process is the same throughout. In his delightfully fresh and interesting work, 'Der Thierische Wille,' Herr G. H. Schneider subdivides impulses (Triebe) into sensation-impulses, perception-impulses, and idea-impulses. To crouch from cold is a sensation-impulse; to turn and follow, if we see people running one way, is a perception-impulse; to cast about for cover, if it begins to blow and rain, is an imagination-impulse. A single complex instinctive action may involve{393} successively the awakening of impulses of all three classes. Thus a hungry lion starts to seek prey by the awakening in him of imagination coupled with desire; he begins to stalk it when, on eye, ear, or nostril, he gets an impression of its presence at a certain distance; he springs upon it, either when the booty takes alarm and flees, or when the distance is sufficiently reduced; he proceeds to tear and devour it the moment he gets a sensation of its contact with his claws and fangs. Seeking, stalking, springing, and devouring are just so many different kinds of muscular contraction, and neither kind is called forth by the stimulus appropriate to the other.
Every instinct is an impulse. Whether we refer to impulses like blushing, sneezing, coughing, smiling, dodging, or keeping time with music as instincts or something else is just a matter of terms. The process remains the same all the way through. In his engaging and insightful work, 'Der Thierische Wille,' Herr G. H. Schneider divides impulses (Triebe) into sensation-impulses, perception-impulses, and idea-impulses. To crouch from the cold is a sensation-impulse; to turn and follow when we see people running is a perception-impulse; to look for cover when it starts to blow and rain is an idea-impulse. A single complex instinctive action can involve{393} the activation of impulses from all three categories. So, a hungry lion begins to seek prey through the triggering of imagination coupled with desire; he starts to stalk it when he picks up a sound, sight, or scent indicating its presence nearby; he springs at it when the prey gets startled and runs away, or when the distance is close enough; he tears and devours it the moment he feels it with his claws and teeth. Seeking, stalking, springing, and devouring are just different types of muscle contractions, and each is triggered by its own specific stimulus.
Now, why do the various animals do what seem to us such strange things, in the presence of such outlandish stimuli? Why does the hen, for example, submit herself to the tedium of incubating such a fearfully uninteresting set of objects as a nestful of eggs, unless she have some sort of a prophetic inkling of the result? The only answer is ad hominem. We can only interpret the instincts of brutes by what we know of instincts in ourselves. Why do men always lie down, when they can, on soft beds rather than on hard floors? Why do they sit round the stove on a cold day? Why, in a room, do they place themselves, ninety-nine times out of a hundred, with their faces towards its middle rather than to the wall? Why do they prefer saddle of mutton and champagne to hard-tack and ditch-water? Why does the maiden interest the youth so that everything about her seems more important and significant than anything else in the world? Nothing more can be said than that these are human ways, and that every creature likes its own ways, and takes to the following them as a matter of course. Science may come and consider these ways, and find that most of them are useful. But it is not for the sake of their utility that they are followed, but because at the moment of following them we feel that that is the only appropriate and natural thing to do. Not one man in a billion, when taking his dinner,{394} ever thinks of utility. He eats because the food tastes good and makes him want more. If you ask him why he should want to eat more of what tastes like that, instead of revering you as a philosopher he will probably laugh at you for a fool. The connection between the savory sensation and the act it awakens is for him absolute and selbstverständlich, an 'a priori synthesis' of the most perfect sort, needing no proof but its own evidence. It takes, in short, what Berkeley calls a mind debauched by learning to carry the process of making the natural seem strange, so far as to ask for the why of any instinctive human act. To the metaphysician alone can such questions occur as: Why do we smile, when pleased, and not scowl? Why are we unable to talk to a crowd as we talk to a single friend? Why does a particular maiden turn our wits so upside-down? The common man can only say, "Of course we smile, of course our heart palpitates at the sight of the crowd, of course we love the maiden, that beautiful soul clad in that perfect form, so palpably and flagrantly made from all eternity to be loved!"
So, why do different animals do things that seem so strange to us, in response to such unusual stimuli? Why does a hen put herself through the boredom of incubating a bunch of eggs that seem incredibly uninteresting, unless she has some kind of instinct about what's going to happen? The only answer is ad hominem. We can only understand the instincts of animals by relating them to our own instincts. Why do people always lie down, when they can, on soft beds instead of hard floors? Why do they gather around the stove on a chilly day? Why, in a room, do they position themselves, ninety-nine times out of a hundred, facing the center rather than the wall? Why do they prefer lamb and champagne over hardtack and ditch-water? Why does a woman captivate a man so much that everything about her seems more important and meaningful than anything else in the world? The only thing we can say is that these are human behaviors, and every creature likes its own ways and naturally follows them. Science can observe these behaviors and find that most are practical. But it's not because of their usefulness that they are followed; it's because, in the moment, we feel it's the only right and natural thing to do. Not one man in a billion thinks about utility while having dinner,{394} he eats because the food tastes good and leaves him wanting more. If you ask him why he craves more of something that tastes good, instead of respecting you as a philosopher, he'll probably just laugh and call you a fool. The link between the tasty sensation and the action it triggers is completely obvious and selbstverständlich, an 'a priori synthesis' of the highest kind, needing no proof beyond its own clarity. In short, it takes what Berkeley calls a mind corrupted by learning to think that the natural is strange enough to start questioning the why of any instinctive human action. Such questions like: Why do we smile when we’re happy and not frown? Why can’t we talk to a crowd the same way we talk to a friend? Why does a specific woman turn our thoughts upside down? The average person can only say, "Of course we smile, of course our heart races at the sight of a crowd, of course we love the maiden, that beautiful soul shaped in that perfect form, clearly and undeniably meant to be loved!"
And so, probably, does each animal feel about the particular things it tends to do in presence of particular objects. They, too, are a priori syntheses. To the lion it is the lioness which is made to be loved; to the bear, the she-bear. To the broody hen the notion would probably seem monstrous that there should be a creature in the world to whom a nestful of eggs was not the utterly fascinating and precious and never-to-be-too-much-sat-upon object which it is to her.
And so, each animal probably feels a certain way about the specific things they do in the presence of certain objects. These feelings are also a priori syntheses. For the lion, it’s the lioness who is meant to be loved; for the bear, it’s the she-bear. To a broody hen, the idea that there could be a creature in the world that doesn’t find a nest full of eggs completely fascinating and precious, and never too much to sit on, would probably seem unbelievable.
Thus we may be sure that, however mysterious some animals' instincts may appear to us, our instincts will appear no less mysterious to them. And we may conclude that, to the animal which obeys it, every impulse and every step of every instinct shines with its own sufficient light, and seems at the moment the only eternally right and proper thing to do. It is done for its own sake exclusively. What voluptuous thrill may not shake a fly, when{395} she at last discovers the one particular leaf, or carrion, or bit of dung, that out of all the world can stimulate her ovipositor to its discharge? Does not the discharge then seem to her the only fitting thing? And need she care or know anything about the future maggot and its food?
Thus we can be sure that, no matter how mysterious some animals' instincts may seem to us, our instincts will seem just as mysterious to them. And we can conclude that, for the animal that follows its instincts, every impulse and every step shines with its own clear purpose, appearing in that moment as the only eternally right and proper thing to do. It is done solely for its own sake. What kind of intense excitement might a fly feel when{395} she finally finds the exact leaf, or piece of carrion, or bit of dung, that can trigger her ovipositor? Doesn’t the discharge then seem to her like the only thing that makes sense? And does she need to care or know anything about the future maggot and its food?
Instincts are not always blind or invariable. Nothing is commoner than the remark that man differs from lower creatures by the almost total absence of instincts, and the assumption of their work in him by 'reason.' A fruitless discussion might be waged on this point by two theorizers who were careful not to define their terms. We must of course avoid a quarrel about words, and the facts of the case are really tolerably plain. Man has a far greater variety of impulses than any lower animal; and any one of these impulses, taken in itself, is as 'blind' as the lowest instinct can be; but, owing to man's memory, power of reflection, and power of inference, they come each one to be felt by him, after he has once yielded to them and experienced their results, in connection with a foresight of those results. In this condition an impulse acted out may be said to be acted out, in part at least, for the sake of its results. It is obvious that every instinctive act, in an animal with memory, must cease to be 'blind' after being once repeated, and must be accompanied with foresight of its 'end' just so far as that end may have fallen under the animal's cognizance. An insect that lays her eggs in a place where she never sees them hatched must always do so 'blindly'; but a hen who has already hatched a brood can hardly be assumed to sit with perfect 'blindness' on her second nest. Some expectation of consequences must in every case like this be aroused; and this expectation, according as it is that of something desired or of something disliked, must necessarily either re-enforce or inhibit the mere impulse. The hen's idea of the chickens would probably encourage her to sit; a rat's memory, on the other hand, of a former escape from a trap would neutralize his impulse to take bait from anything{396} that reminded him of that trap. If a boy sees a fat hopping-toad, he probably has incontinently an impulse (especially if with other boys) to smash the creature with a stone, which impulse we may suppose him blindly to obey. But something in the expression of the dying toad's clasped hands suggests the meanness of the act, or reminds him of sayings he has heard about the sufferings of animals being like his own; so that, when next he is tempted by a toad, an idea arises which, far from spurring him again to the torment, prompts kindly actions, and may even make him the toad's champion against less reflecting boys.
Instincts aren't always blind or unchanging. It's common to say that humans differ from lower animals due to their almost complete lack of instincts, relying instead on 'reason.' A pointless debate could happen between two theorists who don't bother to define their terms. We should avoid an argument over words because the facts are fairly straightforward. Humans have a much greater variety of impulses than any lower animal. Each impulse, by itself, can be just as 'blind' as the lowest instinct, but because of human memory, ability to reflect, and ability to draw conclusions, each one is felt by the person after they've acted on it and noticed the results, together with a foresight of those outcomes. In this state, an acted impulse can be said to be acted upon, at least partially, for the sake of its results. It’s clear that every instinctive act, in an animal with memory, must stop being 'blind' after being repeated once, and must include some foresight about its 'end' as far as that end has come within the animal's awareness. An insect that lays her eggs in a spot where she never sees them hatch must always do so 'blindly'; but a hen that has already raised chicks can hardly be expected to sit on her second nest without some awareness. There must be some expectation of consequences in every case like this; and this expectation, whether it’s something wanted or something unwanted, will either strengthen or inhibit the simple impulse. The hen's thoughts of the chicks would likely encourage her to sit; while a rat's memory of a past escape from a trap would hold back his urge to take bait from anything{396} that reminded him of that trap. If a boy sees a fat hopping toad, he probably has a strong urge (especially if he’s with other boys) to smash the creature with a stone, which he might impulsively obey. But something about the dying toad's clasped hands suggests the meanness of the act or reminds him of things he’s heard about the suffering of animals being similar to his own; so that, the next time he’s tempted by a toad, a thought arises which, instead of pushing him to torment it again, leads him to act kindly and may even turn him into the toad’s defender against less thoughtful boys.
It is plain, then, that, no matter how well endowed an animal may originally be in the way of instincts, his resultant actions will be much modified if the instincts combine with experience, if in addition to impulses he have memories, associations, inferences, and expectations, on any considerable scale. An object O, on which he has an instinctive impulse to react in the manner A, would directly provoke him to that reaction. But O has meantime become for him a sign of the nearness of P, on which he has an equally strong impulse to react in the manner B, quite unlike A. So that when he meets O, the immediate impulse A and the remote impulse B struggle in his breast for the mastery. The fatality and uniformity said to be characteristic of instinctive actions will be so little manifest that one might be tempted to deny to him altogether the possession of any instinct about the object O. Yet how false this judgment would be! The instinct about O is there; only by the complication of the associative machinery it has come into conflict with another instinct about P.
It’s clear that, regardless of how naturally skilled an animal is with instincts, its actual behaviors will be greatly influenced if those instincts are combined with experiences. If, besides natural drives, it has memories, associations, inferences, and expectations at any significant level, things change. An object O, which instinctively triggers a reaction A, would directly elicit that response. But O has also become a sign of the presence of P, which prompts an equally strong drive to respond with B, a reaction that's completely different from A. So, when the animal encounters O, the immediate impulse A and the distant impulse B compete within it. The inevitability and consistency typically associated with instinctive actions will be so diminished that one might be inclined to completely dismiss the idea that the animal possesses any instinct regarding object O. Yet, what a mistaken view that would be! The instinct regarding O is present; it’s just that the complexity of the associative processes has caused it to clash with another instinct related to P.
Here we immediately reap the good fruits of our simple physiological conception of what an instinct is. If it be a mere excito-motor impulse, due to the preëxistence of a certain 'reflex arc' in the nerve-centres of the creature, of course it must follow the law of all such reflex arcs. One{397} liability of such arcs is to have their activity 'inhibited' by other processes going on at the same time. It makes no difference whether the arc be organized at birth, or ripen spontaneously later, or be due to acquired habit; it must take its chances with all the other arcs, and sometimes succeed, and sometimes fail, in drafting off the currents through itself. The mystical view of an instinct would make it invariable. The physiological view would require it to show occasional irregularities in any animal in whom the number of separate instincts, and the possible entrance of the same stimulus into several of them, were great. And such irregularities are what every superior animal's instincts do show in abundance.
Here we quickly see the benefits of our straightforward understanding of what an instinct is. If it’s just a simple impulse triggered by the presence of a certain 'reflex arc' in the creature's nervous system, then it has to follow the rules that apply to all such reflex arcs. One{397} limitation of these arcs is that their activity can be 'inhibited' by other processes happening at the same time. It doesn’t matter if the arc is present at birth, develops naturally later, or results from learned habits; it still has to compete with all the other arcs, sometimes succeeding and sometimes failing to channel the impulses through itself. The mystical perspective on instinct would make it constant. The physiological perspective, however, suggests it should show occasional inconsistencies in any animal where the number of distinct instincts and the potential for the same stimulus affecting multiple instincts are high. And these inconsistencies are what we see in abundance in the instincts of every advanced animal.
Wherever the mind is elevated enough to discriminate; wherever several distinct sensory elements must combine to discharge the reflex arc; wherever, instead of plumping into action instantly at the first rough intimation of what sort of a thing is there, the agent waits to see which one of its kind it is and what the circumstances are of its appearance; wherever different individuals and different circumstances can impel him in different ways; wherever these are the conditions—we have a masking of the elementary constitution of the instinctive life. The whole story of our dealings with the lower wild animals is the history of our taking advantage of the way in which they judge of everything by its mere label, as it were, so as to ensnare or kill them. Nature, in them, has left matters in this rough way, and made them act always in the manner which would be oftenest right. There are more worms unattached to hooks than impaled upon them; therefore, on the whole, says Nature to her fishy children, bite at every worm and take your chances. But as her children get higher, and their lives more precious, she reduces the risks. Since what seems to be the same object may be now a genuine food and now a bait; since in gregarious species each individual may prove to be either the friend or the rival, according to the circumstances, of another;{398} since any entirely unknown object may be fraught with weal or woe. Nature implants contrary impulses to act on many classes of things, and leaves it to slight alterations in the conditions of the individual case to decide which impulse shall carry the day. Thus, greediness and suspicion, curiosity and timidity, coyness and desire, bashfulness and vanity, sociability and pugnacity, seem to shoot over into each other as quickly, and to remain in as unstable an equilibrium, in the higher birds and mammals as in man. All are impulses, congenital, blind at first, and productive of motor reactions of a rigorously determinate sort. Each one of them then is an instinct, as instincts are commonly defined. But they contradict each other—'experience' in each particular opportunity of application usually deciding the issue. The animal that exhibits them loses the 'instinctive' demeanor and appears to lead a life of hesitation and choice, an intellectual life; not, however, because he has no instincts—rather because he has so many that they block each other's path.
Wherever the mind is advanced enough to make distinctions; wherever various sensory elements need to come together to trigger a response; wherever, instead of instantly jumping into action at the first vague indication of what kind of thing is present, the agent pauses to figure out what type it is and what the circumstances are of its appearance; wherever different individuals and situations can influence actions in different ways; wherever these conditions exist—we see a masking of the basic nature of instinctive life. The entire narrative of our interactions with wild animals is about how we exploit the way they make judgments based solely on labels, allowing us to trap or kill them. Nature has left them to operate in this basic way, having them act in the manner that is usually correct. There are more worms not hooked than there are on hooks; therefore, overall, Nature tells her fishy offspring to bite at any worm and take their chances. But as her offspring evolve and their lives become more valuable, she decreases the risks. Since what seems like the same object can sometimes be real food and at other times be bait; since in social species, each individual can be either a friend or a rival depending on the situation; since any completely unfamiliar object could bring either benefit or harm, Nature instills conflicting impulses to respond to many types of things and allows slight changes in circumstances to determine which impulse prevails. Thus, greed and suspicion, curiosity and fear, shyness and desire, bashfulness and vanity, friendliness and aggression, seem to blend into each other quickly, remaining in a state of unstable balance among higher birds and mammals just like in humans. All are impulses, innate, initially blind, and resulting in specific behaviors. Each one of them is an instinct, as instincts are generally defined. But they contradict one another—'experience' usually dictates the outcome in each specific situation. The animal that displays them loses its 'instinctive' behavior and appears to lead a life of hesitation and choice, an intellectual existence; not because it lacks instincts—rather because it has so many that they interfere with one another.
Thus we may confidently say that however uncertain man's reactions upon his environment may sometimes seem in comparison with those of lower mammals, the uncertainty is probably not due to their possession of any principles of action which he lacks. On the contrary, man possesses all the impulses that they have, and a great many more besides. In other words, there is no material antagonism between instinct and reason. Reason, per se, can inhibit no impulses; the only thing that can neutralize an impulse is an impulse the other way. Reason may, however, make an inference which will excite the imagination so as to let loose the impulse the other way; and thus, though the animal richest in reason is also the animal richest in instinctive impulses too, he never seems the fatal automaton which a merely instinctive animal must be.
So we can confidently say that even though human reactions to their environment might sometimes seem more uncertain compared to those of lower mammals, this uncertainty likely isn't because humans lack any principles of action that those animals have. In fact, humans have all the same impulses they do, plus many more. In other words, there’s no real conflict between instinct and reason. Reason, by itself, can’t suppress any impulses; the only thing that can neutralize one impulse is another impulse in the opposite direction. However, reason can make an inference that sparks the imagination and releases the impulse the other way; thus, while the most rational animal is also the one with the greatest variety of instinctive impulses, it doesn’t seem like the doomed automaton that a merely instinctive animal would be.
a. The inhibition of instincts by habits; and
a. The blocking of instincts by habits; and
b. The transitoriness of instincts.
The fleeting nature of instincts.
a. The law of inhibition of instincts by habits is this: When objects of a certain class elicit from an animal a certain sort of reaction, it often happens that the animal becomes partial to the first specimen of the class on which it has reacted, and will not afterward react on any other specimen.
a. The law of inhibition of instincts by habits is this: When things from a certain category trigger a specific reaction in an animal, it's common for the animal to become attached to the first example of that category it reacts to, and it won't respond to any other example afterward.
The selection of a particular hole to live in, of a particular mate, of a particular feeding-ground, a particular variety of diet, a particular anything, in short, out of a possible multitude, is a very wide-spread tendency among animals, even those low down in the scale. The limpet will return to the same sticking-place in its rock, and the lobster to its favorite nook on the sea-bottom. The rabbit will deposit its dung in the same corner; the bird makes its nest on the same bough. But each of these preferences carries with it an insensibility to other opportunities and occasions—an insensibility which can only be described physiologically as an inhibition of new impulses by the habit of old ones already formed. The possession of homes and wives of our own makes us strangely insensible to the charms of those of other people. Few of us are adventurous in the matter of food; in fact, most of us think there is something disgusting in a bill of fare to which we are unused. Strangers, we are apt to think, cannot be worth knowing, especially if they come from distant cities, etc. The original impulse which got us homes, wives, dietaries, and friends at all, seems to exhaust itself in its first achievements and to leave no surplus energy for reacting on new cases. And so it comes about that, witnessing this torpor, an observer of mankind might say that no instinctive propensity toward certain objects existed at all. It existed, but it existed miscellaneously, or as an instinct pure and simple, only before habit was formed. A habit, once grafted on an instinctive tendency, restricts the range of the tendency itself, and keeps us from reacting on any{400} but the habitual object, although other objects might just as well have been chosen had they been the first-comers.
Choosing a specific place to live, a specific partner, a specific feeding area, a specific type of diet—essentially anything out of countless options—is a common behavior among animals, even those lower on the evolutionary scale. The limpet returns to the same spot on its rock, and the lobster goes back to its preferred spot on the ocean floor. The rabbit leaves its droppings in the same corner; the bird builds its nest on the same branch. However, each of these preferences comes with a lack of awareness of other opportunities and situations—this insensitivity can only be described physiologically as a suppression of new impulses by the habits of previously established ones. Owning homes and partners makes us surprisingly indifferent to the appeal of others. Few of us are adventurous when it comes to food; in fact, many of us find something unappealing about menus we aren't familiar with. We tend to think that strangers aren't worth getting to know, especially if they come from faraway cities, etc. The initial impulse that led us to attain homes, partners, diets, and friends seems to deplete itself in those initial successes, leaving no extra energy to address new situations. Consequently, an observer of humanity might conclude that no instinctual drive toward certain things exists at all. It does exist, but it exists randomly, or as a basic instinct, only before habits are formed. A habit, once attached to an instinctive tendency, limits that tendency's range and prevents us from reacting to anything except the habitual choice, even though other choices could have just as easily been made had they been the first options.
Another sort of arrest of instinct by habit is where the same class of objects awakens contrary instinctive impulses. Here the impulse first followed toward a given individual of the class is apt to keep him from ever awakening the opposite impulse in us. In fact, the whole class may be protected by this individual specimen from the application to it of the other impulse. Animals, for example, awaken in a child the opposite impulses of fearing and fondling. But if a child, in his first attempts to pat a dog, gets snapped at or bitten, so that the impulse of fear is strongly aroused, it may be that for years to come no dog will excite in him the impulse to fondle again. On the other hand, the greatest natural enemies, if carefully introduced to each other when young and guided at the outset by superior authority, settle down into those 'happy families' of friends which we see in our menageries. Young animals, immediately after birth, have no instinct of fear, but show their dependence by allowing themselves to be freely handled. Later, however, they grow 'wild' and, if left to themselves, will not let man approach them. I am told by farmers in the Adirondack wilderness that it is a very serious matter if a cow wanders off and calves in the woods and is not found for a week or more. The calf, by that time, is as wild and almost as fleet as a deer, and hard to capture without violence. But calves rarely show any wildness to the men who have been in contact with them during the first days of their life, when the instinct to attach themselves is uppermost, nor do they dread strangers as they would if brought up wild.
Another way that habits can interrupt instincts is when the same group of objects triggers opposing instinctive reactions. The initial instinct we feel towards a specific member of that group can prevent us from ever experiencing the opposite instinct. In fact, a particular individual might shield the entire group from triggering that different reaction. For instance, animals can evoke in a child both fear and affection. But if a child is snapped at or bitten while trying to pet a dog, causing a strong fear response, that child may not feel the urge to pet any dog for years. On the flip side, even the fiercest natural enemies, if introduced to each other as young ones and guided by someone in charge, can become those "happy families" of friends we observe in zoos. Newborn animals initially lack the instinct to fear and show their need for care by allowing themselves to be handled. However, as they grow, they become "wild," and if left alone, will avoid humans. Farmers in the Adirondack wilderness have told me that if a cow strays off and gives birth in the woods without being found for over a week, it becomes very problematic. By then, the calf is as wild and almost as swift as a deer, making it difficult to catch without force. However, calves usually don't display wild behavior towards the people who cared for them during their early days when their instinct to bond is strongest, nor do they fear strangers as they would if they had been raised in the wild.
Chickens give a curious illustration of the same law. Mr. Spalding's wonderful article on instinct shall supply us with the facts. These little creatures show opposite instincts of attachment and fear, either of which may be aroused by the same object, man. If a chick is born in the absence of the hen, it "will follow any moving object.{401} And when guided by sight alone, they seem to have no more disposition to follow a hen than to follow a duck or a human being. Unreflecting lookers-on, when they saw chickens a day old running after me," says Mr. Spalding, "and older ones following me for miles, and answering to my whistle, imagined that I must have some occult power over the creatures: whereas I had simply allowed them to follow me from the first. There is the instinct to follow; and the ear, prior to experience, attaches them to the right object."[49]
Chickens provide an interesting example of the same principle. Mr. Spalding's amazing article on instinct will give us the details. These little birds display opposite instincts of attachment and fear, both of which can be triggered by the same being, a human. If a chick is hatched without the hen present, it "will follow any moving object.{401} When they rely only on sight, they show no greater tendency to follow a hen than they do to follow a duck or a person. Observers who saw one-day-old chicks running after me," says Mr. Spalding, "and older ones following me for miles and responding to my whistle, thought I must have some mysterious influence over them; when in fact, I had just let them follow me from the start. There is an instinct to follow, and their ears, before they have any experience, connect them to the correct object."[49]
But if a man presents himself for the first time when the instinct of fear is strong, the phenomena are altogether reversed. Mr. Spalding kept three chickens hooded until they were nearly four days old, and thus describes their behavior:
But if a man shows up for the first time when the instinct of fear is strong, everything changes. Mr. Spalding kept three chickens hooded until they were almost four days old, and this is how he describes their behavior:
"Each of them, on being unhooded, evinced the greatest terror to me, dashing off in the opposite direction whenever I sought to approach it. The table on which they were unhooded stood before a window, and each in its turn beat against the window like a wild bird. One of them darted behind some books, and, squeezing itself into a corner, remained cowering for a length of time. We might guess at the meaning of this strange and exceptional wildness; but the odd fact is enough for my present purpose. Whatever might have been the meaning of this marked change in their mental constitution—had they been unhooded on the previous day they would have run to me instead of from me—it could not have been the effect of experience; it must have resulted wholly from changes in their own organizations."[50]
"Each of them, when the hood was removed, showed me the greatest fear, running off in the opposite direction whenever I tried to get close. The table where they were unhooded was in front of a window, and each one, in turn, banged against the window like a wild bird trying to escape. One of them darted behind some books, squeezing itself into a corner and stayed there trembling for a while. We could try to understand this strange and unusual fear, but the strange fact is enough for what I need right now. No matter what the reason for this significant change in their behavior was—if they had been unhooded the day before, they would have run toward me instead of away—it clearly wasn’t because of past experiences; it must have come entirely from changes within themselves." [50]
Their case was precisely analogous to that of the Adirondack calves. The two opposite instincts relative to the same object ripen in succession. If the first one engenders a habit, that habit will inhibit the application of the second{402} instinct to that object. All animals are tame during the earliest phase of their infancy. Habits formed then limit the effects of whatever instincts of wildness may later be evolved.
Their situation was exactly like that of the Adirondack calves. Two conflicting instincts regarding the same object develop one after the other. If the first one creates a habit, that habit will prevent the second instinct from being applied to that object. All animals are domesticated during the very early stages of their infancy. Habits formed during this time restrict the impact of any wild instincts that may develop later.{402}
b. This leads us to the law of transitoriness, which is this: Many instincts ripen at a certain age and then fade away. A consequence of this law is that if, during the time of such an instinct's vivacity, objects adequate to arouse it are met with, a habit of acting on them is formed, which remains when the original instinct has passed away; but that if no such objects are met with, then no habit will be formed; and, later on in life, when the animal meets the objects, he will altogether fail to react, as at the earlier epoch he would instinctively have done.
b. This brings us to the law of transitoriness, which states: Many instincts develop at a certain age and then fade away. One implication of this law is that if, during the time when an instinct is strong, an individual encounters objects that can stimulate it, a habit of responding to those objects is formed and persists even after the original instinct has diminished; however, if no such objects are encountered, then no habit will be developed. Later in life, when the individual does encounter those objects, they will not respond at all, unlike how they would have instinctively reacted earlier.
No doubt such a law is restricted. Some instincts are far less transient than others—those connected with feeding and 'self-preservation' may hardly be transient at all,—and some, after fading out for a time, recur as strong as ever; e.g., the instincts of pairing and rearing young. The law, however, though not absolute, is certainly very widespread, and a few examples will illustrate just what it means.
No doubt such a law is limited. Some instincts are much more enduring than others—those related to feeding and 'self-preservation' may hardly be temporary at all,—and some, after disappearing for a while, return as strong as ever; for example, the instincts of mating and raising young. The law, however, while not absolute, is definitely quite common, and a few examples will illustrate what it entails.
In the chickens and calves above mentioned it is obvious that the instinct to follow and become attached fades out after a few days, and that the instinct of flight then take its place, the conduct of the creature toward man being decided by the formation or non-formation of a certain habit during those days. The transiency of the chicken's instinct to follow is also proved by its conduct toward the hen. Mr. Spalding kept some chickens shut up till they were comparatively old, and, speaking of these, he says:
In the chickens and calves mentioned earlier, it's clear that their instinct to follow and bond weakens after a few days, and this is replaced by a flight instinct. How the creature interacts with humans depends on whether a certain habit is formed or not during that time. The short-lived nature of a chicken's instinct to follow is also shown in how it behaves toward the hen. Mr. Spalding kept some chickens confined until they were relatively older, and he notes:
"A chicken that has not heard the call of the mother until eight or ten days old then hears it as if it heard it not. I regret to find that on this point my notes are not so full as I could wish, or as they might have been. There is, however, an account of one chicken that could not be{403} returned to the mother when ten days old. The hen followed it, and tried to entice it in every way; still, it continually left her and ran to the house or to any person of whom it caught sight. This it persisted in doing, though beaten back with a small branch dozens of times, and, indeed, cruelly maltreated. It was also placed under the mother at night, but it again left her in the morning."
"A chicken that hasn't heard its mother's call until it's eight or ten days old hears it as if it had never heard it before. I wish my notes on this were more detailed, but there's one story about a chicken that couldn't return to its mother when it was ten days old. The hen followed it and tried to lure it back in every possible way, but it kept running away to the house or toward any person it spotted. It kept doing this, even when it was pushed back with a small branch dozens of times and was treated quite harshly. It was also put under the mother at night, but it left her again in the morning."
The instinct of sucking is ripe in all mammals at birth, and leads to that habit of taking the breast which, in the human infant, may be prolonged by daily exercise long beyond its usual term of a year or a year and a half. But the instinct itself is transient, in the sense that if, for any reason, the child be fed by spoon during the first few days of its life and not put to the breast, it may be no easy matter after that to make it suck at all. So of calves. If their mother die, or be dry, or refuse to let them suck for a day or two, so that they are fed by hand, it becomes hard to get them to suck at all when a new nurse is provided. The ease with which sucking creatures are weaned, by simply breaking the habit and giving them food in a new way, shows that the instinct, purely as such, must be entirely extinct.
The sucking instinct is present in all mammals at birth and leads to the habit of breastfeeding, which in human infants can last well beyond the usual one to one and a half years with continued practice. However, this instinct is temporary; if a child is spoon-fed during the first few days of life and not allowed to breastfeed, it can be quite difficult to get the child to suck later on. The same goes for calves. If their mother dies, is dry, or doesn’t let them suck for a day or two, and they are instead fed by hand, it becomes challenging to get them to suck when a new nurse is introduced. The fact that suckling animals can be weaned easily by just breaking the habit and providing food in a different way indicates that the instinct itself can completely disappear.
Assuredly the simple fact that instincts are transient, and that the effect of later ones may be altered by the habits which earlier ones have left behind, is a far more philosophical explanation than the notion of an instinctive constitution vaguely 'deranged' or 'thrown out of gear.'
Surely, the basic reality that instincts are temporary, and that the influence of later instincts can be changed by the habits created by earlier ones, offers a much more thoughtful explanation than the idea of an instinctive makeup being vaguely 'off balance' or 'malfunctioning.'
I have observed a Scotch terrier, born on the floor of a stable in December, and transferred six weeks later to a carpeted house, make, when he was less than four months old, a very elaborate pretence of burying things, such as gloves, etc., with which he had played till he was tired. He scratched the carpet with his forefeet, dropped the object from his mouth upon the spot, then scratched all about it, and finally went away and let it lie. Of course, the act was entirely useless. I saw him perform it at that age some four or five times, and never again in his life.{404} The conditions were not present to fix a habit which should last when the prompting instinct died away. But suppose meat instead of a glove, earth instead of a carpet, hunger-pangs instead of a fresh supper a few hours later, and it is easy to see how this dog might have got into a habit of burying superfluous food, which might have lasted all his life. Who can swear that the strictly instinctive part of the food-burying propensity in the wild Canidæ may not be as short-lived as it was in this terrier?
I saw a Scotch terrier, born in a stable in December, who was moved six weeks later to a carpeted home. When he was younger than four months, he pretended to bury things, like gloves he had played with until he was tired. He would scratch the carpet with his front paws, drop the object from his mouth onto the spot, scratch around it, and then walk away, leaving it there. Obviously, this was completely pointless. I watched him do this about four or five times at that age, but never again in his life.{404} The right conditions weren’t there to create a habit that would continue after the initial instinct faded. But if it had been meat instead of a glove, dirt instead of carpet, and hunger instead of a freshly prepared meal a few hours later, it’s easy to imagine how this dog could have developed a habit of burying extra food that might have lasted his entire life. Who can say that the instinctive part of the food-burying behavior in wild Canidæ isn’t as short-lived as it was in this terrier?
Leaving lower animals aside, and turning to human instincts, we see the law of transiency corroborated on the widest scale by the alternation of different interests and passions as human life goes on. With the child, life is all play and fairy-tales and learning the external properties of 'things'; with the youth, it is bodily exercises of a more systematic sort, novels of the real world, boon-fellowship and song, friendship and love, nature, travel and adventure, science and philosophy; with the man, ambition and policy, acquisitiveness, responsibility to others, and the selfish zest of the battle of life. If a boy grows up alone at the age of games and sports, and learns neither to play ball, nor row, nor sail, nor ride, nor skate, nor fish, nor shoot, probably he will be sedentary to the end of his days; and, though the best of opportunities be afforded him for learning these things later, it is a hundred to one but he will pass them by and shrink back from the effort of taking those necessary first steps the prospect of which, at an earlier age, would have filled him with eager delight. The sexual passion expires after a protracted reign; but it is well known that its peculiar manifestations in a given individual depend almost entirely on the habits he may form during the early period of its activity. Exposure to bad company then makes him a loose liver all his days; chastity kept at first makes the same easy later on. In all pedagogy the great thing is to strike the iron while hot, and to seize the wave of the pupil's interest in each successive subject before its ebb has come, so that knowledge{405} may be got and a habit of skill acquired—a headway of interest, in short, secured, on which afterward the individual may float. There is a happy moment for fixing skill in drawing, for making boys collectors in natural history, and presently dissectors and botanists; then for initiating them into the harmonies of mechanics and the wonders of physical and chemical law. Later, introspective psychology and the metaphysical and religious mysteries take their turn; and, last of all, the drama of human affairs and worldly wisdom in the widest sense of the term. In each of us a saturation-point is soon reached in all these things; the impetus of our purely intellectual zeal expires, and unless the topic be one associated with some urgent personal need that keeps our wits constantly whetted about it, we settle into an equilibrium, and live on what we learned when our interest was fresh and instinctive, without adding to the store. Outside of their own business, the ideas gained by men before they are twenty-five are practically the only ideas they shall have in their lives. They cannot get anything new. Disinterested curiosity is past, the mental grooves and channels set, the power of assimilation gone. If by chance we ever do learn anything about some entirely new topic, we are afflicted with a strange sense of insecurity, and we fear to advance a resolute opinion. But with things learned in the plastic days of instinctive curiosity we never lose entirely our sense of being at home. There remains a kinship, a sentiment of intimate acquaintance, which, even when we know we have failed to keep abreast of the subject, flatters us with a sense of power over it, and makes us feel not altogether out of the pale.
Leaving lower animals aside and focusing on human instincts, we see the law of transience clearly demonstrated in the shifting interests and passions throughout human life. For a child, life revolves around play, fairy tales, and discovering the external qualities of things. As a youth, it’s about organized physical activities, real-world novels, camaraderie and music, friendships and love, nature, travel and adventure, science and philosophy. In adulthood, it shifts to ambition and strategy, desire for possessions, responsibilities to others, and the personal thrill of life’s challenges. If a boy grows up isolated during his playful years and doesn't learn to play ball, row, sail, ride, skate, fish, or shoot, he will likely remain sedentary for the rest of his days; even if given the best opportunities to learn these skills later, he will probably ignore them and shy away from making those crucial first attempts that would have excited him when he was younger. Sexual desire wanes after a long period, but it’s well known that its specific expressions in an individual largely depend on the habits formed in its early active years. Being around the wrong crowd can lead to a lifetime of recklessness, while maintaining chastity early on makes it easier to remain so later. In education, the key is to strike while the iron is hot and to capture the student’s interest in each new topic before it fades, so that knowledge can be gained and skills developed—a foundation of interest that the individual can build upon later. There’s a perfect time to hone drawing skills, inspire boys to collect natural history specimens, and eventually to study dissection and botany; the same goes for introducing them to the principles of mechanics and the wonders of physics and chemistry. Later on, topics like introspective psychology and metaphysical or religious mysteries come into play; finally, there’s the drama of human affairs and worldly wisdom in its broadest sense. We each quickly reach a saturation point in these matters; our pure intellectual enthusiasm wanes, and unless the subject is tied to a pressing personal need that keeps our minds sharp, we settle into a state of equilibrium, relying on what we learned when our interest was fresh and instinctual, without adding to our knowledge. Outside of their own work, the ideas acquired by individuals before they turn twenty-five are practically the only ideas they will hold throughout their lives. They cannot learn anything new. Disinterested curiosity fades, mental pathways get established, and the ability to assimilate information diminishes. If by chance we do manage to learn something entirely new, we often feel a strange sense of insecurity and hesitate to voice a strong opinion. However, the knowledge gained during the formative years of instinctual curiosity never completely leaves us; a sense of familiarity and intimate understanding remains, which, even when we realize we’ve fallen behind in the topic, gives us a sense of control and keeps us feeling somewhat connected.
Whatever individual exceptions to this might be cited are of the sort that 'prove the rule.'
Any individual exceptions to this might be mentioned, but they only serve to reinforce the rule.
To detect the moment of the instinctive readiness for the subject is, then, the first duty of every educator. As for the pupils, it would probably lead to a more earnest temper on the part of college students if they had less{406} belief in their unlimited future intellectual potentialities, and could be brought to realize that whatever physics and political economy and philosophy they are now acquiring are, for better or worse, the physics and political economy and philosophy that will have to serve them to the end.
To identify the moment when a student is instinctively ready to learn is the primary responsibility of every educator. For the students, it might encourage a more serious attitude among college students if they had less{406} faith in their limitless future intellectual possibilities, and instead understood that the physics, political economy, and philosophy they are currently learning are, for better or worse, the subjects that will serve them for life.
Enumeration of Instincts in Man.—Professor Preyer, in his careful little work, 'Die Seele des Kindes,' says "instinctive acts are in man few in number, and, apart from those connected with the sexual passion, difficult to recognize after early youth is past." And he adds, "so much the more attention should we pay to the instinctive movements of new-born babies, sucklings, and small children." That instinctive acts should be easiest recognized in childhood would be a very natural effect of our principles of transitoriness, and of the restrictive influence of habits once acquired; but they are far indeed from being 'few in number' in man. Professor Preyer divides the movements of infants into impulsive, reflex, and instinctive. By impulsive movements he means random movements of limbs, body, and voice, with no aim, and before perception is aroused. Among the first reflex movements are crying on contact with the air, sneezing, snuffling, snoring, coughing, sighing, sobbing, gagging, vomiting, hiccuping, starting, moving the limbs when touched, and sucking. To these may now be added hanging by the hands (see Nineteenth Century, Nov. 1891). Later on come biting, clasping objects, and carrying them to the mouth, sitting up, standing, creeping, and walking. It is probable that the centres for executing these three latter acts ripen spontaneously, just as those for flight have been proved to do in birds, and that the appearance of learning to stand and walk, by trial and failure, is due to the exercise beginning in most children before the centres are ripe. Children vary enormously in the rate and manner in which they learn to walk. With the first impulses to imitation, those to significant vocalization are born. Emulation rapidly ensues, with pugnacity in its train. Fear of definite{407} objects comes in early, sympathy much later, though on the instinct (or emotion?—see p. 373) of sympathy so much in human life depends. Shyness and sociability, play, curiosity, acquisitiveness, all begin very early in life. The hunting instinct, modesty, love, the parental instinct, etc., come later. By the age of 15 or 16 the whole array of human instincts is complete. It will be observed that no other mammal, not even the monkey, shows so large a list. In a perfectly-rounded development every one of these instincts would start a habit toward certain objects and inhibit a habit towards certain others. Usually this is the case; but, in the one-sided development of civilized life, it happens that the timely age goes by in a sort of starvation of objects, and the individual then grows up with gaps in his psychic constitution which future experiences can never fill. Compare the accomplished gentleman with the poor artisan or tradesman of a city: during the adolescence of the former, objects appropriate to his growing interests, bodily and mental, were offered as fast as the interests awoke, and, as a consequence, he is armed and equipped at every angle to meet the world. Sport came to the rescue and completed his education where real things were lacking. He has tasted of the essence of every side of human life, being sailor, hunter, athlete, scholar, fighter, talker, dandy, man of affairs, etc., all in one. Over the city poor boy's youth no such golden opportunities were hung, and in his manhood no desires for most of them exist. Fortunate it is for him if gaps are the only anomalies his instinctive life presents; perversions are too often the fruit of his unnatural bringing-up.
Enumeration of Instincts in Man.—Professor Preyer, in his detailed work, 'Die Seele des Kindes,' states, "instinctive acts in humans are few, and aside from those related to sexual passion, hard to identify after early childhood." He goes on to say, "we should pay even more attention to the instinctive movements of newborns, suckling infants, and young children." It may seem natural that instinctive acts are easiest to identify in childhood due to our understanding of transitoriness and the limiting effects of learned habits; however, they are certainly not 'few' in number in humans. Professor Preyer categorizes infant movements as impulsive, reflex, and instinctive. He defines impulsive movements as random movements of limbs, body, and voice without any purpose, occurring before perception is triggered. The first reflex movements include crying when exposed to air, sneezing, snuffling, snoring, coughing, sighing, sobbing, gagging, vomiting, hiccuping, starting, moving limbs when touched, and sucking. We can now add hanging by the hands (see Nineteenth Century, Nov. 1891) to this list. Later, we see biting, grasping objects, bringing them to the mouth, sitting up, standing, crawling, and walking. It's likely that the areas of the brain controlling these last three actions develop naturally, just as those for flight have been shown to in birds, and that the process of learning to stand and walk, through trial and error, starts in most children before these areas are fully developed. Children learn to walk at varying rates and in different ways. With the first impulses to imitate, there also comes significant vocalization. Emulation quickly follows, bringing along pugnacity. Fear of specific{407} objects emerges early, while sympathy comes much later, even though so much of human life relies on this instinct (or emotion?—see p. 373). Shyness and sociability, play, curiosity, and acquisitiveness all begin very early in life. The hunting instinct, modesty, love, the parental instinct, and others develop later. By ages 15 or 16, the full range of human instincts is present. It’s notable that no other mammal, not even monkeys, has such a long list. In a well-rounded development, each of these instincts would create habits towards certain objects while inhibiting habits towards others. This is usually the case; however, in the one-sided development characteristic of civilized life, crucial experiences can be missed, leading individuals to grow up with gaps in their psychological makeup that future experiences can never fully address. Compare the well-rounded gentleman with a struggling laborer or tradesman in a city: during the former's adolescence, opportunities suitable to his developing interests—both physical and intellectual—were consistently available as his interests emerged. Consequently, he is equipped from all angles to navigate the world. Sports often stepped in to round out his education where real opportunities fell short. He has experienced a bit of every aspect of human life: he has been a sailor, hunter, athlete, scholar, fighter, conversationalist, dandy, and businessperson, all in one. In contrast, the city poor boy's youth lacked such golden opportunities, and in his adulthood, he often feels no desire for many of them. It's unfortunate for him if gaps are the only issues in his instinctive life; perversions are too frequently the outcome of his unnatural upbringing.
Description of Fear.—In order to treat at least one instinct at greater length, I will take the instance of fear.
Description of Fear.—To explore one instinct in more detail, I will use the example of fear.
Fear is a reaction aroused by the same objects that arouse ferocity. The antagonism of the two is an interesting study in instinctive dynamics. We both fear, and wish to kill, anything that may kill us; and the question{408} which of the two impulses we shall follow is usually decided by some one of those collateral circumstances of the particular case, to be moved by which is the mark of superior mental natures. Of course this introduces uncertainty into the reaction; but it is an uncertainty found in the higher brutes as well as in men, and ought not to be taken as proof that we are less instinctive than they. Fear has bodily expressions of an extremely energetic kind, and stands, beside lust and anger, as one of the three most exciting emotions of which our nature is susceptible. The progress from brute to man is characterized by nothing so much as by the decrease in frequency of proper occasions for fear. In civilized life, in particular, it has at last become possible for large numbers of people to pass from the cradle to the grave without ever having had a pang of genuine fear. Many of us need an attack of mental disease to teach us the meaning of the word. Hence the possibility of so much blindly optimistic philosophy and religion. The atrocities of life become 'like a tale of little meaning though the words are strong'; we doubt if anything like us ever really was within the tiger's jaws, and conclude that the horrors we hear of are but a sort of painted tapestry for the chambers in which we lie so comfortably at peace with ourselves and with the world.
Fear is a reaction triggered by the same things that trigger aggression. The contrast between the two is a fascinating study in instinctual behavior. We both fear and want to eliminate anything that may pose a threat to us; and whether we act on fear or aggression is usually influenced by specific circumstances of the situation, which shows a higher level of reasoning. This introduces a level of uncertainty into our reactions, but this uncertainty exists in both higher animals and humans, and shouldn't be seen as evidence that we are less instinctive than they are. Fear has strong physical manifestations and stands alongside lust and anger as one of the top three most intense emotions we experience. The shift from animal to human is marked chiefly by a decline in the number of situations that genuinely provoke fear. In modern life, especially, many people can go from birth to death without experiencing real fear. For a lot of us, it might take a mental health crisis to understand what fear really means. This leads to a lot of blindly optimistic philosophy and religion. The harsh realities of life seem 'like a story that lacks meaning, even though the words are powerful'; we often question if anything like us ever truly faced the tiger, concluding that the nightmares we hear about are just illusions created for the rooms where we live so comfortably at peace with ourselves and the world.
Be this as it may, fear is a genuine instinct, and one of the earliest shown by the human child. Noises seem especially to call it forth. Most noises from the outer world, to a child bred in the house, have no exact significance. They are simply startling. To quote a good observer, M. Perez:
Be that as it may, fear is a real instinct and one of the first feelings shown by a human child. Noises seem especially to trigger it. Most sounds from the outside world, to a child raised indoors, have no clear meaning. They are just surprising. To quote a good observer, M. Perez:
"Children between three and ten months are less often alarmed by visual than by auditory impressions. In cats, from the fifteenth day, the contrary is the case. A child, three and a half months old, in the midst of the turmoil of a conflagration, in presence of the devouring flames and ruined walls, showed neither astonishment nor fear, but{409} smiled at the woman who was taking care of him, while his parents were busy. The noise, however, of the trumpet of the firemen, who were approaching, and that of the wheels of the engine, made him start and cry. At this age I have never yet seen an infant startled at a flash of lightning, even when intense; but I have seen many of them alarmed at the voice of the thunder.... Thus fear comes rather by the ears than by the eyes, to the child without experience."[51]
"Children between three and ten months are generally less frightened by what they see than by what they hear. In contrast, cats start to react differently from around the fifteenth day. For example, a three-and-a-half-month-old baby, amidst the chaos of a fire, surrounded by raging flames and crumbling walls, showed no surprise or fear. Instead, he smiled at the woman caring for him while his parents were occupied. However, the sound of the firemen's trumpet and the clattering of the engine wheels startled him and made him cry. At this age, I've never seen a baby flinch at a flash of lightning, no matter how bright it was; yet I've seen many get scared by the sound of thunder. So, for an inexperienced child, fear tends to come more from sounds than sights.{409}[51]"
The effect of noise in heightening any terror we may feel in adult years is very marked. The howling of the storm, whether on sea or land, is a principal cause of our anxiety when exposed to it. The writer has been interested in noticing in his own person, while lying in bed, and kept awake by the wind outside, how invariably each loud gust of it arrested momentarily his heart. A dog attacking us is much more dreadful by reason of the noises he makes.
The impact of noise on increasing our fear as adults is very significant. The howling of a storm, whether at sea or on land, is a major source of anxiety when we're exposed to it. The author has observed in himself, while lying in bed and kept awake by the wind outside, how each loud gust consistently stopped his heart for a moment. A dog attacking us is much more frightening because of the sounds it makes.
Strange men, and strange animals, either large or small, excite fear, but especially men or animals advancing toward us in a threatening way. This is entirely instinctive and antecedent to experience. Some children will cry with terror at their very first sight of a cat or dog, and it will often be impossible for weeks to make them touch it. Others will wish to fondle it almost immediately. Certain kinds of 'vermin,' especially spiders and snakes, seem to excite a fear unusually difficult to overcome. It is impossible to say how much of this difference is instinctive and how much the result of stories heard about these creatures. That the fear of 'vermin' ripens gradually seemed to me to be proved in a child of my own to whom I gave a live frog once, at the age of six to eight months, and again when he was a year and a half old. The first time, he seized it promptly, and holding it in spite of its struggling, at last got its head into his mouth. He then let{410} it crawl up his breast, and get upon his face, without showing alarm. But the second time, although he had seen no frog and heard no story about a frog betweenwhiles, it was almost impossible to induce him to touch it. Another child, a year old, eagerly took some very large spiders into his hand. At present he is afraid, but has been exposed meanwhile to the teachings of the nursery. One of my children from her birth upwards saw daily the pet pug-dog of the house, and never betrayed the slightest fear until she was (if I recollect rightly) about eight months old. Then the instinct suddenly seemed to develop, and with such intensity that familiarity had no mitigating effect. She screamed whenever the dog entered the room, and for many months remained afraid to touch him. It is needless to say that no change in the pug's unfailingly friendly conduct had anything to do with this change of feeling in the child. Two of my children were afraid, when babies, of fur: Richet reports a similar observation.
Strange men and strange animals, whether they're big or small, trigger fear, especially when they approach us in a threatening manner. This reaction is completely instinctive and happens before we have any experience. Some kids will cry in fear the first time they see a cat or dog, and it can take weeks to get them to touch it. Others might want to pet it right away. Certain types of 'vermin,' particularly spiders and snakes, seem to provoke an unusually hard-to-overcome fear. It’s tough to determine how much of this fear is instinctual versus influenced by stories heard about these creatures. I believe that the fear of 'vermin' develops gradually, as I observed in my own child when I gave him a live frog at ages six to eight months and again at a year and a half. The first time, he grabbed it quickly and, despite its wriggling, managed to get its head into his mouth. He even let it crawl on his chest and face without panicking. However, the second time, even though he hadn’t seen a frog or heard a story about one in between, it was incredibly difficult to get him to touch it. Another child, who was one year old, eagerly picked up some large spiders. Now, he's scared, but he has been exposed to nursery teachings in the meantime. One of my children saw our pet pug daily from birth and never showed any fear until she was about eight months old, if I remember correctly. Then, suddenly, that instinct kicked in with such intensity that being familiar with the dog didn’t help. She would scream whenever the dog came into the room and remained afraid to touch him for several months. It goes without saying that the pug's consistently friendly behavior had nothing to do with the child's change in feelings. Two of my children were afraid of fur when they were babies; Richet reports a similar observation.
Preyer tells of a young child screaming with fear on being carried near to the sea. The great source of terror to infancy is solitude. The teleology of this is obvious, as is also that of the infant's expression of dismay—the never-failing cry—on waking up and finding himself alone.
Preyer talks about a young child screaming in fear when being carried close to the sea. The biggest source of fear for infants is being alone. The reason for this is clear, just like the reason for the infant's frightened expression—the constant cry—when they wake up and realize they are by themselves.
Black things, and especially dark places, holes, caverns, etc., arouse a peculiarly gruesome fear. This fear, as well as that of solitude, of being 'lost,' are explained after a fashion by ancestral experience. Says Schneider:
Black things, and especially dark places, holes, caverns, etc., cause a uniquely chilling fear. This fear, along with the fear of solitude and being 'lost,' can be somewhat explained by our ancestral experiences. Schneider says:
"It is a fact that men, especially in childhood, fear to go into a dark cavern or a gloomy wood. This feeling of fear arises, to be sure, partly from the fact that we easily suspect that dangerous beasts may lurk in these localities—a suspicion due to stories we have heard and read. But, on the other hand, it is quite sure that this fear at a certain perception is also directly inherited. Children who have been carefully guarded from all ghost-stories{411} are nevertheless terrified and cry if led into a dark place, especially if sounds are made there. Even an adult can easily observe that an uncomfortable timidity steals over him in a lonely wood at night, although he may have the fixed conviction that not the slightest danger is near.
"It’s a fact that men, especially as kids, are afraid to go into a dark cave or a gloomy forest. This fear comes, of course, partly from the belief that dangerous animals might be hiding in these places—a belief fueled by stories we've heard and read. However, it’s also clear that this fear is inherited to some extent. Children who have been shielded from all ghost stories{411} still get terrified and cry when taken into a dark area, especially if there are noises. Even an adult can easily notice that an uncomfortable anxiety creeps over him in a lonely forest at night, even if he firmly believes there’s no danger at all."
"This feeling of fear occurs in many men even in their own house after dark, although it is much stronger in a dark cavern or forest. The fact of such instinctive fear is easily explicable when we consider that our savage ancestors through innumerable generations were accustomed to meet with dangerous beasts in caverns, especially bears, and were for the most part attacked by such beasts during the night and in the woods, and that thus an inseparable association between the perceptions of darkness, caverns, woods, and fear took place, and was inherited."[52]
"This feeling of fear happens to many men even in their own homes after dark, although it's much stronger in a dark cave or forest. This instinctive fear makes sense when we think about our ancient ancestors who, over countless generations, often encountered dangerous animals in caves, especially bears. Most of the time, these animals attacked at night and in the woods, creating a strong connection between darkness, caves, forests, and fear that was passed down through generations." [52]
High places cause fear of a peculiarly sickening sort, though here, again, individuals differ enormously. The utterly blind instinctive character of the motor impulses here is shown by the fact that they are almost always entirely unreasonable, but that reason is powerless to suppress them. That they are a mere incidental peculiarity of the nervous system, like liability to sea-sickness, or love of music, with no teleological significance, seems more than probable. The fear in question varies so much from one person to another, and its detrimental effects are so much more obvious than its uses, that it is hard to see how it could be a selected instinct. Man is anatomically one of the best fitted of animals for climbing about high places. The best psychical complement to this equipment would seem to be a 'level head' when there, not a dread of going there at all. In fact, the teleology of fear, beyond a certain point, is more than dubious. A certain amount of timidity obviously adapts us to the world we live in, but the fear-paroxysm is surely altogether harmful to him who is its prey.{412}
High places create a fear that feels uniquely disturbing, though people react to it in vastly different ways. The instinctual nature of these reactions is evident because they are often completely irrational, and reason can’t seem to control them. It seems likely that this fear is just an incidental trait of the nervous system, similar to susceptibility to motion sickness or an enjoyment of music, without any deeper purpose. The intensity of this fear varies greatly from person to person, and its negative effects are much more apparent than any benefits, making it difficult to understand how it could be an instinct that evolved through natural selection. Anatomically, humans are among the best animals suited for navigating high places. Ideally, one should have a clear mind when in such situations, rather than a fear of being there at all. In reality, the purpose of fear, past a certain threshold, is quite questionable. While some level of caution clearly helps us adapt to our environment, the fear-paroxysm is undoubtedly detrimental to anyone who experiences it.{412}
Fear of the supernatural is one variety of fear. It is difficult to assign any normal object for this fear, unless it were a genuine ghost. But, in spite of psychical-research societies, science has not yet adopted ghosts; so we can only say that certain ideas of supernatural agency, associated with real circumstances, produce a peculiar kind of horror. This horror is probably explicable as the result of a combination of simpler horrors. To bring the ghostly terror to its maximum, many usual elements of the dreadful must combine, such as loneliness, darkness, inexplicable sounds, especially of a dismal character, moving figures half discerned (or, if discerned, of dreadful aspect), and a vertiginous baffling of the expectation. This last element, which is intellectual, is very important. It produces a strange emotional 'curdle' in our blood to see a process with which we are familiar deliberately taking an unwonted course. Anyone's heart would stop beating if he perceived his chair sliding unassisted across the floor. The lower animals appear to be sensitive to the mysteriously exceptional as well as ourselves. My friend Professor W. K. Brooks told me of his large and noble dog being frightened into a sort of epileptic fit by a bone being drawn across the floor by a thread which the dog did not see. Darwin and Romanes have given similar experiences. The idea of the supernatural involves that the usual should be set at naught. In the witch and hobgoblin supernatural, other elements still of fear are brought in—caverns, slime and ooze, vermin, corpses, and the like. A human corpse seems normally to produce an instinctive dread, which is no doubt somewhat due to its mysteriousness, and which familiarity rapidly dispels. But, in view of the fact that cadaveric, reptilian, and underground horrors play so specific and constant a part in many nightmares and forms of delirium, it seems not altogether unwise to ask whether these forms of dreadful circumstance may not at a former period have been more normal objects of the environment than now. The ordinary cock-sure{413} evolutionist ought to have no difficulty in explaining these terrors, and the scenery that provokes them, as relapses into the consciousness of the cave-men, a consciousness usually overlaid in us by experiences of more recent date.
Fear of the supernatural is just one type of fear. It's hard to pinpoint a typical cause for this fear, unless it involves a real ghost. But, despite the efforts of psychical research societies, science hasn't embraced the idea of ghosts yet; so we can only say that certain ideas about supernatural influences, linked with actual situations, create a unique kind of horror. This horror likely stems from a mix of simpler fears. To amplify the ghostly terror, various familiar elements of dread must come together, like isolation, darkness, unexplained sounds—especially ominous ones—faintly seen moving figures (or, if they are clear, figures that look terrifying), and a dizzying disruption of our expectations. This last aspect, which is intellectual, is crucial. It creates a strange emotional chill in our veins when we witness something familiar suddenly taking an unusual turn. Anyone's heart would skip a beat if they saw their chair gliding across the floor without any help. Animals seem to be aware of the mysteriously unusual just like we are. My friend Professor W. K. Brooks shared a story about his large, noble dog having an epileptic-like fit when a bone was pulled across the floor by a thread that the dog couldn't see. Darwin and Romanes reported similar incidents. The concept of the supernatural suggests that the ordinary should be disregarded. In the realm of witches and hobgoblins, additional fear factors are introduced—such as caves, sludge, vermin, corpses, and so forth. A human corpse typically evokes an instinctive fear, likely due to its enigmatic nature, which quickly fades with familiarity. However, given that cadaveric, reptilian, and underground horrors are prevalent in many nightmares and forms of delirium, it seems reasonable to consider whether these frightening scenarios might have been more commonplace in our environment in the past. A typical, confident{413} evolutionist should be able to explain these fears and the settings that trigger them as regressions to the awareness of early humans, a mindset that is usually obscured in us by more recent experiences.
There are certain other pathological fears, and certain peculiarities in the expression of ordinary fear, which might receive an explanatory light from ancestral conditions, even infra-human ones. In ordinary fear, one may either run, or remain semi-paralyzed. The latter condition reminds us of the so-called death-shamming instinct shown by many animals. Dr. Lindsay, in his work 'Mind in Animals,' says this must require great self-command in those that practise it. But it is really no feigning of death at all, and requires no self-command. It is simply a terror-paralysis which has been so useful as to become hereditary. The beast of prey does not think the motionless bird, insect, or crustacean dead. He simply fails to notice them at all; because his senses, like ours, are much more strongly excited by a moving object than by a still one. It is the same instinct which leads a boy playing 'I spy' to hold his very breath when the seeker is near, and which makes the beast of prey himself in many cases motionlessly lie in wait for his victim or silently 'stalk' it, by stealthy advances alternated with periods of immobility. It is the opposite of the instinct which makes us jump up and down and move our arms when we wish to attract the notice of someone passing far away, and makes the shipwrecked sailor upon the raft where he is floating frantically wave a cloth when a distant sail appears. Now, may not the statue-like, crouching immobility of some melancholiacs, insane with general anxiety and fear of everything, be in some way connected with this old instinct? They can give no reason for their fear to move; but immobility makes them feel safer and more comfortable. Is not this the mental state of the 'feigning' animal?
There are some other irrational fears and specific behaviors in normal fear that could be understood through ancestral conditions, even those of our non-human ancestors. In normal fear, a person might either run away or become somewhat paralyzed. This paralysis is similar to the so-called death-feigning instinct seen in many animals. Dr. Lindsay, in his work 'Mind in Animals,' mentions that this must require great self-control in those who exhibit it. However, it's not really a pretension of death and doesn’t require self-control. It's simply a fear-induced paralysis that has proven so beneficial that it has become inherited. The predator doesn’t consider the motionless bird, insect, or crustacean to be dead. It simply doesn’t notice them at all, because its senses, like ours, are much more stimulated by movement than by stillness. This is the same instinct that causes a boy playing 'I spy' to hold his breath when the seeker is close, and it’s also what drives the predator to lie still while waiting for its prey or to silently stalk it through stealthy movements interspersed with moments of immobility. It contrasts with the instinct that makes us jump and wave our arms to get the attention of someone far away or causes a shipwrecked sailor on a raft to frantically wave a cloth when he sees a distant sail. Now, could the statue-like, crouching stillness of some melancholics, who are consumed by anxiety and fear of everything, be connected to this ancient instinct? They can’t provide any reason for their fear of moving, but remaining still makes them feel safer and more at ease. Isn’t this similar to the mental state of the 'feigning' animal?
Again, take the strange symptom which has been described{414} of late years by the rather absurd name of agoraphobia. The patient is seized with palpitation and terror at the sight of any open place or broad street which he has to cross alone. He trembles, his knees bend, he may even faint at the idea. Where he has sufficient self-command he sometimes accomplishes the object by keeping safe under the lee of a vehicle going across, or joining himself to a knot of other people. But usually he slinks round the sides of the square, hugging the houses as closely as he can. This emotion has no utility in a civilized man, but when we notice the chronic agoraphobia of our domestic cats, and see the tenacious way in which many wild animals, especially rodents, cling to cover, and only venture on a dash across the open as a desperate measure—even then making for every stone or bunch of weeds which may give a momentary shelter—when we see this we are strongly tempted to ask whether such an odd kind of fear in us be not due to the accidental resurrection, through disease, of a sort of instinct which may in some of our remote ancestors have had a permanent and on the whole a useful part to play?{415}
Once again, consider the unusual symptom that has recently been referred to by the rather silly name of agoraphobia. The person experiences racing heart and fear at the sight of any open space or wide street that they have to cross alone. They shake, their knees buckle, and they might even faint at the thought of it. When they have enough self-control, they sometimes manage to cross by staying close to a vehicle or by joining a group of people. But mostly, they sneak along the edges of the area, pressing against the buildings as much as possible. This feeling serves no purpose in a civilized person, but when we observe the chronic agoraphobia in our domestic cats, and notice how many wild animals, particularly rodents, stick to cover and only make a desperate dash across open space when absolutely necessary—making a beeline for any stone or clump of weeds that might provide a moment of shelter—we can’t help but wonder if this strange kind of fear in us might be due to the unexpected revival, through illness, of an instinct that once played a valuable role in some of our distant ancestors.{415}
CHAPTER XXVI.
WILL.
Voluntary Acts.—Desire, wish, will, are states of mind which everyone knows, and which no definition can make plainer. We desire to feel, to have, to do, all sorts of things which at the moment are not felt, had, or done. If with the desire there goes a sense that attainment is not possible, we simply wish; but if we believe that the end is in our power, we will that the desired feeling, having, or doing shall be real; and real it presently becomes, either immediately upon the willing or after certain preliminaries have been fulfilled.
Voluntary Acts.—Desire, wish, and will are mental states that everyone understands, and no definition can clarify them further. We want to feel, have, or do many things that we are not currently experiencing. If we feel that achieving our desire is impossible, we simply wish; but if we believe that we can achieve it, we will the desired feeling, possession, or action into reality; and it soon becomes real, either right away after we decide or after certain steps have been taken.
The only ends which follow immediately upon our willing seem to be movements of our own bodies. Whatever feelings and havings we may will to get come in as results of preliminary movements which we make for the purpose. This fact is too familiar to need illustration; so that we may start with the proposition that the only direct outward effects of our will are bodily movements. The mechanism of production of these voluntary movements is what befalls us to study now.
The only outcomes that happen immediately after we want something appear to be movements of our own bodies. Any feelings and havings we desire to achieve come as a result of initial movements we make for that purpose. This idea is so well known that it doesn’t need examples; therefore, we can begin with the idea that the only direct visible effects of our will are physical movements. Now, we will study how these voluntary movements are produced.
They are secondary performances. The movements we have studied hitherto have been automatic and reflex, and (on the first occasion of their performance, at any rate) unforeseen by the agent. The movements to the study of which we now address ourselves, being desired and intended beforehand, are of course done with full prevision of what they are to be. It follows from this that voluntary movements must be secondary, not primary, functions of our organism. This is the first point to understand in the psychology of Volition. Reflex, instinctive, and emotional{416} movements are all primary performances. The nerve-centres are so organized that certain stimuli pull the trigger of certain explosive parts; and a creature going through one of these explosions for the first time undergoes an entirely novel experience. The other day I was standing at a railroad station with a little child, when an express-train went thundering by. The child, who was near the edge of the platform, started, winked, had his breathing convulsed, turned pale, burst out crying, and ran frantically towards me and hid his face. I have no doubt that this youngster was almost as much astonished by his own behavior as he was by the train, and more than I was, who stood by. Of course if such a reaction has many times occurred we learn what to expect of ourselves, and can then foresee our conduct, even though it remain as involuntary and uncontrollable as it was before. But if, in voluntary action properly so called, the act must be foreseen, it follows that no creature not endowed with prophetic power can perform an act voluntarily for the first time. Well, we are no more endowed with prophetic vision of what movements lie in our power than we are endowed with prophetic vision of what sensations we are capable of receiving. As we must wait for the sensations to be given us, so we must wait for the movements to be performed involuntarily, before we can frame ideas of what either of these things are. We learn all our possibilities by the way of experience. When a particular movement, having once occurred in a random, reflex, or involuntary way, has left an image of itself in the memory, then the movement can be desired again, and deliberately willed. But it is impossible to see how it could be willed before.
They are secondary actions. The movements we've looked at so far have been automatic and reflexive, and (at least the first time they happen) unexpected for the person involved. The movements we're focusing on now, being planned and intended in advance, are, of course, carried out with full awareness of what they will be. This means that voluntary movements must be secondary, not primary, functions of our body. This is the first thing to grasp in the psychology of willpower. Reflex, instinctive, and emotional{416} movements are all primary actions. The nerve centers are organized so that certain stimuli trigger specific explosive reactions; and when a being goes through one of these reactions for the first time, it experiences something completely new. The other day, I was at a train station with a little child when a fast train zoomed by. The child, who was near the edge of the platform, flinched, blinked, had his breathing disrupted, turned pale, started crying, and ran desperately towards me to hide his face. I have no doubt that this little one was almost as surprised by his own reaction as he was by the train, and more so than I was standing there. Of course, if such a reaction happens repeatedly, we learn what to expect from ourselves and can anticipate our actions, even if they remain as involuntary and uncontrollable as before. However, in true voluntary action, since the act must be anticipated, it follows that no creature without prophetic abilities can perform an act voluntarily for the first time. Well, we are no more gifted with prophetic insight into what movements we can make than we are with prophetic insight into what sensations we can experience. Just as we must wait for sensations to come to us, we must also wait for movements to happen involuntarily before we can form ideas about what either of these things are. We learn all our potential through experience. When a specific movement happens once in a random, reflexive, or involuntary manner and leaves a memory of itself, then that movement can be desired again and consciously willed. But it is impossible to see how it could be willed before.
A supply of ideas of the various movements that are possible, left in the memory by experiences of their involuntary performance, is thus the first prerequisite of the voluntary life.
A collection of ideas about the different movements we can make, stored in our memory from experiences of them happening without our control, is therefore the first requirement for a life of choice.
Two Kinds of Ideas of Movement.—Now these ideas may be either resident or remote. That is, they may be of the{417} movement as it feels, when taking place, in the moving parts; or they may be of the movement as it feels in some other part of the body which it affects (strokes, presses, scratches, etc.), or as it sounds, or as it looks. The resident sensations in the parts that move have been called kinæsthetic feelings, the memories of them are kinæsthetic ideas. It is by these kinæsthetic sensations that we are made conscious of passive movements—movements communicated to our limbs by others. If you lie with closed eyes, and another person noiselessly places your arm or leg in any arbitrarily chosen attitude, you receive a feeling of what attitude it is, and can reproduce it yourself in the arm or leg of the opposite side. Similarly a man waked suddenly from sleep in the dark is aware of how he finds himself lying. At least this is what happens in normal cases. But when the feelings of passive movement as well as all the other feelings of a limb are lost, we get such results as are given in the following account by Prof. A. Strümpell of his wonderful anæsthetic boy, whose only sources of feeling were the right eye and the left ear:[53]
Two Kinds of Ideas of Movement.—Now these ideas can be either resident or remote. That means they can be about the{417} movement as we feel it in the moving parts, or they can be about how the movement feels in another part of the body that it influences (like strokes, presses, scratches, etc.), or how it sounds, or how it looks. The sensations felt in the parts that move are called kinæsthetic feelings, and the memories of these sensations are kinæsthetic ideas. It's through these kinæsthetic sensations that we become aware of passive movements—movements that are communicated to our limbs by others. If you lie with your eyes closed, and someone quietly places your arm or leg in any random position, you sense what position it is and can replicate it with your opposite arm or leg. Similarly, a person suddenly awakened from sleep in the dark can tell how they are lying. At least, that's what typically happens. However, when the sensations of passive movement, as well as all other feelings in a limb, are lost, we see results like those described by Prof. A. Strümpell about his extraordinary anæsthetic boy, who could only feel with his right eye and left ear:[53]
"Passive movements could be imprinted on all the extremities to the greatest extent, without attracting the patient's notice. Only in violent forced hyperextension of the joints, especially of the knees, there arose a dull vague feeling of strain, but this was seldom precisely localized. We have often, after bandaging the eyes of the patient, carried him about the room, laid him on a table, given to his arms and legs the most fantastic and apparently the most inconvenient attitudes without his having a suspicion of it. The expression of astonishment in his face, when all at once the removal of the handkerchief revealed his situation, is indescribable in words. Only when his head was made to hang away down he immediately spoke of dizziness, but could not assign its ground. Later he sometimes inferred from the sounds{418} connected with the manipulation that something special was being done with him.... He had no feelings of muscular fatigue. If, with his eyes shut, we told him to raise his arm and to keep it up, he did so without trouble. After one or two minutes, however, the arm began to tremble and sink without his being aware of it. He asserted still his ability to keep it up.... Passively holding still his fingers did not affect him. He thought constantly that he opened and shut his hand, whereas it was really fixed."
"Passive movements could be applied to all limbs to the fullest extent without the patient noticing. Only during extreme forced bending of the joints, especially the knees, did he feel a vague sense of strain, which was rarely pinpointed. We often, after blindfolding the patient, moved him around the room, placed him on a table, and put his arms and legs in the most unusual and seemingly uncomfortable positions without him suspecting anything. The look of surprise on his face when the blindfold was removed and revealed his situation is beyond words. Only when his head was tilted downward did he immediately mention feeling dizzy but couldn’t explain why. Later, he sometimes deduced from the sounds associated with the manipulation that something unusual was happening to him.... He didn’t feel any muscle fatigue. If we instructed him to raise his arm and hold it up with his eyes closed, he did so effortlessly. However, after one or two minutes, his arm began to shake and drop without him realizing it. He insisted he could still hold it up.... Passively keeping his fingers still didn’t bother him. He continually thought he was opening and closing his hand, while in reality, it was completely still."
No third kind of idea is called for. We need, then, when we perform a movement, either a kinæsthetic or a remote idea of which special movement it is to be. In addition to this it has often been supposed that we need an idea of the amount of innervation required for the muscular contraction. The discharge from the motor centre into the motor nerve is supposed to give a sensation sui generis, opposed to all our other sensations. These accompany incoming currents, whilst that, it is said, accompanies an outgoing current, and no movement is supposed to be totally defined in our mind, unless an anticipation of this feeling enter into our idea. The movement's degree of strength, and the effort required to perform it, are supposed to be specially revealed by the feeling of innervation. Many authors deny that this feeling exists, and the proofs given of its existence are certainly insufficient.
No other type of idea is needed. So, when we make a movement, we need either a kinesthetic idea or a distant idea of which specific movement it will be. It has also often been assumed that we require an idea of the amount of innervation needed for the muscle contraction. The signal from the motor center to the motor nerve is thought to produce a sensation sui generis, different from all our other sensations. These accompany incoming signals, while it is said that this one accompanies an outgoing signal, and no movement is considered fully defined in our mind unless this anticipation of that feeling is part of our idea. The strength of the movement and the effort needed to perform it are believed to be specifically indicated by the feeling of innervation. Many authors dispute the existence of this feeling, and the evidence provided for its existence is certainly lacking.
The various degrees of 'effort' actually felt in making the same movement against different resistances are all accounted for by the incoming feelings from our chest, jaws, abdomen, and other parts sympathetically contracted whenever the effort is great. There is no need of a consciousness of the amount of outgoing current required. If anything be obvious to introspection, it is that the degree of strength put forth is completely revealed to us by incoming feelings from the muscles themselves and their insertions, from the vicinity of the joints, and from the general fixation of the larynx, chest, face, and body.{419} When a certain degree of energy of contraction rather than another is thought of by us, this complex aggregate of afferent feelings, forming the material of our thought, renders absolutely precise and distinctive our mental image of the exact strength of movement to be made, and the exact amount of resistance to be overcome.
The different levels of 'effort' we actually feel when making the same movement against varying resistances are explained by the sensations coming from our chest, jaws, abdomen, and other areas that tighten sympathetically when the effort is intense. We don't need to be aware of how much outgoing power is needed. If there's anything clear through self-reflection, it's that the level of strength exerted is fully communicated to us through the sensations from our muscles and their attachments, from the area around the joints, and from the overall tension in the larynx, chest, face, and body.{419} When we think about a specific level of contraction energy rather than another, this complex mix of incoming sensations, which forms the basis of our thoughts, makes our mental image of the precise strength needed for the movement and the exact resistance to overcome incredibly clear and specific.
Let the reader try to direct his will towards a particular movement, and then notice what constituted the direction of the will. Was it anything over and above the notion of the different feelings to which the movement when effected would give rise? If we abstract from these feelings, will any sign, principle, or means of orientation be left by which the will may innervate the proper muscles with the right intensity, and not go astray into the wrong ones? Strip off these images anticipative of the results of the motion, and so far from leaving us with a complete assortment of directions into which our will may launch itself, you leave our consciousness in an absolute and total vacuum. If I will to write Peter rather than Paul, it is the thought of certain digital sensations, of certain alphabetic sounds, of certain appearances on the paper, and of no others, which immediately precedes the motion of my pen. If I will to utter the word Paul rather than Peter, it is the thought of my voice falling on my ear, and of certain muscular feelings in my tongue, lips, and larynx, which guide the utterance. All these are incoming feelings, and between the thought of them, by which the act is mentally specified with all possible completeness, and the act itself, there is no room for any third order of mental phenomenon.
Let the reader try to focus their will on a specific action, and then notice what determines the direction of that will. Is there anything beyond the anticipation of the different feelings that the movement will create once it's done? If we set aside these feelings, is there any sign, principle, or method of guidance left that would allow the will to engage the right muscles with the correct intensity, and not mistakenly trigger the wrong ones? Remove these images that anticipate the outcomes of the movement, and instead of providing us with a full array of directions our will can take, you leave our awareness in a complete and utter void. If I decide to write Peter instead of Paul, it's the thought of specific finger sensations, particular alphabet sounds, certain appearances on the page, and nothing else that comes right before the motion of my pen. If I choose to say the word Paul instead of Peter, it’s the thought of my voice reaching my ear, and particular muscle sensations in my tongue, lips, and throat that guide the speech. All these are incoming sensations, and between the thought of them, which mentally specifies the action as completely as possible, and the action itself, there is no space for any third kind of mental phenomenon.
There is indeed the fiat, the element of consent, or resolve that the act shall ensue. This, doubtless, to the reader's mind, as to my own, constitutes the essence of the voluntariness of the act. This fiat will be treated of in detail farther on. It may be entirely neglected here, for it is a constant coefficient, affecting all voluntary actions alike, and incapable of serving to distinguish them. No{420} one will pretend that its quality varies according as the right arm, for example, or the left is used.
There is definitely the fiat, the element of consent or decision that the action will take place. This, without a doubt, to both the reader and me, forms the core of the voluntary nature of the action. This fiat will be discussed in detail later. It can be completely overlooked here, as it is a constant factor that influences all voluntary actions equally and cannot be used to differentiate between them. No{420} one would argue that its quality changes depending on whether the right arm or the left arm is used.
An anticipatory image, then, of the sensorial consequences of a movement, plus (on certain occasions) the fiat that these consequences shall become actual, is the only psychic state which introspection lets us discern as the forerunner of our voluntary acts. There is no coercive evidence of any feeling attached to the efferent discharge.
An anticipatory image, then, of the sensory effects of an action, plus (sometimes) the decision that these effects will actually happen, is the only mental state that introspection allows us to recognize as the precursor to our voluntary actions. There is no compelling evidence of any feeling associated with the outgoing response.
The entire content and material of our consciousness—consciousness of movement, as of all things else—seems thus to be of peripheral origin, and to come to us in the first instance through the peripheral nerves.
The whole content and material of our awareness—awareness of movement, just like everything else—seems to come from the edges and initially reaches us through the peripheral nerves.
The Motor-cue.—Let us call the last idea which in the mind precedes the motor discharge the 'motor-cue.' Now do 'resident' images form the only motor-cue, or will 'remote' ones equally suffice?
The Motor-cue.—Let’s refer to the last idea in the mind before the motor action as the 'motor-cue.' Do 'resident' images serve as the only motor-cue, or can 'remote' ones work just as well?
There can be no doubt whatever that the cue may be an image either of the resident or of the remote kind. Although, at the outset of our learning a movement, it would seem that the resident feelings must come strongly before consciousness, later this need not be the case. The rule, in fact, would seem to be that they tend to lapse more and more from consciousness, and that the more practised we become in a movement, the more 'remote' do the ideas become which form its mental cue. What we are interested in is what sticks in our consciousness; everything else we get rid of as quickly as we can. Our resident feelings of movement have no substantive interest for us at all, as a rule. What interest us are the ends which the movement is to attain. Such an end is generally a remote sensation, an impression which the movement produces on the eye or ear, or sometimes on the skin, nose, or palate. Now let the idea of such an end associate itself definitely with the right discharge, and the thought of the innervation's resident effects will become as great an encumbrance as we have already concluded that the feeling of the innervation{421} itself is. The mind does not need it; the end alone is enough.
There's no doubt that the cue can be an image, whether from within or from a distance. At first, when we learn a movement, it seems like the feelings from within should be very prominent in our awareness, but later on, that's not necessarily true. In fact, it appears that these feelings often fade from our awareness, and as we get more skilled at a movement, the ideas that serve as its mental cue become more 'distant.' What we care about is what sticks in our awareness; everything else we try to discard as quickly as possible. Our internal feelings of movement usually aren’t very interesting to us. What we find interesting are the results that the movement is meant to achieve. These results are typically some kind of distant sensation, like an impression that the movement creates for our eyes, ears, or sometimes even our skin, nose, or taste buds. If we can clearly link the idea of such a result to the correct action, then the thought of the resident effects of the innervation will become just as much of a hindrance as we've already decided the feeling of the innervation{421} itself is. The mind doesn’t need it; the result alone is sufficient.
The idea of the end, then, tends more and more to make itself all-sufficient. Or, at any rate, if the kinæsthetic ideas are called up at all, they are so swamped in the vivid kinæsthetic feelings by which they are immediately overtaken that we have no time to be aware of their separate existence. As I write, I have no anticipation, as a thing distinct from my sensation, of either the look or the digital feel of the letters which flow from my pen. The words chime on my mental ear, as it were, before I write them, but not on my mental eye or hand. This comes from the rapidity with which the movements follow on their mental cue. An end consented to as soon as conceived innervates directly the centre of the first movement of the chain which leads to its accomplishment, and then the whole chain rattles off quasi-reflexly, as was described on p 115-6
The idea of the end tends to become more self-sufficient. Or, at the very least, if physical sensations come to mind at all, they get completely drowned out by the vivid physical feelings that immediately come over us, leaving us no time to recognize their separate existence. As I write, I don’t anticipate, as something distinct from my sensation, either the appearance or the tactile feel of the letters coming from my pen. The words resonate in my mental ear, so to speak, before I write them, but not in my mental eye or hand. This happens because the movements follow their mental cue so quickly. An end accepted as soon as it’s conceived directly stimulates the center of the first movement in the chain that leads to its completion, and then the entire chain unfolds quasi-reflexively, as described in p 115-6
The reader will certainly recognize this to be true in all fluent and unhesitating voluntary acts. The only special fiat there is at the outset of the performance. A man says to himself, "I must change my clothes," and involuntarily he has taken off his coat, and his fingers are at work in their accustomed manner on his waistcoat-buttons, etc.; or we say, "I must go downstairs," and ere we know it we have risen, walked, and turned the handle of the door;—all through the idea of an end coupled with a series of guiding sensations which successively arise. It would seem indeed that we fail of accuracy and certainty in our attainment of the end whenever we are preoccupied with the way in which the movement will feel. We walk a beam the better the less we think of the position of our feet upon it. We pitch or catch, we shoot or chop the better the less tactile and muscular (the less resident), and the more exclusively optical (the more remote), our consciousness is. Keep your eye on the place aimed at, and your hand will fetch it; think of your hand, and you will very likely{422} miss your aim. Dr. Southard found that he could touch a spot with a pencil-point more accurately with a visual than with a tactile mental cue. In the former case he looked at a small object and closed his eyes before trying to touch it. In the latter case he placed it with closed eyes, and then after removing his hand tried to touch it again. The average error with touch (when the results were most favorable) was 17.13 mm. With sight it was only 12.37 mm.—All these are plain results of introspection and observation. By what neural machinery they are made possible we do not know.
The reader will definitely see this in all smooth and confident voluntary actions. There’s only one special decision at the start of the action. A person thinks, "I need to change my clothes," and without realizing it, he has taken off his coat, and his fingers are instinctively working on his waistcoat buttons, etc.; or we say, "I need to go downstairs," and before we know it, we’ve stood up, walked, and turned the doorknob—all driven by the idea of an end accompanied by a series of guiding sensations that arise in order. It seems that we lose precision and certainty in reaching our goal whenever we focus too much on how the movement will feel. We balance on a beam better if we think less about where our feet are. We throw or catch, shoot or chop better the less we are aware of the tactile and muscular (the more present), and the more we focus on the visual (the more distant) aspects. Keep your eye on the target, and your hand will reach it; think about your hand, and you are likely to miss your target. Dr. Southard found that he could pinpoint a spot with a pencil tip more accurately when using a visual cue than a touch cue. In the first case, he looked at a small object and closed his eyes before trying to touch it. In the second case, he placed it with his eyes closed, and then after moving his hand away, he tried to touch it again. The average error with touch (when the conditions were most favorable) was 17.13 mm. With sight, it was only 12.37 mm.—These are all clear results from self-reflection and observation. We don’t know what neural mechanisms make this possible.
In Chapter XIX we saw how enormously individuals differ in respect to their mental imagery. In the type of imagination called tactile by the French authors, it is probable that the kinæsthetic ideas are more prominent than in my account. We must not expect too great a uniformity in individual accounts, nor wrangle overmuch as to which one 'truly' represents the process.
In Chapter XIX, we saw how greatly individuals vary when it comes to their mental imagery. In the type of imagination referred to as tactile by French authors, it’s likely that kinesthetic ideas are more prominent than I described. We shouldn't expect too much uniformity in personal accounts, nor should we argue too much about which one 'truly' represents the process.
I trust that I have now made clear what that 'idea of a movement' is which must precede it in order that it be voluntary. It is not the thought of the innervation which the movement requires. It is the anticipation of the movement's sensible effects, resident or remote, and sometimes very remote indeed. Such anticipations, to say the least, determine what our movements shall be. I have spoken all along as if they also might determine that they shall be. This, no doubt, has disconcerted many readers, for it certainly seems as if a special fiat, or consent to the movement, were required in addition to the mere conception of it, in many cases of volition; and this fiat I have altogether left out of my account. This leads us to the next point in our discussion.
I hope I’ve made it clear what the 'idea of a movement' is that needs to come before it can be voluntary. It’s not just about the thought of the movement that needs to happen. It’s about anticipating the movement’s noticeable effects, whether they’re immediate or far off, and sometimes they can be really far off. These anticipations, at the very least, determine what our movements will be. I've talked as if they might also determine that we will move at all. This, of course, has probably confused many readers, since it seems like an extra approval or consent for the movement is needed beyond just thinking about it in many cases of making a choice; and I haven’t included this approval in my explanation at all. This brings us to the next point in our discussion.
Ideo-motor Action.—The question is this: Is the bare idea of a movement's sensible effects its sufficient motor-cue, or must there be an additional mental antecedent, in the shape of a fiat, decision, consent, volitional mandate, or{423} other synonymous phenomenon of consciousness, before the movement can follow?
I answer: Sometimes the bare idea is sufficient, but sometimes an additional conscious element, in the shape of a fiat, mandate, or express consent, has to intervene and precede the movement. The cases without a fiat constitute the more fundamental, because the more simple, variety. The others involve a special complication, which must be fully discussed at the proper time. For the present let us turn to ideo-motor action, as it has been termed, or the sequence of movement upon the mere thought of it, without a special fiat, as the type of the process of volition.
I respond: Sometimes just the idea alone is enough, but other times, we need an additional conscious element, like a directive, command, or explicit agreement, to step in before the movement occurs. The cases without a directive are more fundamental because they are simpler. The others involve additional complexity, which we’ll need to explore in detail later. For now, let’s focus on ideo-motor action, as it's called, or the process of moving simply by thinking about it, without a specific directive, as an example of how volition works.
Wherever a movement unhesitatingly and immediately follows upon the idea of it, we have ideo-motor action. We are then aware of nothing between the conception and the execution. All sorts of neuro-muscular processes come between, of course, but we know absolutely nothing of them. We think the act, and it is done; and that is all that introspection tells us of the matter. Dr. Carpenter, who first used, I believe, the name of ideo-motor action, placed it, if I mistake not, among the curiosities of our mental life. The truth is that it is no curiosity, but simply the normal process stripped of disguise. Whilst talking I become conscious of a pin on the floor, or of some dust on my sleeve. Without interrupting the conversation I brush away the dust or pick up the pin. I make no express resolve, but the mere perception of the object and the fleeting notion of the act seem of themselves to bring the latter about. Similarly, I sit at table after dinner and find myself from time to time taking nuts or raisins out of the dish and eating them. My dinner properly is over, and in the heat of the conversation I am hardly aware of what I do; but the perception of the fruit, and the fleeting notion that I may eat it, seem fatally to bring the act about. There is certainly no express fiat here; any more than there is in all those habitual goings and comings and rearrangements of ourselves which{424} fill every hour of the day, and which incoming sensations instigate so immediately that it is often difficult to decide whether not to call them reflex rather than voluntary acts. As Lotze says:
Wherever a movement quickly and decisively follows the idea of it, we have ideo-motor action. We don't notice anything between the thought and the action. Of course, various neuro-muscular processes happen in between, but we are completely unaware of them. We think about the action, and it gets done; that’s all introspection reveals. Dr. Carpenter, who I believe was the first to use the term ideo-motor action, categorized it, if I'm not mistaken, among the curiosities of our mental life. The reality is that it's not a curiosity but just the normal process laid bare. While talking, I become aware of a pin on the floor or some dust on my sleeve. Without stopping the conversation, I brush off the dust or pick up the pin. I don’t make any deliberate decision, but simply seeing the object and briefly thinking about dealing with it seems to make me do it. Similarly, after dinner, I find myself occasionally grabbing nuts or raisins from the dish and eating them. My meal is technically finished, and in the flow of the conversation, I'm hardly aware of my actions; however, the sight of the fruit and the fleeting thought that I might eat it seem to make it happen inevitably. There’s definitely no conscious decision being made here, just like in all those everyday habits, movements, and adjustments that{424} fill every hour of the day, which incoming sensations trigger so instantly that it’s often hard to say if we should consider them reflex actions rather than voluntary ones. As Lotze says:
"We see in writing or piano-playing a great number of very complicated movements following quickly one upon the other, the instigative representations of which remained scarcely a second in consciousness, certainly not long enough to awaken any other volition than the general one of resigning one's self without reserve to the passing over of representation into action. All the acts of our daily life happen in this wise: Our standing up, walking, talking, all this never demands a distinct impulse of the will, but is adequately brought about by the pure flux of thought."[54]
"We observe in writing or playing the piano a lot of very complex movements happening quickly one after another. The stimulating representations of these actions hardly linger in our awareness for more than a second, certainly not long enough to spark any other intention than the overall one of completely surrendering to the transition from thought to action. All the activities of our daily lives occur this way: Our standing up, walking, talking—none of this requires a distinct impulse of the will, but is effectively driven by the natural flow of thought."[54]
In all this the determining condition of the unhesitating and resistless sequence of the act seems to be the absence of any conflicting notion in the mind. Either there is nothing else at all in the mind, or what is there does not conflict. We know what it is to get out of bed on a freezing morning in a room without a fire, and how the very vital principle within us protests against the ordeal. Probably most persons have lain on certain mornings for an hour at a time unable to brace themselves to the resolve. We think how late we shall be, how the duties of the day will suffer; we say, "I must get up, this is ignominious," etc.; but still the warm couch feels too delicious, the cold outside too cruel, and resolutions faints away and postpones itself again and again just as it seemed on the verge of bursting the resistance and passing over into the decisive act. Now how do we ever get up under such circumstances? If I may generalize from my own experience, we more often than not get up without any struggle or decision at all. We suddenly find that we have got up. A fortunate lapse of consciousness occurs; we forget both{425} the warmth and the cold; we fall into some revery connected with the day's life, in the course of which the idea flashes across us, "Hollo! I must lie here no longer"—an idea which at that lucky instant awakens no contradictory or paralyzing suggestions, and consequently produces immediately its appropriate motor effects. It was our acute consciousness of both the warmth and the cold during the period of struggle, which paralyzed our activity then and kept our idea of rising in the condition of wish and not of will. The moment these inhibitory ideas ceased, the original idea exerted its effects.
In all of this, the key factor for the smooth and unstoppable flow of action seems to be the lack of any conflicting thoughts in the mind. Either there’s nothing else in the mind, or what is there doesn’t interfere. We know what it’s like to get out of bed on a freezing morning in a room without a heater, and how the essential urge inside us resists the ordeal. Most people have probably laid in bed for an hour on certain mornings, unable to gather the resolve to get up. We think about how late we will be, how our tasks for the day will be affected; we say, “I must get up, this is embarrassing,” and so on; but still, the warm bed feels too nice, and the cold outside too harsh, as our resolve fades and keeps postponing itself again and again, just when it seems close to breaking through and turning into action. So how do we ever get up in such situations? If I can generalize from my own experience, we often manage to get up without any struggle or decision at all. We suddenly realize that we have gotten up. A fortunate lapse of awareness happens; we forget both{425} the warmth and the cold; we drift into some daydream connected to the day ahead, during which the thought strikes us, “Wow! I can’t lie here any longer”—a thought that, at that lucky moment, doesn’t bring up any conflicting or paralyzing suggestions, and thus instantly leads to the necessary action. It was our intense awareness of both the warmth and the cold during the struggle that paralyzed our activity then and kept our urge to rise in a state of wish rather than will. The moment these inhibiting thoughts stopped, the original thought exerted its effects.
This case seems to me to contain in miniature form the data for an entire psychology of volition. It was in fact through meditating on the phenomenon in my own person that I first became convinced of the truth of the doctrine which these pages present, and which I need here illustrate by no farther examples. The reason why that doctrine is not a self-evident truth is that we have so many ideas which do not result in action. But it will be seen that in every such case, without exception, that is because other ideas simultaneously present rob them of their impulsive power. But even here, and when a movement is inhibited from completely taking place by contrary ideas, it will incipiently take place. To quote Lotze once more:
This case seems to me to contain, in a small way, the information for an entire psychology of will. It was actually by reflecting on this phenomenon in myself that I first became convinced of the truth of the idea presented in these pages, which I don’t need to illustrate with further examples. The reason this idea isn’t immediately obvious is that we have so many thoughts that do not lead to action. However, it will be clear that in every one of these cases, without exception, it’s because other thoughts present at the same time take away their driving force. Even in cases where a movement is held back from completely occurring by opposing thoughts, it will still incipiently occur. To quote Lotze once more:
"The spectator accompanies the throwing of a billiard-ball, or the thrust of the swordsman, with slight movements of his arm; the untaught narrator tells his story with many gesticulations; the reader while absorbed in the perusal of a battle-scene feels a slight tension run through his muscular system, keeping time as it were with the actions he is reading of. These results become the more marked the more we are absorbed in thinking of the movements which suggest them; they grow fainter exactly in proportion as a complex consciousness, under the dominion of a crowd of other representations, withstands the passing over of mental contemplation into outward action."{426}
"The spectator moves their arm slightly as they watch a billiard ball being hit or a swordsman thrusting; the untrained storyteller animatedly gestures while narrating; the reader, engrossed in a battle scene, experiences a slight tension in their muscles, almost matching the actions described. These effects become more pronounced the deeper we focus on the movements that evoke them; they fade in intensity as a more complicated awareness, influenced by a multitude of other thoughts, resists the shift from mental engagement to physical expression." {426}
The 'willing-game,' the exhibitions of so-called 'mind-reading,' or more properly muscle-reading, which have lately grown so fashionable, are based on this incipient obedience of muscular contraction to idea, even when the deliberate intention is that no contraction shall occur.
The 'willing-game,' the displays of so-called 'mind-reading,' or more accurately muscle-reading, which have become so trendy lately, are based on this early obedience of muscle contractions to thoughts, even when there's a conscious intention to prevent any contraction.
We may then lay it down for certain that every representation of a movement awakens in some degree the actual movement which is its object; and awakens it in a maximum degree whenever it is not kept from so doing by an antagonistic representation present simultaneously to the mind.
We can confidently say that every depiction of a movement triggers, to some extent, the actual movement it's referring to; and it triggers it to the fullest extent when there isn't a competing representation also in the mind.
The express fiat, or act of mental consent to the movement, comes in when the neutralization of the antagonistic and inhibitory idea is required. But that there is no express fiat needed when the conditions are simple, the reader ought now to be convinced. Lest, however, he should still share the common prejudice that voluntary action without 'exertion of will-power' is Hamlet with the prince's part left out, I will make a few farther remarks. The first point to start from, in understanding voluntary action and the possible occurrence of it with no fiat or express resolve, is the fact that consciousness is in its very nature impulsive. We do not first have a sensation or thought, and then have to add something dynamic to it to get a movement. Every pulse of feeling which we have is the correlate of some neural activity that is already on its way to instigate a movement. Our sensations and thoughts are but cross-sections, as it were, of currents whose essential consequence is motion, and which have no sooner run in at one nerve than they are ready to run out by another. The popular notion that consciousness is not essentially a forerunner of activity, but that the latter must result from some superadded 'will-force,' is a very natural inference from those special cases in which we think of an act for an indefinite length of time without the action taking place. These cases, however, are not the norm; they are cases of inhibition by{427} antagonistic thoughts. When the blocking is released we feel as if an inward spring were let loose, and this is the additional impulse or fiat upon which the act effectively succeeds. We shall study anon the blocking and its release. Our higher thought is full of it. But where there is no blocking, there is naturally no hiatus between the thought-process and the motor discharge. Movement is the natural immediate effect of the process of feeling, irrespective of what the quality of the feeling may be. It is so in reflex action, it is so in emotional expression, it is so in the voluntary life. Ideo-motor action is thus no paradox, to be softened or explained away. It obeys the type of all conscious action, and from it one must start to explain the sort of action in which a special fiat is involved.
The clear decision or mental agreement to take action comes into play when we need to neutralize conflicting and inhibiting thoughts. However, the reader should now be convinced that no clear decision is necessary when the circumstances are straightforward. To avoid any lingering belief that voluntary action without 'willpower' is like Hamlet without the prince's role, I will make a few additional points. The first thing to understand about voluntary action and its potential occurrence without a clear decision or express intention is that consciousness is inherently impulsive. We don’t first experience a sensation or thought and then have to add something dynamic to make a movement happen. Every feeling we have corresponds to some neural activity that is already gearing up to trigger a movement. Our sensations and thoughts are merely snapshots of flows that essentially lead to motion, and as soon as they enter one nerve, they are ready to exit through another. The common belief that consciousness is not fundamentally a precursor to action, but that action must come from some added 'will-force,' is a natural conclusion drawn from specific instances where we consider an action for an extended period without it happening. However, these instances are exceptions; they're cases of inhibition caused by conflicting thoughts. When the blockage is removed, we feel as if an internal spring has been released, which serves as the extra push or decision that allows the action to succeed. We will explore the concept of blocking and its release soon; our higher thinking is full of it. But where there isn’t any blocking, there naturally isn’t a gap between the thought process and the motor response. Movement is the natural immediate outcome of the feelings we experience, regardless of what those feelings are. This is true in reflex actions, emotional expressions, and voluntary behaviors. Ideo-motor action isn't a paradox to be softened or explained away. It follows the pattern of all conscious actions, and from that, we must start to explain the kind of action that involves a specific decision.
It may be remarked in passing, that the inhibition of a movement no more involves an express effort or command than its execution does. Either of them may require it. But in all simple and ordinary cases, just as the bare presence of one idea prompts a movement, so the bare presence of another idea will prevent its taking place. Try to feel as if you were crooking your finger, whilst keeping it straight. In a minute it will fairly tingle with the imaginary change of position; yet it will not sensibly move, because its not really moving is also a part of what you have in mind. Drop this idea, think purely and simply of the movement, and nothing else, and, presto! it takes place with no effort at all.
It can be noted that stopping a movement doesn’t require more conscious effort or command than actually doing it. Either one may need it. But in most simple and everyday scenarios, just as the presence of one idea can trigger a movement, the presence of another idea can stop it from happening. Try to imagine bending your finger while keeping it straight. After a moment, you’ll feel a tingling sensation from the imagined movement, yet it won’t actually move because its not really moving is also part of what you're thinking about. Let go of this idea, focus solely on the movement, and nothing else, and just like that! It happens effortlessly.
A waking man's behavior is thus at all times the resultant of two opposing neural forces. With unimaginable fineness some currents among the cells and fibres of his brain are playing on his motor nerves, whilst other currents, as unimaginably fine, are playing on the first currents, damming or helping them, altering their direction or their speed. The upshot of it all is, that whilst the currents must always end by being drained off through some motor nerves, they are drained off sometimes through one set and sometimes through another; and sometimes{428} they keep each other in equilibrium so long that a superficial observer may think they are not drained off at all. Such an observer must remember, however, that from the physiological point of view a gesture, an expression of the brow, or an expulsion of the breath are movements as much as an act of locomotion is. A king's breath slays as well as an assassin's blow; and the outpouring of those currents which the magic imponderable streaming of our ideas accompanies need not always be of an explosive or otherwise physically conspicuous kind.
A waking person's behavior is always the result of two opposing neural forces. Some currents within the cells and fibers of their brain are affecting their motor nerves, while other equally subtle currents are influencing the first currents, either blocking or supporting them, changing their direction or speed. The outcome is that while these currents must eventually be channeled through some motor nerves, they can be routed through different sets at different times; and at times{428} they can balance each other out for so long that a casual observer might think they're not being channeled at all. However, this observer should remember that, from a physiological perspective, a gesture, a facial expression, or a breath is just as much a movement as walking is. A king's breath can be as lethal as an assassin's strike; and the flow of those currents that accompany the intangible stream of our thoughts doesn’t always have to be explosive or physically obvious.
Action after Deliberation.—We are now in a position to describe what happens in deliberate action, or when the mind has many objects before it, related to each other in antagonistic or in favorable ways. One of these objects of its thought may be an act. By itself this would prompt a movement; some of the additional objects or considerations, however, block the motor discharge, whilst others, on the contrary, solicit it to take place. The result is that peculiar feeling of inward unrest known as indecision. Fortunately it is too familiar to need description, for to describe it would be impossible. As long as it lasts, with the various objects before the attention, we are said to deliberate; and when finally the original suggestion either prevails and makes the movement take place, or gets definitively quenched by its antagonists, we are said to decide, or to utter our voluntary fiat, in favor of one or the other course. The reinforcing and inhibiting objects meanwhile are termed the reasons or motives by which the decision is brought about.
Action after Deliberation.—We can now explain what happens in deliberate action, or when the mind considers multiple ideas that are related to each other in conflicting or supportive ways. One of these thoughts might be an action. On its own, this would trigger a movement; however, some of the other thoughts or considerations block this action, while others encourage it to happen. The outcome is that unique feeling of inner turmoil known as indecision. Luckily, it’s so familiar we don’t need to explain it, because describing it would be impossible. As long as it lasts, with various thoughts competing for our attention, we are said to deliberate; and when one initial thought ultimately wins and prompts the action, or gets completely suppressed by opposing thoughts, we are said to decide, or to declare our intention, in favor of one path or the other. The thoughts that support or hinder this decision are termed the reasons or motives behind the choice made.
The process of deliberation contains endless degrees of complication. At every moment of it our consciousness is of an extremely complex thing, namely, the whole set of motives and their conflict. Of this complicated object, the totality of which is realized more or less dimly all the while by consciousness, certain parts stand out more or less sharply at one moment in the foreground, and at another moment other parts, in consequence of the{429} oscillations of our attention, and of the 'associative' flow of our ideas. But no matter how sharp the foreground-reasons may be, or how imminently close to bursting through the dam and carrying the motor consequences their own way, the background, however dimly felt, is always there as a fringe (p. 163); and its presence (so long as the indecision actually lasts) serves as an effective check upon the irrevocable discharge. The deliberation may last for weeks or months, occupying at intervals the mind. The motives which yesterday seemed full of urgency and blood and life to-day feel strangely weak and pale and dead. But as little to-day as to-morrow is the question finally resolved. Something tells us that all this is provisional; that the weakened reasons will wax strong again, and the stronger weaken; that equilibrium is unreached; that testing our reasons, not obeying them, is still the order of the day, and that we must wait awhile, patiently or impatiently, until our mind is made up 'for good and all.' This inclining first to one, then to another future, both of which we represent as possible, resembles the oscillations to and fro of a material body within the limits of its elasticity. There is inward strain, but no outward rupture. And this condition, plainly enough, is susceptible of indefinite continuance, as well in the physical mass as in the mind. If the elasticity give way, however, if the dam ever do break, and the currents burst the crust, vacillation is over and decision is irrevocably there.
The process of deciding is incredibly complicated. At every moment, our awareness grapples with a very intricate mix of conflicting motives. While we vaguely understand this complexity, certain aspects come into sharper focus at different times due to the shifting nature of our attention and the flow of our thoughts. Regardless of how urgent or pressing the reasons in the foreground seem, the background—although it may feel faintly present—always lingers as a backdrop; and as long as we remain undecided, it effectively prevents a definite choice from emerging. Deliberating can take weeks or even months, intermittently occupying our thoughts. The motives that felt so urgent and alive yesterday can seem strangely weak and lifeless today. Yet, neither today nor tomorrow will resolve the question. Something within us indicates that this state is temporary; that the weakened reasons will regain strength, and the stronger ones will diminish; that balance is never achieved; that we should test our reasons instead of just following them, and that we must wait—whether patiently or impatiently—until we can make a final decision. This shifting focus between two potential futures resembles the back-and-forth movement of an elastic object. There’s tension inside, but nothing gives way. This state can clearly last indefinitely, both in our minds and in physical forms. However, if that tension breaks, if the dam finally bursts and the forces rush out, the uncertainty ends and the decision becomes irreversible.
The decision may come in either of many modes. I will try briefly to sketch the most characteristic types of it, merely warning the reader that this is only an introspective account of symptoms and phenomena, and that all questions of causal agency, whether neural or spiritual, are relegated to a later page.
The decision can happen in various ways. I'll briefly outline the most typical types, just reminding the reader that this is only a reflective overview of symptoms and occurrences, and all questions about what causes them, whether it's related to the brain or something spiritual, will be addressed later.
Five Chief Types of Decision.—Turning now to the form of the decision itself, we may distinguish five chief types. The first may be called the reasonable type. It is that of those cases in which the arguments for and against a given{430} course seem gradually and almost insensibly to settle themselves in the mind and to end by leaving a clear balance in favor of one alternative, which alternative we then adopt without effort or constraint. Until this rational balancing of the books is consummated we have a calm feeling that the evidence is not yet all in, and this keeps action in suspense. But some day we wake with the sense that we see the matter rightly, that no new light will be thrown on it by farther delay, and that it had better be settled now. In this easy transition from doubt to assurance we seem to ourselves almost passive; the 'reasons' which decide us appearing to flow in from the nature of things, and to owe nothing to our will. We have, however, a perfect sense of being free, in that we are devoid of any feeling of coercion. The conclusive reason for the decision in these cases usually is the discovery that we can refer the case to a class upon which we are accustomed to act unhesitatingly in a certain stereotyped way. It may be said in general that a great part of every deliberation consists in the turning over of all the possible modes of conceiving the doing or not doing of the act in point. The moment we hit upon a conception which lets us apply some principle of action which is a fixed and stable part of our Ego, our state of doubt is at an end. Persons of authority, who have to make many decisions in the day, carry with them a set of heads of classification, each bearing its volitional consequence, and under these they seek as far as possible to range each new emergency as it occurs. It is where the emergency belongs to a species without precedent, to which consequently no cut-and-dried maxim will apply, that we feel most at a loss, and are distressed at the indeterminateness of our task. As soon, however, as we see our way to a familiar classification, we are at ease again. In action as in reasoning, then, the great thing is the quest of the right conception. The concrete dilemmas do not come to us with labels gummed upon their backs. We may name them by many names. The wise man is he{431} who succeeds in finding the name which suits the needs of the particular occasion best (p. 357 ff.). A 'reasonable' character is one who has a store of stable and worthy ends, and who does not decide about an action till he has calmly ascertained whether it be ministerial or detrimental to any one of these.
Five Chief Types of Decision.—Now, let’s look at the form of the decision itself. We can distinguish five main types. The first is the reasonable type. This is when the arguments for and against a certain{430} course of action seem to settle themselves in our minds and ultimately create a clear advantage for one option, which we then choose effortlessly. Until this rational weighing of options is completed, we feel a calm sense that we don’t have all the evidence yet, keeping us in a state of indecision. But eventually, we wake up feeling that we understand the situation correctly, that there won’t be any new insights from waiting longer, and that it’s better to settle it now. In this smooth transition from doubt to certainty, we feel almost passive; the 'reasons' that lead us to our decision seem to come naturally, independent of our will. However, we feel completely free, as we’re not experiencing any sense of pressure. The main reason for our decision in these situations is usually the realization that we can categorize the situation in a class that we typically approach in a straightforward manner. Generally, a significant part of any deliberation involves considering all possible ways to conceive the act of doing or not doing something. The moment we come up with a concept that allows us to apply a principle of action that is a fixed and stable part of who we are, our uncertainty ends. Authority figures, who have to make numerous decisions throughout the day, carry with them a set of classifications, each with its own consequences, and they try to fit each new situation into these categories as much as possible. It’s when the situation falls into a unique category, one without a clear precedent, that we feel most confused and stressed about the ambiguity of our task. However, as soon as we find the right classification, we feel at ease again. In action as in reasoning, the key is finding the right concept. The specific dilemmas don’t come to us labeled. We can refer to them by many different names. The wise person is the one{431} who manages to find the name that best suits the needs of the moment (p. 357 ff.). A 'reasonable' person is someone who has a collection of stable and valuable goals and doesn’t decide on an action until they’ve carefully determined whether it helps or harms any of those goals.
In the next two types of decision, the final fiat occurs before the evidence is all 'in.' It often happens that no paramount and authoritative reason for either course will come. Either seems a good, and there is no umpire to decide which should yield its place to the other. We grow tired of long hesitation and inconclusiveness, and the hour may come when we feel that even a bad decision is better than no decision at all. Under these conditions it will often happen that some accidental circumstance, supervening at a particular movement upon our mental weariness, will upset the balance in the direction of one of the alternatives, to which then we feel ourselves committed, although an opposite accident at the same time might have produced the opposite result.
In the next two types of decisions, the final choice happens before all the evidence is in. It often occurs that no overriding and clear reason for either option will emerge. Both seem reasonable, and there’s no referee to decide which should take precedence over the other. We become weary of indecision and uncertainty, leading us to think that even a bad choice is better than no choice at all. In these situations, it often happens that some random factor, coming at a moment when we're mentally exhausted, tips the balance toward one of the options, making us feel committed to it, even though a different random event at the same time could have led us to the opposite choice.
In the second type our feeling is to a great extent that of letting ourselves drift with a certain indifferent acquiescence in a direction accidentally determined from without, with the conviction that, after all, we might as well stand by this course as by the other, and that things are in any event sure to turn out sufficiently right.
In the second type, we mostly feel like we're just going along with whatever happens, accepting things without much thought, as if they were pushed onto us from without. We believe that we might as well follow this path as oppose to another and that, in the end, everything will probably turn out okay.
In the third type the determination seems equally accidental, but it comes from within, and not from without. It often happens, when the absence of imperative principle is perplexing and suspense distracting, that we find ourselves acting, as it were, automatically, and as if by a spontaneous discharge of our nerves, in the direction of one of the horns of the dilemma. But so exciting is this sense of motion after our intolerable pent-up state that we eagerly throw ourselves into it. 'Forward now!' we inwardly cry, 'though the heavens fall.' This reckless and exultant espousal of an energy so little premeditated by us{432} that we feel rather like passive spectators cheering on the display of some extraneous force than like voluntary agents is a type of decision too abrupt and tumultuous to occur often in humdrum and cool-blooded natures. But it is probably frequent in persons of strong emotional endowment and unstable or vacillating character. And in men of the world-shaking type, the Napoleons, Luthers, etc., in whom tenacious passion combines with ebullient activity, when by any chance the passion's outlet has been dammed by scruples or apprehensions, the resolution is probably often of this catastrophic kind. The flood breaks quite unexpectedly through the dam. That it should so often do so is quite sufficient to account for the tendency of these characters to a fatalistic mood of mind. And the fatalistic mood itself is sure to reinforce the strength of the energy just started on its exciting path of discharge.
In the third type, the determination seems just as random, but it comes from within rather than from outside. Often, when the lack of a guiding principle is confusing and the suspense is overwhelming, we find ourselves acting almost automatically, as if propelled by a sudden burst of energy towards one side of the dilemma. But this feeling of movement after our unbearable waiting is so thrilling that we eagerly dive into it. 'Let’s go now!' we internally shout, 'even if the heavens fall.' This reckless and triumphant embrace of an energy we barely planned feels more like we are passive onlookers cheering for some external force rather than willing participants. This kind of decision is too sudden and chaotic to happen often in calm and composed individuals. However, it's likely more common among people with strong emotions and unstable or indecisive natures. For powerful figures, like Napoleons and Luthers, whose intense passion combines with dynamic action, when their passion is suddenly held back by doubts or fears, such a dramatic resolution often occurs. The flood of emotions breaks through the barrier unexpectedly. That this happens so frequently helps explain why these characters often have a fatalistic outlook. This fatalistic mindset will also likely amplify the strength of the energy that's just been released on its exhilarating path. {432}
There is a fourth form of decision, which often ends deliberation as suddenly as the third form does. It comes when, in consequence of some outer experience or some inexplicable inward change, we suddenly pass from the easy and careless to the sober and strenuous mood, or possibly the other way. The whole scale of values of our motives and impulses then undergoes a change like that which a change of the observer's level produces on a view. The most sobering possible agents are objects of grief and fear. When one of these affects us, all 'light fantastic' notions lose their motive power, all solemn ones find theirs multiplied many-fold. The consequence is an instant abandonment of the more trivial projects with which we had been dallying, and an instant practical acceptance of the more grim and earnest alternative which till then could not extort our mind's consent. All those 'changes of heart,' 'awakenings of conscience,' etc., which make new men of so many of us may be classed under this head. The character abruptly rises to another 'level,' and deliberation comes to an immediate end.
There is a fourth form of decision that often wraps up deliberation just as abruptly as the third form does. It happens when, due to some external experience or an inexplicable internal shift, we abruptly switch from a relaxed and carefree attitude to a serious and intense mood, or perhaps the other way around. Our entire scale of values regarding our motives and impulses then changes, similar to how a change in the observer's position alters a view. The most sobering influences are experiences of grief and fear. When one of these touches us, all 'lighthearted' thoughts lose their appeal, while more serious ones gain significant weight. As a result, we instantly abandon the trivial pursuits we had been toying with and quickly accept the grimmer and more earnest alternatives that had previously failed to gain our attention. All those 'changes of heart,' 'awakenings of conscience,' and so on, which transform so many of us into new individuals can be categorized in this way. The character suddenly rises to a higher 'level,' and deliberation comes to an immediate halt.
In the fifth and final type of decision, the feeling that{433} the evidence is all in, and that reason has balanced the books, may be either present or absent. But in either case we feel, in deciding, as if we ourselves by our own wilful act inclined the beam: in the former case by adding our living effort to the weight of the logical reason which, taken alone, seems powerless to make the act discharge; in the latter by a kind of creative contribution of something instead of a reason which does a reason's work. The slow dead heave of the will that is felt in these instances makes of them a class altogether different subjectively from all the four preceding classes. What the heave of the will betokens metaphysically, what the effort might lead us to infer about a will-power distinct from motives, are not matters that concern us yet. Subjectively and phenomenally, the feeling of effort, absent from the former decisions, accompanies these. Whether it be the dreary resignation for the sake of austere and naked duty of all sorts of rich mundane delights; or whether it be the heavy resolve that of two mutually exclusive trains of future fact, both sweet and good and with no strictly objective or imperative principle of choice between them, one shall forevermore become impossible, while the other shall become reality; it is a desolate and acrid sort of act, an entrance into a lonesome moral wilderness. If examined closely, its chief difference from the former cases appears to be that in those cases the mind at the moment of deciding on the triumphant alternative dropped the other one wholly or nearly out of sight, whereas here both alternatives are steadily held in view, and in the very act of murdering the vanquished possibility the chooser realizes how much in that instant he is making himself lose. It is deliberately driving a thorn into one's flesh; and the sense of inward effort with which the act is accompanied is an element which sets this fifth type of decision in strong contrast with the previous four varieties, and makes of it an altogether peculiar sort of mental phenomenon. The immense majority of human decisions are decisions{434} without effort. In comparatively few of them, in most people, does effort accompany the final act. We are, I think, misled into supposing that effort is more frequent than it is by the fact that during deliberation we so often have a feeling of how great an effort it would take to make a decision now. Later, after the decision has made itself with ease, we recollect this and erroneously suppose the effort also to have been made then.
In the fifth and final type of decision, the feeling that{433} all the evidence is in and that reason has settled everything may either be present or absent. But in either case, when we decide, it feels like we've tipped the scales ourselves: in the former case, by adding our active effort to the logical weight that, by itself, doesn’t seem strong enough to push us to act; in the latter, by contributing something creative instead of a reason that does the work of a reason. The slow, heavy push of the will felt in these situations makes them subjectively unlike the previous four types. What this push of the will means metaphysically, or what it suggests about a will-power separate from motives, isn’t our concern right now. Subjectively and phenomenally, the sensation of effort, absent from earlier decisions, accompanies these. Whether it’s the grim acceptance of duty over all kinds of earthly pleasures, or whether it’s the serious resolve that out of two conflicting future paths—both good and sweet, with no clear reason to choose one over the other—one will forever be impossible while the other becomes real; it’s a bleak and bitter decision, a step into a lonely moral wilderness. If we look closely, the main difference from the previous cases seems to be that, in those instances, the mind completely or almost completely set aside the defeated option at the moment of choosing the winning one, while here both choices are kept in focus, and in the very act of eliminating the lost option, the chooser realizes how much they’re giving up. It’s like deliberately driving a thorn into one’s own flesh; and the feeling of inner effort that accompanies this act distinctly contrasts with the earlier four types, making it a unique kind of mental phenomenon. The vast majority of human decisions are decisions{434} made without effort. In most cases, especially for most people, there isn’t effort involved in the final act. I think we are mistaken in believing that effort is more common than it is because during deliberation we often feel how much effort it would take to make a decision now. Later, after the decision has come easily, we remember that and mistakenly think the effort was also made at that time.
The existence of the effort as a phenomenal fact in our consciousness cannot of course be doubted or denied. Its significance, on the other hand, is a matter about which the gravest difference of opinion prevails. Questions as momentous as that of the very existence of spiritual causality, as vast as that of universal predestination or free-will, depend on its interpretation. It therefore becomes essential that we study with some care the conditions under which the feeling of volitional effort is found.
The reality of effort as an impressive fact in our awareness cannot be questioned or denied. However, its importance is a topic of serious disagreement. Issues as crucial as the existence of spiritual causality, as expansive as universal predestination or free will, rely on how we interpret it. Thus, it's vital that we examine closely the conditions in which the sensation of voluntary effort occurs.
The Feeling of Effort.—When I said, awhile back, that consciousness (or the neural process which goes with it) is in its very nature impulsive, I should have added the proviso that it must be sufficiently intense. Now there are remarkable differences in the power of different sorts of consciousness to excite movement. The intensity of some feelings is practically apt to be below the discharging point, whilst that of others is apt to be above it. By practically apt, I mean apt under ordinary circumstances. These circumstances may be habitual inhibitions, like that comfortable feeling of the dolce far niente which gives to each and all of us a certain dose of laziness only to be overcome by the acuteness of the impulsive spur; or they may consist in the native inertia, or internal resistance, of the motor centres themselves, making explosion impossible until a certain inward tension has been reached and over-passed. These conditions may vary from one person to another, and in the same person from time to time. The neural inertia may wax or wane, and the habitual inhibitions dwindle or augment. The intensity of particular{435} thought-processes and stimulations may also change independently, and particular paths of association grow more pervious or less so. There thus result great possibilities of alteration in the actual impulsive efficacy of particular motives compared with others. It is where the normally less efficacious motive becomes more efficacious, and the normally more efficacious one less so, that actions ordinarily effortless, or abstinences ordinarily easy, either become impossible, or are effected (if at all) by the expenditure of effort. A little more description will make it plainer what these cases are.
The Feeling of Effort.—When I mentioned earlier that consciousness (or the neural activity that comes with it) is essentially impulsive, I should have added that it needs to be intense enough. There are significant differences in how different types of consciousness can stimulate movement. The intensity of some feelings tends to be below the point where action is triggered, while others can push beyond it. By "tends to," I mean this occurs under normal circumstances. These circumstances might include habitual inhibitions, like that relaxed feeling of dolce far niente that gives us all a dose of laziness, only to be overcome by a strong impulse; or they might relate to the natural resistance of the motor centers themselves, preventing action until a certain level of internal tension has been reached and surpassed. These factors can vary from person to person and even for the same person at different times. Neural inertia can increase or decrease, and habitual inhibitions can lessen or increase. The intensity of specific{435} thought processes and stimuli can also change on their own, while certain paths of association can become more or less accessible. This leads to significant variations in the actual impulsive effectiveness of certain motives compared to others. It's when a usually weaker motive becomes stronger, and a typically stronger one becomes weaker that actions that are usually effortless, or abstentions that are typically easy, can turn impossible or can be achieved (if at all) only with considerable effort. A bit more detail will clarify what these cases are.
Healthiness of Will.—There is a certain normal ratio in the impulsive power of different mental objects, which characterizes what may be called ordinary healthiness of will, and which is departed from only at exceptional times or by exceptional individuals. The states of mind which normally possess the most impulsive quality are either those which represent objects of passion, appetite, or emotion—objects of instinctive reaction, in short; or they are feelings or ideas of pleasure or of pain; or ideas which for any reason we have grown accustomed to obey, so that the habit of reacting on them is ingrained; or finally, in comparison with ideas of remoter objects, they are ideas of objects present or near in space and time. Compared with these various objects, all far-off considerations, all highly abstract conceptions, unaccustomed reasons, and motives foreign to the instinctive history of the race, have little or no impulsive power. They prevail, when they ever do prevail, with effort; and the normal, as distinguished from the pathological, sphere of effort is thus found wherever non-instinctive motives to behavior must be reinforced so as to rule the day.
Healthiness of Will.—There is a certain typical balance in the impulsive power of different mental objects that defines what we can call a normal healthiness of will, and this is only deviated from in rare cases or by unique individuals. The mental states that usually have the strongest impulsive quality are either those related to passion, desire, or emotion—basically, instinctive responses; or they are feelings or thoughts of pleasure or pain; or ideas we have become used to following, making those reactions habitual; or finally, they are thoughts about things that are present or nearby in space and time, as opposed to more distant ideas. In comparison, all distant considerations, highly abstract thoughts, unfamiliar reasons, and motives that don't connect to our instinctive past have little to no impulsive power. They only succeed, if they do at all, with effort; and the normal, as opposed to the pathological, range of effort is thus identified wherever non-instinctive motives for behavior need to be strengthened to take precedence.
Healthiness of will moreover requires a certain amount of complication in the process which precedes the fiat or the act. Each stimulus or idea, at the same time that it wakens its own impulse, must also arouse other ideas along with their characteristic impulses, and action must finally{436} follow, neither too slowly nor too rapidly, as the resultant of all the forces thus engaged. Even when the decision is pretty prompt, the normal thing is thus a sort of preliminary survey of the field and a vision of which course is best before the fiat comes. And where the will is healthy, the vision must be right (i.e., the motives must be on the whole in a normal or not too unusual ratio to each other), and the action must obey the vision's lead.
The healthiness of will also requires a certain level of complexity in the process that leads to a decision or action. Each stimulus or idea, while triggering its own response, must also bring up other ideas along with their specific impulses. Ultimately, action must follow{436} neither too slowly nor too quickly, as the result of all the forces involved. Even when the decision is made quickly, it’s normal to have some initial assessment of the situation and a sense of which direction is best before the decision is finalized. And when the will is healthy, the perspective must be correct (meaning the motives should be generally in a normal or not too unusual ratio to each other), and the action must follow the guidance of that perspective.
Unhealthiness of will may thus come about in many ways. The action may follow the stimulus or idea too rapidly, leaving no time for the arousal of restraining associates—we then have a precipitate will. Or, although the associates may come, the ratio which the impulsive and inhibitive forces normally bear to each other may be distorted, and we then have a will which is perverse. The perversity, in turn, may be due to either of many causes—too much intensity, or too little, here; too much or too little inertia there; or elsewhere too much or too little inhibitory power. If we compare the outward symptoms of perversity together, they fall into two groups, in one of which normal actions are impossible, and in the other abnormal ones are irrepressible. Briefly, we may call them respectively the obstructed and the explosive will.
Unhealthiness of will can happen in many ways. The action may follow the stimulus or idea too quickly, not allowing any time for the emergence of restraining influences—this is what we call a hasty will. Or, even if the restraining influences do appear, the balance between the impulsive and inhibitory forces may become distorted, resulting in a will that is misguided. The misguided nature can arise from various causes—too much intensity or too little in one area; too much or too little inertia in another; or an imbalance in inhibitory power somewhere else. If we look at the outward signs of misguided will, they can be categorized into two groups: one where normal actions are impossible, and another where abnormal actions are uncontrollable. In short, we can refer to them as the obstructed will and the explosive will.
It must be kept in mind, however, that since the resultant action is always due to the ratio between the obstructive and the explosive forces which are present, we never can tell by the mere outward symptoms to what elementary cause the perversion of a man's will may be due, whether to an increase of one component or a diminution of the other. One may grow explosive as readily by losing the usual brakes as by getting up more of the impulsive steam; and one may find things impossible as well through the enfeeblement of the original desire as through the advent of new lions in the path. As Dr. Clouston says, "the driver may be so weak that he cannot control well-broken horses, or the horses may be so hard-mouthed that no driver can pull them up."{437}
It’s important to remember that the resulting action is always determined by the ratio between the obstructive and explosive forces at play. We can never know just from the outward signs what the elementary cause of a person's will being skewed might be, whether it's because one force has increased or the other has decreased. Someone can become explosive just as easily by losing their usual brakes as they can by increasing their impulsive energy; and a person might find things impossible either due to a weakening of their initial desire or the emergence of new obstacles. As Dr. Clouston puts it, "the driver may be so weak that he cannot control well-broken horses, or the horses may be so hard-mouthed that no driver can pull them up."{437}
The Explosive Will. 1.) From Defective Inhibition.—There is a normal type of character, for example, in which impulses seem to discharge so promptly into movements that inhibitions get no time to arise. These are the 'dare-devil' and 'mercurial' temperaments, overflowing with animation and fizzling with talk, which are so common in the Slavic and Celtic races, and with which the cold-blooded and long-headed English character forms so marked a contrast. Simian these people seem to us, whilst we seem to them reptilian. It is quite impossible to judge, as between an obstructed and an explosive individual, which has the greater sum of vital energy. An explosive Italian with good perception and intellect will cut a figure as a perfectly tremendous fellow, on an inward capital that could be tucked away inside of an obstructed Yankee and hardly let you know that it was there. He will be the king of his company, sing the songs and make the speeches, lead the parties, carry out the practical jokes, kiss the girls, fight the men, and, if need be, lead the forlorn hopes and enterprises, so that an onlooker would think he has more life in his little finger than can exist in the whole body of a correct judicious fellow. But the judicious fellow all the while may have all these possibilities and more besides, ready to break out in the same or even a more violent way, if only the brakes were taken off. It is the absence of scruples, of consequences, of considerations, the extraordinary simplification of each moment's mental outlook, that gives to the explosive individual such motor energy and ease; it need not be the greater intensity of any of his passions, motives, or thoughts. As mental evolution goes on, the complexity of human consciousness grows ever greater, and with it the multiplication of the inhibitions to which every impulse is exposed. How much freedom of discourse we English folk lose because we feel obliged always to speak the truth! This predominance of inhibition has a bad as well as a good side; and if a man's impulses are in{438} the main orderly as well as prompt, if he has courage to accept their consequences, and intellect to lead them to a successful end, he is all the better for his hair-trigger organization, and for not being 'sicklied o'er with the pale cast of thought.' Many of the most successful military and revolutionary characters in history have belonged to this simple but quick-witted impulsive type. Problems come much harder to reflective and inhibitive minds. They can, it is true, solve much vaster problems; and they can avoid many a mistake to which the men of impulse are exposed. But when the latter do not make mistakes, or when they are always able to retrieve them, theirs is one of the most engaging and indispensable of human types.
The Explosive Will. 1.) From Defective Inhibition.—There's a normal type of personality where impulses seem to act immediately, leaving no time for inhibitions to arise. These are the 'daredevil' and 'mercurial' temperaments, full of energy and chatter, commonly found in Slavic and Celtic people, contrasting sharply with the reserved and analytical English character. To us, these individuals might seem monkey-like, while they may view us as reptilian. It’s impossible to determine which type, obstructed or explosive, possesses more overall energy. An explosive Italian with sharp perception and intellect can stand out as a remarkable presence, drawing from an inner energy that could easily fit inside a reserved American without ever revealing itself. He’ll be the life of the party, singing, speaking, leading groups, playing pranks, flirting with girls, challenging men, and if necessary, leading risky ventures, giving the impression that he has more vitality in his little finger than is present in the entire body of a cautious and rational individual. However, the careful person may have just as much potential and more, ready to burst forth in the same or even a more intense way if only they were unrestrained. The explosive person’s motor energy and ease come from a lack of scruples, consequences, and considerations, drastically simplifying their mental viewpoint in each situation; their passions, motives, or thoughts don’t necessarily have to be stronger. As we evolve mentally, human consciousness becomes increasingly complex, leading to more inhibitions that every impulse faces. How much freedom of expression do we English people lose because we feel obligated to always tell the truth? This prevalence of inhibition has both positive and negative aspects; if a person’s impulses are mostly orderly and prompt, and they have the courage to face the outcomes and the intellect to guide them toward success, they benefit from their quick-reacting nature, avoiding being 'sicklied o’er with the pale cast of thought.' Many of history’s most successful military and revolutionary figures have belonged to this straightforward yet sharp-witted impulsive type. Reflective and inhibitive minds find problems more challenging. While they can solve much larger issues and avoid many mistakes that impulsive people might make, when the impulsive individuals do not err, or when they successfully recover from their mistakes, they represent one of the most appealing and essential types of humanity.
In infancy, and in certain conditions of exhaustion, as well as in peculiar pathological states, the inhibitory power may fail to arrest the explosions of the impulsive discharge. We have then an explosive temperament temporarily realized in an individual who at other times may be of a relatively obstructed type. In other persons, again, hysterics, epileptics, criminals of the neurotic class called dégénérés by French authors, there is such a native feebleness in the mental machinery that before the inhibitory ideas can arise the impulsive ones have already discharged into act. In persons healthy-willed by nature bad habits can bring about this condition, especially in relation to particular sorts of impulse. Ask half the common drunkards you know why it is that they fall so often a prey to temptation, and they will say that most of the time they cannot tell. It is a sort of vertigo with them. Their nervous centres have become a sluice-way pathologically unlocked by every passing conception of a bottle and a glass. They do not thirst for the beverage; the taste of it may even appear repugnant; and they perfectly foresee the morrow's remorse. But when they think of the liquor or see it, they find themselves preparing to drink, and do not stop themselves: and more than this they cannot say. Similarly a{439} man may lead a life of incessant love-making or sexual indulgence, though what spurs him thereto seems to be trivial suggestions and notions of possibility rather than any real solid strength of passion or desire. Such characters are too flimsy even to be bad in any deep sense of the word. The paths of natural (or it may be unnatural) impulse are so pervious in them that the slightest rise in the level of innervation produces an overflow. It is the condition recognized in pathology as 'irritable weakness.' The phase known as nascency or latency is so short in the excitement of the neural tissues that there is no opportunity for strain or tension to accumulate within them; and the consequence is that with all the agitation and activity, the amount of real feeling engaged may be very small. The hysterical temperament is the playground par excellence of this unstable equilibrium. One of these subjects will be filled with what seems the most genuine and settled aversion to a certain line of conduct, and the very next instant follow the stirring of temptation and plunge in it up to the neck.
In early life, and in certain states of fatigue, as well as in unusual medical conditions, the ability to control impulses may not be strong enough to prevent impulsive outbursts. This results in an explosive temperament that can show up in someone who is typically more reserved. In other cases, such as with hysterics, epileptics, or neurotic criminals referred to as dégénérés by French writers, there is such a fundamental weakness in their mental processes that impulsive thoughts can act before inhibiting ones can emerge. For people generally self-controlled, bad habits can lead to this state, particularly concerning certain types of urges. If you ask many habitual drunks why they often give in to temptation, most will say they honestly don’t know. It feels to them like a kind of dizziness. Their nervous systems have become a gateway that is pathologically opened by any thoughts of a drink. They don’t crave the drink; in fact, they might even find it unappealing, and they fully expect to regret it later. But when they think about or see alcohol, they feel themselves getting ready to drink and don’t stop: they can’t explain it any further. Similarly, a {439} man may live a life of constant flirting or sexual activity, driven by trivial suggestions and possibilities rather than genuine passion or desire. Such people are too insubstantial to be truly bad in a meaningful way. Their natural (or possibly unnatural) impulses are so open that even the slightest increase in stimulation leads to an overflow. This condition is known in medicine as 'irritable weakness.' The phase recognized as nascency or latency is so brief in the excitement of their nerves that there’s no time for tension to build up; consequently, despite all the excitement and chaos, the level of genuine feeling involved may be quite low. The hysterical temperament perfectly exemplifies this unstable balance. One moment, a person may seem to have a deep and genuine dislike for a certain behavior, and the very next moment, they may succumb to temptation and dive right in.
2.) From Exaggerated Impulsion.—Disorderly and impulsive conduct may, on the other hand, come about where the neural tissues preserve their proper inward tone, and where the inhibitory power is normal or even unusually great. In such cases the strength of the impulsive idea is preternaturally exalted, and what would be for most people the passing suggestion of a possibility becomes a gnawing, craving urgency to act. Works on insanity are full of examples of these morbid insistent ideas, in obstinately struggling against which the unfortunate victim's soul often sweats with agony ere at last it gets swept away.
2.) From Exaggerated Impulsion.—Disorderly and impulsive behavior can happen when the neural tissues maintain their natural balance, and the inhibitory control is normal or even unusually strong. In these cases, the intensity of the impulsive thought is unnaturally heightened, and what would be just a fleeting suggestion for most people turns into a desperate, overwhelming urge to act. Works on insanity are filled with examples of these troubling persistent thoughts, which the unfortunate individual often struggles against with intense anguish before finally succumbing to them.
The craving for drink in real dipsomaniacs, or for opium or chloral in those subjugated, is of a strength of which normal persons can form no conception. "Were a keg of rum in one corner of a room and were a cannon constantly discharging balls between me and it, I could not{440} refrain from passing before that cannon in order to get the rum;" "If a bottle of brandy stood at one hand and the pit of hell yawned at the other, and I were convinced that I should be pushed in as sure as I took one glass, I could not refrain:" such statements abound in dipsomaniacs' mouths. Dr. Mussey of Cincinnati relates this case:
The thirst for alcohol in true alcoholics, or for opium or chloral in those who are addicted, is at a level that normal people can't even imagine. "If there was a keg of rum in one corner of a room and a cannon was firing balls constantly between me and it, I couldn't refrain from walking past that cannon to get to the rum;" "If a bottle of brandy was on one side and the pit of hell was yawning on the other, and I was sure I would be pushed in if I took even one glass, I still couldn't hold back:" such statements are common from alcoholics. Dr. Mussey of Cincinnati shares this case:
"A few years ago a tippler was put into an almshouse in this State. Within a few days he had devised various expedients to procure rum, but failed. At length, however, he hit upon one which was successful. He went into the wood-yard of the establishment, placed one hand upon the block, and with an axe in the other struck it off at a single blow. With the stump raised and streaming he ran into the house and cried, 'Get some rum! get some rum! My hand is off!' In the confusion and bustle of the occasion a bowl of rum was brought, into which he plunged the bleeding member of his body, then raising the bowl to his mouth, drank freely, and exultingly exclaimed, 'Now I am satisfied.' Dr. J. E. Turner tells of a man who, while under treatment for inebriety, during four weeks secretly drank the alcohol from six jars containing morbid specimens. On asking him why he had committed this loathsome act, he replied: 'Sir, it is as impossible for me to control this diseased appetite as it is for me to control the pulsations of my heart.'"
A few years ago, a heavy drinker was put into a shelter in this state. Within a few days, he came up with various ways to get rum, but they didn't work. Eventually, though, he figured out one that did. He went into the wood yard of the shelter, placed one hand on the chopping block, and with an axe in the other, chopped it off with one swing. With the bloody stump raised, he ran into the house and yelled, 'Get some rum! Get some rum! My hand is gone!' In the chaos of the moment, someone brought a bowl of rum, and he plunged his bleeding hand into it, then lifted the bowl to his mouth, drinking greedily and triumphantly shouting, 'Now I am satisfied.' Dr. J. E. Turner tells of a man who, while being treated for alcoholism, secretly drank the alcohol from six jars containing medical specimens over four weeks. When asked why he did such a disgusting thing, he replied: 'Sir, it is as impossible for me to control this sickening craving as it is for me to control the beating of my heart.'
Often the insistent idea is of a trivial sort, but it may wear the patient's life out. His hands feel dirty, they must be washed. He knows they are not dirty; yet to get rid of the teasing idea he washes them. The idea, however, returns in a moment, and the unfortunate victim, who is not in the least deluded intellectually, will end by spending the whole day at the wash-stand. Or his clothes are not 'rightly' put on; and to banish the thought he takes them off and puts them on again, till his toilet consumes two or three hours of time. Most people have the potentiality of this disease. To few has it not happened{441} to conceive, after getting into bed, that they may have forgotten to lock the front door, or to turn out the entry gas. And few of us have not on some occasion got up to repeat the performance, less because we believed in the reality of its omission than because only so could we banish the worrying doubt and get to sleep.
Often the persistent thought is of a trivial nature, but it can wear the patient down. His hands feel dirty, and they must be washed. He knows they aren't dirty; yet to get rid of the nagging thought, he washes them. However, the thought comes back in a moment, and the unfortunate person, who isn't at all misled intellectually, will end up spending the whole day at the sink. Or his clothes are not 'properly' put on; and to shake off the thought, he takes them off and puts them on again, until his grooming takes two or three hours. Most people have the potential for this issue. Few have not experienced{441} the anxiety, after getting into bed, of wondering whether they may have forgotten to lock the front door or turn off the entry gas. And few of us haven’t, at one time or another, gotten up to repeat the action, not so much because we truly believed we had forgotten, but simply to cast aside the nagging doubt and finally get to sleep.
The Obstructed Will.—In striking contrast with the cases in which inhibition is insufficient or impulsion in excess are those in which impulsion is insufficient or inhibition in excess. We all know the condition described on p. 218, in which the mind for a few moments seems to lose its focussing power and to be unable to rally its attention to any determinate thing. At such times we sit blankly staring and do nothing. The objects of consciousness fail to touch the quick or break the skin. They are there, but do not reach the level of effectiveness. This state of non-efficacious presence is the normal condition of some objects, in all of us. Great fatigue or exhaustion may make it the condition of almost all objects; and an apathy resembling that then brought about is recognized in asylums under the name of abulia as a symptom of mental disease. The healthy state of the will requires, as aforesaid, both that vision should be right, and that action should obey its lead. But in the morbid condition in question the vision may be wholly unaffected, and the intellect clear, and yet the act either fails to follow or follows in some other way.
The Obstructed Will.—In sharp contrast to situations where there’s too little inhibition or too much impulsion are those where there’s too little impulsion or too much inhibition. We all know the state described on p. 218, where for a few moments, the mind seems to lose its ability to focus and struggles to direct its attention to anything specific. During these times, we find ourselves blankly staring and doing nothing. The objects of our consciousness are present but fail to engage us or resonate. They exist, but they don’t affect us effectively. This state of ineffective presence is a normal condition for some objects in all of us. Extreme fatigue or exhaustion can make it the state for nearly all objects; the resulting apathy is recognized in mental health facilities as abulia, a symptom of mental illness. A healthy state of will requires, as mentioned before, that vision is clear, and that actions align with that vision. However, in the problematic condition described, vision may remain entirely unaffected, and the intellect may be sharp, yet the actions either don’t follow through or manifest in a different way.
"Video meliora proboque, deteriora sequor" is the classic expression of this latter condition of mind. The moral tragedy of human life comes almost wholly from the fact that the link is ruptured which normally should hold between vision of the truth and action, and that this pungent sense of effective reality will not attach to certain ideas. Men do not differ so much in their mere feelings and conceptions. Their notions of possibility and their ideals are not as far apart as might be argued from their differing fates. No class of them have better sentiments{442} or feel more constantly the difference between the higher and the lower path in life than the hopeless failures, the sentimentalists, the drunkards, the schemers, the 'deadbeats,' whose life is one long contradiction between knowledge and action, and who, with full command of theory, never get to holding their limp characters erect. No one eats of the fruit of the tree of knowledge as they do; as far as moral insight goes, in comparison with them, the orderly and prosperous philistines whom they scandalize are sucking babes. And yet their moral knowledge, always there grumbling and rumbling in the background,—discerning, commenting, protesting, longing, half resolving,—never wholly resolves, never gets its voice out of the minor into the major key, or its speech out of the subjunctive into the imperative mood, never breaks the spell, never takes the helm into its hands. In such characters as Rousseau and Restif it would seem as if the lower motives had all the impulsive efficacy in their hands. Like trains with the right of way, they retain exclusive possession of the track. The more ideal motives exist alongside of them in profusion, but they never get switched on, and the man's conduct is no more influenced by them than an express train is influenced by a wayfarer standing by the roadside and calling to be taken aboard. They are an inert accompaniment to the end of time; and the consciousness of inward hollowness that accrues from habitually seeing the better only to do the worse, is one of the saddest feelings one can bear with him through this vale of tears.
"I see better things and approve of them, yet I follow worse ones" is the classic expression of this state of mind. The moral tragedy of human life largely stems from the broken connection that should normally exist between recognizing the truth and taking action, and that this sharp awareness of reality doesn’t attach to certain ideas. People don’t differ as much in their feelings and beliefs. Their ideas of what’s possible and their ideals aren’t as far apart as one might think based on their different outcomes. No group has better sentiments{442} or feels the distinction between the higher and lower paths in life more than those who are hopeless failures, the dreamers, the alcoholics, the schemers, the 'freeloaders,' whose lives are a constant contradiction between knowledge and action, and who, despite fully understanding theory, never manage to lift their floundering characters upright. No one consumes the fruit of the tree of knowledge quite like they do; in terms of moral insight, compared to them, the orderly and successful people they criticize are like naive children. Yet their moral understanding, always grumbling and rumbling in the background—perceiving, commenting, protesting, yearning, half-resolving—never fully resolves, never transitions from a minor key to a major one, or from a subjunctive mood to an imperative one, never breaks the spell, never takes control. In figures like Rousseau and Restif, it seems as if the lower motives hold all the driving power. Like trains with the right of way, they dominate the track. The more ideal motives abundantly exist alongside them, but they’re never activated, and a person's behavior is influenced no more by them than an express train is by a traveler on the roadside calling to be picked up. They serve as an inert background to the end of time; and the feeling of internal emptiness that comes from habitually seeing the better only to choose the worse is one of the saddest burdens one can carry through this vale of tears.
Effort feels like an original force. We now see at one view when it is that effort complicates volition. It does so whenever a rarer and more ideal impulse is called upon to neutralize others of a more instinctive and habitual kind; it does so whenever strongly explosive tendencies are checked, or strongly obstructive conditions overcome. The âme bien née, the child of the sunshine, at whose birth the fairies made their gifts, does not need much of it in{443} his life. The hero and the neurotic subject, on the other hand, do. Now our spontaneous way of conceiving the effort, under all these circumstances, is as an active force adding its strength to that of the motives which ultimately prevail. When outer forces impinge upon a body, we say that the resultant motion is in the line of least resistance, or of greatest traction. But it is a curious fact that our spontaneous language never speaks of volition with effort in this way. Of course if we proceed a priori and define the line of least resistance as the line that is followed, the physical law must also hold good in the mental sphere. But we feel, in all hard cases of volition, as if the line taken, when the rarer and more ideal motives prevail, were the line of greater resistance, and as if the line of coarser motivation were the more pervious and easy one, even at the very moment when we refuse to follow it. He who under the surgeon's knife represses cries of pain, or he who exposes himself to social obloquy for duty's sake, feels as if he were following the line of greatest temporary resistance. He speaks of conquering and overcoming his impulses and temptations.
Effort feels like a natural force. We can now easily see how effort complicates our will. It happens whenever a more rare and ideal impulse needs to counteract more instinctive and habitual urges; it happens whenever strong explosive tendencies are held back, or strongly obstructive conditions are overcome. The âme bien née, the child of the sunshine, blessed by fairies at birth, doesn’t need much of it in{443} their life. The hero and the neurotic, however, definitely do. Our instinctual way of thinking about effort, in all these situations, is as an active force that adds its power to the motives that eventually win out. When external forces act on a body, we say that the resulting motion follows the path of least resistance or greatest traction. But it’s interesting that our natural language never describes willpower and effort in this manner. If we take a logical approach and define the path of least resistance as the one that is followed, the physical law should also apply to the mental realm. Yet we feel, in all tough cases of will, that the path taken, when the rarer and more ideal motives prevail, is actually the path of greater resistance, while the path of coarser motivation seems more accessible and easier, even when we choose not to take it. Someone who holds back cries of pain under the surgeon's knife, or who faces societal scorn for the sake of duty, feels like they are following the path of greatest temporary resistance. They talk about conquering and overcoming their impulses and temptations.
But the sluggard, the drunkard, the coward, never talk of their conduct in that way, or say they resist their energy, overcome their sobriety, conquer their courage, and so forth. If in general we class all springs of action as propensities on the one hand and ideals on the other, the sensualist never says of his behavior that it results from a victory over his ideals, but the moralist always speaks of his as a victory over his propensities. The sensualist uses terms of inactivity, says he forgets his ideals, is deaf to duty, and so forth; which terms seem to imply that the ideal motives per se can be annulled without energy or effort, and that the strongest mere traction lies in the line of the propensities. The ideal impulse appears, in comparison with this, a still small voice which must be artificially reinforced to prevail. Effort is what reinforces it, making things seem as if, while the force of propensity{444} were essentially a fixed quantity, the ideal force might be of various amount. But what determines the amount of the effort when, by its aid, an ideal motive becomes victorious over a great sensual resistance? The very greatness of the resistance itself. If the sensual propensity is small, the effort is small. The latter is made great by the presence of a great antagonist to overcome. And if a brief definition of ideal or moral action were required, none could be given which would better fit the appearances than this: It is action in the line of the greatest resistance.
But the lazy person, the drunk, and the coward never talk about their behavior that way, nor do they say they are resisting their energy, overcoming their sobriety, conquering their courage, and so on. Generally, if we categorize all motivations as either urges on one side and ideals on the other, the hedonist never claims that their actions stem from a triumph over their ideals, while the moralist always frames theirs as a victory over their urges. The hedonist uses terms that imply passivity, saying they forget their ideals, ignore their responsibilities, and so forth; these terms suggest that ideal motivations can be disregarded without any energy or effort, and that the strongest draw is toward the urges. The ideal impulse, in contrast, seems like a quiet voice that needs extra support to be heard. Effort is what bolsters this impulse, creating the impression that while the force of urges is essentially a constant, the ideal force can vary in strength. But what dictates the level of effort required when, with that effort, an ideal motive triumphs over significant sensual resistance? It's the very magnitude of the resistance itself. If the sensual urge is weak, the effort is correspondingly weak. The effort becomes significant when there is a strong opponent to overcome. And if a concise definition of ideal or moral action were needed, none would describe the situation better than this: It is action in the face of the greatest resistance.
The facts may be most briefly symbolized thus, P standing for the propensity, I for the ideal impulse, and E for the effort:
The facts can be summarized like this: P stands for propensity, I for ideal impulse, and E for effort:
I per se | < | P. |
I + E | > | P. |
In other words, if E adds itself to I, P immediately offers the least resistance, and motion occurs in spite of it.
In other words, if E combines with I, P quickly provides the least resistance, and movement happens regardless.
But the E does not seem to form an integral part of the I. It appears adventitious and indeterminate in advance. We can make more or less as we please, and if we make enough we can convert the greatest mental resistance into the least. Such, at least, is the impression which the facts spontaneously produce upon us. But we will not discuss the truth of this impression at present; let us rather continue our descriptive detail.
But the E doesn’t seem to be a crucial part of the I. It looks random and uncertain from the start. We can create it to a greater or lesser extent as we wish, and if we create enough, we can turn the greatest mental resistance into the least. That’s the impression the facts give us. However, we won’t dive into whether this impression is true right now; instead, let’s keep going with our detailed description.
Pleasure and Pain as Springs of Action.—Objects and thoughts of objects start our action, but the pleasures and pains which action brings modify its course and regulate it; and later the thoughts of the pleasures and the pains acquire themselves impulsive and inhibitive power. Not that the thought of a pleasure need be itself a pleasure, usually it is the reverse—nessun maggior dolore—as Dante says—and not that the thought of pain need be a pain, for, as Homer says, "griefs are often afterwards an entertainment." But as present pleasures are tremendous reinforcers, and present pains tremendous inhibitors of whatever{445} action leads to them, so the thoughts of pleasures and pains take rank amongst the thoughts which have most impulsive and inhibitive power. The precise relation which these thoughts hold to other thoughts is thus a matter demanding some attention.
Pleasure and Pain as Motivators.—Objects and ideas associated with them initiate our actions, but the pleasure and pain that come from those actions shape their direction and control them; later, the memories of those pleasures and pains gain their own power to motivate or restrain. The thought of a pleasure doesn’t have to feel pleasurable; often, it feels quite the opposite—nessun maggior dolore—as Dante puts it—and the thought of pain doesn’t have to feel painful, because, as Homer says, “griefs are often later a source of entertainment.” However, since immediate pleasures are powerful motivators and immediate pains are strong deterrents to whatever {445} action leads to them, the thoughts of pleasures and pains rank among the thoughts with the greatest ability to motivate or inhibit behavior. The specific relationship that these thoughts have with other thoughts is an important topic to explore.
If a movement feels agreeable, we repeat and repeat it as long as the pleasure lasts. If it hurts us, our muscular contractions at the instant stop. So complete is the inhibition in this latter case that it is almost impossible for a man to cut or mutilate himself slowly and deliberately—his hand invincibly refusing to bring on the pain. And there are many pleasures which, when once we have begun to taste them, make it all but obligatory to keep up the activity to which they are due. So widespread and searching is this influence of pleasures and pains upon our movements that a premature philosophy has decided that these are our only spurs to action, and that wherever they seem to be absent, it is only because they are so far on among the 'remoter' images that prompt the action that they are overlooked.
If a movement feels good, we keep doing it as long as it feels nice. If it hurts, our muscles instantly stop contracting. The stopping is so complete that it's almost impossible for someone to deliberately hurt themselves slowly—his hand will instinctively refuse to cause pain. Many pleasures, once we start to enjoy them, make it feel necessary to continue the activity that brings them. The effect of pleasures and pains on our actions is so extensive that some philosophers have concluded that these are our only motivations for acting, and that when they seem absent, it's just that they are so buried among the 'remoter' images that trigger the action that we don’t notice them.
This is a great mistake, however. Important as is the influence of pleasures and pains upon our movements, they are far from being our only stimuli. With the manifestations of instinct and emotional expression, for example, they have absolutely nothing to do. Who smiles for the pleasure of the smiling, or frowns for the pleasure of the frown? Who blushes to escape the discomfort of not blushing? Or who in anger, grief, or fear is actuated to the movements which he makes by the pleasures which they yield? In all these cases the movements are discharged fatally by the vis a tergo which the stimulus exerts upon a nervous system framed to respond in just that way. The objects of our rage, love, or terror, the occasions of our tears and smiles, whether they be present to our senses, or whether they be merely represented in idea, have this peculiar sort of impulsive power. The{446} impulsive quality of mental states is an attribute behind which we cannot go. Some states of mind have more of it than others, some have it in this direction and some in that. Feelings of pleasure and pain have it, and perceptions and imaginations of fact have it, but neither have it exclusively or peculiarly. It is of the essence of all consciousness (or of the neural process which underlies it) to instigate movement of some sort. That with one creature and object it should be of one sort, with others of another sort, is a problem for evolutionary history to explain. However the actual impulsions may have arisen, they must now be described as they exist; and those persons obey a curiously narrow teleological superstition who think themselves bound to interpret them in every instance as effects of the secret solicitancy of pleasure and repugnancy of pain. If the thought of pleasure can impel to action, surely other thoughts may. Experience only can decide which thoughts do. The chapters on Instinct and Emotion have shown us that their name is legion; and with this verdict we ought to remain contented, and not seek an illusory simplification at the cost of half the facts.
This is a significant mistake, though. While the effects of pleasure and pain on our actions are important, they are far from our only motivators. For example, instinct and emotional expression have nothing to do with them. Who smiles just for the enjoyment of smiling, or frowns for the joy of frowning? Who blushes to avoid the discomfort of not blushing? Or who, in anger, sadness, or fear, is driven to act by the pleasure those emotions create? In all these situations, actions are triggered by the vis a tergo that the stimulus exerts on a nervous system designed to respond this way. The targets of our anger, love, or fear, and the reasons for our tears and smiles—whether they are real or just imagined—have this unique sort of impulsive power. The{446} impulsive quality of mental states is something we can't ignore. Some mental states have more of this quality than others; some exhibit it in one way and some in another. Feelings of pleasure and pain possess this quality, as do perceptions and thoughts about facts, but neither has it exclusively. It's inherent to all consciousness (or the neural processes behind it) to prompt some kind of movement. Why certain creatures and objects provoke one type of action while others evoke a different type remains a question for evolutionary history to solve. No matter how these impulses originated, we must describe them as they are now; those who think they must interpret them solely as responses to hidden urges of pleasure and pain follow a strangely limited belief. If the thought of pleasure can drive us to act, surely other thoughts can too. Only experience can determine which thoughts lead to action. The chapters on Instinct and Emotion have shown that there are many variations; we should accept this conclusion and avoid attempting to oversimplify at the cost of important truths.
If in these our first acts pleasures and pains bear no part, as little do they bear in our last acts, or those artificially acquired performances which have become habitual. All the daily routine of life, our dressing and undressing, the coming and going from our work or carrying through of its various operations, is utterly without mental reference to pleasure and pain, except under rarely realized conditions. It is ideo-motor action. As I do not breathe for the pleasure of the breathing, but simply find that I am breathing, so I do not write for the pleasure of the writing, but simply because I have once begun, and being in a state of intellectual excitement which keeps venting itself in that way, find that I am writing still. Who will pretend that when he idly fingers his knife-handle at the table, it is for the sake of any pleasure which it gives him, or pain which he thereby avoids? We do all these things{447} because at the moment we cannot help it; our nervous systems are so shaped that they overflow in just that way; and for many of our idle or purely 'nervous' and fidgety performances we can assign absolutely no reason at all.
If in these our first actions pleasure and pain play no role, then neither do they in our final actions, or in those performances we've developed into habits. The daily routine of life—getting dressed and undressed, going to and from work or completing its various tasks—is completely detached from any consideration of pleasure and pain, except in very rare circumstances. It’s ideo-motor action. Just as I don’t breathe for the pleasure of breathing but simply notice that I am breathing, I don’t write for the enjoyment of writing but because I started and, in a state of intellectual excitement that keeps expressing itself this way, I find that I am still writing. Who would claim that when idly fiddling with the handle of a knife at the table, it's for any pleasure it brings or pain it helps avoid? We do all these things{447} simply because we can't help it in that moment; our nervous systems are wired in such a way that they overflow like that. For many of our idle or purely 'nervous' and restless behaviors, we can assign no reason at all.
Or what shall be said of a shy and unsociable man who receives point-blank an invitation to a small party? The thing is to him an abomination; but your presence exerts a compulsion on him, he can think of no excuse, and so says yes, cursing himself the while for what he does. He is unusually sui compos who does not every week of his life fall into some such blundering act as this. Such instances of voluntas invita show not only that our acts cannot all be conceived as effects of represented pleasure, but that they cannot even be classed as cases of represented good. The class 'goods' contains many more generally influential motives to action than the class 'pleasants.' But almost as little as under the form of pleasures do our acts invariably appear to us under the form of goods. All diseased impulses and pathological fixed ideas are instances to the contrary. It is the very badness of the act that gives it then its vertiginous fascination. Remove the prohibition, and the attraction stops. In my university days a student threw himself from an upper entry window of one of the college buildings and was nearly killed. Another student, a friend of my own, had to pass the window daily in coming and going from his room, and experienced a dreadful temptation to imitate the deed. Being a Catholic, he told his director, who said, 'All right! if you must, you must,' and added, 'Go ahead and do it,' thereby instantly quenching his desire. This director knew how to minister to a mind diseased. But we need not go to minds diseased for examples of the occasional tempting-power of simple badness and unpleasantness as such. Every one who has a wound or hurt anywhere, a sore tooth, e.g., will ever and anon press it just to bring out the pain. If we are near a new sort of stink, we must sniff it again just to verify once more how bad it is.{448} This very day I have been repeating over and over to myself a verbal jingle whose mawkish silliness was the secret of its haunting power. I loathed yet could not banish it.
Or what can we say about a shy and unsocial guy who gets a direct invitation to a small gathering? The idea disgusts him; however, your presence puts pressure on him, he can't come up with an excuse, so he reluctantly agrees, cursing himself all the while for saying yes. It's pretty rare to find someone who doesn’t, at least once a week, stumble into a situation like this. Examples of unwilling consent show us that our actions can’t always be seen as resulting from anticipated pleasure, and they can’t even be categorized as examples of perceived good. The category of 'goods' has a lot more broad motivations for action compared to 'pleasants.' But even less often do our actions seem to us as genuine 'goods' rather than just fleeting pleasures. All kinds of unhealthy urges and fixed ideas contradict that notion. It’s the very negativity of the act that provides a weird sort of appeal. Take away the prohibition, and the allure vanishes. Back in college, a student jumped from an upper window of one of the buildings and almost died. Another student, a friend of mine, had to pass that window every day coming to and from his room and felt a terrible urge to do the same. Being Catholic, he confided in his director, who said, 'Okay! If you really need to, go ahead,' and added, 'Just do it,' which immediately killed his desire. This director knew how to help someone struggling with unhealthy thoughts. But we don’t have to look at troubled minds to find examples of how simple things being bad or unpleasant can tempt us. Anyone with a wound or injury, like a toothache, will often poke at it just to feel the pain. If we encounter a new kind of awful smell, we have to sniff it again to really confirm how bad it is.{448} Just today, I’ve been repeating a silly little rhyme to myself whose annoying absurdity was what made it so hard to shake off. I hated it but couldn’t make it go away.
What holds attention determines action. If one must have a single name for the condition upon which the impulsive and inhibitive quality of objects depends, one had better call it their interest. 'The interesting' is a title which covers not only the pleasant and the painful, but also the morbidly fascinating, the tediously haunting, and even the simply habitual, inasmuch as the attention usually travels on habitual lines, and what-we-attend-to and what-interests-us are synonymous terms. It seems as if we ought to look for the secret of an idea's impulsiveness, not in any peculiar relations which it may have with paths of motor discharge,—for all ideas have relations with some such paths,—but rather in a preliminary phenomenon, the urgency, namely, with which it is able to compel attention and dominate in consciousness. Let it once so dominate, let no other ideas succeed in displacing it, and whatever motor effects belong to it by nature will inevitably occur—its impulsion, in short, will be given to boot, and will manifest itself as a matter of course. This is what we have seen in instinct, in emotion, in common ideo-motor action, in hypnotic suggestion, in morbid impulsion, and in voluntas invita,—the impelling idea is simply the one which possesses the attention. It is the same where pleasure and pain are the motor spurs—they drive other thoughts from consciousness at the same time that they instigate their own characteristic 'volitional' effects. And this is also what happens at the moment of the fiat, in all the five types of 'decision' which we have described. In short, one does not see any case in which the steadfast occupancy of consciousness does not appear to be the prime condition of impulsive power. It is still more obviously the prime condition of inhibitive power. What checks our impulses is the mere thinking of reasons to the contrary{449}—it is their bare presence to the mind which gives the veto, and makes acts, otherwise seductive, impossible to perform. If we could only forget our scruples, our doubts, our fears, what exultant energy we should for a while display!
What captures our attention dictates our actions. If we had to sum up the condition that influences both the impulsive and inhibitory nature of things, we should simply call it their interest. "The interesting" refers not only to what is enjoyable and what is painful, but also to what is morbidly captivating, annoyingly persistent, and even just habitual. Our attention tends to follow habitual patterns, so what we pay attention to and what interests us are essentially the same thing. It seems that to understand why an idea compels us, we should focus not on any specific connections it might have with motor responses—because all ideas relate to some motor pathways—but rather on a preliminary factor: the urgency with which it captures our attention and controls our consciousness. Once it takes control, if no other ideas manage to push it aside, whatever natural motor responses it carries will inevitably follow—its drive will happen automatically and will show itself easily. This is evident in instincts, emotions, common ideomotor actions, hypnotic suggestions, morbid drives, and in voluntas invita: the driving idea is simply the one that holds our attention. The same goes for pleasure and pain as motivating factors—they push other thoughts out of our awareness while they provoke their own distinctive 'volitional' effects. This is also what occurs at the moment of the fiat, in all five types of 'decision' we've outlined. In short, there seems to be no instance where a sustained presence in our consciousness isn't the key element of impulsive power. It's even more clear that it's the primary factor for inhibitive power. What stops our impulses is merely considering opposing reasons{449}—the simple fact of these reasons being present in our minds grants the veto, making otherwise tempting actions impossible to carry out. If only we could forget our scruples, doubts, and fears, what vibrant energy we would show for a while!
Will is a relation between the mind and its 'ideas.' In closing in, therefore, after all these preliminaries, upon the more intimate nature of the volitional process, we find ourselves driven more and more exclusively to consider the conditions which make ideas prevail in the mind. With the prevalence, once there as a fact, of the motive idea, the psychology of volition properly stops. The movements which ensue are exclusively physiological phenomena, following according to physiological laws upon the neural events to which the idea corresponds. The willing terminates with the prevalence of the idea; and whether the act then follows or not is a matter quite immaterial, so far as the willing itself goes. I will to write, and the act follows. I will to sneeze, and it does not. I will that the distant table slide over the floor towards me; it also does not. My willing representation can no more instigate my sneezing-centre than it can instigate the table to activity. But in both cases it is as true and good willing as it was when I willed to write. In a word, volition is a psychic or moral fact pure and simple, and is absolutely completed when the stable state of the idea is there. The supervention of motion is a supernumerary phenomenon depending on executive ganglia whose function lies outside the mind. If the ganglia work duly, the act occurs perfectly. If they work, but work wrongly, we have St. Vitus's dance, locomotor ataxy, motor aphasia, or minor degrees of awkwardness. If they don't work at all, the act fails altogether, and we say the man is paralyzed. He may make a tremendous effort, and contract the other muscles of the body, but the paralyzed limb fails to move. In all these cases, however, the volition considered as a psychic process is intact.{450}
Will is a relationship between the mind and its 'ideas.' So, after all this discussion about the volitional process itself, we must focus on the conditions that help ideas dominate in the mind. Once the motive idea is firmly established, the psychology of will essentially concludes. The actions that follow are purely physiological events, occurring according to physiological laws in response to the neural events related to the idea. The willing ends when the idea is dominant; whether or not the action happens afterward is irrelevant to the willing itself. I choose to write, and the action follows. I choose to sneeze, and it doesn’t happen. I wish for the distant table to slide toward me; it doesn’t happen either. My intention to sneeze cannot trigger my sneezing reflex any more than it can get the table to move. But in both situations, my willing is just as genuine as when I intended to write. In short, volition is simply a psychological or moral fact, and it is fully realized when the idea is stable. The occurrence of movement is an additional phenomenon that depends on executive ganglia outside of the mind. If the ganglia function properly, the action occurs seamlessly. If they function but malfunction, we see conditions like St. Vitus's dance, locomotor ataxia, motor aphasia, or varying degrees of clumsiness. If they don’t function at all, then the action doesn’t happen, leading us to say the person is paralyzed. They may exert a tremendous effort and tense other muscles, but the paralyzed limb remains still. However, in all these cases, the volition as a psychological process remains intact.{450}
Volitional effort is effort of attention. We thus find that we reach the heart of our inquiry into volition when we ask by what process it is that the thought of any given action comes to prevail stably in the mind. Where thoughts prevail without effort, we have sufficiently studied in the several chapters on Sensation, Association, and Attention, the laws of their advent before consciousness and of their stay. We shall not go over that ground again, for we know that interest and association are the words, let their worth be what it may, on which our explanations must perforce rely. Where, on the other hand, the prevalence of the thought is accompanied by the phenomenon of effort, the case is much less clear. Already in the chapter on Attention we postponed the final consideration of voluntary attention with effort to a later place. We have now brought things to a point at which we see that attention with effort is all that any case of volition implies. The essential achievement of the will, in short, when it is most 'voluntary,' is to attend to a difficult object and hold it fast before the mind. The so-doing is the fiat; and it is a mere physiological incident that when the object is thus attended to, immediate motor consequences should ensue.
Volitional effort is the effort of focusing attention. We find that we truly get to the core of our exploration into volition when we ask how it is that the thought of a specific action comes to dominate our minds consistently. Where thoughts come to the forefront without effort, we have adequately covered in the various chapters on Sensation, Association, and Attention the rules of how they arise in consciousness and how they persist. We won't revisit that topic since we know that interest and association are the fundamental concepts, regardless of their value, upon which our explanations must depend. However, when the dominance of a thought involves the experience of effort, the situation is much less straightforward. As noted in the chapter on Attention, we deferred the final discussion of voluntary attention with effort to a later point. We've now reached a stage where we recognize that attention with effort is all that any instance of volition entails. Essentially, the primary function of the will, particularly when it is most 'voluntary,' is to focus on a challenging object and maintain that focus in the mind. This action is the fiat; and it is simply a physiological occurrence that when the object is being focused on, immediate motor responses follow.
Effort of attention is thus the essential phenomenon of will.[55] Every reader must know by his own experience{451} that this is so, for every reader must have felt some fiery passion's grasp. What constitutes the difficulty for a man laboring under an unwise passion of acting as if the passion were wise? Certainly there is no physical difficulty. It is as easy physically to avoid a fight as to begin one, to pocket one's money as to squander it on one's cupidities, to walk away from as towards a coquette's door. The difficulty is mental: it is that of getting the idea of the wise action to stay before our mind at all. When any strong emotional state whatever is upon us, the tendency is for no images but such as are congruous with it to come up. If others by chance offer themselves, they are instantly smothered and crowded out. If we be joyous, we cannot keep thinking of those uncertainties and risks of failure which abound upon our path; if lugubrious, we cannot think of new triumphs, travels, loves, and joys; nor if vengeful, of our oppressor's community of nature with ourselves. The cooling advice which we get from others when the fever-fit is on us is the most jarring and exasperating thing in life. Reply we cannot, so we get angry; for by a sort of self-preserving instinct which our passion has, it feels that these chill objects, if they once but gain a lodgment, will work and work until they have frozen the very vital spark from out of all our mood and brought our airy castles in ruin to the ground. Such is the inevitable effect of reasonable ideas over others—if they can once get a quiet hearing; and passion's cue accordingly is always and everywhere to prevent their still small voice from being heard at all. "Let me not think of that! Don't speak to me of that!" This is the sudden cry of all those who in a passion perceive some sobering considerations about to check them in mid-career. There is something so icy in this cold-water bath, something which seems so hostile to{452} the movement of our life, so purely negative, in Reason, when she lays her corpse-like finger on our heart and says, "Halt! give up! leave off! go back! sit down!" that it is no wonder that to most men the steadying influence seems, for the time being, a very minister of death.
The effort of attention is the key aspect of will.[55] Every reader knows from experience{451} that this is true, because every reader has felt the grip of some intense passion. What makes it hard for someone caught up in a foolish passion to act as if the passion were wise? Clearly, there’s no physical challenge. It’s just as easy physically to walk away from a fight as to start one, to save your money as to spend it on your desires, to step away from a flirt’s door as to step toward it. The real challenge is mental: it’s about keeping the idea of the wise action in our minds. When we’re in the grip of any strong emotion, we tend to only think of things that go along with that feeling. If different thoughts pop up, they get quickly pushed aside. If we’re happy, we can’t focus on the uncertainties and risks of failure that lie ahead; if we’re feeling down, we can’t think about new successes, travels, loves, and joys; and if we’re angry, we can’t consider our oppressor’s similarities to ourselves. The rational advice we receive from others when we’re in a passionate state is the most frustrating thing ever. We can't respond, which makes us angry; it’s like our passion has a self-preserving instinct, sensing that these calm ideas, if they gain even a moment’s foothold, will chip away at our mood, ultimately destroying our dreams. This is the unavoidable effect of reasonable ideas over others—if they can ever get a quiet audience; thus, passion's goal is always to block that quiet voice from being heard. "I don’t want to think about that! Don’t talk to me about that!" This is the immediate response of anyone who, in their passion, senses some sobering thoughts trying to interrupt them. There’s something so chilling in this sudden reality check, something that feels so opposing to{452} our drive in life, so purely negative, when reason reaches out and says, "Stop! Give up! Quit! Go back! Sit down!" It's no surprise that for many, this steadying influence feels, in that moment, like a true agent of death.
The strong-willed man, however, is the man who hears the still small voice unflinchingly, and who, when the death-bringing consideration comes, looks at its face, consents to its presence, clings to it, affirms it, and holds it fast, in spite of the host of exciting mental images which rise in revolt against it and would expel it from the mind. Sustained in this way by a resolute effort of attention, the difficult object erelong begins to call up its own congeners and associates and ends by changing the disposition of the man's consciousness altogether. And with his consciousness his action changes, for the new object, once stably in possession of the field of his thoughts, infallibly produces its own motor effects. The difficulty lies in the gaining possession of that field. Though the spontaneous drift of thought is all the other way, the attention must be kept strained on that one object until at last it grows, so as to maintain itself before the mind with ease. This strain of the attention is the fundamental act of will. And the will's work is in most cases practically ended when the bare presence to our thought of the naturally unwelcome object has been secured. For the mysterious tie between the thought and the motor centres next comes into play, and, in a way which we cannot even guess at, the obedience of the bodily organs follows as a matter of course.
The strong-willed person, however, is someone who hears the quiet inner voice without flinching, and when the harsh reality of death arises, they face it head-on, accept its presence, hold on to it, affirm it, and keep it close, despite a flood of distracting thoughts that oppose it and try to push it away. With a determined focus, the challenging thought soon begins to attract similar ideas and eventually completely alters the person's state of mind. And as their mindset shifts, their actions change as well, because once the new thought firmly occupies their mind, it inevitably leads to corresponding responses. The challenge lies in claiming that mental space. Even though the natural tendency of thought drifts in the opposite direction, one must keep their attention focused on that single idea until it becomes strong enough to easily remain in their thoughts. This focused attention is the essential act of will. In most cases, the will's job is nearly done once the challenging thought is firmly established in our mind. Then, the mysterious connection between thought and the body's motor functions comes into play, and in a way we can’t even fully understand, the body responds automatically.
In all this one sees how the immediate point of application of the volitional effort lies exclusively in the mental world. The whole drama is a mental drama. The whole difficulty is a mental difficulty, a difficulty with an ideal object of our thought. It is, in one word, an idea to which our will applies itself, an idea which if we let it go would slip away, but which we will not let go. Consent to the idea's undivided presence, this is effort's sole achievement.{453} Its only function is to get this feeling of consent into the mind. And for this there is but one way. The idea to be consented to must be kept from flickering and going out. It must be held steadily before the mind until it fills the mind. Such filling of the mind by an idea, with its congruous associates, is consent to the idea and to the fact which the idea represents. If the idea be that, or include that, of a bodily movement of our own, then we call the consent thus laboriously gained a motor volition. For Nature here 'backs' us instantaneously and follows up our inward willingness by outward changes on her own part. She does this in no other instance. Pity she should not have been more generous, nor made a world whose other parts were as immediately subject to our will!
In all this, you can see that the immediate focus of our will is entirely in the mental realm. The entire situation is a mental one. The challenge we face is a mental challenge, centered around an ideal thought. In short, it’s an idea that our will engages with, an idea that, if we were to let it go, would fade away, but which we refuse to release. Agreeing to the idea’s uninterrupted presence is the only goal of our effort.{453} Its sole purpose is to bring this feeling of agreement into the mind. And there’s only one way to do this. The idea we need to agree to must be kept from flickering and disappearing. It must be held firmly in front of the mind until it fills the mind. This filling of the mind with an idea and its related thoughts is agreement to the idea and to the reality that the idea represents. If the idea involves, or includes, a physical movement of our own, we call the agreement we’ve painstakingly achieved a motor volition. Here, Nature instantly supports us and follows our internal willingness with external changes on her part. She doesn’t do this in any other case. It’s a pity she couldn’t have been more generous, or created a world where other aspects were as immediately influenced by our will!
On page 430, in describing the 'reasonable type' of decision, it was said that it usually came when the right conception of the case was found. Where, however, the right conception is an anti-impulsive one, the whole intellectual ingenuity of the man usually goes to work to crowd it out of sight, and to find for the emergency names by the help of which the dispositions of the moment may sound sanctified, and sloth or passion may reign unchecked. How many excuses does the drunkard find when each new temptation comes! It is a new brand of liquor which the interests of intellectual culture in such matters oblige him to test; moreover it is poured out and it is sin to waste it; also others are drinking and it would be churlishness to refuse. Or it is but to enable him to sleep, or just to get through this job of work; or it isn't drinking, it is because he feels so cold; or it is Christmas-day; or it is a means of stimulating him to make a more powerful resolution in favor of abstinence than any he has hitherto made; or it is just this once, and once doesn't count, etc., etc., ad libitum—it is, in fact, anything you like except being a drunkard. That is the conception that will not stay before the poor soul's attention. But if he once gets able to pick out that way of conceiving, from all the other possible{454} ways of conceiving the various opportunities which occur, if through thick and thin he holds to it that this is being a drunkard and is nothing else, he is not likely to remain one long. The effort by which he succeeds in keeping the right name unwaveringly present to his mind proves to be his saving moral act.
On page 430, when discussing the 'reasonable type' of decision, it was noted that it usually appears once the right understanding of the situation is found. However, when that understanding runs counter to impulsive behavior, a person's intellect tends to work hard to suppress it, and to create justifications that make their current actions seem acceptable, allowing laziness or passion to take over. How many excuses does an alcoholic come up with each time a new temptation arises! It’s a new kind of alcohol that their intellectual interests compel them to try; moreover, it’s being poured out, and wasting it would be a sin; besides, others are drinking, and saying no would be rude. Or it’s just to help them sleep or to get through a task; or it’s not really drinking, it’s because they feel so cold; or it’s Christmas Day; or it’s a way to encourage them to make a stronger commitment to abstain than any they’ve made before; or it’s just this one time, and one time doesn’t count, etc., etc., ad libitum—in reality, it’s anything but being a drunkard. That is the idea that refuses to stay in the struggling person's mind. But if they manage to focus on that understanding, separating it from all the other ways to interpret the various moments they face, and if they consistently remind themselves that this is being a drunkard and nothing else, they’re unlikely to remain one for long. The effort to keep that clear name firmly in their mind turns out to be their saving moral act.
Everywhere, then, the function of the effort is the same: to keep affirming and adopting a thought which, if left to itself, would slip away. It may be cold and flat when the spontaneous mental drift is towards excitement, or great and arduous when the spontaneous drift is towards repose. In the one case the effort has to inhibit an explosive, in the other to arouse an obstructed will. The exhausted sailor on a wreck has a will which is obstructed. One of his ideas is that of his sore hands, of the nameless exhaustion of his whole frame which the act of farther pumping involves, and of the deliciousness of sinking into sleep. The other is that of the hungry sea ingulfing him. "Rather the aching toil!" he says; and it becomes reality then, in spite of the inhibiting influence of the relatively luxurious sensations which he gets from lying still. Often again it may be the thought of sleep and what leads to it which is the hard one to keep before the mind. If a patient afflicted with insomnia can only control the whirling chase of his ideas so far as to think of nothing at all (which can be done), or so far as to imagine one letter after another of a verse of Scripture or poetry spelt slowly and monotonously out, it is almost certain that here, too, specific bodily effects will follow, and that sleep will come. The trouble is to keep the mind upon a train of objects naturally so insipid. To sustain a representation, to think, is, in short, the only moral act, for the impulsive and the obstructed, for sane and lunatics alike. Most maniacs know their thoughts to be crazy, but find them too pressing to be withstood. Compared with them the sane truths are so deadly sober, so cadaverous, that the lunatic cannot bear to look them in the face and say,{455} "Let these alone be my reality!" But with sufficient effort, as Dr. Wigan says, "Such a man can for a time wind himself up, as it were, and determine that the notions of the disordered brain shall not be manifested. Many instances are on record similar to that told by Pinel, where an inmate of the Bicêtre, having stood a long cross-examination, and given every mark of restored reason, signed his name to the paper authorizing his discharge 'Jesus Christ,' and then went off into all the vagaries connected with that delusion. In the phraseology of the gentleman whose case is related in an early part of this [Wigan's] work he had 'held himself tight' during the examination in order to attain his object; this once accomplished he 'let himself down' again, and, if even conscious of his delusion, could not control it. I have observed with such persons that it requires a considerable time to wind themselves up to the pitch of complete self-control, that the effort is a painful tension of the mind.... When thrown off their guard by any accidental remark or worn out by the length of the examination, they let themselves go, and cannot gather themselves up again without preparation."
Everywhere, then, the purpose of the effort is the same: to keep confirming and adopting a thought that, if left alone, would fade away. It might feel dull and lifeless when the natural mental drift is toward excitement, or it can feel significant and tough when the natural drift is toward rest. In one situation, the effort has to suppress an explosive urge; in the other, it needs to stimulate a blocked will. The tired sailor on a wrecked ship has a will that's hindered. One of his thoughts is about his sore hands, the unnamed exhaustion of his entire body that pumping more would cause, and the bliss of sinking into sleep. The other thought is of the hungry sea swallowing him. “I’d rather deal with the painful effort!” he thinks; and in that moment, it becomes a reality, despite the tempting feelings of comfort he gets from lying still. Sometimes it’s the thought of sleep and what leads to it that’s the hardest to keep in mind. If a person suffering from insomnia can manage to control the swirling rush of their thoughts to think of nothing at all (which can be done), or to visualize one letter after another from a verse of Scripture or poetry slowly and monotonously, it’s almost guaranteed that specific bodily reactions will follow, and that sleep will come. The challenge is to keep the mind focused on such naturally bland objects. To maintain a representation, to think, is fundamentally the only moral action, whether for the impulsive or the restrained, for the sane and the insane alike. Most mentally unstable individuals recognize their thoughts are irrational, but feel too compelled by them to resist. In comparison, the rational truths are so painfully sober and lifeless that the mentally ill can’t bear to confront them and say, {455} “Let these be my reality!” But with enough effort, as Dr. Wigan says, “Such a person can, for a while, wound themselves up, so to speak, and decide that the thoughts of their disordered mind won’t take hold. Many cases are documented similar to the story told by Pinel, where an inmate at the Bicêtre, after enduring a long questioning and showing every sign of regained sanity, signed the discharge paper as 'Jesus Christ,' and then slipped back into all the peculiarities tied to that delusion. In the words of the gentleman described in an earlier part of this [Wigan's] work, he ‘held himself together’ during the examination to achieve his goal; once that was done, he ‘let himself down’ again and, even if he was aware of his delusion, couldn’t control it. I've noticed with such individuals that it takes quite a while to pull themselves up to complete self-control; it’s a painful strain on the mind... When caught off guard by an unintended comment or worn out from the lengthy questioning, they let themselves go and can’t gather themselves again without some preparation.”
To sum it all up in a word, the terminus of the psychological process in volition, the point to which the will is directly applied, is always an idea. There are at all times some ideas from which we shy away like frightened horses the moment we get a glimpse of their forbidding profile upon the threshold of our thought. The only resistance which our will can possibly experience is the resistance which such an idea offers to being attended to at all. To attend to it is the volitional act, and the only inward volitional act which we ever perform.
To sum it all up in one word, the endpoint of the psychological process in decision-making, the moment where our will is directly focused, is always an idea. There are always some ideas that we avoid like scared horses as soon as we see their intimidating shape at the edge of our thoughts. The only pushback our will can ever face is the resistance that such an idea presents to even being noticed. Paying attention to it is the act of will, and it's the only internal act of will we ever really perform.
The Question of 'Free-will.'—As was remarked on p. 443, in the experience of effort we feel as if we might make more or less than we actually at any moment are making.
The Question of 'Free-will.'—As was noted on p. 443, in the experience of effort, it feels like we could be doing more or less than we actually are at any given moment.
The effort appears, in other words, not as a fixed reaction on our part which the object that resists us necessarily calls forth, but as what the mathematicians call an 'independent{456} variable' amongst the fixed data of the case, our motives, character, etc. If it be really so, if the amount of our effort is not a determinate function of those other data, then, in common parlance, our wills are free. If, on the contrary, the amount of effort be a fixed function, so that whatever object at any time fills our consciousness was from eternity bound to fill it then and there, and compel from us the exact effort, neither more nor less, which we bestow upon it,—then our wills are not free, and all our acts are foreordained. The question of fact in the free-will controversy is thus extremely simple. It relates solely to the amount of effort of attention which we can at any time put forth. Are the duration and intensity of this effort fixed functions of the object, or are they not? Now, as I just said, it seems as if we might exert more or less in any given case. When a man has let his thoughts go for days and weeks until at last they culminate in some particularly dirty or cowardly or cruel act, it is hard to persuade him, in the midst of his remorse, that he might not have reined them in; hard to make him believe that this whole goodly universe (which his act so jars upon) required and exacted it of him at that fatal moment, and from eternity made aught else impossible. But, on the other hand, there is the certainty that all his effortless volitions are resultants of interests and associations whose strength and sequence are mechanically determined by the structure of that physical mass, his brain; and the general continuity of things and the monistic conception of the world may lead one irresistibly to postulate that a little fact like effort can form no real exception to the overwhelming reign of deterministic law. Even in effortless volition we have the consciousness of the alternative being also possible. This is surely a delusion here; why is it not a delusion everywhere?
The effort seems, in other words, not as a fixed reaction on our part that the resisting object necessarily provokes, but as what mathematicians call an 'independent{456} variable' among the fixed data of the situation, like our motives, character, etc. If that is truly the case, if the level of our effort isn't definitely determined by those other factors, then, in everyday terms, our wills are free. Conversely, if the level of effort is a fixed function, such that whatever object occupies our consciousness at any moment was destined to do so from eternity and compelled us to exert exactly the amount of effort we give it—neither more nor less—then our wills are not free, and all our actions are predetermined. The issue in the free-will debate is quite straightforward. It only concerns the amount of attention effort we can exert at any moment. Is the duration and intensity of this effort a fixed response to the object, or isn't it? Now, as I just mentioned, it seems like we could put forth more or less in any particular situation. When a person has allowed their thoughts to wander for days and weeks until they lead to some particularly shameful or cowardly or cruel act, it’s tough to convince them, in the midst of their guilt, that they could have restrained those thoughts; hard to make them believe that this entire universe (which their act disrupts) required and demanded it of them at that critical moment, and made any other outcome impossible from the start. However, there’s the certainty that all their effortless choices are outcomes of interests and associations whose strength and order are mechanically determined by the structure of that physical mass, their brain; and the overall continuity of things along with a holistic view of the world might lead one to insist that a small detail like effort cannot genuinely contradict the overwhelming authority of deterministic law. Even in effortless choices, we have the awareness that other options were also possible. This is surely an illusion in this case; why wouldn't it be an illusion everywhere?
The fact is that the question of free-will is insoluble on strictly psychologic grounds. After a certain amount of effort of attention has been given to an idea, it is manifestly{457} impossible to tell whether either more or less of it might have been given or not. To tell that, we should have to ascend to the antecedents of the effort, and defining them with mathematical exactitude, prove, by laws of which we have not at present even an inkling, that the only amount of sequent effort which could possibly comport with them was the precise amount that actually came. Such measurements, whether of psychic or of neural quantities, and such deductive reasonings as this method of proof implies, will surely be forever beyond human reach. No serious psychologist or physiologist will venture even to suggest a notion of how they might be practically made. Had one no motives drawn from elsewhere to make one partial to either solution, one might easily leave the matter undecided. But a psychologist cannot be expected to be thus impartial, having a great motive in favor of determinism. He wants to build a Science; and a Science is a system of fixed relations. Wherever there are independent variables, there Science stops. So far, then, as our volitions may be independent variables, a scientific psychology must ignore that fact, and treat of them only so far as they are fixed functions. In other words, she must deal with the general laws of volition exclusively; with the impulsive and inhibitory character of ideas; with the nature of their appeals to the attention; with the conditions under which effort may arise, etc.; but not with the precise amounts of effort, for these, if our wills be free, are impossible to compute. She thus abstracts from free-will, without necessarily denying its existence. Practically, however, such abstraction is not distinguished from rejection; and most actual psychologists have no hesitation in denying that free-will exists.
The truth is that the question of free will can't be solved purely on psychological grounds. After we've focused on an idea for a while, it's clearly{457} impossible to know whether we could have focused more or less on it. To determine that, we would need to look back at the factors leading to that effort, and define them with mathematical precision, proving, by laws that we currently don't even understand, that the only amount of subsequent effort that could possibly fit with those factors was exactly the amount that actually occurred. Measuring these, whether they're psychological or neural aspects, and the kind of deductive reasoning this proof requires will likely always be out of human reach. No serious psychologist or physiologist would even attempt to suggest how they might be practically measured. If one had no outside motives leading them to favor either solution, they might easily leave the question unanswered. However, a psychologist can't be expected to be neutral, given their strong motivation for determinism. They want to establish a Science; and a Science is a system of fixed relationships. Where there are independent variables, Science stops. Therefore, as far as our choices could be seen as independent variables, scientific psychology must overlook this and examine them only to the extent that they are fixed functions. In other words, it must focus on the general laws of choice exclusively; on the encouraging and inhibiting nature of ideas; on how these ideas capture attention; on the conditions under which effort may emerge, etc.; but not on the exact amounts of effort, since if our wills are free, these are impossible to calculate. It thus abstracts from free will, without necessarily denying its existence. In practice, though, this kind of abstraction often feels like rejection; and most current psychologists have no qualms about denying that free will exists.
For ourselves, we can hand the free-will controversy over to metaphysics. Psychology will surely never grow refined enough to discover, in the case of any individual's decision, a discrepancy between her scientific calculations and the fact. Her prevision will never foretell, whether the effort{458} be completely predestinate or not, the way in which each individual emergency is resolved. Psychology will be psychology, and Science science, as much as ever (as much and no more) in this world, whether free-will be true in it or not.
For us, we can leave the free-will debate to metaphysics. Psychology will likely never become advanced enough to uncover, in the case of any person’s decision, a mismatch between her scientific reasoning and reality. Her predictions will never reveal, regardless of whether the effort{458} is completely preordained or not, how each individual situation is resolved. Psychology will remain psychology, and science will remain science, just as it always has (as much and no more) in this world, whether free will exists in it or not.
We can thus ignore the free-will question in psychology. As we said on p. 452, the operation of free effort, if it existed, could only be to hold some one ideal object, or part of an object, a little longer or a little more intensely before the mind. Amongst the alternatives which present themselves as genuine possibles, it would thus make one effective. And although such quickening of one idea might be morally and historically momentous, yet, if considered dynamically, it would be an operation amongst those physiological infinitesimals which an actual science must forever neglect.
We can therefore set aside the free will debate in psychology. As we mentioned on p. 452, the exercise of free will, if it existed, could only keep one ideal object, or part of an object, focused in the mind for a bit longer or with greater intensity. Among the options that appear as genuine possibles, it would make one effective choice. And while this quickening of a single idea could be morally and historically significant, when viewed dynamically, it would just be part of those physiological infinitesimals that a real science will always overlook.
Ethical Importance of the Phenomenon of Effort.—But whilst eliminating the question about the amount of our effort as one which psychology will never have a practical call to decide, I must say one word about the extraordinarily intimate and important character which the phenomenon of effort assumes in our own eyes as individual men. Of course we measure ourselves by many standards. Our strength and our intelligence, our wealth and even our good luck, are things which warm our heart and make us feel ourselves a match for life. But deeper than all such things, and able to suffice unto itself without them, is the sense of the amount of effort which we can put forth. Those are, after all, but effects, products, and reflections of the outer world within. But the effort seems to belong to an altogether different realm, as if it were the substantive thing which we are, and those were but externals which we carry. If the 'searching of our heart and reins' be the purpose of this human drama, then what is sought seems to be what effort we can make. He who can make none is but a shadow; he who can make much is a hero. The huge world that girdles us about{459} puts all sorts of questions to us, and tests us in all sorts of ways. Some of the tests we meet by actions that are easy, and some of the questions we answer in articulately formulated words. But the deepest question that is ever asked admits of no reply but the dumb turning of the will and tightening of our heart-strings as we say, "Yes, I will even have it so!" When a dreadful object is presented, or when life as a whole turns up its dark abysses to our view, then the worthless ones among us lose their hold on the situation altogether, and either escape from its difficulties by averting their attention, or if they cannot do that, collapse into yielding masses of plaintiveness and fear. The effort required for facing and consenting to such objects is beyond their power to make. But the heroic mind does differently. To it, too, the objects are sinister and dreadful, unwelcome, incompatible with wished-for things. But it can face them if necessary, without for that losing its hold upon the rest of life. The world thus finds in the heroic man its worthy match and mate; and the effort which he is able to put forth to hold himself erect and keep his heart unshaken is the direct measure of his worth and function in the game of human life. He can stand this Universe. He can meet it and keep up his faith in it in presence of those same features which lay his weaker brethren low. He can still find a zest in it, not by 'ostrich-like forgetfulness,' but by pure inward willingness to face it with those deterrent objects there. And hereby he makes himself one of the masters and the lords of life. He must be counted with henceforth; he forms a part of human destiny. Neither in the theoretic nor in the practical sphere do we care for, or go for help to, those who have no head for risks, or sense for living on the perilous edge. Our religious life lies more, our practical life lies less, than it used to, on the perilous edge. But just as our courage is so often a reflex of another's courage, so our faith is apt to be a faith in some one else's faith. We draw new life from the heroic example. The prophet has{460} drunk more deeply than anyone of the cup of bitterness, but his countenance is so unshaken and he speaks such mighty words of cheer that his will becomes our will, and our life is kindled at his own.
Ethical Importance of the Phenomenon of Effort.—While it's clear that psychology won't ever truly measure the amount of our effort, I want to highlight how deeply important the phenomenon of effort is to us as individuals. We often gauge ourselves by various standards. Our strength, intelligence, wealth, and even luck make us feel confident in facing life. However, more significant than these are the feelings of the effort we can exert. Those things are just outcomes, reflections of the external world we experience. In contrast, effort feels like something entirely different; it seems to represent who we are, while those things are merely what we carry. If the essence of our human experience is to explore our innermost selves, then the real question is about the effort we can make. A person who can't exert any effort is just a shadow; those who can exert a lot are heroes. The vast world around us challenges us in many ways. We may respond to some tests with easy actions or articulate answers, but the most profound questions require nothing but a silent resolution and the tightening of our heartstrings as we say, "Yes, I will even have it so!" When faced with something terrible or when life reveals its darkest depths, those without worth lose their grip entirely, either ignoring the difficulties or collapsing into despair and fear. They lack the strength to confront such challenges. Yet, the heroic mind reacts differently. It sees the darkness and awfulness, too, but it can face these realities without losing grip on the rest of life. The world finds in the heroic person a worthy counterpart; the effort they can put forth to remain strong and keep their heart steady directly reflects their value and role in the human experience. They can stand in this Universe. They can confront it and maintain their faith amid the very same daunting elements that bring others down. They continue to find joy in life, not by ignoring the harshness, but by willingly facing it head-on. In doing so, they become masters of life and an integral part of human destiny. We neither seek out nor rely on those who lack the courage to take risks or live on the edge of danger. Our religious lives depend less and less on that edge. However, just like our bravery often comes from others' courage, our faith tends to be rooted in someone else's conviction. We draw new strength from heroic examples. The prophet has{460} tasted deep bitterness, yet his unwavering demeanor and powerful words of encouragement inspire us, igniting our own wills and fueling our lives.
Thus not only our morality but our religion, so far as the latter is deliberate, depend on the effort which we can make. "Will you or won't you have it so?" is the most probing question we are ever asked; we are asked it every hour of the day, and about the largest as well as the smallest, the most theoretical as well as the most practical, things. We answer by consents or non-consents and not by words. What wonder that these dumb responses should seem our deepest organs of communication with the nature of things! What wonder if the effort demanded by them be the measure of our worth as men! What wonder if the amount which we accord of it were the one strictly underived and original contribution which we make to the world!{461}
Thus, not only does our morality but also our religion, as far as it's intentional, rely on the effort we can put in. "Will you or won't you do it?" is the most challenging question we face; we get asked it every hour of the day, about both the biggest and smallest, the most theoretical and the most practical matters. We respond with agreeing or disagreeing instead of words. It's no surprise that these silent answers feel like our most profound means of communicating with the essence of things! It's no surprise that the effort required by them defines our value as individuals! It's no surprise that the amount of effort we give is our one truly original contribution to the world!{461}
EPILOGUE.
PSYCHOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY.
What the Word Metaphysics means.—In the last chapter we handed the question of free-will over to 'metaphysics.' It would indeed have been hasty to settle the question absolutely, inside the limits of psychology. Let psychology frankly admit that for her scientific purposes determinism may be claimed, and no one can find fault. If, then, it turn out later that the claim has only a relative purpose, and may be crossed by counter-claims, the readjustment can be made. Now ethics makes a counterclaim; and the present writer, for one, has no hesitation in regarding her claim as the stronger, and in assuming that our wills are 'free.' For him, then, the deterministic assumption of psychology is merely provisional and methodological. This is no place to argue the ethical point; and I only mention the conflict to show that all these special sciences, marked off for convenience from the remaining body of truth (cf. p. 1), must hold their assumptions and results subject to revision in the light of each others' needs. The forum where they hold discussion is called metaphysics. Metaphysics means only an unusually obstinate attempt to think clearly and consistently. The special sciences all deal with data that are full of obscurity and contradiction; but from the point of view of their limited purposes these defects may be overlooked. Hence the disparaging use of the name metaphysics which is so common. To a man with a limited purpose any discussion that is over-subtle for that purpose is branded as 'metaphysical.' A geologist's purposes fall short of understanding Time itself. A mechanist need{462} not know how action and reaction are possible at all. A psychologist has enough to do without asking how both he and the mind which he studies are able to take cognizance of the same outer world. But it is obvious that problems irrelevant from one standpoint may be essential from another. And as soon as one's purpose is the attainment of the maximum of possible insight into the world as a whole, the metaphysical puzzles become the most urgent ones of all. Psychology contributes to general philosophy her full share of these; and I propose in this last chapter to indicate briefly which of them seem the more important. And first, of the
What the Word Metaphysics Means.—In the last chapter, we handed the question of free will over to 'metaphysics.' It would have been premature to settle the issue definitively within the confines of psychology. Let psychology acknowledge that for its scientific purposes determinism may be claimed, and no one should object. If it later turns out that the claim has only a relative purpose and may be countered by other claims, we can adjust accordingly. Now ethics presents a counterclaim; and I have no hesitation in considering its claim the stronger, assuming that our wills are 'free.' For me, the deterministic assumption of psychology is merely provisional and methodological. This isn't the place to debate the ethical point; I mention the conflict to illustrate that these specialized sciences, separated out for convenience from the larger body of truth (cf. p. 1), must hold their assumptions and results open to revision based on each other's needs. The arena where they engage in discussion is called metaphysics. Metaphysics is simply an unusually stubborn attempt to think clearly and consistently. The specialized sciences tackle data that are often unclear and contradictory; but in light of their limited purposes, these flaws can be overlooked. Hence the common disparaging use of the term metaphysics. To someone with a narrow focus, any discussion that is too subtle for that purpose is labeled as 'metaphysical.' A geologist's goals don't include understanding Time itself. A mechanist doesn't need to know how action and reaction are possible at all. A psychologist has enough to do without questioning how both they and the mind they're studying are able to perceive the same external world. However, it's clear that issues irrelevant from one perspective may be crucial from another. As soon as someone's aim is to gain the maximum insight into the world as a whole, the metaphysical questions become the most pressing of all. Psychology contributes its fair share of these to general philosophy, and I intend in this last chapter to briefly highlight which of them seem the most significant. And first, of the
Relation of Consciousness to the Brain.—When psychology is treated as a natural science (after the fashion in which it has been treated in this book), 'states of mind' are taken for granted, as data immediately given in experience; and the working hypothesis (see p. 6) is the mere empirical law that to the entire state of the brain at any moment one unique state of mind always 'corresponds.' This does very well till we begin to be metaphysical and ask ourselves just what we mean by such a word as 'corresponds.' This notion appears dark in the extreme, the moment we seek to translate it into something more intimate than mere parallel variation. Some think they make the notion of it clearer by calling the mental state and the brain the inner and outer 'aspects,' respectively, of 'One and the Same Reality.' Others consider the mental state as the 'reaction' of a unitary being, the Soul, upon the multiple activities which the brain presents. Others again comminute the mystery by supposing each brain-cell to be separately conscious, and the empirically given mental state to be the appearance of all the little consciousnesses fused into one, just as the 'brain' itself is the appearance of all the cells together, when looked at from one point of view.
Relation of Consciousness to the Brain.—When psychology is viewed as a natural science (like it is in this book), 'states of mind' are accepted as immediate experiences; the working hypothesis (see p. 6) is simply the empirical law that at any moment, every complete state of the brain corresponds to a unique state of mind. This works fine until we start to get philosophical and question what we really mean by the term 'corresponds.' This idea becomes very confusing when we try to turn it into something deeper than just a parallel happening. Some people think they clarify this idea by referring to the mental state and the brain as the inner and outer 'aspects,' respectively, of 'One and the Same Reality.' Others view the mental state as the 'reaction' of a single entity, the Soul, to the various activities that the brain presents. Still others complicate the idea by suggesting that each brain cell is conscious on its own, and that the observable mental state results from all these individual consciousnesses coming together as one, just as the 'brain' itself appears as a whole when looked at from a certain perspective.
We may call these three metaphysical attempts the monistic, the spiritualistic, and the atomistic theories respectively.{463} Each has its difficulties, of which it seems to me that those of the spiritualistic theory are logically much the least grave. But the spiritualistic theory is quite out of touch with the facts of multiple consciousness, alternate personality, etc. (pp. 207-214). These lend themselves more naturally to the atomistic formulation, for it seems easier to think of a lot of minor consciousnesses now gathering together into one large mass, and now into several smaller ones, than of a Soul now reacting totally, now breaking into several disconnected simultaneous reactions. The localization of brain-functions also makes for the atomistic view. If in my experience, say of a bell, it is my occipital lobes which are the condition of its being seen, and my temporal lobes which are the condition of its being heard, what is more natural than to say that the former see it and the latter hear it, and then 'combine their information'? In view of the extreme naturalness of such a way of representing the well-established fact that the appearance of the several parts of an object to consciousness at any moment does depend on as many several parts of the brain being then active, all such objections as were urged, on pp. 23, 57, and elsewhere, to the notion that 'parts' of consciousness can 'combine' will be rejected as far-fetched, unreal, and 'metaphysical' by the atomistic philosopher. His 'purpose' is to gain a formula which shall unify things in a natural and easy manner, and for such a purpose the atomistic theory seems expressly made to his hand.
We can refer to these three metaphysical approaches as the monistic, the spiritualistic, and the atomistic theories, respectively.{463} Each has its challenges, but it seems to me that the issues with the spiritualistic theory are logically the least serious. However, the spiritualistic theory is largely disconnected from the realities of multiple consciousness, alternate personalities, etc. (pp. 207-214). These phenomena fit more naturally with the atomistic perspective, as it appears easier to imagine many smaller consciousnesses coming together into one larger one and then splitting into several smaller ones, rather than envisioning a Soul that reacts completely at one moment and then breaks into several separate simultaneous reactions. The way brain functions are localized also supports the atomistic view. For instance, if in my experience of a bell, my occipital lobes are responsible for seeing it, while my temporal lobes are responsible for hearing it, what could be more intuitive than saying that the former see it and the latter hear it, and then ‘combine their information’? Given how natural it is to describe the well-established fact that the perception of various parts of an object by consciousness at any moment depends on different parts of the brain being active, all the objections raised on pp. 23, 57, and elsewhere, regarding the idea that 'parts' of consciousness can 'combine' will be dismissed as unrealistic, far-fetched, and 'metaphysical' by the atomistic philosopher. His goal is to create a formula that unifies concepts in a straightforward and natural way, and for that purpose, the atomistic theory seems perfectly suited.
But the difficulty with the problem of 'correspondence' is not only that of solving it, it is that of even stating it in elementary terms.
But the challenge with the problem of 'correspondence' isn't just about solving it; it's also about being able to explain it in simple terms.
Before we can know just what sort of goings-on occur when thought corresponds to a change in the brain, we must know the subjects of the goings-on. We must know which sort of mental fact and which sort of cerebral fact are, so to speak, in immediate juxtaposition. We must{464} find the minimal mental fact whose being reposes directly on a brain-fact; and we must similarly find the minimal brain-event which can have a mental counterpart at all. Between the mental and the physical minima thus found there will be an immediate relation, the expression of which, if we had it, would be the elementary psycho-physic law.
Before we can understand what happens when thought connects to changes in the brain, we need to identify the subjects involved. We need to determine which types of mental facts and which types of brain facts are, so to speak, in close proximity. We have to{464} identify the smallest mental fact that directly relies on a brain fact; and we also need to find the smallest brain event that can have a mental counterpart. Between the mental and physical minima identified, there will be a direct relationship, the expression of which, if we had it, would represent the fundamental psycho-physical law.
Our own formula has escaped the metempiric assumption of psychic atoms by taking the entire thought (even of a complex object) as the minimum with which it deals on the mental side, and the entire brain as the minimum on the physical side. But the 'entire brain' is not a physical fact at all! It is nothing but our name for the way in which a billion of molecules arranged in certain positions may affect our sense. On the principles of the corpuscular or mechanical philosophy, the only realities are the separate molecules, or at most the cells. Their aggregation into a 'brain' is a fiction of popular speech. Such a figment cannot serve as the objectively real counterpart to any psychic state whatever. Only a genuinely physical fact can so serve, and the molecular fact is the only genuine physical fact. Whereupon we seem, if we are to have an elementary psycho-physic law at all, thrust right back upon something like the mental-atom-theory, for the molecular fact, being an element of the 'brain,' would seem naturally to correspond, not to total thoughts, but to elements of thoughts. Thus the real in psychics seems to 'correspond' to the unreal in physics, and vice versa; and our perplexity is extreme.
Our formula has moved beyond the outdated idea of psychic atoms by considering the entire thought (even of a complex object) as the basic unit we work with on the mental side, and the whole brain as the basic unit on the physical side. However, the 'whole brain' isn't actually a physical fact! It's just our term for how a billion molecules arranged in specific ways can influence our senses. According to the principles of the corpuscular or mechanical philosophy, the only real things are individual molecules or at most, cells. Their grouping into a ‘brain’ is just a common way of speaking. This kind of idea can't serve as the objective reality for any psychic state. Only a true physical fact can do that, and the molecular fact is the only true physical fact. Therefore, if we're going to have a basic psycho-physical law, we seem to be pushed back toward something resembling the mental-atom theory, since the molecular fact, being part of the 'brain,' appears to relate not to whole thoughts, but to components of thoughts. So, the real in psychology seems to ‘correspond’ to the unreal in physics, and vice versa; and we're left very confused.
The Relation of States of Mind to their 'Objects.'—The perplexity is not diminished when we reflect upon our assumption that states of consciousness can know (pp. 2-13). From the common-sense point of view (which is that of all the natural sciences) knowledge is an ultimate relation between two mutually external entities, the knower and the known. The world first exists, and then the states of mind; and these gain a cognizance of the world which gets gradually more and more complete. But it is hard{465} to carry through this simple dualism, for idealistic reflections will intrude. Take the states of mind called pure sensations (so far as such may exist), that for example of blue, which we may get from looking into the zenith on a clear day. Is the blue a determination of the feeling itself, or of its 'object'? Shall we describe the experience as a quality of our feeling or as our feeling of a quality? Ordinary speech vacillates incessantly on this point. The ambiguous word 'content' has been recently invented instead of 'object,' to escape a decision; for 'content' suggests something not exactly out of the feeling, nor yet exactly identical with the feeling, since the latter remains suggested as the container or vessel. Yet of our feelings as vessels apart from their content we really have no clear notion whatever. The fact is that such an experience as blue, as it is immediately given, can only be called by some such neutral name as that of phenomenon. It does not come to us immediately as a relation between two realities, one mental and one physical. It is only when, still thinking of it as the same blue (cf. p. 239), we trace relations between it and other things, that it doubles itself, so to speak, and develops in two directions; and, taken in connection with some associates, figures as a physical quality, whilst with others it figures as a feeling in the mind.
The Relation of States of Mind to their 'Objects.'—The confusion doesn’t get any easier when we think about our assumption that states of consciousness can know (pp. 2-13). From a common-sense perspective (which aligns with all the natural sciences), knowledge is a fundamental relationship between two separate entities: the knower and the known. The world exists first, then comes the states of mind, which gradually gain a better understanding of the world. However, it’s challenging to maintain this simple dualism because idealistic thoughts keep intruding. Consider states of mind referred to as pure sensations (if such exist), like the sensation of blue, which we might experience when looking up at a clear sky. Is the blue a feature of the feeling itself, or is it a feature of its 'object'? Should we describe the experience as a quality of our feeling or as our feeling of a quality? Everyday language constantly flips back and forth on this issue. The ambiguous term 'content' has recently been introduced instead of 'object' to avoid making a choice; 'content' implies something that isn’t exactly part of the feeling nor completely identical to the feeling, as the latter is still viewed as the container. Yet, we have no clear idea of our feelings as separate vessels from their content. The truth is that an experience like blue, as it is immediately perceived, can only be called something neutral like phenomenon. It doesn’t come to us immediately as a relationship between two realities, one mental and one physical. It’s only when we continue thinking of it as the same blue (cf. p. 239), that we explore relationships between it and other things, causing it to split into two directions, so to speak; in relation to some associates, it represents a physical quality, while with others, it represents a mental feeling.
Our non-sensational, or conceptual, states of mind, on the other hand, seem to obey a different law. They present themselves immediately as referring beyond themselves. Although they also possess an immediately given 'content,' they have a 'fringe' beyond it (p. 168), and claim to 'represent' something else than it. The 'blue' we have just spoken of, for instance, was, substantively considered, a word; but it was a word with a meaning. The quality blue was the object of the thought, the word was its content. The mental state, in short, was not self-sufficient as sensations are, but expressly pointed at something more in which it meant to terminate.
Our non-sensational, or conceptual, states of mind, on the other hand, seem to follow a different rule. They immediately suggest that they are pointing to something beyond themselves. Even though they also have an immediate 'content,' they have a 'fringe' around it (p. 168), and they claim to 'represent' something else. The 'blue' we just mentioned, for example, was, when looked at in substance, a word; but it was a word with a meaning. The quality of blue was the object of the thought, while the word was its content. In short, the mental state wasn't self-sufficient like sensations are but clearly pointed to something more that it aimed to end with.
But the moment when, as in sensations, object and conscious{466} state seem to be different ways of considering one and the same fact, it becomes hard to justify our denial that mental states consist of parts. The blue sky, considered physically, is a sum of mutually external parts; why is it not such a sum, when considered as a content of sensation?
But when we experience sensations, and both the object and our conscious state appear to be different ways of looking at the same fact, it becomes difficult to explain why we deny that mental states have components. The blue sky, when viewed physically, consists of mutually separate parts; why shouldn't it be seen that way when we look at it as a sensation?
The only result that is plain from all this is that the relations of the known and the knower are infinitely complicated, and that a genial, whole-hearted, popular-science way of formulating them will not suffice. The only possible path to understanding them lies through metaphysical subtlety; and Idealism and Erkenntnisstheorie must say their say before the natural-science assumption that thoughts 'know' things grows clear.
The only clear outcome from all of this is that the relationship between what we know and the person knowing it is extremely complex, and a friendly, straightforward approach to explaining it won’t be enough. The only way to truly understand it is through intricate philosophical concepts; both Idealism and Erkenntnisstheorie need to contribute their perspectives before the assumption in natural science that thoughts 'know' things can become clear.
The changing character of consciousness presents another puzzle. We first assumed conscious 'states' as the units with which psychology deals, and we said later that they were in constant change. Yet any state must have a certain duration to be effective at all—a pain which lasted but a hundredth of a second would practically be no pain—and the question comes up, how long may a state last and still be treated as one state? In time-perception for example, if the 'present' as known (the 'specious present,' as we called it) may be a dozen seconds long (p. 281), how long need the present as knower be? That is, what is the minimum duration of the consciousness in which those twelve seconds can be apprehended as just past, the minimum which can be called a 'state,' for such a cognitive purpose? Consciousness, as a process in time, offers the paradoxes which have been found in all continuous change. There are no 'states' in such a thing, any more than there are facets in a circle, or places where an arrow 'is' when it flies. The vertical raised upon the time-line on which (p. 285) we represented the past to be 'projected' at any given instant of memory, is only an ideal construction. Yet anything broader than that vertical is not, for the actual present is only the joint between{467} the past and future and has no breadth of its own. Where everything is change and process, how can we talk of 'state'? Yet how can we do without 'states,' in describing what the vehicles of our knowledge seem to be?
The changing nature of consciousness presents another puzzle. Initially, we viewed conscious 'states' as the units that psychology examines, and later we stated that these states are constantly changing. However, any state must last long enough to be effective at all—a pain that lasts only a hundredth of a second would hardly be considered pain—and the question arises: how long can a state last and still be regarded as one state? For instance, in time perception, if the 'present' as we understand it (the 'specious present,' as we referred to it) can last for a dozen seconds (p. 281), how long must the present as knower last? In other words, what is the minimum duration of consciousness required for those twelve seconds to be recognized as just passed, the minimum that can be called a 'state,' for that cognitive purpose? Consciousness, as a process unfolding over time, presents the paradoxes found in all continuous change. There are no 'states' in such a phenomenon, just as there are no distinct points in a circle, or locations where an arrow 'is' while it’s in flight. The vertical line drawn on the timeline where (p. 285) we illustrated the past being 'projected' at any moment of memory is merely an ideal concept. Nevertheless, anything broader than that vertical is not, because the actual present is just the intersection between{467} the past and future and lacks width of its own. In a world where everything is change and process, how can we speak of 'state'? Yet, how can we describe what the means of our knowledge seem to be without referring to 'states'?
States of consciousness themselves are not verifiable facts. But 'worse remains behind.' Neither common-sense, nor psychology so far as it has yet been written, has ever doubted that the states of consciousness which that science studies are immediate data of experience. 'Things' have been doubted, but thoughts and feelings have never been doubted. The outer world, but never the inner world, has been denied. Everyone assumes that we have direct introspective acquaintance with our thinking activity as such, with our consciousness as something inward and contrasted with the outer objects which it knows. Yet I must confess that for my part I cannot feel sure of this conclusion. Whenever I try to become sensible of my thinking activity as such, what I catch is some bodily fact, an impression coming from my brow, or head, or throat, or nose. It seems as if consciousness as an inner activity were rather a postulate than a sensibly given fact, the postulate, namely, of a knower as correlative to all this known; and as if 'sciousness' might be a better word by which to describe it. But 'sciousness postulated as an hypothesis' is practically a very different thing from 'states of consciousness apprehended with infallible certainty by an inner sense.' For one thing, it throws the question of who the knower really is wide open again, and makes the answer which we gave to it at the end of Chapter XII a mere provisional statement from a popular and prejudiced point of view.
States of consciousness aren't verifiable facts. But 'worse things are yet to come.' Neither common sense nor the psychology that's been developed so far has ever questioned that the states of consciousness studied by that science are immediate data of experience. 'Things' have been doubted, but thoughts and feelings have never been. The outer world has been denied, but not the inner world. Everyone assumes that we have direct, introspective knowledge of our thinking activity, with our consciousness viewed as something internal, contrasting with the outer objects it perceives. Yet, I have to admit that I can't be sure of this conclusion. Whenever I try to sense my thinking activity as such, what I actually perceive is some physical sensation—an impression from my brow, head, throat, or nose. It seems like consciousness, as an inner activity, is more of a postulate than an observable fact, specifically the postulate of a knower that correlates with all this known information; and perhaps 'sciousness' might be a better term to describe it. But 'sciousness postulated as a hypothesis' is fundamentally different from 'states of consciousness grasped with absolute certainty by an inner sense.' For one thing, it reopens the question of who the knower really is and reduces our previous answer given at the end of Chapter XII to a mere provisional statement from a popular and biased perspective.
Conclusion.—When, then, we talk of 'psychology as a natural science,' we must not assume that that means a sort of psychology that stands at last on solid ground. It means just the reverse; it means a psychology particularly fragile, and into which the waters of metaphysical criticism leak at every joint, a psychology all of whose elementary{468} assumptions and data must be reconsidered in wider connections and translated into other terms. It is, in short, a phrase of diffidence, and not of arrogance; and it is indeed strange to hear people talk triumphantly of 'the New Psychology,' and write 'Histories of Psychology,' when into the real elements and forces which the word covers not the first glimpse of clear insight exists. A string of raw facts; a little gossip and wrangle about opinions; a little classification and generalization on the mere descriptive level; a strong prejudice that we have states of mind, and that our brain conditions them: but not a single law in the sense in which physics shows us laws, not a single proposition from which any consequence can causally be deduced. We don't even know the terms between which the elementary laws would obtain if we had them (p. 464). This is no science, it is only the hope of a science. The matter of a science is with us. Something definite happens when to a certain brain-state a certain 'sciousness' corresponds. A genuine glimpse into what it is would be the scientific achievement, before which all past achievements would pale. But at present psychology is in the condition of physics before Galileo and the laws of motion, of chemistry before Lavoisier and the notion that mass is preserved in all reactions. The Galileo and the Lavoisier of psychology will be famous men indeed when they come, as come they some day surely will, or past successes are no index to the future. When they do come, however, the necessities of the case will make them 'metaphysical.' Meanwhile the best way in which we can facilitate their advent is to understand how great is the darkness in which we grope, and never to forget that the natural-science assumptions with which we started are provisional and revisable things.
Conclusion.—When we refer to 'psychology as a natural science,' we shouldn't assume that it implies a type of psychology that is firmly established. In fact, it means quite the opposite; it signifies a psychology that is particularly fragile, where the waters of metaphysical criticism seep in at every joint, a psychology whose basic assumptions and data must be reexamined in broader contexts and expressed in different terms. It is, in short, a phrase of uncertainty rather than arrogance; it is indeed strange to hear people speak triumphantly of 'the New Psychology' and write 'Histories of Psychology' when there isn't even a hint of clear understanding about the real elements and forces represented by the term. We have a collection of raw facts; some casual discussions and disputes over opinions; basic classification and generalization on a mere descriptive level; and a strong bias that suggests we have states of mind, and that our brain influences them: yet, there's not a single law in the way that physics presents laws, not a single statement from which we can logically derive any conclusions. We don't even understand the parameters that would apply if we had the fundamental laws (p. 464). This isn't science; it's simply the aspiration for one. The essence of a science is with us. Something specific occurs when a particular brain state corresponds to a specific 'sciousness.' A real understanding of what this is would be the scientific breakthrough, overshadowing all past achievements. But right now, psychology resembles the state of physics before Galileo and the laws of motion, or chemistry before Lavoisier and the concept of conservation of mass in reactions. The Galileo and Lavoisier of psychology will undoubtedly be celebrated figures when they arrive, and they surely will, or past accomplishments are no indication of future outcomes. However, when they do arrive, the nature of the field will require them to be 'metaphysical.' In the meantime, the best way to pave the way for their arrival is to recognize how vast the darkness is that we are navigating and to always remember that the natural-science assumptions we started with are temporary and open to revision.
INDEX.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__.
Abstract ideas, 240, 25;
characters, 353;
propositions, 354
Abstraction, 251;
see Distraction
Accommodation, of crystalline lens, 32;
of ear, 49
Acquaintance, 14
Acquisitiveness, 407
Action, what holds attention determines, 448
After-images, 43-5
Agassiz, 132
Alexia, 113
Allen, Grant, 104
Alternating personality, 205 ff.
Amidon, 132
Analysis, 56, 248, 251, 362
Anger, 374
Aphasia, 108, 113;
loss of images in, 309
Apperception, 326
Aqueduct of Silvius, 80
Arachnoid membrane, 84
Arbor vitæ, 86
Aristotle, 318
Articular sensibility, 74
Association, Chapter XVI;
the order of our ideas, 253;
determined by cerebral laws, 255;
is not of ideas, but of things thought of, 255;
the elementary principle of, 256;
the ultimate cause of is habit, 256;
indeterminateness of its results, 258;
total recall, 259;
partial recall and the law of interest, 261;
frequency, recency, vividness, and emotional congruity tend to determine the object recalled,
264;
focalized recall or by similarity, 267, 364;
voluntary trains of thought, 271;
problems, 273
Atomistic theories of consciousness, 462
Attention, Chapter XIII;
its relation to interest, 170;
its physiological ground, 217;
narrowness of field of consciousness, 217;
to how many things possible, 219;
to simultaneous sight and sound, 220;
its varieties, 220;
voluntary, 224;
involuntary, 220;
change necessary to, 226;
its relation to genius, 227;
physiological conditions of, 228;
the sense-organ must be adapted, 229;
the idea of the object must be aroused, 232;
pedagogic remarks, 236;
attention and free-will, 237;
what holds attention determines action, 448;
volitional effort is effort of attention, 450
Auditory centre in brain, 113
Auditory type of imagination, 306
Austen, Miss, 261
Automaton theory, 10, 101
Azam, 210
Bahnsen, 147
Bain, 145, 367, 370
Berklev, 302, 303, 347
Binet, 318, 332
Black, 45-6
Blind Spot, 31
Blix, 64, 68
Blood-supply, cerebral, 130
Bodily expression, cause of emotions, 375
Brace, Julia, 252
Brain, the functions of, Chapter VIII, 91
Brain, its connection with mind, 5-7;
its relations to outer forces, 9;
relations of consciousness to, 462
Brain, structure of, Chapter VII, 78 ff.;
vesicles, 78 ff.;
dissection of sheep's, 81;
how to preserve, 83;
functions of, Chapter VIII, 91 ff.
Bridgman, Laura, 252, 308
Broca, 109, 113, 115
Broca's convolution, 109
Brodhun, 46
Brooks, Prof. W. K., 412
Brutes, reasoning of, 367
Calamus scriptorius, 84
Canals, semicircular, 50
Carpenter, 223, 224
Cattell, 125, 126, 127
Caudate nucleus, 81, 86
Centres, nerve, 92
Cerebellum, its relation to equilibrium, 76;
its anatomy, 79, 84
Cerebral laws, of association, 255
Cerebral process, see Neural Process
Cerebrum, see Brain, Hemisphere
Changing character of consciousness, 152, 466
Charcot, 113, 309
Choice, see Interest
Coalescence of different sensations into the same 'thing,' 339
Cochlea, 51, 52
Cognition, see Reasoning
Cold, sensations of, 63 ff.;
nerves of, 64
Color, 40-3
Commissures, 84
Commissure, middle, 88 ff.;
anterior, 88;
posterior, 88
Comparison of magnitudes, 342
Compounding of sensations, 23, 43, 57
Compound objects, analysis of, 248
Concatenated acts, dependent on habit, 140
Conceiving, mode of, what is meant by, 354
Conceptions, Chapter XIV;
defined, 239;
their permanence, 239;
different states of mind can mean the same, 239;
abstract, universal, and problematic, 240;
the thought of 'the same' is not the same thought over again, 243
Conceptual order different from perceptual, 243
Consciousness, stream of, Chapter XI, 151;
four characters in, 152;
personal, 152;
is in constant change, 152, 466;
same state of mind never occurs twice, 154;
consciousness is continuous, 157;
substantive and transitive states of, 160;
interested in one part of its object more than another, 170;
double consciousness, 206 ff.;
narrowness of field of, 217;
relations of to brain, 462
Consciousness and Movement, Chapter XXIII;
all consciousness is motor, 370
Concomitants, law of varying, 251
Consent, in willing, 452
Continuity of object of consciousness, 157
Contrast, 25, 44-5
Convergence of eyeballs, 31, 33
Convolutions, motor, 106
Corpora fimbriata, 86
Corpora quadrigemma, 79, 86, 89
Corpus albicans, 84
Corpus callosum, 81, 84
Corpus striatum, 81, 86, 108
Cortex, 11, note
Cortex, localization in, 104;
motor region of, 106
Corti's organ, 52
Cramming, 295
Crura of brain, 79, 84, 108
Curiosity, 407
Currents, in nerves, 10
Czermak, 70
Darwin, 388, 389
Deafness, mental, 113
Delage, 76
Deliberation, 448
Delusions of insane, 207
Dermal senses, 60 ff.
Determinism and psychology, 461
Decision, five types, 429
Differences, 24;
directly felt, 245;
not resolvable into composition, 245;
inferred, 248
Diffusion of movements, the law of, 371
Dimension, third, 342, 346
Discharge, nervous, 120
Discord, 58
Discrimination, Chapter XV, 59;
touch, 62;
defined, 244;
conditions which favor, 245;
sensation of difference, 246;
differences inferred, 248;
analysis of compound objects, 249;
to be easily singled out a quality should already be separately known, 250;
dissociation by varying concomitants, 251;
practice improves discrimination, 252;
of space, 338
See Difference
'Disparate' retinal points, 35
Dissection, of sheep's brain, 81
Distance, as seen, 39;
between members of series, 24;
in space, see Third dimension
Distraction, 218 ff.
Division of space, 338
Donaldson, 64
Double consciousness, 206 ff.
Double images, 36
Double personality, 205
Duality of brain, 205
Dumont, 135
Dura mater, 82
Duration, the primitive object in time-perception, 280;
our estimation of short, 281
Ear, 47 ff.
Effort, feeling of, 434;
feels like an original force, 442;
volitional effort is effort of attention, 450;
ethical importance of the phenomena of effort, 458
Ego, see Self
Embryological sketch, Chapter VII, 78
Emotion, Chapter XXIV;
compared with instincts, 373;
varieties of, innumerable, 374;
causes of varieties, 375, 381;
results from bodily expression, 375;
this view not materialistic, 380;
the subtler emotions, 384;
fear, 385;
genesis of reactions, 388
Emotional congruity, determines association, 264
Empirical self, see Self
Emulation, 406
End-organs, 10;
of touch, 60;
of temperature, 64;
of pressure, 60;
of pain, 67
Environment, 3
Essence of reason, always for subjective interest, 358
Essential characters, in reason, 354
Ethical importance of effort, 458
Exaggerated impulsion, causes an explosive will, 439
Exner, 123, 281
Experience, 218, 244
Explosive will, from defective inhibition, 437;
from exaggerated impulsion, 439
Expression, bodily, cause of emotions, 375
Extensity, primitive to all sensation, 335
Exteriority of objects, 15
External world, 15
Extirpation of higher nerve-centres, 95 ff.
Eye, its anatomy, 28-30
Familiarity, sense of, see Recognition
Fear, 385, 406, 407
Fechner, 21, 229
Feeling of effort, 434
Féré, 311
Ferrier, 132
Fissure of Rolando, seat of motor incitations, 106
Fissure of Sylvius, 108
Foramen of Monro, 88
Force, original, effort feels like, 442
Forgetting, 300
Fornix, 81, 86, 87, 89
Fovea centralis, 31
Franklin, 121
Franz, Dr., 308
Freedom of the will, 237
Free-will and attention, 237;
relates solely to effort of attention, 455;
insoluble on strictly psychologic grounds, 456;
ethical importance of the phenomena of effort, 458
Frequency, determines association, 264
"Fringes" of mental objects, 163 ff.
Frogs' lower centres, 95
Functions of the Brain, Chapter VIII, 91;
nervous functions, general idea of, 91
Fusion of mental states, 197, 245, 339
Fusion, of sensations, 23, 43, 57
Galton, 126, 265, 303, 306
Genius, 227, 327
Goethe, 146, 157
Goldscheider, 11, 64, 68
Goltz, 100
Guiteau, 185
Gurney, Edmund, 331, 334
Habit, Chapter X, 134 ff.;
has a physical basis, 134;
due to plasticity, 135;
due to pathways through nerve-centres, 136;
effects of, 138;
practical use of, 138;
depends on sensations not attended to, 141;
ethical and pedagogical importance of 142 ff.;
habit the ultimate cause of association, 256
Hagenauer, 386
Hall, Robert, 223
Hallucinations, 330 ff.
Hamilton, 260, 268
Harmony, 58
Hartley, 255
Hearing, 47 ff.;
centre of, in cortex, 113
Heat-sensations, 63 ff.;
nerves of, 64
Helmholtz, 26, 42, 43, 55, 56, 58, 121, 226, 227, 231, 233, 234, 321
Hemispheres, general notion of, 97;
chief seat of memory, 98;
effects of deprivation of, on frogs, 92;
on pigeons, 96
Herbart, 222, 326
Herbartian School, 157
Hering, 24, 26
Herzen, 123, 124
Hippocampi, 88
Hodgson, 262, 264, 280, 283
Holbrook, 297
Horsley, 107, 118
Hume, 161, 244
Hunger, sensations of, 69
Huxley, 143
Hypnotic conditions, 301
Ideas, the theory of, 154 ff.;
never come twice the same, 154;
they do not permanently exist, 157;
abstract ideas, 240, 251;
universal 240;
order of ideas by association, 253
'Identical retinal points,' 35
Identity, personal, 201;
mutations of, 205 ff.;
alternating personality, 205
Ideo-motor action the type of all volition, 432
Illusions, 317 ff., 330
Images, mental, compared with sensations, 14;
double, in vision, 36;
'after-images,' 43-5;
visual, 302;
auditory, 306;
motor, 307;
tactile, 308
Imagination, Chapter XIX;
defined, 302;
differs in individuals, 302;
Galton's statistics of, 302;
visual, 302;
auditory, 306;
motor, 307;
tactile, 308;
pathological
differences, 308;
cerebral process of, 310;
not locally distinct from that of sensation, 310
Imitation, 406
Inattention, 218, 236
Increase of stimulus, 20;
serial, 24
Infundibulum, 82, 84, 88
Inhibition, defective, causes an Explosive Will, 437
Inhibition of instincts by habits, 399
Insane delusions, 207
Instinct, Chapter XXV;
emotions compared with, 373;
definition of, 391;
every instinct is an impulse, 392;
not always blind or invariable, 395;
modified by experience, 396;
two principles of non-uniformity, 398;
man has more than beasts, 398, 406;
transitory, 402;
of children, 406;
fear, 407
Intellect, part played by, in space-perception, 349
Intensity of sensations, 16
Interest, selects certain objects and determines thoughts 170;
influence in association, 262
Introspection, 118
Janet, 211, 212, 301
Jackson, Hughlings, 105, 117
Joints, their sensibility, 74
Kadinsky, 330
Knowledge, theory of, 2, 464, 467;
two kinds of, 14
König, 46
Krishaber, 208
Labyrinth, 47, 49-52
Lange, K., 329
Laws, cerebral, of association, 255
Law, Weber's, 17;
—, Fechner's 21;
—, of relativity, 24
Lazarus, 300, 323
Lenticular nucleus, 81
Lewes, 11, 232, 326
Likeness, 243, 364
Lindsay, Dr., 413
Localization of Functions in the hemispheres, 104 ff.
Localization, Skin, 61
Locations, in environment, 340;
serial order of, 341
Locke, 244, 302, 357
Lockean School, 157
Locomotion, instinct of, 406
Lombard, 131
Longituditional fissure, 84
Lotze, 175
Love, 407
Lower Centres, of frogs and pigeons, 95 ff.
Ludwig, 130
Mach, 75
Mamillary bodies, 84
Man's intellectual distinction from brutes, 367
Mantegazza, 390
Martin, 40, 44, 45, 49, 52, 53, 60, 61, 65, 69
Martineau, 251
Materialism and emotion, 380
Matteuci, 120
Maudsley, 138
Measurement, of sensations, 22;
of space, 342
'Mediumships,' 212
Medulla oblongata, 84, 108
Memory, Chapter XVIII;
hemispheres physical seat of, 98;
defined, 287;
analysis of the phenomenon of memory, 287 ff.;
return of a mental image is not memory, 289;
association explains recall and retention, 289;
brain-scheme of, 291;
conditions of good memory, 292;
multiple associations favor, 294;
effects of cramming on, 295;
how to improve memory, 298;
recognition, 299;
forgetting, 300;
hypnotics, 301
Mental blindness, 112
Mental images, 14
Mental operations, simultaneous, 219
Mental states, cannot fuse, 197;
relation of, to their objects, 464
Merkel, 59, 66
Metaphysics, what the word means, 461
Meyer, G. H., 308, 311
Meynert, 105, 117
Mill, James, 196, 276, 289
Mill, J. S., 147, 157
Mimicry, 406
Mind depends on brain conditions, 3-7;
states of, their relation to their objects, 464;
see Consciousness
Modesty, 407
Monistic theories of consciousness, 462
Morgan, Lloyd, 368
Mosso, 130, 131
Motion, sensations of, Chapter VI, 70 ff.;
feeling of motion over surfaces, 70
Motor aphasia, 108
Motor region of cortex, 106
Motor type of imagination, 307
Movement, consciousness and, II, Chapter I;
images of movement, 307;
all consciousness is motor, 370
Munk, 110
Münsterberg, 23, 311
Muscular sensation, 65 ff.;
relations to space, 66, 74;
muscular centre in cortex, 106
Mussey, Dr., 440
Naunyn, 115
Nerve-currents, 9
Nervous discharge, 120
Nerve-endings in the skin, 60;
in muscles and tendons, 66-67;
Pain, 67 ff.;
nerve-centres, 92
Nerves, general functions of, 91 ff.
Neural activity, general conditions of, Chapter IX, 120;
nervous discharge, 120
Neural functions, general idea of, 91
Neural process, in habit, 134 ff.;
in association, 255 ff.;
in memory, 291;
in imagination, 310;
in perception, 329
Nucleus lenticularis, 81, 108;
caudatus, 81, 108
Object, the, of sensation, 13-15;
of thought, 154, 163;
one part of, more interesting than another, 170;
object must change to hold attention, 226;
objects as signs and as realities, 345;
relation of states of mind to their object, 464
Occipitel lobes, seat of visual centre, 110
Old-fogyism vs. genius, 327
Olfactory lobes, 82, 84
Olivary bodies, 85
Optic nerve, 82, 89
Optic tracts, 84
Original force, effort feels like one, 442
Overtones, 55
Pain, 67 ff.;
pain and pleasure as springs of action, 444
Pascal, 223
Past time, known in a present feeling, 285;
the immediate past is a portion of the present duration-block, 280
Paulhan, 219, 220
Pedagogic remarks on habit, 142;
on attention, 236
Peduncles, 84, 85, 86
Perception, Chapter XX;
compared with sensation, 312;
involves reproductive processes, 312;
the perceptive state of mind is not a compound, 313;
perception is of definite and probable things, 316;
illusory perceptions, 317;
physiological process of perception, 329
Perception of Space, Chapter XXI
Perez, M., 408
Personal Identity, 201;
mutations of, 205 ff.;
alternating personality, 205 ff.
Personality, alterations of, 205 ff.
Philosophy, Psychology and, Epilogue, 461
Phosphorus and thought, 132
Pia mater, 82
Pigeons' lower centres, 96
Pitch, 54
Pituitary body, 82, 89
Place, a series of positions, 341
Plasticity, as basis of habit, defined, 135
Plato, 240
Play, 407
Pleasure, and pain, as springs of action, 444
Psychology and Philosophy, Epilogue, 461
Pons Varolii, 79, 84, 108
Positions, place a series of, 341
Practice, improves discrimination, 252
Present, the present moment, 280
Pressure sense, 60
Preyer, 406
Probability determines what object shall be perceived, 316, 329
Problematic conceptions, 240
Problems, solution of, 272
Projection of sensations, eccentric, 15
Psychology, defined, 1;
a natural science, 2;
what data it assumes, 2;
Psychology and Philosophy, Chapter XXVII
Psycho-physic law, 17, 24, 46, 59, 66, 67
Pugnacity, 406
Purkinje, 75
Pyramids, 85
Quality, 13, 23, 25, 56
Raehlmann, 349
Rationality, 173
Reaction-time, 120 ff.
Real magnitude, determined by æsthetic and practical interests, 344
Real space, 337
Reason, 254
Reasoning, Chapter XXIII;
what it is, 351;
involves use of abstract characters, 353;
what is meant by an essential character, 354;
the essence is always for a subjective interest, 358;
two great points in reasoning, 360;
sagacity, 362;
help from association by similarity, 364;
reasoning power of brutes, 367
Recall, 289
Recency, determines association, 264
'Recepts,' 368
Recognition, 299
Recollection, 289 ff.
Redintegration, 264
Reflex acts, defined, 92;
reaction-time measures one, 123;
concatenated habits are constituted by a chain of, 140
Reid, 313
Relations, between objects, 162;
feelings of, 162
'Relativity of knowledge,' 24
Reproduction in memory, 289 ff.;
voluntary, 271
Resemblance, 243
Retention in memory, 289
Retentiveness, organic, 291;
it is unchangeable, 296
Retina, peripheral parts of, act as sentinels, 73
Revival in memory, 289 ff.
Ribot, 300
Richet, 410
Rivalry of selves, 186
Robertson, Prof. Croom, 318
Rolando, fissure of, 106
Romanes, 128, 322, 367
Rosenthal, 11
Rousseau, 148
Rotation, sense of, 75
Sagacity, 362
Sameness, 201, 202
Schaefer, 107, 110, 118
Schiff, 131
Schneider, 72, 372, 392
Science, natural, 1
Scott, Prof., 311
Sea-sickness, accidental origin, 390
Seat of consciousness, 5
Selection, 10;
a cardinal function of consciousness, 170
Self, The, Chapter XII;
not primary, 176;
the empirical self, 176;
its constituents, 177;
the material self, 177;
the social self, 179;
the spiritual self, 181;
self-appreciation, 182;
self-seeking, bodily, social, and spiritual, 184;
rivalry of the mes. 186;
their hierarchy, 190;
teleology of self-interest, 193;
the I, or 'pure ego,' 195;
thoughts are not compounded of 'fused' sensations, 196;
the soul as a combining medium, 200;
the sense of personal identity, 201;
explained by identity of function in successive passing thoughts, 203;
mutations of the self, 205;
insane delusions, 207;
alternating personalities, 210;
medium-ships, 212;
who is the thinker? 215
Self-appreciation, 182
Self-interest, theological uses of, 193;
teleological character of, 193
Selves, their rivalry, 186
Semicircular canals, 50
Semicircular canals, their relation to sensations of rotation, 75
Sensations, in General, Chapter II, p. 9;
distinguished from perceptions, 12;
from images, 14;
first things in consciousness, 12;
make us acquainted with qualities, 14;
their exteriority, 15;
intensity of sensations, 16;
their measurement, 21;
they are not compounds, 23
Sensations, of touch, 60;
of skin, 60 ff.;
of smell, 69;
of pain, 67;
of heat, 63;
of cold, 63;
of hunger, 69;
of thirst, 69;
of motion, 70;
muscular, 65;
of taste, 69;
of pressure, 60;
of joints, 74;
of movement through space, 75;
of rotation, 75;
of translation, 76
Sense of time, see Time
Sensory centres in the cortex, 113 ff.
Septum lucidum, 87
Serial order of locations, 341
Shame, 374
Sheep's brain, dissection of, 81
Sight, 28 ff.;
see Vision
Signs, 40;
sensations are, to us of other sensations, whose space-value is held to be more real, 345 ff.
Similarity, association by, 267, 364;
see Likeness
Size, 40
Skin—senses, 60 ff.;
localizing power of, 61;
discrimination of points on, 247
Smell, 69;
centre of, in cortex, 116
Smith, T. C., 311
Sociability, 407
Soul, the, as ego or thinker, 196;
as a combining medium, 200, 203
Sound, 53-59;
images of, 306
Space, Perception of, Chapter XXI;
extensity in three dimensions primitive to all sensation, 335;
construction of real space, 337;
the processes which it involves: (1) Subdivision, 338;
(2) Coalescence of different sensible data into one 'thing,' 339;
(3) Location in an environment, 342;
objects which are signs, and objects which are realities, 345;
the third dimension, 346;
Berkeley's theory of distance, 346;
part played by intellect in space-perception, 349
Space, relation of muscular sense to, 66, 74
Spalding, 401 ff.
Span of consciousness, 219, 286
Specific energies, 11
Speech, centres of, in cortex, 109;
thought possible without it, 169;
see Aphasia
Spencer, 103, 387, 390
Spinal cord, conduction of pain by, 68;
centre of defensive movements, 93
Spiritual substance, see Soul
Spiritualistic theories of consciousness, 462
Spontaneous trains of thought, 257;
examples, 257 ff., 271
Starr, 107, 113, 115
Steinthal, 327
Stream of Consciousness, Chapter XI, 151
Stricker, 307
Subdivision of space, 338
Substantive states of mind, 160
Succession vs. duration, 280;
not known by successive feelings, 285
Summation of stimuli, 128
Surfaces, feeling of motion over, 70
Tactile centre in cortex, 116
Tactile images, 308
Taine, 208
Taste, 69;
centre of, in cortex, 116
Teleological character of consciousness, 4;
of self-interest, 193
Temperature-sense, 63 ff.
Terminal organs, 10, 30, 52
Thalami, 80, 86, 89, 108
Thermometry, cerebral, 131
'Thing,' coalescence of sensations to form the same, 339
Thinking principle, see Soul
Third dimension of space, 346
Thirst, sensations of, 69
Thomson, Dr. Allen, 129
Thought, the 'Topic' of, 167;
stream of, 151;
can be carried on in any terms, 167;
unity of, 196;
spontaneous trains of, 257;
the entire thought the minimum, 464
'Timbre,' 55
Time, sense of, Chapter XVII;
begins with duration, 280;
no sense of empty time, 281;
compared with perception of space, 282;
discrete flow of time, 282;
long intervals conceived symbolically, 283;
we measure duration by events that succeed in it, 283;
variations in our estimations of its length, 283;
cerebral processes of, 286
Touch, 60 ff.;
centre of, in cortex, 116;
images of, 308
Transcendental self or ego, 196
Transitive states of mind, 160
Translation, sense of, 76
Trapezium, 85
Turner, Dr. J. E., 440
Tympanum, 48
Types of decision, 429
Unity of the passing thought, 196
Universal conceptions, 240
Urbantschitch, 25
Valve of Vieussens, 80, 86
Variability of the emotions, 381
Varying concomitants, law of disassociation by, 251
Ventricles, 79 ff.
Vierordt, 71
Vision, 28 ff.;
binocular, 33-9;
of solidity, 37
Visual centre of cortex, 110, 115
Visual imagination, 302
Visualizing power, 302
Vividness, determines association, 264
Volition, see Will
Volkmann, 285
Voluminousness, primitive, of sensations, 335
Voluntary acts, defined, 92;
voluntary attention, 224;
voluntary trains of thought, 271
Weber's law, 17, 24, 46, 59
Weber's law—weight, 66;
pain, 67
Weight, sensibility to, 66 ff.
Wernicke, 109, 113, 115
Wesley, 223
Wheatstone, 347
Wigan, 300
Will, Chapter XXVI;
voluntary acts, 415;
they are secondary performances, 415;
no third kind of idea is called for, 418;
the motor-cue, 420;
ideo-motor action, 432;
action after deliberation, 428;
five types of decision, 429;
feeling of effort, 434;
healthiness of will, 435;
defects of, 436;
the explosive will: (1) from defective inhibition, 437;
(2) from exaggerated impulsion, 439;
the obstructed will, 441;
effort feels like an original force, 442;
pleasure and pain as springs of action, 444;
what holds attention determines action, 448;
will is a relation between the mind and its ideas, 449;
volitional effort is effort of attention, 450;
free-will, 455;
ethical importance of effort, 458
Willing terminates with the prevalence of the idea, 449
Wundt, 11, 18, 25, 58, 122, 123, 125, 127, 220, 281
Abstract ideas, 240, 25;
characters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
proposals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Abstraction, 251;
see Distraction
Accommodation, of the crystalline lens, 32;
of the ear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Acquaintance, 14
Acquisitiveness, 407
Action, what captures attention determines, 448
After-images, 43-5
Agassiz, 132
Alexia, 113
Grant Allen, 104
Alternating personality, 205 ff.
Amidon, 132
Analysis, 56, 248, 251, 362
Anger, 374
Aphasia, 108, 113;
loss of images in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Apperception, 326
Aqueduct of Silvius, 80
Arachnoid membrane, 84
Arbor vitæ, 86;
Aristotle, 318
Articular sensibility, 74
Association, Chapter XVI;
the sequence of our thoughts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
determined by brain science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not of ideas, but of things that are thought of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the basic principle of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the root cause of this is habit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
indeterminacy of its results, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
total recall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
partial recall and the law of interest, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Frequency, recency, vividness, and emotional relevance usually influence what is remembered.
264;
focalized recall or by similarity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
voluntary trains of thought, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
issues, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Atomistic theories of consciousness, 462
Attention, Chapter XIII;
its relation to interest, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its physiological basis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
narrow scope of awareness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
to how many things possible, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
to simultaneous audio and visual, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its varieties, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
voluntary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
involuntary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
change needed to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its connection to genius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
physiological conditions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the sensory organ must be adapted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the concept of the object needs to be encouraged, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
teaching insights, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
free will and attention, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
what grabs attention drives action, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Volitional effort is the effort of attention, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Auditory centre in the brain, 113
Auditory type of imagination, 306
Austen, Miss, 261
Automaton theory, 10, 101
Azam, 210
Bahnsen, 147
Bain & Company, 145, 367, 370
Berklev, 302, 303, 347
Binet, 318, 332
Black, 45-6
Blind Spot, 31
Blix, 64, 68
Blood-supply, cerebral, 130
Bodily expression, cause of emotions, 375
Brace, Julia, 252
Brain, the functions of, Chapter VIII, 91
Brain, its connection with the mind, 5-7;
its relationships to external forces, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
relationships of consciousness to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Brain, structure of, Chapter VII, 78 ff.;
vesicles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
sheep dissection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
how to preserve, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
functions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ etc.
Bridgman, Laura, 252, 308
Broca's area, 109, 113, 115
Broca's convolution, 109
Brodhun, 46
Brooks, Prof. W. K., 412
Brutes, reasoning of, 367
Calamus scriptorius, 84
Canals, semicircular, 50
Carpenter, 223, 224
Cattell, 125, 126, 127
Caudate nucleus, 81, 86
Centres, nerve, 92
Cerebellum, its relation to equilibrium, 76;
its anatomy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Cerebral laws, of association, 255
Cerebral process, see Neural Process
Cerebrum, see Brain, Hemisphere
Changing character of consciousness, 152, 466
Charcot, 113, 309
Choice, see Interest
Coalescence of different sensations into the same 'thing,' 339
Cochlea, 51, 52
Cognition, see Reasoning
Cold, sensations of, 63 ff.;
nerves of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Color, 40-3
Commissures, 84
Commissure, middle, 88 ff.;
front, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
posterior, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Comparison of magnitudes, 342
Compounding of sensations, 23, 43, 57
Compound objects, analysis of, 248
Concatenated acts, dependent on habit, 140
Conceiving, mode of, what is meant by, 354
Conceptions, Chapter XIV;
defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their permanence, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
different states of mind can mean the same thing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
abstract, universal, and problematic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
The idea of 'the same' isn't the exact same thought repeated, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Conceptual order different from perceptual, 243
Consciousness, stream of, Chapter XI, 151;
four characters in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
personal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
is constantly changing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
the same state of mind never happens twice, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
consciousness is continuous, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
substantive and transitive states of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
interested in one aspect of its object more than another, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
double consciousness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
narrow field of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
relations of the brain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Consciousness and Movement, Chapter XXIII;
all consciousness is action, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Concomitants, law of varying, 251
Consent, in willing, 452
Continuity of object of consciousness, 157
Contrast, 25, 44-5
Convergence of eyeballs, 31, 33
Convolutions, motor, 106
Corpora fimbriata, 86
Corpora quadrigemma, 79, 86, 89
Corpus albicans, 84
Corpus callosum, 81, 84
Corpus striatum, 81, 86, 108
Cortex, 11, note
Cortex, localization in, 104;
motor region of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Corti's organ, 52
Cramming, 295
Crura of brain, 79, 84, 108
Curiosity, 407
Currents, in nerves, 10
Czermak, 70
Darwin, 388, 389
Deafness, mental, 113
Delage, 76
Deliberation, 448
Delusions of insane, 207
Dermal senses, 60 ff.
Determinism and psychology, 461
Decision, five types, 429
Differences, 24;
directly experienced, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not breakable into parts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
inferred, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Diffusion of movements, the law of, 371
Dimension, third, 342, 346
Discharge, nervous, 120
Discord, 58
Discrimination, Chapter XV, 59;
touch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
conditions that favor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
feeling of difference, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
inferred differences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
analysis of compound objects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
to be easily identified, a quality should already be recognized separately, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
dissociation by changing factors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
practice improves skills, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
See Difference
'Disparate' retinal points, 35
Dissection, of sheep's brain, 81
Distance, as seen, 39;
between series members, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in space, see 3D
Distraction, 218 ff.
Division of space, 338
Donaldson, 64
Double consciousness, 206 ff.
Double images, 36
Double personality, 205
Duality of brain, 205
Dumont, 135
Dura mater, 82
Duration, the primitive object in time-perception, 280;
our estimate of short, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ear, 47 ff.
Effort, feeling of, 434;
feels like a unique force, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Volitional effort is the effort of attention, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the ethical significance of the phenomenon of effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ego, see Self
Embryological sketch, Chapter VII, 78
Emotion, Chapter XXIV;
compared to instincts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
varieties of, countless, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
causes of varieties, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
results from body language, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
this perspective is not materialistic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the deeper feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
fear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
reaction origins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Emotional congruity, determines association, 264
Empirical self, see Self
Emulation, 406
End-organs, 10;
of touch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of temperature, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of pressure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of pain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Environment, 3
Essence of reason, always for subjective interest, 358
Essential characters, in reason, 354
Ethical importance of effort, 458
Exaggerated impulsion, causes an explosive will, 439
Exner, 123, 281
Experience, 218, 244
Explosive will, from defective inhibition, 437;
from exaggerated impulse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Expression, bodily, cause of emotions, 375
Extensity, primitive to all sensation, 335
Exteriority of objects, 15
External world, 15
Extirpation of higher nerve-centres, 95 ff.
Eye, its anatomy, 28-30
Familiarity, sense of, see Recognition
Fear, 385, 406, 407
Fechner, 21, 229
Feeling of effort, 434
Ferry, 311
Ferrier, 132
Fissure of Rolando, seat of motor incitations, 106
Fissure of Sylvius, 108
Foramen of Monro, 88
Force, original, effort feels like, 442
Forgetting, 300
Fornix, 81, 86, 87, 89
Fovea centralis, 31
Franklin, 121
Franz, Dr., 308
Freedom of the will, 237
Free-will and attention, 237;
relates only to the effort of attention, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
insolvable on purely psychological grounds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the ethical significance of the concept of effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Frequency, determines association, 264
"Fringes" of mental objects, 163 ff.
Frogs' lower centres, 95
Functions of the Brain, Chapter VIII, 91;
nervous system functions, basic concept of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Fusion of mental states, 197, 245, 339
Fusion, of sensations, 23, 43, 57
Galton, 126, 265, 303, 306
Genius, 227, 327
Goethe, 146, 157
Goldscheider, 11, 64, 68
Goltz, 100
Guiteau, 185
Edmund Gurney, 331, 334
Habit, Chapter X, 134 ff.;
has a physical basis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
due to flexibility, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
due to pathways through nerve centers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
effects of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
practical use of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
depends on sensations that go unnoticed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
ethical and educational importance of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
Habit is the main reason for forming associations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Hagenauer, 386
Hall, Robert, 223
Hallucinations, 330 ff.
Hamilton, 260, 268
Harmony, 58
Hartley, 255
Hearing, 47 ff.;
center of, in cortex, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Heat-sensations, 63 ff.;
nerves of steel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Helmholtz, 26, 42, 43, 55, 56, 58, 121, 226, 227, 231, 233, 234, 321
Hemispheres, general notion of, 97;
main hub of memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
effects of deprivation on frogs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
about pigeons, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Herbart, 222, 326
Herbart School, 157
Herring, 24, 26
Herzen, 123, 124
Hippocampuses, 88
Hodgson, 262, 264, 280, 283
Holbrook, 297
Horsley, 107, 118
Hume, 161, 244
Hunger, sensations of, 69
Huxley, 143
Hypnotic conditions, 301
Ideas, the theory of, 154 ff.;
never come twice the same, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
they don't permanently exist, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
abstract concepts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
universal __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
order of ideas by association, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
'Identical retinal points,' 35
Identity, personal, 201;
mutations of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
switching personality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ideo-motor action is the type of all volition, 432
Illusions, 317 ff., 330
Images, mental, compared with sensations, 14;
double vision, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
'after-images,' __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
visual, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
audio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
motor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
tactile, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Imagination, Chapter XIX;
defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
differs among individuals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Galton's statistics of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
visual, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
audio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
motor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
tactile, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
pathological differences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
thinking process of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not locally different from that of sensation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Imitation, 406
Inattention, 218, 236
Increase of stimulus, 20;
serial, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Infundibulum, 82, 84, 88
Inhibition, defective, causes an Explosive Will, 437
Inhibition of instincts by habits, 399
Insane delusions, 207
Instinct, Chapter XXV;
emotions compared to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
every instinct is an impulse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not always fixed or predictable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
shaped by experience, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
two principles of non-uniformity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
man has more than animals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
temporary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of kids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
fear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Intellect, part played by, in space-perception, 349
Intensity of sensations, 16
Interest, selects certain objects and determines thoughts 170;
association influence, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Introspection, 118
Janet, 211, 212, 301
Jackson, Hughlings, 105, 117
Joints, their sensitivity, 74
Kandinsky, 330
Knowledge, theory of, 2, 464, 467;
two types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
King, 46
Krishaber, 208
Labyrinth, 47, 49-52
Lange, K., 329
Laws, cerebral, of association, 255
Law, Weber's, 17;
—, Fechner's __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
—, of relativity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lazarus, 300, 323
Lenticular nucleus, 81
Lewes, 11, 232, 326
Likeness, 243, 364
Lindsay, Dr., 413
Localization of Functions in the hemispheres, 104 ff.
Localization, Skin, 61
Locations, in environment, 340;
serial order of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Locke, 244, 302, 357
Locke's School, 157
Locomotion, instinct of, 406
Lombard, 131
Longitudinal fissure, 84
Lotze, 175
Love, 407
Lower Centres, of frogs and pigeons, 95 ff.
Ludwig, 130
Mach, 75
Mamillary bodies, 84
Man's intellectual distinction from brutes, 367
Mantegazza, 390
Martin, 40, 44, 45, 49, 52, 53, 60, 61, 65, 69
Martineau, 251
Materialism and emotion, 380
Matteucci, 120
Maudsley, 138
Measurement, of sensations, 22;
of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
'Mediumships,' 212
Medulla oblongata, 84, 108
Memory, Chapter XVIII;
physical seat of hemispheres, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
analysis of the phenomenon of memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
The return of a mental image is not the same as memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
association explains memory and recall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
brain plan of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
conditions for good memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
multiple associations endorse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
effects of cramming on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
how to boost memory, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
recognition, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
forgetting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
sleep aids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mental blindness, 112
Mental images, 14
Mental operations, simultaneous, 219
Mental states, cannot fuse, 197;
relation of, to their objects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Merkel, 59, 66
Metaphysics, what the word means, 461
Meyer, G.H., 308, 311
Meynert, 105, 117
James Mill, 196, 276, 289
Mill, J.S., 147, 157
Mimicry, 406
Mind depends on brain conditions, 3-7;
states of their relation to their objects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
see Consciousness
Modesty, 407
Monistic theories of consciousness, 462
Morgan, Lloyd, 368
Mosso, 130, 131
Motion, sensations of, Chapter VI, 70 ff.;
movement across surfaces, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Motor aphasia, 108
Motor region of cortex, 106
Motor type of imagination, 307
Movement, consciousness and, II, Chapter I;
images of movement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
all consciousness is action, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Munk, 110
Münsterberg, 23, 311
Muscular sensation, 65 ff.;
relations to space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
muscle center in cortex, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Dr. Mussey, 440
Naunyn, 115
Nerve-currents, 9
Nervous discharge, 120
Nerve-endings in the skin, 60;
in muscles and tendons, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Pain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
nerve centers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nerves, general functions of, 91 ff.
Neural activity, general conditions of, Chapter IX, 120;
nervous breakdown, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Neural functions, general idea of, 91
Neural process, in habit, 134 ff.;
in collaboration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
in memory of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in imagination, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
in perception, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nucleus lenticularis, 81, 108;
caudatus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Object, the, of sensation, 13-15;
of thought, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
one aspect of this is more interesting than another, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the object needs to change to capture attention, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
objects as symbols and as actual things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the relationship between states of mind and their objects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Occipital lobes, seat of the visual centre, 110
Old-fogyism vs. genius, 327
Olfactory lobes, 82, 84
Olivary bodies, 85
Optic nerve, 82, 89
Optic tracts, 84
Original force, effort feels like one, 442
Overtones, 55
Pain, 67 ff.;
pain and pleasure as motivations for action, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pascal, 223
Past time, known in a present feeling, 285;
The recent past is part of the current time frame, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Paulhan, 219, 220
Pedagogic remarks on habit, 142;
on focus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Peduncles, 84, 85, 86
Perception, Chapter XX;
compared to feeling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
involves reproductive processes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the aware state of mind is not a mixture, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Perception is about definite and probable things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
illusory perceptions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
physiological process of perception, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Perception of Space, Chapter XXI
Perez, M., 408
Personal Identity, 201;
mutations of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
alternating personality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ etc.
Personality, alterations of, 205 ff.
Philosophy, Psychology and, Epilogue, 461
Phosphorus and thought, 132
Pia mater, 82
Pigeons' lower centres, 96
Pitch, 54
Pituitary body, 82, 89
Place, a series of positions, 341
Plasticity, as basis of habit, defined, 135
Plato, 240
Play, 407
Pleasure, and pain, as springs of action, 444
Psychology and Philosophy, Epilogue, 461
Pons Varolii, 79, 84, 108
Positions, place in a series, 341
Practice, improves discrimination, 252
Present, the present moment, 280
Pressure sense, 60
Prey, 406
Probability determines what object shall be perceived, 316, 329
Problematic conceptions, 240
Problems, solution of, 272
Projection of sensations, eccentric, 15
Psychology, defined, 1;
a natural science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
what data it assumes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Psychology and Philosophy, Chapter 27
Psycho-physic law, 17, 24, 46, 59, 66, 67
Pugnacity, 406
Purkinje Cells, 75
Pyramids, 85
Quality, 13, 23, 25, 56
Raehlmann, 349
Rationality, 173
Reaction-time, 120 ff.
Real magnitude, determined by aesthetic and practical interests, 344
Real space, 337
Reason, 254
Reasoning, Chapter XXIII;
what it is, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
involves the use of abstract characters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
354
The essence is always for a personal interest, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
two key points in reasoning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
wisdom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
help from association by similarity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
reasoning ability of animals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Recall, 289
Recency, determines association, 264
'Recepts,' 368
Recognition, 299
Recollection, 289 ff.
Redintegration, 264
Reflex acts, defined, 92;
reaction-time measures one, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Concatenated habits consist of a series of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Reid, 313
Relations, between objects, 162;
feelings of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
'Relativity of knowledge,' 24
Reproduction in memory, 289 ff.;
voluntary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Resemblance, 243
Retention in memory, 289
Retentiveness, organic, 291;
it's unchangeable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Retina, peripheral parts of, act as sentinels, 73
Revival in memory, 289 ff.
Ribot, 300
Richet, 410
Rivalry of selves, 186
Robertson, Prof. Croom, 318
Rolando, fissure of, 106
Romanian, 128, 322, 367
Rosenthal, 11
Rousseau, 148
Rotation, sense of, 75
Sagacity, 362
Sameness, 201, 202
Schaefer, 107, 110, 118
Schiff, 131
Schneider, 72, 372, 392
Science, natural, 1
Scott, Prof., 311
Sea-sickness, accidental origin, 390
Seat of consciousness, 5
Selection, 10;
a key function of consciousness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Self, The, Chapter XII;
not primary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the tangible self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
its members, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the material self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the social self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the spiritual self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
self-love, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
self-serving, physical, social, and spiritual, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
rivalry of the selves. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their hierarchy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
self-interest teleology, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the I, or 'pure ego,' __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
thoughts are not made up of 'fused' sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
the soul as a connecting medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
personal identity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
explained by the identity of function in consecutive passing thoughts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
self mutations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
crazy delusions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
switching personalities, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
mid-sized ships, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
who's the thinker? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Self-appreciation, 182
Self-interest, theological uses of, 193;
purpose-driven nature of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Selves, their rivalry, 186
Semicircular canals, 50
Semicircular canals, their relation to sensations of rotation, 75
Sensations, in General, Chapter II, p. 9;
distinguished from perceptions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
from images, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
first things in awareness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
introduce us to qualities, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their outward appearance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
intensity of feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
their measurement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
they're not compounds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sensations, of touch, 60;
of skin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
of scent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of pain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of heat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
FOOTNOTES:
FOOTNOTES:
[1] In the present volume I have given so much extension to the details of 'Sensation' that I have obeyed custom and put that subject first, although by no means persuaded that such order intrinsically is the best. I feel now (when it is too late for the change to be made) that the chapters on the Production of Motion, on Instinct, and on Emotion ought, for purposes of teaching, to follow immediately upon that on Habit, and that the chapter on Reasoning ought to come in very early, perhaps immediately after that upon the Self. I advise teachers to adopt this modified order, in spite of the fact that with the change of place of 'Reasoning' there ought properly to go a slight amount of re-writing.
[1] In this volume, I’ve included a lot of detail about 'Sensation,' which is why I’ve followed convention and placed that topic first, even though I’m not convinced it’s the best order. I now feel (though it’s too late to change it) that the chapters on the Production of Motion, Instinct, and Emotion should directly follow the one on Habit for teaching purposes, and the chapter on Reasoning should come early on, possibly right after the one on the Self. I recommend that teachers use this modified order, even though moving 'Reasoning' would require some minor rewrites.
[2] The subject may feel pain, however, in this experiment; and it must be admitted that nerve-fibres of every description, terminal organs as well, are to some degree excitable by mechanical violence and by the electric current.
(Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.) The subject might feel pain, though, in this experiment; and it has to be acknowledged that nerve fibers of all types, including terminal organs, can be somewhat stimulated by mechanical impact and by electrical currents.
[3] Thus the optic nerve-fibres are traced to the occipital lobes, the olfactory tracts go to the lower part of the temporal lobe (hippocampal convolution), the auditory nerve-fibres pass first to the cerebellum, and probably from thence to the upper part of the temporal lobe. These anatomical terms used in this chapter will be explained later. The cortex is the gray surface of the convolutions.
[3] So the optic nerve fibers connect to the occipital lobes, the olfactory tracts go to the lower part of the temporal lobe (hippocampal convolution), and the auditory nerve fibers first go to the cerebellum, likely then moving to the upper part of the temporal lobe. The anatomical terms used in this chapter will be explained later. The cortex is the gray surface of the convolutions.
[5] In other words, S standing for the sensation in general, and d for its noticeable increment, we have the equation dS = const. The increment of stimulus which produces dS (call it dR) meanwhile varies. Fechner calls it the 'differential threshold'; and as its relative value to R is always the same, we have the equation dR/R = const.
[5] In other words, S represents the overall sensation, and d signifies its noticeable increase, we arrive at the equation dS = const. The increase in stimulus that causes dS (let’s call it dR) can vary. Fechner refers to it as the 'differential threshold'; and since its relative value to R always remains constant, we get the equation dR/R = const.
[9] The extreme case is where green light and red, e.g. light falling simultaneously on the retina, give a sensation of yellow. But I abstract from this because it is not certain that the incoming currents here affect different fibres of the optic nerve.
[9] The extreme case is when green and red light, e.g. light hitting the retina at the same time, create the sensation of yellow. However, I’ll set this aside because it’s unclear whether the incoming signals affect different fibers of the optic nerve.
[10] The student can easily verify the coarser features of the eye's anatomy upon a bullock's eye, which any butcher will furnish. Clean it first from fat and muscles and study its shape, etc., and then (following Golding Bird's method) make an incision with a pointed scalpel into the sclerotic half an inch from the edge of the cornea, so that the black choroid membrane comes into view. Next with one blade of a pair of scissors inserted into this aperature, cut through sclerotic, choroid, and retina (avoid wounding the membrane of the vitreous body!) all round the eyeball parallel to the cornea's edge.
[10] The student can easily check the basic features of the eye's anatomy using a cow's eye, which any butcher can provide. Start by removing the fat and muscle, then examine its shape and other characteristics. Next, using Golding Bird's method, make a small incision with a sharp scalpel about half an inch from the edge of the cornea to expose the dark choroid membrane. Then, with one blade of a pair of scissors inserted into this opening, carefully cut through the sclera, choroid, and retina (making sure not to damage the membrane of the vitreous body!) all the way around the eyeball, keeping it parallel to the edge of the cornea.
The eyeball is thus divided into two parts, the anterior one containing the iris, lens, vitreous body, etc., whilst the posterior one contains most of the retina. The two parts can be separated by immersing the eyeball in water, cornea downwards, and simply pulling off the portion to which the optic nerve is attached. Floating this detached posterior cap in water, the delicate retina will be seen spread out over the choroid (which is partly iridescent in the ox tribe); and by turning the cup inside out, and working under water with a camel's-hair brush, the vessels and nerves of the eyeball may be detected.
The eyeball is divided into two parts: the front part, which includes the iris, lens, and vitreous body, and the back part, which contains most of the retina. You can separate the two parts by putting the eyeball in water with the cornea facing down and gently pulling off the part that is attached to the optic nerve. When you float this detached back section in water, you can see the delicate retina spread out over the choroid (which has a slight iridescent quality in the cattle family). By turning the cup inside out and working underwater with a camel's-hair brush, you can identify the vessels and nerves of the eyeball.
The anterior part of the eyeball can then be attacked. Seize with forceps on each side the edge of the sclerotic and choroid (not including the retina), raise the eye with the forceps thus applied and shake it gently till the vitreous body, lens, capsule, ligament, etc., drop out by their weight, and separate from the iris, ciliary processes, cornea, and sclerotic, which remains in the forceps. Examine these latter parts, and get a view of the ciliary muscle which appears as a white line, when with camel's-hair brush and scalpel the choroid membrane is detached from the sclerotic as far forward as it will go. Turning to the parts that cling to the vitreous body observe the clear ring around the lens, and radiating outside of it the marks made by the ciliary processes before they were torn away from its suspensory ligament. A fine capillary tube may now be used to insufflate the clear ring, just below the letter p in Fig. 3, and thus to reveal the suspensory ligament itself.
The front part of the eyeball can now be targeted. Use forceps to grip the edges of the sclera and choroid on each side (avoiding the retina), then lift the eye with the forceps and gently shake it until the vitreous body, lens, capsule, ligament, and so on fall out by their own weight, separating from the iris, ciliary processes, cornea, and sclera, which stays in the forceps. Examine these remaining parts and look for the ciliary muscle, which appears as a white line when you detach the choroid membrane from the sclera using a camel's-hair brush and scalpel as far forward as possible. Turning to the parts that are still attached to the vitreous body, notice the clear ring around the lens and the markings radiating outwards made by the ciliary processes before they were pulled from their suspensory ligament. A fine capillary tube can now be used to blow air into the clear ring, just below the letter p in Fig. 3, to reveal the suspensory ligament itself.
All these parts can be seen in section in a frozen eye or one hardened in alcohol.
All these parts can be seen in the section in a frozen eye or one stiffened in alcohol.
[12] The simplest form of stereoscope is two tin tubes about one and one-half inches calibre, dead black inside and (for normal eyes) ten inches long. Close each end with paper not too opaque, on which an inch-long thick black line is drawn. The tubes can be looked through, one by each eye, and held either parallel or with their farther ends converging. When properly rotated, their images will show every variety of fusion and non-fusion, and stereoscopic effect.
[12] The most basic type of stereoscope is made of two tin tubes about one and a half inches wide, with a matte black interior and a length of ten inches. Seal each end with paper that isn't too thick, featuring a one-inch-long thick black line. You look through the tubes, one for each eye, and can hold them either parallel or with the far ends coming together. When adjusted correctly, the images will display all kinds of fusion and non-fusion effects, as well as a stereoscopic effect.
[14] Ibid.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source.
[15] The ordinary mixing of pigments is not an addition, but rather, as Helmholtz has shown, a subtraction, of lights. To add one color to another we must either by appropriate glasses throw differently colored beams upon the same reflecting surface; or we must let the eye look at one color through an inclined plate of glass beneath which it lies, whilst the upper surface of the glass reflects into the same eye another color placed alongside—the two lights then mix on the retina; or, finally, we must let the differently colored lights fall in succession upon the retina, so fast that the second is there before the impression made by the first has died away. This is best done by looking at a rapidly rotating disk whose sectors are of the several colors to be mixed.
[15] Mixing colors is not about adding them together, but as Helmholtz has shown, it's more about subtracting from the lights. To actually combine one color with another, we either need to use colored glasses to cast different colored beams on the same surface, or we let our eyes see one color through an angled glass plate that lies beneath it while the top surface of the glass reflects a different color into the same eye—the two lights then mix on the retina. Finally, we can allow the different colored lights to hit the retina in quick succession, ensuring the second light arrives before the first one has faded. The best way to do this is by looking at a fast-spinning disk that has sectors of the various colors we want to mix.
[16] Martin: op. cit.
[17] Martin, pp. 525-8.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Martin, pp. 525-8.
[18] In teaching the anatomy of the ear, great assistance will be yielded by the admirable model made by Dr. Auzoux, 56 Rue de Vaugirard, Paris, described in the catalogue of the firm as "No. 21—Oreille, temporal de 60 cm., nouvelle édition," etc.
[18] When teaching the anatomy of the ear, the excellent model created by Dr. Auzoux, 56 Rue de Vaugirard, Paris, will be very helpful. It's listed in the firm's catalog as "No. 21—Oreille, temporal de 60 cm., nouvelle édition," etc.
[20] Martin: op. cit.
[21] Martin: op. cit.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Martin: same source
[22] Martin: op. cit.
[23] Martin: op. cit.
[24] Martin: op. cit.
[25] Martin: op. cit., with omissions.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Martin: op. cit., with omissions.
[26] Martin: op. cit.
[27] Vierteljahrsch. für wiss. Philos., II. 377.
[28] This chapter will be understood as a mere sketch for beginners. Models will be found of assistance. The best is the 'Cerveau de Texture de Grande Dimension,' made by Auzoux, 56 Rue de Vaugirard, Paris. It is a wonderful work of art, and costs 300 francs. M. Jules Talrich of No. 97 Boulevard Saint-Germain, Paris, makes a series of five large plaster models, which I have found very useful for class-room purposes. They cost 350 francs, and are far better than any German models which I have seen.
[28] This chapter should be seen as a simple introduction for beginners. There are helpful models available. The best one is the 'Large-Scale Brain Model' made by Auzoux, located at 56 Rue de Vaugirard, Paris. It’s an incredible piece of art and costs 300 francs. M. Jules Talrich at 97 Boulevard Saint-Germain, Paris, offers a set of five large plaster models, which I’ve found very useful for classroom use. They cost 350 francs and are much better than any German models I’ve come across.
[29] All the places in the brain at which the cavities come through are filled in during life by prolongations of the membrane called pia mater, carrying rich plexuses of blood-vessels in their folds.
[29] All the areas in the brain where the cavities connect are filled during life by extensions of the membrane known as pia mater, which contain dense networks of blood vessels in their folds.
[33] Some of the evidence for this medium's supernormal powers is given in The Proceedings of the Society for Psychical Research, vol. VI. p. 436, and in the last Part of vol. VII. (1892).
[33] Some of the evidence for this medium's extraordinary abilities is provided in The Proceedings of the Society for Psychical Research, vol. VI. p. 436, and in the final Part of vol. VII. (1892).
[35] Physiol. Optik, p. 741.
[36] I refer to a recency of a few hours. Mr. Galton found that experiences from boyhood and youth were more likely to be suggested by words seen at random than experiences of later years. See his highly interesting account of experiments in his Inquiries into Human Faculty, pp. 191-203.
[36] I'm talking about a time frame of just a few hours. Mr. Galton discovered that memories from childhood and adolescence were more easily triggered by randomly seen words than memories from later in life. Check out his fascinating description of these experiments in his book *Inquiries into Human Faculty*, pages 191-203.
[37] Miss M. W. Calkins (Philosophical Review, I. 389, 1892) points out that the persistent feature of the going thought, on which the association in cases of similarity hinges, is by no means always so slight as to warrant the term 'focalized.' "If the sight of the whole breakfast-room be followed by the visual image of yesterday's breakfast-table, with the same setting and in the same surroundings, the association is practically total," and yet the case is one of similarity. For Miss Calkins, accordingly, the more important distinction is that between what she calls desistent and persistent association. In 'desistent' association all parts of the going thought fade out and are replaced. In 'persistent' association some of them remain, and form a bond of similarity between the mind's successive objects; but only where this bond is extremely delicate (as in the case of an abstract relation or quality) is there need to call the persistent process 'focalized.' I must concede the justice of Miss Calkins's criticism, and think her new pair of terms a useful contribution. Wundt's division of associations into the two classes of external and internal is congruent with Miss Calkins's division. Things associated internally must have some element in common; and Miss Calkins's word 'persistent' suggests how this may cerebrally come to pass. 'Desistent,' on the other hand, suggests the process by which the successive ideas become external to each other or preserve no inner tie.
[37] Miss M. W. Calkins (Philosophical Review, I. 389, 1892) points out that the ongoing aspect of thought, which underlies the association in cases of similarity, is not always so minimal as to justify the term 'focalized.' "If seeing the entire breakfast room is followed by a mental image of yesterday's breakfast table, with the same setup and in the same setting, the association is almost complete," and yet this situation is one of similarity. For Miss Calkins, the key distinction is between what she refers to as desistent and persistent association. In 'desistent' association, all parts of the active thought fade away and are replaced. In 'persistent' association, some parts remain, creating a link of similarity between the mind's successive objects; but this connection only needs to be called 'focalized' when it is extremely subtle (like in the case of an abstract relationship or quality). I have to acknowledge the validity of Miss Calkins's critique, and I find her new pair of terms to be a valuable addition. Wundt's classification of associations into two categories of external and internal aligns with Miss Calkins's division. Internally associated things must share some common element; and Miss Calkins's term 'persistent' implies how this may cognitively happen. 'Desistent,' in contrast, describes the process through which the successive ideas become external to each other or lack an internal connection.
[38] A common figure-alphabet is this:
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ A typical figure-alphabet is this:
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 0 |
t | n | m | r | l | sh | g | f | b | s |
d | j | k | v | p | c | ||||
ch | c | z | |||||||
g | qu |
[39] In Mind, IX. 206, M. Binet points out the fact that what is fallaciously inferred is always an object of some other sense than the 'this.' 'Optical illusions' are generally errors of touch and muscular sensibility, and the fallaciously perceived object and the experiences which correct it are both tactile in these cases.
[39] In Mind, IX. 206, M. Binet highlights that what we mistakenly conclude is always associated with a sense different from the 'this.' 'Optical illusions' usually stem from errors in touch and muscle awareness, with both the misperceived object and the experiences that clarify it being tactile in these instances.
[41] M. Lazarus: Das Leben d. Seele (1857), II. p. 32. In the ordinary hearing of speech half the words we seem to hear are supplied out of our own head. A language with which we are familiar is understood even when spoken in low tones and far off. An unfamiliar language is unintelligible under these conditions. The 'ideas' for interpreting the sounds by not being ready-made in our minds, as they are in our familiar mother-tongue, do not start up at so faint a cue.
[41] M. Lazarus: Das Leben d. Seele (1857), II. p. 32. In everyday conversations, we often fill in half the words we think we hear from our own minds. We're able to understand a language we're familiar with, even when it's spoken softly and from a distance. However, an unfamiliar language becomes confusing under these same circumstances. The 'ideas' that help us interpret sounds don't emerge as easily from a faint cue if they aren't already formed in our minds, as they are with a language we grew up speaking.
[43] The great maxim in pedagogy is to knit every new piece of knowledge on to a preëxisting curiosity—i.e., to assimilate its matter in some way to what is already known. Hence the advantage of "comparing all that is far off and foreign to something that is near home, of making the unknown plain by the example of the known, and of connecting all the instruction with the personal experience of the pupil.... If the teacher is to explain the distance of the sun from the earth, let him ask ... 'If anyone there in the sun fired off a cannon straight at you, what should you do?' 'Get out of the way,' would be the answer. 'No need of that,' the teacher might reply. 'You may quietly go to sleep in your room, and get up again, you may wait till your confirmation-day, you may learn a trade, and grow as old as I am,—then only will the cannon-ball be getting near, then you may jump to one side! See, so great as that is the sun's distance!'" (K. Lange, Ueber Apperception, 1879, p. 76.)
[43] The main principle in teaching is to connect every new piece of knowledge to an existing curiosity—basically, to relate it to something already known. This is why it’s helpful to "compare things that are distant and unfamiliar to something closer to home, to clarify the unknown using examples from the known, and to link all teaching to the personal experiences of the student." If a teacher needs to explain how far the sun is from the earth, they might ask, "If someone on the sun fired a cannon right at you, what would you do?" The response would likely be, "Get out of the way." The teacher could then say, "No need for that. You can just go to sleep in your room, wake up again, wait until your confirmation day, learn a trade, and grow as old as I am—only then will the cannonball be getting close, then you can jump aside! See, that’s how great the distance to the sun is!"" (K. Lange, Ueber Apperception, 1879, p. 76.)
[44] The writer of the present work is Agent of the Census for America, and will thankfully receive accounts of cases of hallucination of vision, hearing, etc., of which the reader may have knowledge.
[44] The author of this work is a Census Agent for the United States and would greatly appreciate any reports of experiences related to visual or auditory hallucinations that the reader may know of.
[46] Readers brought up on Popular Science may think that the molecular structure of things is their real essence in an absolute sense, and that water is H-O-H more deeply and truly than it is a solvent of sugar or a slaker of thirst. Not a whit! It is all of these things with equal reality, and the only reason why for the chemist it is H-O-H primarily, and only secondarily the other things, is that for his purpose of laboratory analysis and synthesis, and inclusion in the science which treats of compositions and decompositions, the H-O-H aspect of it is the more important one to bear in mind.
[46] Readers who grow up with Popular Science might believe that the molecular structure of things is their true essence in an absolute way, and that water is H-O-H more fundamentally and accurately than it is a solvent for sugar or something that quenches thirst. Not at all! It is all of these things with equal significance, and the only reason why for the chemist it is primarily H-O-H, and only secondarily the other things, is that for his purpose of laboratory analysis and synthesis, and inclusion in the science that deals with compositions and decompositions, the H-O-H aspect is the more important one to consider.
[50] Ibid., p. 289.
[51] Psychologie de l'Enfant, p. 72.
[52] Der Menschliche Wille, p. 224.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ The Human Will, p. 224.
[54] Medicinische Psychologie, p. 293.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Medical Psychology, p. 293.
[55] This volitional effort pure and simple must be carefully distinguished from the muscular effort with which it is usually confounded. The latter consists of all those peripheral feelings to which a muscular 'exertion' may give rise. These feelings, whenever they are massive and the body is not 'fresh,' are rather disagreeable, especially when accompanied by stopped breath, congested head, bruised skin of fingers, toes, or shoulders, and strained joints. And it is only as thus disagreeable that the mind must make its volitional effort in stably representing their reality and consequently bringing it about. That they happen to be made real by muscular activity is a purely accidental circumstance. There are instances where the fiat demands great volitional effort though the muscular exertion be insignificant, e.g. the getting out of bed and bathing one's self on a cold morning. Again, a soldier standing still to be fired at expects disagreeable sensations from his muscular passivity. The action of his will, in sustaining the expectation, is identical with that required for a painful muscular effort. What is hard for both is facing an idea as real.
[55] This volitional effort is simply about making a choice and must be clearly distinguished from muscular effort, which is often confused with it. The latter involves all those physical sensations that result from a muscular "exertion." These sensations, particularly when they are intense and the body isn't "fresh," can be quite unpleasant, especially when paired with shortness of breath, a congested head, sore skin on fingers, toes, or shoulders, and strained joints. It's only as thus disagreeable that the mind needs to make its volitional effort to accurately represent their reality and, as a result, to deal with it. The fact that these sensations are brought about by muscular activity is merely a coincidence. There are situations where the demand requires significant volitional effort even if the muscular exertion is minimal, such as getting out of bed and taking a shower on a cold morning. Similarly, a soldier standing still, facing gunfire, anticipates unpleasant sensations from his passive muscles. The action of his will, in maintaining that expectation, is the same as what is needed for a painful muscular effort. What is challenging for both is facing an idea as real.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!